I666 Mx2-Ev2 Users Manual en

Inverter
Multi-function Compact Inverter

MX2 Series Type EV2
User’s Manual
3G3MX2-A-EV2
I666-E1-E01
NOTE
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Neverthe-
less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages
resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Trademarks
• Sysmac and SYSMAC are trademarks or registered trademarks of OMRON Corporation in Japan and other
countries for OMRON factory automation products.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and other countries.
• EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
• ODVA, CIP, CompoNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA.
Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Copyrights
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Multi-function Compact Inverter (Model: 3G3MX2--EV2).
This manual describes the installation and wiring methods of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, and
parameter setting methods which are required for the operation, as well as troubleshooting and inspec-
tion methods.
Intended Readers
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical sys-
tems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing the control equipment
• Personnel in charge of designing the control systems
• Personnel in charge of installing and maintaining the control equipment
• Personnel in charge of managing the control systems and facilities
Notice
This manual contains information you need to know to correctly use the Multi-function Compact Inverter
(Model: 3G3MX2--EV2).
Before using the inverter, read this manual and gain a full understanding of the information provided
herein.
After you finished reading this manual, keep it in a convenient place so that it can be referenced at any
time.
Make sure this manual is delivered to the end user.
Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 1

Manual Configuration
Manual Configuration
This manual is compiled section by section for user’s convenience as follows.
Section Overview
Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of the 3G3MX2-EV2
Series features, standard specifications, and external
dimensions by inverter capacity. It also shows the differ-
ences of this inverter from the conventional inverter for
those who use the previous model.
Section 2 Design This section describes the installation environment and wir-
ing methods.
Section 3 Operation and Test Run This section describes the part names and key operation of
the Digital Operator, and the operation method of this prod-
uct as well as the test run procedure.
Section 4 Parameter List This section provides the parameter lists that show monitor
functions and available parameters for this inverter.
Section 5 Basic Settings This section describes the basic functions such as the Run
command.
Section 6 Vector Control and Applied Functions This section describes the vector control and applied func-
tions characteristic of this inverter.
Section 7 Other Functions This section describes the details of functions not described
in Section 5 or Section 6.
Section 8 Communications Functions This section describes the general-purpose serial commu-
nications functions (Modbus communication).
Section 9 Overview of DriveProgramming This section provides the features of the DriveProgram-
ming.
Section 10 Troubleshooting This section describes how to analyze the cause and take
countermeasures if the inverter fails, and provides trouble-
shooting for possible troubles.
Section 11 Maintenance and Inspection This section describes the maintenance and periodical
inspection items.
Section 12 Options This section describes the specifications and external
dimension of optional equipment.
Appendices This section provides information on derating, capacitor life
curve, compliance with the UL/cUL Standards, and inverter
selection.
2 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Manual Structure
Manual Structure
Page Structure and Symbol Icons

The following page structure and symbol icons are used in this manual.
Level 1 heading
Level 2 heading
Level 2 heading Section Level 1
Level 3 heading
Level 3 heading
Operation Steps
Describes the operation
steps.
Note, Supplementary
Information, Reference
Target
A note, supplementary
information, reference
target, etc. are provided
with difference icons.
Manual Name
Note The above page is only a sample for illustrative purposes. It is not the actual content of the manual.

Manual Structure
Special Information
Special information in this manual is classified as follows:
Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure safe usage of the product.
Precautions for Correct Use

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.
Additional Information
Additional information to read as required.

This information is provided to increase understanding or make operation easier.

Sections in this Manual
Sections in this Manual
1 10
2 11
Overview Troubleshooting
3 12
Design Maintenance and
Inspection
4 A
Options
5 I
Parameter List Appendices 6
7
Basic Settings I Index
8
Vector Control and Applied Functions
9
Other Functions
8 Communications Functions
9 Overview of DriveProgramming

Terms and Conditions Agreement
Warranty, Limitations of Liability
Warranties
⚫ Exclusive Warranty
Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workman-
ship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in
writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
⚫ Limitations
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF
THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based
on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right.
⚫ Buyer Remedy
Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form originally
shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-com-
plying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal
to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be
responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products
unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and
maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of
any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies
shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combi-
nation with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materi-
als or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in
writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc
OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on
which liability is asserted.

Application Considerations
Suitability of Use
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations
which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At
Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings
and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a com-
plete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, sys-
tem, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of
the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take applica-
tion responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE
HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS
PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIP-
MENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or
any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
Performance Data
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for
the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of
Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual perfor-
mance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
Change in Specifications
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or
when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to
confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions

Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; how-
ever, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
To ensure that the Multi-function Compact Inverter (Model: 3G3MX2--EV2) is used safely and
correctly, be sure to read this Safety Precautions section and the main text before using the product.
Learn all items you should know before use, regarding the equipment as well as required safety infor-
mation and precautions.
Make an arrangement so that this manual also gets to the end user of this product.
After reading this manual, keep it in a convenient place so that it can be referenced at any time.
Indications and Meanings of Safety Information

In this user’s manual, the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to
ensure the safe use of the Multi-function Compact Inverter (Model: 3G3MX2--EV2).
The information provided here is vital to safety. Strictly observe the precautions provided.
Meanings of Signal Words

Safety Precautions
Explanation of Symbols
This symbol indicates a prohibited item (an item you must not do).
The specific instruction is indicated using an illustration or text inside or near .
The symbol shown to the left indicates “disassembly prohibited.”
This symbol indicates danger and caution.
The symbol shown to the left indicates “beware of electric shock.”
This symbol indicates danger and caution.
The symbol shown to the left indicates “non-specific general danger.”
This symbol indicates caution (warnings included).
The symbol shown to the left indicates “risk of hot surface.”
The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you must do.
The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text.
This example shows a general precaution for something that you must do.
This symbol indicates a compulsory item (an item that must be done).
The symbol shown to the left indicates “grounding required.”

Safety Precautions
Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly.

Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel.

Do not change wiring and switches, put on or take off optional devices while the input power is
being supplied. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or
fire.
(200V class:type-D grounding, 400V class:type-C grounding)
Do not remove the front cover or the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes
after the power shut off. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands.

Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off. Not doing
so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the STO function is activated.
Do not touch the Inverter cooling fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during
the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn.

Safety Precautions
Security Measures
Anti-virus protection
Install the latest commercial-quality antivirus software on the computer connected to the control
system and maintain to keep the software up-to-date.
Security measures to prevent unauthorized access
Take the following measures to prevent unauthorized access to our products.
• Install physical controls so that only authorized personnel can access control systems and equip-
ment.
• Reduce connections to control systems and equipment via networks to prevent access from
untrusted devices.
• Install firewalls to shut down unused communications ports and limit communications hosts and
isolate control systems and equipment from the IT network.
• Use a virtual private network (VPN) for remote access to control systems and equipment.
• Adopt multifactor authentication to devices with remote access to control systems and equip-
ment.
• Set strong passwords and change them frequently.
• Scan virus to ensure safety of USB drives or other external storages before connecting them to
control systems and equipment.
Data input and output protection
Validate backups and ranges to cope with unintentional modification of input/output data to control
systems and equipment.
• Checking the scope of data
• Checking validity of backups and preparing data for restore in case of falsification and abnormali-
ties
• Safety design, such as emergency shutdown and fail-soft operation in case of data tampering
and abnormalities
Data recovery
Backup data and keep the data up-to-date periodically to prepare for data loss.
When using an intranet environment through a global address, connecting to an unauthorized ter-
minal such as a SCADA, HMI or to an unauthorized server may result in network security issues
such as spoofing and tampering. You must take sufficient measures such as restricting access to
the terminal, using a terminal equipped with a secure function, and locking the installation area by
yourself.
When constructing an intranet, communication failure may occur due to cable disconnection or the
influence of unauthorized network equipment. Take adequate measures, such as restricting physi-
cal access to network devices, by means such as locking the installation area.
When using a device equipped with the SD Memory Card function, there is a security risk that a
third party may acquire, alter, or replace the files and data in the removable media by removing the
removable media or unmounting the removable media.
Please take sufficient measures, such as restricting physical access to the Controller or taking
appropriate management measures for removable media, by means of locking the installation area,
entrance management, etc., by yourself.

Safety Precautions
CAUTION
Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance, inspection or parts replacement. Not
doing so might result in a minor injury.
Do not connect resistors to the terminals [+1, P/+] and the terminal [N/-] directly. Doing so might
result in a small-scale fire, heat generation or damage to the unit.
Install a stop motion device to ensure safety. Not doing so might result in a minor injury. (A holding
brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety.)
Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor / regenerative braking unit. In case of a braking
resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor. Not doing so might
result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor / regenerative braking
unit. Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is
detected in the braking resistor / regenerative braking unit.
The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to itself or
other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal
objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring.
Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circut breaker (MCCB) that matches the
Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in damage to property due to
the short circuit of the load.
Do not dismantle, repair or modify the product.

Doing so may result in an injury.
If a parameter is set incorrectly when starting up, adjusting, maintaining, or replacing, an unex-
pected operation may occur.
If the DriveProgramming stops during multi-function output, the output status is held. Take safety
precautions such as stopping peripheral devices. Not doing so might result in a minor injury.

Installation and Storage

Do not store or use the product in the following places.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications.
• Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
Transporting, Installation and Wiring

• Do not drop or apply a strong impact on the product.
Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction.
• Do not drop or apply a strong impact on the product.Doing so may result in damaged parts or mal-
function.
• Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage.
• Do not connect input voltages and currents outside the specified range, to the control I/O terminals,
especially the AC power supply is not allowed. Doing so may result in damage to the product.
• Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely. Wiring work must be done after install-
ing the unit body.
• Before turning on power, check that the wiring is correct.
• Do not connect any loads other than three-phase induction motors and PM motors to the outputs (U,
V, W) of this product.
• Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong magnetic fields.
Locations close to power lines.
• When using DriveProgramming, confirm that the program data is downloaded normally before start-
ing operation.

Operation and Adjustment

• Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the
inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
• Do not come close to the machine when selecting reset in the deceleration stop function (b050)
because the machine may abruptly start after the power is turned on.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator may not function
depending on the settings and the status of the Inverter.
• When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control
input terminals, the motor may start abruptly. Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal.
• Even if the inverter power supply is turned off, the counter-electromotive force occurs while the PM
motor rotates, which may result in electric shock.
Do not remove the front cover or terminal block cover of the Inverter until the PM motor stops.
• Be sure to confirm the RUN command is not input before resetting the alarm because the machine
may abruptly start.
• When using the Digital Operator (3G3AX-OP01), ensure safety of the equipment before operating
the RUN key or the volume.
Maintenance and Inspection

• The capacitor service life is influenced by the ambient temperature.Refer to "Product Life Curve"
described in the User’s manual. When a capacitor reaches the end of its service life and does not
work as the product, you need to replace the capacitor.

Installation
• Mount the product vertically on a wall with the product’s longer sides upright.
The material of the wall has to be nonflammable such as a metal plate.
Restart Selection Function

• Do not come close to the machine while RUN command is enabled. When the restart selection func-
tion (b001, b008) is set, the machine may start abruptly.
Motor Overload Protection

• For the motor overload protection, be sure to set the rated current of your motor to the Electronic
Thermal Level (b012/b212) and PM Motor Rated Current (H105).
Maintenance and Parts Replacement

• Generally speaking, inverters contain components and will operate properly only when each compo-
nent operates normally. Some of the electrical components require maintenance depending on appli-
cation conditions.
Periodic inspection and replacement are necessary to ensure proper long-term operation of Invert-
ers.
• When a cooling fan reaches the end of its service life, replace it.
Product Disposal
• Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
Dispose of in accordance with WEEE Directive

Warning Label
• This product bears a warning label at the following location to provide handling warnings.
• Be sure to follow the instructions.
The appearance differs depending on the capacity of the inverter.
Warning Description

Regulations and Standards
Regulations and Standards

To export (or provide to nonresident aliens) any part of this product that falls under the category of
goods (or technologies) for which an export certificate or license is mandatory according to the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan, an export certificate or license (or service transac-
tion approval) according to this law is required.
Regulation Applicable Standards

CE EMC EN 61800-3
UKCA Functional safety EN 61800-5-2, STO SIL3
EN ISO 13849-1, Cat.3/PLe
Electrical safety EN 61800-5-1
Others Ecodesign, RoHS
UL US UL61800-5-1
CA CSA C22.2 No.274
FS IEC 61800-5-2, STO SIL3
IEC 61508-1 to -7 SIL3
EN ISO 13849-1, Cat.3/PLe
KC Certificate to be obtained
RCM EN 61800-3
The customer must check the conditions that must be met for compliance with the environmental stan-
dards and regulations of their respective country.
• Checking use of regulated chemical substances
This product complies with regulated substances used in electrical parts based on the RoHS Direc-
tive. For details on the Certificate of Conformance and other regulations, contact the place of pur-
chase.
• Motor efficiency regulations
This product is subject to energy efficiency regulations when it is used in motor systems that are
driven by an inverter. For details on inverter efficiency with respect to motor output in accordance with
EU efficiency regulations, refer to the following website.
https://industrial.omron.eu/en/company-info/environmental/ecodesign-directive

Items to Check after Unpacking

After unpacking, check the following items.
• Is this the model you ordered?
• Was there any damage sustained during shipment?
Checking the Nameplate

The nameplate is affixed to the product.
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications
Unit version
Checking the Model
3 G 3 M X 2 - A 2 0 5 5 - EV2
Type EV2 or V2
Maximum applicable motor capacity (Heavy load rating)
001 0.1 kW
002 0.2 kW
004 0.4 kW
007 0.75 kW
015 1.5 kW
022 2.2 kW
030 3.0 kW
037 3.7 kW
040 4.0 kW
055 5.5 kW
075 7.5 kW
110 11 kW
150 15 kW
Voltage class
B Single phase 200 VAC (200-V class)
2 3-phase 200 VAC (200-V class)
Enclosure rating
Panel-mounting (IP10 or higher) or
A closed wall-mounting models

Checking the Accessories

This product comes with the following accessories.
• INSTRUCTION MANUAL (in Japanese) × 1 copy
• INSTRUCTION MANUAL (in English) × 1 copy
• Nameplate (in 6 languages) × 1
• Compliance Sheet × 1
For China, the Product Certificate of Conformance is included.
Mounting screws and other necessary parts are not included. They must be provided by the user.

Related Manuals
Related Manuals
Please see the manuals below for related product information.
Name Catalog No.

CX-Drive Operation Manual W453
DriveProgramming User’s Manual I580
MX2/RX Series EtherCAT® Communication Unit User's Manual I574

Revision History
Revision History
The manual revision code is a number appended to the end of the catalog number found in the bottom
right-hand corner of the front and back covers.
Example
Cat.No. I666-E1-E01
Revision code
Revision code Revision date Revised Content

E01 October 2023 Original production

Revision History

CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1
Manual Configuration .............................................................................................. 2
Manual Structure. .................................................................................................... 3
Sections in this Manual ........................................................................................... 5

Terms and Conditions Agreement .......................................................................... 6
Safety Precautions. ................................................................................................. 8
Precautions for Safe Use ...................................................................................... 13
Precautions for Correct Use ................................................................................. 15
Regulations and Standards .................................................................................. 17
Items to Check after Unpacking ........................................................................... 18
Related Manuals. ................................................................................................... 20
Revision History. ................................................................................................... 21
CONTENTS ............................................................................................................. 23
Section 1 Overview
1-1 Overview of Functions ........................................................................................................... 1-2
1-1-1 Features of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter ..................................................................................1-2
1-1-2 Classes of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter ....................................................................................1-6
1-2 Appearance and Part Names ..................................................................................................1-8
1-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................................1-12
1-3-1 Standard Specifications ............................................................................................................1-12
1-3-2 External Dimensions .................................................................................................................1-17
1-4 Restrictions ............................................................................................................................1-23
1-5 Comparison with Previous Model ........................................................................................1-25
Section 2 Design
2-1 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2-1-1 Inverter Installation ...................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-1-2 Installation Environment.............................................................................................................. 2-5
2-2 Removal of Each Part .............................................................................................................. 2-9
2-2-1 Removing Covers ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
2-2-2 Terminal Blocks......................................................................................................................... 2-10
2-2-3 Preparing Backing Plate ........................................................................................................... 2-11
2-3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-3-1 Standard Connection Diagram .................................................................................................. 2-12
2-3-2 Arrangement and Function of Main Circuit Terminal Block ........................................................ 2-13

CONTENTS
2-3-3 Arrangement and Function of Control Circuit Terminal Block.................................................... 2-14
2-3-4 Wiring for Main Circuit Terminals .............................................................................................. 2-17
2-3-5 Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals .......................................................................................... 2-36
2-3-6 Wiring for RS-485 Communications Terminals ......................................................................... 2-43
2-3-7 Wiring for Digital Operator. ....................................................................................................... 2-45
2-3-8 Compliance with EU Directives and UKCA .............................................................................. 2-45
Section 3 Operation and Test Run

3-1 Operation of Digital Operator ................................................................................................ 3-5
3-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions ..................................................................................................... 3-5
3-1-2 Key Operation Method ............................................................................................................... 3-7
3-1-3 Key Operation Method with Remote Digital Operator Connected ............................................. 3-13
3-2 Connections and Functions of CX-Drive ............................................................................ 3-16
3-2-1 CX-Drive Connection Method................................................................................................... 3-16
3-2-2 Overview of CX-Drive Functions .............................................................................................. 3-20
3-2-3 Precautions for Using CX-Drive ............................................................................................... 3-24
3-3 Flow of Test Run ................................................................................................................... 3-25
3-4 Operation Items for Test Run............................................................................................... 3-26
Section 4 Parameter List

4-1 Monitor Mode .......................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-1-1 Group d ...................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Function Mode ........................................................................................................................ 4-5
4-2-1 Group F: Basic Function Parameters ......................................................................................... 4-5
4-3 Extended Function Mode ....................................................................................................... 4-6
4-3-1 Group A: Standard Function Parameters ................................................................................... 4-7
4-3-2 Group b: Detailed Function Parameters. .................................................................................. 4-14
4-3-3 Group C: Multi-function Terminal Function Parameters ............................................................ 4-24
4-3-4 Group H: Motor Control Parameters ......................................................................................... 4-32
4-3-5 Group P: Option/Applied Function Parameters......................................................................... 4-35
4-3-6 Group U: User Parameters....................................................................................................... 4-41
Section 5 Basic Settings

5-1 Parameter Display and Parameter Initialization ................................................................... 5-3
5-1-1 Display Selection. ....................................................................................................................... 5-3
5-1-2 Parameter Initialization. .............................................................................................................. 5-5
5-2 V/f Control Settings ................................................................................................................ 5-8
5-2-1 Control Method (V/f Characteristics)........................................................................................... 5-8
5-2-2 Heavy load/Light Load Selection .............................................................................................. 5-11
5-3 Motor Parameter Settings .................................................................................................... 5-15
5-3-1 Motor Capacity/Pole Number Selection.................................................................................... 5-15
5-3-2 Electronic Thermal Function..................................................................................................... 5-15
5-3-3 Base Frequency and Maximum Frequency of Motor ................................................................ 5-20
5-4 RUN Command Settings ...................................................................................................... 5-21
5-4-1 RUN Command Selection ........................................................................................................ 5-21
5-5 Frequency Reference Settings ............................................................................................ 5-23
5-5-1 Frequency Reference Selection ............................................................................................... 5-23
5-5-2 Frequency Reference Correlation Chart .................................................................................. 5-29
5-5-3 Frequency Limit........................................................................................................................ 5-30
5-6 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings ........................................................................... 5-32
5-6-1 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings .................................................................................. 5-32

CONTENTS
5-6-2 Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern ............................................................................................. 5-33
5-6-3 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function ................................................................................ 5-36
5-7 Stop Method Settings............................................................................................................ 5-38
5-7-1 Stop Selection........................................................................................................................... 5-38
5-7-2 Free-run Stop Selection ............................................................................................................ 5-38
5-7-3 STOP Key Selection ................................................................................................................. 5-41
5-8 Reset Method Settings .......................................................................................................... 5-42
5-8-1 Reset ........................................................................................................................................ 5-42
5-8-2 Restart after Resetting .............................................................................................................. 5-44
5-9 Multi-function Input Settings ................................................................................................ 5-46
5-9-1 Multi-function Input Selection. ................................................................................................... 5-46
5-9-2 Multi-function Input Operation Selection.................................................................................... 5-47
5-9-3 Input Terminal Response Time ................................................................................................. 5-47
5-9-4 Forward RUN Command (FW) and Reverse RUN Command (RV) .......................................... 5-47
5-9-5 Multi-step Speed Operation Function ........................................................................................ 5-48
5-9-6 Jogging (JG) ............................................................................................................................. 5-51
5-9-7 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration (2CH) .................................................................................... 5-52
5-9-8 Reset (RS) ................................................................................................................................ 5-52
5-9-9 3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R) ...................................................................................... 5-53
5-10 Multi-function Output Settings ............................................................................................. 5-54
5-10-1 Multi-function Output Selection ................................................................................................. 5-54
5-10-2 Multi-function Output Operation Selection ................................................................................. 5-54
5-10-3 Multi-function Output ON/OFF Delay Time ............................................................................... 5-55
5-10-4 Signal during RUN (RUN) ......................................................................................................... 5-55
5-10-5 Constant Speed Arrival Signal (FA1) ........................................................................................ 5-56
5-10-6 Alarm Signal (AL)...................................................................................................................... 5-56
5-10-7 0-Hz Detection Signal (ZS) ....................................................................................................... 5-57
5-10-8 Operation Ready (IRDY) ........................................................................................................... 5-58
5-10-9 Forward Run Signal (FWR) ....................................................................................................... 5-58
5-10-10 Reverse Run Signal (RVR) ....................................................................................................... 5-58
5-11 Torque Boost Function Settings .......................................................................................... 5-59
5-11-1 Torque Boost............................................................................................................................. 5-59
5-12 Measures against Overvoltage ............................................................................................. 5-62
5-12-1 Overvoltage Suppression Function during Deceleration............................................................ 5-62
5-12-2 Regenerative Braking Function ................................................................................................. 5-64
Section 6 Vector Control and Applied Functions

6-1 Sensorless Vector Control..................................................................................................... 6-3
6-1-1 Sensorless Vector Control Parameter Settings ........................................................................... 6-3
6-1-2 Offline Auto-tuning for Motor Parameters ....................................................................................6-4
6-1-3 Motor Parameter Settings ...........................................................................................................6-9
6-1-4 Adjustments for Sensorless Vector Control ...............................................................................6-10
6-2 Torque Limit Function ...........................................................................................................6-12
6-2-1 Torque Limit Function Settings..................................................................................................6-12
6-2-2 Torque LADSTOP Function Settings......................................................................................... 6-14
6-3 Overtorque/Undertorque Function ......................................................................................6-15
6-3-1 Overtorque/Undertorque Function Settings ...............................................................................6-15
6-4 Torque Control .......................................................................................................................6-16
6-4-1 Torque Control Settings ............................................................................................................6-16
6-4-2 Torque Bias Function Settings ..................................................................................................6-17
6-5 V/f Control with Speed Feedback.........................................................................................6-18
6-5-1 Settings of V/f Control with Speed Feedback ............................................................................6-18
6-5-2 Recommended Encoder and Its Wiring ....................................................................................6-19
6-5-3 Protective Detection under V/f Control with Speed Feedback ...................................................6-23
6-5-4 Adjustments for V/f Control with Speed Feedback ....................................................................6-24
6-6 Brake Control Function........................................................................................................ 6-25

CONTENTS
6-6-1 Operation Sequence of Brake Control Function ....................................................................... 6-25
6-6-2 Brake Control Function Settings ............................................................................................... 6-26
6-7 Simple Position Control ........................................................................................................ 6-28
6-7-1 Feedback Settings for Simple Position Control......................................................................... 6-28
6-7-2 Recommended Encoder for Simple Position Control and Its Wiring ......................................... 6-29
6-7-3 Simple Position Control Operation and Settings ....................................................................... 6-34
6-7-4 Origin Search Function, Current Position Preset, Position Data Storage at Power Shutoff....... 6-40
6-7-5 Restarting Positioning .............................................................................................................. 6-45
6-7-6 Multi-step Position Control Settings .......................................................................................... 6-45
6-7-7 Turntable Control...................................................................................................................... 6-47
6-7-8 Speed/Position Switching. ........................................................................................................ 6-49
6-7-9 Interlock Function with Simple Position Control and Brake Control .......................................... 6-50
6-8 PM Motor Mode ...................................................................................................................... 6-54
6-8-1 PM Motor and PM Motor Control.............................................................................................. 6-54
6-8-2 Functional Limitations in PM Motor Mode ................................................................................. 6-56
6-8-3 Switching to PM Motor Mode ................................................................................................... 6-58
6-8-4 Offline Auto-tuning for PM Motor Parameters ........................................................................... 6-59
6-8-5 PM Motor Parameter Settings .................................................................................................. 6-62
6-8-6 Adjustment of PM Motor Mode Settings. .................................................................................. 6-64
Section 7 Other Functions

7-1 Monitor Mode .......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7-1-1 Output Frequency Monitor [d001] ............................................................................................... 7-4
7-1-2 Output Current Monitor [d002].................................................................................................... 7-4
7-1-3 RUN Direction Monitor [d003] .................................................................................................... 7-5
7-1-4 PID Feedback Value Monitor [d004] ........................................................................................... 7-5
7-1-5 Multi-function Input Monitor [d005] ............................................................................................. 7-5
7-1-6 Multi-function Output Monitor [d006] .......................................................................................... 7-6
7-1-7 Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007] ................................................................. 7-6
7-1-8 Real Frequency Monitor [d008] .................................................................................................. 7-7
7-1-9 Torque Reference Monitor [d009]. .............................................................................................. 7-7
7-1-10 Torque Bias Monitor [d010]......................................................................................................... 7-8
7-1-11 Output Torque Monitor [d012]..................................................................................................... 7-8
7-1-12 Output Voltage Monitor [d013].................................................................................................... 7-8
7-1-13 Input Power Monitor [d014] ........................................................................................................ 7-9
7-1-14 Integrated Power Monitor [d015] ................................................................................................ 7-9
7-1-15 Total RUN Time Monitor [d016] ................................................................................................ 7-10
7-1-16 Total Power ON Time Monitor [d017] ....................................................................................... 7-10
7-1-17 Fin Temperature Monitor [d018] ............................................................................................... 7-10
7-1-18 Life Assessment Monitor [d022] ............................................................................................... 7-11
7-1-19 Program Counter (DriveProgramming) [d023] .......................................................................... 7-11
7-1-20 Program Number Monitor (DriveProgramming) [d024] ............................................................. 7-11
7-1-21 User Monitor 0 to 2 (DriveProgramming) [d025 to d027] .......................................................... 7-12
7-1-22 Position Command Monitor [d029] ........................................................................................... 7-12
7-1-23 Current Position Monitor [d030] ................................................................................................ 7-12
7-1-24 Dual User Monitor [d050] ......................................................................................................... 7-13
7-1-25 Inverter Mode Monitor [d060] ................................................................................................... 7-13
7-1-26 Frequency Reference Source Monitor [d062] ........................................................................... 7-14
7-1-27 Run Command Source Monitor [d063]. .................................................................................... 7-14
7-1-28 Fault Counter [d080] ................................................................................................................ 7-14
7-1-29 Fault Monitor 1 to 6 [d081 to 086]............................................................................................. 7-15
7-1-30 Warning Monitor [d090] ............................................................................................................ 7-15
7-1-31 DC Voltage Monitor [d102] ....................................................................................................... 7-15
7-1-32 Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor [d103] ...................................................................... 7-16
7-1-33 Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor [d104] .......................................................................... 7-16
7-1-34 Analog Voltage Input O Monitor [d130] .................................................................................... 7-16
7-1-35 Analog Current Input OI Monitor [d131].................................................................................... 7-16
7-1-36 Pulse Train Input EA Monitor [d133] ........................................................................................... 7-17
7-1-37 PID Deviation [d153] .................................................................................................................. 7-17
7-1-38 PID Output Monitor [d155] ......................................................................................................... 7-17

CONTENTS
7-2 Multi-function Input/Output Functions ................................................................................ 7-18
7-2-1 Multi-function Input Selection. ................................................................................................... 7-18
7-2-2 Multi-function Output Selection ................................................................................................. 7-20
7-3 Analog I/O Settings................................................................................................................ 7-22
7-3-1 Analog Input (O, OI) .................................................................................................................. 7-22
7-3-2 Analog Input Filter ..................................................................................................................... 7-24
7-3-3 Analog Command Hold Function (AHD) ................................................................................... 7-24
7-3-4 Analog Input Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 7-25
7-3-5 Analog Input Start/End Function Settings.................................................................................. 7-25
7-3-6 Terminal EO (Pulse/PWM Output) ............................................................................................ 7-27
7-3-7 Terminal AM (Analog Output). ................................................................................................... 7-29
7-4 Inverter Control Settings ...................................................................................................... 7-31
7-4-1 Carrier Frequency ..................................................................................................................... 7-31
7-4-2 Automatic Carrier Reduction ..................................................................................................... 7-32
7-4-3 2nd Control Function (SET) ...................................................................................................... 7-33
7-5 Other Operation Functions ................................................................................................... 7-35
7-5-1 Starting Frequency.................................................................................................................... 7-35
7-5-2 Reduced Voltage Startup Selection .......................................................................................... 7-36
7-5-3 Frequency Jump Function ........................................................................................................ 7-36
7-5-4 Acceleration/Deceleration Stop Function .................................................................................. 7-37
7-5-5 RUN Direction Limit Selection ................................................................................................... 7-38
7-5-6 Permission of RUN Command .................................................................................................. 7-38
7-5-7 Frequency Calculation Function ............................................................................................... 7-39
7-5-8 Frequency Addition Function .................................................................................................... 7-39
7-5-9 Remote Operation Function (UP/DWN) .................................................................................... 7-40
7-5-10 Output Voltage Gain.................................................................................................................. 7-41
7-5-11 AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) Function ............................................................................ 7-42
7-5-12 PID Function ............................................................................................................................. 7-44
7-5-13 Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function ........................................................................... 7-50
7-5-14 Commercial Switching (CS) ...................................................................................................... 7-50
7-5-15 Stabilization Parameter. ............................................................................................................ 7-52
7-5-16 Pulse Train Frequency Input ..................................................................................................... 7-52
7-5-17 LAD Cancel Function ................................................................................................................ 7-53
7-6 Digital Operator and Operation Functions .......................................................................... 7-54
7-6-1 Soft Lock Function (SFT) .......................................................................................................... 7-54
7-6-2 Forced Operator Function (OPE). ............................................................................................. 7-55
7-6-3 Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM) .................................................................................... 7-55
7-6-4 Operation Selection at External Operator Disconnection .......................................................... 7-56
7-6-5 Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen after Power-on).............................................................. 7-56
7-6-6 Initial Screen Automatic Return Function .................................................................................. 7-56
7-6-7 Inverter Display on Operator Connection .................................................................................. 7-57
7-6-8 Display Fixed (DISP) ................................................................................................................ 7-57
7-6-9 Password Function ................................................................................................................... 7-57
7-6-10 User Parameter Setting Function .............................................................................................. 7-60
7-6-11 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function ............................................................................. 7-60
7-6-12 Jog Dial Sensitivity. ................................................................................................................... 7-61
7-7 Restart Functions .................................................................................................................. 7-62
7-7-1 Frequency Pull-in Restart ......................................................................................................... 7-62
7-7-2 Restart during Power Interruption, Undervoltage/Overvoltage, Overcurrent.............................. 7-64
7-7-3 Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function (USP) ................................................................ 7-68
7-7-4 Deceleration Stop on Power Interruption Function.................................................................... 7-69
7-8 Functions Related to Protection, Warning, and Various Output Signals ......................... 7-73
7-8-1 Free-electronic Thermal Function ............................................................................................. 7-73
7-8-2 Motor Electronic Thermal Function ........................................................................................... 7-74
7-8-3 Electronic Thermal Warning ...................................................................................................... 7-77
7-8-4 Overload Limit/Overload Warning ............................................................................................. 7-78
7-8-5 Overcurrent Suppression Function ........................................................................................... 7-81
7-8-6 External Trip (EXT) ................................................................................................................... 7-81
7-8-7 Thermistor Trip Function .......................................................................................................... 7-82

7-8-8 Signal during RUN (RUN) ........................................................................................................ 7-82
7-8-9 Frequency Arrival Signal (FA2 to FA5)...................................................................................... 7-83

CONTENTS
7-8-10 RUN Time/Power ON Time Over (RNT/ONT)........................................................................... 7-84
7-8-11 Logic Operation Output Signal (LOG1 to LOG3) ...................................................................... 7-85
7-8-12 Capacitor Life Warning Signal (WAC) ...................................................................................... 7-86
7-8-13 Cooling Fan Operation ............................................................................................................. 7-86
7-8-14 Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal (WAF) ................................................................................... 7-87
7-8-15 Communication Disconnection Detection Signal (NDc) ............................................................ 7-87
7-8-16 Starting Contact Signal (FR) .................................................................................................... 7-88
7-8-17 Cooling Fin Overheat Warning (OHF) ...................................................................................... 7-88
7-8-18 Low Current Signal (LOC) ........................................................................................................ 7-89
7-8-19 Fatal Fault Signal (MJA). .......................................................................................................... 7-89
7-8-20 Window Comparator (WCO/WCOI) (Disconnection Detection ODc/OIDc) ............................... 7-90
7-8-21 Frequency Reference Selection Status Signal (FREF) ............................................................. 7-91
7-8-22 RUN Command Status Signal (REF) ....................................................................................... 7-91
7-8-23 2nd Control Selection Signal (SETM) ....................................................................................... 7-92
7-8-24 Ground Fault Detection Selection............................................................................................. 7-92
7-9 DC Injection Braking Function ............................................................................................. 7-93
7-9-1 DC Injection Braking (DB) ........................................................................................................ 7-93
7-10 Safety Function ...................................................................................................................... 7-99
7-10-1 Overview of Safety Function..................................................................................................... 7-99
7-10-2 Safety Function Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-102
7-10-3 Wiring and Usage of the Safety Function. ...............................................................................7-103
7-10-4 Periodic Inspection ................................................................................................................. 7-104
7-11 Option/Applied Functions (Group P) ................................................................................. 7-105
7-11-1 Operation Selection on Option Error .......................................................................................7-105
7-11-2 DriveProgramming Function Parameters................................................................................ 7-105
Section 8 Communications Functions

8-1 Communications Specifications ........................................................................................... 8-3
8-2 RS485 Terminal Arrangement and Connection .................................................................... 8-4
8-3 Modbus Communication Parameters ................................................................................... 8-5
8-4 Modbus Communication Protocol ........................................................................................ 8-7
8-4-1 Message Configuration............................................................................................................... 8-7
8-4-2 Required Communications Time ................................................................................................ 8-9
8-4-3 Normal Response....................................................................................................................... 8-9
8-4-4 Abnormal Response................................................................................................................... 8-9
8-4-5 No Response ........................................................................................................................... 8-10
8-5 Explanation of Each Function Code .................................................................................... 8-11
8-5-1 Read Coil Status [01 hex]......................................................................................................... 8-11
8-5-2 Read from Holding Register [03 hex] ....................................................................................... 8-12
8-5-3 Write to Coil [05 hex] ................................................................................................................ 8-13
8-5-4 Write to Holding Register [06 hex] ............................................................................................ 8-14
8-5-5 Loop-back Test [08 hex] ........................................................................................................... 8-15
8-5-6 Write to Multiple Coils [0F hex] ................................................................................................. 8-16
8-5-7 Write to Multiple Holding Registers [10 hex] ............................................................................. 8-18
8-5-8 Read/Write from/to Multiple Holding Registers [17h] ................................................................ 8-19
8-5-9 Exception Response ................................................................................................................ 8-20
8-6 Saving a Change to Holding Register (Enter Command) ................................................. 8-21
8-6-1 How to Issue Enter Command.................................................................................................. 8-21
8-6-2 EEPROM Write Mode ............................................................................................................. 8-23
8-7 Modbus Mapping Function .................................................................................................. 8-24
8-7-1 Operation of Modbus Mapping Function................................................................................... 8-24
8-7-2 Modbus Mapping Function Settings ......................................................................................... 8-25
8-7-3 Compressed Single-word Registers. ........................................................................................ 8-26
8-7-4 Troubleshooting for Modbus Mapping Function ........................................................................ 8-28
8-7-5 Endian Function ........................................................................................................................ 8-29

8-8 Co-inverter Communication ................................................................................................. 8-31

CONTENTS
8-8-1 Co-inverter Communication Parameters ................................................................................... 8-32
8-8-2 Co-inverter Communication Settings ......................................................................................... 8-35
8-9 Modbus Communication Data Lists .................................................................................... 8-37
8-9-1 Coil Number List ....................................................................................................................... 8-37
8-9-2 Monitor Function/Enter Command Register List ....................................................................... 8-41
8-9-3 Group F Register List ................................................................................................................ 8-50
8-9-4 Group A/b/C/H/P Register List .................................................................................................. 8-51
8-9-5 2nd Control Register Number List ............................................................................................. 8-96
Section 9 Overview of DriveProgramming

9-1 Overview of DriveProgramming .............................................................................................9-2
Section 10 Troubleshooting
10-1 Alarm Display and Remedies ...............................................................................................10-2
10-1-1 Alarm Display............................................................................................................................10-2
10-1-2 Alarm Code List ........................................................................................................................10-4
10-1-3 Option Unit Protective Function List ........................................................................................10-10
10-1-4 Warning Display ...................................................................................................................... 10-11
10-1-5 Other Indications on Digital Operator ......................................................................................10-12
10-2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 10-13
Section 11 Maintenance and Inspection

11-1 Maintenance and Inspection ................................................................................................ 11-2
11-1-1 Daily Inspection......................................................................................................................... 11-6
11-1-2 Cleaning.................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11-1-3 Periodic Inspection.................................................................................................................... 11-6
11-1-4 Daily/Periodic Inspection Items. ................................................................................................ 11-7
11-1-5 Megger Test............................................................................................................................ 11-10
11-1-6 Withstand Voltage Test ........................................................................................................... 11-10
11-1-7 Inverter/Converter Unit Test.................................................................................................... 11-10
11-1-8 I/O Voltage/Current/Electric Power Measurement Method ...................................................... 11-12
Section 12 Options
12-1 Overview of Optional Equipment ...........................................................................................12-1
12-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions....................................................................................................12-1
12-2 Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) .................................................................................. 12-4
12-2-1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 12-4
12-2-2 External Dimensions .................................................................................................................... 12-5
12-3 Digital Operator Cable (Model: 3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE ) ....................................................... 12-6
12-3-1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 12-6
12-4 EtherCAT Communications Unit (Model: 3G3AX-MX2-ECT)................................................. 12-7
12-4-1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 12-7

CONTENTS
Appendices
A-1 Derating ................................................................................................................................... A-2
A-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve..........................................................................................A-7
A-3 Life Alarm Output ..................................................................................................................A-8
A-4 UL/cUL Standards Cautions .................................................................................................A-9
A-5 Overview of Inverter Selection ...........................................................................................A-13
Index

1
Overview
This section provides an overview of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series features, standard
specifications, and external dimensions by inverter capacity. It also shows the
differences of this inverter from the conventional inverter for those who use the
previous model.
1-1 Overview of Functions ...................................................................................... 1-2

1-1-1 Features of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter ........................................................... 1-2
1-1-2 Classes of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter ............................................................ 1-6
1-2 Appearance and Part Names ............................................................................ 1-8
1-3 Specifications ................................................................................................... 1-12
1-3-1 Standard Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-12
1-3-2 External Dimensions ......................................................................................... 1-17
1-4 Restrictions ...................................................................................................... 1-23
1-5 Comparison with Previous Model .................................................................. 1-25
Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 1-1

1 Overview
1-1 Overview of Functions

The Multi-function Compact Inverter (Model: 3G3MX2--EV2) provides a variety of functions such as
PM motor control and simple position control. It is also designed for open field networks to extend appli-
cation usability.
In addition, all models of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series comply as standard with the EC Directive and UL/cUL
Standards. You can use them as world standard inverters.
1-1-1 Features of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter has the following features.
Application Support
Although this Inverter is compact, it provides high functionality and supports a lot of applications. It
addresses diverse needs with optimal performance.
⚫ PM motors
In addition to conventional induction motors, this Inverter supports the PM motor, which results in
efficient control.
This is combined with the OMRON’s unique auto-tuning function and initial pole position estimation
function that estimates the magnetic pole position of a PM motor during startup to enable its smooth
start.
This control is suitable for applications with reduced torque characteristics (which do not require
torque at low speeds) such as fans and pumps.
However, it cannot be used for applications with constant torque characteristics such as general
transfer equipment and elevating axes, where the starting torque exceeds 50% of the rated motor
torque.
⚫ Dual rating function

This Inverter has the dual rating function that consists of the heavy load mode and the light load
mode.
This enables the efficient utilization of the inverter depending on your application.
• Heavy load mode
The heavy load mode is used for a transfer machine, elevator, or other device that temporarily
requires a torque exceeding the rated torque. This mode enables high torque control similar to
that achieved with the previous product.
The overload capacity is 150% of the rated current for 1 minute.
• Light load mode
The light load mode is used for a fan, pump, or other device that operates at the rated motor
torque or lower.
Setting the light load mode causes the rated current of the inverter to increase, enabling the
inverter to drive a motor whose capacity is one size larger.
However, check when selecting an inverter because this also decreases the current overload
capacity to 120% of the rated current for 1 minute.
1-2 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

1 Overview

Derating of the rated output current of the inverter may be required depending on the nor-
mal/light load mode selection, operating ambient temperature, side-by-side installation, and
carrier frequency settings.
Use the inverter in an appropriate environment according to A-1 Derating on page A-2.
⚫ Simple position control 1

The simple position control function enables the position control of up to 8 points with a single
Inverter unit.
Inverter
1-1-1 Features of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series
With the standard pulse train input function, it realizes accurate position control based on the feed-
back of the pulse generator (PG) signal or the encoder’s phase-A/B signal.
It can be combined with control from the open field network to expand the control range of your sys-
tem.
⚫ Programming function
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series has the buit-in simple sequence function (DriveProgramming), which
enables a stand-alone inverter to perform simple sequence control.
You can create programs easily in flowchart or text language method by using the CX-Drive.
For details, refer to “DriveProgramming User’s Manual (I580)”.
⚫ Sensorless vector control

This Inverter provides the sensorless vector control and the auto-tuning function, which enable it to
output a high starting torque of 200% at 0.5 Hz.
This enables powerful drive control even at low speeds.
In addition, sensorless vector control can be used in conjunction with the torque limit and torque
control functions.
It is applicable to device contact stopper, load breakage protector, and other control applications.
⚫ V/f control with speed feedback

With the standard pulse train input function, this inverter realizes accurate Vf control based on the
feedback of the pulse generator (PG) signal or the encoder’s phase-A/B signal.
The speed feedback capability ensures stable speed control at high accuracy.
⚫ PID control function

The inverter provides PID control that adjusts the feedback value to match the target value.
This is available to the process control such as temperature, pressure, flow rate.

1 Overview
Open Field Network

This inverter is designed as standard to provide connectivity to open field networks. In addition to
built-in Modbus communication functions, the inverter also supports various system designs.
⚫ Open field network

Installing any of the following optional communications units enables the inverter to support the cor-
responding open network.
It means that the host of each communications unit can perform the inverter operations, stop con-
trol, status monitor, and functions to read and write various parameter settings.
• EtherCAT Communications Unit (Model: 3G3AX-MX2-ECT)
⚫ Modbus communication functions

This inverter has built-in Modbus communication functions as standard.
These Modbus communication functions of the inverter include sophisticated, convenient functions
as listed below.
• Modbus mapping : Up to 10 register addresses can be set as desired. This is con-
venient, for example, when designing a replacement.
• Broadcasting to up to 5 groups
(Simultaneous broadcast) : Broadcasting to up five inverter groups can be performed by
dividing those located within a single network connected to
this inverter. It is useful to reduce the variation in the startup
timings within a group.
• High transmission speed : This inverter supports the maximum transmission speed of
115.2 kbps. This helps reduce the communications data pro-
cessing time.
• Co-inverter communication : Mutual data exchange can be performed among inverters,
without presence of the master in Modbus communication.
Environmental Consideration
OMRON gives consideration to not only the functions inherent to the inverter, but also its service life
and energy efficiency.
⚫ Automatic energy-saving function

The automatic energy-saving function automatically adjusts the output power of the inverter operat-
ing at a constant speed to the minimum. It has an energy-saving effect in applications such as a fan
or pump.
⚫ Compliance with safety standards

All models of the inverter comply as standard with the EC Directive and UL/cUL Standards.
⚫ Complies with RoHS Directive

The Inverter also complies as standard with the RoHS Directive, which restricts the use of hazard-
ous substances.

1 Overview

Ease of Use
This Inverter is also designed for ease of use in terms of the parameter settings, protection, and opera-
tions.
This leads to the reduction of man-hours in Inverter-related work.
⚫ Password function
The password function prevents unauthorized reading and changing of parameters. 1
⚫ Digital Operator’s initial screen automatic return function
Inverter
1-1-1 Features of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series
You can register the initial screen (data etc.) to display on its Digital Operator.
After operating the Digital Operator for adjustment or inverter monitoring, the screen will return to
the initial screen unless you operate any key for 10 minutes.
⚫ Simplified parameter setting by user parameters

You can register up to 32 user parameters.
It is possible to display only the registered parameters to improve the operability of equipment.

1 Overview
1-1-2 Classes of 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter

There are three voltage classes for 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverters: Single-phase 200 VAC, 3-phase 200
VAC and 3-phase 400 VAC.
The maximum applicable motor capacity for this Inverter is 0.1 to 15 kW for the heavy load mode and
0.2 to 18.5 kW for the light load mode.
All models comply as standard with the EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards.
Enclosure Maximum applicable motor capacity

Rated voltage Model
rating CT: Heavy load VT: Light load
3-phase 200 VAC IP20 0.1 kW 0.2 kW 3G3MX2-A2001-EV2
0.2 kW 0.4 kW 3G3MX2-A2002-EV2
0.4 kW 0.75 kW 3G3MX2-A2004-EV2
0.75 kW 1.1 kW 3G3MX2-A2007-EV2
1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3G3MX2-A2015-EV2
2.2 kW 3.0 kW 3G3MX2-A2022-EV2
3.7 kW 5.5 kW 3G3MX2-A2037-EV2
5.5 kW 7.5 kW 3G3MX2-A2055-EV2
7.5 kW 11 kW 3G3MX2-A2075-EV2
11 kW 15 kW 3G3MX2-A2110-EV2
15 kW 18.5 kW 3G3MX2-A2150-EV2
3-phase 400 VAC IP20 0.4 kW 0.75 kW 3G3MX2-A4004-EV2
0.75 kW 1.5 kW 3G3MX2-A4007-EV2
1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3G3MX2-A4015-EV2
2.2 kW 3.0 kW 3G3MX2-A4022-EV2
3.0 kW 4.0 kW 3G3MX2-A4030-EV2
4.0 kW 5.5 kW 3G3MX2-A4040-EV2
5.5 kW 7.5 kW 3G3MX2-A4055-EV2
7.5 kW 11 kW 3G3MX2-A4075-EV2
11 kW 15 kW 3G3MX2-A4110-EV2
15 kW 18.5 kW 3G3MX2-A4150-EV2
Single-phase 200 VAC IP20 0.1 kW 0.2 kW 3G3MX2-AB001-EV2
0.2 kW 0.4 kW 3G3MX2-AB002-EV2
0.4 kW 0.55 kW 3G3MX2-AB004-EV2
0.75 kW 1.1 kW 3G3MX2-AB007-EV2
1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3G3MX2-AB015-EV2
2.2 kW 3.0 kW 3G3MX2-AB022-EV2

1 Overview

Checking the Model
3 G 3 M X 2 - A 2 0 5 5 – EV 2
Type EV2 or V2
Maximum applicable motor capacity (CT rating)
001 0.1 kW
002 0.2 kW 1
004 0.4 kW
007 0.75 kW
Series Inverter
1-1-2 C l a s s e s o f 3 G 3 M X 2 - E V 2
015 1.5 kW
022 2.2 kW
030 3.0 kW
037 3.7 kW
040 4.0 kW
055 5.5 kW
075 7.5 kW
110 11 kW
150 15 kW
Voltage class
B Single phase 200 VAC (200-V class)
Enclosure rating
Panel-mounting (IP10 or higher) or
A closed wall-mounting models

1 Overview
1-2 Appearance and Part Names

The following shows the front view when the product is unpacked (an example of
3G3MX2-A2001-EV2/A2002-EV2/A2004-EV2/A2007-EV2/AB001-EV2/AB002-
EV2/AB004-EV2).
Open the terminal block cover to wire the main circuit terminal block and the control circuit terminal
block.

1 Overview

The figures below show the components of each Inverter model.
Single-phase 200 V, 0.1/0.2/0.4 kW

3-phase 200 V, 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.75 kW
(1) 1
(3)
(4) (2)
(5)
Single-phase 200 V, 0.75/1.5/2.2 kW

3-phase 200 V, 1.5/2.2 kW
3-phase 400 V, 0.4/0.75/1.5/2.2/3.0 kW
(6)
(6)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(1) Cooling Fin (4) Front Cover

(2) Inverter Case (5) Backing Plate
(3) Terminal Block Cover (6) Cooling Fan
Note The single-phase 200-V, 0.75-kW model and the 3-phase 400-V, 0.4/0.75 kW model, however, have no
cooling fan.

1 Overview
3-phase 200 V, 3.7 kW

3-phase 400 V, 4.0 kW
(6)
(6)
(1)
(3)
(5) (2)
(4)
3-phase 200 V, 5.5/7.5 kW

3-phase 400 V, 5.5/7.5 kW
(6)
(6)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5)

1 - 10 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

1 Overview

3-phase 200 V, 11 kW
3-phase 400 V, 11/15 kW
(6)
(6)
1
(1)
(3)
4) (2)
(5)
3-phase 200 V, 15 kW
(6)
(6)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5)

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 1 - 11

1 Overview
1-3 Specifications
1-3-1 Standard Specifications
3-phase 200-V Class

CT: Heavy load, VT: Light load
Item 3-phase 200 V
Model A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150
(3G3MX2--EV2)
Maximum kW CT 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
applicable VT 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
motor HP CT 1/8 1/4 1/2 1 2 3 5 7 1/2 10 15 20
capacity*1 VT 1/4 1/2 1 1 1/2 3 4 7 1/2 10 15 20 25
Rated out- 200 V CT 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.7 2.7 3.8 6.0 8.6 11.4 16.2 20.7
put capac- VT 0.4 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.3 4.1 6.7 10.3 13.8 19.3 23.9
ity [kVA] 240 V CT 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.3 4.5 7.2 10.3 13.7 19.5 24.9
VT 0.4 0.7 1.4 2.4 3.9 4.9 8.1 12.4 16.6 23.2 28.6
Rated input voltage 3-phase 200 V −15% to 240 V +10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current CT 1.0 1.6 3.3 6.0 9.0 12.7 20.5 30.8 39.6 57.1 62.6
[A] VT 1.2 1.9 3.9 7.2 10.8 13.9 23.0 37.0 48.0 68.0 72.0
Rated output voltage*2 3-phase 200 to 240 V (Less than incoming voltage)
Rated output current CT 1.0 1.6 3.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 17.5 25.0 33.0 47.0 60.0
[A] VT 1.2 1.9 3.5 6.0 9.6 12.0 19.6 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0
Braking torque during 50 50 50 50 50 20 20 20 20 10 10
short-time deceleration
[%]*3
(discharge resistor not
connected)
Braking Regenera- Built-in braking resistor circuit (discharge resistor separately mounted)
resistor tive braking
*4 Minimum 100 100 100 50 50 35 35 20 17 17 10
circuit
connection
resistance
[]
Cooling method Self-cooling (without fan) Forced air cooling (with fan)
Weight [kg] 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.6 1.8 1.8 2.0 3.5 3.5 4.5 6.5
Dimensions (Width  68  128 108  128 140  140  260 180  220 
Height) [mm] 128 296 350
Dimensions (Depth) 112 125.5 148.5 173.5 158 168 178
[mm]
*1. “Applicable motor” represents standard 3-phase motors. When using other types of motors, make sure that the
rated current of the motor does not exceed that of the inverter.
*2. The output voltage decreases as the input voltage drops.
*3. The braking torque during capacitor feedback is the average deceleration torque applied when the motor de-
celerates in the shortest deceleration time (when stopped from 50 Hz), not the continuous regenerative torque.
The average deceleration torque varies depending on the motor loss. This value will decrease in operation over
50 Hz.
*4. The usage rate of the regenerative braking function is 10%.

1 Overview
1-3 Specifications
3-phase 400-V Class
Item 3-phase 400 V
Model A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4030 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150
(3G3MX2--EV2)
Maximum kW CT 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
applicable VT 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 1
motor HP CT 1/2 1 2 3 4 5 7 1/2 10 15 20
capacity*1 VT 1 2 3 4 5 7 1/2 10 15 20 25

Rated out- 380 V CT 1.1 2.2 3.1 3.6 4.7 6.0 9.7 11.8 15.7 20.4
put capac- VT 1.3 2.6 3.5 4.5 5.7 7.3 11.5 15.1 20.4 25.0
ity [kVA] 480 V CT 1.4 2.8 3.9 4.5 5.9 7.6 12.3 14.9 19.9 25.7
VT 1.7 3.4 4.4 5.7 7.3 9.2 14.5 19.1 25.7 31.5
Rated input voltage 3-phase 380 V −15% to 480 V +10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current CT 1.8 3.6 5.2 6.5 7.7 11.0 16.9 18.8 29.4 35.9
[A] VT 2.1 4.3 5.9 8.1 9.4 13.3 20.0 24.0 38.0 44.0
Rated output current CT 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2 14.8 18.0 24.0 31.0
[A] VT 2.1 4.1 5.4 6.9 8.8 11.1 17.5 23.0 31.0 38.0
Braking torque during 50 50 50 20 20 20 20 20 10 10
[%]*3
connected)
circuit*4 Minimum 180 180 180 100 100 100 70 70 70 35
connection
resistance
[]
Cooling method Self-cooling Forced air cooling (with fan)
(without fan)
Weight [kg] 1.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.0 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5
Dimensions (Width  108  128 140  140  260 180  296
Height) [mm] 128
Dimensions (Depth) 146.5 173.5 158 168
[mm]
50 Hz.

1 Overview
Single-phase 200-V Class

Item Single-phase 200 V
Model AB001 AB002 AB004 AB007 AB015 AB022
(3G3MX2--EV2)
Maximum kW CT 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
applicable VT 0.2 0.4 0.55 1.1 2.2 3.0
motor HP CT 1/8 1/4 1/2 1 2 3
capacity*1 VT 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1/2 3 4
Rated out- 200 V CT 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.7 2.7 3.8
put capac- VT 0.4 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.3 4.1
ity [kVA] 240 V CT 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.3 4.5
VT 0.4 0.7 1.4 2.4 3.9 4.9
Rated input voltage Single-phase 200 V −15% to 240 V +10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%
Rated input current CT 1.3 3.0 6.3 11.5 16.8 22.0
[A] VT 2.0 3.6 7.3 13.8 20.2 24.0
Rated output current CT 1.0 1.6 3.0 5.0 8.0 11.0
[A] VT 1.2 1.9 3.5 6.0 9.6 12.0
Braking torque during 50 50 50 50 50 20
[%]*3
connected)
circuit*4 Minimum 100 100 100 50 50 35
connection
resistance
[]
Cooling method Self-cooling (without fan) Forced air cooling
(with fan)
Weight [kg] 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.6 1.8 1.8
Dimensions (Width  68  128 108  128
Height) [mm]
Dimensions (Depth) 112 125.5 173.5
[mm]
50 Hz.

1 Overview
Common Specifications
1-3 Specifications
Item Specifications
Enclosure rating Open type (IP20)
Control Control method Phase-to-phase sinusoidal modulation PWM
Output frequency range*1 0.01 to 590 Hz
Frequency precision*2 Digital command: 0.01% of the maximum frequency, Analog command:
0.2% of the maximum frequency (2510°C)
1
Frequency setting Digital setting: 0.01 Hz, Analog setting: Maximum frequency  1/1000
resolution

Voltage/Frequency V/f characteristics (constant torque, reduced torque)
characteristics Sensorless vector control, V/f control with speed feedback
Overload current rating Heavy load rating (CT): 150%/60 s
of inverter Light load rating (VT): 120%/60 s
Instantaneous overcur- 200% of heavy load rating (CT) value
rent protection
Acceleration/ 0.00 to 3600 s (line/curve arbitrary setting), 2nd acceleration/deceleration
Deceleration time setting provided
Carrier frequency 2 to 15 kHz (Derating required)
change range
Starting torque 200%/0.5 Hz (Sensorless vector control)
DC injection braking Operates at operating frequency or less during deceleration via STOP
command, at set frequency or less during operation, or via external input
(level and time can be set).
Protective function Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Electronic thermal, Tempera-
ture error, Ground-fault current at power-on, Inrush current protection cir-
cuit, Overload limit, Incoming overvoltage, External trip, Memory error,
CPU error, USP error, Communication error, Overvoltage suppression
during deceleration, Power interruption protection, Emergency shutoff,
Analog current input (New), STO internal fault (New), etc.
Input Frequency settings Digital Operator
signal External analog input signal (variable resistor/0 to 10 VDC/4 to 20 mA),
Modbus communication
RUN/STOP command Digital Operator
External digital input signal (3-wire input available), Modbus communica-
tion
Multi-function Input*3 7 points (Functions can be selected from among 66)
Analog input*4 2 points (O terminal for voltage: 10 bits/0 to 10 V, OI terminal for current:
10 bits/4 to 20 mA)
Pulse input 2 points (32 kHz max., EA terminal: 5 to 24 VDC, 7 terminal: 24 VDC)
Safety input 2 points (GS1,GS2: Dedicated terminals)
Output sig- Multi-function output *3 2 points (11 and 12 terminals: Functions can be selected from among
nal 47)
Relay output *3 1 point (SPDT contact (AL0, AL1, AL2), Functions can be selected from
among 47)
Analog output 1 point (AM terminal: 10 bits for voltage, 0 to 10 V) (Frequency or current
(Frequency monitor)*5 can be selected)
Pulse output 1 point (EO terminal: 32 kHz max., 0 to 10 V)
Communi- RS-422 RJ45 connector (for Digital Operator)
cations RS-485 Control circuit terminal, Modbus communication
USB USB2.0, Micro-B connector

1 Overview
Item Specifications
Other AVR function, V/f characteristics switching, Upper/Lower limit, Multi-step speed (16 steps), Starting
functions frequency adjustment, Jogging operation, Carrier frequency adjustment, PID control, Frequency
jump, Analog gain/bias adjustment, S-shape acceleration/deceleration, Electronic thermal charac-
teristics/level adjustment, Restart function, Torque boost function, Fault monitor, Soft lock function,
Frequency conversion display, USP function, 2nd control function, UP/DOWN, Overcurrent sup-
pression function, etc.
General Operating ambient tem- −10 to 50°C
specifica- perature*6
tions Storage ambient tem- −20 to 65°C (During shipment)
perature
Operating ambient 20% to 90% (with no condensation)
humidity
Vibration resistance 5.9 m/s2 (0.6 G), 10 to 55 Hz
Location At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m, indoors (without corrosive gases or
dust)
Options EtherCAT 3G3AX-MX2-ECT
Communications Unit
Other optional equipment DC reactor, AC reactor, Radio noise filter, Input noise filter, Output noise
filter, Regenerative braking unit, Braking resistor, etc.
*1. If you must use the motor at higher than 50/60 Hz, check the allowable maximum motor speed and other infor-
mation with the motor manufacturer. If you must use the motor at higher than 400 Hz, use the high-frequency
mode.
*2. To achieve stable motor control, the output frequency may exceed the maximum frequency set in the 1st/2nd
Maximum Frequency (A004/A204) by a maximum of 2 Hz.
*3. In the VT (light load) mode and the PM motor mode, the available functions are limited compared with the CT
(heavy load) mode. For some parameters, the default data and setting range also differ.
*4. By default, the maximum frequency is adjusted to 9.8 V for a voltage input of 0 to 10 VDC and to 19.8 mA for
a current input of 4 to 20 mA, respectively. If necessary, adjust the default parameter settings. For details, refer
to 7-3-4 Analog Input Adjustment on page 7-25.
*5. The analog voltage and current values for the multi-function monitor output terminals show values that can only
be used as a guide for analog meter connection. The maximum output value may differ from 10 V or 20 mA
due to the variability of the analog output circuit. If necessary, adjust the default parameter settings. For details,
refer to 7-3-7 Terminal AM (Analog Output) on page 7-29.
*6. Derating of the rated output current of the inverter may be required depending on the normal/light load mode
selection, operating ambient temperature, side-by-side installation, and carrier frequency settings.

1 Overview
1-3 Specifications
1-3-2 External Dimensions
68 (W)
56
4.5
128 (H)

118
4.5
(3)
D
D1
4.5
Power supply Model W [mm] H [mm] D [mm] D1 [mm]

Single-phase 200 V 3G3MX2-AB001-EV2
112 13.5
3G3MX2-AB002-EV2
3G3MX2-AB004-EV2 125.5 27
3-phase 200 V 3G3MX2-A2001-EV2 68 128
112 13.5
3G3MX2-A2002-EV2
3G3MX2-A2004-EV2 125.5 27
3G3MX2-A2007-EV2 148.5 50

1 Overview
108 (W)
96
4.5
128 (H)
118
(3)
D
D1
4.5

Single-phase 200 V 3G3MX2-AB007-EV2
3G3MX2-AB015-EV2
3G3MX2-AB022-EV2 173.5 55.5
3-phase 200 V 3G3MX2-A2015-EV2
3G3MX2-A2022-EV2
108 128
3-phase 400 V 3G3MX2-A4004-EV2 146.5 28.5
3G3MX2-A4007-EV2
3G3MX2-A4015-EV2
173.5 55.5
3G3MX2-A4022-EV2
3G3MX2-A4030-EV2

1 Overview
140 (W)
1-3 Specifications
128
4.5
128 (H)
1
118

4.5 (3)
173.5(D)
55.5(D1)
4.5

140 128 173.5 55.5

1 Overview
140 (W)
122
2-6
260 (H)
248
(3)
158(D)
74(D1)
6.5

3G3MX2-A2075-EV2
140 260 158 74
3G3MX2-A4075-EV2

1 Overview
180 (W)
1-3 Specifications
160
2-7
296 (H)

284
(3)
168(D)
84(D1)
5

3-phase 400 V 3G3MX2-A4110-EV2 180 296 168 84
3G3MX2-A4150-EV2

1 Overview
220 (W)
192
2-7
350 (H)
337
(3)
178(D)
98(D1)
5

3-phase 200 V 3G3MX2-A2150-EV2 220 350 178 98

1 Overview
1-4 Restrictions
1-4 Restrictions
Restriction on PM Motor Mode
Selecting the PM motor mode disables the following functions.
• 2nd control 1
• Torque control and torque limit functions
• Encoder feedback function
• Induction motor control function
• Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)
• Dual rating function (Normal/Light load mode)
• Simple position control function, Energy-saving control, Brake control, Overcurrent suppression func-
tion, Jogging function, etc.
Therefore, unavailable parameters and the selection functions that cannot be selected in parameters,
are not displayed on the Digital Operator. In addition, for some parameters, the default data are
changed.
For details, refer to 6-8 PM Motor Mode on page 6-54.
Restriction on Light Load (VT) Mode
Selecting the light load mode disables the following control.

• Sensorless vector control
Therefore, functions associated with this control such as auto-tuning/motor parameter setting, torque
control, and torque limit functions are unavailable.
In addition, switching from the heavy load mode to the light load mode causes the Inverter rated cur-
rent and overload detection level to be changed, which also changes the default data and setting
ranges of some parameters.
For details, refer to 5-2-2 Heavy load/Light Load Selection on page 5-11.

• Derating of the rated output current of the inverter may be required depending on the nor-
• In the light load (VT) mode, the PM motor mode cannot be used. Switching from the light load
(VT) mode to the PM motor mode causes the rated current and overload detection settings to
be changed to those for the heavy load mode.
• In the light load (VT) mode, the high-frequency mode cannot be used. Switching from the
light load (VT) mode to the high-frequency mode causes the rated current and overload
detection settings to be changed to those for the heavy load (CT) mode.

1 Overview
Carrier Frequency Setting and Derating of Rated Output Current
Derating of the rated output current of the Inverter may be required when a high carrier frequency is set,
depending on the normal/light load mode selection and operating temperature.
Restriction on Modbus (RS-485) Communication
When the inverter is used with any of the following communications units, the inverter’s RS-485 com-
munications function cannot be used.
Control the inverter from the host of each communications unit.
• EtherCAT Communications Unit (Model: 3G3AX-MX2-ECT)

1 Overview
1-5 Comparison with Previous

1-5 Comparison with Previous Model
The following describes the changes and additions from the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter. Keep this in
Model
mind when replacing the inverter from 3G3MX2-E Series to 3G3MX2-EV2 Series.
Digital Operator 1
For the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, the data display of the Digital Operator and the specifications of
operation keys are changed.
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
The differences in specifications of each part of the Digital Operator are as shown in the table below.
For the specifications of each part of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, refer to 3-1-1 Part Names and
Descriptions on page 3-5.
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2 Details

Data display Data display • The number of digits to appear on the
data display is changed from 4 digits to
5 digits.
• The minus indication on the data display
is changed to (MINUS LED).
It lights when a negative value is dis-
played on the data display.
• The layout of each LED indicator is
changed.
RUN key RUN key The position of the RUN key enabled LED
indicator is changed.

1 Overview
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2 Details

Increment key Jog dial The Increment key, Decrement key, and
Enter key are replaced with a Jog dial.
Decrement key
Enter key
Enter key
Change of the Number of Digits on LED Data Display
The Digital Operator’s LED data display of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter is changed to a 5-digit
display. Refer to 3-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions on page 3-5 for information on the LED data
display.
Addition of the Blinking RUN LED Indicator
If the RUN command is input when the Inverter is unable to start operation (such as when the
frequency reference is 0 Hz or an alarm has occurred), the RUN LED blinks. Refer to 3-1-1 Part Names
and Descriptions on page 3-5 for information on the RUN LED indicator.
Addition of Digit Shift Display Mode
The digit shift display mode is added to display parameter data with more than 5 digits on the Digital
Operator.
For details on the digit shift display mode, refer to Digit Shift Display Mode on page 3-11.
While the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter allows for monitoring data up to the display digits of its Digital
Operator, the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter is able to monitor data that exceeds the display digits.
Change of Individual digit Input Mode Selection

The individual input mode selection method is changed according to the change of Digital Operator
keys.
The remote Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) allows you to enter the individual input mode by
simultaneously pressing the Increment and Decrement keys, as with conventional models. For details,
refer to Individual Input Mode on page 3-12.
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
Press the Increment key and the Decrement Press and hold the Enter key for 3 seconds.
key simultaneously.

1 Overview

Operation to Switch from the Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01)
Connected
When the Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) is connected, press and hold the Mode key on the
Model
Inverter for 3 seconds or more to enable the operation of the Digital Operator on the Inverter. In this
case, the operation of the Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) is disabled.
While the Digital Operator on the Inverter is operational, pressing and holding the Mode key on the
Inverter for 3 seconds or more enables the operation of the Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01). 1
For details, refer to Regarding Operation Authority on page 3-15.
USB Connector
The USB connector is changed from a mini-B (USB 1.1) to a Micro-B (USB 2.0) connector.
Refer to 3-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions on page 3-5 for information on the USB.
The cable used in the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter cannot be used. Prepare the appropriate cable.
Refer to 3-2 Connections and Functions of CX-Drive on page 3-16 for connection with the support tool
CX-Drive.
Addition and Change of Parameters
The following parameters are added and changed.
Parameter
Function name Description
No.
b031 Soft Lock Selection 10 (Data can be changed during RUN) setting is removed.
b037 Display Selection 04 (Basic display) setting is removed.
b098 Ground Fault Detection This parameter is added to enable/disable ground fault detection.
Selection When it is set to 01 (Enabled), Ground protection (E14) will be
detected.
When it is set to 00 (Disabled), Ground protection (E14) will not be
detected.
The default is 01 (Enabled).
b914 Electronic Thermal Load This parameter is added to enable saving of the electronic thermal
Rate Memory Selection at heating total counter value when the power supply is turned OFF.
Power-off When it is set to 01 (Enabled), the electronic thermal load rate will be
saved when power supply to the Inverter is turned OFF.
When it is set to 00 (Disabled), the electronic thermal load rate will be
cleared when power supply to the Inverter is turned OFF.
The default is 01 (Enabled). To comply with UL standards, use this
with 01 (Enabled).
C117 Jog Sensitivity Setting This parameter is added to set the Jog dial count required to increase
or decrease the parameter number or the set data value by 1.
C118 Jog Carry Sensitivity This parameter is added to set the Jog dial count required to carry (or
Setting borrow) the parameter number or the set data value during operation.
A059 DC Injection Braking (Not used)
Carrier Frequency For the carrier frequency for DC injection braking, use the Carrier
Frequency (b083).
b083 Carrier Frequency This is a carrier frequency during normal operation. In the
3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, it is also used during DC
injection
braking.

1 Overview
Change of Parameter Setting Ranges

The following parameter data ranges are changed to extend the support range of applications.
Parameter Data range

Function name
No. 3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
d001 Output Frequency Monitor 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00) *1 0.00 to 590.00
d002 Output Current Monitor 0.00 to 655.30 0.00 to 655.35
d004 PID Feedback Value Monitor 0.00 to 10000.00 0.00 to 9999.00
d007 Output Frequency Monitor (After 0.00 to 39996.00 (57994.20)*1 0.00 to 58994.10
Conversion)
d008 Real Frequency Monitor (-580.00)*1 -400.00 to 400.00 -590.00 to 590.00
(580.00)*1
d015 Integrated Power Monitor 0.0 to 999900.0 0.0 to 1000000.0
d016 Total RUN Time Monitor 0 to 999900 0 to 1000000
d017 Total Power ON Time Monitor 0 to 999900 0 to 1000000
d025 User Monitor 0 -2147483647 to 2147483647 -2147483648 to 2147483647
(DriveProgramming)
d026 User Monitor 1
(DriveProgramming)
d027 User Monitor 2
(DriveProgramming)
d081 Fault Monitor 1 (Latest) Fault Factor: E00 to E83, E99 Fault Factor: E00 to E83, E99
d082 Fault Monitor 2 Output Frequency: 0.00 to Output Frequency: 0.00 to
d083 Fault Monitor 3 580.00 590.00
d084 Fault Monitor 4 Output Current: 0.00 to 655.30 Output Current: 0.00 to 655.35
d085 Fault Monitor 5
Total RUN Time: 0 to 999900 Total RUN Time: 0 to 1000000
Total Power ON Time: 0 to Total Power ON Time: 0 to
999900 1000000
F001 Output Frequency Setting/Moni- 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
tor
A003 1st Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 (580.0)*1 30.0 to 590.0
A203 2nd Base Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 (580.0)*1 30.0 to 590.0
A004 1st Maximum Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 (580.0)*1 30.0 to 590.0
A204 2nd Maximum Frequency 0.0 to 400.0 (580.0)*1 30.0 to 590.0
A011 O Start Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A012 O End Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A020 1st Multi-step Speed Reference 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
0
A220 2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
0
A038 Jogging Frequency 0.00 to 9.99 (100.00)*1 0.00 to 10.00 (100.00)*1
A061 1st Frequency Upper Limit 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A261 2nd Frequency Upper Limit
A062 1st Frequency Lower Limit 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A262 2nd Frequency Lower Limit
A063 Jump Frequency 1 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A065 Jump Frequency 2
A069 Acceleration Stop Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
*1. In high-frequency mode.

1 Overview

Function name
A095 1st 2-step Acceleration Fre- 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00) *1 0.00 to 590.00
quency
A295 2nd 2-step Acceleration Fre-
Model
quency
A096 1st 2-step Deceleration Fre-
quency
A296 2nd 2-step Deceleration Fre- 1
quency
A101 OI Start Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A102 OI End Frequency
A145 Frequency Addition Amount 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
Setting
A154 Deceleration Stop Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A156 PID Sleep Operation Level 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A161 VR Start Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
A162 VR End Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
b007 Frequency Pull-in Lower Limit 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
Frequency
b015 Free-electronic Thermal Fre- 0 to 400 (580)*1 0 to 590
quency 1
b017 Free-electronic Thermal Fre-
quency 2
b019 Free-electronic Thermal Fre-
quency 3
b031 Soft Lock Selection 00 to 03 or 10 00 to 03
b037 Display Selection 00 to 05 00 to 03 or 05
b051 Starting Voltage on Power Inter- 0 to 1000 200-V class: 0.0 to 400.0
ruption 400-V class: 0.0 to 800.0
b052 Deceleration Hold Level on 0 to 1000 200-V class: 0.0 to 400.0
Power Interruption 400-V class: 0.0 to 800.0
b082 Starting Frequency 0.01 to 9.99 (100.00)*1 0.01 to 10.00 (100.00)*1
b096 Regenerative Braking ON Level 200-V class: 330 to 380 200-V class: 330 to 400
400-V class: 660 to 760 400-V class: 660 to 800
b100 Free V/f Frequency 1 0 to 580 0 to 590
b102 Free V/f Frequency 2
b125 Brake Release Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 0.00 to 590.00
b127 Brake Force Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 0.00 to 590.00
b131 Overvoltage Suppression Level 200-V class: 330 to 395 200-V class: 330 to 400
During Deceleration 400-V class: 660 to 790 400-V class: 660 to 800
C003 Multi-function Input 3 Selec- tion 00 to 09, 11 to 16, 18 to 24, 27 00 to 09, 11 to 16, 18, 20 to 24,
to 29, 31 to 42, 44, 46, 47, 50 27 to 29, 31 to 42, 44, 46, 47,
to 53, 56 to 62, 65 to 70, 73, 50 to 53, 56 to 62, 65 to 70,
77, 81 to 86, 91 73, 81 to 86, 91
255: no 255: no

1 Overview

Function name
C004 Multi-function Input 4 Selec- tion 00 to 09, 11 to 16, 18 to 24, 27 00 to 09, 11 to 16, 18, 20 to 24,
to 29, 31 to 42, 44, 46, 47, 50 27 to 29, 31 to 42, 44, 46, 47,
to 53, 56 to 62, 65 to 70, 73, 50 to 53, 56 to 62, 65 to 70,
78, 81 to 86, 91 73, 81 to 86, 91
255: no 255: no
C042 Arrival Frequency During Accel- 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00) *1 0.00 to 590.00
eration 1
C043 Arrival Frequency During Decel- 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
eration 1
C045 Arrival Frequency During Accel- 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
eration 2
C046 Arrival Frequency During Decel- 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
eration 2
P071 Origin Search Mode 2 Fre- 0.00 to 400.00 (580.00)*1 0.00 to 590.00
quency
Data can be changed during RUN
From Soft Lock Selection (b031) of the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter, 10 (Data can be changed during
RUN) selection is deleted, and Data can be changed during RUN is always enabled.
To prevent unintended changes to parameters, use the Soft Lock Selection (b031). (Refer to 7-6-1 Soft
Lock Function (SFT) on page 7-54). To prevent unintended changes, use the password function (refer
to 7-6-9 Password Function on page 7-57).
However, it is not possible to write-protect only a portion of the parameters.
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter allows you to change the following parameters during RUN, although
the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter does not allow it. For parameters for which you can change data during
RUN, refer to the lists in Section 4 Parameter List.
Parameter No. Function name

F004 RUN Direction Selection
A081/A282 AVR Selection
A095/A295 2-step Acceleration Frequency
A096/A296 2-step Deceleration Frequency
b051 Starting Voltage on Power Interruption
b052 Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption
b053 Deceleration Time on Power Interruption
b054 Deceleration Starting Width on Power Interruption
b093 Total Fan Operation Time Clear
C096 Communication Selection
H117 PM Motor Starting Current
H118 PM Motor Starting Time
P039 Speed Limit Value in Torque Control (Forward)
P040 Speed Limit Value in Torque Control (Reverse)
P081 Position Store Selection at Power Off
P082 Position Data at Power Off
P083 Preset Position Data
P200 Modbus Mapping Function Selection
P201 to P210 Modbus Mapping
External Register 1 to 10

1 Overview

External Register Type 1 to 10
Model
Scaling 1 to 10
Internal Register 1 to 10
P400 Modbus Mapping
1
Endian Selection
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter allows you to overwrite the following parameters at any time during
RUN, although the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter does not allow it unless you select “Data can be
changed during RUN.” If necessary, configure change prohibition settings by using soft lock and pass-
word protection functions. Refer to 7-6-1 Soft Lock Function (SFT) on page 7-54 and 7-6-9 Password
Function on page 7-57.

A011 O Start Frequency
A012 O End Frequency
A013 O Start Ratio
A014 O End Ratio
A015 O Start Selection
A016 Analog Input Filter
A039 Jogging Stop Selection
A051 DC Injection Braking Selection
A052 DC Injection Braking Frequency
A053 DC Injection Braking Delay Time
A054 DC Injection Braking Power
A055 DC Injection Braking Time
A056 DC Injection Braking Edge/Level Selection
A057 Startup DC Injection Braking Power
A058 Startup DC Injection Braking Time
A059 DC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency
A061 1st Frequency Upper Limit
A261 2nd Frequency Upper Limit
A062 1st Frequency Lower Limit
A262 2nd Frequency Lower Limit
A064 Jump Frequency Width 1
A069 Acceleration Stop Frequency
A070 Acceleration Stop Time
A071 PID Selection
A075 PID Scale
A076 PID Feedback Selection
A077 PID Deviation Reverse Output
A078 PID Variable Range Limit
A079 PID Feedforward Selection
A083 AVR Filter Time Constant
A084 AVR Gain at Deceleration
A101 OI Start Frequency

1 Overview

A102 OI End Frequency
A103 OI Start Ratio
A104 OI End Ratio
A105 OI Start Selection
A131 Acceleration Curve Parameter
A132 Deceleration Curve Parameter
A141 Calculation Frequency Selection 1
A142 Calculation Frequency Selection 2
A143 Calculation Function Operator Selection
A145 Frequency Addition Amount Setting
A146 Frequency Addition Sign Selection
A154 Deceleration Stop Frequency
A155 Deceleration Stop Time
A156 PID Sleep Operation Level
A157 PID Sleep Operation Delay Time
A161 VR Start Frequency
A162 VR End Frequency
A163 VR Start Ratio
A164 VR End Ratio
A165 VR Start Selection
b001 Power Interruption/Undervoltage Restart Selec-
tion
b002 Allowable Power Interruption Time
b003 Restart Standby Time
b004 Power Interruption/Undervoltage Trip Selection
During Stop
b005 Power Interruption Restart Count
b007 Frequency Pull-in Lower Limit Frequency
b008 Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart Selection
b010 Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart Count
b011 Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart Standby Time
b012 1st Electronic Thermal Level
b212 2nd Electronic Thermal Level
b013 1st Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection
b213 2nd Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection
b015 Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 1
b016 Free-electronic Thermal Current 1
b021 1st Overload Limit Selection
b221 2nd Overload Limit Selection
b022 1st Overload Limit Level
b222 2nd Overload Limit Level
b023 1st Overload Limit Parameter
b223 2nd Overload Limit Parameter
b024 1st Overload Limit Selection 2
b025 1st Overload Limit Level 2
b026 1st Overload Limit Parameter 2
b027 Overcurrent Suppression Selection
b028 Frequency Pull-in Restart Level
b029 Frequency Pull-in Restart Parameter

1 Overview

b030 Starting Frequency Selection at Frequency Pull-in
Restart
b031 Soft Lock Selection
b034 RUN Time/Power ON Time Detection Level
Model
b036 Reduced Voltage Startup Selection
b037 Display Selection
b038 Initial Screen Selection
b039 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function 1
b040 Torque Limit Selection
b041 Torque Limit 1 (Four-quadrant Mode Forward
Power Running)
b042 Torque Limit 2 (Four-quadrant Mode Reverse
Regeneration)
b043 Torque Limit 3 (Four-quadrant Mode Reverse
Power Running)
b044 Torque Limit 4 (Four-quadrant Mode Forward
Regeneration)
b045 Torque LADSTOP Selection
b046 Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection
b070 Analog Operation Level at O Disconnection
b071 Analog Operation Level at OI Disconnection
b082 Starting Frequency
b083 Carrier frequency
b087 STOP Key Selection
b088 Free-run Stop Selection
b090 Usage Rate of Regenerative Braking
b091 Stop Selection
b092 Cooling Fan Operation
b095 Regenerative Braking Selection
b096 Regenerative Braking ON Level
b097 Braking Resistor Value
b120 Brake Control Function Selection
b121 Brake Release Wait Time
b122 Acceleration Wait Time on Brake Control
b123 Stop Wait Time on Brake Control
b124 Brake Error Detection Time
b125 Brake Release Frequency
b126 Brake Release Current
b127 Brake Force Frequency
b130 Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection
During Deceleration
b131 Overvoltage Suppression Level During Decelera-
tion
b132 Overvoltage Suppression Parameter During
Deceleration
b145 GS Input Operation Selection
b910 Motor Electronic Thermal Selection
b911 Motor Electronic Thermal Subtraction Ratio
b912 Motor Electronic Thermal Subtraction Time Con-
stant
b913 Motor Electronic Thermal Integration Gain
C001 Multi-function Input 1 Selection

1 Overview

C011 Multi-function Input 1 Operation Selection
C021 Multi-function Output 11 Selection
C022 Multi-function Output 12 Selection
C026 Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function
Selection
C027 EO Selection
C028 AM Selection
C031 Multi-function Output 11 Operation Selection
C032 Multi-function Output 12 Operation Selection
C036 Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Operation
Selection
C038 Low Current Signal Output Selection
C040 Overload Warning Signal Output Selection
C042 Arrival Frequency During Acceleration 1
C043 Arrival Frequency During Deceleration 1
C044 PID Deviation Excessive Level
C045 Arrival Frequency During Acceleration 2
C046 Arrival Frequency During Deceleration 2
C052 Feedback Comparison Signal Off Level
C053 Feedback Comparison Signal On Level
C054 Overtorque/Undertorque Selection
C055 Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Forward Power
Running)
C056 Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Reverse Regen-
eration)
C057 Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Reverse Power
Running)
C058 Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Forward Regen-
eration)
C059 Overtorque/Undertorque Signal Operation
C061 Electronic Thermal Warning Level
C063 0 Hz Detection Level
C064 Cooling Fin Overheat Warning Level
C071 Communication Speed Selection (Baud Rate
Selection)
C072 Communication Station No. Selection
C074 Communication Parity Selection
C075 Communication Stop Bit Selection
C076 Operation Selection on Communication Error
C077 Communication Error Timeout Time
C078 Communication Wait Time
C101 UP/DWN Storage Selection
C103 Reset Restart Selection
C104 UP/DWN Clear Selection

1 Overview

C130 Multi-function Output 11 ON Delay Time
C131 Multi-function Output 11 OFF Delay Time
Model
C140 Multi-function Relay Output ON Delay Time
C141 Multi-function Relay Output OFF Delay Time
C142 Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 1
C143 Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 2 1
C144 Logic Output Signal 1 Operator Selection

C160 Multi-function Input 1 Response Time
C169 Multi-step Speed/Position Determination Time
P001 Operation Selection on Option Error
P015 Creep Speed Setting
P026 Overspeed Error Detection Level
P027 Speed Deviation Excessive Level
P055 Pulse Train Frequency Scale
P056 Pulse Train Frequency Filter Time Parameter
P057 Pulse Train Frequency Bias Amount
P058 Pulse Train Frequency Upper Limit
P059 Pulse Train Frequency Lower Limit
For parameters for which you can change data during RUN, refer to the Changes during RUN column
of the tables in Section 4 Parameter List.
Deletion of Basic Display of the Display Selection
The 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter limits the parameters displayed on the Digital Operator to prevent
changes to parameters that are not displayed when the Display Selection (b037) is set to 04 (Basic
display).
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series does not provide such a basic display capability.
Refer to 5-1-1 Display Selection on page 5-3 for information on the display selection.

1 Overview
Parameters That are Not Initialization Target

Regarding the parameter initialization (data initialization by setting Initialization Selection (b084) to 02
to 04), the parameters not to be initialized have been changed. In the table below, “Yes” indicates those
not to be initialized, and “-” indicates those to be initialized.
Parameter
Function name 3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
No.
d016 Total RUN Time Monitor Yes Yes
d017 Total Power ON Time Yes Yes
Monitor
b085 Initialization Data Selection Yes Yes
b094 Initialization Target Setting Yes −
C081 O Adjustment Yes −
C082 OI Adjustment Yes −
C085 Thermistor Adjustment Yes −
P082 Position Data at Power Off Yes −
In the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, the following parameters, which are not to be initialized in
the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter, will also be initialized.
• Initialization Target Setting (b094)

The default data will be 00 (All data (Complete initialization)).
Whenever initializing parameters, set and execute Initialization Target Setting (b094).
Refer to 5-1-2 Parameter Initialization on page 5-5 for information on the parameter initialization.
• O Adjustment (C081), OI Adjustment (C082), Thermistor Adjustment (C085)

The default data will be 100.0%, and the adjusted results will be initialized. Adjust them as necessary.
Refer to 7-3-4 Analog Input Adjustment on page 7-25 for information on the O adjustment and the OI
adjustment.
• Position Data at Power Off (P082)

The default data will be 0. Perform homing etc. to readjust the position.
Refer to 6-7-4 Origin Search Function, Current Position Preset, Position Data Storage at Power Shut-
off on page 6-40 for information on the position data at power off.
Although Heavy load/Light Load Selection (b049) is not to be initialized by parameter initialization
(Initialization Selection (b084)), by setting Inverter Mode Selection (b171) to 01 to 03, it will be initialized
as with the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter.
Free V/f
If the Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) is set to less than 30 Hz, the output may become unstable. For this
reason, the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter does not start operating even when it receives the RUN com-
mand. The RUN indicator flashes.
Refer to 5-2-1 Control Method (V/f Characteristics) on page 5-8 for free V/f.

1 Overview

Change of Maximum Frequency
The maximum frequency is changed from 400 Hz (580 Hz in high-frequency mode) to 590 Hz. For the
maximum frequency, refer to 5-3-3 Base Frequency and Maximum Frequency of Motor on page 5-20.
Model
If you must use the motor at higher than 400 Hz, use the high-frequency mode. 1
Changes in Reset Specifications

A trip caused by emergency shutoff (E37) can now be reset by the STOP/RESET key.
When STOP Key Selection (b087) is set to 00 (Enabled) or 02 (Only RESET enabled), reset can be
done according to Reset Selection (C102). After the reset, it operates according to the C103 setting.
The specifications of trip reset with RS (Reset) terminal remain unchanged from the 3G3MX2-E Series
Inverter.
Refer to 5-8-1 Reset on page 5-42 for information on the reset function.
Operation When Switching from Normal Operation to Jogging

Operation
When Jogging Stop Selection (A039) is set to 03 (Free-running on jogging stop/Enabled during
operation), 04 (Deceleration stop on jogging stop/Enabled during operation), or 05 (DC injection
braking on jogging stop/Enabled during operation), turning ON the jogging (JG) input during operation
will start jogging operation. The output frequency in switching to jogging operation is changed.
As for the details, refer to 5-9-6 Jogging (JG) on page 5-51 in Enabled during operation on page 5-52.

1 Overview
Speed Detection Method during Single-Phase Pulse Input

Pulse string input can be used for the feedback input, which is used in v/f control with speed feedback
and simple position control. The speed detection method during single-phase pulse input is changed as
follows. Refer to 6-5-1 Settings of V/f Control with Speed Feedback on page 6-18 and 6-7-1 Feedback
Settings for Simple Position Control on page 6-28.

1 Overview
Maximum Input Frequency for Pulse Input Terminal

The maximum input frequency for the multifunction input terminal 7 when EB (Rotation direction
detection) is assigned is changed from 1.8 kHz to 32 kHz.
Refer to 6-5-2 Recommended Encoder and Its Wiring on page 6-19 for the specifications of encoder
inputs.
Restarting Positioning
The operation of restarting positioning is changed as follows. Refer to 6-7-5 Restarting Positioning on
page 6-45 for restarting positioning.

1 Overview

Changes in DC Injection Braking Power during Magnetic Pole
Positioning and Starting Current of PM Motors
When PM Motor Starting Method Selection (H123) is set to 01 (Initial pole position estimation enabled),
Model
the DC injection braking power and the starting current are changed as shown in the following figure.
For magnetic pole positioning of PM motors, refer to PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation in 6-8-6
Adjustment of PM Motor Mode Settings on page 6-64.
1
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
During Startup DC Injection Braking Time (A058), If the PM Motor Starting Current (H117) and DC

Startup DC Injection Braking Power (A057) is output; Injection Braking Power (A057) values are different, the
after that, during PM Motor Starting Time (H118), PM larger value will be output.
Motor Starting Current (H117) is output.
Braking Braking
power power
Practically H117=A057
H117 H117
Initial pole PM
A057 Normal A057 DC injection magnetic Normal
position operation
DC injection estimation braking pole operation
braking positioning
A058 H118 A058 H118 Time
Time
PID Variable Range Limit Function
The PID variable range limit is now effective even with the PID reverse output enabled setting. Refer to
7-5-12 PID Function on page 7-44 for the PID variable range.
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
When the PID Selection (A071) is set to 02 Even when the PID Selection (A071) is set
(Enabled (Reverse output enabled)), the to 02 (Enabled (Reverse output enabled)),
PID variable range limit function is disabled. the PID variable range limit function is
enabled.
How to Operate Parameters and Set Data

For the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, the Increment and Decrement keys are replaced with a Jog dial.
Operation 3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2

Increasing the Press the Increment key. Press and hold the Rotate the Jog dial clockwise. Operate it
parameter number key to accelerate the change. continuously to carry the digit.*1
or the set data
value
Decreasing the Press the Decrement key. Press and hold Rotate the Jog dial counterclockwise. Oper-
parameter number the key to accelerate the change. ate it continuously to carry the digit.*1
or the set data
value
*1. Refer to 7-6-12 Jog Dial Sensitivity on page 7-61 for how to adjust the carry sensitivity.

1 Overview
Frequency Matching Restart

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter does not have a frequency matching restart function.
The operation when the following parameters are set for frequency pull-in restart is different from the
3G3MX2-E Series Inverter. It operates with frequency pull-in restart. For frequency pull-in restart, refer
to 7-7-1 Frequency Pull-in Restart on page 7-62.
• When Power Interruption/Undervoltage Restart Selection (b001) is set to 02
• When Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart Selection (b008) is set to 02
• When Free-run Stop Selection (b088) is set to 01
• When Reset Restart Selection (C103) is set to 01
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
It operates with frequency matching restart. It operates with frequency pull-in restart at shutoff.
The operation of frequency matching restart is as The operation of frequency matching restart is as
follows. follows.
At the time of restart, it recognizes a frequency from the At the time of restart, the frequency at shutoff is output
motor terminal voltage in a free-run stop state and to the motor. Once the output frequency and the output
restarts according to that frequency. voltage are balanced, the inverter performs normal
operation.
Example: Example of power interruption/undervoltage
restart Example: Example of power interruption/undervoltage
At power-ON, it recognizes a frequency from the motor restart
terminal voltage in a free-run stop state and restarts At power-ON, it executes pull-in restart at the output
according to that frequency. frequency at shutoff.

1 Overview

OFF/ON Operation of Cooling Fan
The operation when the Cooling Fan Operation (b092) is set to 01 (Enabled only during operation) or
02 (Dependent on cooling fin temperature) is changed as follows.
Model
Refer to 7-8-13 Cooling Fan Operation on page 7-86 for cooling fan operation.
b092 3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2

00: Disabled Constant operation Constant operation
1
01: Enabled only during It operates under the following conditions. It operates under the following conditions.
operation • During operation (Stops 5 minutes after • During operation (Stops if fin tempera-

operation stop) ture falls below 50°C for 3 minutes after
• For 5 minutes after power-on operation stop)
• Even while stopped, if fin temperature
exceeds 60°C (Stops if fin temperature
falls below 50°C for 3 minutes)
02: Dependent on It operates under the following conditions. It operates under the following conditions.
cooling fin temperature • Cooling fin temperature of approxi- Cooling fin temperature of approximately
mately 45°C or higher (Stops when it 40°C or higher (Stops if fin temperature
falls below 45°C) falls below 40°C for 3 minutes)
Changes in Output Targets for Fatal Fault Signal (MJA) of

Multi-function Output
Regarding the fatal fault signal (MJA) of multi-function output, the errors that can be output are changed
as follows. The fatal fault signal (MJA) turns ON when an alarm indicated with “Yes” in the table below
occurs.
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter does not output the MJA when a Current detector error (E10), CPU
communications error (E22), or Main circuit error (E25) occurs. Refer to 7-8-19 Fatal Fault Signal (MJA)
on page 7-89 for information on the fatal fault signal (MJA) of multi-function output.
Alarm
Description 3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
code
E08. EEPROM error Yes Yes
E10. Current detector error Yes −
E11. CPU error Yes Yes
E14. Ground protection Yes Yes
E22. CPU communications error Yes −
E25. Main circuit error Yes −
E30. Driver error − Yes

1 Overview
Overload Limit
The models are different in operation when the Overload Limit Selection parameter (b021/b221/b024)
is set to 03 (Enabled during acceleration and constant speed (Accelerated during regeneration)). Refer
to 7-8-4 Overload Limit/Overload Warning on page 7-78 for information on the overload limit.
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2
If the output current value exceeds the overload limit During deceleration, the overload limit is disabled.
level during deceleration, it will be determined as
regeneration, making the inverter accelerate.
Output current Output current
Overload Overload
Limit Level Limit Level
b022/b222, b025 b022/b222, b025
Accelerates according to
Overload Limit
Output Parameter (b023/b026, Output
frequency b223) settings frequency
Carrier Frequency
The function name for the carrier frequency used during DC injection braking is integrated from DC
Injection Braking Carrier Frequency (A059) for the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter to Carrier Frequency
(b083) for the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter. Refer to 7-4-1 Carrier Frequency on page 7-31 for the
Carrier Frequency.

1 Overview

Relationship between DC Injection Braking Power and Carrier
Frequency
The limitation on the braking power and carrier frequency for DC injection braking is changed as
Model
follows. Refer to 7-9-1 DC Injection Braking (DB) on page 7-93 for information on the DC injection
braking.
3G3MX2-E 3G3MX2-EV2 1
The DC injection braking power is limited according to The carrier frequency is automatically reduced
the carrier frequency setting. according to the braking power.

100
15
90
80 (75) 12
Limit value 70 11
for DC 60 Carrier
injection
50 (46) frequency 9
braking (kHz) 7
power 40 (34)
(%) 30 5 (5)
(22) 3
20 (2)
(10) 2
10
0 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
DC injection braking carrier frequency (kHz) Braking power (%)
1 (10)
1
1 (22)
1
1 (34)
Limit value 1
for carrier 1 (46)

frequency (75)
(kHz)
(100)
: Relationship between DC injection braking power and
limit value for carrier frequency (3G3MX2-EV2 Series)
: Relationship between DC injection braking power and
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 limit value for carrier frequency (3G3MX2-E Series)
: Cannot be set for 3G3MX2-EV2 Series
DC injection braking power (%) (Carrier frequency is automatically reduced)

1 Overview
Addition of Dedicated Safety Terminals and Deletion of Safety

Function Selector Switch
The 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter had a safety function selector switch and used the multi-function input
terminals 3 and 4 for the safety inputs GS1 and GS2.
For the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, terminals GS1 and GS2 are added as safety terminals.
Moreover, dedicated safety power supply terminals P24S and CMS are added, and the safety function
selector switch is eliminated. Refer to 2-3-3 Arrangement and Function of Control Circuit Terminal
Block on page 2-14 for terminals and wiring.
To use the safety function (STO function), remove the short-circuit wires, and wire the safety outputs to
the terminals GS1 and GS2. To disable this function, short-circuit the terminals GS1 and GS2 to the ter-
minal P24S (in the default state, short-circuit wires are attached). For power supply, use the P24S and
CMS terminals for safety function. Refer to 7-10-3 Wiring and Usage of the Safety Function on page
7-103 for the terminal block layout.
Due to the addition of the dedicated terminals, Multi-function Input 3 Selection (C003) and Multi-func-
tion Input 4 Selection (C004) no longer provide 77 (GS1: Safety input 1) and 78 (GS2: Safety input 2).
As with the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter, the EDM function is a switch that assigns the EDM switch to the
multi-function output 11. The switch assigning the EDM function is not related to multi-function inputs.
Terminating Resistor for Modbus Communication

The resistance value of the built-in terminating resistor is changed from 200  to 120 . For selection of
the terminating resistor, turning ON the same terminating resistor selector switch as in the
3G3MX2-E Series Inverter enables the built-in terminating resistor. Refer to 2-2-2 Terminal Blocks on
page 2-10 for the position of the terminating resistor.
If communications are unstable, install terminating resistors that match the cable’s characteristic
impedance at both ends of the communications cable (refer to 8-2 RS485 Terminal Arrangement and
Connection on page 8-4 for details).
Addition of Errors
The detections of Analog current input error (E26.) and STO internal fault error (E99.) are added.
They are not fatal faults.
For details on each alarm code, refer to Section 10 Troubleshooting.

2
Design
This section describes the installation environment and wiring methods.
2-1 Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-5

2-1-1 Inverter Installation .............................................................................................. 2-5
2-1-2 Installation Environment ...................................................................................... 2-5
2-2 Removal of Each Part ........................................................................................ 2-9
2-2-1 Removing Covers................................................................................................ 2-9
2-2-2 Terminal Blocks ................................................................................................. 2-10
2-2-3 Preparing Backing Plate .................................................................................... 2-11
2-3 Wiring ................................................................................................................ 2-12
2-3-1 Standard Connection Diagram .......................................................................... 2-12
2-3-2 Arrangement and Function of Main Circuit Terminal Block ................................ 2-13
2-3-3 Arrangement and Function of Control Circuit Terminal Block............................. 2-14
2-3-4 Wiring for Main Circuit Terminals....................................................................... 2-17
2-3-5 Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals................................................................... 2-36
2-3-6 Wiring for RS-485 Communications Terminals .................................................. 2-43
2-3-7 Wiring for Digital Operator ................................................................................. 2-45
2-3-8 Compliance with EU Directives and UKCA ....................................................... 2-45

2 Design


fire.


2 Design
CAUTION
2


2 Design
Installation and Storage

Do not store or use the product in the following places.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications.
• Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
Transportation, Installation, and Wiring
• Do not drop or apply a strong impact on the product.

Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction.
• Do not drop or apply a strong impact on the product.Doing so may result in damaged parts or mal-
function.
• Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage.
• Do not connect input voltages and currents outside the specified range, to the control I/O terminals,
especially the AC power supply is not allowed. Doing so may result in damage to the product.
• Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely. Wiring work must be done after install-
ing the unit body.
• Before turning on power, check that the wiring is correct.
• Do not connect any loads other than three-phase induction motors and PM motors to the outputs (U,
V, W) of this product.
• Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong magnetic fields.
Locations close to power lines.
• When using DriveProgramming, confirm that the program data is downloaded normally before start-
ing operation.
Installation
• Mount the product vertically on a wall with the product’s longer sides upright.
The material of the wall has to be nonflammable such as a metal plate.

2 Design
2-1 Installation
2-1-1 Inverter Installation
2-1 Installation
Mount the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter vertically on a wall with the product’s longer sides upright.
The material of the wall must be noninflammable such as a metal plate.
2-1-1 Inverter Installation

For the mounting dimensions, refer to 1-3-2 External Dimensions on page 1-17.
2-1-2 Installation Environment
Operating Environment Conditions
Install the inverter in a location that meets the following conditions.
Operating ambient temperature Operating ambient humidity

−10 to 50°C 20% to 90% (with no condensation)
• Measure and check the ambient temperature at a point approximately 5 cm away from the center
bottom of the inverter.
• For side-by-side installation, derating of the rated output current of the inverter may be required
even at an ambient temperature of 40°C or lower.
• The inverter life (in particular, capacitor life) will be significantly shortened if the inverter is used at
a higher ambient temperature.
• Do not install the inverter in hot and humid locations subject to condensation.
• Avoid installing the inverter in a dirty environment subject to oil mist, dust, or other airborne parti-
cles. Install the inverter in a clean place, or in a full-enclosure type panel.
• Take measures during installation and operation to prevent foreign objects such as metal parti-
cles, oil, and water from entering the inverter.
• Do not install the inverter in locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Do not install the inverter in locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.

2 Design

Derating of the rated output current of the inverter may be required depending on the nor-
Installation Conditions
Keep the inverter clear of heating elements such as a braking resistor or reactor.
If the inverter is installed in a control panel, take into consideration dimensions and ventilation to keep
the ambient temperature within the range of the specifications.
To allow heat dispersion from inside the inverter (approximately 150°C or lower), provide the clearance
specified in the figure below during installation.
⚫ Standard installation
100
mm Provide a sufficient
min. clearance from upper
Flow of air and lower wiring
ducts, etc. to prevent
the flow of cooling air
Inverter from being blocked.
Wall
100
50 mm mm 50 mm
min. min min.
⚫ Side-by-side installation
100
mm Provide a sufficient
min clearance from upper
Flow of air and lower wiring
ducts, etc. to prevent
the flow of cooling air
Inverter from being blocked.
Wall
100
50 mm mm 50 mm
min. min min.

2 Design
Ambient Temperature Control

To ensure reliable operation, use the inverter in an environment subject to minimal temperature rise as
much as possible.
If you install a ventilation fan in a control panel where several inverters are installed, be careful about
2-1 Installation
the layout of the inverters and the air intake and ventilation apertures.
Remember that poor air circulation around inverters causes an internal temperature rise, which may
inversely affect the internal components of the inverters.
2-1-2 Installation Environment

2
Entry of Foreign Objects during Installation

Place a cover over the inverter or take other preventative measures to prevent foreign objects, such as
drill filings, from entering the inverter during installation.
Be sure to remove the cover after installation is complete. Using the inverter with the cover placed
results in poor ventilation, which causes the inverter to overheat.

2 Design
Amount of Heat Generated from the Inverter

For the amount of heat generated from the Inverter, refer to the power losses of the Inverter provided in
https://industrial.omron.eu/en/company-info/environmental/ecodesign-directive.
1 When you access the above URL, the “Ecodesign Directive” page is displayed.
2 Download the ecodesign data for RX, RX2, and MX2 Series from the above website and
display the files in the MX2-EV2 folder.
3 Open the PDF file for the model for which you want to know the power losses to display
the power loss data as shown below.
(1) shows the power losses

of the Inverter at motor
rated frequency × 90% and
load of 100% (ND rating).
(In the example on the left,
(1) is 0.01 kW.)
This indicates the efficiency class

specified in IEC60034-30 “Efficiency
class of single speed, three-phase,
cage induction motors (IE-code).”
4 In the figure above, the table on the left shows the power loss of the Inverter at each
point indicated by the numbers on the frequency - relative torque-producing current
graph on the right.
5 Determine the amount of heat generated from the operating conditions and power losses
of the Inverter.

2 Design
2-2 Removal of Each Part

2-2-1 Removing Covers
Before wiring each terminal block, you need to remove the terminal block cover and the backing plate.
This section describes how to remove these covers.
To install a communications unit or other option unit, you must remove the front cover beforehand.
For how to install an option unit, refer to the user’s manual for each option unit.
2
Removing Terminal Block Cover
2-2-1 Removing Covers

1 Loosen the terminal block cover fixation screw(s).
2 Remove the terminal block cover in the direction of the arrow.
You can find one terminal block cover fixation screw at the lower right of the cover for inverters
with a capacity of 3.0 kW or lower, or two terminal block cover fixation screws on both sides of
the cover for inverters with a capacity of 3.7 kW or higher.
Also note that the front cover is screwed to the terminal block cover, but not fixed to the inverter
body. Therefore, you can remove the terminal block cover without removing the front cover.
Front cover
Terminal
block cover
Front cover fixation screw M3

Screw tightening torque: 0.2 to 0.3 N·m
Front cover fixation screw M3

Terminal block cover fixation screw Screw tightening torque: 0.2 to 0.3 N·m
(1 for 3.0 kW or lower)
M3: Screw tightening torque 0.2 to 0.3 N·m Terminal block cover fixation screw
(2 for 3.7 kW or higher)
M3 for 3.7 kW, 4.0 kW: Screw tightening torque 0.2 to 0.3 N·m
M4 for 5.5kW or higher: Screw tightening torque 0.7 to 0.8 N·m

2 Design
Installing Terminal Block Cover

To install the terminal block cover, reverse the removal procedure.
Install the terminal block cover on the inverter from the top and press it until you here a click.
2-2-2 Terminal Blocks

Removing the terminal block cover and each connector cover reveals terminal blocks, connectors, and
switches arranged as shown below.
USB Connector (Micro-B)
Operator Connector (RJ45) EDM Function Selector Switch

ON (EDM output)
Terminating Resistor Selector Switch OFF (Terminal 11 output)
(Factory default)
ON
Safety function
OFF STO input terminal block
(Factory default)
Connector for Option Unit Relay Output Terminal Block
Main Circuit Terminal Block

Control Circuit Terminal Block
Charge Indicator
Name Description
Terminating resistor selec- The switch for switching ON/OFF the RS-485 terminal on the control circuit terminal
tor switch block. When ON, the terminal is connected to the built-in 120- terminating resistor.
Safety function STO input Dedicated terminals for safety input.
terminal block
EDM function selector Turn this switch ON to use the EDM output of the safety function. Before you turn
switch ON/OFF this switch, be sure to turn off the power supply. For details, refer to 7-10
Safety Function on page 7-99.
USB connector The Micro-B type USB connector for connecting a computer.
Use this connector to connect the inverter to the Inverter/Servo support tool
CX-Drive.
Connector for Digital The connector for connecting the Digital Operator.
Operator
Connector for Option Unit The connector for connecting an option unit.
Use this connector to connect such as a communications option unit.
Control Circuit Terminal The terminal block for connecting various digital/analog I/O devices used for inverter
Block control.
Relay output terminal The SPDT contact terminal block for relay output.
block
Main circuit terminal block The terminal block for connecting the main power supply for the inverter, outputs to
the motor, Braking Resistor, etc.
Charge Indicator Lights up even after power supply shutoff if the main circuit DC voltage (between the
terminal P/+2 and terminal N/−) is approximately 45 V or higher. Make sure the
charge indicator is not lit before wiring etc.
Note For the description of the data display and operation keys, refer to Section 3 Operation and Test Run.

2 Design
2-2-3 Preparing Backing Plate

Before wiring the Inverter, cut off the connecting points between the backing plate and unnecessary
portions with nippers or a wire cutter.
Inverter with 4.0 kW or Higher Capacity
Unnecessary
2
portion
2-2-3 Preparing Backing Plate

Inverter with 5.5 kW or Higher Capacity
Unnecessary
portion

2 Design
2-3 Wiring
2-3-1 Standard Connection Diagram
*1. Connect to the terminals L1 and N on the single-phase 200-VAC inverter (Model: 3G3MX2-AB-EV2).
*2. For how to connect a communications unit, refer to the user’s manual for each option unit.
*3. For the connection to the braking resistor and regenerative braking unit, refer to 2-3-4 Wiring for Main Circuit Terminals on page 2-17.

2 Design
2-3-2 Arrangement and Function of Main Circuit Terminal Block

The table below shows the arrangement of the main circuit terminal block and description of each terminal.
Main Circuit Terminal Block
2-3 Wiring
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1 P/+ RB The terminal arrangement shown on the left is an example
for the inverters with a capacity of 4.0 kW or lower.
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 N/-
2
Terminal
Terminal name Description
2-3-2 Arrangement and Function of Main Circuit Terminal Block

symbol
R/L1 L1 Main power supply input Connect the DC input power supply.
S/L2 terminal For single-phase 200-V type Inverters (Model: 3G3MX2-AB-EV2),
T/L3 N connect these to the L1 and N terminals, respectively.
U/T1 Inverter output terminal Connect a 3-phase motor.
V/T2
W/T3
+1 DC reactor connection Remove the short-circuit bar between the terminals +1 and P/+ (for
P/+ terminal switching the inverter’s built-in filter function) and connect an optional
DC reactor.
P/+ Braking resistor connec- Connect an optional braking resistor (if a braking torque is required).
RB tion terminal
P/+ Braking unit connection Connect optional braking units (if a braking torque is required and that
N/− terminal produced by the built-in braking circuit is insufficient).
G Ground terminal This is the ground terminal. Connect this terminal to the ground.
200-V class should be connected under type-D grounding conditions;
400-V class should be connected under type-C grounding conditions.
For 200-V class models with a capacity of 3.7 kW or lower and 400-V
class models with a capacity of 4.0 kW or lower, the ground terminal
is located on the cooling fin.

2 Design
2-3-3 Arrangement and Function of Control Circuit Terminal Block

The table below shows the arrangement of the control circuit terminal block, and description and speci-
fications of each terminal.
Control Circuit Terminal Block
GS2 CMS GS1

Short-circuit bar
(for sink logic)
Short-circuit bar
(for disabling
EA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L PLC P24 P24S STO function)
SP SN H O OI L EO AM CM2 12 11 AL2 AL1 AL0
Terminal Terminal
Item Description Specifications
symbol name
Analog Power supply L Input signal Common terminal for the internal
common power supply, digital input, and
analog I/O terminals.
H Frequency This is 10 VDC power supply for Allowable current:
reference the terminal O. 10 mA max.
power
supply
Frequency set- O Frequency This is 0 to 10 VDC analog volt- Input impedance:
ting input reference age input. Approx. 10 k
input (Ana- By default, this is adjusted so Allowable input volt-
log voltage that the frequency reaches the age range:
input) maximum at 9.8 V. (Adjustable in −0.3 to +12 VDC
A012/A014)
OI Frequency This is 4 to 20 mA analog DC Input impedance:
reference input. Approx. 100 
input (Ana- By default, this is adjusted so Allowable input range:
log current that the frequency reaches the 0 to 24 mA
input) maximum at 19.8 mA. (Adjust-
able in A102/A104)
Sensor input 5 External Set the Multi-function Input 5 PTC type
(TH) thermistor Selection (C005) to 19 (TH: PTC
input (Multi- thermistor thermal protection) to
function enable this terminal.
input termi- Connect an external thermistor
nal used in between this terminal and L,
common) and the inverter will trip if a tem-
perature error occurs. (The
inverter trips when the resistance
of the thermistor is approximately
3 k or higher.)
Output AM Multi-func- This terminal can output the Allowable current:
tion analog specified signal as a 0 to 10-VDC 2 mA max.
output voltage signal.
(Voltage)

2 Design
Terminal Terminal
symbol name
Digital Power supply L Input signal Common terminal for the internal
common power supply, digital input, and
analog I/O terminals.
P24 Input signal This is 24-VDC power supply for Allowable current:
power sup- contact input signal. For source 100 mA max.
2-3 Wiring
ply logic input, this terminal functions
as the common terminal.
P24S Safety input 24-VDC power supply for safety Allowable current:
signal power switch contact input signals. It 100 mA max.
supply supports the source logic only.
PLC Input termi- For sink logic input: Short-cir- 2
nal power cuited to P24
supply For source logic input: Short-cir-
2-3-3 Arrangement and Function of Control Circuit Terminal Block

cuited to L
To activate contact input via an
external power supply, remove
the short-circuit bar. For details
on the connection, refer to
Multi-function Input Terminals
and Programmable Controller
Connection on page 2-39.
CMS Safety input Common terminal for the safety
signal com- input terminals.
mon
Input 7 Multi- Select seven functions from Voltage between each
6 function among 66 functions, and allocate input terminal and the
5 input them to terminals 1 to 7. terminal PLC
4 These terminals support both the ON voltage: 18 V min.
3 sink logic and the source logic. OFF voltage: 3 V
2 For details on the connection, max.
1 refer to Multi-function Input Ter- Allowable voltage:
minals and Programmable Con- 27 VDC max.
troller Connection on page 2-39. Load current: 5 mA
(at 24 V)
Internal resistance:
4.7 k
GS1 Safety input STO input terminals. Voltage between each
GS2 input terminal and the
terminal CMS
ON voltage: 15 V min.
OFF voltage: 5 V
max.
Allowable voltage: 27
VDC max.
Load current: 5.8 mA
(at 27 V)
Internal resistance:
4.7 k

2 Design
Terminal Terminal
symbol name
Digital Input EA Pulse input - This is pulse input for frequency Input pulse: 32 kHz
A setting. This terminal accepts 5 max.
to 24 VDC input signals. (Note Internal resistance:
that this terminal is connected to 10 k
a different internal circuit from
Voltage between this
the input terminal 7.)
input terminal and the
terminal L:
5 to 24 VDC
ON voltage: 4V min.
OFF voltage: 1V max.
Allowable voltage:
27 VDC max.
7 Pulse input - Set the Multi-function Input 7 Input pulse: 32 kHz
(EB) B Selection (C007) to 85 (EB: max.
Rotation direction detection) to Internal resistance:
enable this terminal. This is pulse 4.7 k
input for frequency setting. (Note ON voltage: 18 V min.
that this terminal is connected to OFF voltage: 3 V
a different internal circuit from max.
the input terminal EA.) Allowable voltage:
27 VDC max.
Load current: 5 mA
(at 24 V)
Output 11 Multi-func- Select two functions from among Open collector output
12 tion output 47 functions, and allocate them Between each termi-
to terminals 11 and 12. These nal and CM2
terminals support both the sink Allowable voltage:
logic and the source logic. For 27 V max.
details on the connection, refer to Allowable current:
Multi-function Output Terminals 50 mA max.
and Programmable Controller Voltage drop at
Connection on page 2-40. power-on: 4 V max.
11 Safety moni- Turn ON the EDM function selec-
(EDM) tor tor switch to enable this terminal.
This automatically sets this termi-
nal to 11 (EDM: Safety monitor
signal).
CM2 Output sig- Common terminal for multi-func- Allowable current:
nal common tion output terminals 11 and 12. 100 mA max.
AL1 Relay out- Select the desired function from Contact capacity
AL2 put terminal among 47 functions, and allocate Between AL1 and AL0:
AL0 Relay out- it to these terminals. 250 VAC, 2 A (Resis-
put common This is SPDT contact output. tance)/0.2 A (Induc-
By default, Multi-function Relay tion)
Output (AL1, AL2) Operation Between AL2 and AL0:
Selection (C036) is set at NC 250 VAC, 1 A (Resis-
contact between AL1 and AL0, tance)/0.2 A (Induc-
and NO contact between AL2 tion)
and AL0. Min. contact capacity
100 VAC, 10 mA
5 VDC, 100 mA

2 Design
Terminal Terminal
symbol name
Digital Output EO Pulse output This terminal outputs pulses. Output pulse: 32 kHz
max.
Output voltage: 10
VDC
Allowable current:
2-3 Wiring
2 mA max.
Serial communications SP Modbus ter- RS-485 terminal Speed: 115.2 kbps
SN minal RS+: RS-485 differential (+) signal max.
(RS-485) RS−: RS-485 differential (−) signal Built-in terminating
resistor: 120 
Switching via slide 2
switch
2-3-4 Wiring for Main Circuit Terminals

The Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026) is, by default, set to 05
(AL: Alarm signal).
The table below shows the relationship between the relay output status when the inverter input
power supply is ON/OFF and the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Operation Selection
(C036) setting. Select the parameter setting appropriate to the sequence of your inverter
according to this table.
Relay output status

Input power
Setting in C036 Inverter status Between Between
supply
AL1 and AL0 AL2 and AL0
00 ON Normal Open Closed
Alarm output Closed Open
OFF — Open Closed
01 (Default data) ON Normal Closed Open
Alarm output Open Closed
OFF — Open Closed

• Before wiring, make sure that the charge indicator is not lit.
• Once the power supply is turned on, the capacitor in the inverter remains charged with a high
voltage for a while after the power supply is shut off regardless of whether the inverter is run-
ning or not, which is dangerous.
• If you change cable connections after the power supply is shut off, wait for at least
10 minutes and, before wiring, check with a circuit tester etc. to be sure that there is no resid-
ual voltage between terminals P/+ and N/−.

2 Design
Main Circuit Configuration Diagram

The diagram below shows the configuration of the inverter main circuit. The function of each peripheral
component is also described.
Name Function
Power supply (a) (b) (c) Refer to Recommended Cable Size, Wiring
Device, and Crimp Terminal on page 2-22.
(a) (d) AC reactor This is used as a harmonic suppression mea-
sure. It also helps improve the power factor. The
MCCB
(b) AC reactor is used when the power supply volt-

age unbalance factor is 3% or more, the inverter
capacity is 500 kVA or more, or rapid change in
the power supply voltage occurs to reduce its
MC
(c)
effect.
(e) Input noise filter This filter reduces the conductive noise gener-
(d) ated in the inverter and transmitted via wires.
Connect it to the primary side (input side) of the
(e) inverter.
(f) Radio noise filter The inverter in operation may cause noise
(f) through the power supply wiring etc., which
could affect radio receivers or other equipment
nearby. This filter reduces such noise (radiated
noise).
R S T
+1 (g) DC reactor This reactor helps suppress harmonics gener-
(g) ated by the inverter.
P/+2
(i) (h) (h) Braking resistor These increase the amount of regenerative
Inverter (i) Regenerative braking unit energy absorption when the inverter applies
(h) motor braking and are used to decrease the the
RB
speed of an elevator or load with a large
moment of inertia.
N/−
All models of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series
U V W Inverter have built-in regenerative braking
processing circuit.
The Regenerative Braking Unit is necessary
(j)
only if a large braking torque is required and the
built-in regenerative braking processing circuit
(f) cannot allow it.
(j) Output noise filter This filter is installed between the inverter and
the motor to reduce the radiated noise emitted
from cables. It is used to reduce radio and tele-
vision interference and prevent meter and sen-
M sor malfunction.

2 Design
Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals

The arrangement of terminals on the inverter main circuit terminal block is shown below.
Applicable model Terminal arrangement

3G3MX2-A2001-EV2
2-3 Wiring
to A2007-EV2
Power supply
input terminals
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1 P/+ RB

º
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 N/- 2
Motor output

terminals
Charge indicator
Ground bars: M4 × 2
3G3MX2-AB001-EV2
to AB004-EV2
Power supply
input terminals
L1 N +1 P/+ RB
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 N/-
Motor output
terminals
Charge indicator
3G3MX2-A2015- Charge indicator
EV2, A2022-EV2
3G3MX2-A4004-EV2
to A4030-EV2
+1 P/+ RB
N/- R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Power supply Motor output

input terminals terminals

2 Design

3G3MX2-AB007- Charge indicator
EV2, AB015-EV2,
AB022-EV2
+1 P/+ RB
N/- L1 N U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

3G3MX2-A2037-EV2 Charge indicator

3G3MX2-A4040-EV2
+1 P/+ RB
N/- R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

3G3MX2-A2055-
EV2, A2075-EV2
3G3MX2-A4055-
EV2, A4075-EV2 Power supply Motor output
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
+1 P/+ N/- RB G G
Charge indicator

2 Design

3G3MX2-A2110-EV2
3G3MX2-A4110-EV2
to A4150-EV2
Power supply
2-3 Wiring
+1 P/+ N/- RB G G

Charge indicator
3G3MX2-A2150-EV2
Power supply
+1 P/+ N/- RB G G
Charge indicator

2 Design
Recommended Cable Size, Wiring Device, and Crimp Terminal

For inverter wiring, crimp terminal, and terminal screw tightening torque, refer to the table below.
• Each table shows an example of connecting the standard 3-phase motor with four poles to an
inverter.
• For the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), select an appropriate product in consideration of the
breaking capacity.
• For compliance with the UL standard requirements, be sure to perform wiring according to A-4
UL/cUL Standards Cautions on page A-9, which includes the use of UL-compliant Class-J fuses.
• Tighten the terminal block screws with the specified torque. Weak tightening may result in a short-cir-
cuiting accident or fire. Conversely, overtightening these screws may cause damage to the terminal
block or the inverter.
⚫ 3-phase 200-V Class
Maximum Molded
Rated Power cable, Tightening case
Normal/ applicable Terminal
input ground cable torque circuit
Model Light load motor screw
current
mode capacity
[A] [mm2] *1*2*3 size [N·m] *2 breaker
[kW] (MCCB)*2
Heavy load 0.1 1.0 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
3G3MX2-A2001-EV2 M3.5 1.0
Light load 0.2 1.2 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
Heavy load 0.2 1.6 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
3G3MX2-A2002-EV2 M3.5 1.0
Light load 0.4 1.9 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
Heavy load 0.4 3.3 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
3G3MX2-A2004-EV2 M3.5 1.0
Light load 0.75 3.9 AWG16 (1.25) 10 A
Heavy load 0.75 6.0 AWG16 (1.25) 10 A
3G3MX2-A2007-EV2 M3.5 1.0
Light load 1.1 7.2 AWG16 (1.25) 10 A
Heavy load 1.5 9.0 AWG14 (2.0) 15 A
3G3MX2-A2015-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 2.2 10.8 AWG14 (2.0) 20 A
Heavy load 2.2 12.7 AWG14 (2.0) 20 A
3G3MX2-A2022-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 3.0 13.9 AWG12 (3.5) 20 A
Heavy load 3.7 20.5 AWG12 (3.5) 30 A
3G3MX2-A2037-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 5.5 23.0 AWG10 (5.5) 50 A
Heavy load 5.5 30.8 AWG8 (8) 50 A
3G3MX2-A2055-EV2 M5 3.0
Light load 7.5 37.0 AWG6 (14) 60 A
Heavy load 7.5 39.6 AWG6 (14) 60 A
3G3MX2-A2075-EV2 M5 3.0
Light load 11 48.0 AWG6 (14) 75 A
Heavy load 11 57.1 AWG4 (22) 100 A
3G3MX2-A2110-EV2 M6 3.9 to 5.1
Light load 15 68.0 AWG4 (22) 100 A
Heavy load 15 62.6 AWG4 (22) 100 A
3G3MX2-A2150-EV2 M8 5.9 to 8.8
Light load 18.5 72.0 AWG2 (38) 100 A
*1. The wire size is based on H-IV wire (with a heat resistance of 75°C).
*2. For compliance with the UL standard requirements, be sure to perform wiring according to A-4 UL/cUL Stan-
dards Cautions on page A-9.
*3. The cable is applicable to wiring to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1, P/+, RB, N/-, and G ( )
terminals.

2 Design
⚫ 3-phase 400-V class
Maximum Molded
current
mode capacity
[kW] (MCCB)*2
Heavy load 0.4 1.8 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
2-3 Wiring
3G3MX2-A4004-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 0.75 2.1 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
Heavy load 0.75 3.6 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
3G3MX2-A4007-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 1.5 4.3 AWG16 (1.25) 10 A
Heavy load 1.5 5.2 AWG16 (1.25) 10 A
3G3MX2-A4015-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 2.2 5.9 AWG16 (1.25) 10 A 2
Heavy load 2.2 6.5 AWG14 (2.0) 10 A
3G3MX2-A4022-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 3.0 8.1 AWG14 (2.0) 15 A

Heavy load 3.0 7.7 AWG14 (2.0) 15 A
3G3MX2-A4030-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 4.0 9.4 AWG14 (2.0) 15 A
Heavy load 4.0 11.0 AWG12 (3.5) 20 A
3G3MX2-A4040-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 5.5 13.3 AWG12 (3.5) 20 A
Heavy load 5.5 16.9 AWG12 (3.5) 30 A
3G3MX2-A4055-EV2 M5 3.0
Light load 7.5 20.0 AWG10 (5.5) 30 A
Heavy load 7.5 18.8 AWG10 (5.5) 30 A
3G3MX2-A4075-EV2 M5 3.0
Light load 11 24.0 AWG10 (5.5) 50 A
Heavy load 11 29.4 AWG10 (5.5) 50 A
3G3MX2-A4110-EV2 M6 3.9 to 5.1
Light load 15 38.0 AWG6 (14) 60 A
Heavy load 15 35.9 AWG6 (14) 60 A
3G3MX2-A4150-EV2 M6 3.9 to 5.1
Light load 18.5 44.0 AWG6 (14) 75 A
*3. The cable is applicable to wiring to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1, P/+, RB, N/-, and G ( ) terminals.
⚫ Single-phase 200-V Class
Maximum Molded
current
mode capacity
[kW] (MCCB)*2
Heavy load 0.1 1.3 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
3G3MX2-AB001-EV2 M3.5 1.0
Light load 0.2 2.0 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
Heavy load 0.2 3.0 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
3G3MX2-AB002-EV2 M3.5 1.0
Light load 0.4 3.6 AWG16 (1.25) 5A
Heavy load 0.4 6.3 AWG16 (1.25) 10 A
3G3MX2-AB004-EV2 M3.5 1.0
Light load 0.55 7.3 AWG16 (1.25) 15 A
Heavy load 0.75 11.5 AWG12 (3.5) 15 A
3G3MX2-AB007-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 1.1 13.8 AWG12 (3.5) 20 A
Heavy load 1.5 16.8 AWG10 (5.5) 20 A
3G3MX2-AB015-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 2.2 20.2 AWG10 (5.5) 30 A
Heavy load 2.2 22.0 AWG10 (5.5) 30 A
3G3MX2-AB022-EV2 M4 1.4
Light load 3.0 24.0 AWG10 (5.5) 50 A
*3. The cable is applicable to wiring to the L1, N, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1, P/+, RB, N/-, and G ( ) terminals.

2 Design
Wiring for Main Power Supply Input Terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
The following describes the wiring for the main power supply input terminals and for peripheral equip-
ment.
⚫ Installing molded case circuit breaker

If the inverter’s protective function is activated, the inverter internal circuit may be damaged depend-
ing on the condition.
Be sure to connect the main power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) to the power supply via
a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) according to each inverter.
• When using multiple inverters, install one MCCB per inverter.
• Determine the capacity of the MCCB according to the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) value
shown in the previous table.
• Determine the time characteristic of the MCCB upon due consideration of the time characteristic
of the inverter’s overheat protection function (150% of the rated output current for 1 minute).
• If you must share one MCCB with multiple inverters or other equipment, construct a sequence
that turns OFF the power supply via the alarm output signal, as shown in the figure below.
Inverter
MCCB MC X
Power
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
3-phase 200 VAC *1
3-phase 400 VAC
X AL2
Alarm signal *2
OFF ON
AL0 (NC contact) *3
X
*1. For 400-V class, connect a 400/200-V transformer.

*2. Set the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 05 (AL: Alarm signal).
*3. Set the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Operation Selection (C036) to 00 (NO: NO contact) to
configure the terminal AL2 as NC contact.

2 Design
⚫ Installing earth leakage breaker

When selecting the earth leakage breaker to use between the power supply and the main power
supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), consider the following.
High-frequency leakage current from inverter

The inverter produces a high-frequency leakage current due to its high-speed output switching.
2-3 Wiring
In general, a leakage current of approximately 100 mA will flow for the power cable length of 1 m per
inverter. Moreover, an additional leakage current of approximately 5 mA will flow with the increasing
length by 1 m.
Therefore, an earth leakage breaker to use in the power input section must be dedicated for the
inverter, which removes high-frequency leakage current and detects only the leakage current in a 2
frequency range that is dangerous to the human body.
• Select a special earth leakage breaker for the inverter with a sensitivity current rating of 10 mA or

higher per inverter.
• If you use a general earth leakage breaker (which detects high-frequency leakage current), select
one with a sensitivity current rating of 200 mA or higher per inverter and an operation time of 0.1 s
or longer.
Leakage current from EMC noise filter

The EMC noise filter is designed to comply with European CE standards.
Specifically, it is designed to meet the neutral-point grounding requirement of the European power
supply specifications. Therefore, using the EMC noise filter with the phase S grounding causes an
increase of leakage current.
• For updated information on EMC noise filters, that support the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter,
check the datasheet or contact Omron representative.
⚫ Installing magnetic contactor

To shut off the main circuit power supply with a sequence, you can use a magnetic contactor (MC)
on the inverter side closer than a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).
• Do not attempt to run/stop the inverter by turning ON/OFF a magnetic contactor.
Instead, use the RUN command signal (FW/RV) via the control circuit terminal block.
• Construct a sequence that turns OFF the power supply via the alarm output signal of the inverter.
• To use one or more braking resistors/regenerative braking units, construct a sequence that turns
OFF a magnetic contactor via a thermal relay contact in each unit.

Do not shut off the power supply more than once in 3 minutes. Doing so may cause an inverter
damage.

2 Design
⚫ Inrush current flow when the inverter power supply is turned ON

When the inverter power supply is turned ON, the charging current, which is called inrush current,
flows in the main circuit board capacitor.
The table below shows the reference values at a power supply voltage of 200 V or 400 V when the
power supply impedance is low. Take this into consideration when selecting the inverter power sup-
ply.
• With a low-speed no-fuse breaker, an inrush current 10 times the rated current can flow for 20 ms.
• To turn ON the power supply for multiple inverters simultaneously, select a no-fuse breaker whose
20-ms allowable current rating is greater than the total inrush current of the inverters.
Single-phase/3-phase 200-V class 3-phase 400-V class

3G3MX2--EV2 Inrush current value (Ao-p) 3G3MX2--EV2 Inrush current value (Ao-p)
A2001 to A2037 22 A4004 to A4040 43
AB001 to AB022 A4055 to A4110 24
A2055 to A2110 34 A4150 49
A2150 67
⚫ Main power supply phase loss and single-phase input

To use a single-phase power supply, use a single-phase 200-V class inverter.
Using a single-phase power supply to supply power to a 3-phase 200-V or 3-phase 400-V class
inverter may cause damage to the inverter.
The inverter may also be damaged if phase loss occurs in the main power supply, because it does
not have any function to detect main power supply phase loss.
Be sure to check that the 3-phase power supply is wired properly before using the inverter.
Even when the inverter is in an input phase lost state, built-in capacitors are charged, which
may result in an electric shock or injury.
Be sure to check the precautions provided in Precautions for Safe Use on page 2-4.
⚫ Power supply environment

In the following cases, the internal converter module (rectifier) may be damaged.
Take countermeasures such as installing an AC reactor on the main circuit input side of the inverter.
• The power supply voltage unbalance factor is 3% or more.
• The power supply capacity is at least 10 times larger than the inverter capacity and, at the same
time, 500 kVA or more.
• Rapid change in the power supply voltage occurs.
Example. When the phase advance capacitor is turned on/off, the inverter may detect an overvolt-
age or the rectifier may be damaged.
⚫ Installing input surge absorber

When using an inductive load (such as a magnetic contactor, magnetic relay, magnetic valve, sole-
noid, or electromagnetic brake), use a surge absorber or diode together.

2 Design
⚫ Installing input noise filter

The inverter performs high-speed output switching, which may cause the noise flow from the
inverter to power supply lines that negatively affects on peripheral equipment.
Therefore, it is recommended to use an input noise filter to reduce noise flowing out to power supply
lines.
2-3 Wiring
This also helps reduce noise that enters the inverter from power supply lines.

2
Wiring for Ground Terminal (G )

To prevent electric shock, be sure to ground the inverter and the motor.
The 200-V class should be connected to the ground terminal under type-D grounding conditions (con-
ventional type 3 grounding conditions: 100  or less ground resistance), The 400-V class should be
connected to the ground terminal under type-C grounding conditions (conventional special type 3
grounding conditions: 10  or less ground resistance).
For the ground cable, use the applicable cable or a cable with a larger diameter. Make the cable length
as short as possible.
When several inverters are connected, the ground cable must not be connected across several invert-
ers or looped. Otherwise, the inverters and peripheral control equipment may malfunction.

2 Design
Harmonic Current Measures and DC/AC Reactor Wiring (+1, P/+)

In recent years, there is an increasing concern about harmonic currents generated from industrial
machinery.
The following provides an overview of harmonics and measures against harmonics implemented in this
inverter.
⚫ Harmonics
The voltage or current whose frequency is an
2nd harmonics (120 Hz)
integral multiple of certain standard frequency Base frequency
(base frequency) is called a harmonic. (60 Hz)
If a commercial power supply frequency of 60 Hz
(50 Hz) is the reference frequency, the harmonics
of that signal is: 3rd harmonics (180 Hz)
x2 = 120 Hz (100 Hz),
x3 = 180 Hz (150 Hz),
and so on.
3rd harmonics (180 Hz)
⚫ Reason why harmonics cause problems
As the number of harmonics increases, the wave-
form of the commercial supply has more distor-
tion. This distortion causes the malfunction of the Distorted waveform
connected equipment or leads to abnormal heat
generation.

2 Design
⚫ Causes of harmonics
• General electrical equipment internally con-
Voltage
verts AC input power (commercial power) into
DC power. At this time, harmonic currents
occur because of the difference in the current Time
flow direction between AC power and DC
power.
2-3 Wiring
• In an AC-to-DC power conversion, the rectifier Conversion with a rectifier
Voltage
converts the input power into a unidirectional
voltage, which is then smoothened by the
capacitor. As a result, the current charged into Time
the capacitor has a waveform that contains
harmonic components. Smoothing with a capacitor 2
Voltage
• This inverter also performs an AC-to-DC con-
version as with other electrical equipment,

which allows current with harmonic compo- Time
nents to flow. In particular, the inverter has Current
more current than other equipment, so the
number of harmonic components in current is
Time
larger.
⚫ DC/AC reactor
To suppress harmonic currents, use the DC (direct current) and AC (alternating current) reactors.
The DC/AC reactor functions to suppress a steep change in the current.
The DC reactor has a higher harmonics suppression ability, so even higher suppression ability can
be expected when used in conjunction with the AC reactor.
Suppressing harmonic currents also leads to the improvement in the power factor on the input or
output side of the inverter.
⚫ Before wiring
The DC reactor is connected to the DC power supply located inside the inverter. Before wiring, be
sure to turn off the power supply and make sure that the charge indicator is not lit.
Do not touch the interior of the inverter during inverter opertaion. Doing so may result in electric
shock or burn injury.
By factory default, a short-circuit bar is connected between the terminals +1 and –P/+. Before con-
necting the DC reactor, remove this short-circuit bar.
Note that the length of the DC reactor connection cable must be 5 m or shorter.
Remove the short-circuit bar only if you connect the DC reactor for use.
If you remove the short-circuit bar with the DC reactor unconnected, the inverter cannot operate
because no power is supplied to its main circuit.

2 Design
⚫ Wiring method
With DC reactor
3-phase 200 VAC

Single-phase 200 VAC*1
3-phase 400 VAC
*1. Connect to the terminals L1 and N on the single-phase 200-VAC inverter.
With DC reactor
and AC reactor
3-phase 200 VAC

Single-phase 200 VAC*1
3-phase 400 VAC
*1. Connect to the terminals L1 and N on the single-phase 200-VAC inverter.
⚫ Effect of reactors
Through the use of the DC/AC reactor, the rate of harmonic current occurrences can be reduced as
shown in the table of typical examples below.
Measure against Harmonic current occurrence rate [%]

harmonics 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
None (Inverter only) 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
With AC reactor 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
With DC reactor 30 13 8.4 5 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
With DC and AC reactors 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
⚫ Guideline for reactor selection

When implementing measures against harmonics, first install a DC reactor and evaluate its effect.
Then, if further reduction is required, add an AC reactor.
To implement harmonic countermeasures in consideration of the power supply environment (such
as rapid change in the power supply voltage), first install an AC reactor and evaluate its effect. Then,
if further reduction is required, add a DC reactor.
If you have multiple inverters and use the AC reactor, use one AC reactor for each inverter. Using
only one AC reactor for more than one inverter does not provide sufficient reduction.

2 Design
Wiring for Inverter Output Terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)

The following describes the wiring for the inverter output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
⚫ Never connect power supply to output terminals

Never connect the power supply to the output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3.
2-3 Wiring
The inverter is damaged internally if power supply voltage is applied to the output terminals.
⚫ Never short or ground output terminals

Do not touch the output terminals with bare hand or contact the output wires with the inverter’s case.
2
Doing so may result in electric shock or ground fault.
Be careful not to short the output wires.

⚫ Do not use phase advance capacitors and noise filters for general-purpose
power supplies or for the input side
Never connect a phase advance capacitor or LC/RC noise filter for general-purpose power supplies
to the output circuit.
Doing so may result in damage to the inverter or burnout of these parts.
⚫ Do not use magnetic switches

Do not connect any magnetic switch or magnet contactor to the output circuit.
If a load is connected to the inverter when running, the inverter’s overcurrent protection circuit is
activated due to the inrush current.
⚫ Precautions for connecting more than one motor to inverter’s output termi-
nals
If connecting more than one motors to the output terminals of the inverter, note the following three
points.
• Make sure that the rated current of the inverter is higher than the sum of the rated current values
of the connected motors.
• The inverter cannot provide overload protection for individual motors, because it only detects a
sum of the current values for all the connected motors.
Install a thermal relay for each motor. The RC value of each thermal relay must be 1.1 times larger
than the rated current of the motor.
• Set the inverter to detect only overloading that occurred in it by setting the Electronic Thermal
Level to the rated output current of the inverter.

2 Design
⚫ Measures against inductive noise

In addition to the noise filter described above, you can suppress the inductive noise produced on the
output side by connecting a bundle of wires through a grounded metal conduit.
Moreover, moving the conduit 30 cm or more away from signal lines helps the reduction of inductive
noise.

2 Design
⚫ Measures against radio noise

Besides the I/O wires, radio noise is radiated from the inverter itself.
This radio noise can be reduced by installing noise filters on both the input and output sides of the
inverter and by installing and shielding the inverter body in a grounded iron enclosure etc.
Keep the cables between the inverter and the motor as short as possible.
2-3 Wiring
2

⚫ Cable length between inverter and motor
If the length of the cables between the inverter and the motor is long, consider how to address the
following problems.
• Voltage drop in output cables
As the cable length between the inverter and the motor increases, the resistance in the cables
becomes higher and accordingly the amount of voltage drop in the inverter output voltage
becomes larger. This causes a decrease in the voltage that is applied to the motor, which results
in a low output torque.
If the cables are long, take measures to reduce the resistance, for example, by selecting cables
whose wire diameter is larger than specified.
• Surge in long cables
If the cable length exceeds 20 m, a surge voltage (approximately 1200 V max. for 400-V class)
may be generated at the motor terminal depending on the stray capacitance or inductance of the
cable, which may result in motor burnout. dV/dt output filter is required in that case.
In particular, when using a 400-V class inverter with a cable length of over 20 m, it is recom-
mended to use a dedicated inverter motor. Dedicated inverter motors are designed to support the
above surge voltage level.
• Leakage current from output cables
As the cable length between the inverter and the motor increases, stray capacitance increases
between the inverter output and the ground. The increase in the stray capacitance on the output
side of the inverter causes an increase of the high-frequency leakage current.
This high-frequency leakage current may negatively affect on the current detector in the inverter
output section or peripheral equipment.
It is recommended to keep the wiring distance between the inverter and the motor at 100 m or
shorter. If your system configuration requires the wiring distance of over 100 m, take measures to
decrease the stray capacitance. The applicable measures are such as not wiring in a metal duct
and using a separate cable for each phase.
In addition, set a carrier frequency appropriate for the wiring distance between the inverter and
the motor according to the table below.
Wiring distance between inverter

50 m max. 100 m max. Over 100 m
and motor
Carrier frequency 10 kHz max. 5 kHz max. 2.5 kHz

2 Design
External Braking Resistor Connection Terminal (P/+, RB)/

Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal (P/+, N/–)
When driving a load with a large inertia or a vertical axis, regenerated energy is fed back to the inverter
when it is decelerating or generating downward movement.
If the amount of regenerative energy exceeds the amount allowable for the inverter, an overvoltage is
detected. Use braking resistors or regenerative braking units to prevent this.
⚫ Using built-in regenerative braking circuit

All models of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter have built-in regenerative braking circuit.
To improve the braking capacity, connect the optional external braking resistor to these terminals (P/+,
RB).

• Be sure to install a circuit that detects overheating of the braking resistor via alarm contacts
(thermal relay output terminals) and shuts off the input power supply of the inverter.
• Do not connect a resistor whose resistance is lower than the minimum connection resistance
value specified in the standard specifications table. Doing so may result in damage to the
regenerative braking circuit.
• When using the Braking Resistor make sure that both average and peak power of both
inverter and resistor are respected, as well as isolation capability and rating of the resistor
should match the inverter voltage class
• Wiring diagram
Braking resistor
+1 P/+ N/− RB
⚫ Using regenerative braking unit (Optional)

If a large braking torque is required and the built-in regenerative braking circuit cannot allow it, use
the Regenerative Braking Unit (optional).
In this case, connect the terminals (P/+2, N/−) of the regenerative braking unit to the inverter’s termi-
nals (P, N).
• Be sure to install a circuit that detects overheating of the regenerative braking unit(s) and
braking resistor(s) via alarm contacts (thermal relay output terminals) and shuts off the input
power supply of the inverter.
• Do not connect a resistor whose resistance is lower than the connection resistance value
specified in the specifications table for that regenerative braking unit. Doing so may result in
damage to the regenerative braking unit.
• When using the Braking Resistor with a 400-V class Regenerative Braking Unit, be sure to
connect two braking resistors of the same model in series. Using the Regenerative Braking
Unit with only one braking resistor connected may cause burnout of the braking resistor.

2 Design
• When using the external Regenerative Braking Unit, remove the built-in resistor. Using the
Regenerative Braking Unit with the built-in resistor connected may cause damage to the
built-in resistor.
• Wiring diagram for connecting one Braking Unit.
2-3 Wiring
*1
MC1 MC2
RY
OFF RY
MC1
ON
2
MC2

Fuse
Inverter
MCCB MC1 MC2 *2
R R/L1 U/T1
S S/L2 V/T2 Motor
T T/L3 W/T3
P/+ P AL1 AL2 RB

3-phase 200 V P Braking Unit
N/− N
Master 1(AL1) RB
2(AL2) P
Regenerative br
*1. For RY, select the contact rating according to the ratings of the coils MC1 and MC2.
*2. MC1 and MC2 are used to provide redundancy.

• Each braking resistor has alarm contact (thermal relay output) terminals. Be sure to perform
wiring for these terminals so that alarm in the system is generated when overtemperature is
detected.

2 Design
2-3-5 Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals
Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals

• Although two terminals L are internally connected, the terminal CM2 is a common terminal for input
and analog signals and mutually isolated from them.
Do not short-circuit or ground these common terminals.
In addition, do not ground these common terminals via external equipment.
When finished wiring, check the external equipment ground conditions.
• For wiring to the control circuit terminals, use twisted-pair shielded cables (recommended diameter:
0.75 mm2). Connect the sheathed shielded cable to each common terminal. The cable length should
be 20 m or shorter.
• Twist a cable connected to the terminal TH (thermistor input) with a cable of the terminal L individu-
ally, and separate them from other L common cables. Since the current flowing through the therm-
istor is weak, separate the thermistor cable from main circuit cable (power cable). The thermistor
connection cable should be 20 m or shorter.
• To use a relay for a multi-function output terminal, connect a surge-absorbing diode in parallel with
the coil.
• The control circuit terminal block has two rows of terminals. Start wiring from the lower terminals. Wir-
ing from the upper terminals makes it difficult to wire the lower terminals.

• Wiring the I/O signal lines for more than one inverter results in creating a sneak path in the
circuit. Connect a diode for sneak current prevention. For wiring instructions, refer to
Precaution for Wiring Control Circuit Terminals on page 2-41.
• The control circuit connection cables should be 20 m or shorter.
• Separate the cables for control circuit terminal connection from the main circuit cable (power
cables) and the relay control circuit cable. If you cannot avoid crossing two types of cables,
keep them at right angles to each other. Not doing so may result in the inverter malfunction.
Separate signal lines from power supply lines when wiring.
• Do not short-circuit the terminals H and L of the analog power supply, and the terminals P24
and L of the power supply for input signal. Doing so may result in failure of the inverter.
• After wiring, lightly pull the wire to confirm that it is connected properly.

2 Design
Arrangement of Control Circuit Terminals

The arrangement of terminals on the control circuit terminal block is shown below.
Input power and common

Safety function
Pulse input and power
2-3 Wiring
Input Input supply
EA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L PLC P24 P24S
SP SN H O OI L EO AM CM2 12 11 AL2 AL1 AL0 2

Communi- Analog input Output Relay output
cations and power

RS-485 supply
Applicable wire
8 mm
Solid wire mm2 Stranded wire mm2 Ferrule mm2
(AWG) (AWG) (AWG)
Control circuit 0.2 to 1.5 0.2 to 1.0 0.25 to 0.75
Sheath strip length
terminal block (AWG24 to 16) (AWG24 to 17) (AWG24 to 18) should be approxi-
Relay output 0.2 to 1.5 0.2 to 1.0 0.25 to 0.75 mately 8 mm for
terminal block (AWG24 to 16) (AWG24 to 17) (AWG24 to 18) solid/stranded wire.
Recommended Terminal
To improve ease of wiring and reliability in connection, it is recommended to use ferrules with the follow-
ing specifications for signal wires.
Wire size
Ferrule type *1 L [mm] d [mm] D [mm]
mm2 (AWG)
0.25 (24) AI 0.25-8YE 12.5 0.8 2.0
0.34 (22) AI 0.34-8TQ 12.5 0.8 2.0
0.5 (20) AI 0.5-8WH 14 1.1 2.5
0.75 (18) AI 0.75-8GY 14 1.3 2.8
*1. Manufacturer : PHOENIX CONTACT

Crimping tool: CRIPMFOX UD 6-4 or CRIMPFOX ZA 3

2 Design
Wiring Method
1 Push in the orange colored portion of the terminal with a flat-blade screwdriver (blade
width: 2.5 mm max.) to open the wire insertion hole.
2 With the flat-blade screwdriver pushed in, insert the wire or ferrule into the wire insertion
(round) hole.
3 Remove the flat-blade screwdriver to clamp the wire.
Note To disconnect, pull out the wire with the shaded ( ) portion pushed in with a flat-blade screwdriver.
Selecting Input Control Logic

By factory default, the multi-function input terminals are set to sink logic (NPN).
To change the input control logic to source logic (PNP), remove the short-circuit bar between the termi-
nals P24 and PLC on the control circuit terminal block, and connect it between the terminals PLC and L.
(a) Sink logic (b) Source logic
2 1 L PLC P24 2 1 L PLC P24
Short-circuit Short-circuit
ºbar bar

2 Design
Multi-function Input Terminals and Programmable Controller Con-

nection
⚫ Sink logic
When external power supply is used
When inverter’s internal power supply for input
2-3 Wiring
(Remove the short-circuit bar from the control
signal is used
circuit terminal block.)
+V P24 +V P24
Short-circuit PLC PLC
bar
L
24 VDC
L
24 VDC 2
1 1

7
7
COM 24 VDC
COM
Output unit etc. Inverter Output unit etc. Inverter
⚫ Source logic
signal is used
COM P24 COM P24

24 VDC PLC
Short-circuit PLC L 24 VDC
bar 24 VDC
L
1 1
7 7
0V 0V
Output unit etc. Inverter Output unit etc. Inverter
⚫ No-voltage switch
signal is used
Short-circuit P24 P24 P24 P24

bar Short- 24 VDC 24 VDC
PLC circuit PLC PLC PLC
24 VDC bar 24 VDC 24 VDC
L L L L
1 1 1 1
7 7 7 7
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter

2 Design
Multi-function Output Terminals and Programmable Controller Con-

nection
⚫ Sink logic
⚫ Source logic

2 Design
Precaution for Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

⚫ Precaution for using more than one inverter
If more than one inverter uses a common input (such as a switch), and their power-on timing is dif-
ferent, a sneak current will flow in the circuit as shown below. This may cause the inverters to falsely
recognize the input signal is ON even if it is OFF. If this occurs, insert a diode (rating: 50 V/0.1 A) in
2-3 Wiring
the position shown in the diagram or redesign the circuit to use an external power supply to prevent
sneak current.
⚫ For sink logic

2

2 Design
⚫ For source logic
Power ON Power ON
Add a diode
Switch OFF Switch OFF

With no diode inserted, the input turns ON In place of short-circuit bar, insert a diode
due to sneak current even when the switch is to prevent sneak current.
OFF.
Power ON
Use an external
power supply
Switch OFF
The use of an external power supply with
the short-circuit bar removed does not
cause sneak current.

2 Design
2-3-6 Wiring for RS-485 Communications Terminals

This inverter has RS-485 communications terminals on its control circuit terminal block.
It uses the Modbus communication protocol to establish communications with external controllers.
This section describes the wiring procedure for the RS-485 communications terminal block and the
installation of the terminating resistor.
2-3 Wiring
Wiring for RS485 Communications Terminal Block
On the control circuit terminal block, the following RS-485 communications terminals are provided. 2
Terminal
Terminal name Function
symbol
2-3-6 Wiring for RS-485 Communications Terminals

SN RS-485 communications send/receive Negative-side send/receive terminal for RS-485 com-
terminal, negative side munications.
SP RS-485 communications send/receive Positive-side send/receive terminal for RS-485 commu-
terminal, positive side nications.
USB port is for computer
use only. RS422 (RJ45
modular connector) port
is for Digital Operator
use only.
Terminating resistor
selector switch
EA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L PLC P24 P24S

SP SN H O OI L EO AM CM2 12 11
RS485 terminal

2 Design
Terminating Resistor Setting

Connect the inverters parallel to each other as shown below and, only on the terminal Inverter, turn ON
the terminating resistor selector switch.
Even if you have only one inverter connected, turn ON the terminating resistor selector switch.
Selecting a terminating resistor appropriate to the cable impedance improves the terminating effect.
For this inverter, however, turning ON the terminating resistor selector switch enables the built-in termi-
nating resistor (120 ).
*1. If the communications are unstable, install a terminating resistor appropriate to the impedance of the cable to
each cable end. The resistance of the terminating resistor built into this inverter is 120 .

2 Design
2-3-7 Wiring for Digital Operator

In addition to the standard Digital Operator, this inverter can be operated via the optional Digital Opera-
2-3 Wiring
tor (Model: 3G3AX-OP01).
To use the 3G3AX-OP01, you need the optional Digital Operator Cable. Model: 3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE
(3 m). Exceeding 3 m may result in malfunction.
2
Multi-function Compact Inverter
(Model: 3G3MX2-EV2)
2-3-7 Wiring for Digital Operator

Digital Operator Digital Operator Cable
(Model: 3G3AX-OP01) Model: 3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE (3 m)
2-3-8 Compliance with EU Directives and UKCA

This section provides conditions that must be met for compliance with EU Directives and European
standards.
Take measures to meet the conditions shown here for the entire system as well as peripheral equip-
ment. For the system that incorporates this inverter, perform the final compliance verification separately
on the whole system.
Directives and Legislation
EU Declaration of Conformity
OMRON declares that 3G3MX2 Series type EV2 Inverter conform with the
requirements of the following EU Directive
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
UKCA Declaration of Conformity

OMRON declares that 3G3MX2 Series type EV2 Inverter conform with the
requirements of the following UK legislation
(2016 No.1091) Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations
(2008 No.1597) Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations

2 Design
Applicable Standards
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series complies with the following standards.
Requirements Applicable Standards

EMC EN 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2012
EN 61800-3: 2018
IEC 61800-3: 2022
Functional safety Functional Safety (Machinery Directive) The safety
(Machinery) functions in 3G3MX2-EV2 Series are designed and man-
ufactured in accordance with the following standards:
• EN 61800-5-2: 2017, STO SIL3
• EN ISO 13849-1: 2015, Cat3/PLe
Electrical safety EN 61800-5-1: 2007
(Machinery/Low Voltage) EN 61800-5-1: 2007/A1: 2017
EN 61800-5-1: 2007/A11: 2021
Others Ecodesign, RoHS
• This product is designed for industrial environments.

If used in a residential environment, it may cause radio interference. In that case, it is necessary to
take appropriate measures against radio interference.
• This product is not intended to be connected to a power grid that supplies residential facilities.

2 Design
Concepts of Compliance
⚫ EMC Directive
The OMRON products are the electrical devices incorporated and used in various machines or man-
ufacturing equipment. For this reason, OMRON makes efforts to manufacture products that meet
the related EMC standards so that the machines or equipment in which they are incorporated can
2-3 Wiring
easily comply with the EMC standards.
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter designed and tested to comply with the above EMC standards
when installed and wired to equipment appropriately. However, your machines and equipment vary
in type, and in addition, EMC performance depends on the configuration, wiring, or device location
in the control panel even when all of the devices are EMC compliant products. For this reason, the 2
final assessment of the EMC compliance should be verified under your usage conditions.
Please perform the final verification on the EMC compliance of your machines or the entire system

at your own responsibility.
⚫ EMC noise filters

OMRON is currently preparing a line up of EMC noise filters.
⚫ Wiring for power supply

Keep the ground cable as short as possible.
Place the inverter and the noise filter on the same earth (ground) plate.
Always connect the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the inverter to the power sup-
ply via an EMC noise filter.
Keep the cable between the inverter and the EMC noise filter as short as possible (40 cm maxi-
mum).
⚫ Wiring between inverter and motor

For cables between the inverter and motor, be sure to use shield braided cables.
Keep the cables as short as possible.

2 Design
⚫ Measures against noise for compliance with EMC Directive

• Keep the power cable of the inverter and the EMC noise filter wiring as short as possible.
Use a shield braided cable.
• For the shield braided cable, use a tinned copper shielded cable with a shield factor of 85%.
• Be sure to connect the ground cable separately from the shielded cable. Use the ground cable as
thick and short as possible to wire.
• Use shield braided cables for connection between the inverter and the motor. Keep the cables as
short as possible at a length 20 m or less, with the cable shield grounded at each end. Installing a
clamp filter near the inverter output terminals is an effective countermeasure.
• Ground the motor frame, the shield of the motor cable, and the terminal housing adequately.
• The motor terminal housing may not contact with the chassis due to the rubber bushing or the
screw hole for motor ground terminal may be coated. Check the contact performance. If there is
any problem, take measures to enhance contact performance.
• Use shielded cables for wiring to the control circuit terminals and communications lines and
ground the shield of each cable on the inverter side. Grounding the cables at each end may
increase the effect.
• Connect the cable shield directly to a ground plate with a conductive cable clamp. At this time,
keep the shield strip length as short as possible.
• Make the contact area between the EMC noise filter/Inverter and the ground plate as large as
possible to enhance contact performance. At this time, remove the paint etc. from the ground
plate.
• For the control panel door, use a conductive gasket to improve the shielding effect.
• In the same control panel, do not install equipment that generates non-EMC-compliant electro-
magnetic waves.
• Avoid conductor loops that encompass large areas.
• As a measure against harmonic distortion, an AC/DC reactor or harmonic suppression equipment
is required.
• Avoid placing noise-generating cables (such as power cables and motor cables of the inverter) in
parallel with signal cables and allow a clearance of at least 25 cm between them.
If you cannot avoid crossing two types of cables, keep them at right angles to each other.

2 Design
⚫ Wiring example for single-phase 200-V class
2-3 Wiring
2

2 Design
⚫ Low-voltage Directive
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter complies with EN61800-5-1 when installed and wired to equipment
according to the methods described below.
• The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter is an open type device. Be sure to install it inside the
control panel.
• The power supply and voltage (SELV) with reinforced or double insulation should be used for wir-
ing to the control circuit terminals.
• To satisfy requirements of the LVD (Low Voltage Directive), the inverter must be protected with
fuses in case a short-circuiting accident occurs. Be sure to install fuses on the power supply side
of the inverter. The fuses must be selected from the products listed in A-4 UL/cUL Standards Cau-
tions on page A-9.
• Use one set of fuses per inverter.
• Use the crimp terminal with an insulation sleeve to connect to the main circuit terminals.
• This product complies with the requirements of IEC 60364-4-41: 2005/AMD1: 2017: Clause 411
“Protective measure: automatic disconnection of supply”, since it complies with the requirements
of IEC61800-5-1: 2007+AMD1: 2016: Clause 4.3.9.
For installation of inverters, wiring, and fuses for protecting the main circuit, it is necessary to com-
ply with the descriptions in Chapter 2 of this manual and A-4 UL/cUL Standards Cautions on page
A-9.
• Regarding IEC61800-5-1: Clause 5.2.3.6.3.3 “Short-circuit between phase terminals of power out-
put and protective earth”, circuitry in compliance test is as described as “Figure 13 - Example of
short-circuit test between CDM/BDM d.c. link power output and protective earth” and “Class J 30A
Non time delay fuse” is used as “OCPD” in “Fault loop”.
⚫ Manufacturer
OMRON Corporation
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku, Kyoto 600-8530 Japan
⚫ Importer in EU
OMRON Europe B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp, The Netherlands
Cautions when exporting to Europe

• Not all OMRON products in Europe are imported through the above importer.
When a different importer is exporting OMRON products to Europe, those importer is responsible
to clarify their name and address as an importer and clearly indicate to the customer.
⚫ Contact in UK
The UK legislation require clear indication of the name and address of the manufacturer and
importer is compulsory. The importer must clearly indicate the importer name and address to the
customer.
(UKCA Contact)
Omron Electronics LTD.
Opal Drive, Fox Milne, MK15 0DG, Milton Keynes, United Kingdom

2 Design
Ecodesign Directive
We provide the VSD efficiency information regarding to motor regulation.
For details, please visit the following website.
https://industrial.omron.eu/en/company-info/environmental/ecodesign-directive
2-3 Wiring
2

2 Design

Operation and Test Run
3
This section describes the part names and key operation of the Digital Operator, and
the operation method of this product as well as the test run procedure.
3-1 Operation of Digital Operator............................................................................ 3-5

3-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions .............................................................................. 3-5
3-1-2 Key Operation Method ........................................................................................ 3-7
3-1-3 Key Operation Method with Remote Digital Operator Connected ...................... 3-13
3-2 Connections and Functions of CX-Drive ....................................................... 3-16
3-2-1 CX-Drive Connection Method............................................................................ 3-16
3-2-2 Overview of CX-Drive Functions ....................................................................... 3-20
3-2-3 Precautions for Using CX-Drive ........................................................................ 3-24
3-3 Flow of Test Run .............................................................................................. 3-25
3-4 Operation Items for Test Run .......................................................................... 3-26

3 Operation and Test Run


fire.


CAUTION
3



may abruptly start.
Restart Selection Function

• Do not come close to the machine while RUN command is enabled. When the restart selection func-
tion (b001, b008) is set, the machine may start abruptly.
Motor Overload Protection

• For the motor overload protection, be sure to set the rated current of your motor to the Electronic
Thermal Level (b012/b212) and PM Motor Rated Current (H105).

3-1 Operation of Digital Operator

The Digital Operator is a display operation panel for the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter.
3-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions

The table below shows the name and function of each part of the Digital Operator.
RUN key enabled

LED indicator
LED data display
Operation keys
3
RJ45 connector Jog dial

USB connector
Enter key
Display Name Description

MINUS LED Lights (in red) when a negative value is displayed on the display.
RUN (Operation) Lights green when the Inverter is operating.
LED indicator The indicator also lights when the Inverter is decelerating after the
RUN command is turned OFF since the it lights when one of the fol-
lowing conditions are met: “RUN command is input” and “Inverter
output is ON.”
The indicator blinks green if the RUN command is input when the
inverter is not ready for operation. When the reset is released, RUN
will light up.
• Frequency reference of 0 Hz
• Trip occurred
• Inverter is reset
• STO is active
• Free-run command is input
• Permission of RUN command is OFF
• Free V/f Frequency 7 is less than 30
• Parameter inconsistency warning occurred
Alarm LED indicator Lights red when the Inverter has tripped.
For how to reset a trip state, refer to How to Reset a Trip State on
page 10-3.
Program LED Lights green when the data display shows data (a set value) that
indicator can be changed.
The indicator blinks when the set value is inconsistent. Refer to
10-1-4 Warning Display on page 10-11.
Monitor LED Lights green when the data display shows a frequency.
indicator (Hz)
Monitor LED Lights green when the data display shows a current.
indicator (A)
Power LED Lights green when the Inverter is supplied with power.
indicator

Display Name Description

RUN key enabled Lights green when the RUN Command Source Monitor (d063) is set
LED indicator to Digital Operator. This indicates that the RUN key is enabled on
the Digital Operator.
LED data display Displays (in red) various data such as a parameter value, frequency
value, or set value.
RUN key Starts the Inverter. This key is enabled when the RUN command is
set to Digital Operator.
STOP/RESET key Decelerates the Inverter to a stop.

The STOP/RESET key is enabled when the RUN command is not
set to Digital Operator. However, you may disable it by setting the
parameter b087.
When the Inverter has tripped, the trip state will be reset.
Mode key When parameter is displayed: Moves to the beginning of the next
function parameter group.
When data is displayed: Cancels the setting and returns to
the parameter display.
When the Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) is connected,
press and hold this key for 3 seconds or more to move the operation
to the Inverter’s Digital Operator. Press and hold the key again for 3
seconds or more to move the operation back to the Digital Operator
(Model: 3G3AX-OP01).
Enter key In parameter display mode: Switches to the data display.
Press and hold this key for 3 sec-
onds or more to enter the individual
input mode.
In data display mode: Enters and stores the set value
(into the EEPROM) and returns to
the parameter display.
Jog dial Increases or decreases the parameter number or the set data value.
USB connector The Micro-B type connector for connecting a computer.
Used to connect to the Inverter/Servo support tool CX-Drive
RJ45 connector The connector (RS-422) for connecting the optional Digital Operator
(Model: 3G3AX-OP01). Once you connect the Inverter to the Digital
Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01), the built-in Digital Operator keys
will be disabled. In this case, set the data displayed on the display in
b150.

3-1-2 Key Operation Method

This section explains how to use the Digital Operator keys in a typical operation (when the Display

Selection is “Complete display”) and in the extended function mode U as operation examples.
This operation will be the same even if you set the Display Selection (b037) to other than 00 (Complete
display), although the number of parameters that you will see on the display differs.

You can change the parameter display on the Digital Operator by the Display Selection (b037).
For details, refer to 5-1-1 Display Selection on page 5-3.
Even if you increment a value of 5 digits or less with the Jog dial to make it a number with 6 or
more digits, only the lower 5 digits will continue to be displayed. When you press the Enter key
for confirmation, the upper 5 digits will be displayed, allowing you to check the upper digits as
well. 3
Example: When you increment 999.99 with the Jog dial, it will be displayed as 000.00. Pressing
the Enter key for confirmation will display 1000.0, letting you know the value is 1000.00.

• You can set the initial screen displayed after turning on the power supply by the Initial Screen
Selection (b038). For details, refer to 7-6-5 Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen after
Power-on) on page 7-56.
• You can display only the parameters registered as user parameters. It is also possible to
automatically register changed parameters, or directly set specific parameters. For details,
refer to 7-6-11 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function on page 7-60.
Item Parameter No. Data Description

Display Selection b037 00 Complete display (Factory default)
01 Individual display of functions
02 User setting + d001, F001, b037
03 Data comparison display
05 Monitor display + b037
Initial Screen Selec- b038 000 Screen on which the Enter key was last pressed
tion (Initial screen 001 to 060 d001 to d060 (001: Factory default)
after power-on) 201 F001
202 Do not set.
User Parameter b039 00 Disabled (Factory default)
Automatic Setting 01 Enabled
Function
Regardless of the display mode of the Digital Operator, if you press the Mode key for 1 second
or more, the data of Output Frequency Monitor (d001) is displayed. However, while you press
and hold the Mode key, the display of the function parameter group continues to change in
sequence because the Mode key continues to operate as originally intended. (Example: F001
→ A001 → b001 → C001 ··· after 1 second, “0.00 (data of Output Frequency Monitor)”
appears)

Transition of Parameter Display

In the extended function mode U, you can operate the Digital Operator in the same way as in other modes.

However, do not be confused although each parameter number is displayed again for the set value.
Press the Enter key to enter the selected parameter number. Then the display returns to the parameter dis-
play in the extended function mode U.
To display only the user set parameters, set the Display Selection (b037) to 02 (User setting).

Parameter Initialization
You can initialize the changed parameters and also clear the fault monitor data.
As a measure to prevent inadvertent parameter initialization, the inverter is designed to force the user
to set several parameters before execute initialization.
For details on parameter initialization, refer to 5-1-2 Parameter Initialization on page 5-5.

• The parameters Total RUN Time Monitor (d016), Total Power ON Time Monitor (d017), and
Initialization Data Selection (b085) will not be initialized.
When you set 00 to Inverter Mode Selection (b171), Heavy load/Light Load Selection
(b049) will not be initialized. Setting any other value than 00 will initialize it.
• The inverter does not display the initialization-related parameters (b084, b094, b180)
depending on the Display Selection (b037) setting. If they are not displayed, change b037 to
00 (Complete display).
• When the Soft Lock Selection (b031) is set to prohibit changes of the initialization-related
parameters (b084, b094, b180), the initialization cannot be executed. Change the Soft Lock
Selection (b031) to enable the initialization.
• For details on Soft Lock Selection, refer to 7-6-1 Soft Lock Function (SFT) on page 7-54.
• Remember that you will not be able to revert to the previous settings once you press the
Enter key to execute parameter initialization, with the Initialization Execution (b180) set to 01.
The following figure shows the steps of parameter initialization.

To initialize all the parameters, set the Initialization Target Setting (b094) to 00 (All data).
To initialize the fault monitor and DriveProgramming data in addition to the parameter data, set the Ini-
tialization Selection (b084) to 04.
Set the Initialization Execution (b180) to 01 (Execute initialization) to execute parameter initialization.
Step 1: Set b084 to 04 and Step 2: Set b180 to 01 and Step 3: Initialization is
press the Enter press the Enter completed when
key. key. the Initializing
display disappears.
Initializing
Initialization
completed
Enter Enter
Returning Display to d001
Regardless of the display mode of the Digital Operator, if you press (Mode key) for 1 second or
more, the data of Output Frequency Monitor (d001) is displayed. However, the Digital Operator contin-
ues to display the function mode and extended function mode in sequence as the normal operation if
you press the Mode key for less than 1 second.

Digit Shift Display Mode

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter features a 5-digit LED data display.

To display a value with a large number of digits, display the upper 5 digits and use the Enter key to shift
right. Use the Mode key to shift left. The least significant digit and the most significant digit are indicated
by and respectively.
Enter
Enter
Enter Enter
Enter
Enter
Least significant
digit indication
LED data display Digit shift display mode

returns to the initial Press the Enter key to shift the data
display one digit to the right.

display after time Enter
elapses. Press the Mode key to shift the data

display one digit to the left.
3
Most significant digit indication

Individual digit Input Mode

In individual input mode, you can enter a value for each digit. When a parameter No. or data value to
change is far from the currently displayed value, you can change it efficiently.
Press and hold the Enter key for 3 seconds or more to enter the individual input mode.
The optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) allows you to enter the individual input mode
by simultaneously pressing the Increment and Decrement keys, as with conventional models.

3-1-3 Key Operation Method with Remote Digital Operator Connected

This section describes the operation method when the optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01)

is connected.
Transition of Parameter Display

The following figure shows how to operate the optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01).
Monitor Mode d *1 In parameter display mode

: Moves to the parameter display
Data display
d001: Output Frequency Monitor
In parameter Use the Increment key/Decrement key to 3

display mode increase/decrease the parameter number.
When you press the Increment key at the end,
it will return to the beginning in the same mode.

In parameter display mode
: Moves to the next mode
Function Mode F
Stores the data. Data display
Parameter display
F001: Output Frequency Setting
In data display mode (F001 to F003)

Changes are entered immediately, so the value does not blink even if it is changed.
: Returns to the parameter display after storing the value in the EEPROM.
Extended Function Mode A : Returns to the parameter display without storing the value in the EEPROM.
Parameter display Data display

A001: Frequency Reference Selection
In data display mode

When data is changed, all digits will blink.
While blinking, the changes are not entered yet.
: Returns to the parameter display after entering and storing the changes.
Extended Function
Mode b : Returns to the parameter display after canceling the changes.
Extended Function
Mode C
In the parameter display or data display
Extended Function mode, pressing the Increment key and
Mode H the Decrement key simultaneously
enables quick change of the value.
Extended Function For details, refer to Individual Input
Mode P Mode for Parameters (Direct
Specification/Selection) on page 3-14.
Extended Function
Mode U
*1.In monitor mode d, data cannot be changed.
Extended Function *2.After extended function mode U, the display
Mode d*2 Returns to d001 returns to monitor mode d.

Individual Input Mode for Parameters (Direct Specification/Selection)

When a parameter or data to change is far from the currently displayed value, using individual input
mode allows you to change the parameter efficiently.
In individual input mode, you can enter and select a parameter No. or data for each digit.
Step1: Step2: Step3:

Move a blinking digit to right and left with When the least significant
the Mode key and the Enter key, and digit is blinking, accept it
change the digit with the Increment key with the Enter key.
and the Decrement key.
+1
The most significant digit

blinks.
In individual input mode, both parameter display and data display can be used.
Parameter display
Press simultaneously
(A)
(A)
When the symbol digit When the 100 digit blinks, When the 10 digit blinks, When the 1 digit blinks,
blinks, increase/decrease increase/decrease it with increase/decrease it with
it with the Increment key the Increment key or the the Increment key or the
or the Decrement key. Decrement key. Decrement key. Decrement key.
If you specify any parameter that does not exist, you will
return to the display in which the leftmost digit is blinking.
Press simultaneously
(B)
(B)
When the 10 digit blinks, When the 1 digit blinks, When the 0.1 digit blinks, When the 0.01 digit blinks,
increase/decrease it with increase/decrease it with increase/decrease it with increase/decrease it with
the Increment key or the the Increment key or the the Increment key or the the Increment key or the
Decrement key. Decrement key. Decrement key. Decrement key.
Note 1. When you press the Mode key with a cursor (blinking digit) at the left end, the cursor moves to the right
end.
2. When you press the Increment key and the Decrement key simultaneously in individual input mode, you
will return to the normal input mode.
3. Even at function parameter group F, the changes are not entered yet while blinking.

Digit Shift Display Mode

The optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) features a 4-digit LED data display.

To display a value with a large number of digits, display the upper 4 digits and use the Enter key to shift
right. Use the Mode key to shift left. The least significant digit and the most significant digit are indicated
by and respectively.
Enter
Enter
Enter Enter Enter
Enter
Enter
Least significant
digit indication
Digit shift display mode

Press the Enter key to shift the data display

time elapses. Enter one digit to the right.
Press the Mode key to shift the data display
one digit to the left.
3
Most significant digit indication
Once you connect the Inverter to the optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01), the operation of
the option will be enabled. In this state, we consider that the option has an operation authority.
With the option operational, pressing and holding the Mode key on the Inverter (for 3 seconds) makes
the Inverter operational. In this state, we consider that the Inverter side has an operation authority.
Pressing and holding the Mode key on the Inverter again (for 3 seconds) returns the operation authority
to the option.
When the option has an operation authority, the Inverter will display the parameter set in Inverter Dis-
play on Operator Connection (b150). When the Inverter has an operation authority, the option will dis-
play the parameter set in Initial Screen Selection (b038). The relationship between operation authority,
operable keys, and operator display is as shown in the table below.
Digital Operator on the Inverter Optional Digital Operator

Operation authority Key opera- Key opera-
Screen display Key operation
tion*1 tion*1
Digital Operator on the Displays the opera- Follows the setting
Operable tion screen Inoperable of b038
Inverter
Optional Digital Operator Follows the setting Displays the opera-
Inoperable Operable
of b150 tion screen
*1. The STOP/RESET key can be operated by both operators regardless of operation authority. Refer to 5-7-3
STOP Key Selection on page 5-41 for the operation when 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202) is
set to anything other than 02 (Digital Operator).

3-2 Connections and Functions of CX-Drive

The Inverter/Servo support tool CX-Drive is support software to edit the inverter parameter settings.
Installing the OMRON CX-One software on your PC also installs the CX-Drive simultaneously.
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter is supported in the following or higher versions of the CX-Drive prod-
uct:
• CX-Drive: Ver. 3.02
This section describes how to connect the CX-Drive to an inverter and provides an overview of its func-
tions.
For details on the functions of the CX-Drive, refer to the “CX-Drive Operation Manual (W453)”.
3-2-1 CX-Drive Connection Method

The following figure shows how to connect the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series with the Inverter/Servo support
tool CX-Drive.
Direct Connection via Serial Communications

Connect the CX-Drive directly to the USB connector of the Inverter.
Refer to 3-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions on page 3-5 for information on the USB.
CX-Drive
USB
Commercially-available USB cable

(Micro-B)

CX-Drive Connection Procedure

There are two methods to connect the CX-Drive with the inverter.
The step-by-step procedure for each method is provided below.
⚫ Connecting by registering inverter connection method beforehand

Create a new inverter project, set the connecting method, and connect with the inverter.

Follow the steps below.
1 Start the CX-Drive and, from the [File] menu, select [New].

2 In the [New Drive] window, set the drive type of the target inverter.
Under [Drive Type], select the inverter series name and click the [Settings] button to the right.
In the [Drive Type Settings] window, set the Installation Type/Option, Voltage Class, and
Maximum Motor Capacity and select [EV2] in Specifications.
After setting these items, click the [OK] button to close the [Drive Type Settings] window.

3 In the [New Drive] window, set the type of connection to the inverter.
Under [Connection Type], select [Direct] and click the [Settings] button to the right.
On the [Driver] tab, in [Port Selection], select the port name of the computer on which the
CX-Drive is installed.
4 After setting these items, click the [OK] button and close all windows.
The new project is registered in the workspace.
Click the (Work Online) icon to connect to the inverter.
⚫ Automatically detecting the connected inverter

Set the [Autodetect Options] in the CX-Drive and use the Autodetect function to automatically con-
nect to the inverter.
Follow the steps below.
1 Start the CX-Drive and, from the [Drive] menu, select [Autodetect Options] to open the
Options window.

2 On the [Autodetect] tab, set the [Drive Type Selection], [Series Type Selection] and [Con-

nection Type Selection].
Under [Drive Type Selection], select the [Inverter] box and click the [Inverter].
Then, under [Series Type Selection], select the [3G3MX2] box.
Next, under [Connection Type Selection], select the [Direct] box and click the [Direct].
Then, click the [Advanced Options: Direct] button to the right.

For the reduction of the automatic search time, deselect unnecessary check boxes to narrow
down the scope of autodetection.
3 In the [Advanced Options [Direct]] window, set communications options.

4 After setting communications options, click the [OK] button and close all open windows.
Then, click [Autodetect].
The Autodetect function starts to create new drive projects automatically.
3-2-2 Overview of CX-Drive Functions

The Inverter/Servo support tool CX-Drive enables you edit the inverter parameters and monitor the
inverter status.
This section provides an overview of the CX-Drive functions.
Screen Structure of CX-Drive

The screen structure of the CX-Drive is as shown below.
The workspace shows a list of registered drive projects. Double-clicking a project displays the functions
contained in it.
Then, double-clicking each function opens a window corresponding to that function.
Window
Workspace
Toolbar
Output window
Status bar


The CX-Drive, by default, does not allow connection to the inverter unless the software ver-
sions match.
• Software number of the inverter set in the CX-Drive project
• Software number of inverter actually connected
If you cannot connect to the inverter due to a software number mismatch, select [Tools] -
[Options] in the menu bar and, in the [Online] tab, deselect the [Check Drive Software Compat-
ibility] check box. This allows CX-Drive to connect to the inverter operate normally, although a
warning display appears.
To match the software numbers, right-click on the project, select [Properties], and click the [Set-
tings] button in the [Drive Type] section. In the [Drive Type Settings] window, set the Software
Number that matches that of the inverter. If you cannot find the applicable software number in
the CX-Drive’s Software Number list, please upgrade the CX-Drive version.
3
Editing Parameter Data in CX-Drive
3-2-2 Overview of CX-Drive Functions

Among the projects in the workspace, double-click [Parameter Editor] to open the [Parameter Editor
Window] that shows a list of all inverter parameters (in numeric order).
In this window, you can edit the inverter parameter.
To upload/download parameters from the inverter, use the [Transfer] button in the toolbar.
• Double-click one of the folders under Parameter Editor to narrow down the parameter list to only
those parameters associated with it.
• Edit the value set for each parameter in the Value field of the parameter list.
• When you select a parameter, the explanation of the parameter appears above the parameter list.
• At the left end of the list, icons that represent the status of parameter data are displayed: Not default,
Not default and different from the inverter, or Invalid. You can display only parameters with the same
icon.
• You can select specific parameters and transfer data for only those selected parameters to the inverter.

Status Function of CX-Drive

Open the Status folder in the project and double-click the status information.
The window corresponding to the selected status information opens.
Display Description
[Digital Inputs] Displays the current ON/OFF status information and function set to
each input terminal.
[Digital Outputs] Displays the current ON/OFF status information and function set to
each output terminal.
[Monitor Mode] Displays the internal status values of the inverter. These status values
are similar to those displayed in the monitor mode (dxxx) of the inverter.
[Alarms] Displays an alarm history of the current and past alarms.


Monitor Function of CX-Drive
Open the Monitor folder in the project and double-click Real Time Trace.
The Real Time Trance window opens, in which you can monitor the operation status of the inverter.
• Up to 8 signals can be traced.
• Triggers can be set to the ON/OFF timing of the inverter’s internal status, or numerically.

3-2-3 Precautions for Using CX-Drive

This section describes the precautions for using the “status function” and “test run function” of the
CX-Drive.
Status Function of CX-Drive

When the EDM function selector switch is ON, the input status of terminals GS1 and GS2 is displayed
for multi-function input terminals 3 and 4, respectively. Therefore, the “ON” or “OFF” state of 3 and 4 will
no longer be displayed.
Test Run Function of CX-Drive

By clicking the [Test Run] button in the toolbar, you can use the test run function.
Refer to the CX-Drive Operation Manual (Cat. No. W453) for details on the test run function.
• Before using the test run function, make sure that parameters are synchronized between the
CX-Drive and the Inverter. Parameters can be transferred with the [Transfer] button in the toolbar.
(Refer to Editing Parameter Data in CX-Drive on page 3-21.)
• In the test run function, following the setting of frequency, acceleration time, and deceleration time, all
parameters are transferred to the Inverter when the RUN command (forward/reverse) is executed.
Changing two or more settings simultaneously may result in a failure in parameter transfer.

3-3 Flow of Test Run

Perform a test run of the inverter according to the following flow.
Item Description Reference
3-3 Flow of Test Run

Installation Install the inverter according to the installation conditions. Section 2,
2-1
Wiring and con- Connect the inverter to the power supply and peripheral equipment. Section 2,
nections 2-10
3-2-3 Precautions for Using CX-Drive

Power-on Check the points mentioned in the next page before turning on the Section 3,
power supply. 3-4
Display Status Check that there is no error in the inverter. Section

Checks 10
Parameter Initial- Initialize the inverter parameters. Section 5,

ization 5-1
Parameter Setting Set the parameters required for the test run. Section 5,
5-3, 5-4
No-load Run Run the motor with no-load via the Digital Operator. Section 3,
3-1
Load Run Run the motor via Digital Operator, with the mechanical system con- Section 3,
nected. 3-1
Operation Basic settings (operation with the basic settings required to operate Section 5
and stop the inverter.)
Vector control (operation with the vector control and other functions.) Section 6

3-4 Operation Items for Test Run

The following describes the operation items for test run.
Installation
Check that the inverter meets the installation conditions.

For details on installing the inverter, refer to 2-1 Installation on page 2-5.
Wiring and Connections

Select peripheral equipment according to the specifications and wire the cables securely.
For details on wiring the inverter, refer to 2-3 Wiring on page 2-12.
Power-on
⚫ Points to be checked before turning ON the power
Check that the power supply voltage is appropriate and that the main power input terminals (R/L1,
S/L2, T/L3) are securely wired.
The rated input voltage of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter is as follows.
Model Power supply voltage

3G3MX2-A2-EV2 3-phase 200 to 240 VAC
3G3MX2-A4-EV2 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC
3G3MX2-AB-EV2 Single-phase 200 to 240 VAC
Check that the motor is securely connected to the inverter output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).
Check that the controller is securely connected to the control circuit terminals. In addition, turn off
the control terminals.
Set the motor in a no-load state (not connected to the mechanical system).
⚫ Power-on
If no problem is found in above checks, turn on the power supply.

Display Status Checks

If no problem is found at power-on, the display status will be as follows.

Name Display status
POWER LED Lit
ALARM LED Not lit
RUN LED Not lit (Lit during RUN, blinking if the RUN command is input
when the inverter is unable to start operation such as when
the frequency reference is 0 Hz)
RUN key enabled LED indicator Lit
Monitor LED indicator (Hz) Lit
Data display LED Displays d001 setting.
If any problem is found, the display status will be as follows. 3

Refer to Section 10 Troubleshooting for countermeasures.
Name Display status

POWER LED Lit
ALARM LED Lit
RUN LED Not lit
RUN key enabled LED indicator Lit
Monitor LED indicator (Hz) Lit
Data display LED Displays alarm code such as E01 on data display.
(Displayed alarm code differ depending on error condition.)
Parameter Initialization
You can initialize the changed parameters and also clear the fault monitor data.
As a measure to prevent inadvertent parameter initialization, the inverter is designed to force the user
to set several parameters to execute initialization.
The following figure shows the steps of complete parameter initialization.
To initialize all the parameters, set the Initialization Target Setting (b094) to 00 (All data).
To initialize the fault monitor and DriveProgramming data in addition to the parameter data, set the Ini-
tialization Selection (b084) to 04.
Set the Initialization Execution (b180) to 01 (Execute initialization) to execute parameter initialization.
For details on parameter initialization, refer to 5-1 Parameter Display and Parameter Initialization on
page 5-3.
Step 1: Set b084 to 04 and Step 2: Set b180 to 01 and Step 3: Initialization is com-
press the Enter press the Enter pleted when the ini-
key. key. tialization display
disappears
Initializing
Initialization
completed
Enter Enter


The DriveProgramming User Parameters U00 to U31 (P100 to P131) will not be initialized
unless the Initialization Selection (b084) is set to 04.
• The inverter does not display the initialization-related parameters (b084, b094, b180)
depending on the Display Selection (b037) setting. If they are not displayed, change b037 to
00 (Complete display).
For details on Soft Lock Selection, refer to 7-6-1 Soft Lock Function (SFT) on page 7-54.
• Remember that you will not be able to revert to the previous settings once you press the
Enter key to execute parameter initialization, with the Initialization Execution (b180) set to 01.
Parameter Setting
To operate the inverter, two commands are required: the RUN command and the frequency reference.
First, set the sources of these commands in the 1st Frequency Reference Selection (A001) and 1st
RUN Command Selection (A002). For Test Run, set these parameter to 02 (Digital Operator) so as to
operate the inverter via the Digital Operator.
Next, set the 1st Motor Capacity (H003) and the 1st Motor Pole Number (H004). These values will be
used as the reference values for the automatic torque boost, motor protection, and torque limit func-
tions.
Then, in the 1st Electronic Thermal Level (b012), set the rated current of your motor.
Set the value correctly according to the motor.
Parameter No. Function name Set value Default data Unit

A001 1st Frequency Reference 02: Digital Operator 02 −
Selection
A002 1st RUN Command Selec- 02: Digital Operator 02 −
tion
H003 1st Motor Capacity 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/ Maximum applicable kW
1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/ motor capacity
5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5
H004 1st Motor Pole Number 2/4/6/8 4 pole
10 to 48: Do not set.
b012 1st Electronic Thermal Level 0.20  Rated current to Rated current A
1.00  Rated current
b087 STOP Key Selection 00: Enabled 00 —

The STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator is enabled when the STOP Key Selection
parameter is set to Enabled. Make sure that this parameter is set correctly, although the
STOP/RESET key enabled by default.

No-load Run
Rotate the motor with no-load (in a state not connected to the mechanical system) via the Digital Oper-

ator.
⚫ Forward/reverse rotation via Digital Operator

Follow the steps below to the motor in the forward or reverse rotation.
(1) Set the Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001).

It is recommended to initially set this to approximately 10 Hz or slower for safety reasons
(Factory default: F001 = 6.00).
(2) Set the RUN Direction Selection (F004).
In the RUN Direction Selection (F004), select 00 (Forward) or 01 (Reverse).
3
Press the Mode key for 3 seconds or more to display the data of Output Frequency Monitor
(d001).
Make sure that the displayed value is 0.00 (Hz).
(3) Press the RUN key.
The motor starts rotating with the RUN LED lit.
(4) Check that there is no problem with the output frequency, motor rotation direction or
Inverter operation displayed on the Digital Operator.
For the rotation direction of motor, refer to the explanation for the RUN Direction Monitor
(d003).
Parameter No. Function name Data range Default data Unit

F001 Output Frequency Setting/ 0.00, Starting Frequency to 6.0 Hz
Monitor 1st Maximum Frequency
F004 RUN Direction Selection 00: Forward 00 −
01: Reverse
d001 Output Frequency Monitor 0.00 to 590.00 − Hz
d003 RUN Direction Monitor F: Forward − −
o: Stop
r: Reverse
Key Data display example Description

Press the Mode key for 1 second or more to display the d001
data “0.00”.
Press the RUN key.

The RUN LED lights and the frequency reference monitor value
is displayed on the data display.
⚫ Stopping Motor
After rotating the motor with no-load in the forward or reverse rotation via the Digital Operator, press
the STOP/RESET key . The motor stops rotating.

Load Run
If no problem is found during no-load run, connect the mechanical system and run the inverter with load
via the Digital Operator.
⚫ Mechanical system connection

Make sure that the motor stopped completely before connecting the mechanical system.
Then, connect the mechanical system with the motor securely to prevent the screws from loosening.
⚫ Operation via Digital Operator
In case of abnormal inverter run, be prepared to press the STOP/RESET key on the Digital
Operator.
In the same way as you did during no-load run, stop the machine via the Digital Operator.
⚫ RUN mode checks

Start with a low speed and, while checking that the machine moves smoothly in a correct direction,
increase the Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) value.
Check that there is no mechanical vibration and noise by varying the Output Frequency Setting/
Monitor (F001) and RUN Direction Selection (F004) settings.
Also, check a current, load rate, and voltage by the Output Current Monitor (d002), Electronic Ther-
mal Load Rate Monitor (d104), and DC Voltage Monitor (d102).
Check that the output current is up to 150% of the motor rated current.
Also, check that the electronic thermal load rate is sufficiently low to reach 100%.
Check that the main circuit DC voltage for 200-V class and for 400-V class is sufficiently low to reach
390 VDC and 780 VDC, respectively.
Operation
To operate the inverter with only basic parameters, refer to Section 5 Basic Settings.
To use applied functions such as sensorless vector control, V/f control with speed feedback, torque
control, and simple position control, in addition to Section 5 Basic Settings, refer to Section 6 Vector
Control and Applied Functions.

Parameter List
This section provides the parameter lists that show monitor functions and available
parameters for this inverter.
4
4-1 Monitor Mode ..................................................................................................... 4-2

4-1-1 Group d ............................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Function Mode ................................................................................................... 4-5
4-2-1 Group F: Basic Function Parameters .................................................................. 4-5
4-3 Extended Function Mode .................................................................................. 4-6
4-3-1 Group A: Standard Function Parameters............................................................. 4-7
4-3-2 Group b: Detailed Function Parameters ............................................................ 4-14
4-3-3 Group C: Multi-function Terminal Function Parameters ..................................... 4-24
4-3-4 Group H: Motor Control Parameters .................................................................. 4-32
4-3-5 Group P: Option/Applied Function Parameters .................................................. 4-35
4-3-6 Group U: User Parameters ................................................................................ 4-41

4 Parameter List
4-1 Monitor Mode

The inverter by default displays the data of the parameter d001 after power-on. To monitor the desired
parameter at power-on, change this default setting in the Initial Screen Selection (b038).
The displayed parameters vary with the Display Selection (b037) setting. To display all parameters, set
this parameter to 00 (Complete display).
For data that exceeds the display digits of the Digital Operator, the upper digits of the data are dis-
played. To monitor digits that are not displayed, use the digit shift display mode. For details, refer to
Digit Shift Display Mode on page 3-11.
4-1-1 Group d
Changes
Parameter Default
Function name Monitor or data range during Unit Page
No. data
RUN
Output Frequency
d001 0.00 (0.0) to 590.00 (590.0)*1 − Enabled Hz P. 7-4
Monitor
Output Current Moni-
d002 0.00 to 655.35 − − A P. 7-4
tor
F: Forward
RUN Direction Moni-
d003 o: Stop − − − P. 7-5
tor
r: Reverse
PID Feedback Value
d004 0.00 to 9999.00*2 − − − P. 7-5
Monitor
ON
OFF
Multi-function Input EA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
d005 − − − P. 7-5
Monitor*3 (Example)
Terminals 1, 2: ON
Terminals 3 to 7: OFF
ON
OFF
Multi-function AL 12 11
d006 − − − P. 7-6
Output Monitor (Example)
Terminals 11, 12: ON
Terminal AL: OFF
Output Frequency
d007 Monitor (After Con- 0.00 (0.0) to 58994.10 (58994.1)*1 − Enabled − P. 7-6
version)
Real Frequency
d008 −590.00 (−590.0) to 590.00 (590.0)*1 − − Hz P. 7-7
Monitor
Torque Reference
d009 0 to 200 − − % P. 7-7
Monitor
*2. The digit shift display mode can be used.
*3. Turning ON the EDM function selector switch automatically switches the input status display of 3 and 4 to the
input status display of GS1 and GS2. Although 3 and 4 cannot be monitored with d005 when the EDM function
selector switch is ON, the terminals operate according to the selected function.

4 Parameter List
Changes
Parameter Default
No. data
RUN
d010 Torque Bias Monitor −200 to 200 − − − %
Output Torque Moni-
d012 −200 to 200 − − % P. 7-8
tor
Output Voltage Moni-
d013 0.0 to 600.0 − − V P. 7-8
tor
d014 Input Power Monitor 0.0 to 100.0 − − kW P. 7-9
Integrated Power
d015 0.0 to 1000000.0*1 − − − P. 7-9
Monitor
Total RUN Time Mon-
d016 0. to 1000000.*1 − − h P. 7-10
itor
4-1 Monitor Mode

Total Power ON Time
d017 0. to 1000000.*1 − − h P. 7-10
Monitor
Fin Temperature
d018 −20.0 to 150.0 − − °C P. 7-10
Monitor
Life Assessment
d022 2 1 − − − P. 7-11
Monitor
1: Capacitor on main circuit board 4
2: Cooling fan
Program Counter
d023 1 to 1024 − − − P. 7-11
4-1-1 Group d
(DriveProgramming)
Program Number
d024 Monitor 0 to 9999 − − − P. 7-11
(DriveProgramming)
User Monitor 0
d025
(DriveProgramming) Displays DriveProgramming execution
User Monitor 1 result.
d026 − − − P. 7-12
(DriveProgramming) −2147483648 to 2147483647 *1
(Displays upper 5 digits excluding “-”)
User Monitor 2
d027
(DriveProgramming)
−268435455 to 268435455
Position Command
d029 (1 multiplication)*1 − − pulse P. 7-12
Monitor
−268435455 to 268435455
Current Position
d030 (1 multiplication) *1 − − pulse P. 7-12
Monitor
Dual User Monitor (2
d050 Displays data set in b160 and b161. − − − P. 7-13
types of data)
Displays the currently set mode.
I-C (IM motor heavy load)
Inverter Mode Moni-
d060 I-V (IM motor light load) − − − P. 7-13
tor
H-I (IM motor high frequency)
P (PM motor mode)

4 Parameter List
Changes
Parameter Default
No. data
RUN
00: Digital Operator (F001)
01 to 15: Multi-step speed frequency 1 to
15
16: Jogging frequency
18: Modbus communication
Frequency 19: Option
d062 Reference Source 21: Volume − − − P. 7-14
Monitor 22: Pulse train frequency
23: Operation function output
24: DriveProgramming
25: Analog voltage input (O)
26: Analog current input (OI)
27: Analog Input (O) + (OI)
1: Control circuit terminal block
RUN Command 2: Digital Operator
d063 − − − P. 7-14
Source Monitor 3: Modbus communication
4: Option
d080 Fault Counter 0. to 65535. − − time P. 7-14
Fault Monitor 1 Fault Factor
d081
(Latest)
• Output frequency [Hz]*1
• Output Current [A]
d083 Fault Monitor 3 − − − P. 7-15
• Main circuit DC voltage [V]
• Total RUN Time [h]
d086 Fault Monitor 6 • Total Power ON Time [h]
d090 Warning Monitor Warning code − − − P. 7-15
d102 DC Voltage Monitor 0.0 to 1000.0 − − V P. 7-15
Regenerative Brak-
d103 ing Load Rate Moni- 0.0 to 100.0 − − % P. 7-16
tor
Electronic Thermal
d104 0.0 to 100.0 − − % P. 7-16
Load Rate Monitor
Analog Voltage Input 0 to 1023 (1023= Equivalent to A/D con-
d130 − − − P. 7-16
O Monitor verter output of 10.9 V)
Analog Current Input 0 to 1023 (1023= Equivalent to A/D con-
d131 − − − P. 7-16
OI Monitor verter output of 23.3 mA)
Pulse Train Input EA
d133 0.00 to 100.00 − − % P. 7-17
Monitor
d153 PID Deviation −9999.00 to 9999.00*2 − − % P. 7-17
d155 PID Output Monitor −100.00 to 100.00 − − % P. 7-17
*1. When the frequency is displayed, in high-frequency mode, the operator display resolution becomes 0.1
(equivalent to the 3G3MX2-E Series Inverter).

4 Parameter List
4-2 Function Mode

The table below lists the function mode parameters.
If the data exceeds the display digits, the Digital Operator displays the upper digits for monitoring and
the lower digits for setting. To monitor digits that are not displayed, use the digit shift display mode. For
details, refer to Digit Shift Display Mode on page 3-11.
4-2-1 Group F: Basic Function Parameters
4-2 Function Mode

Changes
Parameter
Function name Monitor or data range Default data during Unit Page
No.
RUN
0.0, Starting Frequency to
1st/2nd Maximum Fre-
Output Frequency quency Hz
F001 6.00 Enabled % P. 5-23
Setting/Monitor
When the PID function is
4
enabled: 0.00 to 9999.00*1
1st Acceleration
F002 0.00 to 3600.00*1 10.00 (30.00)*2 Enabled s
4-2-1 Group F: Basic Function Parameters

Time 1
2nd Acceleration
F202 0.00 to 3600.00*1 10.00 (30.00)*2 Enabled s
Time 1
P. 5-32
1st Deceleration
F003 0.00 to 3600.00*1 10.00 (30.00)*2 Enabled s
Time 1
2nd Deceleration
F203 0.00 to 3600.00*1 10.00 (30.00)*2 Enabled s
Time 1
RUN Direction Selec- 00: Forward
F004 00 Enabled*3 − P. 5-21
tion 01: Reverse
*3. Changing the direction during operation has the same effect as when giving a command in the opposite direc-
tion.

4 Parameter List
4-3 Extended Function Mode

In the extended function mode, inverter parameters are categorized in six groups: A, b, C, H, P, and U.
This section provides the parameter list for each group.
Note that the parameters displayed on the Digital Operator vary with the setting in the Display Selection
(b037). To display all parameters, set this parameter to 00 (Complete display).
If the data exceeds the display digits, the Digital Operator displays the upper digits for monitoring and
the lower digits for setting. To monitor digits that are not displayed, use the digit shift display mode. For
details, refer to Digit Shift Display Mode on page 3-11.

You can change the parameter display on the Digital Operator by the Display Selection (b037).
For details, refer to 5-1-1 Display Selection on page 5-3.
• You can set the initial screen displayed after turning on the power supply by the Initial Screen
Selection (b038). For details, refer to 7-6-5 Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen after
Power-on) on page 7-56.
• You can display only the parameters registered as user parameters. It is also possible to
automatically register changed parameters, or directly set specific parameters. For details,
refer to 7-6-11 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function on page 7-60.

4 Parameter List
4-3-1 Group A: Standard Function Parameters
Parameter Changes
Default Set
No. data data
RUN
00: Digital Operator (Volume) *1
01: Control circuit terminal block (Ana-
1st Frequency Refer-
A001 log input) 02 Disabled

ence Selection
03: Modbus communication − P. 5-23
04: Option
2nd Frequency Refer- 06: Pulse train frequency
A201 02 Disabled
ence Selection
Basic operation settings
01: Control terminal block (DrivePro-
1st RUN Command
A002 gramming) 02 Disabled
Selection
02: Digital Operator − P. 5-21
2nd RUN Command 03: Modbus communication
A202
Selection 04: Option
02 Disabled 4
60.0
A003 1st Base Frequency 30.0 to 1st Maximum Frequency (A004) Disabled Hz
(580.0)*2

P. 5-20
60.0
A203 2nd Base Frequency 30.0. to 2nd Maximum Frequency (A204) Disabled Hz
(580.0)*2
1st Maximum Fre- 60.0
A004 1st Base Frequency (A003) to 590.0 Disabled Hz
quency (580.0)*2
P. 5-20
2nd Maximum Fre- 60.0
A204 2nd Base Frequency (A203) to 590.0 Disabled Hz
quency (580.0)*2
00: Switch between O (Voltage) and OI
(Current)
02: Switch between O (Voltage) and vol-
A005 O/OI Selection 00 Disabled − P. 7-22
ume*1
03: Switch between OI (Current) and
volume*1
Analog input
A011 O Start Frequency 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz

A012 O End Frequency 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
A013 O Start Ratio 0. to O End Ratio 0. Enabled % P. 7-25
A014 O End Ratio O Start Ratio to 100. 100. Enabled %
00: O Start Frequency (A011)
A015 O Start Selection 01 Enabled −
01: 0 Hz
1. to 30.
A016 Analog Input Filter 31. (500-ms filter with ±0.1-Hz hystere- 8. Enabled − P. 7-24
sis)
DriveProgramming
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Start/stop via multi-func-
DriveProgramming
A017 tion input PRG terminal) 00 Enabled − P. 7-105
Function Selection
02: Enabled (Start/stop via power on/
off)
*1. This setting is enabled when the Digital Operator with the volume control (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) is connected.

4 Parameter List
Changes
Parameter Default Set
No. data data
RUN
00: Binary (16-step selection with 4 ter-
Multi-step Speed minals)
A019 00 Disabled −
Selection 01: Bit (8-step selection with 7 termi-
nals)
0.00
1st Multi-step Speed
A020 Starting Frequency to 1st Maximum Fre- 6.00 Enabled Hz
Reference 0
quency
0.00
2nd Multi-step Speed
A220 Starting Frequency to 2nd Maximum Fre- 6.00 Enabled Hz
Reference 0
quency
Multi-step Speed
A021
Reference 1
Multi-step Speed
A022
Reference 2
Multi-step Speed
A023
Reference 3
Multi-step Speed
A024
Reference 4
Multi-step Speed
A025
Reference 5
P. 5-48
Multi-step Speed
A026
Reference 6
Multi-step Speed
Multi-step speed, jogging
A027
Reference 7
0.00
Multi-step Speed
A028 Starting Frequency to 0.00 Enabled Hz
Reference 8
Maximum Frequency
Multi-step Speed
A029
Reference 9
Multi-step Speed
A030
Reference 10
Multi-step Speed
A031
Reference 11
Multi-step Speed
A032
Reference 12
Multi-step Speed
A033
Reference 13
Multi-step Speed
A034
Reference 14
Multi-step Speed
A035
Reference 15
A038 Jogging Frequency Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00)*1 6.00 Enabled Hz
00: Free-running on jogging stop/Dis-
abled during operation
01: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/
Disabled during operation
02: DC injection braking on jogging stop/
Jogging Stop Selec- Disabled during operation P. 5-51
A039 04 Enabled −
tion 03: Free-running on jogging stop/
Enabled during operation
04: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/
05: DC injection braking on jogging stop/

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
1st Torque Boost 00: Manual torque boost
Selection 01: Automatic torque boost
2nd Torque Boost 00: Manual torque boost
Selection 01: Automatic torque boost
1st Manual Torque 0.0 to 20.0 (Percentage of 1st Motor
A042 1.0 Enabled %
Boost Voltage Rated Voltage Selection (A082)) P. 5-59

2nd Manual Torque 0.0 to 20.0 (Percentage of 2nd Motor
A242 1.0 Enabled %
Boost Voltage Rated Voltage Selection (A282))
1st Manual Torque 0.0 to 50.0 (Percentage of 1st Base Fre-
A043 5.0 Enabled %
Boost Frequency quency (A003))
2nd Manual Torque 0.0 to 50.0 (Percentage of 2nd Base Fre-
A243 5.0 Enabled %
Boost Frequency quency (A203))
00: Constant torque characteristics
(VC)
01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th
A044 1st Control Method power (VC at low speed)) 00 Disabled −
V/f characteristics
02: Free V/f setting

03: Sensorless vector control *1 P. 5-8
4
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th

A244 2nd Control Method power (VC at low speed)) 00 Disabled −
03: Sensorless vector control *1
A045 1st Output Voltage Gain 20. to 100. 100. Enabled %
2nd Output Voltage P. 7-41
A245 20. to 100. 100. Enabled %
Gain
1st Automatic Torque
A046 Boost Voltage Compen- 0. to 255. 100. Enabled −
sation Gain
2nd Automatic Torque
A246 Boost Voltage Compen- 0. to 255. 100. Enabled −
sation Gain
P. 5-59
1st Automatic Torque
A047 Boost Slip Compen- 0. to 255. 0. Enabled −
sation Gain
2nd Automatic
A247 Torque Boost Slip 0. to 255. 0. Enabled −
Compensation Gain
00: Disabled
DC Injection Braking 01: Enabled
A051 00 Enabled −
Selection 02: Enabled (Operates only at set fre-
quency)
DC injection braking
DC Injection Braking
A052 0.00 to 60.00 0.50 Enabled Hz
Frequency
A053 0.0 to 5.0 0.0 Enabled s P. 7-93
Delay Time
DC Injection Braking 0. to 100./70.
A054 50. Enabled %
Power (Heavy load/Light load)
A055 0.0 to 60.0 0.5 Enabled s
Time
DC Injection Braking 00: Edge operation
A056 01 Enabled −
Edge/Level Selection 01: Level operation
*1. Sensorless vector control can be set in the heavy load mode only.

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Startup DC Injection 0. to 100./70.
DC injection braking
A057 0. Enabled %
Braking Power (Heavy load/Light load)
Startup DC Injection
A058 0.0 to 60.0 0.0 Enabled s
Braking Time P. 7-93
2.0 to 15.0/10.0
A059*1 (Reserved) (Heavy load/Light load)
5.0/2.0 Enabled kHz
0.00
1st Frequency Upper
A061 1st Frequency Lower Limit to 1st Maxi- 0.00 Enabled Hz
Limit
mum Frequency
0.00
2nd Frequency
A261 2nd Frequency Lower Limit to 2nd Maxi- 0.00 Enabled Hz
Upper Limit
mum Frequency
P. 5-30
0.00
1st Frequency Lower
A062 Starting Frequency to 1st Frequency 0.00 Enabled Hz
Limit
Upper Limit
0.00
Limit, jump
2nd Frequency
A262 Starting Frequency to 2nd Frequency 0.00 Enabled Hz
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
A063 Jump Frequency 1 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
Jump Frequency
A064
Width 1 0.00 to 10.00 (100.00)*2 0.50 Enabled Hz

Jump Frequency P. 7-36
A066

Jump Frequency
A068
0.00 to Starting Frequency: Disabled

Acceleration stop
Acceleration Stop Frequency above Starting Frequency to

A069 0.00 Enabled Hz
Frequency 99.99
100.0 to 590.00 P. 7-37
Acceleration Stop 0.0: Disabled
A070 0.0 Enabled s
Time 0.1 to 60.0
00: Disabled
A071 PID Selection 01: Enabled 00 Enabled −
02: Enabled (Reverse output enabled)
A072 PID P Gain 0.00 to 25.00 1.00 Enabled −
PID Braking
A073 PID I Gain 0.0 to 3600.0 1.0 Enabled s

A074 PID D Gain 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 Enabled s
P. 7-44
A075 PID Scale 0.01 to 99.99 1.00 Enabled time
00: OI (Current)
01: O (Voltage)
PID Feedback Selec-
A076 02: Modbus communication 00 Enabled −
tion
03: Pulse train frequency
*1. Changing it does not affect the operation of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter.

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Disabled (Deviation = Target value
PID Deviation − Feedback value)
A077 00 Enabled −
Reverse Output 01: Enabled (Deviation = Feedback
PID Braking
value − Target value)

PID Variable Range P. 7-44
A078 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 Enabled %
Limit

00: Disabled
PID Feedforward
A079 01: O (Voltage) 00 Enabled −
Selection
02: OI (Current)
A081 1st AVR Selection 00: Always ON 02 Enabled −
01: Always OFF P. 7-42
A281 2nd AVR Selection 02 Enabled −
02: OFF during deceleration
1st Motor Rated Volt- 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
A082 200/400 Disabled V
AVR
age Selection
P. 5-20
2nd Motor Rated 400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
A282 200/400 Disabled V
Voltage Selection
A083 AVR Filter Time Constant 0.000 to 10.000 0.300 Enabled s
A084
AVR Gain at Deceler-
50. to 200. 100. Enabled %
P. 7-42 4
ation
Operation Mode 00: Normal operation

Selection 01: Energy-saving operation
Energy-saving P. 7-50
A086 Response/Accuracy 0.0 to 100.0 50.0 Enabled %
Adjustment
1st Acceleration 10.00
A092 Enabled
Time 2 (15.00)*2
2nd Acceleration 10.00
A292 Enabled
Time 2 (15.00)*2
0.00 to 3600.00*1 s
1st Deceleration 10.00
Operation mode, acceleration/deceleration function
A093 Enabled
Time 2 (15.00)*2
2nd Deceleration 10.00
A293 Enabled
Time 2 (15.00)*2
00: Switch via 2CH terminal (multi-func-
1st tion input: 09)
A094 2-step Acceleration/ 00 Disabled
Deceleration Selection 01: Switch by setting (A095/A295/
A096/A296) −
2nd 02: Switch only during forward/reverse
P. 5-36
A294 2-step Acceleration/ switching 00 Disabled
Deceleration Selection
1st
A095 2-step Acceleration 0.00 Enabled
Frequency
2nd
A295 2-step Acceleration 0.00 Enabled
Frequency
0.00 to 590.00 Hz
1st
A096 2-step Deceleration 0.00 Enabled
Frequency
2nd
A296 2-step Deceleration 0.00 Enabled
Frequency
Acceleration 00: Line
A097 01 Disabled
Pattern Selection 01: S-shape curve
02: U-shape curve − P. 5-33
Deceleration
A098 03: Inverted U-shape curve 01 Disabled
Pattern Selection
04: EL-S-shape curve

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
A101 OI Start Frequency 0.00 Enabled
Acceleration/Deceleration Frequency adjustment
0.00 to 590.00 Hz
A102 OI End Frequency 0.00 Enabled
A103 OI Start Ratio 0. to OI End Ratio 20. Enabled %
A104 OI End Ratio OI Start Ratio to 100 100. Enabled % P. 7-25
00: OI Start Frequency (A101)
A105 OI Start Selection 01: 0 Hz 00 Enabled −
Acceleration Curve
A131 2 Enabled
Parameter
1 (Small curve) to 10 (Large curve) − P. 5-33
Deceleration Curve
A132 2 Enabled
Parameter
00: Digital Operator (A020/A220)

Calculation Fre-
A141 01: Digital Operator (Volume)*1 02 Enabled
quency Selection 1
02: Input O (Voltage)
03: Input OI (Current) −
Calculation frequency
Calculation Fre- 04: Modbus communication

A142 03 Enabled P. 7-39
quency Selection 2 05: Option
00: Addition (A141 + A142)
Calculation Function
A143 01: Subtract ion (A141 − A142) 00 Enabled −
Operator Selection
02: Multiplication (A141  A142)
Frequency Addition
A145 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
Amount Setting
P. 7-39
Frequency Addition 00: Frequency reference + A145
A146 00 Enabled −
Sign Selection 01: Frequency reference − A145
EL-S Shape Acceler-
Acceleration/Deceleration
A150 10. Disabled

ation Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape Acceler-
A151 10. Disabled
ation Curve Ratio 2
EL-S Shape Deceler- 0. to 50. % P. 5-33
A152 10. Disabled
ation Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape Deceler-

A153 10. Disabled
ation Curve Ratio 2
0.00 to Starting Frequency: Disabled

Deceleration stop
Deceleration Stop
A154 Frequency above Starting Frequency to 0.00 Enabled Hz
Frequency
590.00
0.0: Disabled P. 7-37
Deceleration Stop
A155 0.0 Enabled s
Time 0.1 to 60.0
PID Sleep Operation

A156 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
Level
PID
P. 7-44
PID Sleep Operation
A157 0.0 to 25.5 0.0 Enabled s
Delay Time

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
A161 VR Start Frequency 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
Frequency adjustment
A162 VR End Frequency 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz

A163 VR Start Ratio 0. to VR End Ratio 0. Enabled %
A164 VR End Ratio VR Start Ratio to 100 100. Enabled % P. 7-25
00: VR Start Frequency (A161)

A165 VR Start Selection 01: 0 Hz 01 Enabled −

4 Parameter List
4-3-2 Group b: Detailed Function Parameters
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Trip
01: 0-Hz restart
Power Interruption/
02: Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff
b001 Undervoltage Restart 00 Enabled −
Selection 03: Trip after frequency pull-in deceler-
ation stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
Allowable Power
b002 0.3 to 25.0 1.0 Enabled s
Interruption Time
b003 Restart Standby Time 0.3 to 100.0 1.0 Enabled s
Momentary power interruption/Trip restart
00: Disabled
Power Interruption/ 01: Enabled
b004 Undervoltage Trip 02: Disabled during stop and decelera- 00 Enabled −
Selection During Stop tion stop by turning off the RUN
command
Power Interruption 00: 16 times
b005 00 Enabled − P. 7-62
Restart Count 01: No limit
Trip after frequency
b007 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
pull-in deceleration stop
00: Trip
01: 0-Hz restart
Overvoltage/
b008 Overcurrent Restart 00 Enabled −
Selection 03: Trip after frequency pull-in deceler-
ation stop
Overvoltage/
b010 Overcurrent Restart 1 to 3 3 Enabled time
Count
Overvoltage/
b011 Overcurrent Restart 0.3 to 100.0 1.0 Enabled s
Standby Time

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Rated
1st Electronic Ther-
b012 current of Enabled A
mal Level
0.20  Rated current to 1.00  Rated cur- inverter
rent Rated
2nd Electronic Ther-
mal Level
inverter
P. 5-15

1st Electronic Ther- 00: Reduced torque characteristics
b013 mal Characteristics 01: Constant torque characteristics 01 Enabled
Selection
−
Electronic thermal
2nd Electronic Ther- 02: Free setting

b213 mal Characteristics 01 Enabled
Selection
Free-electronic Ther- 0. to Free-electronic Thermal Frequency
b015 0. Enabled Hz
mal Frequency 1 2
Free-electronic Ther-
b016 0.00 to 1.00  Rated current 0.00 Enabled A
mal Current 1
Free-electronic Ther- Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 1 to
b017 0. Enabled Hz
mal Frequency 2 Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 3
P. 7-73 4
mal Current 2

Free-electronic Ther- Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 2 to
b019 0. Enabled Hz
mal Frequency 3 590.
mal Current 3

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Disabled
1st Overload Limit
b021 01: Enabled during acceleration and 01 Enabled
Selection
constant speed
02: Enabled during constant speed −
2nd Overload Limit 03: Enabled during acceleration and
b221 01 Enabled
Selection constant speed (Accelerated during
regeneration)
1st Overload Limit Rated
b022 Enabled A
Level 0.20  Rated current to 2.00  Rated cur- current
rent (Heavy load) 
1.50
2nd Overload Limit 0.20  Rated current to 1.50  Rated cur- (Normal)
b222 Enabled A
Level rent (Light load) 1.20
(Light)
1st Overload Limit
b023 1.0 Enabled
Parameter
0.1 to 3000.0 s
2nd Overload Limit
b223 1.0 Enabled P. 7-78
Parameter
Overload limit, overcurrent protection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled during acceleration and
constant speed
1st Overload Limit
b024 02: Enabled during constant speed 01 Enabled −
Selection 2
03: Enabled during acceleration and
constant speed (Accelerated during
regeneration)
Rated
0.20  Rated current to 2.00  Rated cur- current
rent (Heavy load) 
1st Overload Limit
b025 1.50 Enabled A
Level 2 0.20  Rated current to 1.50  Rated cur- (Normal)
rent (Light load) 1.20
(Light)
1st Overload Limit
b026 0.1 to 3000.0 1.0 Enabled s
Parameter 2
00: Disabled
Overcurrent Suppres- 01: Enabled
b027 01 Enabled − P. 7-81
sion Selection 02: Enabled (at reduced voltage
startup)
0.20  Rated current to 2.00  Rated cur-
rent (Heavy load) Rated
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Level 0.20  Rated current to 1.50  Rated cur- inverter
rent (Light load)
Frequency Pull-in P. 5-44
b029 0.1 to 3000.0 0.5 Enabled s
Restart Parameter P. 7-62
Starting Frequency 00: Frequency at interruption
Selection at 01: Maximum frequency
b030 00 Enabled −
Frequency Pull-in 02: Set frequency (Frequency refer-
Restart ence)

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Data other than b031 cannot be
changed when terminal SFT is ON.
01: Data other than b031 and the set
frequency cannot be changed when
terminal SFT is ON.
Lock
b031 Soft Lock Selection 01 Enabled − P. 7-54

02: Data other than b031 cannot be

changed.
03: Data other than b031 and specified
frequency parameter cannot be
changed.
b033 Motor Cable Length 5. to 20. 10. Enabled m P. 6-4
RUN Time/Power ON 0: Disabled (Function does not activate)
b034 0. Enabled 10 h P. 7-84
Time Detection Level 1. to 65535.
00: No direction limit
01: Only Forward is enabled (Reverse
RUN Direction Limit
b035 is limited) 00 Disabled − P. 7-38
Selection
02: Only Reverse is enabled
(Forward is limited) 4
0: Reduced voltage startup disabled 1
Reduced Voltage (Reduced voltage startup time: short) to
−

b036 2 Enabled P. 7-36
Auxiliary function
Startup Selection 255 (Reduced voltage startup time:

long)
00: Complete display
01: Individual display of functions
b037 Display Selection 02: User setting + d001, F001, b037 00 Enabled − P. 5-3
03: Data comparison display
05: Monitor display + b037
000: Screen on which the Enter key
was last pressed
Initial Screen Selec-
b038 001 to 060: d001 to d060 001 Enabled − P. 7-56
tion
201: F001
202: Do not set.
User Parameter 00: Disabled
b039 Automatic Setting 01: Enabled 00 Enabled − P. 7-60
Function

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switching
b040 Torque Limit Selection 00 Enabled −
02: Analog voltage input
03: Option (No applicable Option)
Torque Limit 1 (Four-
quadrant Mode For-
b041 200. Enabled
ward Power Run-
ning)
quadrant Mode P. 6-12
Torque limit
b042 200. Enabled

Reverse Regenera-
0. to 200.
tion) %
255: no (Torque limit disabled)
quadrant Mode
b043 200. Enabled
Reverse Power Run-
ning)
b044 quadrant Mode For- 200. Enabled
ward Regeneration)
Torque LADSTOP 00: Disabled
b045 00 Enabled − P. 6-14
Selection 01: Enabled
Reverse Rotation 00: Disabled
b046 00 Enabled − P. 6-11
Prevention Selection 01: Enabled
00: Heavy load mode (CT)
Mode
Heavy load/Light
b049 01: Light load mode (VT) 00 Disabled − P. 5-11
Load Selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Deceleration stop)
Deceleration Stop on Power Interruption
Deceleration Stop
02: Enabled (Constant voltage, without
b050 Selection on Power 00 Disabled −
Interruption recovery)
03: Enabled (Constant voltage, with
recovery)
Starting Voltage on 200-V class: 0.0 to 400.0 220.0/
b051 Enabled V
Power Interruption 400-V class: 0.0 to 800.0 440.0
P. 7-69
Deceleration Hold 200-V class: 0.0 to 400.0 360.0/
b052 Level on Power Inter- Enabled V
400-V class: 0.0 to 800.0 720.0
ruption
Deceleration Time on
b053 0.01 to 3600.00 1.00 Enabled s
Power Interruption
Deceleration Starting
b054 Width on Power 0.00 to 10.00 (100.00)*1 0.00 Enabled Hz
Interruption

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Set an upper limit level.
Window Comparator Setting range: 0. to 100.
b060 100. Enabled %
O Upper Limit Level Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis
width  2
Set a lower limit level.

b061 0. Enabled %
O Lower Limit Level Upper limit: Upper limit level − Hysteresis
width  2
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Window Comparator
b062 Setting range: 0. to 10. 0. Enabled %
O Hysteresis Width
Upper limit: (Upper limit level − Lower
limit level) / 2
Window comparator
Set an upper limit level.

b063 100. Enabled %
OI Upper Limit Level Lower limit: Lower limit level + Hysteresis P. 7-90
width  2
4
Set a lower limit level.

b064 0. Enabled %
OI Lower Limit Level Upper limit: Upper limit level − Hysteresis
width  2
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
lower limit levels.
Window Comparator
b065 Setting range: 0. to 10. 0. Enabled %
OI Hysteresis Width
Upper limit: (Upper limit level − Lower
limit level) / 2
Analog Operation 0. to 100.
b070 Level at O no Enabled %
Disconnection 255: no (Disabled)
Analog Operation 0. to 100.
b071 Level at OI Discon- no Enabled %
nection 255: no (Disabled)

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Ambient Tempera-
b075 −10. to 50. 40 Enabled °C P. 7-87
ture
Integrated Power 00: Clear disabled
b078 00 Enabled −
Clear 01: Clear with the Enter key
P. 7-9
Integrated Power
b079 1. to 1000. 1. Enabled −
Display Scale
Starting
b082
Frequency 0.01 to 10.00 (100.00)*1 1.50 Enabled Hz P. 7-35
2.0 to 15.0 or 10.0 (Heavy load/Light

10.0/
b083 Carrier Frequency load) (2.0 to 10.0)*1 Enabled kHz P. 7-31
2.0 (5.0)*1
This parameter requires derating.
00: Initialization disabled
01: Clearing Fault Monitor
Initialization Selec- 02: Initialize data
b084 00 Disabled −
tion 03: Clear fault monitor + Initialize data P. 5-5
04: Clear fault monitor + Initialize data +
Clear DriveProgramming
Initialization Data
b085 Do not change from 00. 00 Disabled −
Selection
Frequency Conver-
b086 0.01 to 99.99 1.00 Enabled − P. 7-6
sion Coefficient
00: Enabled
Auxiliary function
b087 STOP Key Selection 01: Disabled 00 Enabled − P. 5-41

02: Only RESET enabled
00: 0-Hz restart
Free-run Stop Selec-
b088 01: Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff 00 Enabled − P. 5-38
tion
00: Disabled
Automatic Carrier 01: Enabled (dependent on current)
b089 01 Enabled − P. 7-32
Reduction 02: Enabled (dependent on cooling fin
temperature)
Usage Rate of
0.0: Regenerative braking not active 0.1
b090 Regenerative Brak- 0.0 Enabled % P. 5-64
to 100.0 (limited by setting in b097)
ing
00: Deceleration stop
b091 Stop Selection 00 Enabled − P. 5-38
01: Free-run stop
00: Always enabled
01: Enabled only during operation (includ-
b092 Cooling Fan Operation ing 3 minutes after power-on and 3 min- 01 Enabled −
utes after Inverter operation stop) P. 7-86
02: Dependent on fin temperature
Total Fan Operation 00: Clear disabled
b093 00 Enabled −
Time Clear 01: Clear (Set at time of replacement)
00: All data
01: All data other than terminals/com-
Initialization Target munications
b094 00 Disabled − P. 5-5
Setting 02: U*** registration function only
03: Other than U*** registration function
and b37

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Disabled (Function not active)
Regenerative Brak- 01: Enabled (Disabled during stop)
b095 00 Enabled −
ing Selection 02: Enabled (Enabled during operation
and stop)
Auxiliary function
Regenerative Braking 200-V class: 330. to 400.

b096 360./720. Enabled V P. 5-64
ON Level 400-V class: 660. to 800.

Mini-
Braking Resistor mum
b097 Minimum connection resistance to 600.0 Enabled 
Value resis-
tance
Ground Fault Detec- 00: Disabled
b098 01 Disabled − P. 7-92
tion Selection*1 01: Enabled
Free V/f 0.: Disabled
b100 0. Disabled Hz
Frequency 1 1. to Free V/f Frequency 2
b101 Free V/f Voltage 1 0.0 to 800.0 0.0 Disabled V
0.: Disabled
Free V/f
b102
Frequency 2
Free V/f Frequency 1 to Free V/f Fre- 0. Disabled Hz 4
quency 3

0.: Disabled
Free V/f
b104 Free V/f Frequency 2 to Free V/f Fre- 0. Disabled Hz
Frequency 3
quency 4
V/f free function
0.: Disabled
Free V/f
Frequency 4 P. 5-9
quency 5
0.: Disabled
Free V/f
Frequency 5
quency 6
0.: Disabled
Free V/f
Frequency 6
quency 7
Free V/f 0.: Disabled
b112 0. Disabled Hz
Frequency 7 Free V/f Frequency 6 to 590.*2
*1. This parameter is added to the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter.
*2. If the free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) is set to less than 30 Hz, the inverter will not operate.

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC Injection Braking
Brake Control Func-
b120 enabled during stop) 00 Enabled −
tion Selection
02: Enabled (DC Injection Braking dis-
abled during stop)
Brake Release Wait
b121 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 Enabled s
Time
Acceleration Wait
b122 Time on Brake Con- 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 Enabled s
Brake control
trol
Stop Wait Time on P. 6-26
b123 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 Enabled s
Brake Control
Brake Error Detec-
b124 0.00 to 5.00 0.00 Enabled s
tion Time
Brake Release Fre-
b125 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
quency
Rated
Brake Release Cur- 0.00 to 2.00  Inverter rated
rent current
inverter
Brake Force Fre-
b127 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
quency
Overvoltage Sup- 00: Disabled
pression Function 01: Enabled (DC voltage kept constant)
Overvoltage suppression during deceleration
b130 01 Enabled −
Selection During 02: Enabled (Acceleration enabled)
Deceleration
Overvoltage Sup- 200-V class: 330. to 400.
380./
b131 pression Level 400-V class: 660. to 800. Enabled V
760.
During Deceleration
Overvoltage Protec-
b132 tion Parameter 0.10 to 30.00 1.00 Enabled s
P. 5-62
During Deceleration
Overvoltage Sup-
pression Propor-
b133 0.00 to 5.00 0.20 Enabled −
tional Gain During
Deceleration
Overvoltage Sup-
pression Integral
b134 0.0 to 150.0 1.0 Enabled s
Time During Deceler-
ation

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
GS Input Operation 00: No trip (shut off by hardware) P. 7-
b145 00 Enabled − 103
Selection 01: Trip
Inverter Display on 001 to 060
b150 001 Enabled − P. 7-57
Operator Connection (Corresponding to d001 to d060)
User Monitor Selection 001 to 030
b160 001 Enabled −

1 (Corresponding to d001 to d030)
P. 7-13
User Monitor Selection 001 to 030
Auxiliary function
b161 002 Enabled −

2 (Corresponding to d001 to d030)
d001/d007 Data Set- 00: Disabled P. 7-4
b163 00 Enabled − P. 7-6
ting Selection 01: Enabled
Initial Screen Auto- 00: Disabled
b164 00 Enabled − P. 7-56
matic Return Function 01: Enabled
00: Trip
Operation Selection 01: Trip after deceleration stop
b165 at External Operator 02: Ignore 02 Enabled − P. 7-56
Disconnection 03: Free-run stop 4
b166 (Reserved) Do not change the default 00. 00 − − −

00: Selection disabled
01: Induction motor mode
Mode
Inverter Mode Selec-

b171 02: Induction motor high-frequency 00 Disabled − P. 6-58
tion
mode
03: PM motor mode
Initialization Execu- 00: Function disabled
b180 00 Disabled − P. 5-5
tion 01: Execute initialization
0000: Function disabled
Auxiliary function
b190 Password A Setting 0000 Disabled −

0001 to FFFF: Password
Password A for
b191 0000 to FFFF 0000 Disabled −
Authentication
P. 7-57
b192 Password B Setting 0000 Disabled −
0001 to FFFF: Password
Password B for
b193 0000 to FFFF 0000 Disabled −
Authentication
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Fixed subtraction ratio)
Motor Electronic Ther-
b910 02: Enabled (b911 subtraction ratio) 03 Enabled −
mal Selection
03: Enabled (b912 time parameter sub-
traction)
Electronic thermal
Motor Electronic Ther- 0.10 to 100000.00*1

b911 600.00 Enabled s
mal Subtraction Ratio (Displays upper 5 digits)
Motor Electronic Ther- P. 7-74
0.10 to 100000.00*1
b912 mal Subtraction Time 120.00 Enabled s
Constant (Displays upper 5 digits)
Motor Electronic Ther-
b913 1.0 to 200.0 100.0 Enabled %
mal Integration Gain
Electronic Thermal 00: Disabled
b914 Load Rate at Power- 01: Enabled 01 Enabled −
off*2

4 Parameter List
4-3-3 Group C: Multi-function Terminal Function Parameters
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: FW (Forward)
01: RV (Reverse)
02: CF1 (Multi-step speed setting binary 1)
Multi-function Input 1 03: CF2 (Multi-step speed setting binary 2) 00
C001 04: CF3 (Multi-step speed setting binary 3)
(FW) Enabled
Selection 05: CF4 (Multi-step speed setting binary 4)
06: JG (Jogging)
07: DB (External DC injection braking)
08: SET (2nd control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
11: FRS (Free-run stop)
12: EXT (External trip)
13: USP (Power recovery restart prevention func-
Multi-function Input 2 tion) 01
C002 14: CS (Commercial switching) (RV) Enabled
Selection
15: SFT (Soft lock)
16: AT (Analog input switching)
18: RS (Reset)
19: TH (PTC thermistor thermal protection, C005
only)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
Multi-function Input 3 22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
18
C003 23: PID (PID disabled)
(RS) Enabled
Selection 24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
27: UP (Remote operation accelerated)
28: DWN (Remote operation decelerated)
29: UDC (Remote operation data clear)
31: OPE (Forced operator function)
Multi-function input terminals
32: SF1 (Multi-step speed setting bit 1)

Multi-function Input 4 35: SF4 (Multi-step speed setting bit 4) 12
C004 36: SF5 (Multi-step speed setting bit 5) (EXT) Enabled
Selection 37: SF6 (Multi-step speed setting bit 6) P. 5-47
− P. 7-18
39: OLR (Overload limit switching)
40: TL (Torque limit enabled)
41: TRQ1 (Torque limit switching 1)
44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
Multi-function Input 5 47: PCLR (Current position clear) 02
C005 (CF1) Enabled
Selection 50: ADD (Set frequency A145 addition)
51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)
52: ATR (Torque command input permission)
53: KHC (Integrated power clear)
56: MI1 (General-purpose input 1)
Multi-function Input 6 60: MI5 (General-purpose input 5) 03
C006 61: MI6 (General-purpose input 6) (CF2) Enabled
Selection 62: MI7 (General-purpose input 7)
65: AHD (Analog command held)
66: CP1 (Position command selection 1)
69: ORL (Origin search limit signal)
70: ORG (Origin search startup signal)
73: SPD (Speed/Position switching)
81: 485 (Start co-inverter communication)
Multi-function Input 7 82: PRG (DriveProgramming start)
83: HLD (Retain output frequency) 06
C007 (JG) Enabled
Selection 84: ROK (Permission of RUN command)
85: EB (Rotation direction detection, C007
only)
86: DISP (Display fixed)
91: PSET (Preset position)
255: no (No allocation)

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Multi-function Input 1
C011 00 Enabled
Operation Selection
Multi-function input terminals
C012 00 Enabled
Operation Selection
C013 00 Enabled
Operation Selection

Multi-function Input 4 00: NO (NO contact)
C014 00 Enabled − P. 5-47
Operation Selection 01: NC (NC contact)
C015 00 Enabled
Operation Selection
C016 00 Enabled
Operation Selection
C017 00 Enabled
Operation Selection
00: RUN (Signal during RUN)
01: FA1 (Constant speed arrival signal)
02: FA2 (Set frequency exceeded signal)
03: OL (Overload warning)
04: OD (Excessive PID deviation)
05: AL (Alarm signal)
06: FA3 (Set-frequency only signal)
4
Multi-function Output 07: OTQ (Overtorque/Undertorque signal) 00
C021 (RUN) Enabled
11 Selection 09: UV (Signal during undervoltage)
10: TRQ (Torque limit)

11: RNT (RUN time over)
12: ONT (Power ON time over)
13: THM (Electronic thermal warning)
19: BRK (Brake release)
20: BER (Brake error)
21: ZS (0-Hz detection signal)
22: DSE (Excessive speed deviation)
23: POK (Position ready)
Multi-function output terminals
24: FA4 (Set frequency exceeded signal 2)

25: FA5 (Set-frequency only signal 2)
26: OL2 (Overload warning 2)
27: ODc (Analog O disconnection detection)
28: OIDc (Analog OI disconnection detection)
Multi-function Output 31: FBV (PID feedback comparison signal) 01
C022 (FA1) Enabled P. 5-54
12 Selection 32: NDc (Communications disconnection −
detection) P. 7-20
33: LOG1 (Logic operation output 1)
39: WAC (Capacitor life warning signal)
40: WAF (Cooling fan life warning signal)
41: FR (Starting contact signal)
42: OHF (Cooling fin overheat warning)
43: LOC (Low current signal)
44: MO1 (General-purpose output 1)
50: IRDY (Operation ready)
51: FWR (Forward run signal)
Multi-function Relay 52: RVR (Reverse run signal)
53: MJA (Fatal fault signal) 05
C026 Output (AL1, AL2) (AL) Enabled
Function Selection 54: WCO (Window comparator O)
55: WCOI (Window comparator OI)
58: FREF (Frequency reference source)
59: REF (RUN command source)
60: SETM (Motor 2 selection)
62: EDM (Safety device monitor)*1
63: OPO (Option)
*1. When the EDM function selector switch is ON, C021 is forcibly allocated to 62 (EDM). You cannot set 62 (EDM) manu-
ally. If you turn ON and then OFF the EDM function selector switch, C021 is set to 255 (no: No allocation).

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque (Only in the sensor-
less vector control)
03: Digital output frequency
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
C027 EO Selection 07 Enabled − P. 7-27
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
08: Digital current monitor
10: Cooling fin temperature
12: DriveProgramming (YA(0))
15: Pulse train input monitor
Analog monitor

01: Output current
02: Output torque (Only in the sensor-
less vector control)
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
C028 AM Selection 06: Electronic thermal load rate 07 Enabled − P. 7-29
07: LAD frequency
10: Cooling fin temperature
11: Output torque (signed) (Only in the
sensorless vector control)
13: DriveProgramming (YA(1))
0.20  Rated current to 2.00  Rated cur-
Digital Current Moni- rent Rated
C030 Enabled A P. 7-28
tor Reference Value (Current value at digital current monitor current
output 1440 Hz)
Multi-function output terminals
C031 11 Operation Selec- 00 Enabled

tion
C032 12 Operation Selec- 00 Enabled
00: NO (NO contact)
tion − P. 5-54
01: NC (NC contact)
Multi-function Relay
C036 Output (AL1, AL2) 01 Enabled
Operation Selection

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Enabled during acceleration/decel-
Low Current Signal
C038 eration and constant speed 01 Enabled −
Output Selection
Level and output terminal status
01: Enabled during constant speed P. 7-89

Low Current Detec- 0.00  Rated current to 2.00  Rated cur- Rated
C039 Enabled A
tion Level rent current
Overload Warning 00: Enabled during acceleration/decel-
eration and constant speed −

C040 Signal Output Selec- 01 Enabled
tion 01: Enabled during constant speed
0.00: Overload warning disabled Rated
1st Overload Warn- P. 7-80
C041
ing Level 0.01  Rated current to 2.00  Rated cur- current Enabled
rent  1.15
A
Rated
2nd Overload Warn-
C241 current Enabled
ing Level
 1.15

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
0.0 Not output arrival signal
Arrival Frequency 0: during acceleration.
C042 0.00 Enabled Hz
During Acceleration 1
0.01 to 590.00
P. 7-83
Arrival Frequency 0.0 Not output arrival signal
C043 During 0: during deceleration. 0.00 Enabled Hz
Deceleration 1 0.01 to 590.00
PID Deviation Exces-
C044 0.0 to 100.0 3.0 Enabled % P. 7-44
sive Level
0.0 Not output arrival signal during
Arrival Frequency 0: acceleration.
C045 0.00 Enabled Hz
During Acceleration 2
0.01 to 590.00
P. 7-83
Arrival Frequency 0.0 Not output arrival signal during
C046 During 0: deceleration. 0.00 Enabled Hz
Deceleration 2 0.01 to 590.00
Pulse Train Output
C047 0.01 to 99.99 1.00 Enabled − P. 7-28
EO Scale
Feedback Compari-
C052 0.0 to 100.0 100.0 Enabled %
Level and output terminal status
son Signal Off Level

P. 7-44
Feedback Compari-
C053 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 Enabled %
son Signal On Level
Overtorque/Under- 00: Overtorque
C054 00 Enabled −
torque Selection 01: Undertorque
Overtorque/Under-
torque Level
C055 100. Enabled
(Forward Power Run-
ning)
Overtorque/Under-
torque Level
C056 100. Enabled
(Reverse Regenera-
tion)
0. to 200. %
Overtorque/Under- P. 6-15
torque Level
C057 100. Enabled
(Reverse Power
Running)
Overtorque/Under-
torque Level
C058 100. Enabled
(Forward Regenera-
tion)
Overtorque/Under- 00: Enabled during acceleration/decel-
C059 torque Signal Opera- eration and constant speed 01 Enabled −
tion 01: Enabled only during constant speed
Electronic Thermal
C061 0. to 100. 90. Enabled % P. 7-77
Warning Level
C063 0 Hz Detection Level 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 Enabled Hz P. 5-57
Cooling Fin Over-
C064 0. to 110. 100. Enabled °C P. 7-88
heat Warning Level

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
03: 2400 bps
04: 4800 bps
Communication 05: 9600 bps
Speed Selection 06: 19.2 kbps
C071 05 Enabled − P. 8-5
(Baud Rate Selec- 07: 38.4 kbps
tion) 08: 57.6 kbps

09: 76.8 kbps
10: 115.2 kbps
Communications Function
Communication Sta-
C072 1. to 247. 1. Enabled −
tion No. Selection
00: No parity
Communication Par-
C074 01: Even parity 00 Enabled −
ity Selection
02: Odd parity
Communication Stop 1: 1 bit
C075 1 Enabled −
Bit Selection 2: 2 bits
00: Trip
P. 8-5
Operation Selection 01: Trip after deceleration stop 4
C076 on Communication 02: Ignore 02 Enabled −
Error 03: Free-run stop

Communication Error 0.00: Timeout disabled
C077 0.00 Enabled s
Timeout Time 0.01 to 99.99
Communication Wait
C078 0. to 1000. 0. Enabled ms
Time
C081 O Adjustment 0.0 to 200.0 100.0 Enabled %
P. 7-25
Adjustment
C082 OI Adjustment 0.0 to 200.0 100.0 Enabled %

Thermistor Adjust-
C085 0.0 to 200.0 100.0 Enabled % P. 7-82
ment
C091 (Reserved) Do not change the default 00. 00 − − −
Communication 01: Co-inverter communication
C096 00 Enabled −
Communications Functions
Selection 02: Co-inverter communication (man-

agement inverter)
Co-inverter Commu-
C098 nication Starting Sta- 1. to 8. 1. Disabled −
tion Number P. 8-31
Co-inverter Commu-
C099 nication Ending Sta- 1. to 8. 1. Disabled −
tion Number
Co-inverter Commu- 00: Start via 485 terminal
C100 nication Start Selec- 01: Constant communication 00 Disabled −
tion

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
UP/DWN Storage 00: Not store frequency data
C101 00 Enabled − P. 7-40
Selection 01: Store frequency data
00: Trip reset at power-on
01: Trip reset at power-off
C102 Reset Selection 02: Enabled only during trip (Reset at 02 Enabled −
power-on)
P. 5-42
03: Trip reset only
00: 0-Hz restart
Reset Restart Selec-
C103 01: Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff 00 Enabled −
tion
Auxiliary function

UP/DWN Clear 00: 0 Hz
C104 00 Enabled − P. 7-40
Selection 01: EEPROM data at power-on
C105 EO Gain Setting 50. to 200. 100. Enabled % P. 7-28
C106 AM Gain Setting 50. to 200. 100. Enabled % P. 7-29
C109 AM Bias Setting 0. to 100. 0. Enabled % P. 7-29
0.0 Overload warning disabled
0: Rated
1st Overload Warn-
C111 current Enabled A P. 7-80
ing Level 2 0.01  Rated current to 2.00  Rated cur-  1.15
rent
Jog Sensitivity Set- 1. to 24.
C117 1. Enabled −
ting*1
P. 7-61
Jog Carry Sensitivity 1. to 100.
C118 20. Enabled −
Setting*1
C130 0.0 Enabled
11 ON Delay Time
C131 0.0 Enabled
11 OFF Delay Time
C132 0.0 Enabled
12 ON Delay Time
C133 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 Enabled s P. 5-55
12 OFF Delay Time
C140 Output ON Delay 0.0 Enabled
I/O terminal function
Time
C141 Output OFF Delay 0.0 Enabled
Time
Same as options for C021 (33 to 35:
Logic Output Signal 1
C142 LOG1 to LOG3, 63: OPO, and 255: no 00 Enabled −
Selection 1
cannot be selected.)
Selection 2
00: AND P. 7-85
C144 01: OR 00 Enabled −
Operator Selection
02: XOR
Selection 1

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Selection 2
00: AND
Operator Selection
02: XOR

C148 LOG1 to LOG3, 63: OPO, and 255: no 00 Enabled − P. 7-85
Selection 1
Selection 2
00: AND
I/O terminal function

Operator Selection
02: XOR
Multi-function Input
C160 1. Enabled
1 Response Time
C161
1. Enabled
4
2 Response Time
C162 1. Enabled

3 Response Time
C163 0. to 200. ( 2 ms) 1. Enabled ms P. 5-47
4 Response Time
C164 1. Enabled
5 Response Time
C165 1. Enabled
6 Response Time
C166 1. Enabled
7 Response Time
Multi-step Speed/
C169 Position Determina- 0. to 200. ( 10 ms) 0. Enabled ms P. 6-45
tion Time

4 Parameter List
4-3-4 Group H: Motor Control Parameters
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Disabled
H001 Auto-tuning Selection 01: Enabled (No motor rotation) 00 Disabled − P. 6-4
02: Enabled (Motor rotation)
1st Motor Parameter 00: Standard motor parameter
H002 00 Disabled
selection
−
2nd Motor Parameter 02: Auto-tuning data
H202 00 Disabled
Selection
H003 1st Motor Capacity Maxi- Disabled kW
mum
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/
applica-
H203 2nd Motor Capacity 4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 Disabled kW
ble motor P. 6-4
capacity
1st Motor Pole Num-
H004 4 Disabled
ber 2/4/6/8
pole
2nd Motor Pole Num- 10 to 48: Do not set.
H204 4 Disabled
ber Selection
H005 1st Speed Response 100. Enabled
1. to 1000. −
H205 2nd Speed Response 100. Enabled
1st Stabilization
H006 100. Enabled
Parameter
0. to 255. − P. 7-52
2nd Stabilization
H206 100. Enabled
Parameter
Control parameters
Depen-
1st Motor Parameter
H020 dent on Disabled
R1
capacity
0.001 to 65.535
Depen-
2nd Motor Parameter
R1
capacity

Depen-
1st Motor Parameter
R2
capacity
0.001 to 65.535
Depen-
2nd Motor Parameter
R2
capacity
Depen-
H022 1st Motor Parameter L dent on Disabled
capacity
0.01 to 655.35 mH P. 6-9
Depen-
2nd Motor Parameter
L
capacity
Depen-
1st Motor Parameter
Io
capacity
0.01 to 655.35 A
Depen-
2nd Motor Parameter
Io
capacity
Depen-
H024 1st Motor Parameter J dent on Disabled
capacity
0.001 to 9999.000*1 kgm2
Depen-
2nd Motor Parameter
J
capacity

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
1st Motor Parameter Depen-
H030 R1 dent on Disabled 
(Auto-tuning Data) capacity
0.001 to 65.535
2nd Motor Parameter Depen-
H230 R1 dent on Disabled 
P. 6-4

1st Motor Parameter Depen-
H031 R2 dent on Disabled
0.001 to 65.535 
H231 R2 dent on Disabled
Depen-
1st Motor Parameter L
(Auto-tuning Data)
capacity
0.01 to 655.35 mH
H232 L dent on Disabled
H033
1st Motor Parameter
Io
Depen-
dent on Disabled
4
0.01 to 655.35 A P. 6-4
4-3-4 Group H: Motor Control Parameters

H233 Io dent on Disabled
Depen-
1st Motor Parameter J
(Auto-tuning Data)
capacity
Control parameters
0.001 to 9999.000*1 kgm2

H234 J dent on Disabled
V/f Control With
Speed Feedback Slip
H050 0.00 to 10.00 0.20 Enabled time
Compensation
Proportional Gain
P. 6-24
V/f Control With
Speed Feedback Slip
H051 0. to 1000. 2. Enabled s
Compensation
Integral Gain
PM Motor Parameter 00: Standard PM motor parameter
H102 00 Disabled −
Selection 01: Auto-tuning parameter
Maximum
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/ applica-
H103 PM Motor Capacity Disabled kW
4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 ble motor
capacity
Depen-
PM Motor Pole 2/4/6/8
H104 dent on Disabled pole
Number 10 to 488: Do not set.
capacity
Depen-
PM Motor Rated
H105 0.00 to 1.00 Rated current dent on Disabled A P. 6-62
Current
capacity
Depen-
PM Motor
H106 0.001 to 65.535 dent on Disabled 
Parameter R
capacity
Depen-
PM motor
H107 0.01 to 655.35 dent on Disabled mH
Parameter Ld
capacity
Depen-
PM motor
H108 0.01 to 655.35 dent on Disabled mH
Parameter Lq
capacity

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Depen-
PM motor Vp/
H109 0.0001 to 6.5535 dent on Disabled
Parameter Ke (rad/s)
capacity
P. 6-62
PM motor Depen-
H110 *1 dent on Disabled 2
0.001 to 9999.000 kgm
Parameter J capacity
PM Motor Parameter Depen-
H111 R 0.001 to 65.535 dent on Disabled 
PM Motor Parameter Depen-
H112 Ld 0.01 to 655.35 dent on Disabled mH P. 6-59
PM motor Parameter Depen-
H113 Lq 0.01 to 655.35 dent on Disabled mH
PM Motor Speed
H116 1 to 1000 100 Enabled %
Response
PM Motor Starting
H117 20.00 to 100.00 70.00 Enabled %
Control parameters
Current
PM Motor Starting
H118 0.01 to 60.00 1.00 Enabled s
Time
H119*2 (Reserved) 0 to 120 100 Enabled %
PM Motor Minimum
H121 0.0 to 25.5 8.0 Enabled %
Frequency
PM Motor No-Load
H122 0.00 to 100.00 10.00 Enabled %
Current
00: Disabled
PM Motor Starting
H123 01: Initial pole position estimation 00 Disabled −
Method Selection P. 6-64
enabled
PM Motor Initial Pole
H131 Position Estimation 0V 0 to 255 10 Disabled time
Waiting Times
Position Estimation
H132 0 to 255 10 Disabled time
Detection Waiting
Times
H133 Position Estimation 0 to 255 30 Disabled time
Detection Times
PM Initial Pole Posi-
H134 tion Estimation Volt- 0 to 200 100 Disabled %
age Gain

4 Parameter List
4-3-5 Group P: Option/Applied Function Parameters
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Operation Selection on 00: Trip
P001 00 Enabled − P. 7-105
Auxiliary function
Option Error 01: Continue operation

00: Frequency setting (including PID)
01: Feedback pulse (enabled only
Pulse Train Input EA P. 6-18
P003 when 1st control is selected) 00 Disabled −
Selection P. 7-52
02: MI8 (General-purpose input 8 for
DriveProgramming)
00: Single-phase pulse train
01: Phase A and B 90°phase difference
Pulse Train Input Type
P004 pulse train 00 Disabled −
Selection P. 6-18
02: Do not set.
P. 6-28
03: Single-phase pulse train + direction
Number of Encoder
Simple position control
P011 32. to 1024. 512. Disabled pulse

Pulses 4
Simple Position Con- 00: Simple position control disabled
P012 00 Disabled −
trol Selection 02: Simple position control enabled

P. 6-34
Creep Speed Moving
P014 0.0 to 400.0 125.0 Disabled % P. 6-50
Amount
P015 Creep Speed Setting Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00)*1 5.00 Enabled Hz
Positioning Completion
P017 0. to 10000. (×4 multiplication) 50. Disabled pulse P. 6-45
Range Setting *1
Overspeed Error
P026 0.0 to 150.0 115.0 Enabled %
Detection Level
P. 6-23
Speed Deviation
P027 0.00 to 120.00 10.00 Enabled Hz
Excessive Level
00: Digital Operator
Auxiliary function
Acceleration/Decel- 03: DriveProgramming

P031 eration Time Input 00 Disabled − P. 5-32
Type
00: Terminal O
Torque Reference 01: Terminal OI
Input Selection 03: Digital Operator
P. 6-16
Torque Reference
P034 0. to 200. 0. Enabled %
Setting
00: Disabled
P036 Torque Bias Selection 01: Digital Operator 00 Disabled −
Torque control

P. 6-17
P037 Torque Bias Value −200. to 200. 0. Enabled %
Torque Bias Polarity 00: As per sign
Selection 01: Dependent on RUN direction
Speed Limit Value in
P039 Torque Control (For- 0.00 to 120.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
ward)
P. 6-16
P040 Torque Control 0.00 to 120.00 0.00 Enabled Hz
(Reverse)
Speed/Torque
P041 0. to 1000. 0. Disabled ms
Switching Time

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
P044 (Reserved) Do not change the default 1.00. 1.00 − − −
Communications unit
P045 (Reserved) Do not change the default 00. 00 − − −

Pulse Train Fre-

P055 1.0 to 32.0 25.0 Enabled kHz
quency Scale
Pulse Train Fre-
Pulse train input
P056 quency Filter Time 0.01 to 2.00 0.10 Enabled s

Parameter
Pulse Train Fre- P. 7-52
P057 −100. to 100. 0. Enabled %
quency Bias Amount
Pulse Train Fre-
P058 0. to 100. 100. Enabled %
quency Upper Limit
Pulse Train Fre-
P059 0.01 to 20.00 1.00 Enabled %
quency Lower Limit
Multi-step Position
P060 0 Enabled
Command 0
Multi-step Position
P061 0 Enabled
Command 1
Multi-step Position
P062 0 Enabled
Command 2
Position Limit Setting (Reverse Side)
Multi-step Position
P063 (P073) to Position Limit Setting (Forward 0 Enabled
Command 3
Side)*1 pulse P. 6-45
Multi-step Position
P064 (Displays upper 5 digits excluding “-”) 0 Enabled
Command 4
(×1 multiplication)
Multi-step Position
P065 0 Enabled
Command 5
Multi-step Position
P066 0 Enabled
Command 6
Multi-step Position
P067 0 Enabled
Command 7
00: Origin search mode 1
P068 Origin Search Mode 00 Enabled −
Origin Search Direc- 00: Forward side
P069 01 Enabled −
tion Selection 01: Reverse side P. 6-40
Origin Search Mode
P070
1 Frequency 0.00 to 10.00 (100.0)*2 5.00 Enabled Hz
Origin Search Mode
P071 0.00 to 1st Maximum Frequency 5.00 Enabled Hz
2 Frequency
0 to 268435455*1 2684
Position Limit Setting
P072 (Displays upper 5 digits) Enabled pulse
(Forward Side) 35455
P. 6-34
−268435455 to 0*1
Position Limit Setting −2684
P073 (Displays upper 5 digits excluding “-”)
(Reverse Side) 35455
Enabled pulse

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Position Control 00: Limit
Mode Selection 01: No limit
P. 6-34
Encoder Disconnec- 0.0: Disconnection detection disabled
P077 1.0 Enabled s
tion Detection Time 0.1 to 10.0
P080 0. to 10000. (×4 multiplication) 0. Disabled pulse P. 6-45
Range Setting

Position Store Selec- 00: Not store
P081 00 Enabled − P. 6-44
tion at Power Off 01: Store
(P073) to Position Limit Setting (Forward
Position Data at
P082 Side)*1 0 Enabled pulse P. 6-44
Power Off
(P073) to Position Limit Setting (Forward
P083 Preset Position Data Side)*1 0 Enabled pulse P. 6-43
(×1 multiplication) 4
P100
P101

P102
P103
P104
P105
P106
P107
P108
P109
P110
P111
P112
DriveProgramming
P113
P114
P115 DriveProgramming
User Parameter U00 0. to 65535. 0. Enabled − P. 7-105
P116 to U31
P117
P118
P119
P120
P121
P122
P123
P124
P125
P126
P127
P128
P129
P130
P131

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
Number of Sent Data of
P140 All Stations in Co- 1. to 5. 5. Enabled −
inverter Communication
Recipient Station Num-
ber of All Stations in Co-
P141 1. to 247. 1. Enabled −
inverter Communica-
tion 1
Recipient Register of All
P142 Stations in Co-inverter 0000 to FFFF hex 0000 Enabled −
Communication 1
Sender Register of All
Communication 1
P144 1. to 247. 2. Enabled −
inverter Communica-
tion 2
Communication 2
Communication 2
Co-inverter communication

P147 1. to 247. 3. Enabled −
inverter Communica-
tion 3 P. 8-31
Communication 3
Communication 3
P150 1. to 247. 4. Enabled −
inverter Communica-
tion 4
Communication 4
Communication 4
P153 1. to 247. 5. Enabled −
inverter Communica-
tion 5
Communication 5
Communication 5

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN

Option

P176 (Reserved) Do not change the default 0000. 0000 − − − 4

P180 (Reserved) Do not change the default 0. 0. − − −
P192 (Reserved) Do not change the default 63 63 − − −

4 Parameter List
Changes
No. data data
RUN
00: Standard Mod-
Modbus Mapping bus address
P200 00 Enabled − P. 8-25
Function Selection 01: Modbus mapping
enabled
P201
P202
P203
P204
P205 Modbus Mapping Exter-
0000 to FFFF hex 0000 Enabled − P. 8-25
P206 nal Register 1 to 10
P207
P208
P209
P210
P211
P212
P213
P214
Modbus Mapping Exter- 00: Unsigned
P215
nal Register Type 1 to 00 Enabled − P. 8-25
P216 01: Signed
10
P217
Modbus mapping
P218
P219
P220
P221
P222
P223
P224
P225 Modbus Mapping Scal-
0.001 to 65.535 1.000 Enabled − P. 8-25
P226 ing 1 to 10
P227
P228
P229
P230
P301
P302
P303
P304
P305 Modbus Mapping Internal
0000 to FFFF hex 0000 Enabled − P. 8-25
P306 Register 1 to 10
P307
P308
P309
P310
00: Big endian
Modbus Mapping Endian
P400 01: Little endian 00 Enabled − P. 8-29
Selection
02: Special endian

4 Parameter List
4-3-6 Group U: User Parameters
Changes
No. data data
RUN
U001
U002
U003

U004
U005
U006
U007
U008
U009
U010
U011
U012
U013
U014
4
User parameters
U015
U016 no: No registration
4-3-6 Group U: User Parameters

User Selection 1 to 32 no Enabled − P. 7-60
U017 d001 to P196
U018
U019
U020
U021
U022
U023
U024
U025
U026
U027
U028
U029
U030
U031
U032

4 Parameter List

Basic Settings
This section describes the basic functions such as the Run command.
5-1 Parameter Display and Parameter Initialization .............................................. 5-3

5-1-1 Display Selection ................................................................................................. 5-3 5
5-1-2 Parameter Initialization ........................................................................................ 5-5
5-2 V/f Control Settings ........................................................................................... 5-8
5-2-1 Control Method (V/f Characteristics) .................................................................... 5-8
5-2-2 Heavy load/Light Load Selection ....................................................................... 5-11
5-3 Motor Parameter Settings ............................................................................... 5-15
5-3-1 Motor Capacity/Pole Number Selection............................................................. 5-15
5-3-2 Electronic Thermal Function .............................................................................. 5-15
5-3-3 Base Frequency and Maximum Frequency of Motor ......................................... 5-20
5-4 RUN Command Settings ................................................................................. 5-21
5-4-1 RUN Command Selection ................................................................................. 5-21
5-5 Frequency Reference Settings........................................................................ 5-23
5-5-1 Frequency Reference Selection ........................................................................ 5-23
5-5-2 Frequency Reference Correlation Chart ............................................................ 5-29
5-5-3 Frequency Limit................................................................................................. 5-30
5-6 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings ...................................................... 5-32
5-6-1 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings ........................................................... 5-32
5-6-2 Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern ..................................................................... 5-33
5-6-3 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function ........................................................ 5-36
5-7 Stop Method Settings ...................................................................................... 5-38
5-7-1 Stop Selection ................................................................................................... 5-38
5-7-2 Free-run Stop Selection .................................................................................... 5-38
5-7-3 STOP Key Selection .......................................................................................... 5-41
5-8 Reset Method Settings .................................................................................... 5-42
5-8-1 Reset................................................................................................................. 5-42
5-8-2 Restart after Resetting ...................................................................................... 5-44
5-9 Multi-function Input Settings .......................................................................... 5-46
5-9-1 Multi-function Input Selection ............................................................................ 5-46
5-9-2 Multi-function Input Operation Selection ............................................................ 5-47
5-9-3 Input Terminal Response Time .......................................................................... 5-47

5 Basic Settings
5-9-4 Forward RUN Command (FW) and Reverse RUN Command (RV) .................. 5-47
5-9-5 Multi-step Speed Operation Function.................................................................5-48
5-9-6 Jogging (JG) ..................................................................................................... 5-51
5-9-7 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration (2CH) ............................................................ 5-52
5-9-8 Reset (RS) ........................................................................................................ 5-52
5-9-9 3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R) .............................................................. 5-53
5-10 Multi-function Output Settings ....................................................................... 5-54
5-10-1 Multi-function Output Selection ......................................................................... 5-54
5-10-2 Multi-function Output Operation Selection ........................................................ 5-54
5-10-3 Multi-function Output ON/OFF Delay Time ....................................................... 5-55
5-10-4 Signal during RUN (RUN) ..................................................................................5-55
5-10-5 Constant Speed Arrival Signal (FA1) ................................................................ 5-56
5-10-6 Alarm Signal (AL) ............................................................................................. 5-56
5-10-7 0-Hz Detection Signal (ZS) ............................................................................... 5-57
5-10-8 Operation Ready (IRDY) .................................................................................. 5-58
5-10-9 Forward Run Signal (FWR) .............................................................................. 5-58
5-10-10 Reverse Run Signal (RVR) ............................................................................... 5-58
5-11 Torque Boost Function Settings ..................................................................... 5-59
5-11-1 Torque Boost .....................................................................................................5-59
5-12 Measures against Overvoltage ....................................................................... 5-62
5-12-1 Overvoltage Suppression Function during Deceleration ................................... 5-62
5-12-2 Regenerative Braking Function..........................................................................5-64

5 Basic Settings
5-1 Parameter Display and Parameter

Initialization
5-1 Parameter Display and Parameter Initialization

5-1-1 Display Selection
• You can select the parameters to be displayed on the Digital Operator.
• To display all parameters, set this parameter to 00 (Complete display).
Parameter No. Function name Data Default data Unit

01: Individual display of functions
b037 Display Selection 02: User setting + d001, F001, b037 00 −
03: Data comparison display
05: Monitor (d***) display only + b037
no: No registration
User Selection 1 to
U001 to U032 d001 to P196: Select the parameter number you want no −
User Selection 32
to display.
Complete Display (b037 =00) 5

Displays all inverter parameters.
5-1-1 Display Selection

Individual Display of Functions (b037 =01)
If a specific function is not selected, its related parameter is not displayed.

For details on the display conditions, refer to the following table.
No. Display condition Parameters displayed when condition is met

F202, F203, A201 to A204, A220, A241 to A247, A261,
To display parameters
A262, A281, A282, A292 to A296, b212, b213, b221 to
1 when 2nd control (SET ter- C001 to C007 = 08
b223, C241, H202 to H206, H220 to H224, H230 to
minal) is selected
H234
d009, d010, d012, b040 to b046, C054 to C059, H001,
when 1st Control Method is
2 A044 = 03 H005, H020 to H024, H030 to H034, P033, P034, P036
set to Sensorless vector
to P040
control
d009, d010, d012, b040 to b046, C054 to C059, H001,
when 2nd Control Method C001 to C007 = 08 and A244 =
3 H205, H220 to H224, H230 to H234, P033, P034, P036
is set to Sensorless vector 03
to P040
control
when 1st/2nd Control A044 = 02, or C001 to C007 =
4 b100 to b113
Method is set to Free V/f 08 and A244 = 02
setting function
b013 = 02, or C001 to C007 =
5 when free-electronic ther- b015 to b020
08 and b213 = 02
mal function is enabled
when 1st Control Method is
6 A044 = 00 or 01 A041 to A043, A046, A047
set to V/f control (constant
torque or reduced torque)

5 Basic Settings
No. Display condition Parameters displayed when condition is met

when 2nd Control Method
C001 to C007 = 08 and A244 =
7 is set to V/f control (con- A241 to A243, A246, A247
00 or 01
stant torque or reduced
torque)
A051 = 00 or 01, or C001 to
8 when DC injection braking A052 to A059
C007 = 07
is active
9 when PID function is A071 = 01 or 02 d004, A072 to A079, A156, A157, C044, C052, C053
enabled
10 when the co-inverter com- C096 = 01 or 02 C098 to C100, P140 to P155
munication is enabled
when curve accelera-
11 A097, A098 = 01 to 04 A131, A132, A150 to A153
tion/deceleration function is
enabled
when deceleration stop on
12 b050 = 01 to 03 b051 to b054
power interruption function
is enabled
13 when brake control func- b120 = 01 b121 to b127
tion is enabled
when overvoltage suppres-
14 b130 = 01 or 02 b131 to b134
sion function during decel-
eration is enabled
d008, P004, P011, P012, P014 to P017, P026, P027,
15 when simple position con- P003 = 01
P060 to P073, P075, P077, P080 to P083, H050, H051
trol is enabled
User Setting (b037 = 02)

Any parameters set for U001 to U032 and the parameters F001, b037, b190, and b191 will be dis-
played.
Data Comparison Display (b037 = 03)

• Displays only the changed parameters from the factory default settings.
• All monitor display parameters (d***), F001, b037, b190, and b191 will be always displayed.
Monitor Display Only (b037 = 05)
Only monitor display parameters (d***), b037, b190, and b191 will be displayed.

5 Basic Settings
5-1-2 Parameter Initialization

• The parameter initialization function restores the changed parameters to the factory default settings.
• It also can clear the fault monitor data.
• As a measure to prevent inadvertent parameter initialization, you need to set several parameters to

execute initialization.
• When you set 00 to Inverter Mode Selection (b171), Heavy load/Light Load Selection (b049) will not
be initialized. Setting any other value than 00 will initialize it.
The DriveProgramming User Parameters U00 to U31 (P100 to P131) are not initialized unless the Ini-
tialization Selection (b084) is set to 04.
• When you newly set 3G3MX2-series V2 type after restoring the parameters to the factory default set-
tings, execute parameter initialization with the Initialization Selection (b084) set to 04 (Clear fault
monitor + Initialize data + Clear DriveProgramming) in advance.
Default
Parameter No. Function name Data Unit
data
00: Initialization disabled
01: Clear fault monitor
Initialization Selec- 02: Initialize data
b084 00 −
tion 03: Clear fault monitor + Initialize data
04: Clear fault monitor + Initialize data +
Clear DriveProgramming 5
Initialization Data Do not change the default 00.
b085 00 −
Selection
00: All data (Complete initialization)

01: All data other than terminals/communica-
tions*1
Initialization Target
b094 02: Only User Selection 1 to 32 (U001 to 00 −
Setting
U032)*2
03: Other than User Selection 1 to 32 (U001
to U032) and Display Selection (b037)
Initialization Exe- 00: Function disabled
b180 00 −
cution 01: Execute initialization
*1. The table below shows the I/O terminal and basic communications settings when the Initialization Target Set-
ting (b094) is set to 01.
*2. This setting initializes only the data of parameters registered by the user. User registered parameters are not
initialized.
I/O terminal data Basic communications setting data

Parameter No. Description Parameter No. Description
C001 to C007 Multi-function Input Selection C071 Communication Speed Selection
C011 to C017 Multi-function Input Operation C072 Communication Station No. Selection
Selection C074 Communication Parity Selection
C021, C022 Multi-function Output Selection C075 Communication Stop Bit Selection
C026 Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, C076 Operation Selection on Communica-
MB) Function Selection tion Error
C031, C032 Multi-function Output Operation C077 Communication Error Timeout Time
Selection C078 Communication Wait Time
C036 Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
MB) Operation Selection

5 Basic Settings
• Remember that it is impossible to undo the initialization once you press the Enter key ( )
to execute parameter initialization, with the Initialization Execution (b180) set to 01.
Selection (b031) to enable the initialization. For details on Soft Lock Selection, refer to 7-6-1
Soft Lock Function (SFT) on page 7-54.
• When parameter initialization is in progress, the inverter will ignore the RUN command even
if it is ON.
Enter the RUN command again after completion of the initialization process.
Initializing the Parameter Settings (Clear Fault Monitor + Initialize

Data + Clear DriveProgramming)
Step 1: Set b084 to 04 and Step 2: Set b180 to 01 and

press the Enter press the Enter
key. key.
Initializing
Initialization
completed
Enter Enter
Step 1.5:
To initialize a portion of
The left most digit rotates.
parameter data or initialize it
with the initial value of Pattern Fault monitor initialization
1( ), set b094 or b085. Content of
Pattern ( ) initialization
initialization
Pattern ( ) initialization
Blinking alternately
Operating Heavy load mode
mode after
initialization Light load mode

• As a measure to prevent inadvertent parameter initialization, the Initialization Selection
(b084) and Initialization Execution (b180) settings are designed to be reset to 00 when the
initialization is completed or after power cycle. Be sure to set these parameters each time
when you need to initialize the parameter settings.
The DriveProgramming User Parameters U00 to U31 (P100 to P131) are not initialized
unless the Initialization Selection (b084) is set to 04.
• Remember that you cannot restore the initialized data to the previous settings once you exe-
cute parameter initialization.

5 Basic Settings
Clearing Fault Monitor Data
Step 1: Set b084 to 04 and Step 2: Set b180 to 01 and

press the Enter press the Enter
key. key.

Clearing
completed
Enter Enter
Switching between 1st and 2nd Controls
• The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter provides two controls that can be switched as required.
• Even with a single motor, you can use the 2nd control to configure the control and settings suitable
for your application.
• The 2nd control is allocated in the 200s parameter number (e.g. A201 relative to A001).
5
For the explanation of the 2nd control, refer to 7-4-3 2nd Control Function (SET) on page 7-33.

5 Basic Settings
5-2 V/f Control Settings
5-2-1 Control Method (V/f Characteristics)

• V/f control is a method of controlling a motor by setting the output voltage and frequency of the
inverter as V/f characteristics, which is effective for using the inverter easily.
• To set V/f characteristics (output voltage and output frequency), set the 1st/2nd Control Method to 00
to 02.
Parameter Default
Function name Data Unit
No. data
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power
1st/2nd Control
A044/A244 (VC at low speed)) 00 −
Method *2*3 02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control *1
*1. Sensorless vector control can be set in the heavy load mode only. For details on sensorless vector control,
refer to 6-1 Sensorless Vector Control on page 6-3.
*2. Setting the Inverter Mode Selection (b171) to 03 (PM motor mode) does not cause the parameters
A044/A244 to be displayed after initialization.
*3. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to
C007) to 08 (SET) and then turn ON that terminal.
Constant Torque Characteristics (VC)

This setting is suitable for cart, conveyor, overhead traveling crane, and other applications where a
torque is required, independent of the motor rotation speed.
It enables the output of a constant torque based on the frequency, according to the V/f characteristics
that represent the proportional relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage.
However, the output voltage is proportional from 0 Hz to the base frequency, it is constant independent
of the frequency, from the base frequency to the maximum frequency.
For the base frequency, set the rated frequency of the motor.
For the maximum frequency, set the highest frequency required for your application, within the maxi-
mum frequency of the motor.
Output
voltage
(100%)
Output frequency
[Hz]
0 Base Maximum Frequency
Frequency

5 Basic Settings
Reduced Torque Characteristics (VP 1.7th Power (VC at low speed))

This setting is suitable for fan, pump, and other applications that do not require large torque at low
speeds.
It provides high efficiency, reduced noise, and vibration, because the output voltage is reduced in the
low speed range.
In the low speed range at 10% of the base frequency or lower, the setting provides constant torque
characteristics (VC) to secure a sufficient starting torque.

Range (a): Constant torque characteristics are provided within the range from 0 Hz to 10% of the
base frequency.
(Example) If the base frequency is 60 Hz, the setting provides constant torque charac-
teristics within the range from 0 to 6 Hz.
5
Range (b): Reduced torque characteristics are provided within the range from 10% to 100% of the
base frequency.
The inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1.7th power of the frequency.
5-2-1 Control Method (V/f Characteristics)

Range (c): A constant voltage is output within the range from the base frequency to the maximum
frequency.
Free V/f Function

• The free V/f function is suitable for the applications listed below.
The output voltage of the inverter can be adjusted according to your application.
Application Adjustment method

If the motor and the brake share the same power supply, a large volt-
Motor integrated with a brake (that uses age is required at low frequencies to release the brake.
a shared power supply for the motor and The release timing of the brake can be adjusted by setting the fre-
the brake) quency at which you want to release the brake and adjusting the volt-
age at that frequency.
When the load value changes significantly depending on the motor
Applications subject to significant load speed, the output torque of the inverter can be adjusted by setting the
variation at different motor speeds frequency at which the load value becomes large and adjusting the
voltage at that frequency.
• With the free V/f function, you can configure V/f characteristics by setting the voltage and frequency
values at seven points. For any unused points, set the corresponding Free V/f Frequency 1 to 7 to 0
(Disabled).
• The set values of the Free V/f Frequency 1 to 7 must satisfy the following relationship:
1  2  3  4  5  6  7.
All of the default data are set to 0 Hz. Start by setting the Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) and Free V/f
Voltage 7 (b113).
• If the free V/f function frequency 7 is set to less than 30 Hz, the inverter will not operate with the RUN
LED blinking.

5 Basic Settings
• The free V/f function is disabled by default. Even if you set 02 (Free V/f setting) in the 1st/2nd Control
Method (A044/A244), the inverter cannot operate with the free V/f function.
• If the free V/f function is enabled, the torque boost function (A041/A241, A042/A242, A043/A243), Base
Frequency (A003/A203), and Maximum Frequency (A004/A204) settings are disabled. The Free V/f
Frequency 7 data is regarded as the maximum frequency.
• Based on limits, a warning will be triggered.
Parameter Default
Function name Data Description Unit
No. data
0.: Disabled
b100 Free V/f Frequency 1 (f1)
1. to Free V/f Frequency 2
0.: Disabled
b102 Free V/f Frequency 2 (f2) Free V/f Frequency 1 to Free V/f
Frequency 3
0.: Disabled
Frequency 4
0.: Disabled
Set the frequency at
b106 Free V/f Frequency 4 (f4) Free V/f Frequency 3 to Free V/f 0 Hz
each break point.
Frequency 5
0.: Disabled
Frequency 6
0.: Disabled
Frequency 7
0.: Disabled
b112 Free V/f Frequency 7 (f7)
Free V/f Frequency 6 to 590.*1
b101 Free V/f Voltage 1 (V1)
Set the voltage at
b107 Free V/f Voltage 4 (V4) 0.0 to 800.0 0.0 V
each break point.
Related functions A044, A244
*1. If the free V/f function frequency 7 (b112) is set to less than 30 Hz, the inverter will not operate with the RUN
LED blinking.
Example: Output
voltage [V]
V7
V6
V5
V4
V1
V2, V3
Output frequency
0 f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 [Hz]

5 Basic Settings

Even if the Free V/f Voltage 1 to 7 is set to a high voltage, the inverter cannot produce output volt-
age higher than the input voltage or the value of the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection
(A082/A282).
Be sure to check that the output characteristic setting is proper. An improper setting causes over-
current during acceleration or deceleration, or vibration of the motor and/or machine.

5-2-2 Heavy load/Light Load Selection
This enables the efficient utilization of the inverter according to your application.
5
• According to your application, select one of the two modes: heavy load mode and light load mode.

• The heavy load mode provides the same load rating as the previous Inverters, which means that the
overload capacity is 150% of the rated current of the Inverter for 1 minute.
• For loads (such as fan and pumps) that do not require frequent use of the inverter above the rated
torque, you can select the light load mode.
Setting the light load mode causes the rated current of the Inverter to increase, which enables the
Inverter to drive a motor one size larger than in the heavy load mode. However, the overload capac-
ity is 120% of the rated current of the Inverter for 1 minute.
• Use the Heavy load/Light Load Selection (b049) to switch between the heavy load mode and the
light load mode.
It is not necessary to cycle the power supply after changing this setting.

The high-frequency mode supports heavy load ratings only. For the high-frequency mode, refer
to the 6-9 High-frequency Mode on page 6-68.

Heavy load/Light Load 00: Heavy load mode (CT)
b049 00 −
Selection 01: Light load mode (VT)
The Inverter features of the heavy load mode and the light load mode are as shown below.
Item Heavy load (CT) Light load (VT)
Loads that require a high torque during Loads that do not require frequent use of
Feature
acceleration/deceleration etc. the inverter above rated torque
Application example Elevator, crane, conveyor, etc. Fan pump, air conditioner, etc.
Rated output current
3.0 A (3-phase 200-V, 0.4-kW inverter) 3.5 A (3-phase 200-V, 0.4-kW inverter)
(Example)
Overload current rating 150%, 60 s 120%, 60 s

5 Basic Settings
Changing the Heavy load/Light Load Selection (b049) setting switches the setting ranges and default
data of some parameters.
Doing so also causes some parameter settings to be initialized at the same time.
For these parameters, you must set data again after changing the b049 setting even if you configured
them beforehand.
• Changing from heavy load mode to light load mode:
Basically causes the parameter settings to be initialized. For details, refer to the Initialization at load
mode switching column in the following table.
• Changing from light load mode to heavy load mode:
Basically does NOT cause the parameter settings to be initialized. For details, refer to the Initializa-
tion at load mode switching column in the following table.
⚫ Parameters whose setting ranges and default data are switched between nor-
mal load and light load mode
Initialization at
Para- Setting range Default data load mode
Function switching
meter
name
No. Heavy Light Normal Light to
Heavy load (CT) Light load (VT)
load (CT) load (VT) to Light Normal
1st Control 00: Constant torque 00: Constant torque 00 No Enabled Disabled
Method characteristics characteristics switching
01: Reduced torque 01: Reduced torque
A044 characteristics characteristics
02: Free V/f setting 02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector
control
2nd Control 00: Constant torque 00: Constant torque 00 No
Method characteristics characteristics switching
01: Reduced torque 01: Reduced torque
A244 characteristics characteristics
02: Free V/f setting 02: Free V/f setting
control
DC Injection Percentage of heavy load Percentage of light load 50. [%] No Enabled Disabled
A054
Braking Power rated current rated current switching
Startup DC 0. to 100. [%] 0. to 70. [%] 0. [%] No
A057 Injection Brak- switching
ing Power
1st Electronic 0.20 to 1.00  Heavy load 0.20 to 1.00  Light load Normal- Light load Conversion *1 Conversion *1
b012
Thermal Level rated current [A] rated current [A] load rated rated
2nd Electronic current [A] current [A]
b212
Thermal Level
Free-electronic 0.00 to 1.00  Heavy load 0.00 to 1.00  Light load 0.00 [A] No Conversion *1 Conversion *1
b016 Thermal rated current [A] rated current [A] switching
Current 1
Free-electronic
b018 Thermal
Current 2
Free-electronic
b020 Thermal
Current 3
1st/2nd 0.20  Heavy load rated 0.20  Light load rated cur- 1.50  1.20  Enabled Conversion *1
b022/
Overload Limit current to 2.00  rent to 1.50  Light load rated Normal- Light load
b222
Level Heavy load rated current [A] current [A] load rated rated
1st Overload current [A] current [A]
b025
Limit Level 2
Frequency 0.20  Heavy load rated 0.20  Light load rated cur- Normal- Light load Enabled Conversion *1
Pull-in Restart current to 2.00  rent to 1.50  Light load rated load rated rated
b028
Level Heavy load rated current [A] current [A] current [A] current [A]
Carrier 2.0 to 15.0 [kHz] 2.0 to 10.0 [kHz] 10.0 [kHz] 2.0 [kHz] Enabled Disabled
b083
Frequency

5 Basic Settings
Initialization at
Para- Setting range Default data load mode
Function switching
meter
name
No. Heavy Light Normal Light to
Heavy load (CT) Light load (VT)
load (CT) load (VT) to Light Normal
Digital Current 0.20  Heavy load rated 0.20  Light load rated Normal- Light load Conversion *1 Conversion *1
Monitor Refer- current to 2.00  current to 2.00  Light load load rated rated
C030
ence Value Heavy load rated current [A] rated current [A] current [A] current [A]
Low Current 0.00 to 2.00  Heavy load 0.00 to 2.00  Light load Normal- Light load Conversion *1 Conversion *1
C039 Detection Level rated current [A] rated current [A] load rated rated
current [A] current [A]
1st Overload 0.00: Overload warning 0.00: Overload warning 1.15  1.15  Conversion *1 Conversion *1
C041
Warning Level detection disabled detection disabled Normal- Light load
2nd Overload 0.01 to 2.00  Heavy load 0.01 to 2.00  Light load load rated rated
C241 current [A] current [A]
Warning Level rated current [A] rated current [A]
1st Overload 0.00: Overload warning 0.00: Overload warning 1.15  1.15  Conversion *1 Conversion *1

Warning Level 2 detection disabled detection disabled Normal- Light load
C111
0.01 to 2.00  Heavy load 0.01 to 2.00  Light load load rated rated
rated current [A] rated current [A] current [A] current [A]
1st Motor 0.1 to 18.5 [kW] Same as the setting range for Max. Max. Disabled Disabled
H003
Capacity *2 heavy load mode applicable applicable
Setting in steps
2nd Motor motor motor
Capacity capacity for capacity for
H203 heavy load light load
[kW] [kW]
*1. Conversion: The set current value will be converted at the ratio of the rated current for the heavy load/light load mode.
(Example) If you change from a light load mode setting of 5 A (rated current: 10 A) to the heavy load mode (rated current:
8 A), the current value will be converted as follows: Rated current 8 A × 50% (5 A/10 A) = 4 A.
5
*2. Setting in steps: Steps of 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 [kW] can be selected.

In the light load mode, the following parameters are not displayed.
Parameter No. Function name Parameter No. Function name

d009 Torque Reference Monitor H005/H205 1st/2nd Speed Response
d010 Torque Bias Monitor H020/H220 1st/2nd Motor Parameter R1
d012 Output Torque Monitor H021/H221 1st/2nd Motor Parameter R2
b040 Torque Limit Selection H022/H222 1st/2nd Motor Parameter L
Torque Limit 1
b041 (Four-quadrant Mode Forward H023/H223 1st/2nd Motor Parameter Io
Power Running)
Torque Limit 2
b042 (Four-quadrant Mode Reverse H024/H224 1st/2nd Motor Parameter J
Regeneration)
Torque Limit 3
1st/2nd Motor Parameter R1
b043 (Four-quadrant Mode Reverse H030/H230
(Auto-tuning Data)
Power Running)
Torque Limit 4
1st/2nd Motor Parameter R2
b044 (Four-quadrant Mode Forward H031/H231
(Auto-tuning Data)
Regeneration)
1st/2nd Motor Parameter L
b045 Torque LADSTOP Selection H032/H232
(Auto-tuning Data)
Reverse Rotation Prevention Selec- 1st/2nd Motor Parameter Io
b046 H033/H233
tion (Auto-tuning Data)
1st/2nd Motor Parameter J
C054 Overtorque/Undertorque Selection H034/H234
(Auto-tuning Data)
Overtorque/Undertorque Level
C055 P033 Torque Reference Input Selection
(Forward Power Running)
C056 P034 Torque Reference Setting
(Reverse Regeneration)

5 Basic Settings
Parameter No. Function name Parameter No. Function name

C057 P036 Torque Bias Selection
(Reverse Power Running)
C058 P037 Torque Bias Value
(Forward Regeneration)
Overtorque/Undertorque Signal
C059 P038 Torque Bias Polarity Selection
Operation
Speed Limit Value in Torque Control
H001 Auto-tuning Selection P039
(Forward)
Speed Limit Value in Torque Control
H002/H202 1st/2nd Motor Parameter Selection P040
(Reverse)
Similarly, in the light load mode, the following function options are not displayed.
Multi-function Output 11 Selection, Multi-

Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection function Output 12 Selection, Multi-function Relay
Output (AL1, AL2) Function
Selection
40: TL Torque limit enabled 07: OTQ Overtorque/Undertorque signal
41: TRQ1 Torque limit switching 1 10: TRQ Torque limit
42: TRQ2 Torque limit switching 2 − −
52: ATR Torque reference input permission − −

5 Basic Settings
5-3 Motor Parameter Settings
5-3-1 Motor Capacity/Pole Number Selection

Set the following parameters according to your motor.
Parameter
Function name Data Default data Unit
No.
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/ Maximum applica-
H003 1st Motor Capacity kW
3.7/4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 ble motor capacity

0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/ Maximum applica-
H203 2nd Motor Capacity kW
3.7/4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 ble motor capacity
2/4/6/8
H004 1st Motor Pole Number 4 pole
2/4/6/8
H204 2nd Motor Pole Number 4 pole
5-3-2 Electronic Thermal Function

The electronic thermal function prevents the motor from overloading and burning.
5
Set the rated current of your motor in the Electronic Thermal Level parameters.
In the Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection parameters, set the motor torque characteristics as
5-3-1 Motor Capacity/Pole Number Selection

follows, according to the motor specifications.
Characteristics Description
Use this setting for general-purpose motors.
In an air-cooled motor that uses the rear fan coupled directly to the motor shaft, the cooling
Reduced torque
effect degrades as the motor rotation speed decreases. This characteristics setting enables
characteristics
overload detection that takes into account such degradation of the cooling effect at low
speeds.
Use this setting for dedicated inverter motors.
Constant torque Dedicated inverter motors are designed to prevent degradation of the cooling effect that
characteristics arises as the motor speed increases. This characteristics setting provides overload detec-
tion independent of the motor rotation speed.
Derating of the output current is required depending on the installation environment and the Carrier Fre-
quency (b083). For derating of each inverter model, refer to A-1 Derating on page A-2.
In the Electronic Thermal Level, set the output current value to be derated.
This setting is, however, unnecessary if the Electronic Thermal Level is already set to the derating
value or lower.

5 Basic Settings

• Setting the Motor Electronic Thermal Selection (b910) to 01 to 03 separates the inverter from
the motor electronic thermal function. This enables you to change the operation characteris-
tics of the motor electronic thermal function according to the thermal time constant of the
motor in use. For how to change these characteristics, refer to 7-8-2 Motor Electronic Ther-
mal Function on page 7-74.
• To comply with UL standards, set the Electronic Thermal Load Rate Memory Selection at
Power-off (b914) to 01 (Enabled).
• To set the electronic thermal function to work as with the conventional 3G3MX2 Series, set
the Motor Electronic Thermal Selection (b910) to 00 (Disabled).
• To connect several motors to a single inverter, set the Electronic Thermal Level to the rated
output current of the inverter and install a thermal relay etc. for each motor.
• Before setting the electronic thermal function, set the 1st/2nd Motor Capacity (H003/H203)
and the 1st/2nd Motor Pole Number (H004/H204) correctly according to your motor.
Parameter
No.
b012 1st Electronic Thermal Level 0.20  Rated current to 1.00  Rated current *1 Rated
current of A
b212 2nd Electronic Thermal Level *2 inverter
1st Electronic Thermal 00: Reduced torque characteristics (for
b013
Characteristics Selection general-purpose motor)
01: Constant torque characteristics (for 01 −
2nd Electronic Thermal
b213 dedicated inverter motor)
Characteristics Selection *2 02: Free setting*3
*1. Set according to the rated current of your motor.

*2. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007)
to 08 (SET) and then turn ON that terminal.
*3. When 02 (Free setting) is set, the inverter performs overload detection based on the free-electronic thermal
function setting described in 7-8-1 Free-electronic Thermal Function on page 7-73.
• To check the status of the electronic thermal function, use the Electronic Thermal Load Rate
Monitor (d104). An Overload trip (E05) error will occur if the value reaches 100%.
• This inverter has the free-electronic thermal function. The free-electronic thermal function
allows you to set the reduction factor for overload detection based on your application.
For details, refer to 7-8-1 Free-electronic Thermal Function on page 7-73.
• The electronic thermal function can output a warning signal before the inverter is stopped by
an overload detection.
The use of a warning signal is effective to reduce the system down time because it enables
you to solve problems previously.
For details, refer to 7-8-3 Electronic Thermal Warning on page 7-77.

5 Basic Settings
Electronic Thermal Characteristics

The electronic thermal function enables you to change the overload detection characteristics by setting
the 1st/2nd Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection (b013/b213) according to the motor in use.
The reduced torque characteristics and the constant torque characteristics are achieved by setting the
reduction factor for each output frequency of the inverter in the basic electronic thermal characteristics.
This section first describes the basic electronic thermal characteristics and then explains the reduction
factor for each detection characteristic.
⚫ Basic characteristics

The electronic thermal characteristics of a motor are as shown in the following graph independent of
the heavy load/light load mode setting.

⚫ Reduced torque characteristics
Use the reduced torque characteristics setting for general-purpose (standard) motors.
In an air-cooled motor that uses the rear fan coupled directly to the motor shaft, the cooling effect
degrades as the motor rotation speed decreases.
This characteristics setting enables overload detection that takes into account such degradation of
the cooling effect at low speeds.
Specifically, the following reduction factor is applied to the current value set in the 1st/2nd Electronic
Thermal Level (b012/b212) to calculate a reduced current value, which is equivalent to 100% of the
basic characteristics.
Reduction Factor Characteristics

5 Basic Settings
⚫ Constant torque characteristics

Use the torque characteristics setting for dedicated inverter motors.
Dedicated inverter motors are designed to prevent degradation of the cooling effect that arises as
the motor speed increases, except at 5 Hz or less.
For constant torque characteristics, the reduction factor is not defined for frequencies of 5 Hz or
more.
Specifically, the following reduction factor is applied to the current value set in the 1st/2nd Electronic
Thermal Level (b012/b212) to calculate a reduced current value, which is equivalent to 100% of the
basic characteristics.
Reduction Factor Characteristics
⚫ Examples of actual electronic thermal characteristics

Under the following four conditions, electronic thermal characteristics are shown in the graph below,
where the reduction factor at 20 Hz is 0.8 according to the reduction factor in the reduced torque
characteristics, which is reflected on the basic electronic thermal characteristics.
• 1st Electronic Thermal Level (b012) is set to 60 A.
• 1st Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection (b013) is set to 00 (Reduced torque characteris-
tics).
• 1st Base Frequency (A003) is set to 60 Hz.
• 20-Hz output frequency is output (Reduction factor: 0.8)
Overload detection time [s]

5 Basic Settings
⚫ Electronic thermal detection of the inverter

The electronic thermal function for the inverter is fixed to the rated current value of the inverter, inde-
pendent of the b012/b212 setting.
However, the characteristics of the Inverter change because the rated current of the Inverter varies
with the normal and light load mode settings.
Below are the electronic thermal characteristics of the inverter.
Basic Characteristics in Heavy load Mode Basic Characteristics in Light Load Mode
Overload detection time [s] Overload detection time [s]

5
The inverter will trip if an overload is detected by either the inverter or motor electronic thermal
function.

The motor electronic thermal function detects E05., and the inverter thermal function detects
E38..

5 Basic Settings
5-3-3 Base Frequency and Maximum Frequency of Motor

To configure the V/f control characteristics output to the motor, set the base frequency and maximum
frequency of your motor.
For the base frequency, set the rated frequency of the motor (the frequency listed on the motor rating
nameplate).
For the maximum frequency, set the highest frequency required for your application. However, do not
exceed the maximum rotation speed of the motor.
Then, set the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282) to the rated voltage of the motor.
Parameter
No.
A003 1st Base Frequency 30.0 to 1st Maximum Frequency (A004) 60.0 (580.0)*2 Hz
A203 2nd Base Frequency*1 30.0 to 2nd Maximum Frequency (A204) 60.0 (580.0)*2 Hz
A004 1st Maximum Frequency 1st Base Frequency (A003) to 590.0 60.0 (580.0)*2 Hz
A204 2nd Maximum Frequency*1 2nd Base Frequency (A203) to 590.0 60.0 (580.0)*2 Hz
1st/2nd Motor Rated 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
A082/A282 200/400 V
Voltage Selection 400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to
08 (SET) and turn ON that terminal.
Output
voltage
1st/2nd Motor Rated
Voltage Selection
(A082/A282)
Output frequency
1st/2nd Base 1st/2nd Maximum
Frequency Frequency
(A003/A203) (A004/A204)

• Motors whose rated frequency exceed 60 Hz are regarded as special motors.
For these motors, check the rated motor current and select an appropriate inverter based on
the rated current of the inverter.
If you must use the motor at higher than 400 Hz, use the high-frequency mode.
• Do not set the base frequency to lower than the motor rated frequency. Doing so may cause
overload or motor burnout.
• Do not set the motor rated voltage to the motor rated frequency or higher. Doing so may
cause an overload or motor burnout.

5 Basic Settings
5-4 RUN Command Settings
5-4-1 RUN Command Selection

Select the input method for the RUN command.
Parameter
No.
(DriveProgramming)
5-4 RUN Command Settings

1st/2nd RUN Com-
A002/A202 02: Digital Operator 02 −
mand Selection
04: Option
RUN Direction 00: Forward
F004 00 −
Selection 01: Reverse
Related functions F004, C001 to C007
Below are the details of the parameter settings.

Data RUN command source
Inputs the RUN command via the ON/OFF of the FW/RV signal allocated to the control circuit
terminal block.
01
It will be regarded as the STOP command if both the forward and reverse commands are input
5-4-1 RUN Command Selection

simultaneously.
02 Inputs the RUN command via the RUN key and the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator.
03 Inputs the RUN command via Modbus communication. 5
04 Inputs the RUN command via the mounted communications option unit.
• If you select 01 (Control circuit terminal block) in the RUN Command Selection, set any two of the
Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 00 (FW: Forward) and 01 (RV: Reverse).
• Also, when using the 3-wire input function, set the RUN Command Selection to 01 (Control circuit ter-
minal block).
For details on the 3-wire input function, refer to 5-9-9 3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R) on page
5-53.
• When the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection is set to 31 (OPE: Forced operator function) or 51 (F-
TM: Forced terminal block), the setting has priority over the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selec- tion
(A001/A201) and 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202).
When each terminal receives input, the frequency reference and RUN command from the Digital
Operator or the control circuit terminal block are enabled.
• When using the DriveProgramming function to input the RUN command, set the RUN Command
Selection to 01 (Control circuit terminal block).
For details, refer to “DriveProgramming User’s Manual (I580)”.
• To use the Digital Operator to input the RUN command, set the RUN direction in the RUN Direction
Selection (F004).

5 Basic Settings
• An example of inverter operation with forward command (FW) input and reverse command (RV) input
is shown below.
Output frequency Output Frequency Setting

5 Basic Settings
5-5 Frequency Reference Settings
5-5-1 Frequency Reference Selection

• Select the input method for the frequency reference in 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection
(A001/A201).
• When the multi-step speed reference function is used (by setting the multi-function input terminals for
the Multi-step Speed Reference 0 to 15), the setting in A001/A201 is enabled only for the Multi-step

Speed Reference 0.
The values set in the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035 ) are used as the frequency
references for the multi-step speed reference 1 to15.
• The frequency reference value selected in the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection can be
checked in the Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001). In addition, when A001/A201 is set to 02
(Digital Operator (F001)), the frequency reference can be changed in F001.
• When the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection is set to 31 (OPE: Forced operator function) or 51 (F-
TM: Forced terminal block), the setting has priority over the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selec- tion
(A001/A201) and 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202).
When each terminal is input, the frequency reference and RUN command from the Digital Operator
or the control terminal are enabled forcibly.
The values set in the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 have priority over the forced operator func- 5
tion and forced terminal block.
• When the Frequency Lower Limit (A062/A262) is set, the output frequency will be a frequency set by

the lower limit, even if the final frequency reference is set below the lower limit. Even if you set the
frequency reference to 0 Hz, the lower limit takes precedence, so turn OFF the RUN command to
make it stop.
Parameter
No.
00: Digital Operator (Volume) *2
(Analog input)
1st/2nd Frequency 02: Digital Operator (F001)
A001/A201 Reference Selec- 03: Modbus communication 02 −
tion *1 04: Option
10: Operation function output *3
0.00, Starting Frequency to 1st/2nd Max-
Output Frequency imum Frequency Hz
F001 6.00 %
Setting/Monitor When the PID function is enabled: 0.00
to 9999.00*4
Related functions A005, A141 to A143, A145, A146
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007)
to 08 (SET) and turn ON that terminal.
*2. This setting is enabled when the Digital Operator with the volume control (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) is con-
nected.
*3. Refer to 7-5-7 Frequency Calculation Function on page 7-39.

5 Basic Settings
Below are the details of the data of A001/A201.
Data Frequency reference source

Sets the frequency reference via the volume control on the external Digital Operator
00
(Model: 3G3AX-OP01).
Sets the frequency reference via the control circuit terminal block (analog input signals).
01
(O-L, OI-L)
02 Sets the frequency reference via the Digital Operator. (Output Frequency Setting/Monitor: F001)
03 Sets the frequency via Modbus communication.
04 Sets the frequency reference via the mounted communications unit.
Sets the frequency reference based on the pulse train frequency input to the pulse input EA ter-
06
minal.
07 Sets the frequency reference via the DriveProgramming. *1
10 Sets the calculation result of the frequency operation function as the frequency reference. *2
*1. Refer to “DriveProgramming User’s Manual (I580)”.

The Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) shows the frequency reference in the internal
memory (RAM).
F001 displays the frequency reference value selected at that time.
If you change the frequency reference value displayed in F001 and save it (by pressing the
Enter key), the data will be stored with the multi-step speed reference selected at that time.
• For the multi-step speed reference 0, the data will be stored with the 1st Multi-step Speed
Reference 0 (A020)/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A220) according to the 1st/2nd Con-
trol Method selection.
• For the multi-step speed reference 1 to 15, the data will be stored with the corresponding
Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035).
* The frequency reference of Digital Operator (Volume), Control circuit terminal block (Analog
input), Modbus communication, Communications unit, DriveProgramming, and Operation
function output cannot be changed in F001.

5 Basic Settings
The frequency reference methods that are used generally are shown below.
Using Digital Operator (Volume)

Set the frequency reference via the volume control for frequency setting on the Digital Operator (Model:
3G3AX-OP01).

Data display
RUN key
enabled LED
indicator
Operation keys Volume control for frequency
setting

1st/2nd Frequency 5
A001/A201 00: Digital Operator (Volume) *1 02 −
Reference Selection

*1. This setting is enabled when the Digital Operator with the volume control (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) is con-
nected.
Using Digital Operator

Set the frequency reference via the built-in Digital Operator.
To do so, set the Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) and 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0
(A020/A220).

5 Basic Settings

1st/2nd Frequency
A001/A201 02: Digital Operator (F001) 02 −
Reference Selection
Using an Analog Voltage Input or Analog Current Input

To use an analog voltage input or analog current input to set the frequency reference, set the parame-
ters as shown in the table below. This enables the frequency reference input (voltage reference) or fre-
quency reference input (current directive) terminal.
If input is made to both the frequency reference input (voltage reference) and frequency reference input
(current reference) terminals, the sum of the two analog input values will be set as the inverter fre-
quency reference.
However, do not set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 16 (AT: Analog input
switching). The terminal AT, when set, performs switching based on whether it is ON/OFF, without add-
ing the frequency reference (voltage reference) and the frequency reference input (current reference).
The frequency reference input (current reference) cannot be input unless the set terminal AT is input.
V A
• Frequency reference input (Voltage reference), between O and L: 0 o 10 VDC

• Frequency reference input (Current reference), between OI and L: 4 to 20 mA
Note By default, each analog input signal is set to reach the maximum frequency at 9.8 V or 19.8 mA.

1st/2nd Frequency 01: Control circuit terminal block
A001/A201 02 −
Reference Selection (Analog input)
00: Switch between O (Voltage)
A005 O/OI Selection 00 −
and OI (Current) via terminal AT
Multi-function Input Do not set C001 to C007 to 16 (AT:
C001 to C007 − −
1 to 7 Selection Analog input switching). *1
*1. If the terminal AT is not set, O input and OI input reference values will be added.

5 Basic Settings
Using an Analog Voltage Input or Analog Current Input by Switching

To switch between the analog voltage and analog current inputs to set the frequency reference, set the
parameters as shown in the table below.
This enables switching between the frequency reference input (voltage reference) and frequency refer-
ence input (current reference) terminals.
To switch between these analog input signals, use the terminal AT (Analog input switching) allocated to
a multi-function input terminal.
When the terminal AT is input, the frequency reference input (current reference) terminal is enabled.

V A
• Frequency reference input (Voltage reference), between O and L: 0 to 10 VDC

• Frequency reference input (Current reference), between OI and L: 4 to 20 mA

A001/A201 02 −
A005 O/FI Selection 00 −
and FI (Current)
Multi-function Input 16: AT (Analog input switching) 5
C001 to C007 − −
1 to 7 Selection

Using an Analog Voltage Input and Volume Control by Switching
To switch between an analog voltage input and the volume control on the Digital Operator (Model:
3G3AX-OP01) to set the frequency reference, set the parameters as shown in the table below.
This enables switching between the frequency reference input (voltage reference) and the volume con-
trol on the 3G3AX-OP01.
To switch the reference input, use the terminal AT (Analog input switching) allocated to a multi-function
input terminal.
When the terminal AT is input, the volume control on Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) is
enabled.
• Frequency reference input (Voltage reference), between O and L: 0 to 10 VDC

• Volume control on Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01)

A001/A201 02 −
and volume via terminal AT
A005 O/OI Selection 00 −
(Enabled only when
3G3AX-OP01 is used.)
Multi-function Input 16: AT (Analog input switching)
C001 to C007 − −
1 to 7 Selection

5 Basic Settings
Using Multi-step Speed Reference

Allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 02 to 05 or 32 to 38
(Multi-step speed) and turn ON that terminal. This enables the inverter to perform multi-step speed
operation, independent of Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) settings.
The frequency depends on the value set in the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035).
However, at the 0th speed where multi-step input signals are all OFF, the frequency depends on the
1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A002) setting.
Communications etc.
Set value in A001/A201

1st/2nd Frequency 02: Digital Operator (F001) *1
A001/A201 02 −
Reference Selection
00: Binary (16-step selection with 4 termi-
Multi-step Speed
A019 nals) 00 −
Selection
01: Bit (8-step selection with 7 terminals)
02 to 05: CF1 to CF4
Multi-function Input Binary 15-step
C001 to C007 − −
1 to 7 Selection 32 to 38: SF1 to SF7
Bit 7-step
0.00
1st Multi-step Speed
A020 Starting Frequency to 1st Maximum Fre-
Reference 0 *1
quency
6.00 Hz
2nd Multi-step 0.00
A220 Speed Reference Starting Frequency to 2nd Maximum Fre-
0*2 quency
Multi-step Speed 0.00
A021 to A035 0.00 Hz
Reference 1 to 15 Starting Frequency to Maximum Frequency
*1. Only the frequency reference at the 0th speed depends on the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection
(A001/A002) setting.
*2. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input Terminal 1 to 7 Selection
(C001 to C007) to 08 (SET) and turn ON that terminal.

5 Basic Settings
5-5-2 Frequency Reference Correlation Chart

To set the frequency reference, you need to set the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection
(A001/A201).
Alternatively, you can switch the frequency reference via multi-function input or from a communications
unit. Below is a correlation chart among the priority, related parameters, and related multi-function input
terminals when the frequency reference is switched.

ON
[O]+[FI] OFF
+
Allocation to
AT O/FI Selection terminal AT
A005
Analog No
00
02
Analog ON 03
current input [FI] Yes
5
Optional
Digital Operator ON
(Volume)
5-5-2 Frequency Reference Correlation Chart

ON
Digital Operator ON
*1
*2
Modbus 01
communication 02
00 ON
Option 03
04
Pulse train input 06
[EA] *3
07
10
Calculation
Frequency
Selection 1
A141
Calculation (+)
Frequency (−)
Selection 2 (x)
A142
Frequency calculation
function
*1. Setting the d001/d007 Data Setting Selection (b163) to 01 (Enabled) enables the d001 and d007 settings to
be changed and then reflected on the F001 setting.
*2. For details on the forced operator, refer to 7-6-2 Forced Operator Function (OPE) on page 7-55.
*3. For details on the forced terminal block, refer to 7-6-3 Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM) on page 7-55.

5 Basic Settings

The Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) shows the frequency reference in the internal
memory (RAM).
F001 displays the frequency reference value selected at that time.
If you change the frequency reference value displayed in F001 and save it (by pressing the
Enter key), the data will be stored with the multi-step speed reference selected at that time.
• For the multi-step speed reference 0, the data will be stored with the 1st Multi-step Speed
Reference 0 (A020)/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A220) according to the 1st/2nd Con-
trol Method selection.
• For the multi-step speed reference 1 to 15, the data will be stored with the corresponding
Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035).
* The frequency reference of Digital Operator (Volume), Control circuit terminal block (Analog
input), Modbus communication, Option, DriveProgramming, and Operation function output
cannot be changed in F001.
5-5-3 Frequency Limit

• Use this function to set the upper and lower limits of the output frequency. The set limits will be
applied if the input frequency reference is beyond the upper/lower limit(s).
• Set the upper limit first. Be sure that the value set in the 1st/2nd Frequency Upper Limit (A061/A261)
must be larger than the value set in the 1st/2nd Frequency Lower Limit (A062/A262).
• Set the upper and lower limit values so that they do not exceed the 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency
(A004/A204).
• The Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) and the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to
A035) must be within the range defined by the upper limit and lower limit settings.
• The upper/lower limit setting is disabled when set to 0 Hz.
• When Frequency Lower Limit (A062/A262) is set, the output frequency will be a frequency set by the
lower limit, even if the frequency reference is set below the lower limit. Even if you set the frequency
reference to 0 Hz, the lower limit takes precedence, so turn OFF the RUN command to make it stop.
• Based on the relationship between free v/f 7 and limits, a warning will be triggered.

0.00: Disabled (Function not active)
A061 1st Frequency Upper Limit 1st Frequency Lower Limit to 1st
Maximum Frequency
A261 2nd Frequency Upper Limit*1 2nd Frequency Lower Limit to 2nd
Maximum Frequency
0.00 Hz
A062 1st Frequency Lower Limit Starting Frequency (b082) to 1st Fre-
quency Upper Limit
A262 2nd Frequency Lower Limit *1 Starting Frequency (b082) to 2nd
Frequency Upper Limit
Related functions C001 to C007
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input Terminal 1 to 7 Selection (C001
to C007) to 08 (SET) and turn ON that terminal.

5 Basic Settings
Using an Analog Voltage Input or Analog Current Input (O-L, OI-L)

Setting the lower limit causes the inverter to output the frequency set in the 1st/2nd Frequency Lower
Limit (A062/A262) when 0V (4 mA) is input to the frequency reference.
The graph below shows the O/OI characteristics with the default analog input start/end function
settings (O: A011 to A015, OI: A101 to A105). For details on the analog input start/end function, refer
to 7-3-5 Analog Input Start/End Function Settings on page 7-25.
Output frequency [Hz]

Maximum
Frequency

A004/A204
A061
A062
Output frequency
0V 10V
4 mA 20 mA
5-5-3 Frequency Limit

5 Basic Settings
5-6 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings
5-6-1 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings

• Set the motor acceleration/deceleration time.
To accelerate/decelerate slowly, set a large value. To accelerate/decelerate quickly, set a small value.
• The set time here indicates the acceleration/deceleration time from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency.
The actual acceleration/deceleration time varies depending on the frequency reference value.
• The acceleration/deceleration time settings will be ignored and the output frequency will instanta-
neously follow the frequency reference if you set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to
C007) to 46 (LAC: LAD cancel) and input the signal to the corresponding terminal.
• To enable the switching to the 1st/2nd Acceleration Time 1 (F002/F202) and to the 1st/2nd Decelera-
tion Time 1 (F003/F203), set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection parameters to 08 (SET)
and turn ON the corresponding terminal.
For the Multi-function Input Selection parameters, refer to 7-2-1 Multi-function Input Selection on
page 7-18.
• The Acceleration/Deceleration Time Input Type (P031) sets the input type of the acceleration/decel-
eration type.
Select 00 (Digital Operator) to input via an inverter parameter or 03 (DriveProgramming) to input via
the DriveProgramming function.
• The actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be shorter than the minimum accelera-
tion/deceleration time, which is determined by the mechanical inertia moment and the motor torque.
Setting a time shorter than the minimum acceleration/deceleration time may cause an overcur-
rent/overvoltage trip.
• These acceleration/deceleration pattern settings are enabled also for frequency reference input via
analog input terminals.

5 Basic Settings
Parameter Default
No. data
F002 1st Acceleration Time 1 Acceleration time from 0 to maxi-
mum frequency 10.00
s
F202 2nd Acceleration Time 1 *1 (30.00)*3
0.00 to 3600.00*2
F003 1st Deceleration Time 1 Deceleration time from maximum
frequency to 0 10.00
s
(30.00)*3

F203 2nd Deceleration Time 1 *1
0.00 to 3600.00*2
Acceleration/Deceleration Time 00: Digital Operator
P031 00 −
Input Type 03: DriveProgramming
Related functions A004, A204, C001 to C007
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7
Selection (C001 to C007) to 08 (SET) and turn ON that terminal.
If a short deceleration time is set, the amount of regeneration fed back during deceleration
becomes large. If the amount of regeneration exceeds the amount allowable for the inverter,
the deceleration time will be extended according to the Overvoltage Suppression Function
Selection During Deceleration (b130) setting, or an overvoltage protection (E07.) is detected. 5
In such a case, use the regenerative braking function to shorten the deceleration time below
the set value.
5-6-2 Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern

For the regenerative braking function, refer to 5-12-2 Regenerative Braking Function on page
5-64.

• Use this function to set the acceleration/deceleration pattern for each system.
• Select the acceleration/deceleration pattern in the Acceleration Pattern Selection (A097) and Decel-
eration Pattern Selection (A098).
• The acceleration pattern and the deceleration pattern can be set independently.
• These acceleration/deceleration pattern settings are enabled also for frequency reference input via
analog input terminals.
• When the acceleration/deceleration pattern is set to EL-S-shape curve, do not change the frequency
reference during acceleration/deceleration. Even if the frequency reference is changed during accel-
eration/deceleration, the inverter operates with the EL-S-shape curve before the change, however
the frequency reaches the changed frequency reference.
• In the high-frequency mode, the Acceleration Pattern Selection (A097) and Deceleration Pattern
Selection (A098) are fixed to 00 (Line) and thus A097 and A098 are not displayed.

5 Basic Settings
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Line
A097 Acceleration Pattern Selection
01: S-shape curve
02: U-shape curve 01 −
A098 Deceleration Pattern Selection 03: Inverted U-shape curve
A131 Acceleration Curve Parameter
1 (Small curve) to 10 (Large curve) 2 −
A132 Deceleration Curve Parameter
EL-S Shape Acceleration Curve
A150
Ratio 1
0. to 50. 10 %
EL-S Shape Acceleration Curve
A151
Ratio 2
EL-S Shape Deceleration Curve
A152
Ratio 1
0. to 50. 10 %
EL-S Shape Deceleration Curve
A153
Ratio 2
Pattern Selection
Set the Acceleration Pattern Selection/Deceleration Pattern Selection (A097/A098) according to the fol-
lowing table.
Set value
Parameter
00 01 02 03 04
No.
Line S shape U shape Inverted U shape EL-S shape
Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency
A097
(Acceleration)
Time Time Time Time Time
Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency Output frequency
A098
(Deceleration)
Time Time Time Time Time
The motor acceler- This pattern is effec- These patterns are effective for tension con- This pattern provides
ates/decelerates lin- tive to prevent the trol and roll-break prevention applications shockless start/stop
Description early until the set collapse of load on for winding equipment etc. as with the S shape,
output frequency an elevator, con- but the intermediate
value is reached. veyor, etc. section is linear.

5 Basic Settings
Pattern Curve Parameter (Curve Factor)

Set the Acceleration Curve Parameter/Deceleration Curve Parameter (A131/A132) according to the fol-
lowing table.
S shape (A097/A098=01) U shape (A097/A098=02) Inverted U shape (A097/A098=03)

Output frequency [Hz] Output frequency [Hz] Output frequency [Hz]

Target frequency Target frequency Target frequency
[100%] [100%] [100%]
Acceleration time to the Acceleration time to the Acceleration time to the 5

set output frequency set output frequency set output frequency
value [100%] value [100%] value [100%]

• The S-shape pattern has a portion where acceleration/deceleration time is faster in the middle of the
curve.
• If the LAD cancel (LAC) function is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and that terminal is
input, the acceleration/deceleration pattern is ignored and the output frequency follows the frequency
reference.
EL-S-shape Curve Ratio
With the EL-S-shape pattern, you can set the EL-S Shape Acceleration/Deceleration Curve Ratio
(A150 to A153) independently.
Setting all of these parameters to 50 (%) is equivalent to selecting the S-shape pattern.

5 Basic Settings
5-6-3 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function

• Use the 2-step acceleration/deceleration function to switch between two acceleration/deceleration
time settings or change the acceleration/deceleration time on the way during acceleration/decelera-
tion.
• The acceleration/deceleration time switching method can be selected from the following three.
• A094/A294 = 00: Switch via 2CH terminal (multi-function input set to 09) (Example 1)
• A094/A294 = 01: Switch by 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Frequency (A095/A295/A096/A296)
(Example 2)
• A094/A294 = 02: Switch only during forward/reverse switching (Example 3)
• To switch via a multi-function input terminal, set one of the parameters C001 to C007 to 09 (2CH).
Parameter Default
No. data
A092 1st Acceleration Time 2 0.00 to 3600.00*2 10.00
s
A292 2nd Acceleration Time 2 *1 (15.00)*3
A093 1st Deceleration Time 2 0.00 to 3600.00*2 10.00
s
A293 2nd Deceleration Time 2 *1 (15.00)*3
00: Switch via 2CH terminal
1st 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration
A094 (multi-function input: 09)
Selection
(Example 1)
01: Switch by setting
(A095/A295/A096/A296) 00 −
2nd 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration (Example 2)
A294
Selection *1 02: Switch only during for-
ward/reverse switching
(Example 3)
A095 1st 2-step Acceleration Frequency 0.00 to 590.00
0.00 Hz
A295 2nd 2-step Acceleration Frequency *1
A096 1st 2-step Deceleration Frequency 0.00 to 590.00
*1
0.00 Hz
A296 2nd 2-step Deceleration Frequency
Related functions F002, F202, F003, F203, C001 to C007
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd Acceleration/Deceleration Time 2 and to 2nd 2-step Acceleration/Deceler-
ation Frequency, set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 08 (SET) and turn ON
that terminal.

5 Basic Settings
(Example 1) When 1st/2nd 2-step Accelera- (Example 2) When 1st/2nd 2-step Accelera-
tion/Deceleration Selection (A094/A294) is set to tion/Deceleration Selection (A094/A294) is set to
00 Switch via 2CH terminal 01 Switch by setting

(Example 3) When 1st/2nd 2-step Acceleration/Decel-
eration Selection (A094/A294) is set to 02 Switch only 5
during forward/reverse switching
5-6-3 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function

5 Basic Settings
5-7 Stop Method Settings
5-7-1 Stop Selection

• Select whether you want the motor to make a deceleration stop according to the deceleration time
setting or a free-run stop, when the STOP command is input via the Digital Operator or the control cir-
cuit terminal block.
• To use external braking, select Free-run stop.
Using external braking during deceleration stop may cause an overload or overcurrent.
• If you start the RUN command again during free run, the inverter will restart according to the Free-run
Stop Selection (b088) setting.
Parameter Default
No. data
b091 Stop Selection 00 −
01: Free-run stop
5-7-2 Free-run Stop Selection

• Free-run stop is a method of shutting off the inverter output to stop the motor rotation.
Executing the free-run stop function causes the motor to fall a free-run state, in which it decelerates
due to the load and friction forces exerted on the motor and/or machine and comes to a stop.
• In the Free-run Stop Selection (b088), set how to restart the motor rotating in a free-run state after the
execution of the free-run stop.
• The Free-run Stop Selection (b088) setting is enabled for the following cases.
When Stop Selection (b091) is set to 01 (Free-run stop)
Restarting the motor in a free-run stop state when the When Stop Selection (b091) is set to 01
(Free-run stop) causes the motor to restart according to the Free-run Stop Selection (b088) set-
ting.
When free-run stop (FRS) function is used via a multi-function input terminal
Setting the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 11 (FRS) and turning ON the
corresponding input terminal causes the motor to fall in a free-run stop state (with the inverter out-
put shut off).
Then, when the FRS terminal turns OFF, the motor restarts according to the Free-run Stop Selec-
tion (b088) setting.
However, the motor does not restart when the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202) is
set to 02 (Digital Operator).
• Set the Free-run Stop Selection (b088) as follows.
00: 0-Hz restart
Causes the Inverter to restart from 0 Hz.
Frequency pull-in restart causes the inverter to restart by outputting the frequency at shutoff to the
motor in a free-run stop state. When the output current reaches the Frequency Pull-in Restart
Level (b028), the inverter decelerates according to the Frequency Pull-in Restart Parameter
(b029) to suppress the output current. Once the output frequency and the output voltage are bal-
anced, the inverter performs normal operation.

5 Basic Settings

Frequency pull-in restart causes the inverter to restart by outputting the starting frequency set in
the Starting Frequency Selection at Frequency Pull-in Restart (b030) to the motor in a free-run
stop state. When the output current reaches the Frequency Pull-in Restart Level (b028), the
inverter decelerates according to the Frequency Pull-in Restart Parameter (b029) to suppress the
output current. Once the output frequency and the output voltage are balanced, the inverter per-
forms normal operation.
This enables a smooth restart independently of the voltage between motor terminals.
Use this setting when the Inverter is in free-run state for a long time due to a large load inertia.
• When the Frequency Pull-in Lower Limit Frequency (b007) is set, executing the frequency pull-in
restart function causes the inverter to restart from 0 Hz if the frequency at shutoff is the set frequency
or less.
• Immediately after a free-run stop, a large residual voltage remains between motor terminals.

If the inverter restarts the output, an overcurrent may occur. In this case, set the Restart Standby
Time (b003) to a long time.
• While in a free-run stop state, the motor is not subject to external influence because the inverter out-
put is shut off.
Even if the motor is stopped by external brake or the effect of other equipment, the inverter can still
be used without detecting any overcurrent.
However, if the motor in a free-run state is rotated externally, the regenerated energy may be fed
back to the inverter and an overvoltage may be detected. In this case, use the regenerative braking
function.
5
Parameter Default
No. data
5-7-2 Free-run Stop Selection

00: 0-Hz restart (Example 1)
b088 Free-run Stop Selection 00 −
(Example 2)
02: Frequency pull-in restart (Example 2)
b003 Restart Standby Time 0.3 to 100.0 1.0 s
Frequency Pull-in Lower 0.00 to 590.00
b007 0.00 Hz
Limit Frequency
Heavy load 0.20  Rated current to 2.00 
Frequency Pull-in Restart (CT) Rated current Rated
b028 current A
Level Light load 0.20  Rated current to 1.50  value
(VT) Rated current
0.1 to 3000.0
Set the deceleration rate for the output frequency
Frequency Pull-in Restart
b029 during frequency pull-in restart. 0.5 s
Parameter
Set the deceleration time from the maximum fre-
quency to 0 Hz.
Starting Frequency Selec- 00: Frequency at interruption
b030 tion at Frequency Pull-in 01: Maximum Frequency 00 −
Restart 02: Set frequency (Frequency reference)
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to
C007 11: FRS (Free-run stop) − −
7 Selection
• The details of the Starting Frequency Selection at Frequency Pull-in Restart (b030) are shown below.
Set value Content Description
00 Frequency at interruption Executes pull-in restart from frequency at which inverter output is shut off.
01 Maximum Frequency Executes pull-in restart from maximum frequency.
02 Set frequency Executes pull-in restart from set frequency reference.

5 Basic Settings
• The examples below assume that the FRS terminal is used.

When the motor is stopped in a free-run state by the STOP command, restarting of the inverter
occurs in the same timing as when the FRS terminal turns OFF.
(Example 1) 0-Hz restart (b088 = 00)

FW
FRS
Free-run
Motor
rotation
speed
0
• The inverter restarts at 0 Hz independent of the

motor rotation speed. The Restart Standby Time
setting will be ignored during 0-Hz restart.
• If the inverter starts at 0 Hz at a high motor rotation
speed, an overcurrent trip may occur.
(Example 2) Frequency pull-in restart (b088 = 02)

FW
FRS
Decelerates accord-
ing to b029
b028
Output
current
Inverter
output
frequency Frequency selected
in b030
Motor
rotation
speed b003
• When the set Restart Standby Time (b003) elapses,

the inverter starts output at the frequency set in the
Starting Frequency Selection at Frequency Pull-in
Restart (b030). When b088 is set to 01, the inverter
starts output at the frequency at shutoff.
Then, the inverter decelerates the motor according
to the Frequency Pull-in Restart Parameter (b029)
setting, while suppressing the output current to the
value set in the Frequency Pull-in Restart Level
(b028).
• When the current decreases to or below the Fre-
quency Pull-in Restart Level (b028), the inverter accel-
erates again to return to the original frequency.
• If an overcurrent trip occurs with this method,
reduce the Frequency Pull-in Restart Level (b028).

5 Basic Settings
5-7-3 STOP Key Selection

• Enable/disable the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator.
• This setting is enabled when the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202) is not set to 02 (Dig-
ital Operator).
However, when the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202) is set to 02 (Digital Operator), the
STOP/RESET key is enabled independent of this setting.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Enabled
b087 STOP Key Selection 01: Disabled 00 −

02: Only RESET enabled
STOP command via STOP/RESET key on Trip reset via STOP/RESET key on
Data
Digital Operator Digital Operator
00 Enabled Enabled
01 Disabled Disabled
02 Disabled Enabled

5
The STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator is enabled only when the STOP Key Selection
(b087) is set to 00: Enabled (default data).
5-7-3 STOP Key Selection

Be sure to provide a separate emergency stop switch.

5 Basic Settings
5-8 Reset Method Settings
5-8-1 Reset
• Use the reset function to reset the trip status of the inverter. This function is used also when the
inverter is running normally to shut off the inverter output.
To prevent the reset function from being activated when the Inverter is running normally, set the
Reset Selection (C102) to 02 (Enabled only during trip) or 03 (Reset only during trip).
• If the reset signal is input to the inverter, calculated electronic thermal function data, calculated
regenerative braking usage rate data, multi-function pulse counter data, current position monitor
data, and internal counter data used for the protective function are cleared. To prevent these data
from being cleared, set the Reset Selection (C102) to 03 (Reset only during trip).
• Setting the STOP Key Selection (b087) to 00 (Enabled) or 02 (Only RESET enabled) enables the
input of the reset signal via the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator.
• To input the reset signal via the control circuit terminal block, set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7
Selection (C001 to C007) to 18 (RS: Reset).
• The terminal RS (Reset) only supports NO (normally open contact) as the input method. The
Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Operation Selection (C011 to C017) cannot be set to 01 (NC: Normally
closed contact). Be sure to set the NO contact.
• Setting the Reset Selection (C102) to 01 (Trip reset at power-off) enables the reset function to be
activated at the falling edge of the signal.
• In the Reset Restart Selection (C103), select the restart method after reset is executed.
When the Reset Restart Selection (C103) is set to 00 (0-Hz restart), the inverter restarts from 0 Hz.
In addition, when the Reset Selection (C102) is set to 03 (Trip reset only), the inverter restarts from 0
Hz independently of the C103 setting.
Parameter
No.
00: Trip reset at power-on (Example 1)
01: Trip reset at power-off (Example 2)
C102 Reset Selection 02: Enabled only during trip (Reset at 02 −
power-on) (Example 1)
03: Reset only during trip (Example 1)
00: 0-Hz restart
C103 Reset Restart Selection 01: Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff 00 −
C007 18: RS (Reset) − −
7 Selection
(Example 1)Trip reset at power-on (Example 2)Trip reset at power-off

(C102 = 00, 02, or 03) (C102 = 01)
RS RS
Alarm Alarm

Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is not input before resetting the alarm because the machine
may abruptly start.

5 Basic Settings

• The reset function clears the data of calculated electronic thermal function and calculated
usage rate of regenerative braking.
Therefore, frequent use of the reset function causes the motor overload protection and brak-
ing resistor overheat protection functions of the inverter to malfunction.
If you execute the reset function continuously, wait until the motor and braking resistor tem-
peratures drop.
To shut off the inverter output, use the free-run stop function, instead of the reset function.
• When a trip occurs, the inverter will ignore the RUN command even if it is ON.
Enter the RUN command again after inputting the reset signal.

5
5-8-1 Reset

5 Basic Settings
5-8-2 Restart after Resetting

• In the Reset Restart Selection (C103), select the restart method after trip reset is executed.
However, when the Reset Selection (C102) is set to 03 (Trip reset only), the inverter restarts from 0
Hz independently of the C103 setting.
• To reset via the control circuit terminal block, set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to
C007) to 18 (RS: Reset).
• After the reset signal is input and the motor falls in a free-run state, a large residual voltage remains
between motor terminals.
If the inverter restarts the output in this condition, an overcurrent may occur.
To avoid this, set the Restart Standby Time (b003) to a large value.
• When the Reset Restart Selection (C103) is set to 00 (0-Hz restart), the inverter ignores the Restart
Standby Time (b003) and restarts from 0 Hz.
• When Reset Restart Selection (C103) is set to 01 (Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff), frequency
pull-in restart will be executed also when the power supply is cycled.
Parameter Default
No. data
Frequency Pull-in Lower
b007 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Hz
Limit Frequency
Heavy load 0.20  Rated current to 2.00 
Frequency Pull-in Restart (CT) Rated current Rated
b028 current A
Level Light load 0.20  Rated current to 1.50  value
(VT) Rated current
0.1 to 3000.0
Set the deceleration rate for the output fre-
b029 quency during frequency pull-in restart. 0.5 s
Parameter
Set the deceleration time from the maximum fre-
quency to 0 Hz.
Starting Frequency Selec- 00: Frequency at interruption
b030 tion at Frequency Pull-in 01: Maximum Frequency 00 −
00: 0-Hz restart
01: Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff (Exam-
C103 Reset Restart Selection 00 −
ple 1)
02: Frequency pull-in restart (Example 1)
• The details of the Starting Frequency Selection at Frequency Pull-in Restart (b030) are shown below.
Set value Content Description
00 Frequency at interruption Executes pull-in restart from frequency at which inverter output is
shut off.
01 Maximum Frequency Executes pull-in restart from maximum frequency.
02 Set frequency Executes pull-in restart from set frequency reference.

5 Basic Settings
(Example 1) Frequency pull-in restart

When the set Restart Standby Time (b003) elapses, the inverter starts output at the fre-
quency set in the Starting Frequency Selection at Frequency Pull-in Restart (b030).
Then, the inverter decelerates the motor according to the Frequency Pull-in Restart
Parameter (b029) setting, while suppressing the output current to the value set in the Fre-
quency Pull-in Restart Level (b028).
When the current decreases to or below the Frequency Pull-in Restart Level (b028), the
inverter accelerates again to return to the original frequency.
If this method causes an overcurrent trip, decrease the value set in the Frequency Pull-in
Restart Level (b028).
FW input
(Forward)

RS input
(Reset)
Decelerates according to b029
Trip occurs.
b028
Output current
Inverter output
frequency
Frequency
selected in b030
5
Motor rotation
speed
b003
5-8-2 Restart after Resetting

*1. When Reset Restart Selection (C103) is set to 01 (Frequency pull-in restart), pull-in restart will start at the fre-
quency at shutoff.
If the reset signal is input during the restart standby time, the “frequency at shutoff” data stored
in the inverter will be cleared, as a result the inverter restarts from 0 Hz after the reset is cleared.

5 Basic Settings
5-9 Multi-function Input Settings
5-9-1 Multi-function Input Selection

• You can allocate the functions shown in the following table to the multi-function input terminals 1 to 7
to use them.
• This section describes seven types of primary functions. For other functions, refer to 7-2
Multi-function Input/Output Functions on page 7-18.
To allocate the functions, set the values shown in the Data column of the following table in the
Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007).
• Do not allocate the same function to more than one multi-function input terminal. If you allocate the
same function to more than one multi-function input terminal by mistake, the function will be set only
for the terminal to which you allocated last and the previously allocated terminal will be reset to 255
(no: No allocation).
Parameter
Data Function name Reference item Page
No.
00 FW: Forward Forward run command P. 5-47
01 RV: Reverse Reverse run command P. 5-47
02 CF1: Multi-step speed setting binary 1
03 CF2: Multi-step speed setting binary 2 Multi-step speed operation
P. 5-48
04 CF3: Multi-step speed setting binary 3 function
05 CF4: Multi-step speed setting binary 4
06 JG: Jogging Jogging P. 5-51
09 2CH: 2-step acceleration/deceleration 2-step acceleration/deceleration P. 5-52
Multi-function
18 RS: Reset Reset P. 5-52
Input 1 to 7
20 STA: 3-wire start
Selection
21 STP: 3-wire stop 3-wire input function P. 5-53
(C001 toC007)
22 F/R: 3-wire forward/reverse
32 SF1: Multi-step speed setting bit 1
Multi-step speed operation
35 SF4: Multi-step speed setting bit 4 P. 5-48
function

5 Basic Settings
5-9-2 Multi-function Input Operation Selection

The multi-function input terminals can be set to either NO (NO contact) or NC (NC contact) individually.
This manual describes each function with the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Operation Selection (C011 to
C017) set to 00 (NO: NO contact). Note that the operations of set signals are reversed when you set
them to 01 (NC: NC contact).
Parameter Default
No. data
Multi-function Input 1 Operation 00: NO (NO contact)
C011
Selection

Multi-function Input 2 Operation 01: NC (NC contact)
C012
Selection
Multi-function Input 3 Operation • Each multi-function input termi-
C013
Selection nal 1 to 7 can be set indepen-
Multi-function Input 4 Operation dently to either an NO contact or
C014 00 −
Selection NC contact input terminal. *1
Multi-function Input 5 Operation • The terminal allocated to 18 (RS:
C015
Selection
Reset) cannot be set to NC
Multi-function Input 6 Operation contact. Be sure to set the NO
C016
Selection
contact.
Multi-function Input 7 Operation
C017
Selection
Related functions C001 to C007 5
*1. NO contact: ON when closed, OFF when open
NC contact: ON when open, OFF when closed
5-9-2 Multi-function Input Operation Selection

5-9-3 Input Terminal Response Time
• Set the response time for each multi-function input 1 to 7 terminal independently.
This function is effective for removing noise caused by chattering etc.
• If the terminal input becomes unstable because of chattering, increase the set value.
However, increasing the set value results in a slow response.
The setting range is 0 to 200, which provides a response time of approximately 2 to 400 ms.
Parameter Default
No. data
C160 to Multi-function Input 1 to 7
C166 Response Time 0. to 200. ( 2 ms) *1 1. ms
*1. When 0 is set, the response time is 2 ms.
5-9-4 Forward RUN Command (FW) and Reverse RUN Command (RV)
• To input the forward and reverse RUN commands via the control circuit terminals, set the Multi-func-
tion Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 00 (FW) and 01 (RV).
• By default, the Multi-function Input 1 Selection (C001) is set to 00 (FW) and the Multi-function Input 2
Selection (C002) is set to 01 (RV), respectively.
• To input the RUN command via these control circuit terminals, set the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selec-
tion (A002/A202) to 01 (Control circuit terminal block).
• If the terminals FW and RV turn ON simultaneously, the inverter will stop without displaying any
alarm. It will start operating again when either of these terminals turns OFF.
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection 00: FW (Forward)
− −
C007 01: RV (Reverse)

5 Basic Settings
5-9-5 Multi-step Speed Operation Function

• Use this function to switch the frequency reference set in the Multi-step Speed Reference 0 to 15
based on the combination of inputs to multi-function input terminals.
• For multi-step speed operation, you can select either 4-terminal binary operation (in 16 steps maxi-
mum) or 7-terminal bit operation (in 8 steps maximum).
Parameter
No.
00: Binary (16-step selection with
4 terminals)
A019 Multi-step Speed Selection 00 −
01: Bit (8-step selection with 7 ter-
minals)
0.00
A020 1st Multi-step Speed Reference 0 Starting Frequency (b082) to 1st
Maximum Frequency (A004)
6.00
0.00
A220 2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0*1 Starting Frequency (b082) to 2nd
Maximum Frequency (A204)
A021 Multi-step Speed Reference 1
A025 Multi-step Speed Reference 5 Hz
A027 Multi-step Speed Reference 7 0.00
A028 Multi-step Speed Reference 8 Starting Frequency (b082) to 1st/2nd 0.00
A029 Multi-step Speed Reference 9 Maximum Frequency (A004/204)
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input Terminal 1 to 7 Selection (C001
to C007) to 08 (SET) and turn ON that terminal.

Use the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) to set the 1st/2nd Multi-step
Speed Reference 0 (A020/A220).
Set the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) to 02 (Digital Operator: F001) to
enable the 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A020/A220).

5 Basic Settings
Binary Operation
• Setting the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 02 (CF1) to 05 (CF4) enables
the selection of the multi-step speed 0 to 15.
• Use the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035) to set the frequency for the multi-step
speed 1 to 15.
• Use the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) to set the 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed
Reference 0 (A020/A220).
Set the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) to 02 (Digital Operator: F001) to enable
the 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A020/A220).
If A001/A201 are set to 01 (Control circuit terminal block: Analog input), the analog input is used as
the frequency reference to set the 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0.

Parameter
No.
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to 7 03: CF2 (Multi-step speed setting binary 2)
− −
C007 Selection 04: CF3 (Multi-step speed setting binary 3)
Multi-step Speed/Position 0. to 200. ( 10 ms)
C169 0. ms
Determination Time
Multi-step
CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1
speed
0th OFF 5
OFF
1st ON
OFF
2nd OFF
5-9-5 Multi-step Speed Operation Function

ON
3rd ON
OFF
4th OFF
OFF
5th ON
ON
6th OFF
ON
7th ON
8th OFF
OFF
9th ON
OFF
10th OFF
ON
11th ON
ON
12th OFF
OFF
13th ON
ON
14th OFF
ON
15th ON
• For multi-step speed binary operation, the wait time until the inverter recognizes terminal input can be
set in the Multi-step Speed/Position Determination Time (C169). This prevents the transitional status
before terminal input is recognized from being accepted.
• Input data will be determined if it remains unchanged for the time set in the Multi-step Speed/Position
Determination Time (C169). Note that setting a long determination time results in a slow input
response.
With zero determination time 15 With determination time

(C169) 11 13 (C169)
9
Frequency reference 5
Determination time 4
1
(C169)
CF1
CF2
CF3
CF4

5 Basic Settings
Bit Operation
• Setting the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 32 (SF1) to 38 (SF7) enables
the selection of the multi-step speed 0 to 7.
• Use the Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 7 (A021 to A027) to set the frequency for SF1 to SF7.
• Use the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) to set the 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed
Reference 0 (A020/A220).
Set the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) to 02 (Digital Operator: F001) to enable
the 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A020/A220).
If A001/A201 are set to 01 (Control circuit terminal block: Analog input), the analog input is used as
the frequency reference to set the 1st/2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0.
Parameter
No.
C007 35: SF4 (Multi-step speed setting bit 4) − −
Selection
Multi-step
SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1
speed
0th OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1st Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ON
2nd Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ON OFF
3rd Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ON OFF OFF
4th Disabled Disabled Disabled ON OFF OFF OFF
5th Disabled Disabled ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
6th Disabled ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
7th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Note When several terminals simultaneously turn ON, prior-
ity is given to the terminal with the smallest number.
“Disabled” in the above table indicates that speed is
selected regardless of the ON/OFF status.

5 Basic Settings
5-9-6 Jogging (JG)

• When the jogging function is enabled, jogging operation starts when the RUN command is input.
• To enable the jogging function, set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 06
(JG: Jogging).
• Then, set the frequency reference for jogging operation in the Jogging Frequency (A038).
Because, in jogging operation, the frequency reference is output without acceleration time, setting a
high jogging frequency value may cause an overload or trip error. Be sure to set a frequency value
that does not cause tripping.
• Use the Jogging Stop Selection (A039) to set the jogging stop method and whether to enable or dis-

able the jogging function during operation.
Parameter
No.
C007
06: JG (Jogging) − −
Selection
0.00
A038 Jogging Frequency 6.00 Hz
Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00)*1
00: Free-running on jogging stop/Dis-
abled during operation
01: Deceleration stop on jogging
stop/Disabled during operation 5
02: DC injection braking on jogging
stop*2/Disabled during operation
−
5-9-6 Jogging (JG)

A039 Jogging Stop Selection 04
03: Free-running on jogging
stop/Enabled during operation
04: Deceleration stop on jogging
stop/Enabled during operation
05: DC injection braking on jogging
stop*2/Enabled during operation
*2. If the Jogging Stop Selection(A039) is set to 02 or 05, set the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051).
Refer to 7-9-1 DC Injection Braking (DB) on page 7-93.
⚫ Disabled during operation

When the Jogging Stop Selection (A039) is set to 00, 01, or 02, jogging operation is not performed if
the FW signal turns ON first.
To perform jogging operation, turn ON the JG terminal and then turn ON the terminal FW or RV.
Jogging Operation Enabled Jogging Operation Disabled

5 Basic Settings
⚫ Enabled during operation

When the Jogging Stop Selection (A039) is set to 03, 04, or 05, jogging operation is performed even
if the FW signal turns ON first.
However, if the JG signal turns OFF first, the motor falls in a free-run stop state.
5-9-7 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration (2CH)

• Use this function to switch between two acceleration/deceleration time settings or change the accel-
eration/deceleration time on the way during acceleration/deceleration.
• Allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 09 (2CH).
• For the 2-step acceleration/deceleration function, refer to 5-6-3 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration
Parameter
No.
C007 09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration) − −
Selection
5-9-8 Reset (RS)

• This function resets an inverter trip error.
• Allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 18 (RS).
• For the reset function, refer to 5-8 Reset Method Settings on page 5-42.
Parameter
No.
C007 18: RS (Reset) − −
Selection

5 Basic Settings
5-9-9 3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R)

• Use this function to start and stop the inverter via an automatic reset contact such as a pushbutton
switch.
• Allocate the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 20 (STA), 21 (STP), and 22
(F/R).
• Set the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202) to 01 (Control circuit terminal block).
• Allocating the terminal STP disables the terminals FW and RV.
Parameter

No.
1st/2nd RUN Command 01: Control circuit terminal block
A002/A202 02 −
Selection (DriveProgramming)
C007
21: STP (3-wire stop) − −
Selection
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
Data Symbol Function name Status Description

ON Start via automatic reset contact
20 STA 3-wire start
OFF Independent of motor operation
ON Motor operation enabled
21 STP 3-wire stop
OFF Stop via automatic reset contact
ON Reverse
5
22 F/R 3-wire forward/reverse
OFF Forward
5-9-9 3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R)

• To capture the ON/OFF status reliably, the ON or OFF status must continue for twice the set value of
the input terminal response time (C160 to C166). If the input terminal response time is the default,
ensure that the status continues for 2 ms.
• The operation timing is as follows.
STA ON OFF
STP ON OFF
F/R OFF ON
Output
frequency

5 Basic Settings
5-10 Multi-function Output Settings
5-10-1 Multi-function Output Selection

• You can allocate the functions shown in the following table to the multi-function output 11 and 12
terminals, and the multi-function relay output (AL1, AL2) terminals.
• This section describes seven types of primary functions. For other functions, refer to 7-2
Multi-function Input/Output Functions on page 7-18.
• Set the functions in the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022) and the Multi-function
Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026) to use them.
• The multi-function output 11 and 12 terminals are for open collector output and the multi-function
relay output (AL1, AL2) terminals are for relay output.
• The default data of Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026) is 05 (AL: Alarm
signal). Therefore, the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Operation Selection (C036) is set to 01
(NC: NC contact) by default.
This manual describes each function with the Multi-function Output Operation Selection set to 00 (NO:
NO contact). Note that the operations of the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) are reversed.
Parameter
Data Function name Reference item Page
No.
Multi-function 00 RUN: Signal during RUN Signal during RUN P. 5-55
Output 11/12
Selection 01 FA1: Constant speed arrival signal Constant speed arrival signal P. 5-56
(C021/C022) 05 AL: Alarm signal Alarm signal P. 5-56
Multi-function 21 ZS: 0 Hz detection signal 0 Hz detection signal P. 5-57
Relay Output
(AL1, AL2) 50 IRDY: Operation ready Operation ready signal P. 5-58
Function 51 FWR: Forward run signal Forward run signal P. 5-58
Selection
(C026) 52 RVR: Reverse run signal Reverse run signal P. 5-58
5-10-2 Multi-function Output Operation Selection

• Set the multi-function output 11/12 terminals and the multi-function relay output (AL1, AL2)
terminals to either NO (NO contact) or NC (NC contact) individually.
• This manual describes each function with the Multi-function Output Operation Selection set to 00
(NO: NO contact). Note that the signal operations are reversed when you set them to 01 (NC: NC
contact).
Parameter Default
No. data
Multi-function Output 11 00: NO (NO contact)
C031
Operation Selection
00 −
Multi-function Output 12 01: NC (NC contact)
C032
Operation Selection
00: NO contact between AL1 and AL0,
Multi-function Relay Output
NC contact between AL2 and AL0
C036 (AL1, AL2) Operation 01 −
01: NC contact between AL1 and AL0,
Selection
NO contact between AL2 and AL0

5 Basic Settings
5-10-3 Multi-function Output ON/OFF Delay Time

• Each multi-function output terminal can be allocated with the ON/OFF delay time independently.
• Because all output signals turn ON/OFF immediately when the set conditions are met, depending on
the selected signal, chattering may occur. In such a case, use this function to hold or delay the signal.
• Set the parameter independently for each output terminal.
For the output terminal, multi-function output terminals 11 and 12 and a multi-function relay output
(AL1, AL2) terminal are provided.
The correspondence between each output terminal and the related ON/OFF delay parameter is

shown in the table below.
Parameter Default
No. data
C132 Multi-function Output 12 ON Delay Time 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 s
C140 Multi-function Relay Output ON Delay
C133 Multi-function Output 12 OFF Delay Time 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 s
C141 Multi-function Relay Output OFF Delay
5-10-4 Signal during RUN (RUN) 5

• The RUN signal is output during inverter operation.
5-10-3 Multi-function Output ON/OFF Delay Time

• Allocate one of the Multi-function Output 11 Selection or Multi-function Output 12 Selection
(C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 00
(RUN).
• The RUN signal is also output when the inverter is decelerating after the RUN command turns OFF
or DC injection braking is active.
• The RUN signal will not be output even if the RUN command is input when the frequency reference is
0 Hz and the output reference reaches 0 Hz. (Note that on the Digital Operator, the RUN LED is lit
when the RUN command is ON. If the set frequency is 0 Hz, it will blink.)
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 00: RUN (Signal dur- − −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) ing RUN)
C026 05 −
Function Selection
The timing diagram is as follows.

The inverter outputs the RUN (during RUN) signal until the motor is stopped even if the RUN command
(FW) turns OFF.

5 Basic Settings
5-10-5 Constant Speed Arrival Signal (FA1)

• This signal is output when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in the Output Frequency
Setting/Monitor.
In F001, the frequency reference selected at that time is displayed.
• Allocate one of the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay Out-
put (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 01 (FA1).
• The hysteresis of this frequency arrival signal is calculated as follows.
ON (fon) : Set frequency − 1% of maximum frequency) [Hz]

OFF (foff) : Set frequency − 2% of maximum frequency) [Hz]
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 01: FA1 (Constant − −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) speed arrival signal)
C026 05 −
Function Selection
Set fon: 1% of maximum frequency

Output fon foff
frequency foff: 2% of maximum frequency
frequency
Example
Maximum frequency = 120 [Hz]
fon = 120  0.01 = 1.2 [Hz]
FA1 foff = 120  0.02 = 2.4 [Hz]
Set frequency = 60 [Hz]
During acceleration: FA1 is ON at 60 - 1.2 = 58.8 [Hz]
During deceleration: FA1 is OFF at 60 - 2.4 = 57.6 [Hz]
5-10-6 Alarm Signal (AL)

• If an overcurrent, overvoltage, or some other error occurs, the inverter shuts off its output and outputs
an alarm signal (AL). This is called a “trip.”
• A trip state can be canceled by resetting the inverter, by which the alarm signal is also turned OFF.
To reset the inverter, press the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator or turn ON the reset termi-
nal. However, you cannot reset some trip factors by using these methods. In such cases, cycle the
power supply.
put (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 05 (AL).
By default, the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026) is set to 05 (AL:
Alarm signal).
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 05: AL (Alarm signal) − −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2)
C026 05 −
Function Selection

5 Basic Settings

The Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026) is, by default, set to 05
(AL: Alarm output).
The table below shows the relationship between the relay output status when the inverter input
power supply is ON/OFF and the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Operation Selection
(C036) setting. Select the parameter setting appropriate to the sequence of your inverter
according to this table.
Input Relay output status

Setting in C036 power Inverter status Between Between

supply AL1 and AL2 and
AL0 AL0
Normal Open Closed
ON
00 Alarm output Closed Open
OFF − Open Closed
Normal Closed Open
ON
01 (Default data) Alarm output Open Closed
OFF − Open Closed
5-10-7 0-Hz Detection Signal (ZS)

5
• This signal is output when the output frequency of the inverter falls below the 0 Hz Detection Level
(C063).
• Allocate one of the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or the Multi-function Relay
5-10-7 0-Hz Detection Signal (ZS)

Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 21 (ZS).
When the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) is set to 01 (Feedback pulse), this function works
according to the motor rotation speed (feedback value).
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 21: ZS (0 Hz detec- −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) tion signal) −
C026 05
Function Selection
C063 0 Hz Detection Level 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 Hz
Related functions A044, A244, P003
Output frequency
C063
ZS output ON ON
RUN command ON

5 Basic Settings
5-10-8 Operation Ready (IRDY)

• This signal is output when the inverter becomes ready to operate (ready to accept the RUN command).
• When this command is not output, the inverter does not operate even if the RUN command is input.
• If this signal is not output, check if the input power supply voltage (R, S, T) is within the specified
range.
Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 50 (IRDY).
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 50: IRDY (Operation −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) ready) −
C026 05
Function Selection
5-10-9 Forward Run Signal (FWR)

• This signal is output while the inverter performs the forward operation.
• While the inverter performs the reverse operation or when stopped, this signal is not output.
Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 51 (FWR).
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 51: FWR (Forward −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) run signal) −
C026 05
Function Selection
5-10-10 Reverse Run Signal (RVR)

• This signal is output while the inverter performs the reverse operation.
• While the inverter performs the forward operation or when stopped, this signal is not output.
Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 52 (RVR).
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 52: RVR (Reverse −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) run signal) −
C026 05
Function Selection
Output frequency [Hz]
Forward run (FWR) signal
Reverse run (RVR) signal

5 Basic Settings
5-11 Torque Boost Function Settings
5-11-1 Torque Boost

• Use the torque boost function to raise the output torque if it is not sufficient at low speeds.
• This inverter provides two torque boost options: Manual torque boost for manual torque adjustment
and Automatic torque boost for automatic torque adjustment.

• To use the automatic torque boost function effectively, be sure to set the 1st/2nd Motor Capacity
(H003/H203) and the 1st/2nd Motor Pole Number (H004/H204) according to your motor.
Parameter
No.
A041 1st Torque Boost Selection 00: Manual torque boost
01 −
A241 2nd Torque Boost Selection *1 01: Automatic torque boost
A042 1st Manual Torque Boost Voltage
0.0 to 20.0 *2 1.0 %
A242 2nd Manual Torque Boost Voltage *1
A043 1st Manual Torque Boost Frequency
0.0 to 50.0 *3 5.0 %
A243 2nd Manual Torque Boost Frequency *1
H003 1st Motor Capacity 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/ Maximum
*1
2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/ applicable kW 5
H203 2nd Motor Capacity motor capacity
15.0/18.5
H004 1st Motor Pole Number 2/4/6/8
5-11-1 Torque Boost

4 pole
H204 2nd Motor Pole Number *1 10 to 48: Do not set.
1st Automatic Torque Boost Voltage
A046
Compensation Gain
0. to 255. 100.
2nd Automatic Torque Boost Voltage
A246
Compensation Gain *1
%
1st Automatic Torque Boost Slip
A047
Compensation Gain
0. to 255. 0.
2nd Automatic Torque Boost Slip
A247
Compensation Gain *1
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to
C007) to 08 (SET) and turn ON that terminal.
*2. Set data as a percentage (%) of the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282).
*3. Set data as a percentage (%) of the 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency (A004/A204).

5 Basic Settings
Automatic Torque Boost

• With this setting, the inverter increases the output voltage automatically depending on the load condi-
tion. In other words, the output voltage generated when the automatic torque boost is enabled is the
sum of manual torque boost voltage and the automatic torque boost voltage.
• To use the automatic torque boost function effectively, set the 1st/2nd Motor Capacity (H003/H203)
and the 1st/2nd Motor Pole Number (H004/H204) correctly according to your motor.
• To avoid possible overcurrent tripping during deceleration, set the AVR Selection (A081) to 00
(Always ON).
• To enable the slip compensation function in addition to the voltage compensation provided by the
automatic torque boost function, first set the 1st/2nd Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation
Gain (A047/A247) to 100%.
• If the automatic torque boost does not provide the intended performance characteristics, adjust it for
each adjustment item shown in the following table.
Phenomenon Adjustment method Adjustment item

(1) Gradually increase the Automatic Torque Boost Voltage
A046/A246
Torque is insufficient at Compensation Gain.
low speeds. (Motor (2) Set the Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation Gain to
A047/A247
does not rotating at 100. Then, increase the set value gradually.
low speeds.) (3) Gradually increase the Manual Torque Boost Voltage. A042/A242
(4) Decrease the Carrier Frequency. b083
(1) Gradually decrease the Automatic Torque Boost Voltage
A046/A246
Compensation Gain.
Overcurrent trip
(2) Set the Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation Gain to
occurs when load is A047/A247
100. Then, decrease the set value gradually.
applied.
(3) Gradually decrease the Manual Torque Boost Voltage. A042/A242
(4) Gradually decrease the Overload Limit Parameter. b023/b223/b026
Phenomenon Adjustment method Adjustment item

Rotation speed Set the Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation Gain to 100
decreases when load and gradually increase the value. A047/A247
is applied.
Rotation speed Set the Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation Gain to 100
increases when load is and gradually decrease the value. A047/A247
applied.

5 Basic Settings
Manual Torque Boost

• In the manual torque boost function, set the output voltage and output frequency characteristics of
the inverter.
• The automatic torque boost function automatically adds the output voltage and output frequency to
the characteristics set in the manual torque boost function.
• Adjust the manual torque boost function when the automatic boost function is disabled or if the motor
stalls at low speeds.
• Set the 1st/2nd Manual Torque Boost Frequency (A043/A243) to the rotation speed that provides the

required output torque.
While observing the movement of the load, gradually increase the 1st/2nd Manual Torque Boost Volt-
age (A042/A242) value so that the motor speed does not decrease.
Check the output current of the inverter and adjust it to 150% of the rated current of the motor or less.
• Set A042/A242 as 100% of the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282) value.
• Set A043/A243 as 100% of the 1st/2nd Base Frequency (A003/A203) value.
• Setting the Manual Torque Boost Voltage data too high may cause motor overexcitation. An overex-
cited motor is inefficient, and causes overload or overcurrent conditions easily.
Output voltage [%]

5
100
5-11-1 Torque Boost

A042/A242
Output frequency
A043/A243 Base Frequency
(100%)

5 Basic Settings
5-12 Measures against Overvoltage
5-12-1 Overvoltage Suppression Function during Deceleration

• Use this function to prevent overvoltage trip caused by the regenerative energy from the motor during
deceleration.
• Enable or disable the function in the Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During Decelera-
tion (b130). The default data is set to 01 (Enabled: DC voltage kept constant).
• If the Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During Deceleration (b130) is set to 01 (Enabled:
DC voltage constant control), the inverter decelerates automatically while keeping the main circuit
DC voltage rise due to deceleration start at the Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration
(b131).
• If the Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During Deceleration (b130) is set to 02 (Enabled:
Acceleration enabled), the inverter starts accelerating according to the Overvoltage Suppression Param-
eter During Deceleration (b132) setting when the main circuit DC voltage increases due to the start of
deceleration to exceed the Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration (b131). After that, when
the main circuit DC voltage falls below the value set in b131, the inverter starts deceleration again.
• To use this function, set the Usage Rate of Regenerative Braking (b090) to 0.0 (Regenerative braking
not active) and the Regenerative Braking Selection (b095) to 00 (Disabled).
Parameter
No.
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC voltage kept
Overvoltage Suppression Func-
b130 constant) (Example 1) *1 01 −
tion Selection During Deceleration
02: Enabled (Acceleration
enabled) (Example 2)
Overvoltage Suppression Level Dur- 200-V class: 330. to 400.
b131 380./760. V
ing Deceleration *2 400-V class: 660. to 800.
0.10 to 30.00:
Set the acceleration rate for the
output frequency when the over-
Overvoltage Suppression Parame-
b132 voltage suppression during 1.00 s
ter During Deceleration
deceleration function is enabled.
Set the acceleration time from 0
Hz to the maximum frequency.
0.00 to 5.00:
Overvoltage Suppression Propor-
b133 Proportional gain for DC voltage 0.20 −
tional Gain During Deceleration
constant control (b130 = 01 only)
0.0 to 150.0:
Overvoltage Suppression Integral
b134 Integral time when DC voltage is 1.0 s
Time During Deceleration
kept constant (b130 = 01 only)
Usage Rate of Regenerative Brak- 0.0: Regenerative braking not
b090 0.0 %
ing active
b095 Regenerative Braking Selection 00: Disabled 0.0 −
*1. When b130 is set to 01, PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant.
Although increasing the Overvoltage Suppression Proportional Gain During Deceleration (b133) provides a
faster response, setting it to an excessive large value may cause an overcurrent trip.
Increasing the Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time During Deceleration (b134) also provides a faster
response, but setting it to an excessive small value may cause an overcurrent trip.
*2. If b131 is set to a value less than the input voltage, the inverter may not be able to stop the motor. Normally,
do not set this value to 350 V or less for 200-V class and 700 V or less for 400-V class.

5 Basic Settings
(Example 1) (Example 2)
When DC voltage is kept constant (b130 = 01) When acceleration is enabled (b130 = 02)
Main circuit DC voltage [V] Main circuit DC voltage [V]
Overvoltage Overvoltage
suppression control level
level (b131) (b131)
Output frequency Time [s] Output frequency Time [s]

[Hz] DC voltage kept constant [Hz]
Deceleration starts Deceleration starts

starts
Accelerates according to b132
Time [s] Time [s]

• When the overvoltage suppression function during Deceleration function is enabled, the 5
actual deceleration time is longer than the set time.
If the motor load inertia is large, the motor may take a long time to stop.
5-12-1 Overvoltage Suppression Function during Deceleration

To shorten the time until the motor stops, change to the deceleration stop method according
to 5-12-2 Regenerative Braking Function on page 5-64.
• Setting the Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration (b131) to a value less than
the input power supply voltage prevents deceleration. Be sure to set this to a value higher
than the input power supply voltage multiplied by the square root of 2.
Normally, do not set this value to 350 V or less for 200-V class and 700 V or less for 400-V
class.
• Even when the overvoltage suppression function during deceleration function is enabled,
rapid deceleration may cause a trip if the motor cannot respond in time.
In this case, change to the deceleration stop method according to 5-12-2 Regenerative
Braking Function on page 5-64.

5 Basic Settings
5-12-2 Regenerative Braking Function

• When the motor decelerates, moves downward, or is rotated by an external load (that is, when the
output torque direction and the rotation direction are opposite), it serves as a generator and the
regenerated energy is fed back to the inverter.
However, if the motor load inertia is large, the amount of regeneration may become large, which
causes an overvoltage during rapid deceleration or when driving an elevating axis.
• The regenerative braking function uses the built-in or an external regenerative braking circuit to
decrease the internal main circuit DC voltage of the inverter by converting the regenerated energy
from the motor into heat via external braking resistors.
• Connect external braking resistors or external regenerative braking units according to the description
of External Braking Resistor Connection Terminal/Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal in
2-3-4 Wiring for Main Circuit Terminals on page 2-17.
The regenerative braking function is enabled only when the inverter is connected with one or more
external braking resistors/external regenerative braking units.
• The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series has a built-in regenerative braking circuit. Connect external braking
resistors only.
• If a large braking torque is required or if a large regenerative energy must be processed, the built-in
regenerative braking processing circuit may not be sufficient, forcing you to use the Regenerative
Braking Unit.
• To use the built-in regenerative braking function of the inverter, set the Regenerative Braking Selec-
tion (b095) to 01 or 02 (Enabled).
Normally, this parameter is set to 01 (Enabled: Disabled during stop). Set this parameter to 02
(Enabled: Enabled during operation and stop) when regenerative braking is required due to external
force, for example, when using a PM motor.
At this time, set the usage rate (%) of the braking resistor in use in the Usage Rate of Regenerative
Braking (b090).
Note that the regenerative braking function is enabled only when both b090 and b095 are set.
• Be sure to set the resistance of the braking resistor connected to the inverter in the Braking Resistor
Value (b097).
This setting, together with the Usage Rate of Regenerative Braking (b090) data, is used by the
regenerative braking protective function.
• For the Regenerative Braking ON Level (b096), you need not change the default data normally.
This parameter is used for adjusting the level at which the regenerative braking function turns ON
according to the input power supply voltage to the inverter.
• When the external regenerative braking unit is used, regenerative braking is performed in the exter-
nal regenerative braking unit. Therefore, set the inverter parameter, Regenerative Braking Selection
(b095) to 00 (Disabled). In this case, the b090, b096, and b097 settings are ignored.
• To use the regenerative braking function, set the Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During
Deceleration (b130) to 00 (Disabled).

5 Basic Settings
Parameter Default
No. data
0.0: Regenerative braking not active
0.1 to 100.0 (Limited by b097) The usage rate must
be set as a percentage (%) as follows:
Allowable braking frequency [%] of the connected
braking resistor or lower.
Exceeding the set usage rate causes the protective
Usage Rate of Regen- function to be activated, which results in a trip.
b090 0.0 %
erative Braking t1 t2 t3

ON ON ON
Regenerative
braking function 100 s
activated
Usage rate [%] = (t1 + t2 + t3) × 100
100 s
00: Disabled
Regenerative Braking
b095 01: Enabled (Disabled during stop) 00 −
Selection
02: Enabled (Enabled during operation and stop)
200-V class: 330 to 400 VDC *1 200-V
class:
Regenerative Braking 360 V
b096 V
ON Level 400-V class: 660 to 800 VDC *1 400-V
class: 5
720 V
Braking Resistor Value Minimum connection resistance to 600.0
5-12-2 Regenerative Braking Function

Set the resistance of the braking resistor actually
connected to the inverter. Minimum
Then, the inverter automatically calculates the upper connec-
b097 tion resis- 
limit value allowable in b090. tance for
This allows you to consider only the allowable brak- capacity
ing frequency (%) of the braking resistor when set-
ting b090.
*1. For the Regenerative Braking ON Level, set the internal main circuit DC voltage of the inverter.

• To use the built-in regenerative braking function of the inverter, be sure to set the Usage Rate
of Regenerative Braking (b090) and the Regenerative Braking Selection (b095) to 01 or 02. If
you do not set both parameters, the function cannot work.
• Setting the Regenerative Braking ON Level (b096) to the incoming voltage or lower causes
the built-in regenerative braking function to be always active, which results in overheating or
burning of the braking resistor. Be sure to set this to a value higher than the incoming voltage
multiplied by the square root of 2.
Set b096 to 380 VDC or higher for 240 VAC of the incoming voltage and to 750 VDC or
higher for 480 VAC of the incoming voltage, respectively.
• To use the regenerative braking function, connect external braking resistor(s) or external
regenerative braking unit(s) according to the description of External Braking Resistor Con-
nection Terminal/Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal in 2-3-4 Wiring for Main
Circuit Terminals on page 2-17.
Be sure to install a circuit that detects overheating of the braking resistor(s) and the regener-
ative braking unit(s) via alarm contacts (thermal relay output terminals) and shuts off the
input power supply of the inverter.

5 Basic Settings

Vector Control and Applied Functions
This section describes the vector control and applied functions characteristic of this
inverter.
6-1 Sensorless Vector Control ................................................................................ 6-3

6-1-1 Sensorless Vector Control Parameter Settings ................................................... 6-3
6-1-2 Offline Auto-tuning for Motor Parameters ............................................................ 6-4
6-1-3 Motor Parameter Settings ................................................................................... 6-9
6-1-4 Adjustments for Sensorless Vector Control ....................................................... 6-10 6
6-2 Torque Limit Function ..................................................................................... 6-12
6-2-1 Torque Limit Function Settings .......................................................................... 6-12
6-2-2 Torque LADSTOP Function Settings ................................................................. 6-14
6-3 Overtorque/Undertorque Function ................................................................. 6-15
6-3-1 Overtorque/Undertorque Function Settings ....................................................... 6-15
6-4 Torque Control ................................................................................................. 6-16
6-4-1 Torque Control Settings ..................................................................................... 6-16
6-4-2 Torque Bias Function Settings........................................................................... 6-17
6-5 V/f Control with Speed Feedback ................................................................... 6-18
6-5-1 Settings of V/f Control with Speed Feedback .................................................... 6-18
6-5-2 Recommended Encoder and Its Wiring ............................................................. 6-19
6-5-3 Protective Detection under V/f Control with Speed Feedback ........................... 6-23
6-5-4 Adjustments for V/f Control with Speed Feedback............................................. 6-24
6-6 Brake Control Function ................................................................................... 6-25
6-6-1 Operation Sequence of Brake Control Function ................................................ 6-25
6-6-2 Brake Control Function Settings ........................................................................ 6-26
6-7 Simple Position Control .................................................................................. 6-28
6-7-1 Feedback Settings for Simple Position Control.................................................. 6-28
6-7-2 Recommended Encoder for Simple Position Control and Its Wiring .................. 6-29
6-7-3 Simple Position Control Operation and Settings ................................................ 6-34
6-7-4 Origin Search Function, Current Position Preset,
Position Data Storage at Power Shutoff ............................................................ 6-40
6-7-5 Restarting Positioning ....................................................................................... 6-45
6-7-6 Multi-step Position Control Settings ................................................................... 6-45
6-7-7 Turntable Control............................................................................................... 6-47
6-7-8 Speed/Position Switching .................................................................................. 6-49
6-7-9 Interlock Function with Simple Position Control and Brake Control ................... 6-50

6 Vector Control and Applied Functions
6-8 PM Motor Mode ................................................................................................ 6-54

6-8-1 PM Motor and PM Motor Control ...................................................................... 6-54
6-8-2 Functional Limitations in PM Motor Mode ......................................................... 6-56
6-8-3 Switching to PM Motor Mode ............................................................................ 6-58
6-8-4 Offline Auto-tuning for PM Motor Parameters ................................................... 6-59
6-8-5 PM Motor Parameter Settings .......................................................................... 6-62
6-8-6 Adjustment of PM Motor Mode Settings.............................................................6-64
6-9 High-frequency Mode ...................................................................................... 6-68
6-9-1 Functions That Are Restricted in High-frequency Mode .....................................6-68
6-9-2 Switching to High-frequency Mode ....................................................................6-70

6-1 Sensorless Vector Control

The rotation speed of an induction motor, by its characteristic, decreases as the output torque increases.
Selecting sensorless vector control improves this relationship between the output torque and the rota-
tion speed of an induction motor, which results in a high output torque even at low speeds.
With sensorless vector control enabled, this inverter can output a high starting torque, 200% of the
motor rating, at 0.5Hz.
Moreover, this inverter also has a built-in auto-tuning function (rotation/stop method) that automatically
sets motor parameters.
6-1-1 Sensorless Vector Control Parameter Settings

• Set the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) to 03 (Sensorless vector control).
• Set the 1st/2nd Motor Capacity (H003/H203) and the 1st/2nd Motor Pole Number (H004/H204)
according to your motor.
• Set the rated frequency of the motor in the 1st/2nd Base Frequency (A003/A203) and set the rated
voltage of the motor in the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282).
• To use this function, set motor parameters for your motor according to 6-1-2 Offline Auto-tuning for
Motor Parameters on page 6-4 and 6-1-3 Motor Parameter Settings on page 6-9.
• In the light load mode and the PM motor mode, sensorless vector control cannot be selected.
Parameter
No.
A044/A244 1st/2nd Control Method *1 03: Sensorless vector control 00 −
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/ Maximum
6-1-1 Sensorless Vector Control Parameter Settings

H003/H203 1st/2nd Motor Capacity *1 applicable kW
4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 motor capacity
2/4/6/8
H004/H204 1st/2nd Motor Pole Number *1 4 pole
30.0 to 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency
A003/A203 1st/2nd Base Frequency *1 60.0 Hz
(A004/A204)
200-V class: 200 V/215 V/220 V/230 V/
200 V
1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage 240 V
A082/A282
Selection *1 400-V class: 380 V/400 V/415 V/440 V/ 6
400 V
460 V/480 V
*1. To enable the switching to the 2nd control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input S8 Selection (C008) to 08
(SET) and turn ON that terminal.

• The inverter may not provide sufficient performance characteristics due to the current accu-
racy if your motor is two or more sizes lower than its maximum applicable motor capacity.
• The motor may rotate in reverse at low frequencies (a few Hz), depending on the current
accuracy.
In this case, use the Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection (b046) function or refer to 6-1-4
Adjustments for Sensorless Vector Control on page 6-10 to adjust the motor parameter set-
tings.
• If the incoming voltage to the inverter is higher than the rated voltage of the drive motor, set-
ting the 1st/2nd AVR Selection (A081/A281) to 01 (Always OFF) or 02 (OFF during decelera-
tion) may prevent normal operation as the current increases. In this case, set the 1st/2nd
AVR Selection to 00 (Always ON).

6-1-2 Offline Auto-tuning for Motor Parameters

• Use this function to measure and automatically set the motor parameters required for sensorless
vector control.
• To use the sensorless vector control method, perform auto-tuning to measure the motor parameter
values.
• The measured motor parameter values will be set as 50-Hz converted data for one phase in Y-con-
nection.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
H001 Auto-tuning Selection 01: Enabled (No motor rotation) 00 −
00: Standard motor parameter
1st/2nd Motor Parame- 02: Auto-tuning parameter (Applies
H002/H202 00 −
ter Selection H030/H230 to H034/H234 data to motor
parameters.)
Maximum
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/5.5/ applicable
H003/H203 1st/2nd Motor Capacity motor kW
7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5
capacity
1st/2nd Motor Pole 2/4/6/8
H004/H204 4 pole
1st/2nd Motor Parame-
H030/H230 ter R1 (Auto-tuning
Data)
0.001 to 65.535 
H031/H231 ter R2 (Auto-tuning
Data) Depen-
dent on
1st/2nd Motor Parame- motor
H032/H232 0.01 to 655.35 mH
ter L (Auto-tuning Data) capacity
H033/H233 ter lo (Auto-tuning 0.01 to 655.35 A
Data)
H034/H234 0.001 to 9999.000 kgm2
ter J (Auto-tuning Data)
30.0 to 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency
A003/A203 1st/2nd Base Frequency 60.0 Hz
(A004/A204)
00: Disabled
A051 01: Enabled 00 −
Selection
02: Enabled (Operates only at set frequency)
1st/2nd Motor Rated 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
A082/A282 200/400 V
b033 Motor Cable Length 5. to 20. 10. m

Offline Auto-Tuning Steps

Offline auto-tuning consists of the following five steps:
• Presetting of parameters
• Selection of motor rotation during auto-tuning
• Auto-tuning
• Operations after auto-tuning
• Operations in case of error
1 Presetting of parameters
(1) Set the 1st/2nd Motor Capacity (H003/H203) and the 1st/2nd Motor Pole Number
(H004/H204) according to your motor.

(2) Set the rated frequency of the motor in the 1st/2nd Base Frequency (A003/A203) and
set the rated voltage in the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282).
If the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection parameter does not provide data appropriate
to the rated voltage of your motor, select a slightly larger value than required and set the fol-
lowing value in the 1st/2nd Output Voltage Gain (A045/A245):
[1st/2nd Output Voltage Gain (A045/A245)] = 100%  [motor rated voltage]/[1st/2nd
Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282)]
(3) Set the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) and Simple Position Control Selection
(P012) to 00 (Disabled).
If the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) or Simple Position Control Selection (P012) is
set to 02 (Enabled), change it to 00 (Disabled). If either of these parameters is set to 02 6
(Enabled), auto-tuning will not be completed.
(4) Set the motor cable length in the Motor Cable Length (b033).

In the Motor Cable Length (b033), set the length of your motor cable.
(5) Do not to turn ON the torque reference input permission terminal (52: ATR).
Setting one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 52 (ATR: Torque
reference input permission) prevents correct tuning data measurement if the corre-
sponding terminal is ON.
Parameter Default
No. data
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/5.5/7.5/ Maximum
11.0/15.0/18.5 applicable
H003/H203 1st/2nd Motor Capacity motor kW
capacity
1st/2nd Motor Pole 2/4/6/8
H004/H204 4 pole
A003/A203 1st/2nd Base Frequency 30.0 to 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency (A004/A204) 60.0 Hz
1st/2nd Output Voltage 20. to 100.
A045/A245 100. %
Gain
DC Injection Braking 00: Disabled
A051 00 −
Selection
1st/2nd Motor Rated 200-V class: 200 V/215 V/220 V/230 V/240 V
A082/A282 200/400 V
Voltage Selection 400-V class: 380 V/400 V/415 V/440 V/460 V/480 V
Simple Position Con- 00: Simple position control disabled
P012 00 −
trol Selection

2 Selection of motor rotation during auto-tuning

In the Auto-tuning Selection (H001), select whether or not to rotate the motor during auto-tuning.

00: Disabled
H001 Auto-tuning Selection 01: Enabled (No motor rotation) 00 −
Set value Description

01 Motor does not rotate during auto-tuning.
02 Motor rotates during auto-tuning.
Motor rotation
Description
selection
Motor does not Measures motor parameter values without rotating the motor. Use this setting if you do not
rotate (01) rotate the motor. Because the motor does not rotate, the Motor Parameter Io (No-load cur-
rent) and Motor Parameter J (Moment of inertia) values cannot be measured.
Motor rotates (02) Measures motor parameter values with the motor rotating. Use this setting if you can rotate
the motor without any problem.
3 Auto-tuning
Select the target control for auto-tuning in the 1st/2nd Control Method. To switch to the 2nd con-
trol, allocate one of Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 08 (SET).
Then, turn ON the RUN command based on the setting in the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection
(A002/A202). The inverter starts auto-tuning operation.
If auto-tuning is completed successfully, the auto-tuning result will be set to the parameters
H030/H230 to H034/H234.
1) 1st AC excitation (Motor does not rotate.*1)

2) 2nd AC excitation (Motor does not rotate.*1)

3) 1st DC excitation (Motor does not rotate.*1)

4) V/f control operation (Motor rotates up to 80% of base frequency.)*2

5) Sensorless vector control operation (Motor rotates up to X%*3 of base frequency.)*2

6) 2nd DC excitation (Motor does not rotate.*1)

7) Auto-tuning result is displayed.*4
*1. However, the 4-pole motor, for example, may rotate by approximately up to 1/8 of a rotation (half the inverse
of poles).
*2. Steps 4 and 5 will be skipped in auto-tuning without motor rotation (H001 = 01).
*3. The motor speed X in step 5 is given as follows, where T is the acceleration or deceleration time in step 4,
whichever is greater.
0 s < T < 50 s: X = 40%
50 s  T < 100 s: X = 20%
100 s  T: X = 10%
*4. The auto-tuning result will be displayed as follows.
Normal end Error end
If auto-tuning is aborted due to an error, retry it.

To clear the display, press the STOP/RESET key.


• Even if you set H001 to 01 (Auto-tuning without motor rotation), for example, the 4-pole
motor may rotate by approximately up to 1/8 of a rotation (half the inverse of poles).
• To perform auto-tuning for a motor one size smaller in capacity than the inverter, set the
1st/2nd Overload Limit Selection (b021/b221) to 01 (Enabled during acceleration and con-
stant speed) and set the 1st/2nd Overload Limit Level (b022/b222) to 150% of the rated cur-
rent of the motor.
• If the Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time During Deceleration (b134) is too small, an
Overvoltage trip (E07.) may occur during auto-tuning. In this case, increase the b134 value
and retry auto-tuning.
• Make sure the following points before starting auto-tuning with motor rotation enabled.
There is no problem even if the motor rotates up to approximately 80% of the base frequency.
The motor is not driven by external equipment.

The brake is released.
During auto-tuning, the inverter does not provide sufficient torque, which could result in a slip-and-fall
accident in elevating or other applications. To prevent this, remove the motor from the load and per-
form the auto-tuning with the single motor. In this case, because the moment of inertia J is given for
the single motor, calculate the motor-shaft conversion of the moment of inertia of the load machine
and add it to this value.
In applications such as an elevator or ball screw where the amount of motor shaft rotation is limited, the
motor may rotate over the allowable rotation amount, which may result in a mechanical damage. Be
sure to perform auto-tuning with the single motor, or select the no motor rotation mode (H001 = 01).
• Adequate auto-tuning may not be performed if a motor cable is long (longer than 20 m).
6
4 Operations after auto-tuning

• After normal termination of auto-tuning, set the 1st/2nd Motor Parameter Selection
(H002/H202) to 02 (Auto-tuning parameter).
This enables the 1st/2nd Motor parameters (H030 to H034/H230 to H234) set by the auto-tun-
ing function.
• During auto-tuning without motor rotation, the Motor Parameter Io (No-load current) and
Motor Parameter J (Moment of inertia J) values are not measured. Set the following parame-
ters after completion of auto-tuning.
1st/2nd Motor Parameter Io (H033/H233): Measure and set in advance the no-load current of
the single motor at 50 Hz.
Alternatively, check the no-load current of the motor
at 50 Hz with the motor manufacturer and set it.
1st/2nd Motor Parameter J (H034/H234): Calculate and set the motor-shaft conversion of
the moment of inertia of the load machine.
• At the end of auto-tuning, the inverter automatically resets the Auto-tuning Selection (H001)
to 00 (Disabled).
To retry auto-tuning, set H001 again to enable auto-tuning.

Set again the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051), 1st/2nd Output Voltage Gain
(A045/A245), and Simple Position Control Selection (P012) values which you set to Disabled in
“1. Presetting of parameters” according to your operating environment.


00: Standard motor parameter
1st/2nd Motor Parameter 02: Auto-tuning parameter (Applies
H002/H202 00 −
Selection H030/H230 to H034/H234 data to motor
parameters.)
1st/2nd Motor Parameter
H030/H230
R1 (Auto-tuning Data)
0.001 to 65.535 
H031/H231
R2 (Auto-tuning Data)
Dependent
H032/H232 0.01 to 655.35 on motor mH
L (Auto-tuning Data)
capacity
H033/H233 0.01 to 655.35 A
lo (Auto-tuning Data)
H034/H234
J (Auto-tuning Data)
0.001 to 9999.000 kgm2
1st/2nd Output Voltage
A045/A245 20. to 100. 100. %
Gain
00: Disabled
A051 01: Enabled 00 −
Selection
Simple Position Control 00: Simple position control disabled
P012 00 −
Selection 02: Simple position control enabled
5 Operations in case of error

If auto-tuning is aborted due to an error, review the preset parameters according to “1. Preset-
ting of parameters” and check that the rated torque of the motor is at least 50% of the rated out-
put current of the inverter. If the load is too heavy, disconnect it and retry auto-tuning.
If the error persists or auto-tuning is still aborted, enter the motor parameter values directly.
For details, refer to 6-1-3 Motor Parameter Settings on page 6-9.

• If a trip occurs during auto-tuning, the auto-tuning process will be force-terminated and the
inverter displays a trip. In this case, refer to 10-1-2 Alarm Code List on page 10-4.
• If the auto-tuning process is not ended, press the STOP/RESET key or reset the RUN com-
mand. This causes the process to be forcibly ended. In this case, the auto-tuning result will
not be displayed. Then, review the preset parameters in “1. Presetting of parameters”.
• If the rated current of the motor is 50% of the rated output current of the inverter or lower,
auto-tuning may not work.
The inverter may not provide sufficient performance characteristics due to the current accu-
racy if your motor is two or more sizes lower than the maximum applicable motor capacity.
• If the auto-tuning process is aborted, or if you interrupt the process by pressing the
STOP/RESET key or by resetting the RUN command, the auto-tuning settings may be left in
the parameters H030/H230 to H034/H234.

6-1-3 Motor Parameter Settings

• Normally, you perform offline auto-tuning to set motor parameters.
However, if the offline auto-tuning process is aborted, for example, when the inverter does not reach
50% of its rated current during auto-tuning, you need to set the motor parameters manually.
• To configure the motor parameters manually, set the 1st/2nd Motor Parameter Selection
(H002/H202) to 00 (Standard motor parameter).
To maximize the performance of vector control, adjust the parameter values according to your motor.
• Obtain your motor’s datasheet from the motor manufacturer and set each motor parameter.
The following values must be set as 50-Hz converted data for one phase in Y-connection.
Winding resistance
on primary side of motor (H020/H220) : Set the wiring resistance (in ) on the primary side of the
motor for one phase in Y-connection.
Winding resistance
on secondary side of motor (H021/H221): Set the wiring resistance (in ) on the secondary side of

the motor for one phase in Y-connection.
Motor leakage inductance (H022/H222) : Set the leakage inductance (in mH) of the motor for one
phase in Y-connection.
Motor no-load current (H023/H223) : Set the no-load current of the motor, or set the current
value measured when the motor is in isolated no-load run
at 50 Hz.
Moment of inertia (H024/H224) : Calculate the motor-shaft conversion of the moment of
inertia of the load machine, add the moment of inertia of
the motor to it, and set the sum.
• After setting each motor parameter, adjust the parameter values according to 6-1-4 Adjustments for
Sensorless Vector Control on page 6-10.
6
• 1st/2nd Speed Response (H005/H205) are parameters to adjust the speed response of sensorless
vector control. Increase the set value to enhance the responsiveness and decrease it if motor hunting
6-1-3 Motor Parameter Settings

occurs.
Parameter
No. Function name Data Default data Unit
1st/2nd Motor Parameter Selection 00: Standard motor parameter
(Applies H020/H220 to H024/H224
H002/H202 00 −
data to motor parameters.)
02: Auto-tuning parameter
1st/2nd Motor Capacity 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/ Maximum
3.7/4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 applicable
H003/H203 kW
motor
capacity
1st/2nd Motor Pole Number 2/4/6/8
H004/H204 4 pole
H005/H205 1st/2nd Speed Response 1. to 1000. 100. −
1st/2nd Motor Parameter R1 (Wind- 0.001 to 65.535
H020/H220
ing resistance on primary side)

1st/2nd Motor Parameter R2 (Wind-
H021/H221
ing resistance on secondary side)
1st/2nd Motor Parameter L (Leak- 0.01 to 655.35 Dependent
H022/H222 mH
age inductance) on motor
1st/2nd Motor Parameter Io 0.01 to 655.35 capacity
H023/H223 A
(No-load current)
1st/2nd Motor Parameter J 0.001 to 99.999
H024/H224 (Moment of inertia) 100.00 to 999.99 kgm2
1000.0 to 9999.0

6-1-4 Adjustments for Sensorless Vector Control

• To use sensorless vector control method, perform offline auto-tuning.
If you cannot perform offline auto-tuning, set motor parameters appropriately according to 6-1-3
Motor Parameter Settings on page 6-9.
• The inverter may not provide sufficient performance characteristics if your motor is two or more sizes
smaller than the maximum applicable motor capacity. This is because the inverter requires a current
accuracy of at least 50% of the rated current.
• If the sensorless vector control method does not provide the intended performance characteristics,
adjust the appropriate motor parameter depending on the phenomenon, as shown in the following table.
Operation Adjustment
Phenomenon Adjustment method
status item
Actual motor speed is Increase the Motor Parameter R2 value gradually, H021/H221/H031/
Power lower than target speed. up to 120% of the set value. H231
running Actual motor speed is Decrease the Motor Parameter R2 value gradually, H021/H221/H031/
higher than target speed. up to 80% of the set value. H231
Increase the Motor Parameter R1 value gradually, H020/H220/H030/
Torque is insufficient at low up to 120% of the set value. H230
Regeneration
frequencies (a few Hz). Increase the Motor Parameter Io value gradually, H023/H223/H033/
up to 120% of the set value. H233
Decrease the Speed Response value. H005/H205
Shock occurs during
startup. Decrease the Motor Parameter J value gradually, H024/H224/
During relative to the set value. H034/H234
startup Motor rotates momentarily Set the Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection b046
in opposite direction to (b046) to 01 (Enabled).
specified rotation direction.
Decrease the Speed Response value. H005/H205
During
Motor is hunting. Decrease the Motor Parameter J value gradually, H024/H224/
deceleration
relative to the set value. H034/H234
Torque becomes insuffi- Decrease the torque limit. b021/b221/
During torque cient at low frequencies b040 to b044
limit when torque limit is
enabled.
Increase the Speed Response value. H005/H205
Low-frequency
Rotation is unstable. Increase the Motor Parameter J value gradually, H024/H224/
operation
relative to the set value. H034/H234

• Before adjusting the 1st/2nd Speed Response (H005/H205), calculate the motor-shaft con-
version of the moment of load inertia, add the moment of inertia of the motor to it, and set the
sum in the 1st/2nd Motor Parameter J (H024/H224/H034/H234).
For 1st/2nd Speed Response (H005/H205), the larger the set value, the higher the response
speed, which results in a steep torque rise; the smaller the set value, the lower the response
speed, which results in gradual torque rise.
• If you use a motor one size lower than the maximum applicable motor capacity for the
inverter, to prevent motor burnout, set the Torque Limit 1 to 4 (b041 to b044) to limit values
less than the value calculated from the following formula, then enable the torque limit func-
tion. For details on the torque limit function, refer to 6-2-1 Torque Limit Function Settings on
page 6-12.
Torque Limit set value (max.) = 200%  [Rated motor current] / [Rated output current of inverter]
(Example) If the Inverter capacity and the motor capacity are 0.75 kW (rated output current =
5.0 A) and 0.4 kW (rated current = 2.3 A), respectively, set the torque limit values
below the following:
Torque Limit set value (max.) = 200%  (2.3 A) / (5.0 A) = 92%

Reverse Rotation Prevention Function

This function is enabled only when the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) is set to 03 (Sensorless
vector control).
When sensorless vector control is enabled, the inverter may output a rotation signal opposite to the
RUN command direction at low speeds, depending on the current accuracy. To prevent the motor from
rotating in the reverse direction, set the Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection (b046) to 01 (Enabled).

00: Disabled
Reverse Rotation
b046 01: Enabled (Motor does not rotate in 00 −
Prevention Selection
reverse.)
Output Torque Monitor Function (d012)

Use this function to monitor the motor output torque estimated by the sensorless vector control func-
tion.
vector control).
To monitor the motor output torque via the Digital Operator, display the Output Torque Monitor (d012).
For details on Output Torque Monitor, refer to 7-1-11 Output Torque Monitor [d012] on page 7-8.
For how to monitor the motor output torque via the control circuit terminal block signal, refer to 7-3-6
Terminal EO (Pulse/PWM Output) on page 7-27 or 7-3-7 Terminal AM (Analog Output) on page 7-29.
The output torque monitor function estimates the torque value equivalent to the rated current of the 6
inverter as 100%.
To convert it to the rated motor torque ratio, use the following formula:
6-1-4 Adjustments for Sensorless Vector Control

Rated motor torque ratio = [Output Torque Monitor (d012) value]  [Rated output current of inverter]
/ [Rated motor current]

A044/A244 1st/2nd Control Method 03: Sensorless vector control 00 −
d012 Output Torque Monitor −200. to 200. − %
C027 EO Selection 02: Output torque
07 −
C028 AM Selection 11: Output torque (signed)*1
*1. This setting is available for C028 only.

6-2 Torque Limit Function
6-2-1 Torque Limit Function Settings

Use the torque limit function to limit the output torque of motor.
vector control).
• The Torque Limit Selection (b040) provides four modes as shown below.
Mode Description
Four-quadrant separate Use this mode to set the four-quadrant (Forward Power Running, Reverse Regen-
setting mode (b040 = 00) eration, Reverse Power Running, and Forward Regeneration) torque limits in the
Torque Limit 1 to 4 (b041 to b044).
Terminal switching mode Use this mode to switch the Torque Limit 1 to 4 (b041 to b044) setting based on
(b040 = 01) the combination of the torque limit switching functions 1 and 2 (TRQ1 and TRQ2)
allocated to multi-function input terminals.
The selected torque limit value is enabled for all RUN modes.
Analog input mode Use this mode to set the torque limit value based on the analog voltage applied to
(b040 = 02) the terminal O of the control circuit terminal block.
0 to 10 V is equivalent to the torque limit value of 0% to 200%. The torque limit
value set via the analog input terminal is enabled for all RUN modes.
Option mode (b040 = 03) Use this mode to set the torque limit value from optional equipment. At present,
OMRON provides no options that support this mode.
• Setting one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 40 (TL: Torque limit
enabled) enables the torque limit function set in the Torque Limit Selection (b040) only when the ter-
minal TL is input.
When this terminal is reset, the torque limit setting is disabled and the inverter uses the maximum
value (200%) as the torque limit value.
When the Torque limit enabled (TL) function is not allocated to any of the multi-function input termi-
nals, the torque limit function set in the Torque Limit Selection (b040) is always enabled.
• The torque limit function regards the torque value equivalent to the rated output current of the inverter
as 100%.
Rated motor torque ratio = [Torque limit set value]  [Rated output current of Inverter] / [Rated
motor current]
• When the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
AL2) Function Selection (C026) is set to 10 (TRQ: Torque limit), you can check if the torque limit
function is activated with the status of the torque limit signal.
Default
data
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switching
b040 Torque Limit Selection 00 −
02: Analog voltage input
0. to 200.
Torque Limit 1
b041 (Four-quadrant Mode For- 200. %
ward Power Running) Forward Power Running torque limit
when b040 = 00

Default
data
0. to 200.
Torque Limit 2
b042 (Four-quadrant Mode 200. %
Reverse Regeneration) Reverse Regeneration torque limit
when b040 = 00
0. to 200.
Torque Limit 3
b043 (Four-quadrant Mode 200. %
Reverse Power Running) Reverse Power Running torque limit
when b040 = 00
0. to 200.
Torque Limit 4
b044 (Four-quadrant Mode For- 200. %
ward Regeneration) Forward Regeneration torque limit
when b040 = 00
Multi-function Input 1 to 7
C001 to C007 41: TRQ1 (Torque limit switching 1) − −
6-2 Torque Limit Function

Selection
C021, C022
11/12 Selection
Multi-function Relay Out- 10: TRQ (Torque limit) − −
C026 put (AL1, AL2) Function
Selection
⚫ Details of Four-quadrant Separate Setting Mode (b040 = 00)

The following figure shows the Torque Limit 1 to 4 (b041 to b044) when the Torque Limit Selection
(b040) is set to 00 (Four-quadrant separate setting). 6
Torque
6-2-1 Torque Limit Function Settings

Regeneration Power Running
b042 b041
Reverse (RV ) Forw ard (FW)
Power Regeneration
Running b044
b043
⚫ Details of Terminal Switching Mode (b040 = 01)

When the Torque Limit Selection (b040) is set to 01 (Terminal switching), the Torque Limit 1 to 4
(b041 to b044) switched by the torque limit switching 1 and 2 functions allocated to two of the
multi-function input terminals are defined as follows.
(Example) When torque limit switching 1 (TRQ1) and torque limit switching 2 (TRQ2) are allocated to
multi-function input terminals 6 and 7, respectively (C006 = 41, C007 = 42)
42 41
7 6 L 41: TRQ1 42: TRQ2
OFF OFF b041
ON OFF b042
OFF ON b044
ON ON b043


When the torque limit function is used in a low speed range, the inverter may fail to start the
motor and detect an overload. In this case, use this function in conjunction with the overload
limit selection (b021/b221/b024).
6-2-2 Torque LADSTOP Function Settings

Use this function to stop temporarily the frequency acceleration/deceleration function (LAD) when the
torque limit function is activated. This function, as well as the torque limit function, is enabled when the
1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) is set to 03 (Sensorless vector control).
• LAD functions to calculate the transient frequency reference value to enable the motor to reach the
reference frequency in the set acceleration/deceleration time.
• This function stops the frequency reference temporarily at the transient value calculated by LAD
when the torque limit function is activated and restarts at that frequency when the torque limit is reset.
• To stabilize the motor operation after resetting the torque limit, enable this function.
Default
data
b045 00 −
Related functions A044, A244, b040, b041 to b044
Output frequency
Torque limit is activated (During torque limit)
Transient frequency calculated by LAD changes even when torque

limit function is activated (b045 = 00).
Transient frequency calculated by LAD stops changing temporarily
when torque limit function is activated (b045 = 01).
Time
TRQ output
(During torque limit)

6-3 Overtorque/Undertorque Function
6-3-1 Overtorque/Undertorque Function Settings

Use this function to detect that the estimated motor output torque value exceeded the set level and out-
put the overtorque signal.
• This function is enabled only when the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) is set to 03 (Sensorless
vector control).
• To enable the detection of the overtorque/undertorque state, set the Multi-function Output 11/12
Selection (C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to
6-3 Overtorque/Undertorque Function

07 (OTQ: Overtorque/Undertorque signal).
• The overtorque/undertorque function regards the torque level equivalent to the rated output current of
the inverter as 100%.
Rated motor torque ratio = [Overtorque/Undertorque level set value]  [Rated output current of
Inverter] / [Rated motor current]
• Use this function to detect the brake release signal of an elevator, or if the load applied to the load
machine is abnormally high.
Parameter Default
No. data
Overtorque/Undertorque 00: Overtorque
C054 00 −
Selection 01: Undertorque 6
Overtorque/Undertorque 0. to 200.
C055 Level OTQ signal output level during Forward 100. %
6-3-1 Overtorque/Undertorque Function Settings

(Forward Power Running) Power Running
C056 Level OTQ signal output level during Reverse 100. %
(Reverse Regeneration) Regeneration
C057 Level OTQ signal output level during Reverse 100. %
(Reverse Power Running) Power Running
C058 Level OTQ signal output level during Forward 100. %
(Forward Regeneration) Regeneration
00: Enabled during acceleration/decelera-
Overtorque/Undertorque
C059 tion and constant speed 01 −
Signal Operation
01: Enabled during constant speed
Multi-function Output 11/12 07: OTQ (Overtorque/Undertorque signal)
C021, C022
Selection
− −
C026
(AL1, AL2) Function
Selection

6-4 Torque Control

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter provides the torque control
mode. This section describes the torque control settings and
functions.
6-4-1 Torque Control Settings

The inverter provides torque control that controls the output torque of the motor.
• This function is enabled when the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) is set to 03 (Sensorless vec-
tor control).
• To use torque control, allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 52
(ATR: Torque reference input permission).
The torque reference input is enabled when the terminal ATR is input.
• The torque reference input source can be selected in the Torque Reference Input Selection (P033).
Select whether to input the torque reference in the Torque Reference Setting (P034), or via an analog
input terminal.
When the torque reference is input via an analog input terminal, the torque range is 0 to 200% at 0 to
10 V (4 to 20 mA).
• The torque control function regards the torque reference value equivalent to the rated output current
of the inverter as 100%.
Rated motor torque ratio = [Torque reference set value]  [Rated output current of inverter] / [Rated
motor current]
• Because, under torque control, the speed of the inverter is determined by the balance between
torque and load, to prevent the inverter from going out of control, set the Speed Limit Value in Torque
Control (Forward/Reverse) (P039 and P040).
• Switching between normal frequency control to torque control may cause a shock on the motor oper-
ation because the control is different. To reduce the shock during switching, adjust the Speed/Torque
Switching Time (P041).
Increasing the set time reduces the shock.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Terminal O (10 V = 200%)
Torque Reference Input 01: Terminal OI (20 mA = 200%)
P033 00 −
Selection 03: Digital Operator (P034 setting)
0. to 200.
P034 Torque Reference Setting 0. %
(Torque reference when P033 = 03)
Speed Limit Value in Torque
P039 0.00 to 120.00 0.00 Hz
Control (Forward)
Speed Limit Value in Torque
P040 0.00 to 120.00 0.00 Hz
Control (Reverse)
Speed/Torque Switching
P041 0. to 1000. 0. ms
Time
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to 52: ATR (Torque reference input permis-
C007 − −
7 Selection sion)

Torque limit
(P037)
Torque reference Torque reference

input (Reference value for
torque control)
Speed
Speed
Speed limit monitor
value
P039/P040
tion value
6-4 Torque Control

6-4-2 Torque Bias Function Settings
Use this function to apply bias to the torque reference in the torque control mode.
• This function is enabled when the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) is set to 03 (Sensorless vec-
tor control).
• Set the Torque Bias Selection (P036) to 01 (Input via Digital Operator).
• The torque control function regards the torque reference value equivalent to the rated output current
of the inverter as 100%. 6
6-4-2 Torque Bias Function Settings

Rated motor torque ratio = [Torque bias set value]  [Rated output current of inverter] / [Rated
motor current]
• In the Torque Bias Polarity Selection (P038), set the polarity of the torque bias value.
00: As per sign
The forward torque increases when the Torque Bias Value is positive (+) and the reverse torque
increases when the Torque Bias Value is negative (−), independent of the RUN direction.
01: Dependent on RUN direction
The direction in which the torque bias function works depends on the RUN command direction.
Forward command: Forward torque increases when Torque Bias value is positive (+).
Reverse torque increases when Torque Bias value is negative (−).
Reverse command: Reverse torque increases when Torque Bias value is positive (+).
Forward torque increases when Torque Bias value is negative (−).
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
P036 Torque Bias Selection 01: Digital Operator 00 −
P037 Torque Bias Value −200. to 200. (Enabled when P036 = 01) 0. %
Torque Bias Polarity 00: As per sign
P038 00 −
Selection 01: Dependent on RUN direction

6-5 V/f Control with Speed Feedback

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter can perform V/f control with speed feedback with the pulse train input
function included as standard.
This control enables highly accurate and stable speed control based on the feedback of the pulse gen-
erator (PG) signal or the phase-A/B signal from the encoder.
This section describes the settings and functions of V/f control with speed feedback.
6-5-1 Settings of V/f Control with Speed Feedback

In this control mode, the inverter can perform highly accurate and stable speed control as V/f control,
based on the speed feedback data.
• The V/f control with speed feedback function is available only for the 1st control. It will not work if you
switch to the 2nd control.
• To use this function, set the 1st Control Method (A044) to 00 (Constant torque characteristics), 01
(Reduced torque characteristics), or 02 (Free V/f setting).
• Set the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) to 01 (Feedback pulse).
• Set the type of the input pulse train signal in the Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) and the
number of pulses per motor rotation (1 multiplication) in the Number of Encoder Pulses (P011),
respectively.
• If you set the Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) to 01 or 03, also set the Multi-function Input 7
Selection (C007) to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection). The setting “85 (EB: Rotation direction
detection)” only is available only in the Multi-function Input 7 Selection (C007).
When C007 is set to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection), the Multi-function Input 7 Operation
Selection (C017) is disabled.
The terminal EB, once set, serves as the phase-B input for Phase A and B 90°phase difference pulse
train (P004 = 01), or the direction signal for Single-phase pulse train + direction (P004 = 03).
If C007 is not set to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection) when P004 is 01 or 03, the inverter cannot
recognize the feedback information correctly, which causes the V/f control with speed feedback to
malfunction.
Parameter Default
No. data
01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP
A044 1st Control Method 00 −
1.7th power (VC at low speed))
Pulse Train Input EA 01: Feedback pulse (enabled only when 1st
P003 00 −
Selection control is selected)
01: Phase A and B 90°phase difference
Pulse Train Input Type
P004 pulse train 00 −
Selection
02: Do not set.
03: Single-phase pulse train + direction
Number of Encoder
P011 32. to 1024. 512. pulse
Pulses
Multi-function Input 7 85: EB (Rotation direction detection)
C007 06 −
Selection

⚫ Details of Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004)

The Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) setting causes the inverter to recognize the feedback
rotation direction as shown below.
RUN command*1 Multi-function

Pulse Train Input Type Recognized feedback rotation
Input 7
Selection (P004) setting Forward Reverse direction
Terminal EB
ON OFF − Forward*2
OFF ON − Reverse *2
01: Phase A and B 90° Forward or Detects encoder rotation (90° phase dif-
Reverse is ON −
phase difference pulse train ference).
03: Single-phase pulse train Forward or OFF Forward rotation (Follows terminal EB)
+ direction Reverse is ON ON Reverse rotation (Follows terminal EB)

*1. When both the forward RUN command and the reverse RUN command are ON or OFF, the inverter does
not start its output.
*2. The inverter recognizes the rotation direction via RUN command input because it cannot recognize the ro-
tation direction by the single-phase pulse train.
However, if the RUN command is switched during operation, the inverter retains the rotation direction before
the switching until its output frequency causes a deceleration stop and then switches to the rotation direction
recognized via RUN command input.
6-5-2 Recommended Encoder and Its Wiring

For the pulse train input function of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, be sure to use a
complementary-output type encoder.
6
In addition, for encoder cable connection, always use a shielded cable and connect it to the terminal L of
the inverter’s control circuit terminal block.

If an open-collector output encoder is used, the inverter may not recognize the rotation in the forward or
reverse direction. This is because, as the length of the encoder cable increases, its stray capacitance
becomes larger, which causes the inverter to falsely recognize the crosstalk signal from the encoder.
⚫ Complementary output
Complementary output is a method to output via two tran- E6C3-CWZ5GH
Power
sistors.
NPN
The wiring is connected to the 0-V side when output is ON Transistor
and to the power-supply side when output is OFF.
PNP
This design does not allow the wiring to be left open (at high Transistor
impedance) as with the case of open-collector output
encoders.
Therefore, this provides a stable output from the encoder.

⚫ Recommended product
E6C3-CWZ5GH (Manufacturer: OMRON)
Crosstalk : A phenomenon by which signals are erroneously transmitted between different

phases. Specifically, the rising/falling edge signal from phase A is superimposed on
the signal from phase B and the rising/falling edge signal from phase B is superim-
posed on the signal from phase A, respectively.
Encoder Input
For pulse train input, use the pulse train input EA terminal and the multi-function Input 7 terminal of the
control circuit terminals.
Be sure to use a complementary-output type encoder.
Maximum Fre- Terminal EA Terminal 7/EB

Input signal type
quency (5 to 24 VDC, 32 kHz max.) (24 VDC, 32 kHz max.)
Single-phase pulse train (P004
Single-phase pulse train −
= 00) Terminal EA: 32 kHz
Phase A and B 90°phase differ- Terminal 7 Phase-A pulse train Phase-B pulse train
ence pulse train (P004 = 01) (Terminal EB):
Single-phase pulse train + direc- 32 kHz
Single-phase pulse train Direction signal*1
tion (P004 = 03)
*1. Direction signal can be input in favor of the sink or source logic, independent of the output method of the en-
coder signal.
Wiring for Phase A and B 90°Phase Difference Pulse Train (P004 = 01)
Connect the Phase A and B 90°phase difference pulse train as shown in the diagram below.
• Connect the phase-A signal to the pulse train input terminal EA.
• Connect the phase-B signal to the multi-function Input 7 terminal and set the Multi-function Input 7
Selection (C007) to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection).
• If the encoder signal is connected, you need to complete wiring for other multi-input terminals 1 to 6
in the source logic (PNP).
• The control circuit terminal P24 of the inverter is for a 24-V, 100-mA max. power supply. It can be
used for the encoder power supply if the consumption current for the input terminals in use and the
encoder power supply is allowable. However, this terminal must be isolated from any 24-V system
power supply for other than the encoder and inverter.


6
Connect the single-phase pulse signal or single-phase pulse + direction signal as shown in the diagram

below.
• Connect the single-phase pulse signal to the pulse train input EA terminal.
• Input the direction signal to the multi-function Input 7 terminal and set the Multi-function Input 7
Selection (C007) to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection). Select the sink logic (NPN) or source (PNP)
by properly positioning the short-circuit bar.


6-5-3 Protective Detection under V/f Control with Speed Feedback

The V/f control with speed feedback performs the following protective detection based on the speed
feedback data.
Use these functions according to your application.
⚫ Overspeed error detection

If the speed feedback value exceeds the value set in the Overspeed Error Detection Level (P026),
the inverter detects the E81. (Overspeed error) and shuts off the output (trip). Set the detection
level appropriately depending on the maximum speed allowable for your application.
⚫ Speed deviation excessive detection

If the deviation of the actual frequency from the frequency reference value exceeds the value set in
the Speed Deviation Excessive Level (P027), the inverter outputs the excessive speed deviation sig-
nal (DSE). Although the inverter outputs this signal, it does not shut off its output (trip).
In this case, set the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or the Multi-function Relay
Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 22 (DSE: Excessive speed deviation). In addition,
construct such a sequence that stops the control if the inverter outputs the excessive speed devia-
tion signal (DSE).
⚫ Encoder disconnection detection

When the inverter outputs the frequency set in the Creep Speed Setting (P015) or higher, if the
speed feedback value does not reach the Starting Frequency (b082) within the Encoder Disconnec-
tion Detection Time (P077), the inverter detects the E80. (Encoder disconnection error) and shuts
off the output (trip). 6
If the inverter falsely detects this error, for example, when it operates with a heavy load and is slow
to start, some adjustment is required. Use the Creep Speed Setting (P015) and Encoder Disconnec-
6-5-3 Protective Detection under V/f Control with Speed Feedback

tion Detection Time (P077) to set speed and time values that allow the inverter to start stably in your
application.
Parameter Default
No. data
P015 Creep Speed Setting Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00)*1 5.00 Hz
Overspeed Error
P026 0.0 to 150.0 *2 115.0 %
Detection Level
Speed Deviation
P027 0.00 to 120.00 10.00 Hz
Excessive Level
Encoder Disconnection 0.0: Disconnection detection disabled
P077 1.0 s
Detection Time 0.1 to 10.0
Multi-function Output 11,
C021, C022 − −
12 Selection
Multi-function Relay Out- 22: DSE (Excessive speed deviation)
C026 put (AL1, AL2) Function 05 −
Selection
*2. Set this in units of percentage as 100% of the 1st Maximum Frequency (A004).

6-5-4 Adjustments for V/f Control with Speed Feedback

You can adjust the V/f control with speed feedback function with the gain settings shown below.
However, the function cannot be adjusted when using a motor that causes an extremely large slip (10%
of the rated rotation speed or higher) or in applications where such a large load that causes the motor to
stall (or step out) is applied. If so, set the type and capacity of the motor again.
Default
data
V/f Control With Speed Feedback
H050 Slip Compensation Proportional 0.00 to 10.00 0.20 Time
Gain
V/f Control with Speed Feedback
H051 0. to 1000. 2. s
Slip Compensation Integral Time
Set frequency
Frequency reference
(F001)
Proportional gain
(H050)
Speed feedback Integral gain

(H051)
⚫ V/f Control With Speed Feedback Slip Compensation Proportional Gain

At first, adjust the proportional gain for speed feedback.
• In the Real Frequency Monitor (d008), check and gradually increase the set value.
• While checking the Real Frequency Monitor (d008), increase the value within the range where the
motor speed is stable.
• If the motor speed fluctuates or the motor vibrates wildly, decrease the set value until it becomes
stable.
• When adjusting the responsiveness if the load is actually activated, increase the set value to
improve it, or decrease the set value to make it stable.
⚫ V/f Control With Speed Feedback Slip Compensation Integral Gain

Next, adjust the integral time for speed feedback.
• In the Real Frequency Monitor (d008), check and gradually decrease the set value.
• Decrease the value in the Real Frequency Monitor (d008) until it matches the reference fre-
quency.
• If the motor speed fluctuates or the motor vibrates wildly, increase the set value until it becomes
stable.
• When adjusting the responsiveness if the load is actually activated, decrease the set value to
improve it, or increase the set value to make it stable.
Before adjusting V/f Control with Speed Feedback, first disable the automatic torque boost
function (A041 = 00).
The automatic torque boost function also responds to increased current that results from speed
feedback, so it may not be possible to correctly adjust V/f Control With Speed Feedback Slip
Compensation Proportional Gain/Integral Gain (H050/H051).

6-6 Brake Control Function

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter has a built-in brake control function for an elevating system etc.
Use this function to control the external brake used in an elevating system etc. from the inverter.
The brake control function can be used independently of the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244)
Selection.
You can combine this function with the simple position control function.
For how to combine this function with simple position control, refer to 6-7-9 Interlock Function with Sim-
ple Position Control and Brake Control on page 6-50.
This section describes the operation sequence and settings of the brake control function.
6-6-1 Operation Sequence of Brake Control Function

Below is the sequence chart for the brake control function, followed by the description of each operation
in the sequence.
Brake Force Frequency

(b127)
Output frequency
(7)
(1) (5)
Stop Wait Time on Brake
RUN command Control (b123)
(2)
(FW input)
Brak Release Wait Time (b121)
6
Brake release signal
(BRK output) (4)
6-6-1 Operation Sequence of Brake Control Function

Acceleration Wait Time on
Brake Control (b122)
Brake confirmation signal
(BOK input)
(3) (6)
Brake Error Detection Time (b124) Brake Error Detection Time (b124)
Note The above sequence chart shows an example where one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection
(C001 to C007) is set to 44 (BOK: Brake confirmation).
⚫ During acceleration
(1) When the RUN command turns ON, the inverter starts output and accelerate to the
Brake Release Frequency (b125).
(2) After reaching the Brake Release Frequency, the inverter waits until the Brake
Release Wait Time (b121) elapses and outputs the brake release signal (C021, C022,
C026 = 19: BRK).
However, if the output current does not reach the Brake Release Current (b126) when out-
putting the brake release signal, the inverter outputs the brake error signal (C021, C022,
C026 = 20: BER) without releasing the brake, and detects the E36. (Brake error).
(3) After outputting the brake release signal, the inverter waits for the brake confirma-
tion signal (C001 to C007 = 44: BOK) to turn ON during the time set in the Brake Error
Detection Time (b124).
If the brake confirmation signal does not turn ON within the time set in b124, the inverter
outputs the brake error signal (C021, C022, C026 = 20: BER) and detects the E36.
(Brake error).
If any of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) is set to 44 (BOK: Brake
confirmation), the Brake Error Detection Time (b124) setting is disabled and the inverter
proceeds to step (4) after outputting the brake release signal.
(4) After the brake confirmation signal turns ON (after releasing the brake), the inverter
waits until the Acceleration Wait Time on Brake Control (b122) elapses and acceler-
ates again to the set frequency.
⚫ During deceleration
(5) After the RUN command turns OFF, the inverter decelerates to the Brake Force Fre-
quency (b127) and turns OFF the brake release signal (C021, C022, C026 = 19: BRK).
(6) After turning OFF the brake release signal, the inverter waits for the brake confirma-
tion signal (C001 to C007 = 44: BOK) to turn OFF during the time set in the Brake
Error Detection Time (b124).
If the brake confirmation signal does not turn OFF within the time set in b124, the inverter
(Brake error).
proceeds to step (7) after the brake release signal turns OFF.
(7) After the brake confirmation signal turns OFF (after applying the brake), the inverter
waits until the Stop Wait Time on Brake Control (b123) elapses and decelerates again
to an output frequency of 0 Hz.
6-6-2 Brake Control Function Settings

To enable the brake control function, set the Brake Control Function Selection (b120) to 02
(Enabled: DC Injection Braking disabled during stop).
If the interlock function with simple position control and brake control is used, the setting “01:
Enabled (DC Injection Braking enabled during stop)” is enabled. The DC injection braking is dis-
abled only with brake control. For details, refer to 6-7-9 Interlock Function with Simple Position Con-
trol and Brake Control on page 6-50.
The brake control function can be used independently of the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244)
Selection.
You can combine this function with the simple position control function.
For how to combine this function with simple position control, refer to 6-7-9 Interlock Function with
Simple Position Control and Brake Control on page 6-50.
• Allocate one of the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay
Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to the following output signals.
Brake control output : 19 (BRK: Brake release)
Brake error output : 20 (BER: Brake error)
• As required, set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 44 (BOK:
Brake confirmation).
• According to your system, set the parameters used for the operation sequence.
• It is recommended to use sensorless vector control (A044 = 03) that generates a high torque
during startup. For details on sensorless vector control, refer to 6-1 Sensorless Vector Control on
page 6-3.
• Set a frequency higher than the Brake Release Frequency (b125). If the set frequency is equal to or
lower than the b125 value, the inverter will detect an overload because the brake cannot be released.

Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC Injection Braking
Brake Control Function
b120 enabled during stop) 00 −
Selection
02: Enabled (DC Injection Braking dis-
abled during stop)
0.00 to 5.00
The time from when the inverter reaches
b121 Brake Release Wait Time the Brake Release Frequency until it out- 0.00 s
puts the brake release signal. Set the time
until the output current reaches the Brake
Release Current value.
0.00 to 5.00
Set the mechanical delay time from when
Acceleration Wait Time on
b122 the brake confirmation signal (or brake 0.00 s
Brake Control

release signal) turns ON until the brake is
activated actually.
0.00 to 5.00
Stop Wait Time on Brake Set the mechanical delay time from when
b123 0.00 s
Control the brake release signal turns OFF until
the brake is forced actually.
0.00 to 5.00
Set this to equal to or longer than the time
b124 Brake Error Detection Time until the brake confirmation signal turns 0.00 s
ON after the brake release signal is
output.
6
0.00 to 590.00
Brake Release Frequency*1
6-6-2 Brake Control Function Settings

b125 Set the frequency at which the brake 0.00 Hz
release signal is output.
0.00 to 2.00  Rated current of inverter
Set an output current value sufficient Rated cur-
b126 Brake Release Current*2 rent of A
enough to support the load and output the inverter
brake release signal.
0.00 to 590.00
Set the frequency at which the brake
b127 Brake Force Frequency *1 0.00 Hz
release signal turns OFF and forces the
brake during stop.
C007 44: BOK (Brake confirmation) − −
Selection
C021, Multi-function Output 11/12
C022 Selection 19: BRK (Brake release)
− −
Multi-function Relay Output 20: BER (Brake error)
C026
(AL1, AL2) Function Selection
*1. Set this to a value larger than the Starting Frequency (b082).
*2. If the set value is too low, the inverter may not output a sufficient torque when the brake is released.

6-7 Simple Position Control

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter can perform simple position control with the pulse train input function
included as standard.
This control mode enables positioning to a maximum of eight target positions based on the feedback of
the Phase A and B 90°phase difference pulse train from the encoder etc.
Using the communications functions to specify the target position realizes more extensive control.
This section describes the wiring, settings, and functions of the simple position control.
6-7-1 Feedback Settings for Simple Position Control

Set the position feedback data necessary for simple position control.
• The simple position control function is available only for the 1st control. It will not work if you switch to
the 2nd control.
• Set the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) to 01 (Feedback pulse).
• Set the type of the input pulse train signal in the Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) and the
number of pulses per motor rotation (1 multiplication) in the Number of Encoder Pulses (P011),
respectively.
• If you set the Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) to 01 or 03, also set the Multi-function Input 7
Selection (C007) to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection). The setting “85 (EB: Rotation direction
detection)” is available only in the Multi-function Input 7 Selection (C007).
When C007 is set to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection), the Multi-function Input 7 Operation
Selection (C017) is disabled.
The terminal EB, once set, serves as the phase-B input for Phase A and B 90°phase difference pulse
train (P004 = 01), or the direction signal for Single-phase pulse train + direction (P004 = 03).
If C007 is not set to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection) when P004 is 01 or 03, the inverter cannot
recognize the feedback information correctly, which causes the simple position control to malfunc-
tion.
Parameter Default
No. data
Pulse Train Input EA Selec- 01: Feedback pulse (enabled only
P003 00 −
tion when 1st control is selected)
01: Phase A and B 90°phase differ-
Pulse Train Input Type Selec- ence pulse train
P004 00 −
tion 02: Do not set.
03: Single-phase pulse train + direc-
tion
P011 Number of Encoder Pulses 32. to 1024. (1 multiplication) 512. pulse
Multi-function Input 7 Selec-
C007 85: EB (Rotation direction detection) 06 −
tion

⚫ Details of Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004)

The Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) setting causes the inverter to recognize the feedback
rotation direction as shown below.
RUN command*1 Multi-function

Pulse Train Input Type Recognition of feedback rotation
Input 7
Selection (P004) setting Forward Reverse direction
Terminal EB
00 ON OFF Forward*2
−
(Single-phase pulse train) OFF ON Reverse *2
01
Forward or Detects encoder rotation (90° phase
(Phase A and B 90phase Reverse is ON −
difference).
difference pulse train)
Forward rotation (Follows terminal
03 OFF
Forward or EB)
(Single-phase pulse train + Reverse is ON Reverse rotation (Follows terminal
direction) ON
EB)

*1. When both the forward RUN command and the reverse RUN command are ON or OFF, the inverter does
not start output.
*2. The inverter recognizes the rotation direction via RUN command input because it cannot recognize the ro-
tation direction by the single-phase pulse train.
However, if the RUN command is switched during operation, the inverter retains the rotation direction be-
fore the switching until its output frequency causes a deceleration stop and then switches to the rotation
direction recognized via RUN command input.
In this case, position error may occur due to the difference between the output frequency and the actual
operating frequency of the motor.
Under single-phase pulse position control, be sure to stop the motor once before you change the direction
of motor rotation. 6
6-7-2 Recommended Encoder for Simple Position Control and Its Wiring
The type of encoder recommended for simple position control and the wiring method for the encoder signal
are described below.
Recommended Encoder
For the pulse train input function of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, be sure to use a
complementary-output type encoder.
In addition, for encoder cable connection, always use a shielded cable and connect it to the terminal L of
the inverter’s control circuit terminal block.
If an open-collector output encoder is used, the inverter may not recognize the rotation in the forward or
reverse direction. This is because, as the length of the encoder cable increases, its stray capacitance
becomes larger, which causes the inverter to falsely recognize the crosstalk signal from the encoder.
⚫ Complementary output
Complementary output is a method to output via two tran- E6C3-CWZ5GH
Power
sistors.
NPN
The wiring is connected to the 0-V side when output is ON and to Transistor
the power-supply side when output is OFF.
PNP
This design does not allow the wiring to be left open (at a Transistor
high impedance) as with the case of open-collector output
encoders.
Therefore, this provides a stable output from the encoder.

⚫ Recommended product
E6C3-CWZ5GH (Manufacturer: OMRON)
Crosstalk : A phenomenon by which signals are erroneously transmitted between different

phases. Specifically, the rising/falling edge signal from phase A is superimposed on
the signal from phase B and the rising/falling edge signal from phase B is superim-
posed on the signal from phase A, respectively.
Encoder Input
For pulse train input, use the pulse train input EA terminal and the multi-function Input 7 terminal of the
control circuit terminals.
Be sure to use a complementary-output type encoder.
Maximum Terminal EA Terminal 7/EB

Input signal type
Frequency (5 to 24 VDC, 32 kHz max.) (24 VDC, 32 kHz max.)
Single-phase pulse train
Terminal Single-phase pulse train −
(P004 = 00)
EA: 32 kHz
Phase A and B 90°phase difference
Terminal 7 Phase-A pulse train Phase-B pulse train
pulse train (P004 = 01)
(Terminal
Single-phase pulse train + direction
EB): 32 kHz Single-phase pulse train Direction signal*1
(P004 = 03)
*1. Direction signal can be input in favor of the sink or source logic, independent of the output method of the en-
coder signal.
Wiring for Phase A and B 90°Phase Difference Pulse Train (P004 = 01)
Connect the phase-A/B 90° phase difference pulse train as shown in the diagram below.
• Connect the phase-A signal to the pulse train input terminal EA.
• Connect the phase-B signal to the multi-function Input 7 terminal and set the Multi-function Input 7
Selection (C007) to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection).
• If the encoder signal is connected, you need to complete wiring for other multi-input terminals 1 to 6
in the source logic (PNP).


6

Connect the single-phase pulse signal or single-phase pulse + direction signal as shown in the diagram
below.
• Connect the single-phase pulse signal to the pulse train input EA terminal.
• Input the direction signal to the multi-function Input 7 terminal and set the Multi-function Input 7
Selection (C007) to 85 (EB: Rotation direction detection). Select the sink logic (NPN) or source (PNP)
by properly positioning the short-circuit bar.

Encoder Wiring Check

When you finish wiring the encoder, follow the steps below to check the encoder wiring.
(1) Turn ON the power supplies for both the inverter and the encoder.
(2) Set the parameter data according to 6-7-1 Feedback Settings for Simple Position
Control on page 6-28.
(3) Display the Current Position Monitor (d030).
(4) Check that the Current Position Monitor (d030) value increases when the motor
rotates in the forward direction and decreases when the motor rotates in the reverse
direction. In general, the forward/reverse rotation of a motor/encoder is defined as
follows.
Rotation
Motor Encoder
direction

Clockwise when viewed from rear of Clockwise when viewed from encoder
Forward
motor shaft*1 shaft*2
Counterclockwise when viewed from rear Counterclockwise when viewed from
Reverse
of motor shaft *1 encoder shaft
*1. This shows the rotation direction when the U-, V-, and W-phases of the inverter are wired in a cor-
rect order to the U-, V-, and W-phases of the motor.
*2. In the output of the encoder during forward rotation, phase A leads phase B by 90°.
(5) Disable the simple position control function and perform forward operation and
reverse operation with a single inverter. Check, as described in step (4), that the
monitor value increases during forward operation and decreases during reverse 6
operation.

⚫ If problem occurs during wiring check

If any problem occurs during the wiring check, refer to the following table to take corrective action.
Problem Cause Check/Remedy

The motor/encoder rotates in The motor/encoder wiring for for- Reverse the wiring for the phase-A and
opposite directions during forward or reverse rotation is con- phase-B signals.
ward and reverse rotations. nected the other way around.
Check the phase-A and phase-B signals
with a tester etc.
• Are they connected correctly?
• Is the power supplied?
The Current Position Monitor
(d030) value does not
The phase-A or phase-B signal, • Is there any disconnected cable?
or both, is not input correctly. Check if the encoder’s output circuit is
increase/decrease.
not damaged.
If the voltage waveform of the encoder is
normal, the inverter’s input circuit is
damaged. (Ask for repair.)
Take the following measures:
The Current Position Monitor The inverter cannot recognize the
• Use a complementary-output type
(d030) value does not rotation direction due to the
encoder.
increase/decrease during effects of crosstalk on the
either forward or rotation. encoder signal. • Use a shielded cable and connect it to
the terminal L.
6-7-3 Simple Position Control Operation and Settings

The operation and settings of the simple position control function are described below.
Simple Position Control Operation
The simple position control is performed based on the following three settings after the RUN command
turns ON.
When the motor reaches the target position, the inverter outputs the positioning completion signal to
stop the motor by applying DC injection braking.
Target position : The motor moves to the target based on the Multi-step Position
Command 0 to 7 (P060 to P067) settings.
Target speed : The motor moves according to the frequency reference setting.
Acceleration/Deceleration time : The motor runs according to the acceleration and deceleration
time settings.
(1) Simple position control starts when the RUN command (forward or reverse) turns
ON.
(2) The inverter judges the direction of movement based on the current position and the
target position, regardless of the RUN command.
(3) The inverter accelerates according to the acceleration and deceleration time settings
to reach the target speed.
If the amount of movement to the target position is small, the inverter decelerates before
the target speed is reached and makes a triangular movement.
Or, if the current position is within the range set in the Positioning Completion Range Set-
ting (P017), the inverter switches to the DC injection braking mode at that position.

(4) The inverter starts decelerating when the motor reaches the position short of the tar-
get position by the sum of the amount of decelerating movement for the accelera-
tion/deceleration set time and the Creep Speed Moving Amount (P014).
(5) When the frequency set in the Creep Speed Setting (P015) is reached during deceler-
ation, the motor moves at the creep speed.
(6) When the motor reaches the position set in the Positioning Completion Range Set-
ting (P017) from the target position, the inverter outputs the positioning completion
signal (C021, C022, C026 = 23: POK) and decelerates according to the accelera-
tion/deceleration time settings.
(7) After the motor stops, the output status of the inverter switches to DC injection brak-
ing. The DC injection braking mode is reset when the RUN command turns OFF.
Note that this DC injection braking after stop causes the motor to move out of the stop posi-
tion due to external force because it has no position retention mechanism. If position reten-
tion is required, use external braking.
If using external braking to enable position retention, turn OFF the RUN command to
release the DC injection braking mode.

RUN command ON
(1)
Output
frequency [Hz] Amount of decelerating
(4) movement for the
Speed acceleration/decelera-
command When the position tion set time
command value is
small, the inverter
Creep Speed Setting (P015)
(3) decelerates and then
performs positioning
(5) DC injection braking (DB)
before it reaches the 6
speed command (7)
(2) value. Time
(6) Creep Speed Moving

POK output signal ON Amount (P014)
⚫ Precautions for use of single-phase pulse position control (P004 = 00)

When Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) is set to 00 (Single-phase pulse input), the direction
of motor rotation is judged based on RUN command input.
• If the motor rotates from a stop state where the RUN command is not input, the Current Position
Monitor does not work.
To prevent the motor from moving out of position during stop, consider a method to suppress rota-
tion during stop, such as a brake, or change the P004 to 01 (Phase A and B 90°phase difference
pulse train) to perform the Current Position Monitor during stop.
• If the RUN command is switched during operation, the inverter retains the rotation direction before
the switching until its output frequency causes a deceleration stop and then switches to the rota-
tion direction by the RUN command input.
In this case, position error may occur due to the difference between the output frequency and the
actual operating frequency of the motor.
Under single-phase pulse position control, be sure to stop the motor once before you change the
direction of motor rotation.

Frequency/
Speed
Actual motor speed
Output
frequency Time
Output frequency/
Actual speed
Rotation direction judged Forward

based on single-phase
Reverse
pulse (P004 = 00)
Position error
Forward
Actual rotation direction
Reverse

• The actual load may not follow the output frequency during deceleration if, for example, the
load inertia is large. If this occurs, the speed becomes higher than the creep speed around
the target position, and the stopping accuracy degrades.
When the speed decelerates from the creep speed, also the stopping accuracy degrades.
Use the following methods to improve the stopping accuracy.
1. Set a longer deceleration time or increase the Creep Speed Moving Amount (P014).
2. Set the Creep Speed Setting to the lowest possible value.
3. For V/f control, adjust the V/f Control With Speed Feedback Slip Compensation Propor-
tional Gain / Integral Gain (H050/H051) to improve the speed following performance.
4. Switch to sensorless vector control.
• DC injection braking does not work during stop if the simple position control function is used
to control the motor via the RUN command from the Digital Operator (A002 = 02).
To perform DC injection braking after the motor stops, set A002 to other than 02 (Digital
Operator).
• Under position control, the Creep Speed Moving Amount (P014) setting will be ignored if the
amount of movement is smaller than the set value and the motor moves to the target position
at the creep speed.
If the amount of movement is too small to reach the creep speed, the motor makes a triangu-
lar movement.

Simple Position Control Settings

The simple position control is a function only available for the 1st control. It does not work if you switch
to the 2nd control.
In addition, when the simple position control is set, the torque control is disabled. The terminal ATR
(Torque reference input permission) is disabled.
In the PM motor mode, the simple position control is not available (the parameter P012 is not displayed).
To enable the simple position control, set parameters as follows.
• Set the Simple Position Control Selection (P012) to 02 (Simple position control enabled).
• Set the Creep Speed Moving Amount (P014) and Creep Speed Setting (P015) according to the oper-
ation pattern.
Set the Creep Speed Moving Amount as a percentage of the amount of movement per motor rotation.
• Set the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 23 (POK: Position ready), then set the Positioning Completion

Range Setting (P017). This value must be set as 4 multiplication pulses (the number of pulses
obtained by dividing each phase-A pulse by 4).
If the current value reaches in the range of the target position ± P017, the POK signal will be output.
• To enable the position limit settings, set the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) to 00 (Limit).
Then, in the Position Limit Setting (Forward Side) (P072)/Position Limit Setting (Reverse Side)
(P073), set the upper/lower limit of the position control range. This value must be set as 1 multiplica-
tion pulses (equivalent the number of phase-A pulses).
If the current position moves out of the range specified in the Position Limit Setting (Forward
Side/Reverse Side), the inverter detects the E83. (Position control range trip) and shuts off the output.
• Set the actual control target position in the Multi-step Position Command 0 (P060).
This value must be set as 1 multiplication pulses (equivalent the number of phase-A pulses). 6
For how to enable positioning to up to eight points, refer to 6-7-6 Multi-step Position Control Settings
on page 6-45.

• It is recommended to set the 1st Control Method (A044) to 03 (Sensorless vector control).
Before you use sensorless vector control, set the motor parameters as described in 6-1 Sensorless
Vector Control on page 6-3.
• When 1st Control Method (A044) is set to any option other than 03, i.e. V/f control, both position feed-
back and speed feedback are enabled. Refer to 6-5 V/f Control with Speed Feedback on page 6-18
for details on V/f control with speed feedback, and adjust the parameters.
Note If operation is not smooth during startup due to insufficient torque, disable the automatic torque boost
function (A041 = 00) and adjust the manual torque boost parameters.
If this does not improve operation, it is recommended to use sensorless vector control (A044 = 03),
which generates high torque during startup.
• To use the simple position control, set the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to 00 (Disabled).
When the simple position control is enabled, the DC injection braking function works even if the DC
Injection Braking Selection (A051) is set to 00 (Disabled).
Do not set the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to Enabled. Doing so causes the simple posi-
tion control to malfunction.
To obtain the required level of braking power without overload detection, set the DC Injection Braking
Power (A054).
Parameter
No.
Simple Position Control 00: Simple position control disabled
P012 00 −
Selection 02: Simple position control enabled
P014 Creep Speed Moving Amount 0.0 to 400.0 125.0 %
P015 Creep Speed Setting Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00) 5.00 Hz
Positioning Completion
P017 0. to 10000. (4 multiplication) 50. pulse
Range Setting

Parameter
No.
Position range setting (reverse side)
(P073) to position range setting (for-
Multi-step Position Com-
P060 ward side) (P072) *1 0 pulse
mand 0
(1 multiplication)
0 to 268435455
P072 (Displays upper 5 digits) 268435455 pulse
(Forward Side)
(1 multiplication)*1
−268435455 to 0
P073 (Displays upper 5 digits excluding “-”) −268435455 pulse
(Reverse Side)
Position Control Mode 00: Limit
P075 00 −
Selection 01: No limit *2
01: Reduced torque characteristics
A044 1st Control Method 00 −
03: Sensorless vector control
DC Injection Braking Selec-
A051 00: Disabled 00 −
tion
Multi-function Output 11/12
C021, C022 − −
Selection
23: POK (Positioning ready)
C026 05 −
*2. Refer to 6-7-7 Turntable Control on page 6-47.
Protective Functions under Simple Position Control

Simple position control has protective functions. Set these functions according to your application.
If the Reset Selection (C102) is set to 02 (Enabled only during trip, default), 00 (Trip reset at power-on),
or 01 (Trip reset at power-off), the current position data is cleared when a trip is reset.
Set the Reset Selection (C102) to 03 (Trip reset only) so as not to clear the current position data.
⚫ Position control range trip

If the Current Position Monitor (d030) value is out of the position control range specified in the Posi-
tion Limit Setting (P072 and P073), the inverter detects the E83. (Position control range trip) and
shuts off the output. Set the parameter value according to the moving range for your application.
⚫ Overspeed error detection

If the speed feedback value exceeds the value set in the Overspeed Error Detection Level (P026),
the inverter detects the E81. (Overspeed error) and shuts off the output.
Set the detection level according to the maximum speed allowable for your application.
⚫ Speed deviation excessive level detection

If the deviation of the actual frequency from the frequency reference value exceeds the value set in
the Speed Deviation Excessive Level (P027), the inverter outputs the excessive speed deviation sig-
nal (DSE). Although the inverter outputs this signal, it does not shut off its output (trip).
In this case, set the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or the Multi-function Relay
Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to 22 (DSE: Excessive speed deviation). In addition,
construct such a sequence that stops the control if the inverter outputs the excessive speed devia-
tion signal (DSE).

⚫ Encoder disconnection detection

When the inverter outputs the frequency set in the Creep Speed Setting (P015) or higher, if the
speed feedback value does not reach the Starting Frequency (b082) within the Encoder Disconnec-
tion Detection Time (P077), the inverter detects the E80. (Encoder disconnection error) and shuts
off the output.
If the inverter falsely detects this error, for example, when it operates with a heavy load and is slow
to start, some adjustment is required. Use the Creep Speed Setting (P015) and Encoder Disconnec-
tion Detection Time (P077) to set speed and time values that allow the inverter to start stably in your
application.
Parameter
No.
C102 Reset Selection 03: Trip reset only 02 −
0 to 268435455
P072 (Displays upper 5 digits) 268435455 pulse
(Forward Side)

−268435455 to 0
P073 (Displays upper 5 digits including “−”) −268435455 pulse
(Reverse Side)
Overspeed Error Detec-
P026 0.0 to 150.0*2 115.0 %
tion Level
Speed Deviation Exces-
P027 0.00 to 120.00 10.00 Hz
sive Level
P015 Creep Speed Setting Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00)*3 5.00 Hz
Encoder Disconnection 0.0: Disconnection detection disabled
P077 1.0 s
Detection Time 0.1 to 10.0
Multi-function Output 11, 6
C021, C022 − −
12 Selection
Multi-function Relay Out- 22: DSE (Excessive speed deviation)

C026 put (AL1, AL2) Function 05 −
Selection
*2. Set this as a percentage of the 1st Control Method (A004).
Monitor Functions under Simple Position Control
When the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) is set to 01 (Feedback pulse), the monitor functions
listed below are always enabled.
Use these monitor functions for checking the operation of the simple position control function, monitor-
ing device position, or other purposes.
Parameter Default
No. data
d008 Real Frequency Monitor *1 −590.00 to 590.00 − Hz
−268435455 to 268435455 (1 multiplication)
d029 Position Command Monitor *2 − pulse
(Displays upper 4 digits including “−”)
−268435455 to 268435455 (1 multiplication)
d030 Current Position Monitor *3 − pulse
(Displays upper 4 digits including “−”)
*1. For details, refer to 7-1-8 Real Frequency Monitor [d008] on page 7-7.
*2. For details, refer to 7-1-22 Position Command Monitor [d029] on page 7-12.
*3. For details, refer to 7-1-23 Current Position Monitor [d030] on page 7-12.

6-7-4 Origin Search Function, Current Position Preset, Position Data

Storage at Power Shutoff
When the power supply is turned on, the inverter clears the current position data to zero before startup.
Therefore, you need to establish the origin for position control before performing simple position con-
trol.
This section describes the current position clear and origin search functions to establish this origin.
It also describes the current position preset and position data storage at power shutoff functions associ-
ated with the origin search function.
Origin Search by Current Position Clear
When the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) is set to 47 (PCLR: Current position
clear) and that input terminal is turned ON, the current position data is cleared. The position at that time
is set as the origin.
• Move to the position to set the origin and turn ON the current position clear signal to establish the ori-
gin.
• The current position clear signal is enabled when the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) is set to
01 (Feedback pulse), independent of the Simple Position Control Selection (P012).
Parameter Default
No. data
C007 47: PCLR (Current position clear) − −
7 Selection

Operation of Origin Search Function

The origin search function starts when the origin search start signal turns ON, and establishes the origin
at the point when the origin search limit signal turns ON. The origin search function has two origin
search modes as shown below.
Select one that is suited to your application.
The origin search function does not work when the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) is set to 01
(No limit).
Be sure to set the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) to 00 (Limit).
⚫ Origin search mode 1

Use this mode to establish the origin simply by using sensors.
(1) When the origin search startup signal (C001 to C007 = 70: ORG) turns ON, the
inverter accelerates in the direction set in the Origin Search Direction Selection

(P069) for the set acceleration time. Do not input the RUN command. Doing so acti-
vates the simple position control function.
(2) The inverter operates at the Origin Search Mode 1 Frequency (P070).
(3) When the origin search limit signal (C001 to C007 = 69: ORL) turns ON, the inverter
switches to the DC injection braking mode.
(4) Turn OFF the origin search startup signal (C001 to C007 = 70: ORG). The Current
Position Monitor (d030) is cleared to zero and starts counting the current position
again.
ORG input ON
6
ORL input ON
Output frequency
6-7-4 Origin Search Function, Current Position Preset, Position Data Storage at Power Shutoff
(2) Origin Search Mode 1 Frequency (P070)
(1) (3) DB
Origin Position

⚫ Origin search mode 2

This mode provides a method to improve the processing time and accuracy of origin search by
switching between two frequency settings in the origin search mode.
In the Origin Search Mode 2 Frequency (P071), set a high frequency to move to the proximity of the
origin in a short time.
In the Origin Search Mode 1 Frequency (P070), set a low frequency to improve the accuracy of the
stop position.
The figure below shows the operation of the origin search mode 2, where the horizontal axis of the
upper graph represents the position and the lower graph represents the time, respectively.
(1) When the origin search startup signal (C001 to C007 = 70: ORG) turns ON, the
inverter accelerates in the direction set in the Origin Search Direction Selection
(P069) for the set acceleration time. Do not input the RUN command. Doing so acti-
vates the simple position control function.
(2) The inverter operates at the Origin Search Mode 2 Frequency (P071).
(3) When the origin search limit signal (C001 to C007 = 69: ORL) turns ON, the inverter
decelerates for the set deceleration time.
(4) The inverter operates in a direction opposite to that set in the Origin Search Direc-
tion Selection (P069) at the Origin Search Mode 1 Frequency (P070).
(5) When the origin search limit signal (C001 to C007 = 69: ORL) turns OFF, the inverter
switches to the DC injection braking mode.
(6) Turn OFF the origin search startup signal (C001 to C007 = 70: ORG). The Current
Position Monitor (d030) is cleared to zero and starts counting the current position
again.
ORG input ON
ORL input ON
Output (2)
Origin Search Mode 2 Frequency (P071)
frequency
(1) (3)
Origin
Position
(5) DB (4)
ORG input ON
ORL input ON
Output (2)
frequency
(1) (3)
DB
Time
(5)
(4)

Origin Search Function Settings

Configure the origin search function settings as shown below based on the required operation.
• In the Origin Search Mode (P068), set the origin search mode to use.
• In the Origin Search Direction Selection (P069), set the direction in which to start the origin search
function according to your application.
• Set the Origin Search Mode 1 Frequency (P070) when the Origin Search Mode (P068) is set to 00
(Origin search mode 1), and set the Origin Search Mode 1 Frequency (P070) and Origin Search
Mode 2 Frequency (P071) when P068 is set to 01 (Origin search mode 2).
• Set any two of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 69 (ORL: Origin search
limit signal) and 70 (ORG: Origin search startup signal).
• The origin search function does not work when the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) is set to
01 (No limit).
Be sure to set the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) to 00 (Limit).

Parameter Default
No. data
P068 Origin Search Mode 00 −
Origin Search Direction 00: Forward
P069 01 −
Origin Search Mode 1
P070 0.00 to 10.00 (100.00)*1 5.00 Hz
Frequency
Origin Search Mode 2
P071 0.00 to 1st Maximum Frequency 5.00 Hz
Frequency
Position Control Mode
6
P075 00: Limit 00 −
Selection
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to 69: ORL (Origin search limit signal)
6-7-4 Origin Search Function, Current Position Preset, Position Data Storage at Power Shutoff
C007 − −
7 Selection 70: ORG (Origin search startup signal)
Current Position Preset Function
The current position preset function presets the current position to another position.
Use this function when the origin established by the origin search function is different from the actual
origin in the application.
• In the Preset Position Data (P083), set any position that you want to define as the origin of your appli-
cation. This value must be set as 1 multiplication pulses (equivalent the number of phase-A pulses).
• When the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) is set to 91 (PSET: Preset position) and
that input terminal is turned ON, the Preset Position Data (P083) value is set in the Current Posi- tion
Monitor (d030).
• The current position preset function is enabled when the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) is set
to 01 (Feedback pulse), independent of the Simple Position Control Selection (P012) setting.
• The current position preset function does not work when the Position Control Mode Selection (P075)
is set to 01 (No limit). Be sure to set the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) to 00 (Limit).

Parameter Default
No. data
Position Control Mode
P075 00: Limit 00 −
Selection
Pulse Train Input EA 01: Feedback pulse (Enabled only when
P003 00 −
Selection 1st control is selected)
Position Limit Setting (Reverse Side) (P073)
P083 Preset Position Data to Position Limit Setting (Forward Side) 0 pulse
(P072) (1 multiplication)*1
C007 91: PSET (Preset position) − −
7 Selection
Position Data Storage at Power Shutoff
The position data storage at power shutoff function enables the inverter to store the data of the Current
Position Monitor (d030) into the EEPROM at power shutoff so that the data can be set in the Current
Position Monitor at the next power-on.
This allows you to use the origin position once established by the origin search function continuously
even after turning on the power supply again.
However, to use this function, observe the following precautions:
• To store the Current Position Monitor data at power shutoff, set the Position Store Selection at Power
Off (P081) to 01 (Store).
• The position data storage at power shutoff function stores the position data into the Position Data at
Power Off (P082) when the power supply is shut off. This data will be set in the Current Position Mon-
itor at the next power-on.
Although you can set data in the Position Data at Power Off (P082), the operation is ineffective
because it will be overwritten at the next power shutoff.
• If the motor rotates when the power supply is shut off, the inverter cannot recognize the rotation
amount, which causes position error.
Take measures to prevent motor rotation at power shutoff, for example, by using the brake.
If the motor rotated after power shutoff, perform origin search operation to establish the origin in
advance.
• Even if the brake is applied at power shutoff, the position error may occur due to backlash. Because
this positional error is accumulated, perform origin search once per several startups to eliminate it.
Parameter Default
No. data
Position Store Selection at 00: Not store
P081 00 −
Power Off 01: Store
Position Limit Setting (Reverse Side) (P073)
P082 Position Data at Power Off to Position Limit Setting (Forward Side) 0 pulse
(P072) (1 multiplication)*1

6-7-5 Restarting Positioning

If the motor moves out of the restarting positioning range after position control is executed by the simple
position control function, the inverter automatically starts repositioning it again.
To enable the restarting positioning function, set parameters as follows:
• In the Restarting Positioning Range Setting (P080), set the position range in which to start restarting
positioning.
If the current position is deviated by more than “±P080” (including the set value) from the target posi-
tion, the restarting positioning function is activated automatically to reposition the motor to the target
position.
• The RUN command must remain ON while using the restarting positioning function.
• Even if the motor is out of the set pulse input (P080), the restarting positioning function does not work
when it is within the range set in the Positioning Completion Range Setting (P017).
• The restarting positioning function may start and stop repeatedly depending on the Restarting Position-
ing Range Setting (P080) and Positioning Completion Range Setting (P017). In this case, adjust either

of these settings.
• Do not use the restarting positioning function in applications where a brake is used to hold an elevat-
ing axis, or keep equipment in the stop position. Doing so causes frequent force/release of the brake,
which may result in a load fall accident or an overload trip.
Parameter Default
No. data
Range Setting
P015 Creep Speed Setting Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00) 5.00 Hz
Positioning Completion 6
Range Setting
• In the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, position control is executed so that the frequency
6-7-5 Restarting Positioning

reference during restarting positioning function will not exceed Creep Frequency (P015).
6-7-6 Multi-step Position Control Settings

Use the multi-function input 1 to 7 terminals to set up to eight target positions.
• Set any three of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 66 (CP1: Position com-
mand selection 1) to 68 (CP3: Position command selection 3).
• In the Multi-step Position Command 0 to 7 (P060 to P067), set the target positions.
These values must be set as 1 multiplication pulses (equivalent the number of phase-A pulses).

• To provide an interval between each input to the Position command selection 1 to 3 terminals to pre-
vent false recognition, set the wait time until the inverter recognizes input to these terminals in the
Multi-step Speed/Position Determination Time (C169).
Be sure to set these parameters appropriately. Note that increasing the determination time setting
lowers the responsiveness.
Parameter Default
No. data
Multi-step Position
P060 0
Command 0
Multi-step Position
P061 0
Command 1
Multi-step Position
P062 0
Command 2
Multi-step Position Position Limit Setting (Reverse Side) (P073) to
P063 0
Command 3 Position Limit Setting (Forward Side) (P072) *1
pulse
Multi-step Position (Displays upper 5 digits excluding “-”)
P064 0
Command 4 ( 1 multiplication)
Multi-step Position
P065 0
Command 5
Multi-step Position
P066 0
Command 6
Multi-step Position
P067 0
Command 7
C001 to C007 67: CP2 (Position command selection 2) − −
Selection
Multi-step Speed/Posi-
0 to 200 ( 10 ms)
C169 tion Determination 0 ms
Time Time until terminal input is recognized.
⚫ Relationship between Multi-step Position Command 0 to 7 and CP1 to CP3

(Position Command Selection 1 to 3)
Position command CP3 CP2 CP1 Position command CP3 CP2 CP1
Multi-step position 0 0 0 0 Multi-step position 4 1 0 0

⚫ Operation Diagram for Multi-step Speed/Position Determination Time (C169)

The inverter recognizes the input data when the time set in C169 elapsed since it detected the sta-
tus transition of the last input signal.
With zero determination With determination time

time (C169) (C169)
7
5 4
3
Position command
1
CP1
CP2
CP3
Determination

time (C169)
6-7-7 Turntable Control

This function is useful when using a system of rotating coordinates such as those of a turn table.
It performs positioning based on the amount of movement per rotation of the rotating coordinates in the
direction in which the moving distance is shorter.
• Set the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) to 01 (No limit). 6
• Set the amount of movement per rotation of the rotating coordinates in the Multi-step Position Com-
mand 0 (P060).
6-7-7 Turntable Control

This value must be set as 1 multiplication pulses (equivalent the number of phase-A pulses) and a
positive value.
• In the Multi-step Position Command 1 to 7 (P061 to P067), set the actual target positions.
These values must be set as 1 multiplication pulses (equivalent the number of phase-A pulses).
• This control is enabled when the Pulse Train Input Type Selection (P004) is set to 00 (Single-phase
pulse input) or 01 (Phase A and B 90° phase difference pulse train). Do not use this control with the
set value 03 (Single-phase pulse train + direction).
• The origin search, current position preset, and speed/position switching functions do not work when
the Position Control Mode Selection (P075) is set to 01 (No limit).
Do not use the turntable control function in conjunction with the origin search, current position preset,
or speed/position switching function.
Parameter Default
No. data
P075 00 −
Position Limit Setting (Reverse Side) (P073) to
Multi-step Position Position Limit Setting (Forward Side) (P072)*1
P060 0 pulse
Command 0 (Displays upper 5 digits excluding “-”)
Position Limit Setting (Reverse Side) (P073) to
Multi-step Position Position Limit Setting (Forward Side) (P072)*1
P061 to P067 0 pulse
Command 1 to 7 (Displays upper 5 digits excluding “-”)

Parameter Default
No. data
00: Single-phase pulse input
Pulse Train Input
P004 01: Phase A and B 90°phase difference 00 −
Type Selection
pulse train
4000
P075=00
If position command
value is 6000
2000 6000
Current value P075=01 (Shortest control path)

0
8000=P060

6-7-8 Speed/Position Switching

You can switch between simple position control and speed control (frequency operation).
• Set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 73 (SPD (Speed/Position switching)).
• When the SPD (Speed/Position switching) terminal is turned ON, control switches from simple posi-
tion control to speed control (frequency operation).
• When the SPD (Speed/Position switching) terminal is turned OFF, control switches from speed control
(frequency operation) to simple position control.
• In the speed control (frequency operation) mode, the rotation direction depends on the RUN command.
• When the SPD (Speed/Position switching) terminal is ON, the current position is cleared to zero and
not counted.
• If the SPD (Speed/Position switching) terminal is turned OFF during operation, the position where it is
turned OFF is taken as 0 and speed control switches to simple positioning control.
At this time, do not set the position command to an extremely small value such that the motor reaches
the target position within 4 ms after the switch to simple positioning control.

The motor cannot correctly decelerate due to variations in response time.
• The speed/position switching function does not operate when Position Control Mode Selection (P075)
is set to 01 (No limit). Be sure to set this to 00 (Limit).
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to C007 73: SPD (Speed/Position switching) − −
1 to 7 Selection
Position Control 6
P075 00: Limit 00 −
Mode Selection
6-7-8 Speed/Position Switching

Output frequency
Position count start
Speed control Position control

DB
Time
Target position
SPD input ON
FW/RV *1
*1 Follow the sign of the position control target (P060 to P067).

Input FW and RV for forward command and reverse command respectively.

6-7-9 Interlock Function with Simple Position Control and Brake Control
The interlock function with simple position control and brake control is useful in applications where
brake control is required, such as an elevator or equipment that must be kept in the stop position.
Operation Sequence of Brake Control Function

Set the Simple Position Control Selection (P012) to 02 (Simple position control enabled), and the Brake
Control Function Selection (b120) to 01 (Enabled: DC Injection Braking enabled during stop) to auto-
matically interlock the simple position control with brake control.
The interlock function with simple position control and brake control is enabled only for the 1st Control
Method (A044).
The diagram below shows the operation sequence of the interlock function with simple position control
and brake control.
Note The above sequence chart shows an example when one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection
(C001 to C007) is set to 44 (BOK: Brake confirmation).
⚫ During acceleration
(1) The interlock function with simple position control and brake control starts when the
RUN command (forward or reverse) turns ON.
The inverter starts its output and accelerates to the frequency set in the Creep Speed Set-
ting (P015).
The inverter judges the direction of movement based on the current position and the target
position, regardless of the RUN command.
Or, if the current position is within the range set in the Positioning Completion Range Setting
(P017), it stops there without releasing the brake. Whether or not the inverter switches to the
DC injection braking mode depends on the Brake Control Function Selection (b120) setting.
(2) After reaching the frequency set in the Creep Speed Setting (P015), the inverter waits
until the Brake Release Wait Time (b121) elapses and outputs the brake release signal
(C021, C022, C026 = 19: BRK).
However, if the output current did not reach the Brake Release Current (b126) when output-
ting the brake release signal, the inverter outputs the brake error signal (C021, C022, C026
= 20: BER) without releasing the brake, and detects the E36. (Brake error).

(3) After outputting the brake release signal, the inverter waits for the brake confirma-
tion signal (C001 to C007 = 44: BOK) to turn ON during the time set in the Brake Error
Detection Time (b124).
If the brake confirmation signal does not turn ON within the time set in b124, the inverter
(Brake error).
proceeds to step (4) after outputting the brake release signal.
(4) After the brake confirmation signal turns ON (after releasing the brake), the inverter
waits until the Acceleration Wait Time on Brake Control (b122) elapses and acceler-
ates again to the set frequency.
If the amount of movement to the target position is small, it decelerates before the set fre-
quency is reached and makes a triangular movement.
⚫ During deceleration

(5) The Inverter starts decelerating the motor when it reaches the position short of the
target position by the amount equivalent to the sum of the amount of decelerating
movement caused by the deceleration time settings and the Creep Speed Moving
Amount (P014).
(6) When the frequency set in the Creep Speed Setting (P015) is reached during deceler-
ation, the inverter turns OFF the brake release signal (C021, C022, C026 = 19: BRK).
After turning OFF the brake release signal, the inverter waits for the brake confirmation sig-
nal (C001 to C007 = 44: BOK) to turn OFF during the time set in the Brake Error Detection
Time (b124).
If the brake confirmation signal does not turn OFF within the time set in b124, the inverter
6
(Brake error).
confirmation), the Brake Error Detection Time (b124) is disabled and the inverter proceeds
to step (7) after the brake release signal turns OFF.
(7) After the brake confirmation signal turns OFF (after forcing the brake), the inverter
waits until the Stop Wait Time on Brake Control (b123) or the time during which the
motor moves by the Creep Speed Moving Amount (P014), whichever is longer,
elapses and decelerates again to an output frequency of 0 Hz.
(8) After the motor stops, the output status of the inverter depends on the Brake Control
Function Selection (b120) setting.
The inverter switches to the DC injection braking mode when b120 is set to 01 (Enabled:
DC Injection Braking enabled during stop), and the DC injection braking mode is reset
when the RUN command turns OFF.
The inverter shuts off its output when b120 is set to 02 (Enabled: DC Injection Braking dis-
abled during stop).

When the frequency set in the Creep Speed Setting (P015) is reached during deceleration, the
inverter turns OFF the brake release signal (C021, C022, C026 = 19: BRK) to force the brake,
which causes the motor to stop.
This means that the motor stops short of the actual target position, by the amount of the Creep
Speed Moving Amount (P014) at most.
Set the Creep Speed Moving Amount (P014) in consideration of the stopping accuracy.
Also, consider the Creep Speed Moving Amount (P014) when setting the Positioning Comple-
tion Range Setting (P017).

Settings of Interlock Function with Simple Position Control and

Brake Control
This section describes the settings related to the interlock function with simple position control and
brake control.
For the simple position control settings, refer to 6-7-3 Simple Position Control Operation and Settings
on page 6-34.
• Set the Simple Position Control Selection (P012) to 02 (Simple position control enabled) and, at the
same time, set the Brake Control Function Selection (b120) to 01 (Enabled: DC Injection Braking
enabled during stop) or 02 (Enabled: DC Injection Braking disabled during stop).
• The interlock function with simple position control and brake control is enabled only for the 1st control
method.
put (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026), to the following output signals.
Brake control output : 19 (BRK: Brake release)
Brake error output : 20 (BER: Brake error)
• As required, set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 44 (BOK: Brake
confirmation).
• According to your system, set the parameters used for the operation sequence as shown in the table
below.
• It is recommended to use sensorless vector control (A044 = 03) that generates a high torque during
startup. For details, refer to 6-1 Sensorless Vector Control on page 6-3.
• Set a frequency higher than the Creep Speed Setting (P015). If the set frequency is equal to or lower
than the P015 value, the inverter will detect an overload because the brake cannot be released.
Parameter Default
No. data
Simple Position Control 02: Simple position control enabled
P012 00 −
Selection
0.0 to 400.0
Creep Speed Moving Adjust the amount of movement in consider-
P014 125.0 %
Amount ation of the stopping accuracy, with the brake
application timing.
Starting Frequency to 10.00 (100.00)*4
Set the frequency for releasing/forcing the
P015 Creep Speed Setting *1 brake. 5.00 Hz
This setting is also used for the creep speed
under simple position control.
0 to 10000 (4 multiplication)
Positioning Completion Set the output range of the positioning com-
P017 50. pulse
Range Setting pletion signal in consideration of the Creep
Speed Moving Amount.
01: Enabled (DC injection braking enabled
Brake Control Function during stop) *2
b120 00 −
Selection 02: Enabled (DC injection braking disabled
during stop)
0.00 to 5.00
The time from when the inverter reaches the
Brake Release Wait frequency set in the Creep Speed Setting until
b121 0.00 s
Time it outputs the brake release signal. Set the
time until the output current reaches the
Brake Release Current value.

Parameter Default
No. data
0.00 to 5.00
Set the mechanical delay time from when the
Acceleration Wait Time
b122 brake confirmation signal (or brake release 0.00 s
on Brake Control
signal) turns ON until the brake is activated
actually.
0.00 to 5.00
Set the mechanical delay time from when the
brake release signal turns OFF until the brake
Stop Wait Time on is forced actually.
b123 0.00 s
Brake Control The creep operation time or the stop wait
time, whichever is longer, takes priority. Set a
sufficient time that causes the brake to be
activated and applied without fail.
0.00 to 5.00
Brake Error Detection Set this to equal to or longer than the time
b124 0.00 s
Time until the brake confirmation signal turns ON

after the brake release signal is output.
0.00 to 2.00  Rated current of inverter
Set an output current value sufficient enough Rated
b126 Brake Release Current *3 current of A
to support the load and output the brake inverter
release signal.
C001 to C007 44: BOK (Brake confirmation) − −
to 7 Selection
C021, C022 19: BRK (Brake release) − −
11/12 Selection
Multi-function Relay 23: POK (Positioning ready) 6
C026 Output (AL1, AL2) 05 −
Func-
tion Selection
*1. If the creep speed setting is too low, the inverter may not be able to output a sufficient torque to keep the load
in position. Set such a frequency that enables the inverter to stably output a sufficient torque.
*2. DC injection braking is enabled when the interlock function with simple position control and brake control is
used. DC injection braking works even when the inverter is stopped to support its load holding capability. This
is effective, for example, to prevent fall accidents when the brake is forced.
*3. If the set value is too low, the inverter may not output a sufficient torque when the brake is released.

6-8 PM Motor Mode

The 3GM3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter uses the PM motor mode to enable the inverter to control of a syn-
chronous motor (PM motor), which is more efficient than an induction motor (IM motor).
This section describes the PM motor mode.
6-8-1 PM Motor and PM Motor Control
PM Motor
A PM motor (abbreviation for “Permanent Magnet motor”) is a motor that uses permanent magnets for
the motor rotor.
Generally, it is also called a synchronous motor. Compared with induction motors that are used conven-
tionally for the inverter, PM motors allow no current flow on the rotor side, which results in highly effi-
cient operation due to reduced loss.
In terms of the internal construction, there are various types of PM motors: IPM motors (interior perma-
nent magnet type), SPM motors (surface permanent magnet type), and so on.
PM motors have the control characteristics as shown below.
When using the PM motor mode, understand the following characteristics before selecting the Inverter
type and function settings.
• The applied AC power must be synchronized with the rotor permanent magnets.
Although the motor allows a large current to flow, it cannot output a sufficient torque if the AC power
is not synchronized.
• The permanent magnets used for the rotor are subject to demagnetization if a large current flows in
the PM motor.
Once rotor is demagnetized, the motor cannot output a sufficient torque and must be replaced.
PM Motor Control
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter uses sensorless control to realize PM motor
control. This means that the inverter cannot output a large starting torque.
PM motor control is suitable for applications with reduced torque characteristics (which do not require
torque at low speeds) such as fans and pumps.
However, it cannot be used for applications with constant torque characteristics such as general trans-
fer equipment and elevating axes (which require a torque exceeding the rated torque also at low
speeds).
To keep the PM motor in a synchronized state, use the inverter with a starting torque of 50% of the
motor rated torque or lower.
Follow the steps below to use PM motor control:
(1) Switch to the PM motor mode. (P. 6-58)
(2) Perform offline auto-tuning for PM motor parameters. (P. 6-59)
(3) Set PM motor parameters. (P. 6-62)
Refer to this section if offline auto-tuning fails.
(4) Adjust the PM motor mode settings. (P. 6-64)


• Check the maximum allowable current (limiting current beyond which demagnetization
occurs) for your PM motor.
The inverter could output approximately 300% of the rated output current of the inverter.
Select a PM motor as follows to prevent demagnetization.
When comparing each motor specification, note whether it is an effective value or a peak
value. The inverter’s rated current is an effective value.
Maximum current of PM motor > Approx. 300% of rated output current of inverter
• In the PM motor mode, some of the inverter functions are unavailable. Unavailable parame-
ters are not displayed on the Digital Operator.
Refer to 6-8-2 Functional Limitations in PM Motor Mode on page 6-56.
• The PM motor control mode is applied to one single motor. It is not possible to drive more
than one PM motor with a single inverter.
• With an extremely large load, this control may not keep the PM motor in a synchronized
state.
6-8 PM Motor Mode

As a guide, the motor-shaft conversion of the moment of load inertia shall be not more than
30 times as great as the moment of inertia of the PM motor.
6-8-1 PM Motor and PM Motor Control

6-8-2 Functional Limitations in PM Motor Mode

In the PM motor mode, induction motor-related functions and some other functions cannot be used.
Parameters for these unavailable functions are not displayed in the PM mode.
In addition, for some parameters, the default data are changed for use with the PM motor.
This section lists the unavailable parameters, unavailable selection functions, and parameter with
changed default data, in this order.
Unavailable Parameters
The following parameters are not available and therefore not displayed on the Digital Operator.
Parameter Parameter
Function name Function name
No. No.
d008 Real Frequency Monitor b100 to
b113 Free V/f function
d009 Torque Reference Monitor
d010 Torque Bias Monitor b120 to
Brake control function
b127
d012 Output Torque Monitor
C054 to
d029 Position Command Monitor C059 Overtorque/Undertorque function
d030 Current Position Monitor H002 to
H034 Induction motor parameter
A038,
A039 Jogging function
V/f Control With Speed Feedback Slip
H050 Compensation Proportional Gain
A041 to
A043 Torque boost function
V/f Control With Speed Feedback Slip
H051
A044 1st Control Method Compensation Integral Gain
A045 1st Output Voltage Gain P004 Pulse Train Input Type Selection
1st Automatic Torque Boost Voltage P011 Number of Encoder Pulses
A046 Compensation Gain P012 Simple Position Control Selection
1st Automatic Torque Boost Slip Com- P014 Creep Speed Moving Amount
A047 pensation Gain
P015 Creep Speed Setting
A081 AVR function
P017 Positioning Completion Range Setting
A083 AVR Filter Time Constant
P026 Overspeed Error Detection Level
A084 AVR Gain at Deceleration
P027 Speed Deviation Excessive Level
A085 Operation Mode Selection
P033 to
Energy-saving Response/Accuracy P041 Torque control function
A086
Adjustment
P060 to
b027 Overcurrent Suppression Selection P083 Simple position control
b028 to F202 to
b030 Frequency pull-in restart function
F203
b036 Reduced Voltage Startup Selection A201 to
A296
b040 to b213 to 2nd control function
b044 Torque limit function
b223
b045 Torque LADSTOP Selection C241
H202 to
b046 Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection H234
b049 Heavy load/Light Load Selection

Unavailable Selection Functions

The following parameter selection functions are not available and therefore not displayed on the Digital
Operator.
Parameter No. Function name Unavailable selection functions

Power Interruption/Undervoltage 04: Frequency pull-in restart
b001
Restart Selection
Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart 04: Frequency pull-in restart
b008
Selection
b088 Free-run Stop Selection 02: Frequency pull-in restart
06: JG (Jogging)
C001 Multi-function Input 1 Selection 08: SET (2nd control)
14: CS (Commercial switching)
C003 Multi-function Input 3 Selection 44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
6-8 PM Motor Mode

47: PCLR (Current position clear)
52: ATR (Torque reference input permission)
C005 Multi-function Input 5 Selection 67: CP2 (Position command selection 2)
C006 Multi-function Input 6 Selection 6
70: ORG (Origin search start signal)
6-8-2 Functional Limitations in PM Motor Mode

C007 Multi-function Input 7 Selection 85: EB (Rotation direction detection)
91: PSET (Preset current position)
07: OTQ (Overtorque/Undertorque signal)
C021 Multi-function Output 11 Selection 10: TRQ (Torque limit)
C022 Multi-function Output 12 Selection 20: BER (Brake error)
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, 23: POK (Position ready)
C026
AL2) Function Selection 60: SETM (Motor 2 selection)
C027 EO Selection 02: Output torque (Only in the sensorless vector control)
02: Output torque (Only in the sensorless vector control)
C028 AM Selection 11: Output torque (signed) (Only in the sensorless vec-
tor control)
C103 Reset Restart Selection 02: Frequency pull-in restart
H001 Auto-tuning Selection 02: Enabled (Motor rotation)
P003 Pulse Train Input EA Selection 01: Frequency setting (including PID)

Parameters with Changed Default Data

Switching from the induction motor heavy load mode (default) to the PM motor mode changes the
default data for the following parameter.
Default data
Initial setting PM motor mode
01: Enabled (Dependent 00: Disabled
b089 Automatic Carrier Reduction
on current)
6-8-3 Switching to PM Motor Mode

To use PM motor control, you need to switch the inverter to the PM motor mode.
Follow the steps below to switch to the PM motor mode:
(1) Set the Inverter Mode Selection (b171) to 03 (PM motor mode).
(2) Set the Initialization Execution (b180) to 01 (Execute initialization), then press the
Enter key. Parameter initialization starts.
(3) When parameter initialization is in progress, and are displayed

alternately.
(4) When the initialization process is completed, appears, meaning that the
inverter was switched to the PM control mode.

• If b171 is set to other than 00, regardless of the settings in Initialization Selection (b084) and
Initialization Target Setting (b094), when initialization is executed with the Initialization Exe-
cution (b180) set to 01 (Execute initialization), all data (set data, fault monitor data, and
DriveProgramming data) are initialized.
However, the parameters Total RUN Time Monitor (d016), Total Power ON Time Monitor
(d017), and Initialization Data Selection (b085) will not be initialized.
• To return to the induction motor mode after switching to the PM motor mode, set b171 to 01
(Induction motor mode), then execute initialization with b180 set to 01. The inverter switches
to the induction motor mode while displaying “I-C” on the Digital Operator.
Default
data
01: Induction motor mode
b171 Inverter Mode Selection Induction motor high-frequency 00 −
02:
mode
03: PM motor mode
b180 Initialization Execution 00 −
01: Execute initialization

6-8-4 Offline Auto-tuning for PM Motor Parameters

Offline auto-tuning for PM motor parameters consists of the following four steps:
• Presetting of parameters
• Auto-tuning
• Operations after auto-tuning
• Operations in case of error
1 Presetting of parameters
(1) Set the PM Motor Capacity (H103) and the PM Motor Pole Number (H104) according
to your PM motor.
(2) Set the rated frequency of the motor in the 1st Base Frequency (A003) and set the
maximum frequency in the 1st Maximum Frequency (A004).
The rated/maximum frequency values can be calculated from the rated/maximum rotation
speed of the PM motor as follows:
Rated rotation speed (Maximum rotation speed) [min-1] 
6-8 PM Motor Mode

Rated frequency Number of poles [pole]
=
(Maximum frequency) [Hz] 120
(3) Set the rated voltage of your PM motor in the 1st Motor Rated Voltage Selection
(A082) and set the rated current in the PM Motor Rated Current (H105).
The 1s Motor Rated Voltage Selection parameter must be set to the highest value closest to
the rated voltage of the motor.
In addition, for the purpose of overload protection, set the rated current of the PM motor in 6
the 1st Electronic Thermal Level (b012).
(4) In the PM Motor Parameter Ke (H109), set the inductive voltage parameter of the PM

motor.
Obtain the datasheet of your PM motor from the motor manufacturer and set the inductive
voltage parameter (for one phase).
This value must be set in “Vp/(rad/s).” If the datasheet provides this parameter in a different
unit, you need to perform unit conversion.
Example
If, for a 4-pole PM motor, the inductive voltage parameter for one phase is 10 [mV/r/min],
the set value can be calculated as follows:
10 [mV/r/min] = (10/1000 [V])  (√2)  (60 [s]) / ((2  4 [pole] / 2) [rad]) = 0.0675
[Vp/(rad/s)]
(5) In the PM Motor Parameter J (H110), set the moment of inertia of your PM motor.
Calculate the motor-shaft conversion of the moment of load inertia, add the moment of iner-
tia of the motor to it, and set the sum.
(6) Set the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to 00 (Disabled) (default).
If the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) is set to 01 (Enabled), change it to 00 (Dis-
abled).
If these parameters are set to Enabled, auto-tuning will not be completed.
(7) Set the motor cable length in the Motor Cable Length (b033).
Set the Motor Cable Length (b033) according to the length of your motor cable.

Parameter
No.
Maximum
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/ applicable
H103 PM Motor Capacity kW
5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5 motor
capacity
PM Motor Pole 2/4/6/8 Dependent
H104 pole
Number 10 to 48: Do not set. on capacity
A003 1st Base Frequency 30.0 to 1st Maximum Frequency (A004) 60.0 Hz
1st Maximum Fre-
A004 1st Base Frequency (A003) to 400.0 60.0 Hz
quency
1st Motor Rated 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
A082 200 or 400 V
PM Motor Rated Rated
H105 0.20  Rated current to 1.00  Rated current A
Current current
1st Electronic Ther- Rated
b012 0.20  Rated current to 1.00  Rated current A
mal Level current
PM motor Parame- Dependent Vp/
H109 0.0001 to 6.5535
ter Ke on capacity (rad/s)
PM motor Parame- Dependent
H110
ter J 0.001 to 9999.000*1 on capacity kgm2
00: Disabled
DC Injection Brak-
A051 01: Enabled 00 −
ing Selection
2 Auto-tuning
(1) Set the Auto-tuning Selection (H001) to 01 (Enabled: No motor rotation).
The available setting for PM motor auto-tuning is 01 (Enabled: No motor rotation) only. The
setting “02 (Enabled: Motor rotation)” is not displayed.
Parameter
No.
Auto-tuning Selec- 00: Disabled
H001 00 −
tion 01: Enabled (No motor rotation)
(2) Turn ON the RUN command based on the setting in the 1st RUN Command Selection
(A002).
Turing ON the RUN command causes the inverter to start automatic operation, during
which auto-tuning is executed in the following sequence.
If auto-tuning is completed successfully, the auto-tuning result will be set to the parameters
H111 to H113.
1) Initial pole position estimation (Motor does not rotate.)

2) 1st DC excitation (Motor does not rotate.)

3) 1st AC excitation (Motor does not rotate.)

4) 2nd AC excitation (Motor does not rotate.)


5) Auto-tuning result is displayed.

The auto-tuning result will be displayed as follows.
Normal Error
end end
If auto-tuning is aborted due to an error, retry it.

To clear the display, press the STOP/RESET key.

• Even if you set H001 to 01 (Auto-tuning without motor rotation), for example, the 4-pole
motor may rotate by approximately up to1/8 of a rotation (half the inverse of poles).
• High-tone sound or minor vibration may occur during auto-tuning.
• If a holding brake is provided, release the brake before executing auto-tuning.
• Auto-tuning cannot be performed with a motor whose rated current exceeds the rated output
current of the inverter, or with a motor whose rated current is 50% of the rated current of the
inverter or lower.
6-8 PM Motor Mode

• Adequate auto-tuning may not be performed if a motor cable is long (longer than 20 m).
• Set the Carrier Frequency (b083) to 8.0 kHz or higher. Setting a low carrier frequency results
in a poor auto-tuning accuracy, and the inverter cannot perform adequate control.
3 Operations after auto-tuning

• After normal end of auto-tuning, set the PM Motor Parameter Selection (H102) to 01
(Auto-tuning parameter).
6
This enables the PM motor parameters (H111 to H113) set by the auto-tuning function.

• At the end of auto-tuning, the inverter automatically resets the Auto-tuning Selection (H001)
to 00 (Disabled).
To retry auto-tuning, set H001 again to enable auto-tuning.

Set again the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) value which you set to 00 (Disabled) in “1.
Presetting of parameters” according to the user environment.
Parameter Default
No. data
PM Motor Parameter Selec- 00: Standard PM motor parameter
H102 00 −
tion 01: Auto-tuning parameter
PM Motor Parameter R Dependent
H111 0.001 to 65.535 on capacity 
(Auto-tuning Data)
PM Motor Parameter Ld Dependent
H112 0.01 to 655.35 on capacity mH
(Auto-tuning Data)
PM motor Parameter Lq Dependent
H113 0.01 to 655.35 on capacity mH
(Auto-tuning Data)

4 Operations in case of error

If auto-tuning is aborted due to an error, review the preset parameters according to “1. Presetting
of parameters” and check that the rated torque of the motor is at least 50% of the rated output cur-
rent of the inverter. If the inverter is connected with any load, disconnect it and retry auto-tuning.
If the error persists or auto-tuning is still aborted, enter the motor parameter values directly.
For details, refer to 6-8-5 PM Motor Parameter Settings on page 6-62.

• If a trip occurs during auto-tuning, the auto-tuning process will be forcibly ended. In this case,
the inverter displays a trip display in preference to the abort display. Refer to 10-1-2 Alarm
Code List on page 10-4.
• If the auto-tuning process is not ended, press the STOP/RESET key. This causes the pro-
cess to be forcibly ended. Then, review the preset parameters according to “1. Presetting of
parameters” and retry it.
• If the auto-tuning process is aborted, or if you interrupt the process by pressing the
STOP/RESET key or by turning OFF the RUN command, the auto-tuning settings may be left
in the parameters H111 to H113.
6-8-5 PM Motor Parameter Settings

To use PM motor control, you need to set motor parameters.
Normally, you perform offline auto-tuning to set motor parameters.
However, if the offline auto-tuning process is aborted, for example, when the inverter does not reach
50% of the rated current during auto-tuning, set the motor parameters manually.
• Set the PM Motor Parameter Selection (H102) to 00 (Standard PM motor parameter).
• Set the parameters listed below according to the motor parameters for your PM motor.
• Obtain the motor’s datasheet from the PM motor manufacturer and set each motor parameter.
For H106 to H109, set the value of the motor with the wiring for one phase in Y-connection (that is,
50% of the phase-to-phase value of the motor).
⚫ PM Motor Capacity and PM Motor Pole Number (H103 and H104)

Set the capacity and number of poles of your PM motor.
⚫ 1st Base Frequency and 1st Maximum Frequency (A003 and A004)
Set the rated frequency and maximum frequency of your PM motor.
The rated/maximum frequency values can be calculated from the rated/maximum rotation speed of
the PM motor as follows:
Rated rotation speed (Maximum rotation speed) [min-1]  Number of poles [pole]
Rated frequency
(Maximum frequency) [Hz] = 120
⚫ 1st Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082)

Set the highest value closest to the rated voltage of your motor.
⚫ PM Motor Rated Current (H105)

Set the rated current of your PM motor.
In addition, for the purpose of overload protection, set the rated current of the PM motor in the 1st
Electronic Thermal Level (b012).

⚫ PM Motor Parameter R (H106)

Set the wiring resistance (in ) on the primary side of the motor for one phase in Y-connection.
Alternatively, set 50% of the measured phase-to-phase resistance of the motor.
⚫ PM Motor Parameter Ld (H107)

Set the d-axis inductance (in mH) of the motor in Y-connection.
Alternatively, set 50% of the phase-to-phase inductance of the motor measured with an LCR meter.
Be sure to set this parameter so that Ld is equal to or less than Lq. Not doing so may result in an
overload.
⚫ PM Motor Parameter Lq (H108)

Set the q-axis inductance (in mH) of the motor in Y-connection.
Alternatively, set 50% of the phase-to-phase inductance of the motor measured with an LCR meter.
Be sure to set this parameter so that Ld is equal to or less than Lq.
⚫ PM Motor Parameter Ke (H109)
6-8 PM Motor Mode

Set the inductive voltage parameter of your PM motor in Vp/(rad/s).
This value must be set in “Vp/(rad/s).” If the datasheet provides this parameter in a different unit, you
need to perform unit conversion.
Example
If the inductive voltage parameter for one phase is 10 [mV/r/min], the set value can be calculated as
follows:
10 [mV/r/min] = (10/1000 [V])  (√2)  (60 [s]) / ((2  4 [pole] / 2) [rad]) = 0.0675 [Vp/(rad/s)] 6
⚫ PM Motor Parameter J (H110)
6-8-5 PM Motor Parameter Settings

Calculate the motor-shaft conversion of the moment of load inertia, add the moment of inertia of the
motor to it, and set the sum.
⚫ Motor Cable Length (b033)

Set the cable length from the inverter to the motor.
To maximize the performance of the inverter, set the cable length to 20 m or shorter.
Parameter Default
No. data
A003 1st Base Frequency 30.0 to 1st Maximum Frequency (A004) 60.0 Hz
A004 1st Maximum Frequency 1st Base Frequency (A003) to 400.0 60.0 Hz
1st Motor Rated Voltage 200-V class: 200/215/220/230/240
A082 200 or 400 V
Selection 400-V class: 380/400/415/440/460/480
PM Motor Parameter 00: Standard PM motor parameter
H102 00 −
Selection 02: Auto-tuning parameter
Maximum
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/ applicable
H103 PM Motor Capacity motor kW
5.5/7.5/11.0/15.0/18.5
capacity
2/4/6/8 Dependent
H104 PM Motor Pole Number on capacity pole
Rated cur-
H105 PM Motor Rated Current 0.20  Rated current to 1.00  Rated current rent A
1st Electronic Thermal Rated cur-
b012 0.20  Rated current to 1.00  Rated current rent A
Level

Parameter Default
No. data
Dependent
H106 PM Motor Parameter R 0.001 to 65.535 on capacity 
Dependent
H107 PM Motor Parameter Ld 0.01 to 655.35 on capacity mH
Dependent
H108 PM Motor Parameter Lq 0.01 to 655.35 on capacity mH
Dependent Vp/
H109 PM Motor Parameter Ke 0.0001 to 6.5535 on capacity (rad/s)
0.001 to 99.999
Dependent
H110 PM Motor Parameter J 100.00 to 999.99 on capacity kgm2
1000.0 to 9999.0

• Changing the PM Motor Capacity (H103)/PM Motor Pole Number (H104) automatically
changes the values set in A003, A004, and H105 to H110. Be sure to set the PM Motor
Capacity (H103)/PM Motor Pole Number (H104) first before setting other motor parameters.
6-8-6 Adjustment of PM Motor Mode Settings

To use PM motor control, perform offline auto-tuning for the PM motor parameters.
If you cannot perform auto-tuning, set the motor parameters appropriately according to 6-8-5 PM Motor
Parameter Settings on page 6-62.
This section describes how to adjust the parameter settings if the inverter cannot provide sufficient per-
formance characteristics after auto-tuning or motor parameter settings.
PM Motor Adjustment Parameters

For the adjustment of PM motor control, this inverter provides parameters for the control during startup,
stableness/responsiveness parameters, and initial pole position estimation functions as shown in the
table below.
For how to adjust these parameters, refer to the next section, PM Motor Adjustment.
Parameter Default
No. data
b083 Carrier Frequency 2.0 to 15.0 10.0 kHz
H106 PM Motor Parameter R
Dependent
PM Motor Parameter R 0.001 to 65.535 on capacity 
H111
(Auto-tuning Data)
H107 PM Motor Parameter Ld
Dependent
PM Motor Parameter Ld 0.01 to 655.35 on capacity mH
H112
(Auto-tuning Data)
H108 PM Motor Parameter Lq
Dependent
PM Motor Parameter Lq 0.01 to 655.35 on capacity mH
H113
(Auto-tuning Data)
H116 PM Motor Speed Response 1 to 1000 100 %
H117 PM Motor Starting Current 20.00 to 100.00 70.00 %
H118 PM Motor Starting Time 0.01 to 60.00 1.00 s
H121 PM Motor Minimum Frequency 0.0 to 25.5 8.0 %
H122 PM Motor No-Load Current 0.00 to 100.00 10.00 %

Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
H123 PM Motor Starting Method Selection 01: Initial pole position estima- 00 −
tion enabled
PM Motor Initial Pole Position Esti-
H131 0 to 255 10 time
mation 0V Waiting Times
H132 0 to 255 10 time
mation Detection Waiting Times
H133 0 to 255 30 time
mation Detection Times
PM Initial Pole Position Estimation
H134 0 to 200 100 %
Voltage Gain

• For a PM motor, even if the DC injection braking function is enabled, the regenerative energy
is returned to the inverter. If an overvoltage trip occurs during DC injection braking or during
6-8 PM Motor Mode

deceleration, consider to use one or more braking resistors.
• If a holding brake is provided, release the brake before running the motor.
If this timing is not correct, the PM motor will stall.
• To improve the control performance of the PM motor, be sure set the Carrier Frequency
(b083) to 8.0 kHz or higher.
• Derating of the output current may be required depending on the installation environment
and the Carrier Frequency (b083) setting. For derating of each inverter model, refer to A-1
Derating on page A-2. 6

PM Motor Adjustment
Adjust the PM motor as shown in the table below depending on its operation status and the phenome-
non.
Adjust-
Operation status Phenomenon Adjustment method ment item
The motor may rotate slightly in magnetic pole alignment
Motor rotates in
during startup.
reverse or rotates H123
slightly. Enable the initial pole position estimation function (refer to
P. 6-66) to suppress the rotation speed during startup.
If the motor stalls during startup, a large current may flow,
which causes an overcurrent trip.
Increase the PM Motor Starting Current value.
Increasing the PM Motor Starting Current value improves
the magnetic pole alignment during startup, which results H117
During startup Motor stalls or in an increase in the startup torque.
causes an overcur- However, setting this parameter to an excessively large
rent trip. value may cause an overload. Check the value in the Elec-
tronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor (d104).
Increase the PM Motor Starting Time value.
This increases the time during which the starting current H118
flows to improve the magnetic pole alignment during
startup, which results in an increase in the startup torque.
Motor starting time Enable the initial pole position estimation function (refer to H118,
is too long. P. 6-66) and shorten the motor starting time. H123

Adjust-
Operation status Phenomenon Adjustment method ment item
If the motor rotation is unstable during startup, increase the
motor starting time.
Rotation is unsta-
However, setting this parameter to an excessively large H117
ble.
value may cause an overload. Check the value in the Elec-
tronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor (d104).
Finely adjust the motor parameters for PM motor control.
PM Motor Mini- H106,
Decrease the PM Motor Parameter R value gradually, H111
mum Frequency
down to 70% of the set value.
(H121) or lower
Increase the PM Motor Parameter Ld value gradually, up to H107,
Motor is hunting or
130% of the set value. H112
vibrating.
Increase the PM Motor Parameter Lq value gradually, up to
130% of the set value. H108,
* Be sure to adjust this parameter so that Ld is equal to or H113
less than Lq.
Around PM Motor Increase the PM Motor Speed Response value. H116
A shock or overcur-
Minimum Fre-
rent trip occurs. Decrease the minimum frequency of the PM motor. H121
quency (H121)
Decrease the PM Motor Speed Response value. H116
Increase the PM Motor No-Load Current value. H122
Increase the Carrier Frequency, if too low. b083
Finely adjust the motor parameters for PM motor control.
H106,
Decrease the PM Motor Parameter R value gradually, H111
PM Motor Mini-
Motor is hunting or down to 70% of the set value.
mum Frequency
vibrating. Increase the PM Motor Parameter Ld value gradually, up to H107,
(H121) or higher
130% of the set value. H112
Increase the PM Motor Parameter Lq value gradually, up to
130% of the set value. H108,
* Be sure to adjust this parameter so that Ld is equal to or H113
less than Lq.

Increasing the PM Motor Starting Current (H117) too much causes an overload. Alternatively,
doing so causes automatic carrier reduction depending on the set value.
PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation
The PM motor initial pole position estimation function estimates the magnetic pole position of the PM
motor in a stop state and causes the inverter to start its output according to the estimated magnetic pole
position.
Set PM motor parameters according to 6-8-4 Offline Auto-tuning for PM Motor Parameters on page
6-59 or 6-8-5 PM Motor Parameter Settings on page 6-62 in advance, because the function uses these
settings to estimate the magnetic pole position of the PM motor.
• Set the PM Motor Starting Method Selection (H123) to 01 (Initial pole position estimation enabled).
• The PM motor initial pole position estimation function causes the inverter to output a high-frequency
detection signal to estimate the magnetic pole position. This means that the estimated position is
more accurate as the values set in the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation 0V Waiting Times
(H131)/PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation Detection Waiting Times (H132) or in the PM Motor
Initial Pole Position Estimation Detection Times (H133) is larger.
However, the motor staring time becomes longer in proportion to the set PM Motor Initial Pole Posi-
tion Estimation 0V Waiting Times.

• If the accuracy of the estimated position remains low and the motor still rotates during startup even
after you increase the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation 0V Waiting Times (H131)/PM Motor
Initial Pole Position Estimation Detection Waiting Times (H132), increase the PM Initial Pole Position
Estimation Voltage Gain (H134) value to raise the voltage level of the detection signal.
• Depending on the phenomenon during startup, refer to the following table to adjust necessary motor
parameters.
Adjust-
Phenomenon Adjustment method ment item
Decrease the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation 0V Wait-
ing Times value.
H131
Decreasing the value too much may cause the motor to rotate
excessively for positioning or stall.
Decrease the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation Detec-
Initial pole position estimation tion Waiting Times value.
H132
time is too long. Decreasing the value too much may cause the motor to rotate
Decrease the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation Detec-
6-8 PM Motor Mode

tion Times value.
H133
Increase the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation 0V Wait-
H131
ing Times value.
Increase the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation Detection
H132
Waiting Times value.
Motor rotates excessively for
Increase the PM Motor Initial Pole Position Estimation Detection
positioning.
Times value.
H133 6
Gradually increase the PM Initial Pole Position Estimation Volt-
age Gain value. H134

Increasing the value too much may cause an overcurrent trip.
Gradually increase the PM Initial Pole Position Estimation Volt-
age Gain value.
An overcurrent trip occurs. H134

• Although high-tone sound occurs during startup when the PM Motor Starting Method Selec-
tion (H123) is set to 01 (Initial pole position estimation enabled), it is not a fault.
• When the PM Motor Starting Method Selection (H123) is set to 01 (Initial pole position esti-
mation enabled), start the inverter with the motor stopped.
Starting the inverter with the motor rotation may cause the motor to rotate excessively for
positioning or stall.
• For the DC injection braking power during magnetic pole positioning, if the PM Motor Starting
Current (H117) and DC Injection Braking Power (A057) values are different, then use the
larger value.
• For the DC injection braking time during magnetic pole positioning, use the sum of the PM
Motor Starting Time (H118) and Startup DC Injection Braking Time (A058) values. The upper
limit is 60 seconds.

Other Functions
This section describes the details of functions not described in Section 5 or Section 6.
7-1 Monitor Mode ..................................................................................................... 7-4

7-1-1 Output Frequency Monitor [d001] ........................................................................ 7-4
7-1-2 Output Current Monitor [d002] ............................................................................. 7-4
7-1-3 RUN Direction Monitor [d003].............................................................................. 7-5
7-1-4 PID Feedback Value Monitor [d004] .................................................................... 7-5
7-1-5 Multi-function Input Monitor [d005] ...................................................................... 7-5
7-1-6 Multi-function Output Monitor [d006].................................................................... 7-6
7-1-7 Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007].......................................... 7-6
7-1-8 Real Frequency Monitor [d008] ........................................................................... 7-7 7
7-1-9 Torque Reference Monitor [d009] ........................................................................ 7-7
7-1-10 Torque Bias Monitor [d010] ................................................................................. 7-8
7-1-11 Output Torque Monitor [d012].............................................................................. 7-8
7-1-12 Output Voltage Monitor [d013] ............................................................................. 7-8
7-1-13 Input Power Monitor [d014] ................................................................................. 7-9
7-1-14 Integrated Power Monitor [d015] ......................................................................... 7-9
7-1-15 Total RUN Time Monitor [d016] ......................................................................... 7-10
7-1-16 Total Power ON Time Monitor [d017]................................................................. 7-10
7-1-17 Fin Temperature Monitor [d018] ........................................................................ 7-10
7-1-18 Life Assessment Monitor [d022] ........................................................................ 7-11
7-1-19 Program Counter (DriveProgramming) [d023]................................................... 7-11
7-1-20 Program Number Monitor (DriveProgramming) [d024] ...................................... 7-11
7-1-21 User Monitor 0 to 2 (DriveProgramming) [d025 to d027] ................................... 7-12
7-1-22 Position Command Monitor [d029] .................................................................... 7-12
7-1-23 Current Position Monitor [d030]......................................................................... 7-12
7-1-24 Dual User Monitor [d050] .................................................................................. 7-13
7-1-25 Inverter Mode Monitor [d060] ............................................................................ 7-13
7-1-26 Frequency Reference Source Monitor [d062] .................................................... 7-14
7-1-27 Run Command Source Monitor [d063] .............................................................. 7-14
7-1-28 Fault Counter [d080] ......................................................................................... 7-14
7-1-29 Fault Monitor 1 to 6 [d081 to 086]...................................................................... 7-15
7-1-30 Warning Monitor [d090] ..................................................................................... 7-15
7-1-31 DC Voltage Monitor [d102] ................................................................................ 7-15
7-1-32 Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor [d103] ............................................... 7-16

7 Other Functions
7-1-33 Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor [d104] ................................................... 7-16

7-1-34 Analog Voltage Input O Monitor [d130] ..............................................................7-16
7-1-35 Analog Current Input OI Monitor [d131] ............................................................ 7-16
7-1-36 Pulse Train Input EA Monitor [d133] ................................................................. 7-17
7-1-37 PID Deviation [d153]......................................................................................... 7-17
7-1-38 PID Output Monitor [d155] .................................................................................7-17
7-2 Multi-function Input/Output Functions ........................................................... 7-18
7-2-1 Multi-function Input Selection............................................................................ 7-18
7-2-2 Multi-function Output Selection ......................................................................... 7-20
7-3 Analog I/O Settings .......................................................................................... 7-22
7-3-1 Analog Input (O, OI) .......................................................................................... 7-22
7-3-2 Analog Input Filter ............................................................................................ 7-24
7-3-3 Analog Command Hold Function (AHD) ........................................................... 7-24
7-3-4 Analog Input Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-25
7-3-5 Analog Input Start/End Function Settings ......................................................... 7-25
7-3-6 Terminal EO (Pulse/PWM Output) .................................................................... 7-27
7-3-7 Terminal AM (Analog Output)............................................................................ 7-29
7-4 Inverter Control Settings ................................................................................. 7-31
7-4-1 Carrier Frequency............................................................................................. 7-31
7-4-2 Automatic Carrier Reduction ..............................................................................7-32
7-4-3 2nd Control Function (SET) .............................................................................. 7-33
7-5 Other Operation Functions ............................................................................. 7-35
7-5-1 Starting Frequency ............................................................................................7-35
7-5-2 Reduced Voltage Startup Selection ...................................................................7-36
7-5-3 Frequency Jump Function ................................................................................ 7-36
7-5-4 Acceleration/Deceleration Stop Function .......................................................... 7-37
7-5-5 RUN Direction Limit Selection .......................................................................... 7-38
7-5-6 Permission of RUN Command ...........................................................................7-38
7-5-7 Frequency Calculation Function ....................................................................... 7-39
7-5-8 Frequency Addition Function ............................................................................ 7-39
7-5-9 Remote Operation Function (UP/DWN) ............................................................ 7-40
7-5-10 Output Voltage Gain ..........................................................................................7-41
7-5-11 AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) Function ................................................... 7-42
7-5-12 PID Function..................................................................................................... 7-44
7-5-13 Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function ................................................... 7-50
7-5-14 Commercial Switching (CS) .............................................................................. 7-50
7-5-15 Stabilization Parameter......................................................................................7-52
7-5-16 Pulse Train Frequency Input..............................................................................7-52
7-5-17 LAD Cancel Function........................................................................................ 7-53
7-6 Digital Operator and Operation Functions .................................................... 7-54
7-6-1 Soft Lock Function (SFT) ...................................................................................7-54
7-6-2 Forced Operator Function (OPE) ......................................................................7-55
7-6-3 Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM) ............................................................ 7-55
7-6-4 Operation Selection at External Operator Disconnection .................................. 7-56
7-6-5 Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen after Power-on) ..................................... 7-56
7-6-6 Initial Screen Automatic Return Function .......................................................... 7-56
7-6-7 Inverter Display on Operator Connection.......................................................... 7-57
7-6-8 Display Fixed (DISP) .........................................................................................7-57
7-6-9 Password Function ........................................................................................... 7-57
7-6-10 User Parameter Setting Function...................................................................... 7-60
7-6-11 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function ..................................................... 7-60
7-6-12 Jog Dial Sensitivity............................................................................................ 7-61
7-7 Restart Functions............................................................................................. 7-62

7 Other Functions
7-7-1 Frequency Pull-in Restart ..................................................................................7-62

7-7-2 Restart during Power Interruption, Undervoltage/Overvoltage, Overcurrent . 7-64
7-7-3 Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function (USP) ........................................7-68
7-7-4 Deceleration Stop on Power Interruption Function ............................................7-69
7-8 Functions Related to Protection, Warning, and Various Output Signals 7-73
7-8-1 Free-electronic Thermal Function......................................................................7-73
7-8-2 Motor Electronic Thermal Function ....................................................................7-74
7-8-3 Electronic Thermal Warning ..............................................................................7-77
7-8-4 Overload Limit/Overload Warning .....................................................................7-78
7-8-5 Overcurrent Suppression Function ....................................................................7-81
7-8-6 External Trip (EXT)............................................................................................7-81
7-8-7 Thermistor Trip Function ................................................................................... 7-82
7-8-8 Signal during RUN (RUN) ................................................................................. 7-82
7-8-9 Frequency Arrival Signal (FA2 to FA5)...............................................................7-83
7-8-10 RUN Time/Power ON Time Over (RNT/ONT)....................................................7-84
7-8-11 Logic Operation Output Signal (LOG1 to LOG3) ...............................................7-85
7-8-12 Capacitor Life Warning Signal (WAC) ............................................................... 7-86
7-8-13 Cooling Fan Operation ......................................................................................7-86
7-8-14 Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal (WAF) ............................................................7-87
7-8-15 Communication Disconnection Detection Signal (NDc) .....................................7-87
7-8-16 Starting Contact Signal (FR) ............................................................................. 7-88
7-8-17 Cooling Fin Overheat Warning (OHF) ............................................................... 7-88
7-8-18 Low Current Signal (LOC) .................................................................................7-89
7-8-19 Fatal Fault Signal (MJA) ....................................................................................7-89
7-8-20 Window Comparator (WCO/WCOI) (Disconnection Detection ODc/OIDc) . 7-90
7-8-21 Frequency Reference Selection Status Signal (FREF)......................................7-91
7-8-22 RUN Command Status Signal (REF) ................................................................7-91
7-8-23 2nd Control Selection Signal (SETM) ................................................................7-92
7-8-24 Ground Fault Detection Selection ......................................................................7-92
7-9 DC Injection Braking Function .......................................................................7-93
7
7-9-1 DC Injection Braking (DB) .................................................................................7-93
7-10 Safety Function ................................................................................................7-99
7-10-1 Overview of Safety Function .............................................................................7-99
7-10-2 Safety Function Settings .................................................................................7-102
7-10-3 Wiring and Usage of the Safety Function ........................................................7-103
7-10-4 Periodic Inspection ..........................................................................................7-104
7-11 Option/Applied Functions (Group P)............................................................7-105
7-11-1 Operation Selection on Option Error ...............................................................7-105
7-11-2 DriveProgramming Function Parameters ........................................................ 7-105

7 Other Functions
7-1 Monitor Mode

This section describes the output frequency, fault monitor during trip, and other monitor functions of the
inverter.
7-1-1 Output Frequency Monitor [d001]

Use this function to display the output frequency of the inverter. The value is 0.00 when the inverter is
stopped.
The monitor display LED “Hz” is lit while the value of d001 is displayed.
Parameter Default
No. data
Output Frequency
d001 0.00 to 590.00 − Hz
Monitor
00: Disabled
(Frequency cannot be changed in
d001/d007 Data Set- d001/d007)
b163 00 −
ting Selection 01: Enabled
(Frequency can be changed in
d001/d007)
Related functions A001, A201, F001, d007
• When the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) is set to 02 (Digital Operator:
F001), if the d001/d007 Data Setting Selection (b163) is set to 01 (Enabled), you can change
the Output Frequency Monitor (d001) by the Jog dial only during operation.
• The Output Frequency Monitor (d001) value is reflected on the Output Frequency Set-
ting/Monitor (F001) setting. The value is stored in EEPROM when you press the Enter key.
• Because the inverter updates the F001 value while displaying d001, the input value may not
be displayed immediately depending on the acceleration/deceleration time.
• The monitor value cannot be changed while the PID function is activated/stopped.
• In the individual input mode, it is not possible to change the frequency by pressing and hold-
ing the Enter key.
7-1-2 Output Current Monitor [d002]

Use this function to display the output current value of the inverter. The value is 0.00 when the inverter
is stopped.
The monitor display LED “A” is lit while the value of d002 is displayed.
Parameter Default
No. data
d002 Output Current Monitor 0.00 to 655.35 − A

7 Other Functions
7-1-3 RUN Direction Monitor [d003]

Use this function to display the RUN direction of the inverter.
The RUN LED is lit during inverter operation (forward/reverse RUN).
Parameter Default
No. data
F : Forward
d003 RUN Direction Monitor o : Stop − −
r : Reverse
Generally, the forward rotation is defined as the direction in which the motor wired in direct UVW phase
sequence to the inverter rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the shaft. This is corresponding to
European motor convention. In other parts of the world, motor convention is clockwise.
Forward
7-1-4 PID Feedback Value Monitor [d004]

Use this function to monitor the PID feedback value when the PID Selection (A071) is set to 01
(Enabled) or 02 (Reverse output enabled).
7-1 Monitor Mode

The monitor value is displayed in units of percentage as 100% of the 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency
(A004/A204) and can be converted by setting the PID Scale (A075) as follows.
d004 = Feedback value [%]  PID Scale (A075)
Parameter Default
No. data
PID Feedback Value 0.00 to 9999.00
d004 − −
Monitor (Displayed in increments of 0.01)*1
A075 PID Scale 0.01 to 99.99 (Set in increments of 0.01) 1.00 time 7
7-1-3 RUN Direction Monitor [d003]

7-1-5 Multi-function Input Monitor [d005]

Use this function to display the input status of each multi-function input terminal, based on whether the
corresponding 7-segment LED is lit or not lit.
The terminal for which the built-in CPU detected the input is indicated as ON. Note that this is indepen-
dent of the NO/NC contact setting for each multi-function input terminal.
(Example) Multi-function input terminals 7, 2, and 1 : ON
Multi-function input terminals 6, 5, 4, and 3 : OFF
Display
ON : Lit
OFF : Not lit
EA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(OFF) (ON) (OFF)(OFF)(OFF)(OFF)(ON) (ON)
• When the input terminal response time function is enabled, the inverter cannot display the input sta-
tus immediately. (Refer to 5-9-3 Input Terminal Response Time on page 5-47.)
• The terminal 5 remains OFF and cannot be monitored when Multi-function Input 5 Selection
(C005) is allocated to 19 (TH: PTC thermistor thermal protection).

7 Other Functions
• When the EDM function selector switch is ON, 3 and 4 display the input status of GS1 and GS2,
respectively. Although the functions set for Multi-function Input 3 Selection (C003) and
Multi-function Input 4 Selection (C004) will work, the terminals 3 and 4 cannot be monitored.
7-1-6 Multi-function Output Monitor [d006]

Use this function to display the output status of each multi-function output terminal, based on whether
the corresponding 7-segment LED is lit or not lit.
Each LED shows the output status detected by the built-in CPU. Note that this is independent of the
NO/NC contact setting for each multi-function output terminal.
(Example) Multi-function output terminals 12 and 11 : ON
Relay output terminal AL : OFF
Display
ON : Lit
OFF : Not lit
AL 12 11
(OFF)(ON) (ON)
7-1-7 Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007]

Use this function to display the output frequency value that is converted based on the Frequency Con-
version Coefficient (b086).
This parameter is useful when you want to view the output frequency in a different display unit, for
example, to monitor the motor rotation speed.
d007 = Output Frequency Monitor (d001)  Frequency Conversion Coefficient (b086)

(Example) To monitor the rotation speed of a 4-pole motor:
Motor rotation speed N [min−1] = (120  f [Hz]) / P [pole] = f [Hz]  30
Therefore, if b086 = 30.0, then, at 60 Hz, the value of this parameter is 60  30.0 = 1800.
Parameter Default
No. data
Output Frequency
d007 Monitor (After 0.00 to 58994.10*1 − −
Conversion)
0.01 to 99.99
Frequency Conversion
b086 Set in increments of 0.01 1.00 −
Coefficient
(d007 = d001  b086)
00: Disabled
(Frequency cannot be changed in
d001/d007 Data d001/d007)
b163 00 −
Setting Selection 01: Enabled
(Frequency can be changed in
d001/d007)

7 Other Functions
• When the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) is set to 02 (Digital Operator:
F001), if the d001/d007 Data Setting Selection (b163) is set to 01 (Enabled), you can change
the Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) (d007) by the Jog dial only during
operation.
• The Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) (d007) value is reflected on the Output
Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) setting. The value is stored in EEPROM when you press
the Enter key.
• Because the inverter updates the F001 value while displaying d007, the input value may not
be displayed immediately depending on the acceleration/deceleration time.
• The monitor value cannot be changed while the PID function is activated/stopped.
• In the individual input mode, it is not possible to change the frequency by pressing and hold-
ing the Enter key.
7-1-8 Real Frequency Monitor [d008]

Use this function to display the real frequency of the motor when you perform V/f control with speed
feedback or simplified position control.
Set the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) to 01 (Feedback pulse) to enable the function.
The Real Frequency Monitor (d008) is available only for the 1st control and independent of the 1st Con-
7-1 Monitor Mode

trol Method (A044) setting.
Parameter Default
No. data
Real Frequency
d008 −590.00 to −590.00 − Hz
Monitor
Related functions P011, H004, H204
7
7-1-8 Real Frequency Monitor [d008]

Set the Number of Encoder Pulses (P011) and the 1st Motor Pole Number (H004) correctly.
For the feedback signal setting and wiring instructions, refer to 6-5 V/f Control with Speed
Feedback on page 6-18 or 6-7 Simple Position Control on page 6-28.
7-1-9 Torque Reference Monitor [d009]

Use this function to display the torque reference value that is input during operation under sensorless
vector control.
To use torque control, set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 52 (ATR) and turn
ON the terminal ATR.
For details on torque control, refer to 6-4 Torque Control on page 6-16.
The torque reference monitor function estimates the torque value equivalent to the rated current of the
inverter as 100%.
Rated motor torque ratio = Monitor value  Rated output current of inverter / Rated motor current
Parameter Default
No. data
Torque Reference
d009 0. to 200. − %
Monitor
Related functions A044, A244, C001 to C007, P033, P034

7 Other Functions
7-1-10 Torque Bias Monitor [d010]

Use this function to display the current torque bias value under sensorless vector control.
The torque bias monitor function estimates the torque value equivalent to the rated current of the
inverter as 100%.
For details on the torque bias monitor function, refer to 6-4-2 Torque Bias Function Settings on page
6-17.
Parameter Default
No. data
d010 Torque Bias Monitor −200. to 200. − %
Related functions A044, A244, P036, P037, P038
7-1-11 Output Torque Monitor [d012]

Use this function to display the estimated output torque value of the inverter.
The value is displayed only when sensorless vector control is selected.
The output torque monitor function estimates the torque value equivalent to the rated current of the
inverter as 100%.
Parameter Default
No. data
d012 Output Torque Monitor −200. to 200. − %
Note During forward RUN, the value is positive for Power Running and negative for Regeneration. During
reverse RUN, the value is negative for Power Running and positive for Regeneration.
7-1-12 Output Voltage Monitor [d013]

Use this function to display the output voltage of the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
Output Voltage
d013 0.0 to 600.0 − V
Monitor

Set the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282) correctly. Otherwise, the correct
value may not be displayed.

7 Other Functions
7-1-13 Input Power Monitor [d014]

Use this function to display the input power (instantaneous value) of the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
d014 Input Power Monitor 0.0 to 100.0 − kW
7-1-14 Integrated Power Monitor [d015]

Use this function to display the integrated power of the inverter.
The monitor value can be converted and displayed with a different scale factor by setting the Integrated
Power Display Scale (b079).
d015 = Actual integrated power / Integrated Power Display Scale (b079)

(Example) If the monitor value is 1000 when b079 is set to 100, the actual integral power is
100,000 [kWh].
To clear the integrated power value, set the Integrated Power Clear (b078) to 01.
It is also possible to clear the integrated power value via terminal input by setting one of the Multi-func-
7-1 Monitor Mode

tion Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 53 (KHC: Integrated power clear).
If the Integrated Power Display Scale (b079) is set to 1000, an integrate power value of up to
1,000,000,000 [kWh] can be displayed.
This parameter value will be stored to the inverter’s EEPROM when the power supply is shut off.
Parameter Default
No. data
d015 Integrated Power Monitor 0.0 to 1000000.0*1 − −
00: Clear disabled
7-1-13 Input Power Monitor [d014]

01: Clear with the Enter key
b078 Integrated Power Clear 00 −
(Data is reset from 01 to 00 after exe-
cution.)
Integrated Power Display
b079 1. to 1000. 1. −
Scale
C001 to Multi-function Input S1 to 7
C007 53: KHC (Integrated power clear) − −
7 Selection

7 Other Functions
7-1-15 Total RUN Time Monitor [d016]

Use this function to display the total RUN time of the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
d016 Total RUN Time Monitor 1000000.*1 − h
Note Executing initialization does not clear this data.
7-1-16 Total Power ON Time Monitor [d017]

Use this function to display the total power ON time of the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
Total Power ON Time
d017 1000000.*1 − h
Monitor
Note Executing initialization does not clear this data.
7-1-17 Fin Temperature Monitor [d018]

Use this function to display the temperature of the cooling fin that is built into the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
Fin Temperature
d018 −20.0 to 150.0 − °C
Monitor

7 Other Functions
7-1-18 Life Assessment Monitor [d022]

Use this function to display the life assessment status based on whether the corresponding 7-segment
LED is lit or not lit. This function is intended for the following two items.
For details on the life assessment, refer to 7-8-14 Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal (WAF) on page 7-87
or 7-8-12 Capacitor Life Warning Signal (WAC) on page 7-86.
1: Life expectancy of main circuit board capacitor
2: Life expectancy of cooling fan
Display
Life assessment : Lit
Normal : Not lit
2 1
• The inverter calculates the capacitor life expectancy once in every 10 minutes. If the power supply is
turned on/off more frequently than this cycle, the inverter cannot evaluate the capacitor life successfully.
• For 3-phase 200-V class models with a capacity of 0.4 kW or lower and single-phase 200-V class
models with a capacity of 0.75 kW or lower, the life assessment monitor function for the cooling fan
does not work with the LED lit on the normal status because these models have no cooling fan.
7-1 Monitor Mode

7-1-19 Program Counter (DriveProgramming) [d023]
Use this function to display the line number of the program that is executed while a DriveProgramming
function is active.
For details on the DriveProgramming functions, refer to the “MX2/RX-series Drive Programming User’s
Manual (Cat. No. I580)”.
Parameter
Function name Data
Default
Unit
7
No. data
d023 Program Counter 1 to 1024 − −
7-1-18 Life Assessment Monitor [d022]

7-1-20 Program Number Monitor (DriveProgramming) [d024]
Use this function to display the program number that you specified when transferring a DriveProgram-
ming program.
Parameter Default
No. data
Program Number
d024 0 to 9999 − −
Monitor

7 Other Functions
7-1-21 User Monitor 0 to 2 (DriveProgramming) [d025 to d027]

These monitor functions correspond to the DriveProgramming function variables UMon(0) to UMon(2).
Use them to display any data in your program.
Parameter Default
No. data
d025 User Monitor 0 −2147483648 to 2147483647*1
d026 User Monitor 1
Displays DriveProgramming function vari-
− −
ables UMon(0) to UMon(2).
d027 User Monitor 2
7-1-22 Position Command Monitor [d029]

Use this function to display the position command value in the simple position control mode.
When the Simple Position Control Selection (P012) is set to 02 (Simple position control enabled), it
displays the position command monitor value that is currently set.
For details on simple position control, refer to 6-7 Simple Position Control on page 6-28.
Parameter Default
No. data
−268435455 to 268435455
Position Command
d029 (1 multiplication)*1 − pulse
Monitor
7-1-23 Current Position Monitor [d030]

Use this function to monitor the current position under simple position control.
The Current Position Monitor value is cleared to zero when the power supply is turned on.
For details on simple position control, refer to 6-7 Simple Position Control on page 6-28.
Setting the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) to 01 (Feedback pulse) enables the current position
monitor function even when simple position control is disabled.
This function may be used in conjunction with the position store at power off function, or the function of
47 (PCLR: Current position clear) or 91 (PSET: Preset position) set in the Multi-function Input 1 to 7
Selection (C001 to C007).
For details on these functions, refer to 6-7-4 Origin Search Function, Current Position Preset, Position
Data Storage at Power Shutoff on page 6-40.
Parameter Default
No. data
−268435455 to 268435455
Current Position
d030 (1 multiplication)*1 − pulse
Monitor

7 Other Functions
7-1-24 Dual User Monitor [d050]

Use this function to display two set monitor items by switching between them with the Jog dial.
In b160 and b161, set the parameter numbers whose data you want to monitor.
(Example) To monitor the d001 data, set b160 or b161 to 001.
Parameter Default
No. data
Displays two monitor items set in b160 and
d050 Dual User Monitor − −
b161.
b160 User Monitor Selection 1 001 to 030 001
−
b161 User Monitor Selection 2 (Corresponding to d001 to d030) 002
Enter
Monitor item 1 data
selected in b160
JOG JOG
Monitor item 2 data

selected in b161
7-1 Monitor Mode

Even if you select d001 or d007 in b160/b161 and then set the d001/d007 Data Setting Selec-
tion (b163) to 01 (Enabled), you cannot switch the data from d050 via key operation.
7
7-1-25 Inverter Mode Monitor [d060]
7-1-24 Dual User Monitor [d050]

Use this function to display the current inverter mode.
The Inverter mode setting can be changed by Heavy load/Light Load Selection (b049) and Inverter
Mode Selection (b171). For details on each mode, refer to 5-2-2 Heavy load/Light Load Selection on
page 5-11 and 6-8 PM Motor Mode on page 6-54.
Parameter Default
No. data
I-C: IM motor heavy load mode
I-V: IM motor light load
d060 Inverter Mode Monitor − −
H-I: IM motor high-frequency mode
P: PM motor mode
Related functions b049, b171

7 Other Functions
7-1-26 Frequency Reference Source Monitor [d062]

Set the frequency reference in the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201).
Alternatively, you can switch the frequency reference via multi-function input or from a communications
unit.
The Frequency Reference Source Monitor displays the frequency reference source enabled for the
inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
1 to 15: Multi-step speed reference 1 to 15
16: Jogging frequency
19: Option
Frequency Reference 21: Volume (3G3AX-OP01)
d062 − −
Source Monitor 22: Pulse train frequency
25: Analog voltage input [O]
26: Analog current input [OI]
27: Analog Input [O] + [OI]
7-1-27 Run Command Source Monitor [d063]

Set the RUN command in the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202).
Alternatively, you can switch the RUN command via multi-function input or from a communications unit.
The Run Command Source Monitor displays the RUN command source enabled for the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
Run Command Source 2: Digital Operator
d063 − −
Monitor 3: Modbus communication
4: Option
7-1-28 Fault Counter [d080]

Use this function to display the number of inverter trips.
This count value will be saved to the inverter’s EEPROM when the power supply is turned OFF.
Parameter Default
No. data
d080 Fault Counter 0. to 65535. − time

7 Other Functions
7-1-29 Fault Monitor 1 to 6 [d081 to 086]

Use these functions to display the fault history of the last six faults. This count value will be stored to the
inverter’s EEPROM when the power supply is turned OFF.
The latest fault history is displayed in the Fault Monitor 1 (d081).
⚫ Displayed items
(1) Trip fault factor (Alarm code): Displays one of E01 to E99.
Refer to 10-1-2 Alarm Code List on page 10-4.
(2) Output frequency at trip [Hz]
(3) Output current at trip [A]
The monitor value may become zero when the inverter is in a stop state (E**.1)
(4) DC voltage between P and N in main circuit at trip [V]
The monitor value may become zero if a ground-fault trip occurs when the power supply is
turned on.
(5) Total RUN time of inverter before trip [h]
(6) Total power ON time of inverter before trip [h]
(1) Trip factor (2) Frequency (3) Current (4) Main circuit (5) Total (6) Total power
DC voltage RUN time ON time
7-1 Monitor Mode

JOG JOG JOG JOG JOG
Enter
JOG JOG JOG JOG JOG
Displays if there is no trip.

7
7-1-30 Warning Monitor [d090]
7-1-29 Fault Monitor 1 to 6 [d081 to 086]

Use this function to display the warning code if any inconsistency is found among the set data.
The program LED indicator (PRG) blinks during the warning, until the inconsistent data is corrected.
For details on the warning display, refer to 10-1-4 Warning Display on page 10-11.
7-1-31 DC Voltage Monitor [d102]

Use this function to display the main circuit DC voltage of the inverter (main circuit DC voltage between
the P/+ and N/- terminals of the inverter.)
During operation, the monitor value changes according to the actual main circuit DC voltage of the
inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
d102 DC Voltage Monitor 0.0 to 1000.0 − V

7 Other Functions
7-1-32 Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor [d103]

Use this function to display the regenerative braking load rate. If this monitor value exceeds the value
set in the Usage Rate of Regenerative Braking (b090), the inverter will trip with the alarm code E06
(Braking resistor overload protection).
Parameter Default
No. data
d103 0.0 to 100.0 − %
Load Rate Monitor
Related functions b090
7-1-33 Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor [d104]

Use this function to display the electronic thermal load rate. If this monitor value exceeds 100%, the
inverter will trip with the alarm code E05 (Overload protection).
If the Electronic Thermal Load Rate Memory Selection at Power-off (b914) is set to 01 (Enabled), the
value will be stored in EEPROM when the power supply is turned OFF.
Parameter Default
No. data
Electronic Thermal Load Rate
d104 0.0 to 100.0 − %
Monitor
7-1-34 Analog Voltage Input O Monitor [d130]

Use this function to monitor the state of the analog voltage that is input to the analog voltage reference
terminal O for frequency reference input.
It displays the maximum input value for the terminal O (equivalent to 10.9 V) as 1023 bits.
Parameter Default
No. data
d130 Analog Voltage Input O Monitor 0 to 1023 − −
7-1-35 Analog Current Input OI Monitor [d131]

Use this function to monitor the state of the analog current that is input to the analog current reference
terminal OI for frequency reference input.
It displays the maximum input value for the terminal OI (equivalent to 23.3 mA) as 1023 bits.
Parameter Default
No. data
d131 Analog Current Input OI Monitor 0 to 1023 − −

7 Other Functions
7-1-36 Pulse Train Input EA Monitor [d133]

Use this function to display the pulse train command or feedback value that is input to the pulse train
input terminal EA in units of percentage as 100% of the 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency (A004/A204).
This function is enabled independently of the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) setting.
In the Pulse Train Frequency Scale (P055), set the pulse train command value relative to the maximum
frequency.
Parameter Default
No. data
d133 Pulse Train Input EA Monitor 0.00 to 100.00 − %
Related functions P003, P055
7-1-37 PID Deviation [d153]

Use this function to display the deviation in PID control when the PID Selection (A071) is set to 01
(Enabled) or 02 (Reverse output enabled). The monitor value is displayed in units of percentage as
100% of the 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency (A004/A204).
It can be converted by setting the PID Scale (A075) as follows.
d153 = PID deviation value × PID Scale (A075)
7-1 Monitor Mode

Parameter Default
No. data
d153 PID Deviation −9999.00 to 9999.00*1 − %
Related functions A071, A004, A204, A075
7
7-1-38 PID Output Monitor [d155]
7-1-36 Pulse Train Input EA Monitor [d133]

Use this function to display the operation output of PID control operation when the PID Selection (A071)
is set to 01 (Enabled) or 02 (Reverse output enabled). The monitor value is displayed in units of per-
centage as 100% of the 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency (A004/A204).
Parameter Default
No. data
d155 PID Output Monitor −100.00 to 100.00 − %
Related functions A071, A004, A204

7 Other Functions
7-2 Multi-function Input/Output Functions

This section describes the I/O signal settings for this inverter.

You can use the function set by allocating the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to the
functions listed below.
The multi-function input terminals 1 to 7 can be set to either NO contact or NC contact individually in the
Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C011 to C017).
Do not allocate the same function to more than one multi-function input terminal. If you allocate the
same function to more than one multi-function input terminal by mistake, the function will be enabled for
the last allocated terminal only, and the previously allocated terminals are reset to 255 (no).
After allocating functions to the terminals 1 to 7, check that the set function is stored.
Parameter Reference
Data Description Reference item
No. page
00 FW: Forward command RUN Command Selection
P. 5-21
RV: Reverse command Forward RUN Command (FW) and P. 5-47
01
Reverse RUN Command (RV)
CF1: Multi-step speed setting
02
binary 1
03
binary 2
Multi-step Speed Operation Function P. 5-48
04
binary 3
05
binary 4
06 JG: Jogging Jogging P. 5-51
07 DB: External DC injection braking DC Injection Braking P. 7-93
08 SET: 2nd control 2nd Control Function P. 7-33
2CH: 2-step acceleration/ 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function P. 5-36
09
C001 to deceleration 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration P. 5-52
C007 11 FRS: Free-run stop Free-run Stop P. 5-38
12 EXT: External trip External Trip P. 7-81
USP: Power recovery restart pre- Power Recovery Restart Prevention
13 P. 7-68
vention function Function
14 CS: Commercial switching Commercial Switching P. 7-50
SFT: Soft lock Soft Lock (Control circuit terminal
15 P. 7-54
block)
AT: Analog input switching Frequency Reference Settings P. 5-23
16
Analog input P. 7-22
RS: Reset Reset P. 5-42
18
Reset (RS) P. 5-52
TH: PTC thermistor thermal pro- Thermistor Trip Function (Can be set
19 P. 7-82
tection for C005 only)
20 STA: 3-wire start
21 STP: 3-wire stop 3-wire input function P. 5-53
22 F/R: 3-wire forward/reverse

7 Other Functions
Parameter Reference
No. page
23 PID: PID disabled
PID Function P. 7-44
24 PIDC: PID integral reset
27 UP: Remote operation accelerated
28 DWN: Remote operation decelerated Remote Operation Function P. 7-40
29 UDC: Remote operation data clear
31 OPE: Forced operator function Forced Operator Function P. 7-55
35 SF4: Multi-step speed setting bit 4 Multi-step Speed Operation Function P. 5-48

39 OLR: Overload limit switching Overload Limit/Overload Warning P. 7-78
40 TL: Torque limit enabled
41 TRQ1: Torque limit switching 1 Torque Limit Function Settings P. 6-12
42 TRQ2: Torque limit switching 2
44 BOK: Brake confirmation Brake Control Function Settings P. 6-25
46 LAC: LAD cancel Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings P. 5-32
47 PCLR: Current position clear Simple Position Control Function P. 6-28
50 ADD: Set frequency A145 addition Frequency Addition Function P. 7-39
51 F-TM: Forced terminal block Forced Terminal Block Function P. 7-55
52 ATR: Torque reference input permission Torque Control P. 6-16
53 KHC: Integrated power clear Integrated Power Monitor P. 7-9
C001 to
C007 56 MI1: General-purpose input 1
57 MI2: General-purpose input 2
59 MI4: General-purpose input 4 DriveProgramming Function − 7

65 AHD: Analog command held Analog Command Hold Function P. 7-24
66 CP1: Position command selection 1
Simple Position Control Mode P. 6-28
69 ORL: Origin search limit signal
70 ORG: Origin search startup signal
73 SPD: Speed/Position switching
485: Start co-inverter communica-
81 Co-inverter Communication P. 8-31
tion
82 PRG: DriveProgramming start DriveProgramming −
83 HLD: Retain output frequency Acceleration/Deceleration Stop Function P. 7-37
84 ROK: Permission of RUN command Permission of RUN Command P. 7-38
Simple Position Control Function, V/f
85 EB: Rotation direction detection Control with Speed Feedback (Can P. 6-28
be set for C005 only)
86 DISP: Display fixed Display Fixed P. 7-57
91 PSET: Preset position Current Position Preset P. 6-40
255 no: No allocation − −

7 Other Functions

Use this function to allocate the functions listed below by setting the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selec-
tion (C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026). The multi-func-
tion output 11 and 12 terminals are for open-collector output and the multi-function relay output (AL1,
AL2) terminals are for relay output.
These output terminals can be set to either NO contact or NC contact in the Multi-function Output 11/12
Operation Selection (C031/C032), or the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Operation Selection
(C036) individually.
The default data of Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Function Selection (C026) is 05 (AL: Alarm
signal). Therefore, the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) Operation Selection (C036) is set to 01
(NC: NC contact) by default.
This manual describes each function with the Multi-function Output Operation Selection set to 00 (NO:
NO contact). Note that the operations of the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) are reversed.
Reference
page
00 RUN: Signal during RUN Signal during RUN P. 5-55
01 FA1: Constant speed arrival signal Constant Speed Arrival Signal P. 5-56
02 FA2: Set frequency exceeded signal Frequency Arrival Signal P. 7-83
03 OL: Overload warning Overload Limit/Overload Warning P. 7-80
04 OD: Excessive PID deviation PID Function P. 7-44
05 AL: Alarm signal Alarm Signal P. 5-56
06 FA3: Set-frequency only signal Frequency Arrival Signal P. 7-83
07 OTQ: Overtorque/Undertorque signal Overtorque/Undertorque P. 6-15
Power Interruption/Undervoltage or Overvolt-
09 UV: Signal during undervoltage P. 7-64
age/Overcurrent Restart
10 TRQ: Torque limit Torque Limit Function P. 6-12
11 RNT: RUN time over
RUN Time/Power ON Time Over P. 7-84
12 ONT: Power ON time over
13 THM: Electronic thermal warning Electronic Thermal Warning P. 7-77
19 BRK: Brake release
Brake Control Function P. 6-25
20 BER: Brake error
21 ZS: 0-Hz detection signal 0-Hz Detection Function P. 5-57
22 DSE: Excessive speed deviation
Simple Position Control P. 6-28
23 POK: Position ready
24 FA4: Set frequency exceeded signal 2
Frequency Arrival Signal P. 7-83
25 FA5: Set-frequency only signal 2
26 OL2: Overload warning 2 Overload Limit/Overload Warning P. 7-80
27 ODc: Analog O disconnection detection
Window Comparator P. 7-90
28 OIDc: Analog OI disconnection detection
31 FBV: PID feedback comparison signal PID Function P. 7-44
NDc: Communications disconnection Communication Disconnection Detection
32 P. 7-87
detection Signal
33 LOG1: Logic operation output 1
34 LOG2: Logic operation output 2 Logic Operation P. 7-85
35 LOG3: Logic operation output 3
39 WAC: Capacitor life warning signal Capacitor Life Warning Signal P. 7-86
40 WAF: Cooling fan life warning signal Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal P. 7-87
41 FR: Starting contact signal Starting Contact Signal P. 7-88
42 OHF: Cooling fin overheat warning Cooling Fin Overheat Warning P. 7-88
43 LOC: Low current signal Low Current Signal P. 7-89

7 Other Functions
Reference
page
44 MO1: General-purpose output 1
45 MO2: General-purpose output 2 DriveProgramming Function −
46 MO3: General-purpose output 3
50 IRDY: Operation ready Operation Ready P. 5-58
51 FWR: Forward run signal Forward run signal P. 5-58
52 RVR: Reverse run signal Reverse run signal P. 5-58
53 MJA: Fatal fault signal Fatal Fault Signal P. 7-89
54 WCO: Window comparator O
Window Comparator P. 7-90
55 WCOI: Window comparator OI
58 FREF: Frequency command source Frequency Reference Selection Status Signal P. 7-91
59 REF: RUN command operator RUN Command Status Signal P. 7-91
60 SETM: Motor 2 selection 2nd Control Selection Signal P. 7-92
Safety Function (Set via EDM function selec-
62 EDM: Safety device monitor P. 7-99

tor switch)
63 OPO: Option Do not set −
255 no: No allocation − −

7 Other Functions
7-3 Analog I/O Settings

This section describes the analog I/O signal settings for this inverter.
7-3-1 Analog Input (O, OI)

This inverter has two types of external analog input terminals.
Frequency reference (Analog voltage input) between terminals O and L : 0 to 10 V
This terminal also treats input via the variable resistor (volume) as voltage input to the
inverter.
Frequency reference (Analog current input) between terminals OI and L : 4 to 20 mA
For 0 to 20 mA, set A103 to 0%.
For analog input start/end settings, refer to 7-3-5 Analog Input Start/End Function Settings on page 7-25.
Note 1. By default, each analog input signal is adjusted to reach the maximum frequency at 9.8 V or 19.8 mA.
2. If an excessive current is applied to the terminal OI, an E26 (analog current input error) will occur.
The table below shows analog-input related functions. Set each function according to your application.
Parameter Default
Setting item Function name Data Unit
No. data
01: Control circuit terminal
Frequency 1st/2nd Frequency
A001/A201 block 02 −
reference*1 Reference Selection
(Analog input)
01: Enabled
A071 PID Selection 02: Enabled (Reverse out- 00 −
PID feedback
put enabled)
selection*2
PID Feedback 00: OI (Current)
A076 00 −
Selection 01: O (Voltage)
01: Enabled
A071 PID Selection 02: Enabled (Reverse out- 00 −
PID feedforward
put enabled)
selection*3
PID Feedforward 01: O (Voltage)
A079 00 −
Selection 02: OI (Current)
1st/2nd Frequency 10: Operation function
A001/A201 02 −
Reference Selection output
Calculation Frequency 02: Input O (Voltage)
A141 02 −
Selection 1
Calculation Frequency 03: Input OI (Current)
A142 Calculation 03 −
Selection 2
frequency
00: Addition (A141 + A142)
01: Subtraction (A141 −
A143 A142) 00 −
Operator Selection
02: Multiplication (A141 
A142)
b040 Torque limit*4 Torque Limit Selection 02: Analog voltage input 00 −

7 Other Functions
Parameter Default
Setting item Function name Data Unit
No. data
00: Terminal O
Torque Reference 10 V = 200%
P033 00 −
Input Selection 01: Terminal OI
Torque control 20 mA = 200%
52: ATR
C001 to Multi-function Input 1
C007 (Torque reference input − −
to 7 Selection
permission)
*1. This switches the frequency reference among the volume, current, and voltage based on the O/OI Selection
(A005) setting and the status of the multi-function input terminal allocated to 16 (AT: Analog input switching).
Here, volume represents the volume control (VR) on the optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01).
*2. Setting the PID Selection (A071) to Enabled causes the analog input selection setting in A076 to be allocated
to the PID feedback function. When the 1st Frequency Reference Selection (A001) is set to 01 (Control circuit
terminal block), the analog input setting other than that selected in A076 is used as the target frequency refer-
ence. In this case, the setting in A005 and the function allocated to the terminal AT (Analog input switching)
are disabled.
*3. In A079, you can set a target value, or have a setting that overlaps with the PID Feedback Selection value.
With an overlapping setting, the analog input is used for both the feedback and feedforward signals.
*4. This parameter can be set to 02 (Analog voltage input) only. The torque limit is 200% with an input of 10 V.

When the analog input is used as a frequency reference, switching between voltage (O) and current
(OI is performed) is performed as shown in the table below.
However, when none of the multi-function input terminals are set to 16 (AT: Analog input switching),
regardless of the A005 setting, the frequency reference value is the sum of the analog voltage input O
and analog current input OI values.
Parameter Function Default

Data Unit
No. name data
00: Switches between current and voltage based on ter- 7
minal AT (Analog input switching) status.
Terminal AT (Analog input switching) ON: Current
7-3-1 Analog Input (O, FI)

Terminal AT (Analog input switching) OFF: Voltage
02: Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.

Switches between voltage and VR based on terminal
O/OI AT (Analog input switching) status.
A005 00 −
Selection Terminal AT (Analog input switching) ON: VR
Terminal AT (Analog input switching) OFF: Voltage
03: Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.

Switches between current and VR based on terminal
AT (Analog input switching) status.
Terminal AT (Analog input switching) ON: VR
Terminal AT (Analog input switching) OFF: Current
Multi-function 16: AT (Analog input switching)
C001 to
C007 Input 1 to 7 − −
Selection
Note For details on frequency reference settings, refer to 5-5 Frequency Reference Settings on page 5-23.

7 Other Functions
7-3-2 Analog Input Filter

This function is effective for removing noise in the analog input circuit.
Use it to set an input filter for voltage or current input when using an external analog signal to input the
frequency reference.
However, increasing the set value results in a slow response. The filter time constant is 2 ms for a set
value of 1 to 30.
When set to 31., the parameter applies a filter time constant of 500 ms and a hysteresis of ±0.1 Hz.
Set a larger data value if stable operation cannot be secured because of noise etc.
Parameter Default
No. data
1. to 30.: Set value  2-ms filter
A016 Analog Input Filter 31.: Fixed to 50-ms filter 8. −
with ±0.1-Hz hysteresis*1
*1. When using the PID function, do not set the Analog Input Filter (A016) to 31 (500-ms filter with ±0.1-Hz hys-
teresis). Doing so may result in unstable operation.
7-3-3 Analog Command Hold Function (AHD)

Use this function to hold the frequency reference value via analog input.
Set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 65 (AHD: Analog command held). This
function causes the inverter to hold the result of analog input to the terminal AHD while it is ON.
While the terminal AHD is ON, you can use the UP/DWN function with the frequency reference held by
this function as a reference value. Setting the UP/DWN Storage Selection (C101) to 01 enables the
inverter to store the UP/DWN result.
For details on the UP/DWN function, refer to 7-5-9 Remote Operation Function (UP/DWN) on page
7-40.
If the power supply is turned on, or if the terminal Reset (18: RS) turns from ON to OFF, with the termi-
nal AHD ON, the last held data is available.
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1
C007 65: AHD (Analog command held) − −
to 7 Selection
Related functions C101
AHD input ON
Analog input
value
Frequency
reference
• If you switch from the 1st control to the 2nd control with the terminal AHD ON, the held analog input
value will remain as the frequency reference. To switch the control function, turn OFF the terminal
AHD and have the inverter hold the signal again.
• Frequent use of this function could shorten the life expectancy of the internal EEPROM device.

7 Other Functions
7-3-4 Analog Input Adjustment

You can change the analog input gain. Use this function to fine-tune the analog input signal.
For how to set the scale conversion, for example, from 0-to-10 V to 0-to-5 V, refer to 7-3-5 Analog Input
Start/End Function Settings on page 7-25.
By default, each analog input signal is adjusted to reach the maximum frequency at 9.8 V or 19.8 mA.
Parameter Default
No. data
0.0 to 200.0
C081 O Adjustment 100.0 %
Fine-tune the gain relative to the input voltage.
0.0 to 200.0
C082 OI Adjustment 100.0 %
Fine-tune the gain relative to the input current.

7-3-5 Analog Input Start/End Function Settings
Use these functions to configure the relationship between the analog input signal (O/OI) or the optional 7
Digital Operator’s volume control (VR) signal and the frequency reference.
• In the O/OI/VR Start Ratio (A013/A103/A163), set the minimum analog input value.
7-3-4 Analog Input Adjustment

• In the O/OI/VR Start Frequency (A011/A101/A161), set the output frequency for the analog input set
in the O/OI/VR Start Ratio.
• In the O/OI/VR End Ratio (A014/A104/A164), set the maximum analog input value.
• In the O/OI/VR End Frequency (A012/A102/A162), set the output frequency for the analog input set
in the O/OI/VR End Ratio.
• In the O/OI/VR Start Selection (A015/A105/A165), set the output frequency from 0 V to the minimum
analog input value set in the O/OI/VR Start Ratio.
• Setting the O/OI/VR Start Frequency (A011/A101/A161) and the O/OI/VR End Frequency
(A012/A102/A162) to 0.00 Hz disables the Start and End Frequency settings, which causes the ana-
log input function to work in the range of 0 Hz to the maximum frequency.
• With the default settings, this function works as follows.
Frequency reference (Analog voltage input)
between terminals O and L : 0 to 10 V (0 Hz to Maximum frequency)
Frequency reference (Analog current input)
between terminals OI and L : 4 to 20 mA (0 Hz to Maximum frequency)
VR (Volume control on optional Digital
Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01)) : Left end (0 Hz) to Right end (Maximum frequency)
• By default, each analog input signal is adjusted to reach the maximum frequency at 9.8 V or 19.8 mA.
• To input a voltage of 0 to 5 V, set A014 to 50% and use the default settings for A011 to A104.
• To input a voltage of 0 to 20 mA, set A103 to 0% and use the default settings for A101/A102/A104.

7 Other Functions
Parameter Default
No. data
0.00 to 590.00
A011/A101/
A161 O/OI/VR Start Frequency Set the frequency at which to start ana- 0.00 Hz
log input.
0.00 to 590.00
A012/A102/ O/OI/VR End Frequency 0.00 Hz
A162 Set the frequency at which to end ana-
log input.
0. to V/OI/VR end ratio
A013/A103/ Set the ratio of the start frequency to 0.
A163 O/OI/VR Start Ratio (OI: 20.) %
the external frequency reference of 0 to
10 V or 0 to 20 mA.
O/OI/VR Start Ratio to 100.
A014/A104/ Set the ratio of the end frequency to the
A164 O/OI/VR End Ratio 100. %
external frequency reference of 0 to
10 V or 0 to 20 mA.
00: Start frequency
(A011/A101/A161)
(Output frequency is
A015/A105/ A011/A101/A161 value for 0% to
A165 O/OI/VR Start Selection 01 −
A013/A103/A163)
01: 0 Hz
(Output frequency is 0 Hz for 0%
to A013/A103/A163.)
(Example 1) A015/A165 = 00 (Start frequency)

7 Other Functions
(Example 2) A015/A165 = 01 (0 Hz)
7-3-6 Terminal EO (Pulse/PWM Output)

The terminal EO provides 10-VDC pulse output or PWM output.
The terminal EO on the control circuit terminal block enables the monitoring of the output frequency
and the output current.
EO Selection
Select the signal you want to output from the following table.
7
For pulse output signals (03, 08, 15), use a digital frequency counter. For other output signals, use an
analog meter.
7-3-6 Terminal EO (Pulse/PWM Output)

Parameter Function PWM/
Data Description Full-scale value
No. name Pulse
00 Output frequency*1 *2 PWM 0 to Maximum frequency [Hz]
01 Output current PWM 0 to 200%
02 Output torque*3 PWM 0 to 200%
03 Digital output frequency*4 Pulse 0 to Maximum frequency [Hz]
0 to 133%
04 Output voltage PWM (Example: For 200-V class, 7.5 V
at 200 V)
05 Input power PWM 0 to 200%
06 Electronic thermal load rate PWM 0 to 100%
EO
C027 07 LAD frequency *1 PWM 0 to Maximum frequency [Hz]
Selection
Refer to EO Gain Setting on page
08 Digital current monitor Pulse
7-28.
0 to 200°C (Outputs 0°C for 0°C or
10 Cooling fin temperature PWM
lower)
Use DriveProgramming to set this
12 DriveProgramming (YA(0)) PWM
function. (0.00 to 100.00%)
Refer to EO Gain Setting on page
15 Pulse train input monitor Pulse
7-28.
Option (No applicable
16 − −
Option)

7 Other Functions
*1. 07 (LAD frequency) represents the frequency commanded by the inverter and is equivalent of the Output Fre-
quency Monitor (d001) value. 00 (Output frequency) represents a frequency value that takes into account the
aspects of vector control compensation (such as sensorless vector control) and even stabilization control.
When set to 00 (Output frequency), the parameter may produce an output that appears to be unstable at low
speeds, for example, when decelerating due to the overload limit function. In this case, set it to 07 (LAD fre-
quency) to obtain a stable output.
*2. Setting the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) to 01 (Feedback pulse) causes the inverter to output the
frequency displayed in the Real Frequency Monitor (d008).
*3. This setting is enabled only when the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) is set to 03 (Sensorless vector con-
trol). When A044/A244 is not set to 03, the inverter does not produce output because it remains at 0 V.
*4. When the Frequency Conversion Coefficient (b086) is set, the digital output frequency outputs a converted val-
ue. Refer to 7-1-7 Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007] on page 7-6.
PWM output Pulse output
t t
T T
Cycle T: Constant (6.4 ms) Cycle T: Variable

Duty ratio t/T: Variable Duty ratio t/T: Fixed to 1/2
EO Gain Setting
You can set the output gain in the EO Gain Setting (C105) when the EO Selection (C027) is set to 00 to
02, 04 to 07, 10, or 12 (settings with PWM output).
When C027 is set to 08 (Digital current monitor), set the reference current value for the output pulses in
the Digital Current Monitor Reference Value (C030). The output will be made in proportion to this value,
so that the current value set in C030 produces an output frequency of 1440 Hz.
When C027 is set to 15 (Pulse train input monitor), you can set the output gain in the Pulse Train Out-
put EO Scale (C047) (to obtain an output of Input value  C047).
Parameter Default
No. data
50. to 200.
C105 EO Gain Setting 100. %
Set the EO monitor gain.
0.20  Rated current to 2.00  Rated current
Digital Current Monitor Rated
C030 (Set the current value at an output of 1440 current A
Reference Value
Hz.)
0.01 to 99.99
Pulse Train Output EO
C047 Output pulse frequency = Input pulse fre- 1.00 −
Scale
quency  (C047)

7 Other Functions
7-3-7 Terminal AM (Analog Output)

The terminal AM provides an analog output of 0 to 10 VDC.
The digital terminal AM on the control circuit terminal block enables the monitoring of the output fre-
quency and the output current.
The analog output may not stabilize immediately after the power is turned on or off.
AM Selection
Select the signal you want to output from the following table.
Parameter Function
Data Description Full-scale value
No. name
00 Output frequency*1 *2 0 to Maximum frequency [Hz]
01 Output current 0 to 200%
02 Output torque*3 0 to 200%
0 to 133%
04 Output voltage (Example: For 200-V class, 7.5 V at

200 V)
05 Input power 0 to 200%
AM 06 Electronic thermal load rate 0 to 100%
C028
Selection 07 LAD frequency *1 0 to Maximum frequency [Hz]
0 to 200°C (Outputs 0°C for 0°C or
10 Cooling fin temperature
lower)
11 Output torque (signed) *3 0 to 200%*4
Use DriveProgramming to set this
13 DriveProgramming (YA(1)) function.
7
(0.00 to 100.00%)
16 Option (No applicable Option) −
7-3-7 Terminal AM (Analog Output)

*1. 07 (LAD frequency) represents the frequency commanded by the inverter and is equivalent of the Output Fre-
quency Monitor (d001) value. 00 (Output frequency) represents a frequency value that takes into account the
aspects of vector control compensation (such as sensorless vector control) and even stabilization control.
When set to 00 (Output frequency), the parameter may produce an output that appears to be unstable at low
speeds, for example, when decelerating due to the overload limit function. In this case, set it to 07 (LAD fre-
quency) to obtain a stable output.
*2. Setting the Pulse Train Input EA Selection (P003) to 01 (Feedback pulse) causes the inverter to output the
frequency displayed in the Real Frequency Monitor (d008).
trol). When A044/A244 is not set to 03, the inverter does not produce output because it remains at 0 V.
*4. The specifications of the output torque (signed) are as follows.
AM output [V]
AM Gain Setting (C106) = 200%
10
AM Gain Setting (C106) = 100%
5 AM Bias Setting (C109) = 50%
Torque [%]
0 100 200

7 Other Functions
AM Gain/Bias Setting
Adjust the gain and bias settings of the inverter’s AM output based on the meter connected to the termi-
nal AM. The bias setting is once disabled while the reset input is input, and 0 V is output.
Parameter Default
No. data
50. to 200.
C106 AM Gain Setting 100. %
Set the AM monitor gain.
0 to 100
C109 AM Bias Setting 0. %
Set the AM monitor bias.
(Example) To output 0 to 5 V, set C106 to 50% and use the default data for C109.

7 Other Functions
7-4 Inverter Control Settings

This section describes the carrier frequency function and the 1st/2nd control switching function, which
are related to the inverter control.
7-4-1 Carrier Frequency

Use this function to change the carrier frequency output from the inverter in a PWM waveform.
Set a higher carrier frequency value to reduce the metallic noise generated by the motor. If the inverter
generates a large sound due to resonance with the mechanical system or motor, you can effectively
avoid the resonance by setting the carrier frequency out of the resonance frequency range.
However, this results in an increase in electrical noise or leakage current from the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
Heavy load mode (b049 = 00)

2.0 to 15.0 10.0
b083 Carrier Frequency kHz
Light load mode (b049 = 01)
2.0 to 10.0 2.0
• b083 is applied to the carrier frequency for DC injection braking as well.

• The DC injection braking power is restricted according to the selected carrier frequency. For details,
refer to 7-9-1 DC Injection Braking (DB) on page 7-93.
• Derating of the output current may be required depending on the installation environment and the
Carrier Frequency (b083) setting. For derating of each inverter model, refer to A-1 Derating on page 7
A-2.
In the Electronic Thermal Level, set the output current value to be derated.
7-4-1 Carrier Frequency

This setting, however, is unnecessary if the Electronic Thermal Level is already set to the derating
value or lower.
For details on the electronic thermal function, refer to 5-3-2 Electronic Thermal Function on page
5-15.
• Be aware that adjusting the carrier frequency exceeding the allowable derating level for the output
current may cause damage or shortened life expectancy of the inverter.
• The table below shows the carrier frequency setting and its influence.
Carrier frequency Low High

Noise from motor Large Small
Noise, leakage current Small Large
Torque Slightly large Slightly small
Carrier frequency: Low Carrier frequency: High

7 Other Functions
7-4-2 Automatic Carrier Reduction

Use this function to reduce the carrier frequency automatically as the output current and the cooling fin
temperature increase.
To enable this function, set the Automatic Carrier Reduction (b089) to 01 or 02.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
Automatic Carrier 01: Enabled (Dependent on the current)
b089 01 −
Reduction 02: Enabled (Dependent on cooling fin tem-
perature)
• Depending on the ratio of the output current to the rated current and the cooling fin temperature, this
function reduces the carrier frequency to 12, 9, 6, and 3 kHz, as shown below. The normal carrier fre-
quency will be restored when the output current (when dependent on the current) or the fin tempera-
ture (when dependent on the cooling fin temperature) exceeds each carrier reduction start level −5%
or −5°C, respectively.
• The carrier frequency reduction rate is 2 kHz per second.
• The upper limit of the carrier frequency changeable with this function is equivalent to the value set in
the Carrier Frequency (b083); the lower limit of the carrier frequency is 3 kHz.
• When b083 is set to 3 kHz or lower, this function is disabled independently of the b089 setting.
⚫ b089 = 01
Carrier frequency
⚫ b089 = 02
Carrier frequency

7 Other Functions
7-4-3 2nd Control Function (SET)

Use this function to control two induction motors with different motor parameters by switching.
Even with a single motor, you can use the 2nd control to configure the control and settings that best fit
your application.
To switch between two motors, set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 08 (SET)
and turn OFF (1st control) or ON (2nd control) the terminal SET.
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 08: SET (2nd control)
C007 − −
to 7 Selection
The functions that support motor switching via the terminal SET are as follows.
1st control motor 2nd control motor Setting item

F001 Output Frequency Setting/Monitor
F002 F202 Acceleration Time 1

F003 F203 Deceleration Time 1
A001 A201 Frequency Reference Selection
A002 A202 RUN Command Selection
A003 A203 Base Frequency
A004 A204 Maximum Frequency
A020 A220 Multi-step Speed Reference 0
A041 A241 Torque Boost Selection
A042 A242 Manual Torque Boost Voltage
A043 A243 Manual Torque Boost Frequency
A044 A244 Control Method
A045 A245 Output Voltage Gain 7
A046 A246 Automatic Torque Boost Voltage Compensation Gain
A047 A247 Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation Gain
7-4-3 2nd Control Function (SET)

A061 A261 Frequency Upper Limit
A062 A262 Frequency Lower Limit
A081 A281 AVR Selection
A082 A282 Motor Rated Voltage Selection
A092 A292 Acceleration Time 2
A093 A293 Deceleration Time 2
A094 A294 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Selection
A095 A295 2-step Acceleration Frequency
A096 A296 2-step Deceleration Frequency
b012 b212 Electronic Thermal Level
b013 b213 Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection
b021 b221 Overload Limit Selection
b022 b222 Overload Limit Level
b023 b223 Overload Limit Parameter
C041 C241 Overload Warning Level
H002 H202 Motor Parameter Selection
H003 H203 Motor Capacity
H004 H204 Motor Pole Number
H005 H205 Speed Response
H006 H206 Stabilization Parameter
H020 H220 Motor Parameter R1
H021 H221 Motor Parameter R2

7 Other Functions
1st control motor 2nd control motor Setting item

H022 H222 Motor Parameter L
H023 H223 Motor Parameter Io
H024 H224 Motor Parameter J
H030 H230 Motor Parameter R1 (Auto-tuning Data)
H031 H231 Motor Parameter R2 (Auto-tuning Data)
H032 H232 Motor Parameter L (Auto-tuning Data)
H033 H233 Motor Parameter Io (Auto-tuning Data)
H034 H234 Motor Parameter J (Auto-tuning Data)
It is not possible to distinguish between the 1st and 2nd control functions on the display. Check the
ON/OFF status of each terminal to determine which control function is enabled.
During operation, attempts to switch between the 1st and 2nd control functions fail. Because switching
is enabled only during stop, the inverter will be switched after the operation is stopped.

7 Other Functions
7-5 Other Operation Functions

This section describes the parameters associated with other operation functions.
7-5-1 Starting Frequency

Set the frequency at which the inverter starts its output when the RUN signal turns ON.
Mainly, use this function to adjust the starting torque.
If you set a high frequency in Starting Frequency (b082), the inverter starts with the full voltage and also
the starting current increases. Therefore, the overload limit function may be performed or the inverter
may trip easily by the overcurrent protection.
Default
data
b082 Starting Frequency 0.01 to 10.00 (100.00)*1 1.50 Hz

7-5-1 Starting Frequency

7 Other Functions
7-5-2 Reduced Voltage Startup Selection

Use this function to increase the voltage slowly during motor startup.
To prevent the surge current or overcurrent trip during startup, increase the value set in the Reduced
Voltage Startup Selection (b036). Although setting a small value causes the high starting torque, the
inverter operates as with the full voltage starting. Therefore, an overcurrent trip may occur easily.
Default
data
0: Reduced voltage startup disabled
Reduced Voltage
b036 1 (Reduced voltage startup time: short) to 2 −
Startup Selection
255 (Reduced voltage startup time: long)
7-5-3 Frequency Jump Function

Use the frequency jump function to avoid the resonant point of the load machine during operation.
If jump frequency is set, you cannot set the frequency reference within the jump frequency range to
avoid steady operation in that range.
The output frequency changes continuously according to the acceleration/deceleration time settings
during acceleration/deceleration.
You can set three points for jump frequency.
Parameter Default
No. data
A063/A065/ 0.00 to 590.00
A067 Jump Frequency 1/2/3 0.00 Hz
Set the center of the jump frequency. *1
A064/A066/ Jump Frequency Width 0.00 to 10.00 (100.00)*2
A068 0.50 Hz
1/2/3 Set 1/2 of the jump frequency width.
*1. When set to 0 Hz, this function is disabled.

7 Other Functions
7-5-4 Acceleration/Deceleration Stop Function

This function causes the inverter stop accelerating/decelerating temporarily and start running at a con-
stant speed at the frequency output at that time.
If the moment of inertia of a load machine is large, you can use it, for example, to have the motor wait
until the amount of motor slip during acceleration/deceleration becomes small. You can use it also to
prevent an overcurrent/overvoltage trip during acceleration/deceleration.

This function works independently of the Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern Selection (A097/A098) set-
ting. It is activated for all acceleration/deceleration patterns by the frequency reference input via the
analog input signal or the optional Digital Operator’s volume control (VR).
There are two acceleration/deceleration stop methods as follows, which can be used in conjunction
with each other.
• Stopping automatically when the specified frequency/stop time is reached
• Stopping by inputting the terminal HLD (83: Retain output frequency) set in the Multi-function Input
1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007)
Using this function prolongs the acceleration/deceleration time configured by the F002/F202 and
F003/F203 settings for the duration of the stop time caused by this function.
7
Parameter Default
No. data
7-5-4 Acceleration/Deceleration Stop Function

Acceleration Stop 0.00 to Starting Frequency: Disabled
A069 0.00 Hz
Frequency Frequency above Starting Frequency to 590.00
Acceleration Stop 0.0: Disabled
A070 0.0 s
Time 0.1 to 60.0
Deceleration Stop 0.00 to Starting Frequency: Disabled
A154 0.00 Hz
Frequency Frequency above Starting Frequency to 590.00
Deceleration Stop 0.0: Disabled
A155 0.0 s
Time 0.1 to 60.0
C001 to C007 83: HLD (Retain output frequency) − −
1 to 7 Selection
⚫ Stopping when the specified frequency/stop time is reached

Output frequency
A154
A069 A155
A070
Time
⚫ Stopping via input to a multi-function input terminal

7 Other Functions
7-5-5 RUN Direction Limit Selection

Use this function to limit the RUN direction of the motor.
It can be activated either via the control circuit terminal block or the Digital Operator.
When the inverter receives a RUN command input with the RUN direction limit function enabled from
the control circuit terminal block, is displayed on the Digital Operator.
Parameter Default
No. data
01: Only Forward is enabled (Motor does not
RUN Direction Limit
b035 rotate in reverse.) 00 −
Selection
02: Only Reverse is enabled (Motor does not
rotate in forward.)
7-5-6 Permission of RUN Command

Use this function to have the inverter accept the RUN command only while the permission of RUN com-
mand is ON.
To use it, set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 84 (ROK).
Parameter Default
No. data
C007 84: ROK (Permission of RUN command) − −
7 Selection
Output
frequency
ROK input
RUN command
FW/RV input

7 Other Functions
7-5-7 Frequency Calculation Function

The frequency calculation function enables the use of calculation results from two frequency reference
channels as a frequency reference or PID feedback value.
To use the calculation result as a frequency reference, set the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection
(A001/A201) to 10 (Operation function output).
To use the calculation result as a PID feedback value, set the PID Feedback Selection (A076) to 10
(Operation function output).
Parameter Default
No. data
01: Digital Operator (Volume)
(Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01
is connected)
Calculation Frequency
A141/A142 02: Analog voltage (terminal O) input 02 or 03 −
Selection 1/2
03: Analog current (terminal OI) input

05: Option
00: Addition (A141 + A142)
A143 01: Subtraction (A141 − A142) 00 −
Operator Selection
02: Multiplication (A141  A142)
1st/2nd Frequency Refer- 10: Operation function output
A001/A201 02 −
ence Selection
A076 PID Feedback Selection 10: Operation function output 00 −
Note 1. When this function is enabled, the remote operation function (UP/DWN) cannot be used. In addition, the
frequency settings in the Output Frequency Monitor (d001), Output Frequency Monitor (After Conver-
sion) (d007), and Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) cannot be changed via the Digital Operator 7
keys.
2. A141 and A142 can have the same setting.
7-5-7 Frequency Calculation Function

7-5-8 Frequency Addition Function
Use this function to add or subtract the value set in the Frequency Addition Amount Setting (A145) to
the selected frequency reference value.
To use it, allocate one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 50 (ADD).
The value set in A145 is added or subtracted when the terminal ADD is ON. Turning OFF the terminal
ADD resets the Frequency Addition Amount Setting (A145) to the selected frequency reference value.
Parameter Default
No. data
Frequency Addition
A145 0.00 to 590.00 0.00 Hz
Amount Setting
Frequency Addition Sign 00: (Frequency reference) + (A145)
A146 00 −
Selection 01: (Frequency reference) − (A145)
C007 50: ADD (Set frequency A145 addition) − −
7 Selection
Note 1. If the +/- sign in front of the frequency reference changes (from “−” to “+” or “+” to “−”) as a result of oper-
ation, the rotation direction of the motor will be reversed.
2. When the PID function is used, this function is also enabled for the PID target value.
(Note that A145 can be set as a percentage of the maximum frequency in increments of 0.01%.)

7 Other Functions
7-5-9 Remote Operation Function (UP/DWN)

Use this function to change the inverter output frequency via the multi-function input terminals UP and
DWN.
Set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 27 (UP) and 28 (DWN).
When the UP/DOWN terminal is ON, the inverter operates according to the acceleration/deceleration
time settings (F002/F202, F003/F203, etc.)
In addition, setting C101 to 01 (Store frequency data) enables the inverter to store the frequency refer-
ence value after UP/DWN adjustment into its internal EEPROM when the power supply is shut off.
Parameter Default
No. data
UP/DWN Storage 00: Not store frequency data
C101 00 −
Selection 01: Store frequency data*1
00: 0Hz
C104 UP/DWN Clear Selection 00 −
01: EEPROM data at power-on
C007
28: DWN (Remote operation decelerated) − −
Selection
*1. Do not turn ON/OFF the terminal UP/DWN after turning off the power supply. Otherwise, the inverter may not
store data normally.
• The remote operation function is enabled only when the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection
(A001/A201) is set to 01 (Control circuit terminal block) or 02 (Digital Operator), or when the
multi-step speed operation function is enabled. However, the parameter can be set to 01 (Control cir-
cuit terminal block) only when the analog command hold function (AHD) is enabled. For details on
the analog command hold function, refer to 7-3-3 Analog Command Hold Function (AHD) on page
7-24.
• The remote operation function is disabled for the frequency reference via non-held analog input or for
jogging operation.
• To clear the frequency reference value adjusted using the UP/DWN function, set the Multi-function
Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 29 (UDC).
Then, set the command reference value after clearing in the UP/DWN Clear Selection (C104).

7 Other Functions
7-5-10 Output Voltage Gain

Use this function to decrease the inverter output voltage as a percentage of the voltage set in the
1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282).
You can avoid motor hunting by decreasing the output voltage gain.
Be sure to change the gain value moderately during operation (as a guide, 10% max.) Otherwise, an
overcurrent trip may occur due to sudden output voltage changes.
When the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244) is set to 03 (Sensorless vector control), you can change
the set data during operation or stop, but changes will not be reflected on the control behavior. After
changing the setting, be sure to turn off and then on the input power supply again. Then, the inverter
recalculates the motor parameter values.
This motor parameter calculation is also performed when the reset input turns ON.
Parameter Default
No. data
1st/2nd Output Voltage Set the output voltage reduction factor.
A045/A245 100. %
Gain 20. to 100.

7
7-5-10 Output Voltage Gain

7 Other Functions
7-5-11 AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) Function

Use this function to have the inverter automatically compensate for the output voltage to the motor even
if the incoming voltage fluctuates.
It is useful as a preventive measure against low output torque to the motor or overexcitation.
Note, however, that the inverter cannot output voltage exceeding the incoming voltage to the inverter.
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) Function Settings

To enable/disable the AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) function, set the 1st/2nd AVR Selection (A081/A281).
• The inverter will output voltage to the motor according to the value set in the 1st/2nd Motor Rated
Voltage Selection (A082/A282).
Note, however, that the inverter cannot output voltage exceeding the incoming voltage to the inverter.
• By default, this parameter is set to 02 (OFF during deceleration) to enable the inverter to output a
large deceleration torque during deceleration.
To avoid possible overcurrent trip during deceleration, set the 1st/2nd AVR Selection (A081/A281) to
00 (Always ON).
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Always ON
A081/A281 1st/2nd AVR Selection 01: Always OFF 02 −
02: OFF during deceleration*1
1st/2nd Motor Rated Volt- 200 V: 200 to 240
A082/A282 200 or 400 V
age Selection 400 V: 380 to 480
*1. This setting decreases the energy to be fed back to the inverter by increasing the motor loss.
It is effective when you need to reduce the deceleration time.
However, to avoid possible overcurrent tripping during deceleration, set the 1st/2nd AVR Selection to 00 (Al-
ways ON).
Overexcitation Control during Deceleration
This function decreases the regenerative energy to be fed back to the inverter by forcing the motor
during deceleration to be in an overexcited state.
It enables you to shorten the deceleration time without use of optional braking resistors.
• To use this function, set the Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During Deceleration (b130)
to 00 (Disabled).
• Set the 1st/2nd AVR Selection (A081/A281) to 00 (Always ON).
• Setting the AVR Gain at Deceleration (A084) to higher than 100% enables the adjustment of the
motor in an overexcited state.
Set this as a percentage of the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selection (A082/A282) value.
• AVR Filter Time Constant (A083) is a parameter to set the filter time constant to adjust the responsiveness
of the AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator).
Parameter Default
No. data
Overvoltage Suppression 00: Disabled
b130 Function Selection During 01 −
Deceleration
A081/A281 1st/2nd AVR Selection 00: Always ON 02 −
1st/2nd Motor Rated Volt- 200 V: 200 to 240
A082/A282 200 or 400 V
age Selection 400 V: 380 to 480
A083 AVR Filter Time Constant 0.000 to 10.000 0.300 s
A084 AVR Gain at Deceleration 50. to 200. 100. %

7 Other Functions
⚫ Adjusting overexcitation control during deceleration

(1) First, set A083 to 0.3 and A084 to 130 to shorten the deceleration time.
(2) If you need to set a higher target value for the deceleration time, or to detect an over-
voltage with the above settings, first set A083 to 0 and increase the value set in A084
gradually from 130 while checking the deceleration time at each gain level. The
adjustment is completed if the inverter achieves the target deceleration time.
(3) If an overload or overcurrent occurs
If an overload or overcurrent occurs as a result of overexcitation control during decelera-
tion, take the following countermeasure.
Overload
As the motor consumes regenerative energy, frequent decelerating movements may
cause an overload.
In this case, decrease the value set in A084 gradually and check the inverter state.
If the inverter cannot achieve the target deceleration time or causes an overload, you
need to purchase optional braking resistors.
Overcurrent
If the applied voltage during deceleration is too high, the inverter may detect an over-
load.

If an overcurrent is detected, decrease the value set in A084 gradually and check the
inverter state.
If the inverter cannot achieve the target deceleration time or causes an overcurrent,
you need to purchase optional braking resistors.
7-5-11 AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) Function

7 Other Functions
7-5-12 PID Function

Use this function to control the flow rate, air volume, pressure, and other processes. To use this func-
tion, set A071 to 01 (Enabled) or 02 (Enabled: Reverse output enabled).
The PID function can be disabled during PID operation via external signal input.
To use this function, set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 23 (PID: PID
disabled). This causes the PID function to be disabled while the terminal PID is ON and the inverter
generates an output according to the frequency reference.
You can also use this function to limit the PID output with reference to the target value. Set the
upper/lower limit value in the PID Variable Range Limit (A078) as a percentage of the maximum fre-
quency.
Because the PID output is a frequency reference for the inverter, the base frequency, maximum fre-
quency, frequency limit settings are enabled. For details on these functions, refer to 5-3-3 Base Fre-
quency and Maximum Frequency of Motor on page 5-20, 5-5-3 Frequency Limit on page 5-30, and PID
Variable Range Limit (A078).
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
A071 PID Selection 01: Enabled 00 −
02: Enabled (Reverse output enabled)
0.00 to 25.00
A072 PID P Gain 1.00 −
Set the proportional gain
0.0 to 3600.0
A073 PID I Gain 1.0 s
Set the integral time
0.00 to 100.00
A074 PID D Gain 0.00 s
Set the derivative time
0.01 to 99.99
A075 PID Scale For unit conversion for PID Feedback 1.00 time
Value Monitor (d004)
00: Analog current (Terminal OI) *1
4 to 20 mA
01: Analog voltage (Terminal O) *1
A076 PID Feedback Selection 0 to 10 V 00 −
10: Operation function output *1
00: Disabled (Deviation = Target value −
PID Deviation Reverse Feedback value)
A077 00 −
Output 01: Enabled (Deviation = Feedback
value − Target value)
0.0 to 100.0
A078 PID Variable Range Limit 0.0 %
Variable range based on target value
00: Disabled
01: Analog voltage (Terminal O) *2
PID Feedforward
A079 0 to 10 V 00 −
Selection
02: Analog current (Terminal OI) *3
4 to 20 mA
0.00 to 590.00
PID Sleep Operation
A156 Stops inverter operation if PID output is at 0.00 Hz
Level
the operation level or lower.

7 Other Functions
Parameter Default
No. data
0.0 to 25.5
PID Sleep Operation
A157 Set the delay time until the sleep operation 0.0 s
Delay Time
starts.
PID Deviation Excessive 0.0 to 100.0
C044 3.0 %
Level OD signal output judgment level
Feedback Comparison 0.0 to 100.0
C052 100.0 %
Signal Off Level FBV signal output judgment level
Feedback Comparison 0.0 to 100.0
C053 0.0 %
Signal On Level FBV signal output judgment level
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to 23: PID (PID disabled)
C007 − −
7 Selection 24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
Multi-function Output 04: OD (Excessive PID deviation)
11/12 Selection 31: FBV (PID feedback comparison
C021, C022
C026 Multi-function Relay Out- signal) − −
put (AL1, AL2) Function
Selection

Related functions A001, A201, A005, d004
*1. Setting the PID Selection (A071) to Enabled causes the analog input selection setting in A036 to be allocated
to the PID feedback function.
When the 1st Frequency Reference Selection (A001) is set to 01 (Control circuit terminal block), the analog
input setting other than that selected in A076 is used as the target frequency reference. In this case, the set-
ting in A005 and the function allocated to the terminal AT (Analog input switching) are disabled.
*3. In A079, you can set a target value, or have a setting that overlaps with the PID Feedback Selection value.

7
• When the PID function is enabled, the setting unit for the following parameters is changed to
percentage as 100% of the maximum frequency.
7-5-12 PID Function

Note also that, these parameters are read or written via Modbus communication, the data
unit differs between read and write operations. Set parameter values in units of 0.01 Hz for
writing and in units of the following percentages as 100% of the maximum frequency for
reading.
F001: 0.01%
A011, A012, A020/A220, A021 to A035, A101, A102, A145: 0.1%
• When using the PID function, do not set the Analog Input Filter (A016) to 31 (500-ms filter
with 0.1-Hz hysteresis). Doing so may result in unstable operation.
Basic Structure of PID Control
Feedforward Disabled
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
Target Devia-
value + tion  1 + Control Sensor
Kp 1 + + Td · s M =
0 to 10 V − Ti · s − fs
4 to 20 mA Feedback 0 to 10 V Transducer
4 to 20 mA
Kp: Proportional gain Ti: Integral time Td: Derivative time s: Operator
(A072: PID P gain) (A073: PID I gain) (A074: PID D gain)

7 Other Functions
PID Operation
(1) P Operation
In this operation, the control volume is proportional to the deviation (difference between the
target value and the current value).
(2) I Operation
In this operation, the control volume is proportional to the time integral value of the deviation. The
P operation is less effective as the current value approaches the target value due to smaller devia-
tion, taking a long time to reach the target value. The I operation compensates this disadvantage.
(3) D Operation
In this operation, the control volume is proportional to the percentage of change in the devi-
ation. Because using only the PI operation is time-consuming, the D operation is used to
effectively compensate for the disadvantage in responsiveness.
PID Target Value Setting Unit and PID Scale

When the PID function is enabled, the setting unit for the following parameters is changed to percent-
age as 100% of the maximum frequency (d004 is always in units of %).
You can set the PID Scale (A075) to perform scale conversion of these parameters:
Value after conversion = Value before conversion  PID Scale (A075)
d004 F001 A011 A012 A020 A220 A021 A022

A023 A024 A025 A026 A027 A028 A029 A030
A031 A032 A033 A034 A035 A101 A102 A145

When the following parameters are read or written via Modbus communication, the data unit
differs between read and write operations. Set parameter values in units of 0.01 Hz for writing
and in units of the following percentages (as 100% of the maximum frequency) for reading.

7 Other Functions
F001: 0.01%
A011, A012, A020/A220, A021 to A035, A101, A102, A145: 0.1%

7 Other Functions
Feedback Selection
Select the terminals used to input the feedback signal in PID Feedback Selection (A076).
When the 1st Frequency Reference Selection (A001) is set to 01 (Control circuit terminal block), the
analog input setting other than that selected in A076 is used as the target frequency reference. In this
case, the setting in A005 and the function allocated to the terminal AT (Analog input switching) are dis-
abled.
When the PID Feedback Selection (A076) is set to 02 (Modbus communication), write the feedback
value (100% = 10000) to the holding register address 0006 hex.
Register Parameter Data

Function name R/W Monitor or setting data
No. No. resolution
0006 hex PID Feedback Selection − R/W 0 to 10000 0.01 [%]
Note Although this register supports read and write operations, you can write data only when the PID Feedback
Selection (A076) is set to 02 (Modbus communication). You cannot write data with other settings.
When the PID Feedback Selection (A076) is set to 03 (Pulse train input), the inverter recognizes the

captured pulse train frequency value [Hz] relative to the pulse train frequency set in the Pulse Train Fre-
quency Scale (P055) as the maximum frequency. As a result, for the feedback value, the inverter cap-
tures a value converted into a percentage as 100% of the maximum frequency.
For the pulse train input frequency, refer to 7-5-16 Pulse Train Frequency Input on page 7-52.
Feedforward Selection
Select the terminals used to input the feedback signal in the PID Feedback Selection (A079).
In A079, you can set a target value, or have a setting that overlaps with the PID Feedback Selection
value. 7
If A079 is set to Disabled, feedforward control will not be performed.
7-5-12 PID Function

PID Deviation Reverse Output
Depending on the sensor characteristics, etc., the polarity of deviation between the target and feedback
values may not match the inverter’s command. In this case, you can invert the deviation polarity by set-
ting the PID Deviation Reverse Output (A077) to 01.
(Example) To control a refrigerator compressor
If you are using a temperature sensor designed for use in a temperature range of 0 to
100°C at 0 to 10 V and the target and current temperatures are 5°C and 10°C, respectively,
the inverter attempts to reduce the frequency under PID control since the feedback value is
larger than the target value.
In this case, set A077 to 01. Then, the inverter attempts to increase the frequency.

7 Other Functions
PID Variable Range

This function limits the PID output to within the variable range defined based on the target value.
To use this function, set the PID Variable Range Limit (A078) as a percentage of the maximum fre-
quency. Then, the output frequency will be limited to within a range of Target value ± (A078).
When the PID Selection (A071) is set to 01 (Enabled) or 02 (Enabled (Reverse output enabled)), this
function is enabled.
PID output [%]

PID output range
PID target value

PID Variable Range Limit (A078)
PID Variable Range Limit (A078)

Time [s]
PID Reverse Output

Under normal PID control (A071 = 01), the frequency reference to the inverter will be limited to 0 Hz if
the result of PID operation is a negative value. However, when the PID Selection (A071) is set to 02
(Reverse output enabled), reverse output is enabled for the inverter if the result of PID operation is a
negative value.
PID Gain Adjustment
If the PID function does not provide a stable response, adjust the appropriate gain setting according to
the table below.
Phenomenon Adjustment
Changes in target value are not reflected quickly on feedback value. Increase PID P Gain (A072).
Changes are reflected quickly on feedback value, but not stable. Decrease PID P Gain (A072).
Target and feedback values do not match quickly. Decrease PID I Gain (A073).
Feedback value fluctuates unstably. Increase PID I Gain (A073).
Increasing PID P Gain does not improve response speed. Increase PID D Gain (A074).
Increasing PID P Gain results in fluctuating and unstable feedback value. Decrease PID D Gain (A074).
PID Deviation Excessive (OD)

You can set the PID Deviation Excessive Level (C044) for PID control. This inverter can be configured
to output this signal to a multi-function output terminal if the PID deviation ε reaches the level set in
C044 or higher. The inverter will not shut off its output (trip), however.
Allocate the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022) or the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 04 (OD).
Set C044 in units of percentage as 100% of the 1st/2nd Maximum Frequency (A004/A204).

7 Other Functions
Feedback Comparison Signal

This inverter can be configured to output a control signal from the multi-function output terminal if the
PID feedback value falls out of the setting range.
AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 31 (FBV).
Set the Feedback Comparison Signal Off/On Level (C052/C053) in units of percentage as 100% of the
1st/2nd Maximum Frequency (A004/A204).
When the RUN command is input by the PID function, the FBV output starts with the ON state, indepen-
dent of the Off/On level of the feedback comparison signal.
Feedback Comparison Signal Off Level

PID feedback (C052)
Feedback Comparison Signal On Level
(C053)

Time
FW input ON
OFF
FBV output ON
OFF
PID Feedback Value Monitor (d004)

Use this parameter to monitor the PID feedback value in units of percentage as 100% of the maximum
frequency.
7
The monitor value is displayed as a product of the feedback value and the PID Scale (A075).
d004 = Feedback value  PID Scale (A075)
7-5-12 PID Function

PID Integral Reset (PIDC)
Use this function to clear the integral value of PID operation.

Allocate the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 24 (PIDC). The
integral value is cleared every time the PIDC terminal is turned ON.
Never turn ON the PIDC terminal during PID operation. Doing so may cause an overcurrent trip. Be
sure to deactivate the PID operation before you turn ON the PIDC terminal.
PID Sleep Function

This inverter can be configured to shut off its output when the PID Sleep Operation Delay Time (A157)
elapsed since the PID output reached the PID Sleep Operation Level (A156) or lower. The stop method
(deceleration stop/free-run stop) depends on the Stop Selection (b091) setting. The PID sleep function
will not be activated if the normal PID output is restored within the PID Sleep Operation Delay Time.
Even if the PID disabled signal is input by the PID function, the inverter will shut off its output when the
time set in A157 elapsed since the frequency reference value reached the level set in A156 or lower.
The stop method depends on the b091 setting.

7 Other Functions
7-5-13 Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function

This function automatically adjusts the inverter output power during constant speed operation to the
minimum level. It is suitable for fan, pump, or other load that reduced torque characteristics.
To perform energy-saving operation using this function, set the Operation Mode Selection (A085) to 01
(Energy-saving operation).
You can adjust the response and accuracy of the function in the Energy-saving Response/Accuracy
Adjustment (A086).
Because this function controls the output power to the minimum necessary level, the motor may stall if
the rapid load fluctuation, such as impact load, occurs, which may result in an overcurrent trip.
The automatic energy-saving operation function may not work sufficiently when the frequency refer-
ence source is set to Control circuit terminal block (Analog input). In this case, set the Analog Input Fil-
ter (A016) to 31 (500 ms).
Parameter Default
No. data
A085 00 −
Parameter Default
No. data
Energy-saving 0.0 to 100.0
A086 Response/Accuracy (Response: Slow to Fast) 50.0 %
Adjustment (Accuracy: High to Low)
7-5-14 Commercial Switching (CS)

Use this function to drive a system subject to a large load inertia moment during acceleration and
deceleration with the inverter and during constant speed operation with a commercial power supply,
respectively.
Allocate the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 14 (CS).
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 14: CS (Commercial switching)
C007 − −
to 7 Selection
Follow the sequence diagram given below to switch among the terminals MC1 to MC3, FW, and CS.
When the terminal CS turns ON, the inverter shuts off its output and the motor falls in a free-run state.
Follow the sequence diagram given below to switch among the terminals MC1 to MC3 and, with the
RUN command and CS input ON, turn the terminal CS from ON to OFF. Then, when the Restart
Standby Time (b003) elapses, the Inverter will execute frequency pull-in restart from the frequency at
which the Inverter output was shut off.

7 Other Functions
⚫ Connection diagram for commercial switching operation

MC2
MCCB MC1 MC3 THRY

R U
S V
T W
R0
T0
FWY FW
RVY RV
CSY CS
SC
⚫ Timing diagram for commercial switching

Interlock time for MC2 and Interlock time for MC2 and MC3

MC3 (0.5 to 1 s) (0.5 to 1 s)
MC1 Inverter power supply ON Inverter power supply OFF Inverter power supply ON
Switching between commercial power

MC2 supply and motor disconnection
MC3 and motor disconnection
FW input
(FWY)
CS input
(CSY)
b003 7
Motor
7-5-14 Commercial Switching (CS)

rotation speed
Free-run Free-run
Output
frequency
Driven by inverter Driven by commercial power supply Driven by inverter
Switching from inverter Operation to Co mmercial Power Supply Operation

Switching from Commercial Power Supply Operation to inverter Operation
• Make sure that MC3 and MC2 are mechanically interlocked. Doing so may cause an inverter dam-
age.
• For FWY, RVY, and CSY, use low-voltage relays according to your application.
• If an overcurrent trip occurs during frequency pull-in restart, increase the Restart Standby
Time (b003).
• The inverter can be set up to restart automatically at power-on. In this case, the terminal CS
is not required. For details, refer to 5-8-2 Restart after Resetting on page 5-44.

7 Other Functions
7-5-15 Stabilization Parameter

Use this function to stabilize the motor in hunting.
If the motor is hunting, check first whether the 1st/2nd Motor Capacity (H003/H203) and 1st/2nd Motor
Pole Number (H004/H204) settings match your motor and, if they do not, match them. If the motor’s pri-
mary resistance is smaller than that of the standard motor, increase the value set in H006/H206 gradu-
ally. Or, to drive a motor with a capacity larger than the rated capacity of the inverter, reduce the set
value.
To suppress hunting, you can try the following methods as alternatives to this function.
• To decrease the Carrier Frequency (b083), refer to 7-4-1 Carrier Frequency on page 7-31.
• To decrease the 1st/2nd Output Voltage Gain (A045/A245), refer to 7-5-10 Output Voltage Gain on
page 7-41.
Parameter Default
No. data
0. to 255.
1st/2nd Stabilization
H006/H206 Increase or decrease the value if the motor 100. −
Parameter
is hunting.
1st/2nd Output Voltage 20. to 100.
A045/A245 100. %
Gain Decrease the value if the motor is hunting.
2.0 to 15.0 or 2.0 to 10.0 (Heavy
b083 Carrier Frequency load/Light load) 10.0/2.0 kHz
Decrease the value if the motor is hunting.
7-5-16 Pulse Train Frequency Input

Use this function to use the pulse train input (single-phase) to the terminal EA as a frequency reference
or PID feedback value in each control mode.
In the Pulse Train Frequency Scale (P055), set the input pulse train frequency at the maximum frequency.
This function cannot be used in conjunction with the analog input start/end function. To apply limits to
the pulse train frequency, set the Pulse Train Frequency Bias Amount (P057) and Pulse Train Fre-
quency Upper/Lower Limit (P058/P059). Set these values in units of percentage as 100% of the maxi-
mum frequency.
In addition, be sure to set the Pulse Train Frequency Upper Limit (P058) to a value larger than the
Pulse Train Frequency Lower Limit (P059). If the P058 value is lower than the P059 value, the inverter
will output only the upper limit frequency.
Parameter Default
No. data
Pulse Train Input EA 00: Frequency setting or PID feedback
P003 00 −
Selection value
1.0 to 32.0
Pulse Train Frequency
P055 Set the input pulse frequency to attain the 25.0 kHz
Scale
1st Maximum Frequency (A004).
0.01 to 2.00
Pulse Train Frequency
P056 Set the filter time constant for pulse train 0.10 s
Filter Time Parameter
input.
Pulse Train Frequency Bias −100. to 100.
P057 0. %
Amount
Pulse Train Frequency 0. to 100.
P058 100. %
Upper Limit

7 Other Functions
Parameter Default
No. data
Pulse Train Frequency 0.01 to 20.00
P059 1.00 %
Lower Limit
1st Frequency Reference 06: Pulse train frequency
A001 02 −
Selection
A076 PID Feedback Selection 03: Pulse train frequency 00 −
Calculation Frequency 07: Pulse train frequency
A141 02 −
Selection 1
Calculation Frequency
A142 03 −
Selection 2

7-5-17 LAD Cancel Function
LAD functions to calculate the transient frequency reference value to enable the motor to reach the ref-
erence frequency in the set acceleration/deceleration time. The LAD cancel function disables this fre-
quency acceleration/deceleration function (LAD).
To disable the frequency acceleration/deceleration function (LAD) to output the frequency reference
instantaneously, set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 46 (LAC: LAD cancel)
and turn ON the terminal LAC. 7
For details on the acceleration/deceleration time, refer to 5-6-1 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings
7-5-17 LAD Cancel Function

on page 5-32.
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 46: LAC (LAD cancel)
C007 − −
to 7 Selection
Related functions F002, F202, F003, F203

7 Other Functions
7-6 Digital Operator and Operation Functions

This section describes the Digital Operator and other operation functions.
7-6-1 Soft Lock Function (SFT)

Use this function to protect various parameter settings against changes. This helps prevent data rewrit-
ing due to erroneous operation.
Use the table below to select which type of soft lock you want to apply.
To use this function from a multi-function input terminal, allocate the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selec- tion
(C001 to C007) to 15 (SFT).
Alternatively, you can use the password function to protect parameter data. Refer to 7-6-9 Password
Parameter Terminal Default

No. SFT data
Rewriting enabled only for
ON
b031.
00
Soft lock function disabled
OFF
(Normal operation).
b031 and frequency set-
ON
tings (F001, A020, A220,
01
A021 to A035, A038).
b031 Soft Lock Selection 01 −
Soft lock function disabled
OFF
(Normal operation).
02 −
b031.
b031 and frequency set-
03 −
tings (F001, A020, A220,
A021 to A035, A038).
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 15: SFT (Soft lock)
C007 − −
to 7 Selection

When the Soft Lock Selection (b031) is set to prohibit changes of the initialization-related
For details on the parameter initialization, refer to 5-1-2 Parameter Initialization on page 5-5.

7 Other Functions
7-6-2 Forced Operator Function (OPE)

When the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) or 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection
(A002/A202) is not set to Digital Operator, use this function to frocibly enable the operation via the Dig-
ital Operator based on the ON/OFF status of the multi-function input terminal to which this function is
allocated.
To frocibly enable the frequency reference and RUN command via the Digital Operator, set the
Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 31 (OPE: Forced operator function) and input
the terminal OPE. When the terminal is reset, the inverter operates according to the A001/A002 setting.
If you switch on/off this function during operation, the RUN command will be reset to stop the inverter
output. In this case, to ensure safety, once reset the RUN command from the selected reference source
and input it again before restarting operation.

The forced operator function has priority if the forced terminal block function (51: F-TM) is input simulta-
neously. Note also that, for the frequency reference, the multi-step speed reference function has priority
over the forced operator function.
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 31: OPE (Forced operator function)
C007 − −
to 7 Selection
Related functions A001, A201, A002, A202
7-6-3 Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM)

When the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) or 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection
(A002/A202) is not set to Control circuit terminal block, use this function to frocibly enable the operation
via the control circuit terminal block based on the ON/OFF status of the multi-function input terminal to 7
which the function is allocated.
7-6-2 Forced Operator Function (OPE)

When the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) is set to 51 (F-TM: Forced terminal
block), the inverter accepts the frequency reference and RUN command via the source set in
A001/A002 if the terminal F-TM is reset, and via the control circuit terminal block if the terminal F-TM is
input.
If you switch on/off this function during operation, the RUN command will be reset to stop the inverter
output. In this case, to ensure safety, once reset the RUN command from the selected reference source
and input it again before restarting operation.
The forced operator function has priority if the forced operator function (31: OPE) is input simultane-
ously.
The frequency reference for the forced terminal block function varies with the O/OI Selection (A005)
setting.
• 00 (Switch between O (Voltage) and OI (Current)): Switchable between O and OI via terminal AT (OI
when the terminal AT is input)
• 02 (Switch between O (Voltage) and volume): O (Non-switchable via terminal AT)
• 03 (Switch between OI (Current) and volume): OI (Non-switchable via terminal AT)
Note that, for the frequency reference, the multi-step speed reference function has priority over the
forced terminal block function.
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)
C007 − −
to 7 Selection
Related functions A001, A201, A002, A202, A005

7 Other Functions
7-6-4 Operation Selection at External Operator Disconnection

If the Inverter detects a disconnection (interruption of communications for 5 seconds or longer) with the
optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01), the operation of the Inverter depends on the Opera-
tion Selection at External Operator Disconnection (b165) setting.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Trip (E40.)
Operation Selection at 01: Trip after deceleration stop (E40.)
b165 External Operator Dis- 02: Ignore 02 −
connection 03: Free-run stop
7-6-5 Initial Screen Selection (Initial Screen after Power-on)

Use this parameter to select from the following the screen that appears on the Digital Operator at
power-ON. (By factory default, this is set to 001 (d001).)

Data Content of display (Digital Operator) Unit
No. name data
Screen on which the Enter key was last pressed
000
(Parameters except for d*** and F001)*1
001 d001 (Output Frequency Monitor)
002 d002 (Output Current Monitor)
Initial Screen
b038 003 d003 (RUN Direction Monitor) 001 −
Selection
: : (Each data corresponds with d***.)
060 d060 (Inverter Mode Monitor)
201 F001 (Output Frequency Setting/Monitor)
202 Do not set.
*1. If you select 000 and turn off the power supply, the inverter will display this parameter (b038) at the next pow-
er-on.
7-6-6 Initial Screen Automatic Return Function

To enable this function, set the Initial Screen Automatic Return Function (b164) to 01 (Enabled).
When enabled, the function will automatically switch the display to the initial screen if the Digital Opera-
tor is not operated for 10 minutes.
Parameter Default
No. data
Initial Screen Auto- 00: Disabled (Automatic return disabled)
b164 matic Return Function 00 −
01: Enabled (Automatic return enabled)

7 Other Functions
7-6-7 Inverter Display on Operator Connection

Once you connect the Inverter to the optional Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01), the built-in Digi-
tal Operator keys will be disabled. Use this function to set the parameter to display on the built-in Digital
Operator at this time.
Parameter Default
No. data
001 to 060
Inverter Display on
b150 Each data corresponds with the monitor mode 001 −
Operator Connection
parameters d001 to d060.
7-6-8 Display Fixed (DISP)

Setting the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 86 (DISP) and turning ON the cor-
responding terminal causes the Digital Operator to display only the content selected in the Initial Screen
Selection (b038), preventing it from displaying other parameters.
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 86: DISP (Display fixed)
C007 − −
to 7 Selection
7-6-9 Password Function

Use the password function to set passwords for the Display Selection (b037) and Soft Lock Selection
(b031) functions to prevent display and change of the parameter settings.
7
Data Description Unit
No. name data
7-6-7 Inverter Display on Operator Connection

0000 Password function disabled.*1
Password A
b190 Set the password A for the Display 0000 −
Setting 0001 to FFFF
Selection (b037).*2
Password A for Set the password A authentication
b191 0000 to FFFF 0000 −
Authentication parameter.*2
0000 Password function disabled.*1
Password B
b192 Set the password B for the Soft Lock 0000 −
Setting 0001 to FFFF
Selection (b031).*2
Password B for Set the password B authentication
b193 0000 to FFFF 0000 −
Authentication parameter.*2
*1. These passwords cannot be set to 0000.
*2. You can use any of the following 16 (hex) characters for parameter setting: 0 to 9, A, b, C, d, E, F.

Be sure not to forget the set password. Note that there is no way to reset the password lock
once you forget the set password and even OMRON factories and service stations have no
means to check your password.

7 Other Functions
Overview of Password Function

(Example) Password A
Password not set (Default)

b190 = 0000 (Input enabled)
b191 = 0000 (Input disabled)
Change to b037 allowed
Set b190 to “1234”. Set b190 to “0000”.

(Password set) (Password clear)
Set b191 to “1234”. Authentication enabled

Password lock enabled
(Password authentication)
b190 = 0000 (Input disabled) b190 = 1234 (Input enabled)
b191 = 0000 (Input enabled) b191 = 1234 (Input disabled)
Change to b037 disallowed Turn power supply off and Change to b037 allowed
then on again, leave Digital
Password lock enabled. b037 Operator unoperated for Inverter transits to this state if pass-
value cannot be changed. approximately 10 min, or word is authenticated. Although pass-
change password. word settings are not lost, it accepts
changes to b037 value. If power supply
is turned off and then again, or if Digital
Operator is left unoperated for approxi-
mately 10 min, inverter automatically
returns to password locked state.
Password Setting
⚫ Password setting
(1) Set the Display Selection (b037) and Soft Lock Selection (b031) depending on the
data you want to protect.
(2) Set any passwords (except for 0000) in the Password A/B Setting (b190/b192).
(3) The password lock is enabled. You cannot change the b037/b031 value.

7 Other Functions
⚫ Password authentication (Performed by user who knows password to change

b037/b031 data)
(1) In the Password A/B for Authentication (b191/b193), set any password.
(2) The inverter displays “Good” if the password is correct, allowing you to change the
b037 value. If the set password is incorrect, it displays “Err” and returns to the pass-
word lock enabled state, as described in step (3) of Password Setting. If the Digital
Operator is left unoperated for approximately 10 min, or if the power supply is turned

off and then again, the inverter automatically returns to password lock enabled state,
as described in step (3) of Password Setting.
⚫ Password change
(1) Perform password authentication. You cannot change the password(s) in the pass-
word lock enabled state, as described in step (3) of Password Setting. (Make sure
that 0000 is displayed.)
(2) In the Password A/B for Authentication (b191/b193), set a different password.
Enter
-1 +1 Enter Enter
JOG
Enter
(3) When the password is changed, the inverter automatically returns to the password 7
lock enabled state, as described in step (3) of Password Setting.
7-6-9 Password Function

⚫ Password Clear
(1) Perform password authentication. You cannot clear the password(s) in the password
lock enabled state, as described in step (3) of Password Setting. (Make sure that
0000 is displayed.)
(2) In the Password A/B Setting (b190/b192), set 0000.
(3) The inverter returns to the Password not set state (default) with the password data all
cleared.
Enter
-1 +1 Enter Enter
JOG
Enter

7 Other Functions
7-6-10 User Parameter Setting Function

The parameter group U consists of user parameters. Up to 32 user parameters can be registered as
desired. When registration is done, set the Display Selection (b037) to 02 (User setting). After that, you
will see only the functions registered with U001 to U032 in addition to d001, F001, b037, b190 and
b191.
Parameter Default
No. data
no: No registration
U001 to
U032
User Selection 1 to 32 d001 to P196 no −
Register any parameter.
b037 Display Selection 02: User setting + d001, F001, b037 00 −
7-6-11 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function

When the User Parameter Automatic Setting Function (b039) is set to 01 (Enabled), the parameters
with changed data are stored automatically in an ascending order from U001 to U032. This function is
useful as the change history.
The data (parameter setting) displayed on the screen is stored at the time when you press the Enter
key. This is also applicable for storing the monitor functions (d***).
U001 stores the most recent parameter data; U032 stores the oldest.
If the same parameter was changed, the previous change is deleted and the last one is stored. In addi-
tion, if the number of the parameters exceeds 32, the data is deleted from the oldest (U032).
Parameter Default
No. data
User Parameter Automatic Setting 00: Disabled
b039 00 −
Function 01: Enabled
Related functions U001 to U032
Note Be aware that changing the 039 value from 00 to 01 initializes (resets to “no”) all parameter data registered
to the user parameters U001 to U032.

7 Other Functions
7-6-12 Jog Dial Sensitivity

Change the Jog Sensitivity Setting (C117) and Jog Carry Sensitivity Setting (C118) parameter values to
adjust how much the value changes when the Jog dial is rotated.
Parameter Default
No. data
1 to 24
Set the Jog dial count required
to increase or decrease the
C117 Jog Sensitivity Setting 1 −
value by 1. One rotation of the
Jog dial corresponds to 24
counts.
1 to 100

When you operate the Jog dial
continuously in the same
direction during data setting, the
C118 Jog Carry Sensitivity Setting digit that you can operate is 20 −
shifted. Set the value required to
shift the digit as the amount of
increase or decrease of the
display value per second.
7-6-12 Jog Dial Sensitivity

7 Other Functions
7-7 Restart Functions

This section describes the restart-related functions and their operations.
7-7-1 Frequency Pull-in Restart

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter supports two restart methods, which can be selected using the follow-
ing functions.
Related functions of frequency pull-in

Description
restart
Power Interruption/Undervolt-
b001 age Restart Selection Select the restart method after the inverter shuts off its output.
(P. 7-64)
Overvoltage/Overcurrent
Select the restart method after the inverter shuts off its output due to
b008 Restart Selection
an overvoltage/overcurrent.
(P. 7-64)
Reset Restart Selection
C103 Restart after Resetting the inverter.
(P. 5-44)
Free-run Stop Selection Select the restart method after the free-run stop input signal is can-
b088
(P. 5-38) celed (turned OFF).
The frequency pull-in restart is a function to restart the motor in a free-run state without stopping it.
After output is shut off, the Digital Operator displays until the inverter restarts.
⚫ Frequency pull-in restart

Frequency pull-in restart causes the inverter to restart by outputting the starting frequency set in the
Starting Frequency Selection at Frequency Pull-in Restart (b030) to the motor in a free-run stop
state. When the output current reaches the Frequency Pull-in Restart Level (b028), the inverter
decelerates according to the Frequency Pull-in Restart Parameter (b029) to suppress the output
current. Once the output frequency and the output voltage are balanced, the inverter performs nor-
mal operation.
This enables a smooth restart independent of the voltage between motor terminals.
Use this setting when the inverter is in free-run state for a long time due to a large load inertia.
In the PM motor mode, the inverter does not display “Frequency pull-in restart” for selection func-
tions.

7 Other Functions
The main parameters related to frequency pull-in restart are as follows.

For details on free-run stop, refer to 5-7-2 Free-run Stop Selection on page 5-38.

Parameter Default
No. data
0.3 to 100.0
b003 Restart Standby Time 1.0 s
Set the wait time until the inverter restarts.
0.00 to 590.00
Frequency Pull-in Lower Executing the function causes the Inverter to
b007 0.00 Hz
Limit Frequency restart from 0 Hz if the frequency at shutoff is
the set value of b007 or less.
Rated
7
b028 0.20  Rated current to 2.00  Rated current current of A
Level inverter
7-7-1 Frequency Pull-in Restart

0.1 to 3000.0
Set the deceleration rate for the output fre-
b029 quency during frequency pull-in restart. 0.5 s
Parameter
Set the deceleration time from the maximum
frequency to 0 Hz.
Starting Frequency Selec- 00: Frequency at shutoff
b030 tion at Frequency Pull-in 01: Maximum frequency 00 −

7 Other Functions
7-7-2 Restart during Power Interruption, Undervoltage/Overvoltage,

Overcurrent
Select whether to have the inverter trip or restart if restart during power interruption, undervoltage/over-
voltage, overcurrent occurs.
Restart during Power Interruption, Undervoltage/Overvoltage,

Overcurrent
Power interruption/Undervoltage restart: When the Power Interruption/Undervoltage Restart Selection
(b001) is set to one of the restart options, the inverter repeats restart operation for the number of times
set in the Power Interruption Restart Count (b005) in the event of a momentary power interruption and
then trips. However, when 01 (No limit) is selected, it will not trip.
The standby time until restart is set with Restart Standby Time (b003).
Overvoltage/Overcurrent restart: When the Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart Selection (b008) is set to
one of the restart options, the inverter repeats restart operation for the number of times set in the Over-
voltage/Overcurrent Restart Count (b010) in the event of an undervoltage, and then trips.
In the Power Interruption/Undervoltage Trip Selection During Stop (b004), select whether or not to have
the inverter trip if a power interruption/undervoltage occurs during stop.
In the Power Interruption/Undervoltage Restart Selection (b001), select the restart condition according to
your system: 0-Hz restart, Frequency matching restart, Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop, or
Frequency pull-in restart. You have the option of 0-Hz restart, Frequency matching deceleration trip, or
Frequency pull-in restart.
If the inverter is in an undervoltage state continuously for 40 seconds during restart operation, an
Undervoltage protection (E09) trip will occur.
Parameter Default
No. data
00 Trip
01 0-Hz restart
Power Interruption/Under- 02 Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff *3
b001 voltage Restart Selection 00 −
Frequency pull-in restart (Trip after
*1 *2 03
deceleration stop) *3 *4
04 Frequency pull-in restart
The inverter restarts if the power
interruption duration is shorter than
Allowable Power Interrup- the set time. (Example 1)
b002 0.3 to 25.0 1.0 s
tion Time The inverter trips if the power inter-
ruption duration is equal to or longer
than the set time. (Example 2)
Set the wait time until the inverter
restarts.
00 Disabled (Trip disabled during stop)
Enabled (Trip also enabled during
Power Interruption/Under- 01
stop)
b004 voltage Trip Selection Dur- 00 −
Disabled during stop and during
ing Stop *1
02 deceleration by RUN command
OFF.
Power Interruption Restart 00 16 times
b005 00 −
Count 01 No limit

7 Other Functions
Parameter Default
No. data
Executing the function causes the
Inverter to restart from 0 Hz if the
Frequency Pull-in Lower 0.00 to
b007 frequency at shutoff is the set value 0.00 Hz
Limit Frequency 590.00
of b007 or less.
(Examples 3 and 4)
00 Trip
01 0-Hz restart
Overvoltage/Overcurrent 02 Frequency pull-in restart at shutoff *3
b008 00 −
Restart Selection Frequency pull-in restart (Trip after
03
deceleration stop) *3
04 Frequency pull-in restart
Set how many times you want to
Overvoltage/Overcurrent have the inverter repeat restart oper-
b010 1 to 3 3 time
Restart Count ation if overvoltage/overcurrent
occurs.
Overvoltage/Overcurrent Set the wait time until the inverter
b011 0.3 to 100.0 1.0 s
Restart Standby Time restarts.
0.20 
Rated cur- Rated
Frequency Pull-in Restart Set the current level during fre- current
b028 rent to 2.00 A
of

Level  Rated quency pull-in restart.
inverter
current
Set the deceleration rate for the out-
put frequency during frequency
Frequency Pull-in Restart 0.1 to pull-in restart.
b029 3000.0 0.5 s
Parameter
Set the deceleration time from the
maximum frequency to 0 Hz.
00 Frequency at shutoff
Starting Frequency Selec-
01 Maximum frequency
b030 tion at Frequency Pull-in 00 − 7
Set frequency (Frequency refer-
Restart 02
ence)
voltage, Overcurrent
7-7-2 Restart during Power Interruption, Undervoltage/Over-
11/12 Selection
C021,
C022, C026 Multi-function Relay Out- 09 UV: During undervoltage signal − −
Selection
*1. Even when the Power Interruption/Undervoltage Restart Selection (b001) is set to 01 to 03 (a restart option) or
the Power Interruption/Undervoltage Trip Selection During Stop (b004) is set to 00 or 02 (a disabled option), the
inverter will trip if the actual power interruption time exceeds the Allowable Power Interruption Time (b002).
(Example 2)
*2. Even when an restart option is selected, the inverter will trip if it is in an undervoltage state continuously for 40
seconds or more.
*3. Executing the function causes the inverter to restart from 0 Hz if the frequency at shutoff is the set value of Fre-
quency Pull-in Lower Limit Frequency (b007) or less.
*4. If an overvoltage, overcurrent, or other trip occurs during deceleration, the motor will fall in a free-run state with
an Undervoltage (E09) error. In this case, increase the deceleration time.

7 Other Functions
Below are the timing charts for the restart.

t0: Momentary power interruption time
t1: Allowable Power Interruption Time (b002)
t2: Restart Standby Time (b003)
(Example 1) t0 < t1 (b001=02 or 04)
Power supply
Inverter output
Free-run
Motor rotation
speed Frequency pull-in restart
t0 t2
t1
(Example 2) t0 > t1 (b001=02 or 04)
Power supply
Inverter output
Free-run
Motor rotation
speed
t0
t1 Trip occurs.
(Example 3) Frequency at shutoff (rotation speed) > b007 (b001=02)
Power supply
Inverter output
Free-run
b007
Motor frequency
(rotation speed)
Frequency matching restart

0
t0 t2
(Example 4) Frequency at shutoff (rotation speed) < b007 (b001=02)
Power supply
Inverter output
Free-run b007
Motor frequency
(rotation speed)
t0 t2 0-Hz restart
0-Hz restart

7 Other Functions
Alarm Signal Output in Case of Power Interruption/Undervoltage

during Stop
In the Power Interruption/Undervoltage Trip Selection During Stop (b004), select whether or not to have
the inverter output an alarm signal if a power interruption or undervoltage occurs.
The inverter will output an alarm signal as long as its control power supply remains ON.
⚫ Alarm signal output in case of power interruption/undervoltage during stop

(Example 1) b004 = 00 (Disabled)
Power supply
RUN command
Output frequency
AL output

(Alarm signal)
RS input (Reset)
(Example 2) b004 = 01 (Enabled)
Power supply
RUN command 7
voltage, Overcurrent
7-7-2 Restart during Power Interruption, Undervoltage/Over-
Output frequency
AL output
(Alarm signal)
RS input (Reset)
(Example 3) b004 = 02 (Disabled during stop and during deceleration by RUN command OFF)
Power supply
RUN command
Output frequency
AL output
(Alarm signal)
RS input (Reset)

7 Other Functions
7-7-3 Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function (USP)

Use this function to have the inverter trip with the alarm code E13 displayed, if the power supply is
turned on with the RUN command ON in the inverter.
To reset a trip, perform the reset operation, or turn OFF the RUN command. (Example 1)
If a trip is reset with the RUN command input ON, the inverter starts running immediately after the trip is
reset. (Example 2)
If the RUN command turns ON after the power supply is turned on, the inverter operates normally.
(Example 3)
Allocate the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 13 (USP).
Parameter Default
No. data
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 13: USP (Power recovery restart prevention
C007 − −
to 7 Selection function)
The following shows how the power recovery restart prevention function works.
(Example 1) Power-on with RUN command ON (Example 2) Power-on with RUN command ON
(Reset with RUN command OFF) (Reset with reset signal (RS) ON)
Power supply Power supply
FW input ON FW input ON
(Forward) OFF (Forward)
USP input ON USP input ON
RS input RS input
(Reset) (Reset)
AL output AL output
(Alarm signal) (Alarm signal)
Output frequency Output frequency
(Example 3) RUN command ON after power-on

(Normal operation)
Power supply
FW input
(Forward) OFF ON
USP input ON
RS input
(Reset)
AL output OFF
(Alarm signal)
Output frequency

7 Other Functions
7-7-4 Deceleration Stop on Power Interruption Function

Use this function to have the inverter decelerate and stop after the power supply is shut off during oper-
ation, while preventing it from exceeding the overvoltage level.
You can select one of the three deceleration stop methods provided in the Deceleration Stop Selection
on Power Interruption (b050).
This function will not be canceled until the inverter completes deceleration stop operation. To restart the
inverter after power recovery with this function activated, turn ON the STOP command (to turn OFF the
RUN command) and then turn ON the RUN command again.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
Deceleration Stop Selec-
01: Enabled (Deceleration stop)
b050 tion on Power Interrup- 00 −
tion 02: Enabled (Constant voltage, without recovery)*1
03: Enabled (Constant voltage, with recovery)
200-V
200-V class: 0.0 to 400.0 class:
Starting Voltage on 400-V class: 0.0 to 800.0 220.0
b051 400-V V
Power Interruption*2 The function will be activated if the main circuit DC
voltage drops to the set value or lower. class:
440.0

200-V class: 0.0 to 400.0 200-V
Deceleration Hold Level 400-V class: 0.0 to 800.0 class:
on Power 360.0
b052 The inverter will stop decelerating if the voltage rise 400-V V
Interruption *2*3 caused by regeneration exceeds the set value after class:
starting operation. 720.0
Deceleration Time on 0.01 to 3600.00
b053 Set the deceleration time for the deceleration stop on 1.00 s
Power Interruption*4 power interruption function.
Deceleration Starting 0.00 to 10.00 (100.00)*5
b054 Width on Power Set when you want to have the inverter start deceler- 0.00 Hz 7
Interruption *4 ating as the difference from the output frequency.
Overvoltage Suppression

b133 Proportional Gain During 0.00 to 5.00 0.20 −
Deceleration
Overvoltage Suppression
b134 Integral Time During 0.0 to 150.0 1.0 s
Deceleration
*1. When b050 is set to 02 or 03, PI control is performed to maintain a constant main circuit DC voltage.
Adjust the Overvoltage Suppression Proportional Gain During Deceleration (b133)/Overvoltage Suppression
Integral Time During Deceleration (b134) value:
To improve the responsiveness, increase the proportional gain value and decrease the integral time value.
However, doing so increases the possibility of a trip.
Conversely, decreasing the proportional gain value and increasing the integral time value excessively results
in an undervoltage.
*2. The values set in b051 and b052 must be the undervoltage level (210 V for 200-V class, 410 V for 400-V class)
or higher.
This function will not work if the inverter causes an undervoltage trip.
Note also that the b051 value must be lower than the b052 value.

7 Other Functions
*3. When the Deceleration Stop Selection on Power Interruption (b050) is set to 01 (Enabled: Deceleration stop),
be sure to set the Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption (b052) to a value higher than the incoming
voltage multiplied by the square root of 2. Set b052 to 380 VDC or higher for 240-VAC incoming voltage and
to 750 VDC or higher for 480 VAC-incoming voltage, respectively. If it is set to a value less than the incoming
voltage multiplied by the square root of 2, the inverter will remain in a deceleration stop state even after the
power is restored and cannot decelerate. (The inverter accepts neither RUN command nor frequency refer-
ence input until the deceleration stop operation is completed.) In this case, turn OFF the inverter power supply
to complete the operation of the deceleration stop function.
If the value set in the Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption (b052) is less than the value set in the
Starting Voltage on Power Interruption (b051), the inverter will ignore the b052 setting and operate according
to the b051 setting.
*4. If the value set in the Deceleration Starting Width on Power Interruption (b054) is too large, the inverter may
decelerate rapidly, which causes an overcurrent. If an overcurrent occurs, decrease the b054 value.
Conversely, if the Deceleration Starting Width on Power Interruption (b054) is too small, or if the Deceleration
Time on Power Interruption (b053) is too long, the regenerative energy is in short supply and the internal DC
power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, which causes an undervoltage. If an undervoltage occurs, in-
crease the b054 value or decrease the b053 value.
Deceleration Stop on Power Interruption Function: Deceleration

Stop (b050 = 01)
Use this setting to have the inverter decelerate and stop after the power supply is shut off during opera-
tion, while preventing it from exceeding the Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption (b052).
If the power supply is shut off during operation, the inverter will decelerate by the amount set in the
Deceleration Starting Width on Power Interruption (b054) at once when the voltage drops below the
Starting Voltage on Power Interruption (b051) value, then decelerate according to the Deceleration
Time on Power Interruption (b053) setting.
However, during deceleration, if the inverter falls in an overvoltage state due to regeneration (if it
reaches the Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption (b052) value or higher), this function will not
be activated until the overvoltage state is canceled, so deceleration stop will not occur.

• When the Deceleration Stop Selection on Power Interruption (b050) is set to 01 (Enabled:
Deceleration stop), be sure to set the Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption (b052)
to a value higher than the input power supply voltage multiplied by the square root of 2. Set
b052 to 380 VDC or higher for 240-VAC incoming voltage and to 750 VDC or higher for 480
VAC-incoming voltage, respectively. If it is set to a value less than the incoming voltage volt-
age multiplied by the square root of 2, the inverter will remain in a deceleration stop state
even after the power is restored and cannot decelerate. (The inverter accepts neither RUN
command nor frequency reference input until the deceleration stop operation is completed.)
In this case, turn OFF the inverter power supply to complete the operation of the deceleration
stop function.
• If the value set in the Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption (b052) is less than the
value set in the Starting Voltage on Power Interruption (b051), the inverter will ignore the
b052 setting and run according to the b051 setting.
• This function will not reset until the deceleration stop operation is completed. To restart the
inverter after power recovery during this function operation, in a stop state, input the RUN
command again.
• If the value set in the Deceleration Starting Width on Power Interruption (b054) is too large,
the inverter may decelerate rapidly, which may cause an overcurrent. If an overcurrent
occurs, decrease the b054 value.
• If the Deceleration Starting Width on Power Interruption (b054) is too small, or if the Deceler-
ation Time on Power Interruption (b053) is too long, the regenerative energy is in short sup-
ply and the internal DC power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, which causes an

7 Other Functions
undervoltage trip. If an undervoltage trip occurs, increase the b054 value or decrease the
b053 value.
Main circuit P-N voltage
[V]
b052
b051
Undervoltage level
Time [s]
Output frequency
[Hz]
b054
b053
Time [s]

Deceleration Stop on Power Interruption Function: DC Voltage Kept
Constant (b050 = 02: Without Recovery/b050 = 03: With Recovery)
If a momentary power interruption occur during operation, or if the main circuit DC voltage drops, these
settings will cause the inverter to decelerate with the DC voltage in the main circuit kept at the level set
in the Deceleration Hold Level on Power Interruption (b052).
This function is activated when all of the following start conditions are met:
• b050 = 02 or 03
7
• During RUN (Disabled during trip, during undervoltage, and during stop)
• The main circuit DC voltage drops to the Starting Voltage on Power Interruption (b051) level or lower.

If the power interruption duration is short, the function allows the inverter to decelerate and stop without
shutting off its output, so the main circuit DC voltage can be kept constant. However, if the power inter-
ruption causes an undervoltage trip, the inverter will shut off its output immediately, so the process of this
function will be terminated. The subsequent operation when the power is restored after a momentary
power interruption depends on the Power Interruption/Undervoltage Restart Selection (b001) setting.
When b050 is set to 03, if the power interruption state is canceled and the incoming voltage is restored before
the occurrence of an under voltage trip, the inverter can recover normal operation. However, this function may
cause deceleration stop depending on the b052 setting. Refer to the table and operation examples below.
b050 b052 Operation
b052 > Main circuit DC voltage at incoming Deceleration stop (DC
(Example 1)
voltage recovery voltage constant control)
02 (without recovery)
b052 < Main circuit DC voltage at incoming Deceleration stop (Normal
(Example 2)
voltage recovery operation)
b052 > Main circuit DC voltage at incoming Deceleration stop (DC
(Example 1)
voltage recovery voltage constant control)
03 (with recovery)
b052 < Main circuit DC voltage at incoming
Operation (Normal operation) (Example 2)
voltage recovery
If the inverter makes a deceleration stop as a result of this function, it force-terminates the FW (For-
ward) signal even if this signal is ON. To restart the inverter, make sure that the incoming voltage is
recovered and then turn ON the FW (Forward) signal again.

7 Other Functions
(Example 1)
Vpn [V]
b052
Main circuit DC voltage at b051
DC voltage kept constant.
Output frequency Time

[Hz]
b050 = 02, 03
(Deceleration stop)
Time
Incoming voltage recovery
Depending on the proportional gain/integral time setting, the function may cause the main circuit DC
voltage level to be lower than the b052 value.
(Example 2)

Main circuit DC voltage at incoming voltage recovery
Vpn [V]
b052
b051
DC voltage kept constant
Output frequency Time

[Hz] b050 = 03 (Running)
b050 = 02
(Deceleration stop)
Time
Incoming voltage recovery

7 Other Functions
7-8 Functions Related to Protection,

Warning, and Various Output Signals
7-8 Functions Related to Protection, Warning, and Various Output Signals

This section describes the protective functions such as warning signals.
7-8-1 Free-electronic Thermal Function

To enable the free-electronic thermal function, set the 1st/2nd Electronic Thermal Characteristics
Selection (b013/b213) to 02 (Free setting).
The free-electronic thermal function allows you to set the reduction factor for electronic thermal characteristic
according to your application.
As shown in the reduction factor graph below, set the three points that determine the electronic thermal
characteristics using the associated parameters.
When b016, b018, and b020 are set to the same rated current value, the reduction factor is x1.0.
However, the basic reduction factor shown below is effective independently of the free-electronic ther-
mal function settings.
The final reduction factor is equivalent to the reduction factor set for the free-electronic thermal function
multiplied by the basic reduction factor.
This final reduction factor is then applied to the current value set in the 1st/2nd Electronic Thermal
Level (b012/b212) to derive the reference value (100%) of basic characteristics for the electronic ther-
mal function.
For details on electronic thermal characteristics, refer to 5-3-2 Electronic Thermal Function on page
5-15.
Parameter Default 7
No. data
Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 0. to Free-electronic Thermal Fre-
7-8-1 Free-electronic Thermal Function

b015
1 quency 2
Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 1
Free-electronic Thermal Frequency
b017 to Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 0. Hz
2
3
Free-electronic Thermal Frequency Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 2
b019
3 to 590.00
0.00 to 1.00  Rated current
b016/b018/ Free-electronic Thermal Current
Set the current value at each break 0.00 A
b020 1/2/3
point.
Related functions b012, b212, b013, b213
⚫ Basic reduction factor

7 Other Functions
⚫ Free-electronic thermal reduction factor
Example. 3-phase 200-V, 1.5 kW (Heavy load rating 8 A)

• When b012 = 8 [A], b015 = 1.5 [Hz], b016 = 4 [A]
The basic reduction factor is:  0.9 at 1.5 Hz. The free-electronic thermal reduction factor is:
b016/b012 =  0.5. The final reduction factor is: 0.9  0.5 = x0.45.
The reference value (100%) of basic characteristics for electronic thermal function is: 8 [A] 
0.45 = 3.6 [A].
Therefore, 150% of the basic characteristics value is: 5.4 [A] for 60 s.
7-8-2 Motor Electronic Thermal Function

Setting the Motor Electronic Thermal Selection (b910) to 01 to 03 separates the inverter from the motor
electronic thermal function, which allows you to set the electronic thermal characteristics according to
the motor in use.
To enable the motor electronic thermal function and parameters b911 to b913, set the Motor Electronic
Thermal Selection (b910) to 01 to 03.
• You can set electronic thermal characteristics according to the thermal time constant of the motor in
use.
For the thermal time constant of your motor, contact the motor manufacturer.
• In the 1st/2nd Electronic Thermal Level (b012/b212), set the rated current of your motor.
• In the 1st/2nd Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection (b013/b213), set the characteristics of
your motor.
• In the Motor Electronic Thermal Selection (b910), select an appropriate setting for your motor from 01
to 03.
The recommended setting is 03 (Enabled: b912 time parameter subtraction). The settings 01
(Enabled: Fixed subtraction rate), 02 (Enabled: b911 subtraction rate), and 03 (Enabled: b912 time
parameter subtraction) are described later in this section.
• In the Motor Electronic Thermal Subtraction Ratio (b911), set a subtraction rate with an allowance of
approximately 40% added to the thermal time constant of your motor when b910 is set to 02.
• In the Motor Electronic Thermal Subtraction Time Constant (b912), set a subtraction time constant
with an allowance of approximately 20% added to the thermal time constant of your motor when b910
is set to 03.
• In the Motor Electronic Thermal Integration Gain (b913), set an electronic thermal integration gain
when b910 is set to 01 to 03. When b913 is set to 100%, the overload capacity is 150% of the basic
characteristics of the electric thermal function for 1 minute.
For details on the basic characteristics of the electronic thermal function, refer to 5-3-2 Electronic
Thermal Function on page 5-15.
Decreasing the b913 value prolongs the basic characteristics detection time, while increasing the
value shortens the basic characteristics detection time.
Set an optimal value based on the time during which 150% of the overload capacity of your motor is
applied.
However, be sure to provide a safety margin of 20 to 50%.

7 Other Functions
• If 150% of overload capacity of your motor is large:

Set a small value for 1 minute relative to the time during which 150% of the overload capacity of
your motor is applied.
• If 150% of overload capacity of your motor is small:
Set a large value for 1 minute relative to the time during which 150% of the overload capacity of
your motor is applied.

• Setting the Motor Electronic Thermal Selection (b910) to 00 (Disabled) enables the electronic thermal
function to simultaneously detect the inverter and the motor.
This has the same characteristics as those of the conventional electronic thermal function, which the
electronic thermal detection characteristics for the inverter are the basic characteristics. Specifically,
the rated output current that serves as the reference value for overload detection changes to the set
b012/b212 value. The detection characteristics also change depending on whether the Inverter is in
the normal or light load mode.
For details on the electronic thermal detection function of the inverter, refer to 5-3-2 Electronic Ther-
mal Function on page 5-15. Note that the subtraction ratio is the same as when b911 is set to 01.
• When the Electronic Thermal Load Rate Memory Selection at Power-off (b914) is set to 01
(Enabled), the electronic thermal load rate will be stored when power supply to the Inverter is turned
OFF. The stored load rate will be read the next time the power supply is turned ON. When the param-
eter is set to 00 (Disabled), the counter value will not be stored. It will be cleared when the power
supply is turned ON. The factory default setting is 01 (Enabled). To comply with UL standards, set
this to 01 (Enabled).
Parameter Default
No. data
1st/2nd Electronic Thermal Rated
b012/b212 0.20  Rated current to 1.00  Rated current current A
Level
00: Reduced torque characteristics
1st/2nd Electronic Thermal
b013/b213 01: Constant torque characteristics 01 −
Characteristics Selection
02: Free setting
00: Disabled
Motor Electronic Thermal 01: Enabled (Fixed subtraction rate)
b910 03 −
Selection*1*2 02: Enabled (b911 subtraction rate)
7-8-2 Motor Electronic Thermal Function

03: Enabled (b912 time parameter subtraction)
Motor Electronic Thermal 0.10 to 100000.00*3
b911 600.00 s
Subtraction Ratio (Displays upper 5 digits)
Motor Electronic Thermal 0.10 to 100000.00*3
b912 120.00 s
Subtraction Time Constant (Displays upper 5 digits)
Motor Electronic Thermal
b913 1.0 to 200.0 100.0 %
Integration Gain
Electronic Thermal Load 00: Disabled
b914 Rate Memory Selection at 01 − 7
01: Enabled
Power-off
*1. When b910 is set to 01 to 03, the electronic thermal function is separated for the motor and for the inverter.
The electronic thermal function for the inverter works based on the constant torque characteristics with refer-
ence to the rated output current of the inverter, independent of the b012/b212 setting. For details on the elec-
tronic thermal detection function of the inverter, refer to 5-3-2 Electronic Thermal Function on page 5-15.
*2. When b910 is set to 01 to 03, the overload trip error is divided into the motor overload E05. and the inverter
overload E38..

7 Other Functions
⚫ b910=01: Enabled (Fixed subtraction rate)

The electronic thermal function is separated for the motor and for the inverter. For the motor, the
heat radiation is calculated with a fixed subtraction ratio.
This subtraction ratio is fixed and applied to electronic thermal values from 100% to 0% for 10 min-
utes.
Electronic thermal load rate

100
[%] Overload detection level
Time
10 [min]
⚫ b910=02: Enabled (b911 subtraction rate)

The electronic thermal function is separated for the motor and for the inverter. The heat radiation is
calculated with the subtraction ratio set in b911.
Set the b911 value according to the thermal time constant of the motor.

100
Overload detection level
[%]
Time
b911
⚫ b910=03: Enabled (b912 time parameter subtraction)

The electronic thermal function is separated for the motor and for the inverter. The heat radiation is
calculated with the time parameter set in b912.
Set the b912 value according to the thermal time constant of the motor.

100
[%]
40
[%] Time
b912
b912  5

7 Other Functions
7-8-3 Electronic Thermal Warning

Use this function to output a warning signal before the motor electronic thermal function executes an
overload protection. In C061, set the warning level.
Set the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022) or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2)

Function Selection (C026) to 13 (THM).
Parameter Default
No. data
0.
Electric thermal warning disabled
C061 Electronic Thermal Warning Level 1. to 100.*1 90. %
Set the output level of the thermal
warning signal.
Multi-function Output 11/12 13: THM (Electronic thermal
C021, C022, Selection warning)
C026 − −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
AL2) Function Selection
*1. Set this in units of percentage as 100% of the overload trip level (E05).
7-8-3 Electronic Thermal Warning

7 Other Functions
7-8-4 Overload Limit/Overload Warning
Overload Limit
The inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation and, if the set
overload limit level is reached, decreases the output frequency automatically according to the overload
limit parameter.
This function is useful to prevent the occurrence of an overcurrent trip due to an excessive torque
during acceleration or rapid load fluctuations during constant speed operation.
By using two sets of parameters b021/b022/b023 and b024/b025/b026, you can configure two overload
limit function settings.
To switch between the parameter sets b021/b022/b023 and b024/b025/b026, set the Multi-function
Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 39 (OLR) and turn ON/OFF the terminal to which the OLR
function is allocated.
In the Overload Limit Level (b022/b025/b222), set the current value at which you want to activate this
function.
In the Overload Limit Parameter (b023/b026/b223), set the deceleration time from the maximum fre-
quency to 0 Hz.
When b021/b024 is set to 03 (Enabled during acceleration and constant speed (Accelerated during
regeneration)), if current exceeding the overload limit level flows during regenerative operation, it will be
determined as regeneration, making the inverter accelerate.
Because this function causes automatic deceleration even during acceleration, if the value set in the
Overload Limit Parameter (b023/b026/b223) is too small, an overvoltage trip may occur due to the
regenerative energy from the motor.
If this function is activated during acceleration to prevent the target frequency from being attained,
make the following adjustments.
• Increase the acceleration time. (Refer to 5-6 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings on page 5-32.)
• Increase the Overload Limit Level (b022/b025/b222).
Parameter
No.
00: Disabled
1st Overload Limit Selection/ 01: Enabled during acceleration/con-
1st Overload Limit Selection stant speed
b021/b024
b221 2 02: Enabled during constant speed 01 −
2nd Overload Limit Selec- 03: Enabled during acceleration /con-
tion stant speed (Accelerated during
regeneration)*1
Set the current value at which you want
to activate this function.
Heavy load mode (b049 = 00): Heavy load
1st Overload Limit Level/ mode: Rated
b022/b025 0.20  Rated current to 2.00  Rated current  1.50
b222 1st Overload Limit Level 2 A
current Light load
2nd Overload Limit Level mode: Rated
Light load mode (b049 = 01):
current  1.20
0.20  Rated current to 1.50  Rated
current

7 Other Functions
Parameter
No.
0.1 to 3000.0
1st Overload Limit Parame-
Set the deceleration rate for the output
ter/1st Overload Limit
b023/b026 frequency when the overload limit func-
Parameter 2 1.0 s
b223 tion is enabled.
2nd Overload Limit Parame-

Set the deceleration time from the max-
ter
imum frequency to 0 Hz.
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to 7 39: OLR (Overload limit switching)
C007 − −
Selection
*1. The Inverter speeds up in a regenerative state, only during operation. It does not speed up during deceleration.
⚫ Example case where overload limit function is activated during acceleration

(b021/b024/b221 = 01 or 03)
Overload Limit Level

b022/b025
b222
Deceleration caused by
Overload Limit Parameter
Output current
Maximum frequency
A004/A204 Set frequency
F001
Inverter output
frequency
b023/b026/b223
7
⚫ Example case where overload limit function is activated during deceleration
(during regeneration)
7-8-4 Overload Limit/Overload Warning

For the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series, the overload limit function does not work during deceleration stop.
Therefore, even if the output current value exceeds the overload limit level due to regeneration, the
inverter continues the deceleration stop.
Output current
Overload
Limit Level
b022/b222, b025
Output
frequency

7 Other Functions
Overload Warning
The overload warning function causes the inverter to output an overload warning if the load is too large,
before it detects an overload trip.
This is useful to prevent mechanical damage to transfer machines etc. due to overweighed loading, or
stoppage of transfer lines due to an overload, through the use of the overload protection function of the
inverter.
Allocate the Multi-function Output 11/12 selection (C021/C022) or the Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 03 (OL: Overload warning) or 26 (OL2: Overload warning 2). (Two
types of overload warning signals can be output.)
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Enabled during accelera-
tion/deceleration and constant
Overload Warning Signal Out-
C040 speed 01 −
put Selection
01: Enabled during constant
speed
0.00: Overload warning disabled
0.01  Rated current to 2.00 
Rated current Rated
C041/C241 1st/2nd Overload Warning Level current  A
The inverter will output the OL sig- 1.15
nal when the set overload warning
level is reached.
0.00: Overload warning disabled
0.01  Rated current to 2.00 
Rated current Rated
C111 1st Overload Warning Level 2 current  A
The inverter will output the OL2 sig- 1.15
nal when the set overload warning
level is reached.
Multi-function Output 11/12 03: OL (Overload warning)
C021, C022 Selection 26: OL2 (Overload warning 2)
C026 − −
Overload Limit Level

b022/b025
Overload Warning Level
C041/C111
Output current
OL/OL2 output

7 Other Functions
7-8-5 Overcurrent Suppression Function

This function suppresses the overcurrent caused by a steep current increase due to an impact load etc.
It causes the inverter to stop accelerating when the output current reaches approximately 180% of the rated current.
Default

data
00: Disabled
Overcurrent Suppression
b027 01: Enabled 01 −
Selection
02: Enabled (Reduced voltage startup)
• If setting the Overcurrent Suppression Selection (b027) to 01 (Enabled) still causes an overcurrent,
set it to 02 (Reduced voltage startup). This setting reduces the output voltage and moreover sup-
presses the overcurrent at the startup after a temporal stop.
• Even during overcurrent suppression, input from the STOP/RESET key will be accepted.
• Although the overcurrent suppression function is enabled, an overcurrent trip may occur due to short
circuit or equivalent.
Output current
180% of rat ed
current
Time
Output frequency
Time
7
7-8-6 External Trip (EXT)
7-8-5 Overcurrent Suppression Function

Use this signal to have the inverter trip via an error signal generated by a peripheral system. To do so,
set the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 12 (EXT).
When the EXT terminal turns ON, the inverter trips with the alarm code E12 displayed and shuts off its output.
Once the inverter trips with the alarm code E12 displayed, the trip status will not be reset even if the
error signal is reset from external equipment (the terminal EXT is turned OFF).
In this case, perform the reset operation or cycle the power supply to reset the trip.
Default
data
Multi-function Input 1 to 12: EXT (External trip)
C001 to C007 − −
7 Selection
RUN command FW/RV
Input to terminal EXT

Free running
Motor rotation speed
RS (Reset) input
AL output
(Alarm signal)

7 Other Functions
7-8-7 Thermistor Trip Function

You can provide thermal protection for external equipment such as a motor by connecting a thermistor
installed on it to the inverter and enabling this function.
Connect a PTC thermistor to the inverter. If the resistance of the PTC thermistor becomes approxi-
mately 3 k or more, the inverter will trip (E35).
To have the inverter trip at lower than 3 k, increase the Thermistor Adjustment (C085) value. Con-
versely, to have the inverter trip at higher than 3 k, decrease the C085 value.
Connect the external thermistor between the control terminals 5 and L and set the Multi-function
Input 5 Selection (C005) to 19 (TH: PTC thermistor thermal protection).
Then, set the adjustment parameter according to the specifications of the thermistor.
When using this function, keep the wiring distance between the motor and the inverter at 20 m or shorter.
Since the current flowing through the thermistor is weak, take measures, such as isolating the thermis-
tor cable, to prevent noise due to the motor current.
Parameter Default
No. data
0.0 to 200.0
C085 Thermistor Adjustment Fine-tune the gain relative to the 100.0 %
input voltage.
19: TH (PTC thermistor thermal
C005 Multi-function Input 5 Selection 02 (CF1) −
protection)
Note If no thermistor is connected when C005 is set to 19, a trip will occur.
7-8-8 Signal during RUN (RUN)

The RUN signal will be output from a multi-function output terminal or the multi-function relay output ter-
minal during inverter operation.
This signal turns ON only with the inverter output. The RUN signal is not output even if the RUN com-
mand is input when the frequency is set to 0 Hz. (When the RUN command is input, the RUN LED indi-
cator on the Digital Operator lights. The indicator blinks when the Inverter is operating at 0 Hz.)
AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 00 (RUN: Signal during RUN).
This signal is also output when DC injection braking is active.
The timing diagram is as follows. The RUN signal remains ON until the motor stops even if the RUN
command (FW) turns OFF.
Parameter Default
No. data
Multi-function Output 11/12 00: RUN (Signal during RUN)
C021, C022
Selection
− −
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
C026
AL2) Function Selection

7 Other Functions
Output frequency
FW input (Forward)
RUN output

RUN LED Lit
7-8-9 Frequency Arrival Signal (FA2 to FA5)

The inverter outputs the frequency arrival signal when the output frequency reaches the set level.
Allocate the Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022) or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1,
AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 02 (FA2: Set frequency exceeded signal), 06 (FA3: Set frequency
only signal), 24 (FA4: Set frequency exceeded signal 2) or 25 (FA5: Set frequency only signal 2).
The hysteresis of the signals FA2 (02) and FA4 (24) is calculated as follows.
ON : (Set frequency) − (1% of maximum frequency) [Hz]
OFF : (Set frequency) − (2% of maximum frequency) [Hz]
The hysteresis of the signals FA3 (06) and FA4 (25) during acceleration is calculated as follows.
ON : (Set frequency) − (1% of maximum frequency) [Hz]
OFF : (Set frequency) + (2% of maximum frequency) [Hz]
The hysteresis of these signals during deceleration is calculated as follows.

ON : (Set frequency) + (1% of maximum frequency) [Hz]
OFF : (Set frequency) − (2% of maximum frequency) [Hz] 7
Parameter Default
7-8-9 Frequency Arrival Signal (FA2 to FA5)

No. data
Arrival Frequency During 0.00
Acceleration 1/Arrival Fre- Not output arrival signal during acceleration
C042/C045 0.00 Hz
quency During Accelera- 0.01 to 590.00
tion 2 Output arrival signal during acceleration
Arrival Frequency During 0.00
Deceleration 1/Arrival Fre- Not output arrival signal during deceleration
C043/C046 0.00 Hz
quency During Decelera- 0.01 to 590.00
tion 2 Output arrival signal during deceleration
Multi-function Output 02: FA2 (Set frequency exceeded signal)
11/12 Selection 06: FA3 (Set-frequency only signal)
C021, C022
C026
Multi-function Relay Out- 24: FA4 (Set frequency exceeded signal 2) − −
put (AL1, AL2) Function 25: FA5 (Set-frequency only signal 2)
Selection

7 Other Functions
Set Frequency Exceeded Signal (C021, C022, C026 = 02: FA2, 24: FA4)
The inverter outputs the frequency arrival signal when the inverter reaches the frequency set in the
Arrival Frequency During Acceleration 1/2 (C042/C045) or Arrival Frequency During Deceleration 1/2
(C043/C046) or higher.
C042/C045 C043/C046
fon f off
Output frequency
fon: 1% of maximum frequency

FA2/FA4 output foff: 2% of maximum frequency
Set-frequency Only Signal (C021, C022, C026 = 06: FA3, 25: FA5)
The inverter outputs the frequency arrival signal only when the inverter reaches the frequency set in the
Arrival Frequency During Acceleration 1/2 (C042/C045) or Arrival Frequency During Deceleration 1/2
(C043/C046).
f off fon
C042/C045 C043/C046
fon f off
Output frequency
FA3/FA5 output
fon: 1% of maximum frequency

foff: 2% of maximum frequency
7-8-10 RUN Time/Power ON Time Over (RNT/ONT)

If the total RUN time or power ON time of the inverter exceeds the RUN Time/Power ON Time Detection
Level (b034), the inverter will output the RUN time over (RNT) or Power ON time over (ONT) signal.
Parameter Default
No. data
0.
RUN Time/Power ON
b034 Function is disabled 0. 10 hex
Time Detection Level
1. to 65535.
Multi-function Output 11: RNT (RUN time over)
11/12 Selection, 12: ONT (Power ON time over)
C021, C022 Multi-function Relay Out-
C026 − −
Selection
Related functions d016, d017
RUN Time Over (C021, C022, C026 = 11: RNT)

AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 11 (RNT: RUN time over).
Set the RUN Time/Power ON Time Detection Level (b034).

7 Other Functions
Power ON Time Over (C021, C022, C026 = 12: ONT)

AL2) Function Selection (C026) to 12 (ONT: Power ON time over).
Set the RUN Time/Power ON Time Detection Level (b034).

7-8-11 Logic Operation Output Signal (LOG1 to LOG3)
Use these signals to have the inverter internally perform logical operations with output signals. Set the
Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection (C021/C022), or Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2)
Function Selection (C026), to 33 (LOG1: Logic operation output 1), 34 (LOG2: Logic operation output
2), or 35 (LOG3: Logic operation output 3). The logic output signal selection parameters cannot be
set to 255 (no: No allocation), 63 (OPO: Option), or 33 to 35 (LOG1 to LOG3: Logic operation output
1 to 3).
Three operators, AND, OR, and XOR, are available.
Logic output sig-

nal selection 1
Logic output sig-
nal selection 2
LOGx (AND)
LOGx (OR)
LOGx (XOR)
Each logic operation output signal requires different parameter settings.

Set the necessary parameters according to the table below.
Logic output sig- Logic output sig- Operator selec-

7
Selected signal
nal selection 1 nal selection 2 tion
33: Logic operation output 1 (LOG1) C142 C143 C144
7-8-11 Logic Operation Output Signal (LOG1 to LOG3)

(Example) To output the result of the AND operation between RUN (00: Signal during RUN) and FA2
(01: Set frequency exceeded signal) to the multi-function output terminal 12 as a logic oper-
ation output 1 (LOG1) terminal
Multi-function Output 12 Selection (C022) : 33 (LOG1)
Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 1 (C142) : 00 (RUN)
Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 2 (C143) : 02 (FA2)
Logic Output Signal 1 Operator Selection (C144) : 00 (AND)
RUN
FA2
LOG1

7 Other Functions
Parameter Default
No. data
C142 Logic Output Signal 1 to 3
C145 00 to 63: Same as options for C021 00 −
C148 Selection 1
(Except 33 (LOG1) to 35 (LOG3), 63
C143 Logic Output Signal 1 to 3
C146 (OPO), and 255 (no)) 00 −
C149 Selection 2
C144 00: AND

Logic Output Signal 1 to 3
C147 01: OR 00 −
C150 Operator Selection
02: XOR
Multi-function Output 11/12 33: LOG1: Logic operation output 1
C021, C022, Selection, Multi-function Relay 34: LOG2: Logic operation output 2
C026 − −
Output (AL1, AL2) Function 35: LOG3: Logic operation output 3
Selection
7-8-12 Capacitor Life Warning Signal (WAC)

Use this signal to determines the life expectancy of the capacitor on the option board based on the
inverter’s internal temperature and conduction time.
The status of this signal can be monitored in the Life Assessment Monitor (d022).
Set this function according to A-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve on page A-7.
Parameter Default
No. data
Multi-function Output 11/12 39: WAC
C021, C022
Selection (Capacitor life warning signal)
− −
C026
7-8-13 Cooling Fan Operation

Select whether to enable the inverter’s built-in cooling fan constantly or only during inverter operation.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Always
01: Enabled only during operation
(Note that the cooling fan is
also enabled for 3 min after
b092 Cooling Fan Operation power-on and 3 min after 01 −
inverter operation stop.)
02: Dependent on cooling fin tem-
perature (Enabled above
approximately 40°C)
00: Clear disabled (Value increas-
ing continuously)
b093 Total Fan Operation Time Clear 01: Clear with the Enter key 00 −
(Data is reset from 01 to 00
after execution.)
Note 1. If a momentary power interruption or power shutoff occurs when the cooling fan is operating, the cooling
fan will stop temporarily and, after power recovery, restart automatically.
2. Clear the total operation time only when you replace the cooling fan. Otherwise, the Life Assessment
Monitor (d022) will not display correct monitor data.

7 Other Functions
3. When b092 is 01, the cooling fan operates during inverter operation. If the cooling fin temperature
exceeds 60°C, the cooling fan starts operating even when inverter operation is stopped. If the cooling fin
temperature falls below 50°C when inverter operation is stopped, the cooling fan stops after 3 minutes.
4. When b092 is 02, the cooling fan will operate if the Inverter’s cooling fin temperature exceeds approxi-
mately 40°C. If the cooling fin temperature remains at or below 40°C for 3 minutes, the cooling fan will
stop.

7-8-14 Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal (WAF)
In the Ambient Temperature (b075), set the ambient temperature in the operating environment of the
inverter.
This warning is made on the assumption that the life expectancy of the cooling fan is approximately 10
years under an ambient temperature of 40°C or lower.
If this signal is output, it is recommended to check the cooling fan for clogging etc.
The status of this signal can be monitored in the Life Assessment Monitor (d022).
Parameter Default
No. data
−10 to 50
b075 Ambient Temperature Set the ambient temperature in 40 °C
the operating environment.
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 40: WAF (Cooling fan life warn-
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) ing signal) − −
C026
Function Selection
Related functions b092, d022
7-8-15 Communication Disconnection Detection Signal (NDc)

7
This signal is enabled only when Modbus communication is selected for RS-485 communications.
If a reception timeout error occurs, this signal will be output until the next data is received.
7-8-14 Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal (WAF)

Set the time until the reception timeout in the Communication Error Timeout Time (C077).
For details, refer to Section 8 Communications Functions.
External controller
Inverter
Monitor timer
Communication
Error Timeout Time
Communications (C077)
error (NDc) output
Parameter Default
No. data
0.00: Timeout disabled
C077 Communication Error Timeout Time 0.01 to 99.99 0.00 s
Set the reception timeout time.
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 32: NDc (Communications
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) disconnection detection) − −
C026
Function Selection

7 Other Functions
7-8-16 Starting Contact Signal (FR)

The starting contact signal will be output while the inverter is ready to accept the RUN command.
The output is enabled independently of the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202) setting.
The inverter will stop if the FW and RV signals are input simultaneously.
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 41: FR (Starting contact sig-
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) nal) − −
C026
Function Selection
Forward command (FW)
Reverse command (RV)
Starting contact (FR) output
7-8-17 Cooling Fin Overheat Warning (OHF)

This function monitors the temperature of the cooling fin located inside the inverter and outputs a signal
if the temperature is at or higher than the Cooling Fin Overheat Warning Level (C064).
Parameter Default
No. data
0. to 110.
Set the temperature at which
C064 Cooling Fin Overheat Warning Level 100. °C
to the overheat warning signal
is output.
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 42: OHF (Cooling fin over-
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) heat warning) − −
C026
Function Selection

7 Other Functions
7-8-18 Low Current Signal (LOC)

This signal will be output when the output current falls to or below the Low Current Detection Level
(C039).
In the Low Current Signal Output Selection (C038), select whether to have the inverter output this sig-

nal constantly during run or only during constant speed operation.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Enabled during accelera-
tion/deceleration and
C038 Low Current Signal Output Selection constant speed 01 −
01: Enabled during constant
speed*1
0.00 to 2.00  Rated current
Rated
C039 Low Current Detection Level Set the output level of the low current A
current signal.
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 43: LOC (Low current signal)
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) − −
C026
Function Selection
*1. When the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) is set to 01 (Control circuit terminal block (An-
alog input)), the signal may not be judged as a constant speed depending on the sampling condition. In this
case, set C038 to 00 (Enabled during acceleration/deceleration and constant speed) or increase the value set
in the Analog Input Filter (A016).
7-8-18 Low Current Signal (LOC)

7-8-19 Fatal Fault Signal (MJA)
If any of the following trips occurs, the inverter will output a separate signal besides the alarm signal
(05: AL).
Alarm code Description
E08. EEPROM error
E11. CPU error
E14. Ground protection
E30. Driver error
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 53: MJA (Fatal fault signal)
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) − −
C026
Function Selection

7 Other Functions
7-8-20 Window Comparator (WCO/WCFI) (Disconnection Detection

ODc/FIDc)
The window comparator signal will be output when the analog input O/OI value is between the upper
and lower limit settings. It is useful for monitoring the analog input at a level to detect disconnection or
other faults.
The hysteresis width can be set for the upper and lower limit level settings for the window comparator
function.
In addition to the hysteresis width, the upper and lower limit levels can be set individually for each of the
analog input signals O and OI.
The analog operation level during WCO/WCOI output can be set to a fixed value. To do so, set the
Analog Operation Level at O/OI/FE Disconnection (b070/b071). When set to no, the analog input value
will be used “as is.”
The signals ODc and OIDc will be output in the same way as WCO and WCOI, respectively.
Parameter Default
Function name Data range Unit
No. data
Window Comparator O
b060 Lower limit level + Hysteresis width  2
Upper Limit Level
(0. min.) to 100. 100. %
Window Comparator OI Upper
b063 Set an upper limit level.
Limit Level
Window Comparator O
b061 0. to Lower limit level − Hysteresis width 
Lower Limit Level
2 (100. max.) 0. %
Window Comparator OI Lower
b064 Set a lower limit level.
Limit Level
Window Comparator O Hys- 0. to (Upper limit level − Lower limit level)
b062
teresis Width  2 (10. max.)
0. %
Window Comparator OI Hys- Set a hysteresis width for the upper and
b065
teresis Width lower limit levels.
Analog Operation Level at O 0. to 100.
b070
no %
Analog Operation Level at OI Set the analog operation level during
b071
Disconnection WCO/WCOI (ODc/OIDc) output.
27: ODc (Analog O disconnection
detection)
Multi-function Output 11/12 28: OIDc (Analog OI
C021 Selection disconnection detection)
C022 54: WCO − −
C026 Multi-function Relay Output
(AL1, AL2) Function Selection (Window Comparator O)
55: WCOI
(Window Comparator OI)
Note Set the upper and lower limit level settings for the window comparator function as a percentage [%] of the
input voltage (10 V) or current (20 mA).

7 Other Functions

To use this function for disconnection detection, set the disconnection detection level in the
Window Comparator O/OI Upper Limit Level (b060/b063).
(In this case, the inverter uses the bandwidth over the upper limit value in normal operation
and, if the input falls below the upper limit value, the inverter detects a disconnection error.)
7-8-21 Frequency Reference Selection Status Signal (FREF)

This signal will be output when the RUN command is input via the Digital Operator (A001=02), or when
the forced operator function (31: OPE) is allocated to one of the multi-function output terminals and that 7
terminal is ON.
It is OFF when the RUN command is not input via the Digital Operator.
(FREF)
7-8-21 Frequency Reference Selection Status Signal
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 58: FREF (Frequency com-
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) mand source) − −
C026
Function Selection
7-8-22 RUN Command Status Signal (REF)

This signal will be output when the RUN command is input via the Digital Operator (A001=02), or when
the forced operator function (31: OPE) is allocated to one of the multi-function output terminals and that
terminal is ON.
It is OFF when the RUN command is not input via the Digital Operator.
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 59: REF (RUN command
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) source) − −
C026
Function Selection

7 Other Functions
7-8-23 2nd Control Selection Signal (SETM)

This signal will be output when the SETM (Motor 2 selection) function is allocated to one of the
multi-function output terminals and the terminal SET is ON.
Parameter Default
No. data
C021, C022 Multi-function Output 11/12 Selection 60: SETM (Motor 2 selec-
Multi-function Relay Output (AL1, AL2) tion) − −
C026
Function Selection
7-8-24 Ground Fault Detection Selection

Select whether to enable or disable ground fault detection between the inverter output and the motor at
power-on.
If a ground fault is detected, a ground-fault trip Ground protection (E14.) occurs to protect the inverter.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
b098 Ground Fault Detection Selection 01 −
01: Enabled

7 Other Functions
7-9 DC Injection Braking Function

This section describes the DC injection braking function.
7-9-1 DC Injection Braking (DB)

Use this function to have the motor apply DC injection braking according to the load.
For an induction motor, this function allows braking with no feedback of regenerated energy to the
inverter.
However, for a PM motor, consider to take measures against overvoltage because even the DC injec-
tion braking function allows regenerated energy to be fed back to the inverter.
DC injection braking can be controlled with one of the following three methods:
• Setting the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 07 (DB: External DC injec-
tion braking) and turning ON/OFF the terminal to which the external DC injection braking function

is allocated.
• Setting the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to 01 (Enabled) and then setting appropriate
function parameters.
• Setting the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to 02 (Enabled) and controlling the motor only
by comparison via the frequency set in the DC Injection Braking Frequency parameter.
Note, however that the use of DC injection braking may not cause the motor to stop due to the moment
of inertia of the motor load.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
A051 DC Injection Braking Selection 00 − 7
02: Enabled
(Operates only via set frequency)

0.00 to 60.00
Set the frequency at which you want to
A052 DC Injection Braking Frequency start DC injection braking to stop the 0.50 Hz
motor rotation, when the DC injection
braking function is enabled.
0.0 to 5.0
Set the delay time until the motor starts
DC Injection Braking Delay
A053 applying DC injection braking after the set 0.0 s
Time
DC Injection Braking Frequency is
reached, or after the terminal DB turns ON.
A054 DC Injection Braking Power Heavy load mode (b049 = 00): 0. to 50. %
100.
Startup DC Injection Braking Light load mode (b049 = 01): 0. to 70.
A057 0. (Weakest: Zero current) to 100. 0. %
Power
(Strongest: Rated current)
0.0 to 60.0
Set the time during which DC injection
A055 DC Injection Braking Time braking is applied after deceleration stop. 0.5 s
Setting this time is effective when the
terminal DB performs edge operation.
DC Injection Braking Edge/Level 00: Edge operation (Examples 1 −a to 6−a)
A056 01 −
Selection 01: Level operation (Examples 1−b to 6−b)

7 Other Functions
Parameter Default
No. data
0.0 to 60.0
Set the time during which DC injection
Startup DC Injection Braking
A058 braking is applied when the RUN com- 0.0 s
Time
mand is ON, when the DC injection
braking function is enabled.
Heavy load mode (b049 = 00): 2.0 to
10.0/2.0
b083 Carrier Frequency 15.0 kHz
(5.0)*1
Light load mode (b049 = 01): 2.0 to 10.0
C001 to Multi-function Input 1 to 7 07: DB (External DC injection braking)
C007 − −
Selection
Carrier Frequency for DC Injection Braking
The braking power for DC injection braking can be set in the DC Injection Braking Power (A054). Note,
however, that setting this to exceed 10% automatically applies a limit to the carrier frequency.
The graph below shows the relationship between the DC injection braking power and the limit value for
the carrier frequency.
The value enclosed in parentheses ( ) on the graph represents the limit value for the carrier frequency.
When the value of Carrier Frequency (b083) is greater than the limit, the inverter operates at the carrier
frequency.
• If the DC injection braking power is equal to or less than 10%, the maximum carrier frequency value
is limited to 15 Hz.
• If the DC injection braking power is greater than 10% and equal to or less than 50%, the maximum
carrier frequency value is limited to 5 Hz.
• If the DC injection braking power is greater than 50%, the maximum carrier frequency value is limited
to 2 Hz.
15
12
Limit 11
value for
carrier 9
frequency
(kHz) 7
5
3
2
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Braking power (kHz)
Controlling DC Injection Braking via ON/OFF Status of External DC

Injection Braking Terminal
Use this method to control DC injection braking according to the ON/OFF status of the external DC
injection braking signal allocated to the multi-function input terminal.
Allocate the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 07 (DB: External DC injection
braking).
When the terminal DB turns ON, DC injection braking is applied independently of the RUN command
operation.

7 Other Functions
• DC injection braking works according to the ON/OFF status of the terminal DB, regardless of whether
the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) is set to 00 (Disabled) or 01 (Enabled). Note that the DC
injection braking via the terminal DB has priority over the DC injection braking via the parameter set-
ting 01 (Enabled).
However, when A051 is set to 02, DC injection braking via the terminal DB is disabled.
• In the DC Injection Braking Power (A054), set the braking power required for your application.
A limit value is automatically applied to the Carrier Frequency (b083) setting according to the DC Injec-
tion Braking Power (A054) setting.
• When the DC Injection Braking Delay Time (A053) is set, the inverter shuts off its output and remains
in a free-run sate during the set time. After the expiration of the set time, the inverter starts DC injec-
tion braking.
• In the DC Injection Braking Edge/Level Selection (A056), you can set the operation of DC injection
braking after the terminal DB turns ON.
Select optimal operation according to your system, with reference to the example below.
• When A056 is set to 00 (Edge operation), you need to also set the time during which DC injection
braking is applied in the DC Injection Braking Time (A055).

(a) Edge operation (A056 = 00) (b) Level operation (A056 = 01)
(Example 1-a) (Example 1-b)
7
*1. Set the DC Injection Braking Time (A055) or the DC injection time by DB input in consideration of the heat

generation of the motor.

7 Other Functions
Note During free running and during DB operation, the output frequency is 0.
Controlling DC Injection Braking via Parameter Settings (A051 = 01)
Use this method to control DC injection braking according to the ON/OFF status of the RUN command.
Set the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to 01 (Enabled).
• To enable the DC injection braking function during startup, set the time during which DC injection
braking is applied in the Startup DC Injection Braking Power (A057) and the time during which DC
injection braking is applied in the Startup DC Injection Braking Time (A058).
• To enable the DC injection braking function during stop, set the braking power in the DC Injection
Braking Power (A054), the frequency at which to start DC injection braking in the DC Injection Brak-
ing Frequency (A052), and the time during which DC injection braking is applied in the DC Injection
Braking Time (A055).
• When the DC Injection Braking Delay Time (A053) is set, the inverter shuts off its output after the fre-
quency reaches the stop frequency value set in A052 and remains in a free-run state during the time
set in A053. After the expiration of the time set in A053, the inverter starts DC injection braking.
(Examples 5-a and 5-b)
When A053 is set to 0.0, DC injection braking works after the inverter reaches the frequency set in
A052. (Examples 6-a and 6-b)
• In the DC Injection Braking Edge/Level Selection (A056), you can set the priority between the DC
injection braking time and the RUN command input. Select optimal operation according to your sys-
tem, with reference to the example below.
However, DC injection braking during startup works independently of the DC Injection Braking
Edge/Level Selection setting. (Examples 4-a and 4-b)
Edge operation : The inverter gives priority to the DC Injection Braking Time (A055) and performs DC
injection braking according to the time set in A055.
Once the RUN command (FW) turns OFF, the inverter applies DC injection braking
for the time set in A055 when the output frequency reaches the value set in A052.
Even if the RUN command is turned ON while DC injection braking is active, the
inverter continues to apply DC injection braking during the time set in A055. (Exam-
ples 5-a and 6-a)
Level operation : Giving priority to the RUN command, the inverter ignores the DC Injection Braking
Time (A055) setting and shifts to normal operation.
If the RUN command turns ON while DC injection braking is active, the inverter
returns to normal operation, ignoring the time set in A055. (Examples 5-b and 6-b)

7 Other Functions
Example 4-a. During startup Example 4-b. During startup
Example 5-a. During stop (with A053 setting) Example 5-b. During stop (with A053 setting)

Example 6-a. During stop (A053 = 0.0) Example 6-b. During stop (A053 = 0.0)

Note During free running and during DB operation, the output frequency is 0.
Controlling DC Injection Braking Only via Set Frequency (A051 = 02)

Use this method to control DC injection braking only by changing the set frequency.
Set the DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to 02 (Operates only via set frequency).
• When A051 is set to 02, the external DC injection braking terminal function is disabled.
• If both the set frequency and the output frequency are equal to or lower than the A052 value with the
RUN command ON, the inverter starts DC injection braking. (Example 1-a)
• When the set frequency becomes +2 Hz higher than the A052 value, the inverter releases DC injec-
tion braking and returns to normal output. (Example 1-a)
• The inverter releases DC injection braking if the RUN command turns OFF with DC injection enabled.
(Example 1-b)
• If the set frequency starts from 0 via analog input etc., the inverter resets both the set frequency and
the output frequency and starts operation with DC injection braking. (Example 1-b)
• If the RUN command turns ON via analog input etc. with the set frequency larger than the A052
value, the inverter starts operation with the normal frequency. (Example 1-a)

7 Other Functions
Example 1-a Example 1-b
The timing in which the inverter releases DC injection braking depends on the value set in the DC Injec-
tion Braking Edge/Level Selection (A056).
ON ON
FW input FW input
A052 A052
Frequency Frequency
reference reference
Motor rotation
Motor rotation
speed
speed
A053

7 Other Functions
7-10 Safety Function
7-10-1 Overview of Safety Function

To ensure safety, the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter has the STO (Safe Torque Off) function.
The STO function shuts off the power to the motor and stops the motor through the input signals from a
safety controller.

Planning
• Personnel who design, install, and maintain safety-related systems should have a thorough
knowledge of functional safety.
• It is the responsibility of the user to introduce a safety-related system and implement a risk
analysis of the entire system, as well as to take appropriate measures as needed.
Design
• The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter does not have a function to hold the STO status. This
means that the Inverter is ready for operation when STO input is reset and starts operation

when the RUN command is input.
• Taking this into consideration, set up the system so that the Inverter does not cause danger-
ous situations when STO input is reset.
• In the factory default settings, the STO function is disabled by a short-circuit wire.
Installation
• Make sure that installation is carried out by a qualified electrician with a knowledge of func-
tional safety.
• Use the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter within its environmental specifications, including 7
the EMS environment.
• In order to prevent conductive dust and contamination, install it in an IP54 or higher panel.

Wiring
• The Inverter does not have the function to diagnose STO input signals. Be sure that the sys-
tem is designed to provide two inputs normally. If necessary, use the EDM signal output to
perform fault diagnosis of the input paths.
• Make sure that the two STO input signals from external devices are properly separated and
protected, where each signal is not subject to mutual interference.
• Make sure that the cable length of the signal lines connected to the GS1, GS2, and EDM ter-
minals are 20 m or less for each.
Test Run
• Be sure to perform a test run to verify and validate the safety system. No system can be con-
sidered “safe” before it is validated.
Maintenance
• The STO function does not disconnect the Inverter from the main circuit and peripheral circuit
power supplies. Before you perform maintenance, be sure to isolate the system from the
main power system and from any devices including permanent magnet motors and capaci-
tors that may supply voltage to the system.
• After you shut off the power supplies, wait at least 10 minutes, confirm that the charge LED is
OFF and that the voltage across the P and N terminals has dropped to 45 V or less, and then
perform maintenance.
• Be sure to perform a periodic functional test once a year.

7 Other Functions
Others
• Do not modify the Inverter by any means. Any modification will void not only the compliance
with the standard, but also the product warranty.
Response Time
The response time is defined as the time from the input of a request to activate the safety function until
the activation of the safety function. In the case of the STO function, it is the time from input of STO sig-
nals until shutoff of the power to the motor.
For the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, the response time of the STO function is 20 ms or less.
Taking this response time into consideration, design the system so that the equipment does not cause
dangerous situations.
Self Diagnosis of Internal Paths

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter has a diagnosis function to detect faults in internal safety paths.
If a fault is detected in the safety paths, the internal diagnosis function maintains the output to the motor
in a shutdown state, regardless of the STO signal status.
STO Inputs
The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter has two STO inputs to which redundant, dual signals must be input.
It is assumed that properly separated dual STO signals are input from an external device. In order to
comply with the standard, both inputs must be used.
To connect a host device that outputs diagnostic test pulses to the GS1/GS2 terminals, keep the OFF
pulse width of the test pulses to 500 µs or less.
STO Status Monitor Output (EDM Output)

To monitor the input status of STO signals to the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter or the fault detection
status of the internal safety paths using an external device, use the EDM output terminal.
The EDM signal is a reference signal. You cannot use the EDM signal to drive safety devices.
Periodic Functional Test
In order to maintain the SIL and PL levels of the functional safety system, it is necessary to perform a
periodic functional test for properly verifying the STO function at least once a year.
In the STO functional test, check that the status of the output to the motor and the status of the EDM
signal in response to the GS1 and GS2 inputs are in accordance with the table provided in 7-10-4 Peri-
odic Inspection on page 7-104.
Safety Function
Function Standard
Safe Torque Off (STO) IEC61800-5-2: 2016
EN61800-5-2: 2017

7 Other Functions
Response Time
Function Value Remarks
STO response time 20 ms Time from transition of the GS1 and GS2
signals to the STO status until shutoff of the
power to the motor
EDM response time 30 ms Time from transition of the GS1 and GS2
signals to the STO status until EDM signal
ON
Parameters Related to Safety
Parameter Value Standard

PL e EN ISO 13849-1: 2015
CAT. 3
MTTFd 100years
DCavg >99%
SIL 3 IEC61508: 2010
HFT 1 IEC61800-5-2: 2016

SFF >90% EN61800-5-2: 2017
PFH <2×10-8
PFD <2×10-4
TM 10years

7 Other Functions
7-10-2 Safety Function Settings

Two dedicated input terminals GS1 and GS2 are used for safety input.
To enable the EDM output (safety monitor output), turn ON the EDM function selector switch. This auto-
matically allocates the Multi-function Output 11 Selection (C021) to 62 (EDM).
EDM Function Selector Switch
ON (EDM)
OFF(Normal)
• When the EDM function selector switch is turned from ON to OFF, the input/output terminals
allocated to EDM are reset to 255 (no: No allocation) and the output operation selection setting keeps
NC contact.
The safety device monitor (62: EDM) turns ON when the inverter detects that both of the GS1
and GS2 input signals turn OFF and shuts off the output. If the EDM output signal does not turn
ON even when the inverter shuts off the output by the safety function, check the GS1 and GS2
input circuits and the EDM detection circuit.
Parameter Default
No. data
Multi-function Output 11 62: EDM (Safety device monitor)*1
C021 00 −
Selection
Multi-function Output 11 00: NO (NO contact) *1
C031 00 −
Operation Selection
GS Input Operation Selec- 00: No trip (shut off by hardware)
b145 00 −
tion 01: Trip*2*3
*1. When the EDM function selector switch is ON, these functions are forcibly set and cannot be changed.
*2. The inverter will trip with E37. If this trip occurs simultaneously with the external trip (E12), the emergency shut-
off (E37) has priority, except at power-on.
*3. The safety function cannot ensure safety if either one of the GS1 and GS2 input terminals turns ON during the
inverter trip with E37.

7 Other Functions
7-10-3 Wiring and Usage of the Safety Function
STO Signal Inputs

The Inverter has two inputs GS1 and GS2 for redundant input of the STO signals.
When power is applied to both input terminals and current flows, the safety paths permit the Inverter to
operate.
However, when voltage is not applied to at least one of the input terminals, the corresponding shutoff
path shuts off the Inverter output.
Wiring Example

If you connect more than one G9SP-series safety controller or other safety devices, use them within the
7
guaranteed operation range of the devices used according to the above figure.
7-10-3 Wiring and Usage of the Safety Function

You cannot use the test pulses of the G9SP-series safety controllers for the GS1 and GS2 terminals. If
you do so, the compliance levels of entire system will be Cat 3/PLd and SIL 2.
STO Status Hold Request
The Inverter does not have a safety circuit with a function to hold the shutoff status of the internal safety
paths after STO input is reset.
Therefore, if the RUN command is input after STO input is reset, or if STO input is reset while it remains
ON, the Inverter starts output to the motor. Therefore, to comply with the emergency stop reset require-
ment of EN/IEC 60204-1, it is required that the system executes one of the following.
a. Stops the RUN command to the Inverter when the STO is enabled, and gives the RUN command
when the system operator intentionally makes a request to restart the Inverter.
b. Resets STO input when the system operator intentionally makes a request to restart the Inverter.

7 Other Functions
Wiring to Disable the STO Function

To disable the STO function, connect a short-circuit wire as shown in the figure below. This is the fac-
tory default wiring.
External Devices
All power supplies connected to the control terminals of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter must be
SELV or PELV compliant.
The signal lines for GS1 and GS2 must be physically separated or properly protected.
For all devices used for STO signal transmission, use products that comply with functional safety stan-
dards such as ISO13849-1 and IEC61508.
To achieve a system that complies with Cat 3/PLe and SIL3 as a whole, you must use the 3G3MX2-EV2
Series Inverter in combination with at least PLe- and SIL3-compliant devices.
The pulse width of test pulses input to GS1 and GS2 from external devices must be 500 µs or less.
7-10-4 Periodic Inspection

When the safety input function is activated, the inverter shuts off its output if the current does not flow in
either the terminal GS1 or GS2. Therefore, you must check the inverter periodically to ensure that there
is no defect in the GS1 and GS2 wirings. Be sure to perform periodical inspection at least once a year.
For the wiring information on the terminals GS1, GS2, and EDM, refer to the table below.
Terminal Status
GS1 Current OFF Current ON Current OFF Current ON
GS2 Current OFF Current OFF Current ON Current ON
EDM ON OFF OFF OFF
Inverter output Output shut off Output shut off Output shut off Output enabled

7 Other Functions
7-11 Option/Applied Functions (Group P)

This section describes the functions associated with the option unit connected to the connector for
option unit, as well as the applied functions of the Inverter.
7-11-1 Operation Selection on Option Error

Select whether to have the Inverter trip or continue operation with the error from the option unit ignored,
if an error occurs due to the option unit connected to the connector for option unit.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Trip
P001 Operation Selection on Option Error 00 −
7-11 Option/Applied Functions (Group P)

01: Continue operation
7-11-2 DriveProgramming Function Parameters

• Set these parameters to use the DriveProgramming parameters.
• In the DriveProgramming Function Selection (A017), enable/disable the DriveProgramming function
with the start/stop method.
• Use the DriveProgramming User Parameters to change the values of the user variables (U00 to U31)
used in the DriveProgramming program.
• For details, refer to “DriveProgramming User’s Manual (I580)”.
Parameter Default
No. data
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Start/stop via
multi-function input
−
7-11-1 Operation Selection on Option Error

A017 DriveProgramming Function Selection 00
PRG terminal)
02: Enabled (Start/stop via
power on/off)
P100 to DriveProgramming User Parameter U00 7
P131 0. to 65535. 0. −
to U31

7 Other Functions

Communications Functions
This section describes the general-purpose serial communications functions (Modbus
communication).
8-1 Communications Specifications....................................................................... 8-3

8-2 RS485 Terminal Arrangement and Connection ............................................... 8-4
8-3 Modbus Communication Parameters............................................................... 8-5
8-4 Modbus Communication Protocol.................................................................... 8-7
8-4-1 Message Configuration........................................................................................ 8-7
8-4-2 Required Communications Time ......................................................................... 8-9
8-4-3 Normal Response................................................................................................ 8-9
8-4-4 Abnormal Response ............................................................................................ 8-9
8-4-5 No Response .................................................................................................... 8-10
8-5 Explanation of Each Function Code............................................................... 8-11
8-5-1 Read Coil Status [01 hex].................................................................................. 8-11
8
8-5-2 Read from Holding Register [03 hex] ................................................................ 8-12
8-5-3 Write to Coil [05 hex] ......................................................................................... 8-13
8-5-4 Write to Holding Register [06 hex] ..................................................................... 8-14
8-5-5 Loop-back Test [08 hex] .................................................................................... 8-15
8-5-6 Write to Multiple Coils [0F hex] .......................................................................... 8-16
8-5-7 Write to Multiple Holding Registers [10 hex] ...................................................... 8-18
8-5-8 Read/Write from/to Multiple Holding Registers [17h] ......................................... 8-19
8-5-9 Exception Response ......................................................................................... 8-20
8-6 Saving a Change to Holding Register (Enter Command) ............................. 8-21
8-6-1 How to Issue Enter Command .......................................................................... 8-21
8-6-2 EEPROM Write Mode........................................................................................ 8-23
8-7 Modbus Mapping Function ............................................................................. 8-24
8-7-1 Operation of Modbus Mapping Function ........................................................... 8-24
8-7-2 Modbus Mapping Function Settings .................................................................. 8-25
8-7-3 Compressed Single-word Registers .................................................................. 8-26
8-7-4 Troubleshooting for Modbus Mapping Function ................................................. 8-28
8-7-5 Endian Function ................................................................................................ 8-29
8-8 Co-inverter Communication ............................................................................ 8-31
8-8-1 Co-inverter Communication Parameters ........................................................... 8-32
8-8-2 Co-inverter Communication Settings ................................................................. 8-35

8-9 Modbus Communication Data Lists ............................................................... 8-37

8-9-1 Coil Number List ............................................................................................... 8-37
8-9-2 Monitor Function/Enter Command Register List ............................................... 8-41
8-9-3 Group F Register List ....................................................................................... 8-50
8-9-4 Group A/b/C/H/P Register List ...........................................................................8-51
8-9-5 2nd Control Register Number List .................................................................... 8-96

8-1 Communications Specifications

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter has the RS485-compliant Modbus communication function as stan-
dard, which enables communications with external network controllers. The basic specifications of this
communications function are provided in the table below. Note that the built-in Modbus communication
function is disabled when a communications option unit is mounted on the inverter.
Item Description Remarks

Protocol Modbus communication (Slave)
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19.2 k, 38.4 k, 57.6 k, 76.8 k,
Transmission speed Selectable via parameter
115.2 kbps
Synchronous system Start-stop synchronous system
Transmission code Binary
Transmission mode LSB first (Transmission starts with Least Significant Bit)
Compatible interface RS485
Data bit length 8 bits
Parity No/Even/Odd Selectable via parameter
Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits Selectable via parameter
Startup method One-side start by host command −
8-1 Communications Specifications

Wait time Silent Interval 0 to 1,000 [ms] Selectable via parameter
1: N (N = 247 max.)
Connection form Selectable via parameter
(32 units max. connectable without repeaters)
Error check Overrun/Framing/CRC-16/Horizontal parity
Communications cable
500 m
length

8-2 RS485 Terminal Arrangement and

Connection
The communications terminals are arranged as follows.
USB port is for computer

use only. RS422 (RJ45
modular connector) port
is for Digital Operator
use only.
Terminating resistor
selector switch
EA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L PLC P24 P24S ON

OFF
SP SN H O OI L EO AM CM2 12 11
(Factory default)
RS485 terminal
*1
SP SN SP SN
SP SN SP SN
(No.2)
120  120 
3G3MX2 (No.1) 3G3MX2 (No.n)
*1. If the communications are unstable, install a terminating resistor appropriate to the impedance of the cable to
each cable end. The resistance of the terminating resistor built into this inverter is 120 .

8-3 Modbus Communication Parameters

Set the following parameters according to the communications specifications.
Note that changes to the C071, C074, and C075 data are applied when the power supply is cycled.
• To control the frequency reference or RUN command via Modbus communication, set the 1st/2nd
Frequency Reference Selection (A001/A201) or 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection (A002/A202) to
03 (Modbus communication).
• According to the communications specifications of the host, set the Communication Speed Selection
(Baud Rate Selection) (C071), Communication Parity Selection (C074), Communication Stop Bit
Selection (C075), Communication Error Timeout Time (C077), and Communication Wait Time
(C078).
• In the Communication Station No. Selection (C072), set the slave address of the inverter.
• If the communications with the host are interrupted for a period longer than the Communication Error
Timeout Time (C077) setting, the inverter will detect an communications error. In the Operation
Selection on Communication Error (C076), set how the inverter should operate if it detects a commu-
nications error.
When this parameter is set to 00 or 01, you must reset the trip in order to resume the inverter control.
8-3 Modbus Communication Parameters

?
00 (Trip) : Detects a Modbus communication error (E41.) and shuts of the

output.
01 (Trip after deceleration stop) : Makes a deceleration stop and detects a Modbus communication
error (E41.).
02 (Ignore) : Ignores the communications error and continues to run according
to the current reference/command.
03 (Free-run stop) : Shuts off the output, but does not trip.
04 (Deceleration stop) : Makes a deceleration stop, but does not trip.
Parameter Default
No. data
1st/2nd Frequency 03: Modbus communication
A001/A201 02 −
Reference Selection
1st/2nd RUN Command 03: Modbus communication
A002/A202 02 −
Selection
03: 2400 bps
04: 4800 bps
05: 9600 bps
Communication Speed
06: 19.2 kbps
C071 Selection 05 −
07: 38.4 kbps
(Baud Rate Selection)
08: 57.6 kbps
09: 76.8 kbps
10: 115.2 kbps
Communication Station 1. to 247.
C072 1. −
No. Selection
00: No parity
Communication Parity
C074 01: Even parity 00 −
Selection
02: Odd parity
Communication Stop Bit 1: 1 bit
C075 1 −
Selection 2: 2 bits
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
Operation Selection on
C076 02: Ignore 02 −
Communication Error
03: Free-run stop 8

Parameter Default
No. data
Communication Error Tim- 0.00: Timeout disabled
C077 0.00 s
eout Time 0.01 to 99.99
C078 Communication Wait Time 0. to 1000. 0. ms

8-4 Modbus Communication Protocol

The inverter communicates with external controllers as follows.
(1) Query (1) Query

External
controller
Time
Inverter
(3)
Response
(2) Wait time (4) Communication Error

(Silent Interval + C078) Timeout Time (C077)
(1) Frame (Query) that is sent from the external control device to the inverter
(2) After receiving a query frame, the inverter waits the total time of the silent Interval
and the Communication Wait Time (C078), before returning a response.
Silent interval
The wait time that is specified on Modbus communication; its data length is 3.5 characters
(3.5 bytes).

It depends on the Modbus communication speed setting.
(Example) 1 character:10 bits (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 stop bit)
Time required per character: 1/9,600 (bps)  10 (bit)  1,000 = 1.04 ms
Time required for 3.5 characters: 1.04 ms  3.5 = 3.64 ms
However, according to the Modbus specifications, this time is fixed to 1.75 ms
for communications speeds exceeding 19.2 kbps.
(3) Frame (Response) that is sent from the inverter back to the external controller.
(4) After sending a response, the inverter monitors the time until it completes receiving
the query frame from the external control device. The inverter judges it as a commu-
nications error if it receives no response within the Communication Error Timeout
Time (C077).
Then, the inverter operates according the Operation Selection on Communication Error
8
(C076), while waiting for the reception of the first data again.
The monitoring of the Communication Error Timeout Time starts from the first send- 8-4-1 Message Configuration
ing/receiving operation is established after the power supply is cycled or after the inverter is
reset.
The inverter does not recognize as a communications error timeout if the sending/receiving
operation is not established at all.
8-4-1 Message Configuration

The command message sent from the master to a slave (or slaves) is called “query” and the response
message returned from the slave(s) is called “response.” The transmission format of a query/response
is as follows.
Query Response
Slave address Confirmation slave address
Function code Confirmation function code
Query data Response data
Error check (CRC-16) Error check (CRC-16)

Slave Address
A slave address is a serial number from 1 to 247 set in advance for each inverter (slave). (Only the
inverter that matches the slave address specified in the query will capture that query.)
⚫ Simultaneous broadcast to up to five groups

Set the slave address to 0 to perform broadcasting (simultaneous broadcast).
In a broadcast, all slaves receive data, but they return no response to it.
Moreover, during a broadcast, this inverter cannot perform data read or loop-back operation.
Although the Modbus specifications define the slave addresses between 1 to 247, using the slave
addresses 250 to 254 on the master side enables you to perform simultaneous broadcasting by
group. (In this case, the slaves return no response.)
Please note that this function is enabled for write commands (function code: 05 hex, 06 hex, 0F hex,
and 10 hex) only.
Slave address Recipient

250 (FA hex) Simultaneous broadcast to slave addresses 01 to 09
251 (FB hex) Simultaneous broadcast to slave addresses 10 to 19
252 (FC hex) Simultaneous broadcast to slave addresses 20 to 29
253 (FD hex) Simultaneous broadcast to slave addresses 30 to 39
254 (FE hex) Simultaneous broadcast to slave addresses 40 to 247
Function Code
A function code specifies the function to be performed by the target inverter(s).

The supported function codes are as shown in the table below.
⚫ Function code
Maximum number of
Maximum number of data per
Function code Function data bytes per
message
message
01 hex Read Coil Status 4 32 coils (in bits)
03 hex Read from Holding Register 32 16 registers (in bytes)
05 hex Write to Coil 2 1 coil (in bits)
06 hex Write to Holding Register 2 1 register (in bytes)
08 hex Loop-back Test − −
0F hex Write to Multiple Coils 4 32 coils (in bits)
10 hex Write to Multiple Holding Registers 32 16 registers (in bytes)
Read/Write from/to Multiple 32 each for read/write 16 registers each for read/write
17 hex operation
Holding Registers operation (in bytes)
Data
A message sends data related the function code.

The data transmission format differs depending on the function code.
Among the data used in Modbus communication, the 3G3MX2 Series supports the following data types.
Data name Description

Coil Binary data (1 bit) that supports read/write operation
Holding register 16-bit data that supports read/write operation

Error Check
In Modbus communication, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is used for error checking.
The CRC code is 16-bit data generated for any data block with a data length in 8-bit unit.
For CRC code generation, the following generator polynomial is used: CRC-16 (X16 + X15 + X2 + + 1).
8-4-2 Required Communications Time

The time that the inverter takes to send a response after receiving a query is the sum of the silent inter-
val (3.5 characters) and the Communication Wait Time (C078).
After receiving a response from an inverter, be sure to include an interval equivalent to the silent inter-
val (3.5 characters) or more before sending the next query to the inverter.
(Example) 1 character:10 bits (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 stop bit)
Time required per character: 1/9,600 (bps)  10 (bit)  1,000 = 1.04 ms
Time required for 3.5 characters: 1.04 ms  3.5 = 3.64 ms
However, according to the Modbus specifications, this time is fixed to 1.75 ms for communi-
cations speeds exceeding 19.2 kbps.

8-4-3 Normal Response
If the function code included in a query is for the Loop-back Test (08 hex), Write to Coil (05 hex, 0F
hex), or Write to Holding Register(s) (06 hex,10 hex) function, the inverter returns a response with the
same content as that of the query.
If the function code included in a query is for the Read Coil Status (01 hex) or Read from Holding Reg-
ister (03 hex) function, the inverter returns a response that includes data with the same slave address
and function code.
Refer to the later section, 8-5 Explanation of Each Function Code on page 8-11.
8-4-4 Abnormal Response 8
⚫ Response
8-4-2 Required Communications Time

Slave address
Function code
Exception code
Error check (CRC-16)
If an error (except for a communications error) is found in the query content, the inverter will return
an exception response without performing any operation.
For the cause of an error, check the function code for the response. The function code for an excep-
tion response is the sum of the function code for the query and 80 hex (where the MSB is 1). For the
cause of an error, check the exception code.

⚫ Exception code
Code Description
01 hex An unsupported function is specified.
02 hex The specified address does not exist.
03 hex The specified data is in an unacceptable format.
21 hex Writing to a holding register is specified, but the data is out of the range allowed for the inverter.
The inverter does not allow this function because:
• Function attempts to change a register that cannot be changed during RUN.
• Function attempts to issue the Enter command during RUN (UV *1).
• Function attempts to write data to a register during trip (UV *1).
• Function attempts to write data to a register on which the soft lock function is enabled.
22 hex • Function attempts to change an I/O terminal that cannot be changed.
• Function attempts to change the contact type of the terminal to which the RS (Reset) is allo-
cated.
• Function attempts to write data to a register when the auto-tuning function is enabled.
• Function attempts to write data to a password-locked register when the password function is
enabled.
etc.
23 hex Function attempts to write data to a read-only register (coil).
*1. UV: Undervoltage
8-4-5 No Response
The inverter will ignore the query and return no response if:
• It receives a broadcast (query with the address set to 0).
• It detects a communications error in receiving a query.
• The slave address specified in a query differs from the inverter’s slave address setting.
• The length of the time interval set for the inverter to receive the next data of the message after
receiving a message is less than 3.5 characters.
• The data length of a query is inappropriate.
• The length of the reception interval in a frame exceeds 1.5 characters.
• The error check code specified in a query does not match (CRC error).
• It receives a simultaneous broadcast by group (query with the address set to 250 to 254).
• Provide a timer on the master side for monitoring the response and set it to resend the same query if
no response is received within the set time.

8-5 Explanation of Each Function Code
8-5-1 Read Coil Status [01 hex]

Reads the coil status (ON/OFF).
Example. Reading Data from Multi-function Input Terminals 1 to 7 of

Inverter with Slave Address 1
The status of each multi-function input terminal is as follows.
Item Data
Coil No. 0007 hex 0008 hex 0009 hex 000A hex 000B hex 000C hex 000D hex
Multi-function input terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Coil status ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON

⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
1 Slave address *1 01
2 Function code 01
3 Coil start address (MSB) *2 00
(Coil address) = (Coil number) − 1
4 Coil start address (LSB) *2 06
5 Number of coils (MSB) 00
6 Number of coils (LSB) 07
7 CRC-16 (LSB) 9D
8 CRC-16 (LSB) C9
8
⚫ Response
8-5-1 Read Coil Status [01 hex]

Example
No. Field name
[hex]
Input terminal 7
2 Function code 01 Input terminal 1
3 Number of data bytes 01
4 Coil data *3 45 45 hex = 0100 0101
7 CRC-16 (MSB) 90
8 CRC-16 (LSB) 7B
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed.
*2. Note that the coil start address is 0006, which is 1 less than the coil number 0007: Coil start address = Coil
number - 1.
*3. Data as much as the number of data bytes will be transferred. The MSB (the first received data) has the
smallest coil address.

The data received in a response shows the status for coils 0007 to 000D hex. Therefore, the received
data “45 hex = 0100 0101b” can be read, with the status for coil 0007 hex as the LSB, as described in
“Response” on the previous page.
The received data is always transferred in 1-byte (8 bits) format. Bits that lack data are transferred as 0.
If the Read Coil Status function is not executed normally, refer to 8-5-9 Exception Response on page
8-20.
(Example) When the status of 16 coils starting from coil number 0001 hex is read, the order of data is
as shown below. Data 1 is the initial byte data to be sent.
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

Data 1 0008 hex 0007 hex 0006 hex 0005 hex 0004 hex 0003 hex 0002 hex 0001 hex
Data 2 0010 hex 000F hex 000E hex 000D hex 000C hex 000B hex 000A hex 0009 hex
8-5-2 Read from Holding Register [03 hex]

Reads the contents of consecutive holding registers. From the specified holding register, the specified
number of holding registers can be read.
Example. Reading Latest Trip Data (0012 to 0017 Hex) from Inverter
with Slave Address 1
⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 03
3 Register start address (MSB) *2 00
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
4 Register start address (LSB) *2 11
Number of holding registers 6 registers
5 00
(MSB)
Number of holding registers
6 06
(LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB) 95
8 CRC-16 (LSB) CD

⚫ Response
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 03
3 Number of data bytes *3 0C
4 Register data 1 (MSB) 00
0003 hex → 03 dec → E03 (Factor: Overcurrent)
5 Register data 1 (LSB) 03
0004 hex → 4 dec (Inverter status: During accelera-
7 Register data 2 (LSB) 04 tion)
0000 04D2 hex → 1234 dec → 12.34 [Hz] (Fre-
10 Register data 4 (MSB) 04 quency)
11 Register data 4 (LSB) D2
12 Register data 5 (MSB) 01 012C hex → 300 dec → 3.00 [A] (Current)
13 Register data 5 (LSB) 2C
14 Register data 6 (MSB) 0B 0B18 hex → 2840 dec → 284.0 [V] (DC voltage)
16 CRC-16 (MSB) D0 dec: Decimal

17 CRC-16 (LSB) 6D hex: Hexadecimal
*2. Note that the holding register start address is 0011 hex, which is 1 less than the register number 0012 hex:
Register address = Register number - 1.
*3. Data as much as the number of data bytes will be transferred. In this example, the inverter sends back data
from six holding registers, which is 12 (0C hex) bytes.
8-5-3 Write to Coil [05 hex]

Writes the ON/OFF status to a single coil. The coil status changes as shown in the table below.
Coil status
Data
OFF to ON ON to OFF
Written data (MSB) FF hex 00 hex 8
Written data (LSB) 00 hex 00 hex
8-5-3 Write to Coil [05 hex]

Example. Issuing RUN Command to Inverter with Slave Address 1
You need to set the 1st RUN Command Selection (A002) to03 (Modbus communication).
The coil number for the RUN command is 0001.
⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 05
3 Coil address (MSB) *2 00
4 *2 00
Coil address (LSB)
5 Written data (MSB) FF OFF to ON: FF00 hex
6 Written data (LSB) 00
7 CRC-16 (MSB) 8C
8 CRC-16 (LSB) 3A

⚫ Response
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 05
3 Coil address (MSB) *2 00
4 Coil address (LSB) *2 00
5 Written data (MSB) FF
7 CRC-16 (MSB) 8C
8 CRC-16 (LSB) 3A
*1. For a broadcast, no response will be sent back.
*2. Note that the coil address is 0000, which is 1 less than the coil number 0001: Coil address = Coil number - 1.
If the Write to Coil function is not executed normally, refer to 8-5-9 Exception Response on page 8-20.
8-5-4 Write to Holding Register [06 hex]

Writes data to the specified holding register.
Example. Writing 50.00 Hz to Inverter with Slave Address 1 as Out-

put Frequency Setting Value (F001 = A020)
Because the holding registers for the Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) have a data resolution
of 0.01 Hz, to set 50.00 Hz, set the written data to 5000 (1388 hex).
⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 06
3 *2 00
Register address (MSB) (Register address) = (Register number) − 1
4 Register address (LSB) *2 01
5 Written data (MSB) 13 1388 hex → 5000 dec → 50.00 Hz
7 CRC-16 (MSB) D5
8 CRC-16 (LSB) 5C

Some parameter data, such as the Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001), 1st/2nd Multi-step
Speed Reference 0 (A020/A220), Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035), 1st/2nd
Acceleration Time 1 (F002/A202), and 1st/2nd Deceleration Time 1 (F003/A203), occupy two
registers. In Modbus communication, handle these parameters as follows:
• For reading/writing data from/to an MSB register, use the Read/Write from/to Multiple Holding
Registers function to read/write data from/to two registers at the same time.
Attempting to read/write data from/to only the MSB register results in an error and you will
receive an exception response.
• For an LSB register, however, attempts to read/write from/to only a single register will be pro-
cessed successfully. The MSB register data remains intact in this case.

⚫ Response
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 06
3 Register address (MSB) *2 00
4 Register address (LSB) *2 01
5 Written data (MSB) 13
7 CRC-16 (MSB) D5
8 CRC-16 (LSB) 5C
*2. Note that the holding register start address for F001(LOW) is 0001 hex, which is 1 less than the register num-
ber 0002 hex: Register address = Register number - 1.
Note that, except for F001, changing the parameter value on the data display does not update the dis-
played data realtime. To view the updated value, once return to the parameter display and then display

the data again.
If the Write to Holding Register function is not executed normally, refer to 8-5-9 Exception Response on
page 8-20.
8-5-5 Loop-back Test [08 hex]

Checks the communications between the master and the slave. Any value can be used for test data.
Example. Perform a Loop-back Test on Inverter with Slave Address 1

⚫ Query
8
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
8-5-5 Loop-back Test [08 hex]

1 Slave address*1 01
2 Function code 08
3 Test sub code (MSB) 00
4 Test sub code (LSB) 00
5 Data (MSB) Any
6 Data (LSB) Any
7 CRC-16 (MSB) CRC
8 CRC-16 (LSB) CRC

⚫ Response
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 08
3 Test sub code (MSB) 00
4 Test sub code (LSB) 00
5 Data (MSB) Any
6 Data (LSB) Any
7 CRC-16 (MSB) CRC
8 CRC-16 (LSB) CRC
The test sub code supports the Echo Query Data command (00 hex, 00 hex) only. Other commands are
not supported.
8-5-6 Write to Multiple Coils [0F hex]

Rewrites the ON/OFF status to consecutive multiple coils.
Example. Changing Status of Multi-function Input Terminals 1 to 7 of

Inverter with Slave Address 1
Change the ON/OFF status of the multi-function input terminal 1 to 7 as shown in the following table.
Item Data
Coil No. 0007 hex 0008 hex 0009 hex 000A hex 000B hex 000C hex 000D hex
Multi-function input terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Terminal status ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 0F
7 Number of bytes 02
8 Change data (MSB) *3 17
9 Change data (LSB) *3 00 17 hex = 0001 0111
10 CRC-16 (MSB) 06
Input terminal 1 input
CRC-16 (LSB) 98
Input terminal 7

⚫ Response
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 0F
7 CRC-16 (MSB) F4
8 CRC-16 (LSB) 08
*1. During a broadcast, no response will be sent back.
*2. Note that the coil start address is 0006, which is 1 less than the coil number 0007: Coil start address = Coil
number - 1.
*3. Since written data occupies both MSB and LSB as a set, make the data to have an even number of bytes by
adding one byte of padding data, even if you actually need to change an odd number of bytes.

A multi-function input terminal is recognized as ON when either the terminal block input or the commu-
nications setting turns ON.
Also note that the Multi-function Input Monitor (d005) monitors the terminal block input only.
If the Write to Multiple Coils function is not executed normally, refer to 8-5-9 Exception Response on
page 8-20.
(Example) When the status of coils from coil number 0001 to 000D hex is written, the order of data is
as shown below. Data 1 is the initial byte data to send.
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

Data 1 0008 hex 0007 hex 0006 hex 0005 hex 0004 hex 0003 hex 0002 hex 0001 hex 8
Data 2 − − − 000D hex 000C hex 000B hex 000A hex 0009 hex
8-5-6 Write to Multiple Coils [0F hex]

8-5-7 Write to Multiple Holding Registers [10 hex]

Writes data to consecutive multiple holding registers.
Example. Writing 10 Seconds to Inverter with Slave Address 1 as 1st

Acceleration Time 1 (F002) Value
Because the holding registers 1103 to 1104 hex for the 1st Acceleration Time 1 (F002) has a data reso-
lution of 0.01 s, to set 10 seconds, set the written data to 1000 (0000 03E8 hex).
⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 10
3 *2 11
Register start address (MSB) (Register address) = (Register number) − 1
4 *2 02
Register start address (LSB)
5 Number of registers (MSB) 00
6 Number of registers (LSB) 02
7 Number of bytes *3 04
8 Written data 1 (MSB) 00
9 Written data 1 (LSB) 00
0000 03E8 hex → 1000 dec → 10.00 s
11 Written data 2 (LSB) E8
12 CRC-16 (MSB) B2
13 CRC-16 (LSB) 98
⚫ Response
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 10
3 *2 11
Register start address (MSB)
4 Register start address (LSB) *2 02
5 Number of registers (MSB) 00
6 Number of registers (LSB) 02
7 CRC-16 (MSB) E5
8 CRC-16 (LSB) 34
*1. During a broadcast, no response will be sent back.
*2. Note that the holding register start address is 1102 hex, which is 1 less than the register number 1103 hex:
Register starting address = Register number - 1.
*3. This is not the number of holding registers, but the number of bytes to be changed actually.
If the Write to Multiple Registers function is not executed normally, refer to 8-5-9 Exception Response
on page 8-20.

8-5-8 Read/Write from/to Multiple Holding Registers [17h]

Reads data from and writes data to consecutive multiple holding registers in a continuous manner.
Example. Writing 50.00 Hz to Output Frequency Setting/Monitor

(F001) and Reading from Output Frequency Monitor (d001) Value
from Inverter with Slave Address 1
Because the holding registers 0001 to 0002 hex for the Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001) have
a data resolution of 0.01 s, to set 50.00 Hz, set the written data to 5000 (0000 1388 hex).
Similarly, the holding registers for the Output Frequency Monitor (d001) are 1001 to 1002 hex.
⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]

2 Function code 17
3 Read register start address (MSB) *2 10
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
4 Read register start address (LSB) *2 00
5 Number of read registers (MSB) 00
6 Number of read registers (LSB) 02
7 Write register start address (MSB) *2 00 (Register address) = (Register number) − 1
8 *2 00
Write register start address (LSB)
9 Number of write registers (MSB) 00
10 Number of write registers (LSB) 02
11 Number of written data bytes n 04
13 Written data 1 (LSB) 00 0000 1388 hex → 5000 dec → 50.00 Hz
15 Written data 2 (LSB) 88 8
16 CRC-16 (MSB) F4
17 CRC-16 (LSB) 86
isters [17h]
⚫ Response 8-5-8 Read/Write from/to Multiple Holding Reg-
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
2 Function code 17
3 Number of read data bytes n 04
4 Read data 1 (MSB) 00
5 Read data 1 (LSB) 00 0000 1388 hex → 5000 dec → 50.00 Hz
6 Read data 2 (MSB) 13
7 Read data 2 (LSB) 88
8 CRC-16 (MSB) F4
9 CRC-16 (LSB) 71
*2. Note that the holding register start address is 1 less than the register number: Register address = Register
number - 1.
If the Read/Write from/to Multiple Holding Registers function is not executed normally, refer to 8-5-9
Exception Response on page 8-20.

8-5-9 Exception Response

In a query, the master requests a response, except for broadcast or simultaneous broadcast by group.
Although the inverter normally returns a response to the query, it returns an exception response if the
query has an error.
An exception response has the field configuration shown in the table below.
Field configuration
Slave address
Function code
Exception code
Error check
The details of the field configuration are as shown below. An exception response has a function code,
which is the sum of the function code value of the query and 80 hex. An exception code shows the fac-
tor of the exception response.
Function code
Query Exception Response
01 hex 81 hex
03 hex 83 hex
05 hex 85 hex
06 hex 86 hex
0F hex 8F hex
10 hex 90 hex
17 hex 97 hex
* The MSB is 1.
Exception code Description

01 hex An unsupported function is specified.
02 hex The specified address does not exist.
03 hex The specified data is in an unacceptable format.
The Write to Holding Register function is specified, but the data is out of
21 hex
the setting range.
The inverter does not allow this function because:
• Function attempts to change a register that cannot be changed during
RUN.
• Function attempts to issue the Enter command during RUN (UV *1).
• Function attempts to write data to a register during trip (UV*1).
• Function attempts to write data to a register on which the soft lock func-
22 hex tion is enabled.
• Function attempts to change an I/O terminal that cannot be changed.
• Function attempts to change the contact type of the terminal to which
the RS (Reset) is allocated.
• Function attempts to write data to a register when the auto-tuning func-
tion is enabled.
• Function attempts to write data to a password-locked register when the
password function is enabled.
23 hex Function attempts to write data to a read-only register (coil).
*1. UV: Undervoltage

8-6 Saving a Change to Holding Register

(Enter Command)
The Write to Holding Register (06 hex) or Write to Consecutive Holding Registers (10 hex or 17 hex)
function is used to enable new register data. However, the new data is not stored in the EEPROM of the
inverter and is restored to the previous value when the inverter power supply is shut off.
To store a change to holding registers in the inverter’s EEPROM memory, issue the Enter command
according to the following procedure. In addition, after changing a control parameter, you need to recal-
culate the motor parameters. In this case, also use the Enter command to execute recalculation.
8-6 Saving a Change to Holding Register (Enter Command)

8-6-1 How to Issue Enter Command
Use the Write to Holding Register (06 hex) command to write data to the holding register for the Enter
command (0900 hex). Below are the values to be written to the holding register (0900 hex).
Set value Description

0000 Motor parameter initialization *1
0001 Set value storage
0002 to FFFF Motor parameter initialization *1 and set value storage
*1. When the motor parameter initialization is executed, the parameters listed below are initialized to the default
data.
⚫ The list of parameters that are initialized by the motor parameter initialization

H030/H230 to Various motor parameters
A003/A203 Base Frequency
H034/H234 (Auto-tuning Data)
A004/A204 Maximum Frequency
PM Motor Parameter
A044/A244 Control Method H102
Selection
A082/A282 Motor Rated Voltage Selection
H103 PM Motor Capacity
H104 PM Motor Pole Number
H002/H202 Motor parameter selection
8-6-1 How to Issue Enter Command

H105 PM Motor Rated Current
H003/H203 Motor Capacity
H106 to H110 Various PM motor parameters
H004/H204 Motor Pole Number
Various PM motor parameters
H005/H205 Speed Response H111 to H113
H020/H220 to (Auto-tuning Data) 8
Various motor parameters
H024/H224 H116 PM Motor Speed Response

• After receiving the Enter command, the inverter returns a response to the host and writes the
value to the EEPROM memory. You can monitor the during data write signal (Coil No. 0049
hex) to check whether the data is written.
• Since the inverter’s EEPROM memory has a limit for the number of rewrites (approximately
100,000 times), the inverter life may be shortened if the Enter command is frequently used.

Example. Issuing Enter Command (Storing Set Value) for Inverter with
Slave Address 8
⚫ Query
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
1 Slave address*1 08
2 Function code 06
3 *2 08
Register address (MSB) (Register address) = (Register number) − 1
4 Register address (LSB) *2 FF
7 CRC-16 (MSB) 7A
8 CRC-16 (LSB) C3
⚫ Response
Example
No. Field name
[hex]
1 Slave address 08
2 Function code 06
3 Register address (MSB) *2 08
4 Register address (LSB) *2 FF
7 CRC-16 (MSB) 7A
8 CRC-16 (LSB) C3
*2. Note that the register address is 08FF hex, which is 1 less than the register number 0900 hex.

8-6-2 EEPROM Write Mode

• To set the EEPROM write mode, use the Write to Holding Register (06 hex) command etc. to write 1
to the holding register for the EEPROM write mode (0902 hex).
• In the EEPROM write mode, the data changed by the Write to Holding Register (06 hex) command is
written to both the RAM (volatile memory for operation) and the EEPROM (non-volatile memory for
storage). Then, the EEPROM write mode is canceled.
• The EEPROM write mode is canceled also if a command other than the Write to Holding Register (06
hex) command is received in the EEPROM write mode.
⚫ Difference between enter command and EEPROM write mode

Enter command EEPROM write mode
8-6 Saving a Change to Holding Register (Enter Command)

Master 3G3MX2-EV2 Master 3G3MX2-EV2
Parameter change EEPROM write mode

Writes data to RAM enabled
Parameter change 902 hex = 1
Writes data to RAM
Parameter change Writes data to RAM and
Parameter change
Writes data to RAM EEPROM (changed data only)
Enter command
Parameter change
900 hex = 1 Writes all data to Writes data to RAM
EEPROM EEPROM write mode is
enabled only for a single
parameter change oper-
ation.
8-6-2 EEPROM Write Mode

8-7 Modbus Mapping Function

This Modbus mapping function can change up to 10 register addresses.
For example, when designing replacement, you can match the inverter-side register addresses without
changing the communications program.
It is also possible to set the data type, scale, and endian (byte order) of communication data according
to your application.
8-7-1 Operation of Modbus Mapping Function

The Modbus mapping function can set up to 10 register addresses.
This function processes the command, which is sent to the external register address specified from the
external communications, for data in the address set in Modbus Mapping Internal Register.
Even if the data are different between the external and internal registers, it is possible to adjust data by
the settings of Modbus Mapping External Register Type and Modbus Mapping Scaling.
Modbus mapping function settings (P200 = 01: Enabled)

External register Data type Scale Internal register
P201 P211 P221 P301
1005 hex 01: Signed 2.000 1001 hex
Communications
terminal
Inside inverter
Command from externa l External Internal
communications register (Connection process) register
··· …………………………… ···
Address 1005 hex
1000 hex …………………………… 1000 hex
Command 10 hex
(Write to register) 1001 hex …………………………… 1001 hex
Data 0001 hex 1002 hex …………………………… 1002 hex

1003 hex …………… ……………… 1003 hex
Data type Scale
1004 hex ……………… …………… 1004 hex
conversion
1005 hex ……………… …………… 1005 hex *1
1006 hex …………………………… 1006 hex
··· …………………………… ···
*1. The internal register (Modbus register inside the inverter) that overlaps with the external register setting is dis-
abled.
To use that internal register, set an external register not to overlap or set a different Modbus mapping function
to access from a different address.

8-7-2 Modbus Mapping Function Settings

To use the Modbus mapping function, set the Modbus Mapping Function Selection (P200) to 01 (Mod-
bus mapping enabled) and set each Modbus mapping parameter.
• Each number of 1 to 10 in Modbus Mapping External Register, Modbus Mapping External Register
Type, Modbus Mapping Scaling, and Modbus Mapping Internal Register corresponds to one set of
Modbus mapping function settings, respectively.
• In the Modbus Mapping External Register 1 to 10 (P201 to P210), set the register address to receive
commands from external communications. When this is set to 0000, the command will not be pro-
cessed.
• In the Modbus Mapping External Register Type 1 to 10 (P211 to P220), set the data type used for the
external register on the external communications side.
• In the Modbus Mapping Scaling 1 to 10 (P221 to P230), set the scale factor for receiving data from
external communications and capturing it into the inverter. Conversely, each of these settings pro-
vides a subtraction factor when internal data is output to external communications.
• In the Modbus Mapping Internal Register 1 to 10 (P301 to P310), set the Modbus register address
inside the inverter to process commands from external communications.
For the Modbus register addresses of the inverter, refer to 8-9 Modbus Communication Data Lists on
page 8-37.
• The Modbus mapping function is intended for 16-bit single-word data only and does not support dou-
ble-word data and coils. Therefore, the main information with double-word data is compressed into

single-word data to be used in the Modbus mapping function.
Refer to the register list provided in 8-7-3 Compressed Single-word Registers on page 8-26.
• After setting or changing the Modbus mapping function, be sure to cycle the inverter power supply.
Until the power supply is cycled, the inverter does not apply the changes to the Modbus mapping
function settings.
• If the Modbus communication function is executed with any erroneous Modbus function setting, the
inverter will return an exception response to the command. In this case, check the exception code for
the exception response.
For details on exception codes, refer to 8-7-4 Troubleshooting for Modbus Mapping Function on page
8-28.
8
Modbus Mapping Function 00: Standard Modbus address
P200 00 −
8-7-2 Modbus Mapping Function Settings

Selection 01: Modbus mapping enabled
Modbus Mapping External
P201 to P210 0000 to FFFF hex 0000 −
Register 1 to 10
Modbus Mapping External 00: Unsigned
P211 to P220 00 −
Register Type 1 to 10 01: Signed
Modbus Mapping Scaling 1
P221 to P230 0.001 to 65.535 1.000 −
to 10
Modbus Mapping Internal
P301 to P310 0000 to FFFF hex 0000 −
Register 1 to 10


• The Modbus mapping function settings are reflected on not only Modbus communication, but
also USB communications and communications units.
Set and use the USB communications and communications units as follows.
When using CX-Drive: When the CX-Drive is used to read/write parameters, be sure to
set in advance the Modbus Mapping Function Selection (P200) to
00 (Standard Modbus address).
If the Modbus Mapping Function Selection (P200) is set to 01
(Modbus mapping enabled), the operation is performed for the set
address. Therefore the data is not read/written from/to the
intended parameter.
When using communi- The internal processing between the inverter and communications
cations units: unit cannot be performed normally. Be sure to set the Modbus
Mapping Function Selection (P200) to 00 (Standard Modbus
address).
• If the same address is set in the Modbus Mapping External Register 1 to 10 (P201 to P210),
the inverter will return an exception response with the exception code “32 hex” attached to
the communications command.
• If an address that does not exist in the internal Modbus register or double-word data address
is set in the Modbus Mapping Internal Register 1 to 10 (P301 to P310), the inverter will return
an exception response with the exception code “31 hex” or “32 hex” attached to the commu-
nications command.
• Be sure to set the Modbus Mapping External Register Type 1 to 10 (P211 to P220) and Mod-
bus Mapping Scaling 1 to 10 (P221 to P230) correctly. After setting these parameters, check
that data values are set as intended.
Note that the inverter does not perform checks other than the upper and lower limit checks
and operates according to settings even if they are incorrect.
8-7-3 Compressed Single-word Registers

The Modbus mapping function is intended for 16-bit single-word data only and does not support dou-
ble-word data and coils. Therefore, the main information with double-word data is compressed into sin-
gle-word data to be used in the Modbus mapping function. Also, the main coils with single-word data
are provided.
For compressed single-word registers, refer to the list below.
Register Modbus Data

Parameter
register Function name R/W Monitor or setting data resolu-
No. No.
spec. No tion
1E21 hex 1E20 hex Output Frequency Monitor d001 R 0 to 59000 0.01
[Hz]
PID Feedback Value
1E22 hex 1E21 hex d004 R 0 to 65535 0.1
Monitor
Output Frequency Monitor
1E23 hex 1E22 hex d007 R 0 to 65535 0.01
(After conversion)
0.01
1E24 hex 1E23 hex Real Frequency Monitor d008 R −32768 to 32767 [Hz]
0.01
1E25 hex 1E24 hex Fault Monitor 1 Frequency d081 R 0 to 59000 [Hz]
Output Frequency Setting/ 0/Starting frequency to 0.01
1F31 hex 1F30 hex F001 R/W [Hz]
Monitor Maximum frequency
1F32 hex 1F31 hex 1st Acceleration Time 1 F002 R/W 0 to 65535 0.01 [s]
1F33 hex 1F32 hex 1st Deceleration Time 1 F003 R/W 0 to 65535 0.01 [s]

Register Modbus Data

Parameter
register Function name R/W Monitor or setting data resolu-
No. No.
spec. No tion
1st Multi-step Speed 0/Starting Frequency to 1st 0.01
1F34 hex 1F33 hex A020 R/W [Hz]
Reference 0 Maximum Frequency
Multi-step Speed 0/Starting frequency to 0.01
Reference 1 Maximum frequency
1F36 hex 1F35 hex A022 R/W
Reference 2 Maximum frequency [Hz]
Reference 3 Maximum frequency
0/Frequency Lower Limit to 0.01
1F38 hex 1F37 hex 1st Frequency Upper Limit A061 R/W [Hz]
Maximum Frequency
1F39 hex 1F38 hex 1st Frequency Lower Limit A062 R/W 0 to Frequency Upper Limit 0.01
[Hz]
0.00 to Starting Frequency:
Acceleration Stop Fre- Disabled 0.01
1F3A hex 1F39 hex A069 R/W [Hz]
quency Frequency above Starting
Frequency to 59000
Frequency Addition 0.01
1F3B hex 1F3A hex A145 R/W 0 to 59000 [Hz]
Amount Setting
0.00 to Starting Frequency:
Deceleration Stop Fre- Disabled 0.01
1F3C hex 1F3B hex A154 R/W

quency Frequency above Starting [Hz]
Frequency to 59000
PID Sleep Operation 0.01
1F3D hex 1F3C hex A156 R/W 0 to 59000 [Hz]
Level
Frequency Pull-in Lower 0.01
1F3E hex 1F3D hex b007 R/W 0 to 59000 [Hz]
Limit Frequency
⚫ Inverter control input register No. 1F01 hex
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Name − − In7 In6 In5 In4 In3 In2 In1 − − RS EXT Dir Opr −
8
Opr RUN command (0: Stop/ 1: RUN) In3 Multi-function input 3
Dir Rotation direction command (0: Forward/1: Reverse) In4 Multi-function input 4
8-7-3 Compressed Single-word Registers

EXT External trip In5 Multi-function input 5
RS Reset In6 Multi-function input 6
In1 Multi-function Input 1 In7 Multi-function input 7
In2 Multi-function Input 2

⚫ Inverter status monitor register No. 1E01 hex
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Name ONT RNT TRQ UV − OTQ FA3 AL OD OL FA2 FA1 RUN − IRDY Dir
Dir Rotation direction (0: Forward/1: Reverse) AL Alarm

IRDY Inverter ready FA3 Set-frequency only
RUN During RUN OTQ Overtorque/Undertorque
FA1 Constant speed reached UV Undervoltage
FA2 Set frequency exceeded TRQ Torque limit
OL Overload warning RNT RUN time over
OD Excessive PID deviation ONT Power ON time over
8-7-4 Troubleshooting for Modbus Mapping Function

If there is any setting error for the Modbus mapping function, the inverter will display an exception
response during Modbus communication.
In this case, check the exception code for the exception response.
Below are exception codes associated with exception response and the Modbus mapping function set-
ting errors.
For details on other exception codes, refer to 8-5-9 Exception Response on page 8-20.
⚫ Exception response for erroneous setting

The function code for an exception response is the sum of the executed function code and 80 hex.
Check the error condition with the exception code.
⚫ Response
Slave address
Function code
Exception code
Error check (CRC-16)
Exception code Error condition Countermeasure

• The external address is set to other than • Set the internal address other than 0000.
0000 and the internal address is not • Use a compressed single-word register.
changed from 0000. • Set the internal address correctly.
31 hex • The internal address has a double-word • Set the external address so that it does
register address. not overlap.
• The set internal address does not exist.
• The external address overlaps.
• When the external address overlaps with • The Modbus registers inside the inverter
double-word data in the Modbus register that overlap with the external address
inside the inverter, the inverter received a specified by the Modbus mapping function
command to a non-overlapping address, are disabled.
32 hex which has double-word data. For double-word data, both registers are
disabled.
Review the external communications, or
set the Modbus mapping function for that
address.

8-7-5 Endian Function

In communications, endian refers to the byte order in single-word communications data to be
sent/received.
Generally, big endian (where the MSB-side byte is stored first) and little endian (where the LSB-side
byte is stored first) are used.
Special endian is a kind of big endian where the word order of double-word data is reversed. For
3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, Modbus communication is configured in big endian.
The endian function can set endian only for data sent/received in communications (without changing
the address).
In the Modbus Mapping Endian Selection (P400), set the endian you want to use.
The Modbus Mapping Endian Selection (P400) setting is enabled independent of the Modbus Mapping
Function Selection (P200) setting.

00: Big endian
Modbus Mapping Endian
P400 01: Little endian 00 −
Selection
02: Special endian
⚫ Byte order of single-word data

• Relationship between single-word data bits and bytes
Bit 8 to 15 7 to 0
Byte MSB byte LSB byte
• Order of data during Modbus communication
Send/Receive byte
Big endian Little endian Special endian
order
1 MSB byte LSB byte MSB byte
2 LSB byte MSB byte LSB byte
8
⚫ Byte order of double-word data
• Relationship between double-word data bits and bytes
8-7-5 Endian Function

Bit 24 to 31 16 to 23 8 to 15 7 to 0
Byte MSB byte Data 1 Data 2 LSB byte
• Order of data during Modbus communication
Send/Receive byte
Big endian Little endian Special endian
order
1 MSB byte LSB byte Data 2
2 Data 1 Data 2 LSB byte
3 Data 2 Data 1 MSB byte
4 LSB byte MSB byte Data 1

⚫ Executable function codes

This function is enabled only for the function codes listed below.
Other function codes will be processed in big endian.
Function code
03 hex Read from multiple holding registers
06 hex Write to a holding register
10 hex Write to multiple holding registers
17 hex Read/Write from/to multiple holding registers

• The Modbus mapping endian function settings are reflected on not only Modbus communica-
tion, but also USB communications and communications units.
Set and use the USB communications and communications units as follows.
When using CX-Drive: When the CX-Drive is used to read/write parameters, be sure to
set in advance the Modbus Mapping Endian Selection (P400) to
00 (Big endian).
If the Modbus Mapping Endian Selection (P400) is not set to 00
(Big endian), parameter data cannot be processed normally.
When using communi- The internal processing between the inverter and communications
cations units: unit cannot be performed normally.
Be sure to set the Modbus Mapping Endian Selection (P400) to 00
(Big endian).
• The Modbus mapping endian function does not work with the fault monitor functions (Regis-
ter No.: 0012 to 004E hex).
To use the fault monitor functions, be sure to set P400 to 00 (Big endian).

8-8 Co-inverter Communication

In addition to the standard Modbus communication (slave), the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter provides
the co-inverter communication function, which enables more than one 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter
to communicate mutually without master equipment such as a computer or PLC.
In co-inverter communication, the inverters are assigned as “management inverter,” “master inverter,”
and “slave inverter”. The master inverter is specified by the management inverter according to the user
settings. The others are slave inverters. The management inverter is always fixed, but the master
inverter is switched sequentially. Therefore, the management inverter may serve as the master or a
slave inverter. Other conditions are as follows.
• One management inverter is required within a network.
• Up to 8 inverters can serve as the master inverter.
• Up to 247 inverters can be connected within the entire network (32 inverters without repeaters in
compliance with the RS485 specifications).
In co-inverter communication, be sure to assign the station No. 1, which serves as the management
inverter.

The master inverter can write data to the holding registers on any slave inverter. At this time, up to five
different station numbers and holding registers can be specified at once. On completion of each data
transmission session between the master and a slave (or slaves), the master inverter is switched to the
next in a sequential manner. In this way, data transmission is repeated according to the settings for
each master inverter.
Inverter Inverter Inverter

Station No. 2 Station No. 3 Station No. 4
Master (Inverter No. 1) sends

data to slave(s).
Master is switched from 8

Inverter 1 to Inverter 2. *1*2
data to slave(s).
Master is switched from

Inverter 2 to Inverter 3. *3*4
data to slave(s).
Master is switched from

Inverter 3 to Inverter 4.

data to slave(s).
: Master inverter
*1. Switching of the master is performed automatically by the management inverter.

*2. The management inverter sends the master switching command from Inverter No. 01 to 02 after data is sent
from Inverter 01 (master) to a slave (or slaves), with a wait time of “silent interval + Communication Wait Time
(C078).
*3. After receiving data from the master inverter, the management inverter sends the next master switching com-
mand with a wait time of “silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078). If the management inverter can-
nnot receive the data sent from the master inverter within the Communication Error Timeout Time (C077), a
communication timeout occurs and the management inverter follows the operation set in the Operation Selec-
tion on Communication Error (C076).
*4. Be sure to enable the Communication Error Timeout Time setting (C077 = 0.01 to 99.99) on the management
inverter. When this setting is disabled (C077 = 0), the co-inverter communication will stop if the management
inverter cannot receive data from the master. In this case, cycle the power supply for the management
inverter, or reset the management inverter (by turning ON/OFF the terminal RS).
8-8-1 Co-inverter Communication Parameters

The parameters required to establish co-inverter communication are shown in the table below.
Default Setting
data target*1
Communication
C072*2 1. to 247.*3 1. − ALL*4
Station No. Selection
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
Operation Selection on
C076*5 02: Ignore 02 − ALL
Communication Error
03: Free-run stop
Communication Error 0.00: Timeout disabled
C077 0.00 s ALL
Timeout Time 0.01 to 99.99
Communication Wait
C078 0. to 1000. 0. ms ALL
Time
00: Modbus communication −
Communication Selec- 01: Co-inverter communication B
C096 *2 00 −
tion 02: Co-inverter communication
A
(management inverter)
Co-inverter Communi- 1. to 8.
C098 *2 cation Starting Station Setting required only for manage- 1. − A
Number ment inverter*6
Co-inverter Communi- 1. to 8.
C099 *2 cation Ending Station Setting required only for manage- 1. − A
Number ment inverter *6
Co-inverter Communi- 00: Start via 485 terminal*7 A

C100 *2 00 −
cation Start Selection 01: Constant communication*8 A
Number of Sent Data
of All Stations in
P140 1 to 5 5 − M
Co-inverter Communi-
cation
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations
P141 1 to 247*9 1 − M
in Co-inverter Commu-
nication 1
Recipient Register of
All Stations in
P142 0000 to FFFF 0000 − M
cation 1

Default Setting
data target*1
P143 Stations in Co-inverter 0000 to FFFF 0000 − M
Communication 1
Recipient Station
P144 1 to 247 2 − M
nication 2
All Stations in
P145 0000 to FFFF 0000 − M
cation 2
Communication 2
Recipient Station
P147 1 to 247 3 − M
nication 3
All Stations in
P148 0000 to FFFF 0000 − M

cation 3
Communication 3
Recipient Station
P150 1 to 247 4 − M
nication 4
All Stations in
P151 0000 to FFFF 0000 − M
cation 4 8
8-8-1 Co-inverter Communication Parameters

Communication 4
Recipient Station
P153 1 to 247 5 − M
nication 5
All Stations in
P154 0000 to FFFF 0000 − M
cation 5
Communication 5
Multi-function Input 1 81: 485 (Start co-inverter com-
C001 to C007 − − A
to 7 Selection munication) *7
*1. Below are the details of the setting target.
ALL: Setting required for all connected inverters
A: Setting required only for management inverter (Station No. 1)
B: Setting required for inverters other than management inverter (Station No. 1)
M: Setting required only for inverters set in C098 to C099 (= Inverters assigned with master role)

*2. After changing any of the C072 and C096 to C100 data on the management inverter, be sure to cycle the power
supply to apply the changes. For inverters other than the management inverter, these changes will be applied
immediately.
*3. To switch the master inverter among more than one inverter, be sure to set sequential station numbers. If the
set station numbers include any skipped number, communications cannot be established.
*4. For the management inverter, set the station number to 1 (C072 = 1).
*5. When the Operation Selection on Communication Error (C076) is set to 02 (Ignore) on the management invert-
er, the co-inverter communication session will stop if a communications timeout error occurs on the manage-
ment inverter. In this case, cycle the power supply of the management inverter.
*6. Set these parameters so that C098 is equal to or less than C099.
*7. When the Co-inverter Communication Start Selection (C100) is set to 00 (Start via 485 terminal), set one of
the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 81 (Start co-inverter communication).
*8. When the Co-inverter Communication Start Selection (C100) is set to 01 (Constant communication), the man-
agement inverter starts sending data as soon as the power supply is turned on. At this time, if the next master
inverter is delayed in the startup and cannot receive the master switching command, the master inverter cannot
send the data, which results in a communications timeout error on the management inverter.
When you set C100 to 01, check that the startup of the other inverters is completed and power on the man-
agement inverter finally.
*9. Although, in master-to-slave communications, you set recipient slave's station number, actually, data is sent
to all stations via broadcast communications (Station No. 00). Slaves that are not specified as the recipient on
the master side discard the received data.

8-8-2 Co-inverter Communication Settings

• On each inverter, set the station number in the Communication Station No. Selection (C072)
so that they do not overlap among the inverters. Do not forget to set the station No. 1, which
serves as the management inverter.
• On the management inverter, set the Communication Selection (C096) to 02 (Co-inverter
communication (management inverter)). For other inverters, set the Communication Selec-
tion (C096) to 01 (Co-inverter communication).
• Set a station number 1 to 8 on inverters that serve as the master inverter. To switch the mas-
ter inverter among more than one inverter, the station numbering must be sequential. On the
management inverter, set the smallest master station number in the Co-inverter Communica-
tion Starting Station Number (C098) and the largest master station number in the Co-inverter
Communication Ending Station Number (C099).
• In the Co-inverter Communication Start Selection (C100), set how to start inverter communi-
cations. When C100 is set to 00 (Start via 485 terminal), set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to
7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 81 (Start co-inverter communication).
• In P140 to 155, set the following parameters, which are required when the master inverter
writes data: the number of sent data, recipient station number, recipient register address, and
sender register address.

Co-inverter Communication Operation
(1) The master inverter sends data to one or more slave inverters according to the set-
tings for that master inverter.
(This data is also sent to the management inverter that does not serve as the master
inverter.)
(2) The management inverter sends the master switching command and the master
inverter is switched accordingly.
(3) The next master inverter sends data to one or more slave inverters in the same man-
ner as explained in step (1).
(This data is also sent to the management inverter that does not serve as the master
inverter.)
8
(4) Steps (2) and (3) are followed repeatedly.
Note Because this inverter is designed to establish co-inverter communication as broadcast communications 8-8-2 Co-inverter Communication Settings
(Station No. 00), communications data is sent to all stations. Therefore, slaves that are not specified as the
recipient on the master side receive the data once, but discard internally the data not addressed to them.

Example of Co-inverter Communication Sequence

The sequence diagram below shows co-inverter communication among four inverters with station num-
bers from 1 to 4, where Stations No. 1 to 3 are set as the master inverter.
Station No. register data

02 xxxx xxxx M Data sent from master
02 xxxx xxxx
03 xxxx xxxx Up to 5 recipients S Data received by slave(s)
03 xxxx xxxx can be specified.
Management
Send M
Inverter Station No. 1
Receive t1 t3 S t2 S
Inverter Station No. 2 Send

Receive S S S
t3 t3 t3
Inverter Station No. 3 Send

Receive S S S
Send
Inverter Station No. 4
Receive S S S S
All slaves receive data from the t1: Silent Interval + Communication Wait Time (C078)
master but discard it if not destined t2: Silent Interval + Communication Wait Time (C078)
to them. t3: Communication Error Timeout Time (C077)
• Be sure to set the Communication Error Timeout Time (C077) to other than 0.00 (1 second or longer
is recommended) on the management inverter. When this parameter is set to 0.00, the inverter's
communications function will stop if no data is received from the master. If it stops working, cycle the
power supply of the management inverter.
• The communications error timeout timer starts when the inverter starts waiting for data reception and
times out when it cannot complete data reception within the set time. If a timeout occurs, the inverter
performs the operation set in the Operation Selection on Communication Error (C076). (t3 in above
diagram)
• When the management inverter is the master, the master switching command will be sent with a wait
time of “silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078) after the master sends data. (t1 in above
diagram)
• When an inverter other than the management inverter is the master, the master switching command
will be sent with a wait time of “silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078) after receipt of data
sent from the master inverter. (t2 in above diagram)
• When the Co-inverter Communication Start Selection (C100) is set to 01 (Constant communication),
the management inverter starts sending data as soon as the power supply is turned on. Therefore, if
the power-on timing of any other inverter is delayed, the communications cannot be established nor-
mally, which results in a communications timeout error on the management inverter. When you set
this to 01 (Constant communication), check that the startup of the other inverters is completed and
power on the management inverter finally.
• Do not set 08FF hex (EEPROM Write) or 0901 hex (EEPROM Write Mode Selection) in the recipient
registers. Doing so causes the co-inverter communication session to stop in the EEPROM write pro-
cess.
• After changing any of the C096 to C100 data, be sure to cycle the power supply to apply the
changes.

8-9 Modbus Communication Data Lists

R/W in the list shows whether data can be read from, or written to, the coil or holding register.
(R: Read only, R/W: Read and write enabled)

• The “Coil No.” in the table header shows the coil number used inside the inverter.
Use this coil number when setting EtherCAT communications.
• The “Modbus coil spec. No.” in the table header shows the coil number used to actually spec-
ify the coil in the Modbus communication process.
This coil number is 1 less than the inverter “Coil No.” according to the Modbus communica-
tion specifications.
8-9-1 Coil Number List

Modbus coil
Coil No. Item R/W Description
spec. No.
0000 hex − Not used − Not accessible
1: Run
0001 hex 0000 hex RUN command R/W 0: Stop (Enabled when A002/A202 =
03)
1: Reverse
0002 hex 0001 hex Rotation direction command R/W 0: Forward (Enabled when A002/A202
= 03)
0003 hex 0002 hex External Trip (EXT) R/W 1: Trip
0004 hex 0003 hex Trip reset (RS) R/W 1: Reset
0005 hex
− Reserved − −
0006 hex 8
*1
1: ON
0007 hex 0006 hex Multi-function Input 1 R/W
0: OFF

1: ON
0008 hex 0007 hex Multi-function Input 2 *1 R/W
0: OFF
1: ON
0009 hex 0008 hex Multi-function Input 3 *1 R/W
0: OFF
1: ON
000A hex 0009 hex Multi-function Input 4 *1 R/W
0: OFF
1: ON
000B hex 000A hex Multi-function Input 5 *1 R/W
0: OFF
1: ON
000C hex 000B hex Multi-function Input 6 *1 R/W
0: OFF
1: ON
000D hex 000C hex Multi-function Input 7 *1 R/W
0: OFF
000E hex − Reserved − −
1: Run
000F hex 000E hex Operation status R
0: Stop (Interlocked with d003)
*1. These input terminals can be turned ON/OFF via Modbus communication. This inverter recognizes that an in-
put terminal is ON when it is turned ON either via communications or by the input signal to the control circuit
terminal block.

Modbus coil
spec. No.
1: Reverse
0010 hex 000F hex RUN direction R
0: Forward (Interlocked with d003)
1: Ready
0011 hex 0010 hex Inverter ready R
0: Not ready
0012 hex − Reserved − −
1: ON
0013 hex 0012 hex RUN (During RUN) R
0: OFF
FA1 (Constant speed arrival 1: ON
0014 hex 0013 hex R
signal) 0: OFF
FA2 (Set frequency exceeded 1: ON
0015 hex 0014 hex R
signal) 0: OFF
1: ON
0016 hex 0015 hex OL (Overload warning) R
0: OFF
1: ON
0017 hex 0016 hex OD (Excessive PID deviation) R
0: OFF
1: ON
0018 hex 0017 hex AL (Alarm signal) R
0: OFF
FA3 (Set-frequency only 1: ON
0019 hex 0018 hex R
signal) 0: OFF
OTQ (Overtorque/Under- 1: ON
001A hex 0019 hex R
torque) 0: OFF
001B hex − Reserved − −
1: ON
001C hex 001B hex UV (Undervoltage) R
0: OFF
1: ON
001D hex 001C hex TRQ (Torque limit) R
0: OFF
1: ON
001E hex 001D hex RNT (RUN time over) R
0: OFF
1: ON
001F hex 001E hex ONT (Power ON time over) R
0: OFF
THM (Electronic thermal 1: ON
0020 hex 001F hex R
warning) 0: OFF
0021 to
1: ON
0026 hex 0025 hex BRK (Brake release) R
0: OFF
1: ON
0027 hex 0026 hex BER (Brake error) R
0: OFF
1: ON
0028 hex 0027 hex ZS (0-Hz detection signal) R
0: OFF
DSE (Excessive speed 1: ON
0029 hex 0028 hex R
deviation) 0: OFF
1: ON
002A hex 0029 hex POK (Positioning ready) R
0: OFF
FA4 (Set frequency exceeded 1: ON
002B hex 002A hex R
signal 2) 0: OFF
FA5 (Set-frequency only sig- 1: ON
002C hex 002B hex R
nal 2) 0: OFF
1: ON
002D hex 002C hex OL2 (Overload warning 2) R
0: OFF

Modbus coil
spec. No.
ODc (Analog O 1: ON
002E hex 002D hex R
disconnection detection) 0: OFF
OIDc (Analog OI 1: ON
002F hex 002E hex R
0030 hex
0031 hex
FBV (PID feedback 1: ON
0032 hex 0031 hex R
comparison) 0: OFF
NDc (Communications 1: ON
0033 hex 0032 hex R
LOG1 (Logic operation output 1: ON
0034 hex 0033 hex R
1) 0: OFF
0035 hex 0034 hex R
2) 0: OFF
0036 hex 0035 hex R
3) 0: OFF
0037 to

0039 hex
1: ON
003A hex 0039 hex WAC (Capacitor life warning) R
0: OFF
WAF (Cooling fan life 1: ON
003B hex 003A hex R
warning) 0: OFF
1: ON
003C hex 003B hex FR (Starting contact signal) R
0: OFF
OHF (Cooling fin overheat 1: ON
003D hex 003C hex R
warning) 0: OFF
1: ON
003E hex 003D hex LOC (Low current signal) R
0: OFF
003F to
1: ON
0045 hex 0044 hex IRDY (Operation ready) R
0: OFF 8
1: ON
0046 hex 0045 hex FWR (Forward run signal) R
0: OFF

1: ON
0047 hex 0046 hex RVR (Reverse run signal) R
0: OFF
1: ON
0048 hex 0047 hex MJA (Fatal fault signal) R
0: OFF
1: Writing
0049 hex 0048 hex During data write R
0: Normal
1: Error
004A hex 0049 hex CRC error*1 R
0: No error
1: Error
004B hex 004A hex Overrun error *1 R
0: No error
1: Error
004C hex 004B hex Framing error *1 R
0: No error
1: Error
004D hex 004C hex Parity error *1 R
0: No error
1: Error
004E hex 004D hex Checksum error *1 R
0: No error
*1. The data of communication error is held until a fault reset is input. (Fault reset can be executed during opera-
tion.)

Modbus coil
spec. No.
004F hex − Reserved − −
WCO (Window comparator 1: ON
0050 hex 004F hex R
O) 0: OFF
WCOI (Window comparator 1: ON
0051 hex 0050 hex R
OI) 0: OFF
0052 hex
0053 hex
FREF (Frequency command 1: Digital Operator
0054 hex 0053 hex R
source) 0: Other than Digital Operator
1: Digital Operator
0055 hex 0054 hex REF (RUN command source) R
0: Other than Digital Operator
1: 2nd control selected
0056 hex 0055 hex SETM (Motor 2 selection) R
0: 1st control selected
0057 hex
0058 hex
0059 to
005A hex − Not used − Not accessible

8-9-2 Monitor Function/Enter Command Register List

• The “Register No.” in the table header shows the register number used inside the inverter.
Use this register number when setting EtherCAT communications.
• The “Modbus register spec. No.” in the table header shows the register number used to actu-
ally specify the register in the Modbus communication process.
This register number is 1 less than the inverter “Register No.” according to the Modbus com-
munication specifications.
Register Modbus register Monitor or setting Data

Function name Parameter No. R/W
No. spec. No data resolution
0000 hex − Reserved − − − −
0001 hex 0000 hex F001 (HIGH) R/W 0 to 59000
Output Frequency 0.01
(Enabled when
0002 hex 0001 hex Setting/Monitor F001 (LOW) R/W [Hz]*1
A001 = 03)
0: Initial status

2: Stop
3: Run
4: Free-run stop
0003 hex 0002 hex Inverter Status A − R 5: Jogging −
6: DC injection
braking
8: Trip
9: During UV
0: During stop
0004 hex 0003 hex Inverter Status B − R 1: During RUN −
2: During trip
0: −
1: Stop
2: Deceleration 8
3: Constant
speed
ter List
8-9-2 Monitor Function/Enter Command Regis-
4: Acceleration
5: Forward
6: Reverse
0005 hex 0004 hex Inverter Status C − R −
7: Forward to
reverse
8: Reverse to
forward
9: Forward run
start
10: Reverse run
start
*1. When the PID function is enabled, the data unit differs between read and write operations. Set parameter val-
ues in units of 0.01 Hz for writing and in units of 0.01% (as 100% of the maximum frequency) for reading.


0006 hex 0005 hex PID Feedback *1 − R/W 0 to 10000 0.01 [%]
0007 to
0011 hex 0010 hex Fault Counter d080 R 0 to 65535 1 [time]
Refer to Inverter trip
Fault Monitor 1 Fault
0012 hex 0011 hex fault factor list on −
Factor
page 8-46.
Fault Monitor 1 Inverter
Status
page 8-46.
Fault Monitor 1 Frequency
0014 hex 0013 hex
(HIGH) 0.01
0 to 59000 [Hz]
0015 hex 0014 hex
(LOW)
Output current
Fault Monitor 1 Output
0016 hex 0015 hex d081 R value at the time of 0.01 [A]
Current
trip
Fault Monitor 1 Main circuit DC input voltage at
0017 hex 0016 hex 0.1 [V]
DC voltage the time of trip
Fault Monitor 1 Total RUN
0018 hex 0017 hex
Time (HIGH) Total RUN time
1 [h]
Fault Monitor 1 Total RUN before the trip
0019 hex 0018 hex
Time (LOW)
Fault Monitor 1 Total
001A hex 0019 hex
Power ON Time (HIGH) Total power ON
1 [h]
Fault Monitor 1 Total time before the trip
001B hex 001A hex
Power ON Time (LOW)
001C hex 001B hex fault factor list on −
Factor
page 8-46.
001D hex 001C hex fault factor list on −
Status
page 8-46.
001E hex 001D hex
(HIGH) 0.01
0 to 59000 [Hz]
001F hex 001E hex
(LOW)
Output current
0020 hex 001F hex d082 R value at the time of 0.01 [A]
Current
trip
0021 hex 0020 hex 0.1 [V]
0022 hex 0021 hex
1 [h]
0023 hex 0022 hex
Time (LOW)
0024 hex 0023 hex
1 [h]
0025 hex 0024 hex
Power ON Time (LOW)
*1. Data can be written to the PID feed back register when the PID Feedback Selection (A076) is set to 02 (Mod-
bus communication).


Factor
page 8-46.
Status
page 8-46.
0028 hex 0027 hex
(HIGH) 0.01
0 to 59000 [Hz]
0029 hex 0028 hex
(LOW)
Output current
002A hex 0029 hex d083 R value at the time of 0.01 [A]
Current
trip
002B hex 002A hex 0.1 [V]
002C hex 002B hex
1 [h]
002D hex 002C hex

Time (LOW)
002E hex 002D hex
1 [h]
002F hex 002E hex
Power ON Time (LOW)
0030 hex 002F hex fault factor list on −
Factor
page 8-46.
Status
page 8-46.
0032 hex 0031 hex
(HIGH) 0.01
0 to 59000 [Hz]
0033 hex 0032 hex
(LOW) 8
Output current
Current
ter List
trip
0035 hex 0034 hex 0.1 [V]
0036 hex 0035 hex
1 [h]
0037 hex 0036 hex
Time (LOW)
0038 hex 0037 hex
1 [h]
0039 hex 0038 hex
Power ON Time (LOW)


003A hex 0039 hex fault factor list on −
Factor
page 8-46.
003B hex 003A hex fault factor list on −
Status
page 8-46.
003C hex 003B hex
(HIGH) 0.01
0 to 59000 [Hz]
003D hex 003C hex
(LOW)
Output current
003E hex 003D hex d085 R value at the time of 0.01 [A]
Current
trip
003F hex 003E hex 0.1 [V]
0040 hex 003F hex
1 [h]
0041 hex 0040 hex
Time (LOW)
0042 hex 0041 hex
1 [h]
0043 hex 0042 hex
Power ON Time (LOW)
Factor
page 8-46.
Status
page 8-46.
0046 hex 0045 hex
(HIGH) 0.01
0 to 59000
Fault Monitor 6 Frequency [Hz]
0047 hex 0046 hex
(LOW)
Output current
Current
trip
0049 hex 0048 hex 0.1 [V]
004A hex 0049 hex
1 [h]
004B hex 004A hex
Time (LOW)
004C hex 004B hex
1 [h]
004D hex 004C hex
Power ON Time (LOW)
004E hex 004D hex Warning Monitor d090 R Warning code −
004F to
08FF hex − Not used − − Not accessible −


0: Motor
parame-
ter initial-
ization
1: Set value
storage in
EEPROM
0900 hex 08FF hex EEPROM Write − W Others: Motor −
parame-
ter initial-
ization
and set
value stor-
age in
EEPROM
0901 hex − Not used − − Not accessible −
EEPROM Write Mode 0: Write disabled
0902 hex 0901 hex − W −
Selection 1: Write enabled
0903 to

1000 hex − Not used − − Not accessible −
ter List

⚫ Inverter trip fault factor list
Trip factor in MSB (Fault factor) Trip factor in LSB (Inverter Status)
Transmission Transmission
Name Code Name Code
data data
No trip factor 0 0 hex During reset 0 0 hex
Overcurrent protection during
1 01 hex During stop 1 01 hex
constant speed
2 02 hex During deceleration 2 02 hex
deceleration
3 03 hex During constant speed 3 03 hex
acceleration
4 04 hex During acceleration 4 04 hex
stop
Overload protection 5 05 hex Operates at frequency = 0 5 05 hex
Braking resistor overload
6 06 hex During startup 6 06 hex
protection
During DB (DC injection
Overvoltage protection 7 07 hex 7 07 hex
braking)
EEPROM error 8 08 hex During overload limit 8 08 hex
Undervoltage protection 9 09 hex
Current detector error 10 0A hex
CPU error 11 0B hex
External trip 12 0C hex
USP error 13 0D hex
Ground protection 14 0E hex
Incoming overvoltage protec-
15 0F hex
tion
Temperature detection error 19 13 hex
Temperature error 21 15 hex
Main circuit error 25 19 hex
Analog current input error 26 1A hex
Servo Drive error 30 1E hex
Thermistor error 35 23 hex
Brake error 36 24 hex
Emergency shutoff 37 25 hex
Overload protection in low
38 26 hex
speed range
Digital Operator connection
40 28 hex
failure
Modbus communication 41 29 hex
2B to
43 to 45 2D hex
Internal data error 50 to 69 32 to
45 hex
Encoder disconnection 80 50 hex
Overspeed 81 51 hex
Position control range trip 83 53 hex
Internal error 99 63 hex

Modbus
register Function name R/W Monitor or setting data Page
No. No. resolution
spec. No
d001
1001 hex 1000 hex (HIGH)
Output Frequency 0.01
R 0 to 59000 [Hz] P. 7-4
Monitor d001
1002 hex 1001 hex (LOW)
Output Current
1003 hex 1002 hex d002 R 0 to 65535 0.01 [A] P. 7-4
Monitor
0: Stop
1004 hex 1003 hex RUN Direction Monitor d003 R 1: Forward − P. 7-5
2: Reverse
d004
PID Feedback Value
R 0 to 99990 0.1 P. 7-5
Monitor d004
1006 hex 1005 hex (LOW)
20: Terminal 1
1007 hex 1006 hex d005 R to 26: Terminal 7/EB Bit P. 7-5
Monitor
27: Terminal EA
20: Terminal 11

1008 hex 1007 hex d006 R 21: Terminal 12 Bit P. 7-6
Monitor
22: Relay output terminal AL1
Output Frequency d007

Monitor (After R 0 to 5899410 0.01 P. 7-6
d007
100A hex 1009 hex Conversion) (LOW)
d008
100B hex 100A hex (HIGH) R
Real Frequency 0.01
−59000 to 59000 [Hz] P. 7-7
Monitor d008
100C hex 100B hex R
(LOW)
Torque Reference
100D hex 100C hex d009 R 0 to 200 1 [%] P. 7-7
Monitor
100E hex 100D hex Torque Bias Monitor d010 R −200 to 200 1 [%] P. 7-8
100F hex 100E hex Reserved − − − − −
1010 hex 100F hex Output Torque Monitor d012 R −200 to 200 1 [%] P. 7-8 8
Output Voltage
1011 hex 1010 hex d013 R 0 to 6000 0.1 [V] P. 7-8
Monitor
ter List
0.1
1012 hex 1011 hex Input Power Monitor d014 R 0 to 1000 [kW] P. 7-9
d015
Integrated Power
R 0 to 10000000 − P. 7-9
Monitor d015
1014 hex 1013 hex (LOW)
d016
Total RUN Time
R 0 to 1000000 1 [h] P. 7-10
Monitor d016
1016 hex 1015 hex (LOW)
d017
1017 hex 1016 hex
Total Power ON Time (HIGH)
R 0 to 1000000 1 [h] P. 7-10
Monitor d017
1018 hex 1017 hex (LOW)
Fin Temperature
1019 hex 1018 hex d018 R −200 to 1500 0.1 [°C] P. 7-10
Monitor
101A to
101C hex − Reserved − − − − −
20: Capacitor on main circuit

Life Assessment board
101D hex 101C hex d022 R Bit P. 7-11
Monitor
21: Cooling fan

Modbus
Register Parame- Data
No. ter No. resolution
spec. No
Program Counter
101E hex 101D hex d023 R 1 to 1024 1 P. 7-11
(DriveProgramming)
Program Number
1101F hex 1101E hex Monitor d024 R 0 to 9999 1 P. 7-11
(DriveProgramming)
1020 to
1025 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1026 hex 1025 hex DC Voltage Monitor d102 R 0 to 10000 0.1 [V] P. 7-15
1027 hex 1026 hex d103 R 0 to 1000 0.1 [%] P. 7-16
Load Rate Monitor
Electronic Thermal
1028 hex 1027 hex d104 R 0 to 1000 0.1 [%] P. 7-16
Load Rate Monitor
1029 to
102D hex − Reserved − − − − −
d025 Displays DriveProgramming exe-
102E hex 102D hex User Monitor 0 (HIGH)
R cution result 1
(DriveProgramming) d025
102F hex 102E hex (LOW) −2147483648 to 2147483647
1030 hex 1029 hex User Monitor 1 (HIGH)
R cution result 1 P. 7-12
1031 hex 1030 hex (LOW) −2147483648 to 2147483647
1032 hex 1031 hex User Monitor 2 (HIGH)
R cution result 1
1033 hex 1032 hex (LOW) −2147483648 to 2147483647
1034 hex
− Reserved − − − − −
1035 hex
d029
1036 hex 1035 hex (HIGH) R
Position Command
−268435455 to 268435455 1 P. 7-12
Monitor d029
1037 hex 1036 hex (LOW) R
d030
1038 hex 1037 hex (HIGH) R
Current Position
−268435455 to 268435455 1 P. 7-12
Monitor d030
1039 hex 1038 hex (LOW) R
103A to
1056 hex − Reserved − − − − −
0: I-C (IM motor heavy load)
1: I-V (IM motor light load)
1057 hex 1056 hex Inverter Mode Monitor d060 R 2: H-I (IM motor high fre- − P. 7-13
quency)
3: P (PM motor mode)
1058 hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00 : Digital Operator (F001)
01 to 15: Multi-step speed refer-
ence 1 to 15
16 : Jogging frequency
18 : Modbus communication
Frequency 19 : Option
1059 hex 1058 hex Reference Source d062 R 21 : Volume (3G3AX-OP01) − P. 7-14
Monitor 22 : Pulse train frequency
23 : Operation function output
24 : DriveProgramming
25 : Analog voltage input (O)
26 : Analog current input (OI)
27 : Analog Input (O + OI)
RUN Command 2: Digital Operator
105A hex 1059 hex d063 R − P. 7-14
Source Monitor 3: Modbus communication
4: Option

105B to
108D hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −
0 to 1023
Analog Voltage Input
108E hex 108D hex d130 R (1023= Equivalent to A/D 1 P. 7-16
O Monitor
converter output of 10.9 V)
0 to 1023
Analog Current Input
108F hex 108E hex d131 R (1023= Equivalent to A/D con- 1 P. 7-16
OI Monitor
verter output of 23.3 mA)
1091 hex 1090 hex d133 R 0 to 10000 0.01 [%] P. 7-17
Monitor
1092 to
10AD hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −
d153
10AE hex 10AD hex (HIGH)
PID Deviation
d153
R −10000 to 10000 0.01 [%] P. 7-17 8
10AF hex 10AE hex (LOW)
10B0 hex
− − − − −
ter List
Not used Not accessible
10B1 hex
d155
10B2 hex 10B1 hex (HIGH)
PID Output Monitor R −10000 to 10000 0.01 [%] P. 7-17
d155
10B3 hex 10B2 hex
(LOW)
10B4 to

8-9-3 Group F Register List

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
F002
1st Acceleration
R/W 0 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 1 F002
1104 hex 1103 hex (LOW)
P. 5-32
F003
1st Deceleration
R/W 0 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 1 F003
1106 hex 1105 hex (LOW)
RUN Direction 00: Forward
1107 hex 1106 hex F004 R/W − P. 5-21
1108 to

8-9-4 Group A/b/C/H/P Register List

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Volume*1
01: Control circuit terminal
block (Analog input)

1st Frequency 03: Modbus communi-
1201 hex 1200 hex Reference A001 R/W cation − P. 5-23
Selection 04: Option
10: Operation function
output
01: Control circuit ter-
minal block
1st RUN (DriveProgramming)
1202 hex 1201 hex Command A002 R/W 02: Digital Operator − P. 5-21
Selection*2 03: Modbus communi-
cation
04: Option 8

*2. If you change the 1st RUN Command Selection setting, be sure to wait at least 40 ms before actually inputting
the RUN command.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
300 to 1st Maximum Fre-
1203 hex 1202 hex 1st Base Frequency A003 R/W 0.1 [Hz] P. 5-20
quency
1st Maximum 1st Base Frequency to
1204 hex 1203 hex A004 R/W 0.1 [Hz] P. 5-20
Frequency 5900
00: Switch between O
and OI
02: Switch between O
1205 hex 1204 hex O/OI Selection A005 R/W − P. 7-22
and volume
03: Switch between OI
and volume
1206 to
120A hex − Reserved − − − − −
A011
120B hex 120A hex (HIGH) 0.01
O Start Frequency R/W 0 to 59000
A011 [Hz]*1
120C hex 120B hex (LOW)
A012
120D hex 120C hex (HIGH) 0.01
O End Frequency R/W 0 to 59000
A012 [Hz] *1
120E hex 120D hex P. 7-25
(LOW)
120F hex 120E hex O Start Ratio A013 R/W 0 to 100 1 [%]
1210 hex 120F hex O End Ratio A014 R/W 0 to 100 1 [%]
00: O Start Frequency
1211 hex 1210 hex O Start Selection A015 R/W (A011) −
01: 0 Hz
1 to 30/31 (500-ms filter
1212 hex 1211 hex Analog Input Filter A016 R/W 1 P. 7-24
with ±0.1-Hz hysteresis)
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Start/stop
DriveProgramming via multi-function
1213 hex 1212 hex A017 R/W − −
Function Selection input PRG terminal)
02: Enabled (Start/stop
at power on/off)
1214 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Binary (16-step selec-
Multi-step Speed tion with 4 terminals)
1215 hex 1214 hex A019 R/W −
Selection 01: Bit (8-step selection
with 7 terminals)
A020 0
1216 hex 1215 hex (HIGH) R/W
1st Multi-step Speed 0.01
Starting Frequency to 1st
Reference 0 A020 [Hz] *1
1217 hex 1216 hex (LOW) R/W Maximum Frequency
P. 5-28
A021 0
Starting frequency to
1219 hex 1218 hex (LOW) R/W Maximum frequency
A022 0
121A hex 1219 hex (HIGH) R/W
Starting frequency to
121B hex 121A hex (LOW) R/W Maximum frequency
*1. When the PID function is enabled, the data unit differs between read and write operations.
Set parameter values in units of 0.01 Hz for writing and in units of 0.1% (as 100% of the maximum frequency)
for reading.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
A023 0
121C hex 121B hex (HIGH) R/W
Starting frequency to [Hz]*1
Reference 3 A023
121D hex 121C hex (LOW) R/W Maximum frequency
A024 0
121E hex 121D hex (HIGH) R/W
Reference 4 Starting frequency to [Hz] *1
A024
121F hex 121E hex (LOW) R/W Maximum frequency
A025 0
1220 hex 121F hex (HIGH) R/W
Starting frequency to [Hz] *1
Reference 5 A025
A026 0
A026
A027 0
A027
1225 hex 1224 hex R/W

(LOW) Maximum frequency
A028 0
A028
A029 0
Starting frequency to P. 5-28
A030 0
Reference 10 A030
122B hex 122A hex (LOW) R/W Maximum frequency
A031 0
A031
122D hex 122C hex (LOW) R/W Maximum frequency 8
A032 0

A032
122F hex 122E hex (LOW) R/W Maximum frequency
A033 0
A033
A034 0
Reference 14 A034
A035 0
A035
for reading.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
1236 hex
1237 hex
Starting Frequency to 0.01
1238 hex 1237 hex Jogging Frequency A038 R/W [Hz]
1000 (10000)*1
00: Free-running on
jogging stop/Dis-
abled during oper-
ation
on jogging
stop/Disabled
during operation
02: DC injection brak-
ing on jogging
stop/Disabled
P. 5-51
Jogging Stop Selec- during operation
1239 hex 1238 hex A039 R/W −
tion 03: Free-running on
jogging
stop/Enabled
during operation
on jogging
stop/Enabled
during operation
05: DC injection brak-
ing on jogging
stop/Enabled
during operation
00: Manual torque
1st Torque Boost boost
123B hex 123A hex A041 R/W −
Selection 01: Automatic torque
boost
P. 5-59
1st Manual Torque
123C hex 123B hex A042 R/W 0 to 200 0.1 [%]
Boost Voltage
1st Manual Torque
123D hex 123C hex A043 R/W 0 to 500 0.1 [%]
Boost Frequency
00: Constant torque
characteristics
01: Reduced torque
123E hex 123D hex 1st Control Method A044 R/W characteristics − P. 5-8
control*2
1st Output Voltage
123F hex 123E hex A045 R/W 20 to 100 1 [%] P. 7-41
Gain

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
1st Automatic
Torque Boost Volt-
1240 hex 123F hex A046 R/W 0 to 255 1 [%]
age Compensation
Gain P. 5-59
1st Automatic
1241 hex 1240 hex Torque Boost Slip A047 R/W 0 to 255 1 [%]
Compensation Gain
1242 to
1244 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
1245 hex 1244 hex A051 R/W 02: Enabled (Oper- −
Selection
ates only at set fre-
quency)
DC Injection Braking 0.01
1246 hex 1245 hex A052 R/W 0 to 6000 [Hz]
Frequency
1247 hex 1246 hex A053 R/W 0 to 50 0.1 [s] P. 7-93

Delay Time
1248 hex 1247 hex A054 R/W 0 to 100 (70) 1 [%]
Power
1249 hex 1248 hex A055 R/W 0 to 600 0.1 [s]
Time
DC Injection Braking 00: Edge operation
124A hex 1249 hex Edge/Level A056 R/W 01: Level operation −
Selection

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Startup DC Injection
124B hex 124A hex A057 R/W 0 to 100 (70) 1 [%]
Braking Power
Startup DC Injection P. 7-93
124C hex 124B hex A058 R/W 0 to 600 0.1 [s]
Braking Time
0.1
124D hex 124C hex (Reserved) A059*1 R/W 20 to 150 [kHz]
124E hex − Reserved − − − − −
A061 0
124F hex 124E hex (HIGH) R/W
1st Frequency 1st Frequency Lower 0.01
Upper Limit A061 Limit to 1st Maximum [Hz]
1250 hex 124F hex (LOW) R/W
Frequency P. 5-30
A062 0
1st Frequency 0.01
Lower Limit Starting Frequency to 1st [Hz]
A062
1252 hex 1251 hex (LOW) R/W Maximum Frequency
A063
0.01
Jump Frequency 1 0 to 59000 [Hz]
A063
1254 hex 1253 hex (LOW) R/W
Jump Frequency 0.01
1255 hex 1254 hex A064 R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)*2 [Hz]
Width 1
A065
0.01
Jump Frequency 2 0 to 59000 [Hz]
A065
1257 hex 1256 hex R/W P. 7-36
(LOW)
Jump Frequency 0.01
1258 hex 1257 hex A066 R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)*2 [Hz]
Width 2
A067
Jump Frequency 3 0 to 59000 0.01
A067 [Hz]
125A hex 1259 hex (LOW) R/W
Jump Frequency 0.01
125B hex 125A hex A068 R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)*2 [Hz]
Width 3
A069 0 to Starting Frequency:
Acceleration Stop Disabled 0.01
Frequency A069 Frequency above Start- [Hz]
125D hex 125C hex (LOW) R/W P. 7-37
ing Frequency to 59000
Acceleration Stop 0: Disabled
125E hex 125D hex A070 R/W 0.1 [s]
Time 1 to 600

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
125F hex 125E hex PID Selection A071 R/W −
02: Enabled (Reverse
output enabled)
1260 hex 125F hex PID P Gain A072 R/W 0 to 2500 0.01
1261 hex 1260 hex PID I Gain A073 R/W 0 to 36000 0.1 [s]
1262 hex 1261 hex PID D Gain A074 R/W 0 to 10000 0.01 [s]
1263 hex 1262 hex PID Scale A075 R/W 1 to 9999 0.01
00: Current (OI)
01: Voltage (O)
02: Modbus communi-
PID Feedback
1264 hex 1263 hex A076 R/W cation −
Selection
P. 7-44
output
00: Disabled (Devia-
tion = Target value

PID Deviation − Feedback value)
1265 hex 1264 hex A077 R/W −
Reverse Output 01: Enabled (Deviation
= Feedback value −
Target value)
PID Variable Range
1266 hex 1265 hex A078 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Limit
00: Disabled
PID Feedforward
1267 hex 1266 hex A079 R/W 01: Voltage (O) −
Selection
02: Current (OI)
1268 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
1269 hex 1268 hex 1st AVR Selection A081 R/W −
02: OFF during decel-
eration 8
200-V class: 00 (200)
01 (215)

02 (220)
03 (230) P. 7-42
04 (240)
1st Motor Rated
126A hex 1269 hex A082 R/W 400-V class: 05 (380)
Voltage Selection
06 (400)
07 (415)
08 (440)
09 (460)
10 (480)
AVR Filter Time
126B hex 126A hex A083 R/W 0 to 10000 0.001 [s]
Constant
P. 7-42
AVR Gain at Decel-
126C hex 126B hex A084 R/W 50 to 200 1 [%]
eration
126D hex 126C hex A085 R/W −
Energy-saving P. 7-50
126E hex 126D hex Response/Accuracy A086 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Adjustment
126F to
1273 hex − Reserved − − − − −

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
A092
1st Acceleration
0 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 2 A092
A093
1st Deceleration
0 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 2 A093
00: Switch via 2CH
terminal
(multi-function
1st 2-step input: 09)
Acceleration/ 01: Switch by setting
1278 hex 1277 hex A094 R/W − P. 5-36
Deceleration (A095/A295/A096/
Selection A296)
02: Switch only during
forward/reverse
switching
1st 2-step A095
Acceleration 0 to 59000 0.01
A095 [Hz]
127A hex 1279 hex Frequency (LOW) R/W
1st 2-step A096

127B hex 127A hex (HIGH) R/W
0.01
Deceleration 0 to 59000 [Hz]
A096
127C hex 127B hex Frequency (LOW) R/W
00: Line
01: S-shape curve
Acceleration Pattern
127D hex 127C hex A097 R/W 02: U-shape curve −
Selection
03: Inverted U-shape curve
00: Line P. 5-33
01: S-shape curve
Deceleration Pattern 02: U-shape curve
127E hex 127D hex A098 R/W −
Selection 03: Inverted U-shape
curve
127F hex
1280 hex
A101
0.01
OI Start Frequency 0 to 59000
A101 [Hz]*1
A102
0.01
OI End Frequency 0 to 59000
A102 [Hz] *1
1284 hex 1283 hex R/W P. 7-25
(LOW)
1285 hex 1284 hex OI Start Ratio A103 R/W 0 to 100 1 [%]
1286 hex 1285 hex OI End Ratio A104 R/W 0 to 100 1 [%]
00: OI Start
1287 hex 1286 hex OI Start Selection A105 R/W Frequency (A101) −
01: 0 Hz
for reading.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
1288 to
12A4 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Acceleration Curve 1 (Small curve) to 10
12A5 hex 12A4 hex A131 R/W −
Parameter (Large curve)
P. 5-33
Deceleration Curve 1 (Small curve) to 10
12A6 hex 12A5 hex A132 R/W −
Parameter (Large curve)
12A7 to
12AE − Reserved − − − − −
hex
01: Volume*1
Calculation 02: Voltage (O) input
12AF hex 12AE hex Frequency A141 R/W 03: Current (OI) input −
Selection 1 04: Modbus communication
05: Option
01: Volume *1

P. 7-39
Calculation 02: Voltage (O) input
12B0 hex 12AF hex Frequency A142 R/W 03: Current (OI) input −
Selection 2 04: Modbus communication
05: Option
00: Addition (A141 + A142)
Calculation Function 01: Subtraction (A141 − A142)
12B1 hex 12B0 hex A143 R/W −
Operator Selection 02: Multiplication
(A141  A142)
12B2 hex − Reserved − − − − −
A145
12B3 hex 12B2 hex (HIGH) R/W
Frequency Addition 0.01
0 to 59000
Amount Setting A145 [Hz]*2
12B4 hex 12B3 hex R/W
(LOW) P. 7-39 8
Frequency Addition 00: Frequency reference + A145
12B5 hex 12B4 hex A146 R/W −
Sign Selection 01: Frequency reference − A145

12B6 to
EL-S Shape
12B9 hex 12B8 hex Acceleration Curve A150 R/W 0 to 50 1 [%]
Ratio 1
EL-S Shape
12BA hex 12B9 hex Acceleration Curve A151 R/W 0 to 50 1 [%]
Ratio 2
P. 5-33
EL-S Shape
12BB hex 12BA hex Deceleration Curve A152 R/W 0 to 50 1 [%]
Ratio 1
EL-S Shape
12BC hex 12BB hex Deceleration Curve A153 R/W 0 to 50 1 [%]
Ratio 2
for reading.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
A154 0 to Starting Frequency:
12BD hex 12BC hex (HIGH)
Deceleration Stop Disabled 0.01
R/W
Frequency A154 Frequency above Starting [Hz]
12BE hex 12BD hex (LOW) P. 7-37
Frequency to 59000
Deceleration Stop 0: Disabled
12BF hex 12BE hex A155 R/W 0.1 [s]
Time 1 to 600
A156
12C0 hex 12BF hex (HIGH)
PID Sleep Operation 0.01
R/W 0 to 59000 [Hz]
Level A156
12C1 hex 12C0 hex (LOW) P. 7-44
PID Sleep Operation
12C2 hex 12C1 hex A157 R/W 0 to 255 0.1 [s]
Delay Time
12C3 to
12C5 hex − Reserved − − − − −
A161
12C6 hex 12C5 hex (HIGH) R/W
0.01
VR Start Frequency 0 to 59000 [Hz]
A161
12C7 hex 12C6 hex (LOW) R/W
A162
12C8 hex 12C7 hex (HIGH) R/W
0.01
VR End Frequency 0 to 59000 [Hz]
A162 P. 7-25
12C9 hex 12C8 hex (LOW) R/W
12CA hex 12C9 hex VR Start Ratio A163 R/W 0 to VR End Ratio 1 [%]
12CB hex 12CA hex VR End Ratio A164 R/W VR Start Ratio to 100 1 [%]
00: VR Start Fre-
12CC
hex 12CB hex VR Start Selection A165 R/W quency (A161) −
01: 0 Hz
12CD to
00: Trip
01: 0-Hz restart
02: Frequency pull-in
Power Interruption/ restart at shutoff
1301 hex 1300 hex Undervoltage b001 R/W 03: Trip after frequency −
Restart Selection pull-in decelera- P. 7-62
tion stop
restart
Allowable Power
1302 hex 1301 hex b002 R/W 3 to 250 0.1 [s]
Interruption Time
Restart Standby
1303 hex 1302 hex b003 R/W 3 to 1000 0.1 [s] P. 7-62
Time
00: Disabled
Power Interruption/ 01: Enabled
Undervoltage Trip 02: Disabled during stop
1304 hex 1303 hex b004 R/W −
Selection During and deceleration stop
P. 7-64
Stop by turning off the
RUN command
Power Interruption 00: 16 times
1305 hex 1304 hex b005 R/W −
Restart Count 01: No limit
1306 hex − Reserved − − − − −

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Frequency Pull-in b007
0.01
Lower Limit 0 to 59000 [Hz] P. 7-62
b007
1308 hex 1307 hex Frequency (LOW) R/W
00: Trip
01: 0-Hz restart
Overvoltage/ restart at shutoff
1309 hex 1308 hex Overcurrent Restart b008 R/W 03: Trip after frequency − P. 7-62
Selection pull-in decelera-
tion stop
restart
Overvoltage/
130B hex 130A hex Overcurrent Restart b010 R/W 1 to 3 1 [time]
Count
P. 7-64

Overvoltage/
130C hex 130B hex Overcurrent Restart b011 R/W 3 to 1000 0.1 [s]
Standby Time
1st Electronic
130D hex 130C hex b012 R/W 200 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Thermal Level
00: Reduced torque
1st Electronic
characteristics P. 7-74
Thermal
130E hex 130D hex b013 R/W 01: Constant torque −
Characteristics
characteristics
Selection
02: Free setting
130F hex − Reserved − − − − −
Free-electronic
0 to Free-electronic
1310 hex 130F hex Thermal b015 R/W 1 [Hz]
Thermal Frequency 2
Frequency 1
Free-electronic 8
1311 hex 1310 hex b016 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Thermal Current 1 P. 7-73
Free-electronic Thermal

Free-electronic
Frequency 1 to
1312 hex 1311 hex Thermal b017 R/W 1 [Hz]
Frequency 2
Frequency 3
Free-electronic
1313 hex 1312 hex b018 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Thermal Current 2
Free-electronic
1314 hex 1313 hex Thermal b019 R/W 1 [Hz] P. 7-73
Frequency 2 to 590
Frequency 3
Free-electronic
1315 hex 1314 hex b020 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Thermal Current 3

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Disabled
01: Enabled during
acceleration and
constant speed
02: Enabled during
1st Overload Limit constant speed
1316 hex 1315 hex b021 R/W −
Selection 03: Enabled during
acceleration and
constant speed
(Accelerated
during regenera-
tion)
1st Overload Limit
1317 hex 1316 hex b022 R/W 200 to 2000 (1500) 0.1 [%]
Level
1st Overload Limit
1318 hex 1317 hex b023 R/W 1 to 30000 0.1 [s]
Parameter
P. 7-78
00: Disabled
01: Enabled during
acceleration and
constant speed
02: Enabled during
1st Overload Limit constant speed
1319 hex 1318 hex b024 R/W −
Selection 2 03: Enabled during
acceleration and
constant speed
(Accelerated
during regenera-
tion)
1st Overload Limit
131A hex 1319 hex b025 R/W 200 to 2000 (1500) 0.1 [%]
Level 2
1st Overload Limit
131B hex 131A hex b026 R/W 1 to 30000 0.1 [s]
Parameter 2
00: Disabled
Overcurrent
01: Enabled
131C hex 131B hex Suppression b027 R/W − P. 7-81
02: Enabled (at reduced
Selection
voltage startup)
Frequency Pull-in
131D hex 131C hex b028 R/W 200 to 2000 (1500) 0.1 [%]
Restart Level
Frequency Pull-in
131E hex 131D hex b029 R/W 1 to 30000 0.1 [s]
Restart Parameter
00: Frequency at
interruption P. 5-44
Starting Frequency P. 7-62
01: Maximum fre-
Selection at Fre-
131F hex 131E hex b030 R/W quency −
quency Pull-in
02: Set frequency
Restart
(Frequency refer-
ence)

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Data other than
b031 cannot be
changed when ter-
minal SFT is ON.
01: Data other than
b031 and the set
frequency cannot
be changed when
1320 hex 131F hex Soft Lock Selection b031 R/W − P. 7-54
terminal SFT is ON.
02: Data other than
b031 cannot be
changed.
03: Data other than
b031 and set fre-
quency cannot be
changed.
1321 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1322 hex 1321 hex Motor Cable Length b033 R/W 5 to 20 1 [m] −

RUN Time/Power b034
ON Time Detection 0 to 65535 10 [h] P. 7-84
b034
1324 hex 1323 hex Level (LOW) R/W
01: Only Forward is
enabled (Reverse
RUN Direction Limit
1325 hex 1324 hex b035 R/W is limited) − P. 7-38
Selection
02: Only Reverse is
enabled (Forward
is limited)
0 (Reduced voltage
Reduced Voltage startup time: Short) to
1326 hex 1325 hex b036 R/W − P. 7-36
Startup Selection 255 (Reduced voltage
startup time: Long) 8
01: Individual display

of functions
02: User setting
1327 hex 1326 hex Display Selection b037 R/W +d001, F001, b037 − P. 5-3
03: Data comparison
display
05: Monitor display
only + b037

Modbus
Register Param- Data
No. eter No. resolution
spec. No
00: Screen on which
the Enter key was
Initial Screen last pressed
1328 hex 1327 hex b038 R/W − P. 7-56
Selection 001 to 060: (d001 to d060)
201: F001
202: Do not set.
User Parameter 00: Disabled
1329 hex 1328 hex Automatic Setting b039 R/W 01: Enabled − P. 7-60
Function
00: Four-quadrant separate
setting
Torque Limit 01: Terminal switching
132A hex 1329 hex b040 R/W −
Selection 02: Analog voltage input
03: Option (No applicable
Option)
Torque Limit 1
(Four-quadrant 0 to 200
132B hex 132A hex b041 R/W 1 [%]
Mode Forward 255: no
Power Running)
Torque Limit 2
0 to 200 P. 6-12
132C hex 132B hex (Four-quadrant b042 R/W 1 [%]
Mode Reverse 255: no
Regeneration)
Torque Limit 3
132D hex 132C hex b043 R/W 1 [%]
Mode Reverse 255: no
Power Running)
Torque Limit 4
132E hex 132D hex b044 R/W 1 [%]
Mode Forward 255: no
Regeneration)
132F hex 132E hex b045 R/W − P. 6-14
Reverse Rotation 00: Disabled
1330 hex 132F hex Prevention b046 R/W 01: Enabled − P. 6-11
Selection
1331 hex
1332 hex
Heavy load/Light 00: Heavy load mode (CT)
1333 hex 1332 hex b049 R/W − P. 5-11
Load Selection 01: Light load mode (VT)

Modbus
Register Param- Data
No. eter No. resolution
spec. No
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Deceleration
Deceleration Stop stop)
1334 hex 1333 hex Selection on b050 R/W 02: Enabled (Constant volt- −
Power Interruption age, without recovery)
03: Enabled (Constant volt-
age, with recovery)
Starting Voltage 200-V class: 0 to 4000
1335 hex 1334 hex on Power Interrup- b051 R/W 0.1 [V]
tion 400-V class: 0 to 8000
P. 7-69
Deceleration Hold 200-V class: 0 to 4000
1336 hex 1335 hex Level on Power b052 R/W 0.1 [V]
Interruption 400-V class: 0 to 8000
Deceleration Time b053

on Power 1 to 360000 0.01 [s]
b053
1338 hex 1337 hex Interruption (LOW) R/W
Deceleration

0.01
1339 hex 1338 hex Starting Width on b054 R/W 0 to 10000 [Hz]
Power Interruption
133A to
Window
0. to 100.
133F hex 133E hex Comparator O b060 R/W 1 [%]
Upper Limit Level (Lower limit: b061 + b062  2)
Window 0. to 100.
1340 hex 133F hex Comparator O b061 R/W 1 [%]
Lower Limit Level (Upper limit: b060 − b062  2)
Window 0. to 10.
1341 hex 1340 hex Comparator O b062 R/W (Upper limit: (b060 − b061) / 1 [%]
Hysteresis Width 2)
P. 7-90
Window
1342 hex 1341 hex Comparator b063 R/W
0. to 100.
1 [%]
8
(Lower limit: b064 + b065  2)
OI
Upper Limit Level

Window 0. to 100.
1343 hex 1342 hex Comparator b064 R/W 1 [%]
(Upper limit: b063 − b065  2)
OI
Lower Limit Level
Window 0. to 10.
1344 hex 1343 hex Comparator OI b065 R/W (Upper limit: (b063 − b064) / 1 [%]
Hysteresis Width 2)

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
1345 to
1348 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Analog Operation 0 to 100
1349 hex 1348 hex Level at O b070 R/W 1 [%]
P. 7-90
Analog Operation 0 to 100
134A hex 1349 hex Level at OI b071 R/W 1 [%]
134B to
Ambient
134E hex 134D hex b075 R/W −10 to 50 1 [°C] P. 7-87
Temperature
134F to
1350 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Clear disabled
Integrated Power 01: Executes Clear
1351 hex 1350 hex b078 R/W −
Clear (Resets to 00 after
P. 7-9
execution.)
Integrated Power
1352 hex 1351 hex b079 R/W 1 to 1000 1
Display Scale
1353 hex
1354 hex
0.01
1355 hex 1354 hex Starting Frequency b082 R/W 1 to 1000 (10000)*1 [Hz]
P. 7-35
0.1
1356 hex 1355 hex Carrier Frequency b083 R/W 20 to 150 (100)*1 [kHz] P. 7-31
00: Initialization dis-
abled
01: Clearing fault mon-
itor
Initialization 02: Initialize data
1357 hex 1356 hex b084 R/W −
Selection 03: Clear fault monitor
P. 5-5
+ Initialize data
04: Clear fault monitor +
Initialize data + Clear
DriveProgramming
Initialization Data Do not change the
1358 hex 1357 hex b085 R/W −
Selection default 00.
Frequency
1359 hex 1358 hex b086 R/W 1 to 9999 0.01 P. 7-6
Conversion Coefficient
00: Enabled
01: Disabled
135A hex 1359 hex STOP Key Selection b087 R/W − P. 5-41
02: Only RESET
enabled
00: 0-Hz restart
Free-run Stop
135B hex 135A hex b088 R/W restart at shutoff − P. 5-38
Selection
restart

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (depen-
Automatic Carrier dent on current)
135C hex 135B hex b089 R/W − P. 7-32
Reduction 02: Enabled (depen-
dent on cooling fin
temperature)
0: Regenerative brak-
Usage Rate of
ing not active
135D hex 135C hex Regenerative b090 R/W 0.1 [%] P. 5-64
1 to 1000 (limited by set-
Braking
ting in b097.)
135E hex 135D hex Stop Selection b091 R/W − P. 5-38
01: Free-run stop
00: Always enabled
01: Enabled only
during operation
(including 3 min-
utes after power-on
Cooling Fan
−

135F hex 135E hex b092 R/W and 3 minutes after
Operation
Inverter operation
stop) P. 7-86
02: Dependent on
cooling fin tem-
perature
00: Clear disabled
Total Fan Operation 01: Executes Clear
1360 hex 135F hex b093 R/W −
Time Clear (Resets to 00 after
execution.)
00: All data
01: Data other than
terminals/commu-
nications
Initialization Target
1361 hex 1360 hex
Setting
b094 R/W 02: U*** registration − P. 5-5 8
function only
03: Other than U***

registration func-
tion and b37
00: Disabled (Function
not active)
Regenerative 01: Enabled (Disabled
1362 hex 1361 hex b095 R/W − P. 5-64
Braking Selection during stop)
02: Enabled (Enabled
during stop)
Regenerative Brak- 200-V class: 330 to 400
1363 hex 1362 hex b096 R/W 1 [V] P. 5-64
ing ON Level 400-V class: 660 to 800

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Braking Resistor Minimum connection resis-
1364 hex 1363 hex b097 R/W 0.1 [] P. 5-64
Value tance to 6000
Ground Fault Detec- 00: Disabled
1365 hex 1364 hex b098 R/W − P. 7-92
tion Selection 01: Enabled
1366 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Free V/f Frequency 0. : Disabled
1367 hex 1366 hex b100 R/W 1 [Hz]
1 1. to Free V/f Frequency 2
1368 hex 1367 hex Free V/f Voltage 1 b101 R/W 0 to 8000 0.1 [V]
0.: Disabled
Free V/f Frequency
1369 hex 1368 hex b102 R/W Free V/f Frequency 1 to 1 [Hz]
2
Free V/f Frequency 3
136A hex 1369 hex Free V/f Voltage 2 b103 R/W 0 to 8000 0.1 [V]
0.: Disabled
Free V/f Frequency
136B hex 136A hex b104 R/W Free V/f Frequency 2 to 1 [Hz]
3
136C hex 136B hex Free V/f Voltage 3 b105 R/W 0 to 8000 0.1 [V]
0.: Disabled
Free V/f Frequency
136D hex 136C hex b106 R/W Free V/f Frequency 3 to 1 [Hz]
4
Free V/f Frequency 5 P. 5-8
136E hex 136D hex Free V/f Voltage 4 b107 R/W 0 to 8000 0.1 [V]
0.: Disabled
Free V/f Frequency
136F hex 136E hex b108 R/W Free V/f Frequency 4 to 1 [Hz]
5
1370 hex 136F hex Free V/f Voltage 5 b109 R/W 0 to 8000 0.1 [V]
0.: Disabled
Free V/f Frequency
6
0.: Disabled
Free V/f Frequency
7
590*1
1375 to
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC Injec-
tion braking enabled
Brake Control
137B hex 137A hex b120 R/W during stop) −
Function Selection
02: Enabled (DC Injec-
tion braking disabled
during stop)
Brake Release Wait
137C hex 137B hex b121 R/W 0 to 500 0.01 [s] P. 6-25
Time
Acceleration Wait
137D hex 137C hex Time on Brake b122 R/W 0 to 500 0.01 [s]
Control
Stop Wait Time on
137E hex 137D hex b123 R/W 0 to 500 0.01 [s]
Brake Control
Brake Error
137F hex 137E hex b124 R/W 0 to 500 0.01 [s]
Detection Time
*1. If the free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) is set to less than 30 Hz, the inverter will not operate.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Brake Release 0.01
1380 hex 137F hex b125 R/W 0 to 59000 [Hz]
Frequency
Brake Release
1381 hex 1380 hex b126 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%] P. 6-25
Current
Brake Force 0.01
1382 hex 1381 hex b127 R/W 0 to 59000 [Hz]
Frequency
1383 hex
1384 hex
Overvoltage 00: Disabled
Suppression 01: DC voltage kept con-
1385 hex 1384 hex b130 R/W −
Function Selection stant
During Deceleration 02: Acceleration enabled P. 5-62
Overvoltage 200-V class: 330 to 400
1386 hex 1385 hex Suppression Level b131 R/W 400-V class: 660 to 800 1 [V]
During Deceleration
Overvoltage
Suppression
1387 hex 1386 hex b132 R/W 10 to 3000 0.01 [s]

Parameter During
Deceleration
Overvoltage
Suppression
1388 hex 1387 hex b133 R/W 0 to 500 0.01 P. 5-62
Proportional Gain
During Deceleration
Overvoltage
Suppression Integral
1389 hex 1388 hex b134 R/W 0 to 1500 0.1 [s]
Time During
Deceleration
138A to
1393 hex − Reserved − − − − −
GS Input Operation 00: Not trip
1394 hex 1393 hex b145 R/W − P. 7-103
Selection 01: Trip
1395 to
− Reserved − − − − − 8
13A5 hex
d001/d007 Data 00: Disabled P. 7-4
13A6 hex 13A5 hex b163 R/W − P. 7-6

Setting Selection 01: Enabled
Initial Screen 00: Disabled
13A7 hex 13A6 hex Automatic Return b164 R/W 01: Enabled − P. 7-56
Function
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration
Operation Selection
stop
13A8 hex 13A7 hex at External Operator b165 R/W − P. 7-56
02: Ignore
Disconnection
03: Free-run stop

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Do not change the
13A9 hex − (Reserved) b166 − − −
default 00.
13AA to
13AD hex − Reserved − − − − −
01: Induction motor
mode
Inverter Mode
13AE hex 13AD hex b171 R/W 02: Induction motor − P. 6-58
Selection
high-frequency
mode
03: PM motor mode
13AF to
Initialization
13B7 hex 13B6 hex b180 R/W 01: Execute initializa- − P. 5-5
Execution
tion
13B8 to
13C5 hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (fixed sub-
traction ratio)
Motor Electronic 02: Enabled (b911
13C6 hex 13C5 hex b910 R/W − P. 7-74
Thermal Selection subtraction ratio)
03: Enabled (b912
time parameter
subtraction)
Motor Electronic b911
13C7 hex 13C6 hex (HIGH) 0.01
Thermal Subtraction R/W 10 to 10000000 [s] P. 7-74
b911
13C8 hex 13C7 hex Ratio (LOW)
Motor Electronic b912
13C9 hex 13C8 hex (HIGH) 0.01
Thermal Subtraction R/W 10 to 10000000 [s] P. 7-74
b912
13CA hex 13C9 hex Time Constant (LOW)
Motor Electronic
13CB hex 13CA hex Thermal Integration b913 R/W 10 to 2000 0.1 [%] P. 7-74
Gain
Electronic Thermal 00: Disabled
Load Rate Memory 01: Enabled
13CC hex 13CB hex b914 R/W − P. 7-74
Selection at
Power-off
13CD to
• For Modbus communication, the parameters b150, b160, and b161 have no corresponding registers.

Modbus
Register Function Parameter Data
register R/W Monitor or setting data Page
No. name No. resolution
spec. No
00: FW (Forward)
01: RV (Reverse)
Multi-function 03: CF2 (Multi-step speed setting binary 2)
1401
hex 1400 hex Input 1 C001 R/W 04: CF3 (Multi-step speed setting binary 3) −
Selection 05: CF4 (Multi-step speed setting binary 4)
06: JG (Jogging)
07: DB (External DC injection braking)
08: SET (2nd control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
11: FRS (Free-run stop)
12: EXT (External trip)
Multi-function 13: USP (Power recovery restart prevention function)
1402 14: CS (Commercial switch)
hex 1401 hex Input 2 C002 R/W 15: SFT (Soft lock) −
Selection 16: AT (Analog input switching)
18: RS (reset)
19: TH (PTC thermistor thermal protection)
<C005 only>
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
Multi-function 23: PID (PID disabled)

1403
hex 1402 hex Input 3 C003 R/W 24: PIDC (PID integral reset) −
Selection
28: DWN (Remote operation decelerated)
31: OPE (Forced operator function)
Multi-function 36: SF5 (Multi-step speed setting bit 5)
1404
hex 1403 hex Input 4 C004 R/W 37: SF6 (Multi-step speed setting bit 6) −
38: SF7 (Multi-step speed setting bit 7) P. 7-18
Selection
39: OLR (Overload limit switching)
44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
Multi-function 47: PCLR (Current position clear) 8
1405 50: ADD (Set frequency A145 addition)
hex 1404 hex Input 5 C005 R/W −
51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)
Selection

52: ATR (Torque reference input permission)
53: KHC (Integrated power clear)
Multi-function 61: MI6 (General-purpose input 6)
1406
hex 1405 hex Input 6 C006 R/W 62: MI7 (General-purpose input 7) −
Selection 65: AHD (Analog command held)
70: ORG (Origin search startup signal)
81: 485 (Start co-inverter communication)
Multi-function 82: PRG (DriveProgramming start)
1407
hex
1406 hex Input 7 C007 R/W 83: HLD (Retain output frequency) −
84: ROK (Permission of RUN command)
Selection
85: EB (Rotation direction detection)
86: DISP (Display fixed)
91: PSET (Preset position)

Modbus
spec. No
1408 to
Multi-function
Input 1
140B hex 140A hex C011 R/W −
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input 2
140C hex 140B hex C012 R/W −
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input 3
140D hex 140C hex C013 R/W −
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input 4 00: NO (NO contact)
140E hex 140D hex C014 R/W − P. 5-47
Operation 01: NC (NC contact)
Selection
Multi-function
Input 5
140F hex 140E hex C015 R/W −
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input 6
1410 hex 140F hex C016 R/W −
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input 7
1411 hex 1410 hex C017 R/W −
Operation
Selection
1412 to
1414 hex − Reserved − − − − −

Modbus
spec. No
00: RUN (During RUN)
09: UV (Signal during undervoltage)
Multi-function
1415 hex 1414 hex Output 11 C021 R/W 12: ONT (Power ON time over) −
Selection 13: THM (Electronic thermal warning)
27: ODc (Analog O disconnection detection)

28: OIDc (Analog OI disconnection
detection)
P. 5-54
31: FBV (PID feedback comparison)
32: NDc (Communications disconnection detection)
39: WAC (Capacitor life warning)
40: WAF (Cooling fan life warning)
Multi-function 44: MO1 (General-purpose output 1)
1416 hex 1415 hex Output 12 C022 R/W 45: MO2 (General-purpose output 2) −
Selection 46: MO3 (General-purpose output 3)
51: FWR (Forward run)
52: RVR (Reverse run) 8
53: MJA (Fatal fault signal)
54: WCO (Window comparator O)

55: WCOI (Window comparator
OI)
62: EDM (Safety device monitor signal)
63: OPO (Option)
1417 to
1419 − Reserved − − − − −
hex

Modbus
spec. No
00: RUN (During RUN)
09: UV (Signal during undervoltage)
12: ONT (Power ON time over)
13: THM (Electronic thermal warning)
Multi-function 27: ODc (Analog O disconnection detection)
Relay Output 28: OIDc (Analog OI disconnection
141A detection)
hex 1419 hex (AL1, AL2) C026 R/W
31: FBV (PID feedback comparison)
− P. 5-54
Function 32: NDc (Communications disconnection detection)
Selection 33: LOG1 (Logic operation output 1)
39: WAC (Capacitor life warning)
40: WAF (Cooling fan life warning)
44: MO1 (General-purpose input 1)
51: FWR (Forward run)
52: RVR (Reverse run)
53: MJA (Fatal fault signal)
54: WCO (Window comparator O)
55: WCOI (Window comparator
OI)
62: EDM (Safety device monitor)
63: OPO (Option)

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
01: Output current
02: Output torque*1
03: Digital output fre-
quency
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal
load rate
141B hex 141A hex EO Selection C027 R/W 07: LAD frequency − P. 7-27
08: Digital current
monitor
10: Cooling fin tem-
perature
(YA(0))
15: Pulse train input

monitor
16: Option (No applica-
ble Option)
01: Output current
02: Output torque *1
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal
load rate
07: LAD frequency
141C hex 141B hex AM Selection C028 R/W − P. 7-29
10: Cooling fin tem-
perature
11: Output torque 8
*1
(signed)

(YA(1))
16: Option (No applica-
ble Option)
Digital Current
141E hex 141D hex Monitor Reference C030 R/W 200 to 2000 0.1 [%] P. 7-27
Value
Multi-function Output 00: NO (NO contact)
141F hex 141E hex 11 Operation C031 R/W 01: NC (NC contact) −
Selection
P. 5-54
Multi-function Output 00: NO (NO contact)
1420 hex 141F hex 12 Operation C032 R/W 01: NC (NC contact) −
Selection
1421 to
1423 hex − Reserved − − − − −
trol).

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Multi-function Relay 00: NO (NO contact)
1424 hex 1423 hex Output (AL1, AL2) C036 R/W 01: NC (NC contact) − P. 5-54
Operation Selection
1425 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: During accelera-
tion/deceleration
Low Current Signal and constant
1426 hex 1425 hex C038 R/W −
Output Selection speed
P. 7-89
01: Only during con-
stant speed
Low Current Detec-
1427 hex 1426 hex C039 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%]
tion Level
00: Enabled during
acceleration/decel-
Overload Warning
eration and con-
1428 hex 1427 hex Signal Output C040 R/W −
stant speed
Selection P. 7-78
01: Enabled during
constant speed
1st Overload
1429 hex 1428 hex C041 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%]
Warning Level
Arrival Frequency C042
During Acceleration 0 to 59000 0.01
C042 [Hz]
142B hex 142A hex 1 (LOW) R/W
P. 7-83
0.01
During Deceleration 0 to 59000 [Hz]
C043
142D hex 142C hex 1 R/W
(LOW)
PID Deviation
142E hex 142D hex C044 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%] P. 7-44
Excessive Level
During Acceleration 0 to 59000 0.01
C045 [Hz]
1430 hex 142F hex 2 (LOW) R/W
P. 7-83
0.01
During Deceleration 0 to 59000 [Hz]
C046
1432 hex 1431 hex 2 (LOW) R/W
Pulse Train Output
1433 hex 1432 hex C047 R/W 1 to 9999 0.01 P. 7-27
EO Scale
1434 to
1437 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Feedback
1438 hex 1437 hex Comparison Signal C052 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Off Level
P. 7-44
Feedback
1439 hex 1438 hex Comparison Signal C053 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
On Level

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Overtorque/ 00: Overtorque
143A hex 1439 hex Undertorque C054 R/W 01: Undertorque −
Selection
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level
143B hex 143A hex C055 R/W 0 to 200 1 [%]
(Forward Power
Running)
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level
143C hex 143B hex C056 R/W 0 to 200 1 [%]
(Reverse
Regeneration)
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level P. 6-15
143D hex 143C hex C057 R/W 0 to 200 1 [%]
(Reverse Power
Running)
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level
143E hex 143D hex C058 R/W 0 to 200 1 [%]
(Forward

Regeneration)
00: Enabled during
acceleration/decel-
Overtorque/
eration and con-
143F hex 143E hex Undertorque Signal C059 R/W −
stant speed
Operation
01: Enabled during
constant speed
1440 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Electronic Thermal
1441 hex 1440 hex C061 R/W 0 to 100 1 [%] P. 7-77
Warning Level
1442 hex − Reserved − − − − −
0.01
1443 hex 1442 hex 0 Hz Detection Level C063 R/W 0 to 10000 [Hz] P. 5-57
Cooling Fin Over-
1444 hex 1443 hex C064 R/W 0 to 110 1 [°C] P. 7-88 8
heat Warning Level
1445 to

03 (2400 bps)
04 (4800 bps)
Communication 05 (9600 bps)
Speed Selection 06 (19.2 kbps)
144B hex 144A hex C071 R/W −
(Baud Rate 07 (38.4 kbps)
P. 8-5
Selection) 08 (57.6 kbps)
09 (76.8 kbps)
10 (115.2 kbps)
Communication Sta-
144C hex 144B hex C072 R/W 1 to 247 −
tion No. Selection

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: No
Communication
144E hex 144D hex C074 R/W 01: Even −
Parity Selection
02: Odd
Communication 1: 1 bit
144F hex 144E hex C075 R/W −
Stop Bit Selection 2: 2 bits
00: Trip
01: Trip after decelera-
Operation Selection
tion stop P. 8-5
1450 hex 144F hex on Communication C076 R/W −
02: Ignore
Error
03: Free-run stop
Communication 0: Timeout disabled
1451 hex 1450 hex C077 R/W 0.01 [s]
Error Timeout Time 1 to 9999
Communication Wait
1452 hex 1451 hex C078 R/W 0 to 1000 1 [ms]
Time
1453 to
1454 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1455 hex 1454 hex O Adjustment C081 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%]
P. 7-25
1456 hex 1455 hex OI Adjustment C082 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%]
1457 to
1458 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Thermistor
1459 hex 1458 hex C085 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%] P. 7-82
Adjustment
145A to
Do not change the
145F hex 145E hex Reserved C091 R − −
default 0.
1460 to
1463 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Modbus communi-
cation
01: Co-inverter com-
Communication
1464 hex 1463 hex C096 R/W munication − P. 8-31
Selection
02: Co-inverter com-
munication (man-
agement inverter)
1465 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Co-inverter
Communication
1466 hex 1465 hex C098 R/W 1 to 8 −
Starting Station
Number
Co-inverter
Communication
1467 hex 1466 hex C099 R/W 1 to 8 − P. 8-31
Ending Station
Number
00: Start via 485 termi-
Co-inverter
nal
1468 hex 1467 hex Communication C100 R/W −
01: Constant commu-
Start Selection
nication
00: Not store fre-
UP/DWN Storage quency data
1469 hex 1468 hex C101 R/W − P. 7-40
Selection 01: Store frequency
data

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Trip reset at
power-on
01: Trip reset at
power-off
146A hex 1469 hex Reset Selection C102 R/W −
02: Enabled only
during trip (Reset
at power-on) P. 5-42
03: Trip reset only
00: 0 Hz restart
Reset Restart
146B hex 146A hex C103 R/W restart at shutoff −
Selection
restart
00: 0 Hz
UP/DWN Clear
146C hex 146B hex C104 R/W 01: EEPROM data at − P. 7-40
Selection
power-on
146D hex 146C hex EO Gain Setting C105 R/W 50 to 200 1 [%] P. 7-28

146E hex 146D hex AM Gain Setting C106 R/W 50 to 200 1 [%] P. 7-30
146F to
1470 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1471 hex 1470 hex AM Bias Setting C109 R/W 0 to 100 1 [%] P. 7-30
1472 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1st Overload
1473 hex 1472 hex C111 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%] P. 7-78
Warning Level 2
1474 to
1478 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Jog Sensitivity
1479 hex 1478 hex C117 R/W 1 to 24 −
Setting
P. 7-61
Jog Carry Sensitivity
147A hex 1479 hex C118 R/W 1 to 100 −
Setting
147B to
1485 hex − Reserved − − − − −
8
1486 hex 1485 hex C130 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [s]
11 ON Delay Time

1487 hex 1486 hex C131 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [s]
11 OFF Delay Time
P. 5-55
1488 hex 1487 hex C132 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [s]
12 ON Delay Time
1489 hex 1488 hex C133 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [s]
12 OFF Delay Time
148A to
148F hex − Reserved − − − − −
1490 hex 148F hex Output ON Delay C140 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [s]
Time
P. 5-55
1491 hex 1490 hex Output OFF Delay C141 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [s]
Time

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Same as C021 (Except
Logic Output Signal
1492 hex 1491 hex C142 R/W 33 (LOG1) to 35 (LOG3), −
1 Selection 1
63 (OPO), and 255 (no))
Logic Output Signal
1 Selection 2
63 (OPO), and 255 (no))
00: AND
Logic Output Signal
1494 hex 1493 hex C144 R/W 01: OR −
1 Operator Selection
02: XOR
Logic Output Signal
2 Selection 1
63 (OPO), and 255 (no))
Logic Output Signal
1496 hex 1495 hex C146 R/W 33 (LOG1) to 35 (LOG3), − P. 7-85
2 Selection 2
63 (OPO), and 255 (no))
00: AND
Logic Output Signal
1497 hex 1496 hex C147 R/W 01: OR −
02: XOR
Logic Output Signal
3 Selection 1
63 (OPO), and 255 (no))
Logic Output Signal
3 Selection 2
63 (OPO), and 255 (no))
00: AND
Logic Output Signal
149A hex 1499 hex C150 R/W 01: OR −
02: XOR
149B to
14A4 hex 14A3 hex C160 R/W 0 to 200 2 [ms]
1 Response Time
2 Response Time
3 Response Time
14A7 hex 14A6 hex C163 R/W 0 to 200 2 [ms] P. 5-47
4 Response Time
5 Response Time
6 Response Time
14AA hex 14A9 hex C166 R/W 0 to 200 2 [ms]
7 Response Time
14AB to
14AC hex − Reserved − − − − −
Multi-step
14AD hex 14AC hex Speed/Position C169 R/W 0 to 200 10 [ms] P. 6-45
Determination Time
14AE to

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (No motor
Auto-tuning
1501 hex 1500 hex H001 R/W rotation) − P. 6-4
Selection
02: Enabled (Motor
rotation)
00: Standard motor
1st Motor Parameter parameter
1502 hex 1501 hex H002 R/W − P. 6-4
selection 02: Auto-tuning data
parameter
00: 0.1
01: 0.2
02: 0.4
03: 0.55
04: 0.75
05: 1.1
06: 1.5
07: 2.2
−

1503 hex 1502 hex 1st Motor Capacity H003 R/W
08: 3.0
09: 3.7
10: 4.0
P. 6-3
11: 5.5
12: 7.5
13: 11.0
14: 15.0
15: 18.5
00: 2P
01: 4P
1st Motor Pole 02: 6P
1504 hex 1503 hex H004 R/W −
Number 03: 8P
04 to 23: Do not set 10
to 48P. 8
1505 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1506 hex 1505 hex 1st Speed Response H005 R/W 0 to 1000 1 [%] P. 6-9

1st Stabilization
1507 hex 1506 hex H006 R/W 0 to 255 1 P. 7-52
Parameter
1508 to
1515 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1st Motor Parameter 0.001
1516 hex 1515 hex H020 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-9
R1
1517 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1518 hex 1517 hex H021 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-9
R2
1519 hex − Reserved − − − − −
151A hex 1519 hex H022 R/W 1 to 65535 [mH] P. 6-9
L
151B hex − Reserved − − − − −
1st Motor Parameter
151C hex 151B hex H023 R/W 1 to 65535 0.01 [A]
Io
H024 P. 6-9
151D hex 151C hex (HIGH) R/W
1 to 9999000
J H024 [kgm2]
151E hex 151D hex (LOW) R/W
151F to
1524 hex

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
1st Motor Parameter
0.001
1525 hex 1524 hex R1 (Auto-tuning H030 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-4
Data)
1526 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1st Motor Parameter
0.001
1527 hex 1526 hex R2 (Auto-tuning H031 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-4
Data)
1528 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1529 hex 1528 hex H032 R/W 1 to 65535 [mH] P. 6-4
L (Auto-tuning Data)
1st Motor Parameter
152B hex 152A hex Io (Auto-tuning H033 R/W 1 to 65535 0.01 [A]
Data)
H034 P. 6-4
1 to 9999000
J (Auto-tuning Data) H034 [kgm2]
152D hex 152C hex (LOW) R/W
152E to
153C hex − Reserved − − − − −
V/f Control With
Speed Feedback
153D hex 153C hex H050 R/W 0 to 1000 0.01 [%]
Slip Compensation
Proportional Gain
P. 6-24
V/f Control With
Speed Feedback
153E hex 153D hex H051 R/W 0 to 1000 1 [s]
Slip Compensation
Integral Gain
153F to
00: Standard PM motor
PM Motor parameter
1571 hex 1570 hex H102 R/W −
Parameter Selection 01: Auto-tuning data
parameter
00: 0.1
01: 0.2
02: 0.4
03: 0.55
04: 0.75
05: 1.1
P. 6-62
06: 1.5
07: 2.2
1572 hex 1571 hex PM Motor Capacity H103 R/W −
08: 3.0
09: 3.7
10: 4.0
11: 5.5
12: 7.5
13: 11.0
14: 15.0
15: 18.5

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: 2P
01: 4P
PM Motor Pole 02: 6P
1573 hex 1572 hex H104 R/W −
Number 03: 8P
04 to 23: Do not set 10
to 48P.
PM Motor Rated
1574 hex 1573 hex H105 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Current
PM Motor 0.001
1575 hex 1574 hex H106 R/W 1 to 65535 []
Parameter R
P. 6-62
PM Motor 0.01
1576 hex 1575 hex H107 R/W 1 to 65535 [mH]
Parameter Ld
PM motor 0.01
1577 hex 1576 hex H108 R/W 1 to 65535 [mH]
Parameter Lq
PM motor 0.0001
1578 hex 1577 hex H109 R/W 1 to 65535 [Vp/
Parameter Ke (rad/s)]
H110

PM motor 0.001
R/W 1 to 9999000
Parameter J H110 [kgm2]
157A hex 1579 hex (LOW)
PM Motor
0.001
157B hex 157A hex Parameter R H111 R/W 1 to 65535 []
(Auto-tuning Data)
PM Motor
157C hex 157B hex H112 R/W 1 to 65535 0.01
Parameter Ld [mH] P. 6-59
(Auto-tuning Data)
PM Motor
0.01
157D hex 157C hex Parameter Lq H113 R/W 1 to 65535 [mH]
(Auto-tuning Data)
157E to
1581 hex 1580 hex

PM Motor Speed
H116 R/W 1 to 1000 1 [%]
8
Response
PM Motor Starting 0.01
1582 hex 1581 hex H117 R/W 2000 to 10000

Current [%] P. 6-64
PM Motor Starting
1583 hex 1582 hex H118 R/W 1 to 6000 0.01 [s]
Time
1584 hex 1583 hex (Reserved) H119*1 R/W 0 to 120 1 [%]
PM Motor Minimum
1586 hex 1585 hex H121 R/W 0 to 255 0.1 [%]
Frequency
PM Motor No-Load 0.01
1587 hex 1586 hex H122 R/W 0 to 10000 [%]
Current P. 6-64
00: Disabled
PM Motor Starting
1588 hex 1587 hex H123 R/W 01: Initial pole position −
Method Selection
estimation enabled

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
158A hex 1589 hex Position Estimation H131 R/W 0 to 255 1 [time]
0V Waiting Times
Position Estimation
158B hex 158A hex H132 R/W 0 to 255 1 [time] P. 6-64
Detection Waiting
Times
158C hex 158B hex Position Estimation H133 R/W 0 to 255 1 [time]
Detection Times
PM Initial Pole
158D hex 158C hex Position Estimation H134 R/W 0 to 200 1 [%] P. 6-64
Voltage Gain
158E to
00: Trip
Operation Selection
1601 hex 1600 hex P001 R/W 01: Continues opera- 00 P. 7-105
on Option Error
tion
1602 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Frequency setting
(including PID)
01: Feedback pulse
(enabled only
1603 hex 1602 hex P003 R/W when 1st control is − P. 7-52
Selection
selected)
02: MI8 (General-pur-
pose input 8 for
DriveProgramming)
00: Single-phase pulse
input
01: Phase A and B
Pulse Train Input 90°phase differ-
1604 hex 1603 hex P004 R/W − P. 6-28
Type Selection ence pulse train
02: Do not set.
03: Single-phase pulse
train + direction
1605 to
Number of Encoder 1
160B hex 160A hex P011 R/W 32 to 1024
Pulses [pulse]
00: Simple position
P. 6-28
Simple Position control disabled
160C hex 160B hex P012 R/W −
Control Selection 02: Simple position
control enabled
Creep Speed Mov- 0 to 4000
160E hex 160D hex P014 R/W 0.1 [%]
ing Amount
P. 6-34
Starting Frequency to 0.01
160F hex 160E hex Creep Speed Setting P015 R/W [Hz]
1000 (10000)*1

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
1610 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Positioning
1
1611 hex 1610 hex Completion Range P017 R/W 0 to 10000 [pulse] P. 6-34
Setting
1612 to
1619 hex − Reserved − − − − −
Overspeed Error
161A hex 1619 hex P026 R/W 0 to 1500 0.1 [%]
Detection Level
P. 6-23
Speed Deviation 0.01
161B hex 161A hex P027 R/W 0 to 12000 [Hz]
Excessive Level
161C to
Acceleration/ 00: Digital Operator
161F hex 161E hex Deceleration Time P031 R/W 03: DriveProgramming − P. 5-32
Input Type
1620 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Terminal O
01: Terminal OI

Torque Reference
1621 hex 1620 hex P033 R/W 03: Digital Operator −
Input Selection
06: Option (No applica- P. 6-16
ble Option)
Torque Reference
1622 hex 1621 hex P034 R/W 0 to 200 1 [%]
Setting
1623 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Disabled
Torque Bias Selec- 01: Digital Operator
1624 hex 1623 hex P036 R/W −
tion 05: Option (No applica-
ble Option)
P. 6-17
1625 hex 1624 hex Torque Bias Value P037 R/W −200 to 200 1 [%]
00: As per sign
Torque Bias Polarity
1626 hex 1625 hex P038 R/W 01: Dependent on −
Selection
RUN direction 8
1627 hex − Reserved − − − − −

1628 hex 1627 hex Torque Control P039 R/W 0 to 12000 0.01 P. 6-16
[Hz]
(Forward)
1629 hex − Reserved − − − − −
162A hex 1629 hex Torque Control P040 R/W 0 to 12000 0.01 P. 6-16
[Hz]
(Reverse)
Speed/Torque
162B hex 162A hex P041 R/W 0 to 1000 1 [ms] −
Switching Time
162C to
1638 hex − Reserved − − − − −

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
10 to 320 * Input fre-
Pulse Train 0.1
1639 hex 1638 hex P055 R/W quency at maximum fre- [kHz]
Frequency Scale
quency
Pulse Train
163A hex 1639 hex Frequency Filter P056 R/W 1 to 200 0.01 [s]
Time Parameter
Pulse Train
163B hex 163A hex Frequency Bias P057 R/W −100 to 100 1 [%] P. 7-52
Amount
Pulse Train
163C hex 163B hex Frequency P058 R/W 0 to 100 1 [%]
UpperLimit
Pulse Train
163D hex 163C hex Frequency Lower P059 R/W 1 to 2000 0.01
[%]
Limit
P060 Position range setting
Multi-step Position (reverse side) to posi- 1
Command 0 P060 tion range setting (for- [pulse]
163F hex 163E hex (LOW) R/W
ward side)
ward side)
P. 6-45
ward side)
ward side)
ward side)
ward side)
P. 6-45
164B hex 164A hex (LOW) R/W
ward side)
164D hex 164C hex (LOW) R/W
ward side)

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Origin Search
Mode 1
164E hex 164D hex Origin Search Mode P068 R/W −
01: Origin Search
Mode 2
Origin Search 00: Forward
164F hex 164E hex P069 R/W − P. 6-40
Direction Selection 01: Reverse
Origin Search Mode 0.01
1650 hex 164F hex P070 R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)*1 [Hz]
1 Frequency
Origin Search Mode 0 to 1st Maximum Fre- 0.01
1651 hex 1650 hex P071 R/W [Hz]
2 Frequency quency
Position Limit P072
1
Setting (Forward 0 to 268435455 [pulse]
P072
1653 hex 1652 hex Side) (LOW) R/W
P. 6-34
Position Limit P073
1654 hex 1653 hex R/W
(HIGH) 1
Setting (Reverse −268435455 to 0 [pulse]
P073
1655 hex 1654 hex Side) (LOW) R/W

1656 hex − Reserved − − − − −
1657 hex 1656 hex P075 R/W − P. 6-34
1658 hex − Reserved − − − − −
0: Disconnection
Encoder Disconnec-
1659 hex 1658 hex P077 R/W detection disabled 0.1 [s] P. 6-34
tion Detection Time
1 to 100
165A hex
165B hex
Restarting
1
165C hex 165B hex Positioning Range P080 R/W 0 to 10000 [pulse] P. 6-45
Setting
8

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Position Store 00: Not store
165D hex 165C hex Selection at Power P081 R/W 01: Store −
Off
P082 Position range setting P. 6-44
165E hex 165D hex (HIGH)
Position Data at (reverse side) to posi- 1
R/W
Power Off P082 tion range setting (for- [pulse]
165F hex 165E hex (LOW) ward side)
1660 hex 165F hex (HIGH) (reverse side) to posi- 1
Preset Position Data R/W P. 6-43
P083 tion range setting (for- [pulse]
1661 hex 1660 hex (LOW) ward side)
1662 to
1665 hex − Reserved − − − − −
DriveProgramming
1666 hex 1665 hex P100 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U00
DriveProgramming
1667 hex 1666 hex P101 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U01
DriveProgramming
1668 hex 1667 hex P102 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U02
DriveProgramming
1669 hex 1668 hex P103 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U03
DriveProgramming
166A hex 1669 hex P104 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U04
DriveProgramming
166B hex 166A hex P105 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U05
DriveProgramming
166C hex 166B hex P106 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U06
DriveProgramming
166D hex 166C hex P107 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U07
DriveProgramming
166E hex 166D hex P108 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U08
DriveProgramming
166F hex 166E hex P109 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U09
P. 7-105
DriveProgramming
1670 hex 166F hex P110 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U10
DriveProgramming
1671 hex 1670 hex P111 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U11
DriveProgramming
1672 hex 1671 hex P112 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U12
DriveProgramming
1673 hex 1672 hex P113 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U13
DriveProgramming
1674 hex 1673 hex P114 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U14
DriveProgramming
1675 hex 1674 hex P115 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U15
DriveProgramming
1676 hex 1675 hex P116 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U16
DriveProgramming
1677 hex 1676 hex P117 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U17
DriveProgramming
1678 hex 1677 hex P118 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U18
DriveProgramming
1679 hex 1678 hex P119 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U19

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
DriveProgramming
167A hex 1679 hex P120 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U20
DriveProgramming
167B hex 167A hex P121 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U21
DriveProgramming
167C hex 167B hex P122 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U22
DriveProgramming
167D hex 167C hex P123 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U23
DriveProgramming
167E hex 167D hex P124 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U24
DriveProgramming
167F hex 167E hex P125 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U25
P. 7-105
DriveProgramming
1680 hex 167F hex P126 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U26
DriveProgramming
1681 hex 1680 hex P127 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U27
DriveProgramming
1682 hex 1681 hex P128 R/W 0 to 65535 1

User Parameter U28
DriveProgramming
1683 hex 1682 hex P129 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U29
DriveProgramming
1684 hex 1683 hex P130 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U30
DriveProgramming
1685 hex 1684 hex P131 R/W 0 to 65535 1
User Parameter U31
1686 to
Number of Sent
Data of All Stations
168E hex 168D hex P140 R/W 1 to 5 −
in Co-inverter
Communication
Recipient Station
Number of All 8
168F hex 168E hex Stations in P141 R/W 1 to 247 −
Co-inverter

Communication 1
Recipient Register
of All Stations in
1690 hex 168F hex P142 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex −
Co-inverter
Communication 1
P. 8-31
Sender Register of
All Stations in
1691 hex 1690 hex P143 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex −
Co-inverter
Communication 1
Recipient Station
Number of All
1692 hex 1691 hex Stations in P144 R/W 1 to 247 −
Co-inverter
Communication 2
Recipient Register
of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 2

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Sender Register of
All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 2
Recipient Station
Number of All
Co-inverter
Communication 3
Recipient Register
of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 3
Sender Register of
All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 3
Recipient Station
Number of All
Co-inverter
Communication 4 P. 8-31
Recipient Register
of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 4
Sender Register of
All Stations in
169A hex 1699 hex P152 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex −
Co-inverter
Communication 4
Recipient Station
Number of All
169B hex 169A hex Stations in P153 R/W 1 to 247 −
Co-inverter
Communication 5
Recipient Register
of All Stations in
169C hex 169B hex P154 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex −
Co-inverter
Communication 5
Sender Register of
All Stations in
169D hex 169C hex P155 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex −
Co-inverter
Communication 5
169E to
Option I/F Flexible
16A2 hex 16A1 hex Format Output P160 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Register 1
Option I/F Flexible
16A3 hex 16A2 hex Format Output P161 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1 P. 7-105
Register 2
Option I/F Flexible
Register 3

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Option I/F Flexible
Register 4
Option I/F Flexible
Register 5
Option I/F Flexible
Register 6
Option I/F Flexible
Register 7
Option I/F Flexible
Register 8
Option I/F Flexible
16AA hex 16A9 hex Format Output P168 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Register 9

Option I/F Flexible
16AB hex 16AA hex Format Output P169 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Register 10
Option I/F Flexible
16AC hex 16AB hex Format Input P170 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Register 1
Option I/F Flexible
16AD hex 16AC hex Format Input P171 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1 P. 7-105
Register 2
Option I/F Flexible
16AE hex 16AD hex Format Input P172 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Register 3
Option I/F Flexible
16AF hex 16AE hex Format Input P173 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1 8
Register 4
Option I/F Flexible

16B0 hex 16AF hex Format Input P174 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Register 5
Option I/F Flexible
16B1 hex 16B0 hex Format Input P175 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Register 6
Option I/F Flexible
Register 7
Option I/F Flexible
Register 8
Option I/F Flexible
Register 9
Option I/F Flexible
Register 10
Do not change the
16B6 hex 16B5 hex (Reserved) P180 − − −
default 0.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Do not change the
default 0.
Do not change the
default 0.
Do not change the
default 0.
16BA hex − Reserved − − − − −
Do not change the
16BB hex 16BA hex (Reserved) P185 − − −
default 0.
Do not change the
16BC hex 16BB hex (Reserved) P186 − − −
default 6.
16BD to
16BF hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −
Do not change the
16C0 hex 16BF hex (Reserved) P190 − − −
default 0.
Do not change the
16C2 hex 16C1 hex (Reserved) P192 − − −
default 63.
16C3 hex
− Not used − − Not accessible − −
16C4 hex
Do not change the
default 0.
Do not change the
default 21.
00: Standard Modbus
Modbus Mapping address
16C8 hex 16C7 hex P200 R/W −
Function Selection 01: Modbus mapping
enabled
Modbus Mapping
16C9 hex 16C8 hex P201 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 1
Modbus Mapping
16CA hex 16C9 hex P202 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 2
Modbus Mapping
16CB hex 16CA hex P203 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 3
Modbus Mapping
16CC hex 16CB hex P204 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 4
P. 8-24
Modbus Mapping
16CD hex 16CC hex P205 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 5
Modbus Mapping
16CE hex 16CD hex P206 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 6
Modbus Mapping
16CF hex 16CE hex P207 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 7
Modbus Mapping
16D0 hex 16CF hex P208 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 8
Modbus Mapping
16D1 hex 16D0 hex P209 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 9
Modbus Mapping
16D2 hex 16D1 hex P210 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
External Register 10

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Modbus Mapping 00: Unsigned
16D3 hex 16D2 hex External Register P211 R/W 01: Signed −
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
Type 6

Type 7
16DA hex 16D9 hex External Register P218 R/W 01: Signed −
Type 8
16DB hex 16DA hex P219 R/W − P. 8-24
External Register 01: Signed
Type 9
16DC hex 16DB hex External Register P220 R/W 01: Signed −
Type 10
Modbus Mapping
16DD hex 16DC hex P221 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 1 8
Modbus Mapping
16DE hex 16DD hex P222 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 2

Modbus Mapping
16DF hex 16DE hex P223 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 3
Modbus Mapping
16E0 hex 16DF hex P224 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 4
Modbus Mapping
16E1 hex 16E0 hex P225 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 5
Modbus Mapping
16E2 hex 16E1 hex P226 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 6
Modbus Mapping
16E3 hex 16E2 hex P227 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 7
Modbus Mapping
16E4 hex 16E3 hex P228 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 8
Modbus Mapping
16E5 hex 16E4 hex P229 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 9
Modbus Mapping
16E6 hex 16E5 hex P230 R/W 1 to 65535 0.001
Scaling 10

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
Modbus Mapping
16E7 hex 16E6 hex P301 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 1
Modbus Mapping
Internal Register 2
Modbus Mapping
Internal Register 3
Modbus Mapping
16EA hex 16E9 hex P304 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 4
Modbus Mapping
16EB hex 16EA hex P305 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 5
P. 8-24
Modbus Mapping
16EC hex 16EB hex P306 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 6
Modbus Mapping
16ED hex 16EC hex P307 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 7
Modbus Mapping
16EE hex 16ED hex P308 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 8
Modbus Mapping
16EF hex 16EE hex P309 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 9
Modbus Mapping
16F0 hex 16EF hex P310 R/W 0000 to FFFF hex 1
Internal Register 10
00: Big endian
Modbus Mapping
16F1 hex 16F0 hex P400 R/W 01: Little endian − P. 8-29
Endian Selection
02: Special endian
16F2 to
1E00 hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
20: Coil No. 0010 hex
1E01 hex 1E00 hex Coil data 1*1 − R to − −
215: Coil No. 001F hex
1E02 hex 1E01 hex Coil data 2 *1 − R to − −
2 : Coil No. 004F hex
15

1E06 to

1E18 hex
1E19 to
1F00 hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −

1F01 hex 1F00 hex Coil data 0 *1 − R/W to − −
2 : Coil No. 000F hex
15
1F02 to
1F1D hex − Reserved − − −*2 − −
1F1E to
*1. Each of these holding registers (coil data 0 to 5) comprises 16 registers. Because the co-inverter communica-
tion function does not support coils (only holding registers are supported), use these holding registers to ac-
cess coils, if necessary.
*2. Do not write data to the holding registers 1F02 to 1F1D hex.
8

8-9-5 2nd Control Register Number List

⚫ Group F
Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
F202
2nd Acceleration
0 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 1 F202
P. 5-32
F203
2nd Deceleration
0 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 1 F203
2107 to
⚫ Group A/b/C/H/P
Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: Volume
minal block (Ana-
log input)
03: Modbus communi-
2nd Frequency Ref-
2201 hex 2200 hex A201 R/W cation − P. 5-23
erence Selection
04: Option
06: Pulse train fre-
quency
output
minal block (Drive-
Programming)
2nd RUN Command
2202 hex 2201 hex A202 R/W 02: Digital Operator − P. 5-21
Selection*1
03: Modbus communi-
cation
04: Option
*1. If you change the 2nd RUN Command Selection setting, be sure to wait at least 40 ms before actually inputting
the RUN command.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
300 to 2nd Maximum
2203 hex 2202 hex 2nd Base Frequency A203 R/W 0.1 [Hz] P. 5-20
Frequency
2nd Maximum Fre- 2nd Base Frequency to
2204 hex 2203 hex A204 R/W 0.1 [Hz] P. 5-20
quency 5900
2205 to
A220 0
2nd Multi-step Starting Frequency to 0.01
P. 5-48
Speed Reference 0 A220 2nd Maximum Fre- [Hz]*1
quency
2218 to
00: Manual torque
2nd Torque Boost boost
223B hex 223A hex A241 R/W −
Selection 01: Automatic torque
boost
P. 5-59
2nd Manual Torque
223C hex 223B hex A242 R/W 0 to 200 0.1 [%]

Boost Voltage
2nd Manual Torque
223D hex 223C hex A243 R/W 0 to 500 0.1 [%]
Boost Frequency
00: Constant torque
characteristics
01: Reduced torque
P. 5-8
223E hex 223D hex 2nd Control Method A244 R/W characteristics − P. 6-3
control*2
2nd Output Voltage
223F hex 223E hex A245 R/W 20 to 100 1 [%] P. 7-41
Gain
2nd Automatic
Torque Boost
2240 hex 223F hex
Voltage
A246 R/W 0 to 255 1 [%] 8
Compensation Gain P. 5-59
2nd Automatic

2241 hex 2240 hex Torque Boost Slip A247 R/W 0 to 255 1 [%]
Compensation Gain
2242 to
A261 0
2nd Frequency 2nd Frequency Lower 0.01
Upper Limit A261 Limit to 2nd Maximum [Hz]
Frequency
P. 5-30
A262 0
2nd Frequency Starting Frequency to 0.01
Lower Limit A262 2nd Frequency Upper [Hz]
Limit
Set parameter values in units of 0.01 Hz for writing and in units of 0.1% (as a percentage of the maximum fre-
quency) for reading.

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
2253 to
2268 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
2269 hex 2268 hex 2nd AVR Selection A281 R/W − P. 7-42
02: OFF during decel-
eration
200-V class: 00 (200)
01 (215)
02 (220)
03 (230)
04 (240)
2nd Motor Rated P. 5-20
226A hex 2269 hex A282 R/W 400-V class: 05 (380) − P. 7-42
Voltage Selection
06 (400)
07 (415)
08 (440)
09 (460)
10 (480)
226B to
A292
2nd Acceleration
1 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 2 A292
A293
2nd Deceleration
1 to 360000 0.01 [s]
Time 2 A293
00: Switch via 2CH ter-
minal
01: Switch by 2-step
2nd 2-step
Accelera-
Acceleration/
2273 hex 2272 hex A294 R/W tion/Deceleration − P. 5-36
Deceleration
Frequency
Selection
02: Switch only during
forward/reverse
switching
2nd 2-step A295
2274 hex 2273 hex R/W
(HIGH) 0.01
Acceleration 0 to 59000 [Hz]
A295
2nd 2-step A296

0.01
Deceleration 0 to 59000 [Hz]
A296
2278 to
230B hex − Not used − − Not accessible − −

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
2nd Electronic
230C hex 230B hex b212 R/W 200 to 1000 0.1 [%]
Thermal Level
00: Reduced torque
2nd Electronic
characteristics P. 5-15
Thermal
230D hex 230C hex b213 R/W 01: Constant torque −
Characteristics
characteristics
Selection
02: Free setting
230E to
2315 hex − Reserved − − − − −
00: Disabled
01: Enabled during
acceleration and
constant speed
02: Enabled during
2nd Overload Limit constant speed
2316 hex 2315 hex b221 R/W −
Selection 03: Enabled during
acceleration and
P. 7-78
constant speed

(Accelerated
during regenera-
tion)
2nd Overload Limit
2317 hex 2316 hex b222 R/W 100 to 2000 (1500) 0.1 [%]
Level
2nd Overload Limit
2318 hex 2317 hex b223 R/W 1 to 30000 0.1 [s]
Parameter
2319 to
2nd Overload
2429 hex 2428 hex C241 R/W 0 to 2000 0.1 [%] P. 7-78
Warning Level
242A to
00: Standard motor
2nd Motor Parame- parameter 8
2502 hex 2501 hex H202 R/W −
ter Selection 02: Auto-tuning param-
eter

00: 0.1
01: 0.2
02: 0.4
03: 0.55
04: 0.75
05: 1.1
P. 6-4
06: 1.5
07: 2.2
2503 hex 2502 hex 2nd Motor Capacity H203 R/W −
08: 3.0
09: 3.7
10: 4.0
11: 5.5
12: 7.5
13: 11.0
14: 15.0
15: 18.5

Modbus
No. No. resolution
spec. No
00: 2P
01: 4P
2nd Motor Pole 02: 6P
2504 hex 2503 hex H204 R/W − P. 6-4
Number Selection 03: 8P
04 to 23: Do not set 10 to
48P.
2505 hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Speed
2506 hex 2505 hex H205 R/W 1 to 1000 1 [%] P. 6-4
Response
2nd Stabilization
2507 hex 2506 hex H206 R/W 0 to 255 1 P. 7-52
Parameter
2508 to
2515 hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Motor 0.001
2516 hex 2515 hex H220 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-9
Parameter R1
2517 hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Motor 0.001
2518 hex 2517 hex H221 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-9
Parameter R2
2519 hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Motor 0.01
251A hex 2519 hex H222 R/W 1 to 65535 [mH] P. 6-9
Parameter L
251B hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Motor
251C hex 251B hex H223 R/W 1 to 65535 0.01 [A] P. 6-9
Parameter Io
H224
251D hex 251C hex (HIGH) R/W
2nd Motor 0.001
1 to 9999000 P. 6-9
Parameter J H224 [kgm2]
251E hex 251D hex (LOW) R/W
251F to
2524 hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Motor
0.001
2525 hex 2524 hex Parameter R1 H230 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-4
(Auto-tuning Data)
2526 hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Motor
0.001
2527 hex 2526 hex Parameter R2 H231 R/W 1 to 65535 [] P. 6-4
(Auto-tuning Data)
2528 hex − Reserved − − − − −
2nd Motor
2529 hex 2528 hex H232 R/W 1 to 65535 0.01 P. 6-4
Parameter L [mH]
(Auto-tuning Data)
2nd Motor
252B hex 252A hex Parameter Io H233 R/W 1 to 65535 0.01 [A] P. 6-4
(Auto-tuning Data)
2nd Motor H234
0.001
Parameter J 1 to 9999000 P. 6-4
H234 [kgm2]
252D hex 252C hex (Auto-tuning Data) (LOW) R/W
252E to

Overview of DriveProgramming
This section provides the features of the DriveProgramming.
9-1 Overview of DriveProgramming ....................................................................... 9-2

9-1 Overview of DriveProgramming

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter has the built-in simple sequence function (DriveProgramming), which
enables a stand-alone inverter to perform simple sequence control.
You can create programs easily by using the CX-Drive. The user programs you created can be down-
loaded onto the inverter for programmed inverter operation.
Features of DriveProgramming
• The DriveProgramming supports both flowchart and text language method programming.
• Five tasks can be processed in parallel.
• User programs can be executed externally by the ON/OFF signal input via a multi-function input terminal.
• The user programs can be used to read and write functions allocated to the multi-function input and
output terminals.
• The Digital Operator enables you to change the settings of the output frequency, acceleration/decel-
eration time, and other parameters that require on-site adjustment by specifying the user parameters
(P100 to P131), without connecting any computer.
• Because user programs are stored in the internal EEPROM of the inverter, you can start a program
immediately after the inverter power supply is turned on.

If the DriveProgramming stops during multi-function output, the output status is held. Take
safety precautions such as stopping peripheral devices.

The 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter does not support the optional LCD Digital Operator (Model:
3G3AX-OP05). Therefore, the clock command built into the LCD Digital Operator cannot be used.
DriveProgramming Function
The details of the main DriveProgramming function are as follows.
Item Specifications
Programming language Flowchart and text language method
Windows computer
Input device (The supported operating systems are Windows XP SP3, Win-
dows Vista, and Windows 7.)
1024 steps max.: 6 KB
Program capacity
(1024 steps max. for a total of 5 tasks)
Program Functions supported in Inverter/Servo support tool CX-Drive
specifications Programming support • Program editing and display
function • Program compilation (Program configuration check)
• Program downloading, uploading, and all clear
• Execution by interpreter
• Execution cycle: 2 ms/step (5 commands executable through
Execution format
5-task parallel processing)
• Subroutine call supported (Nesting in 8 levels max.)

The main functions of the DriveProgramming Editor available in CX-Drive are as shown below.
Function Description
Programming Supports the creation, editing, saving, reading, and printing of user programs.
Compilation Compiles a user programs. *1
Downloads a user program to the inverter, or
Transfer
uploads a user program from the inverter.
Starts and stops the execution of a program.
Debugging support
This allows the user to check the inverter status monitor etc.
*1. Compilation is the process to generate an intermediate code after a program check.
For details, refer to “DriveProgramming User’s Manual (I580).”
Monitoring software
CX-Drive
Ver. 3.02 or higher
(DriveProgramming)
Programming
9-1 Overview of DriveProgramming

Creation, editing and saving of
user programs
Connect directly or
Compilation via communications
Transmission
Upload
User Programs
Download
Program execution 9
Monitor
Parameter changed


10
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to analyze the cause and take countermeasures if the
inverter fails, and provides troubleshooting for possible troubles.
10-1 Alarm Display and Remedies .......................................................................... 10-2

10-1-1 Alarm Display .................................................................................................... 10-2
10-1-2 Alarm Code List................................................................................................. 10-4
10-1-3 Option Unit Protective Function List ................................................................ 10-10
10-1-4 Warning Display .............................................................................................. 10-11
10-1-5 Other Indications on Digital Operator .............................................................. 10-12
10-2 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 10-13

10 Troubleshooting
10-1 Alarm Display and Remedies
10-1-1 Alarm Display

If an error occurs, the inverter shuts off its output (“trip”), turns ON the ALARM LED, and displays an
alarm code. With the alarm code displayed, you can rotate the Jog dial clockwise to view the detailed
information such as the output frequency, current, and main circuit DC voltage when the alarm signal
was output.
Before resetting the alarm, be sure to investigate the cause of the trip and remove the trip factor(s)
according to the displayed alarm code.
Note that, during an inverter trip, you cannot change parameter settings and data cannot be written to
the EEPROM via communications. To change parameter settings, cycle the power supply, or reset the
trip in advance.
This section describes how to deal with troubles that may occur after you start using the inverter.
Fault Monitor Display
Use the Fault Monitor 1 to 6 (d081 to d086) to check the current alarm, as well as the past alarms. The
Fault Monitor 1 (d081) displays information on the latest alarm.
Fault Monitor 1 (Latest) Fault Monitor 6
to
Enter
Hz A
Trip factor Inverter status at trip occurrence
JOG
JOG
(R efer to 10-1-2 Alarm Code
List on page 10-4.)
JOG
Hz A
JOG
JOG
Hz A
JOG
JOG
Hz A
: During RUN command input at frequency 0
JOG
Hz A
trip (h)
JOG
JOG
Hz A
JOG

10 Troubleshooting
10-1 Alarm Display and Reme-

The status information displayed on the inverter in the event of an alarm may not match the
apparent operation of the motor.
For example, under PID control or in applications where the frequency is input via the analog
dies
signal, the inverter may accelerate and decelerate slightly in a repetitive manner due to fluctua-
tion of the analog signal etc. even though the motor may appear to rotate at a constant speed.
10
How to Reset a Trip State
10-1-1 Alarm Display

The inverter in a trip state can be reset in either of the following two methods.
• Press the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator.

This key can be used to reset a trip error when the STOP Key Selection (b087) is set to 00 (Enabled)
or 02 (Only resetting enabled).
• Input the reset signal via the control circuit terminal block.
Set one of the Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 18 (RS: Reset).
The above reset methods may not be effective depending on the trip factor.
In such cases, cycle the power supply.

10 Troubleshooting
10-1-2 Alarm Code List
Alarm Reference
Name Description Check and remedy
code page
Overcurrent If the brake is applied to During E01. Is there any rapid load fluctua-
protection the motor, or if motor is constant tion?
rapidly accelerated or speed • Eliminate load fluctuation.
decelerated, a large cur-
Is there any output short-circuit?
rent will flow through the
inverter, which results in a • Check the output wiring.
fault. Therefore, the protec- Is there any ground fault?
tion circuit is activated at • Check the output wiring and
approximately 200% of the the motor.
inverter rated output cur- During E02. Is there any rapid deceleration?
rent, and the inverter trips. Deceler- • Increase the deceleration P. 5-32
ation time. P. 5-59
P. 6-62
During E03. Is there any rapid acceleration? P. 7-78
Acceler- • Increase the acceleration P. 7-81
ation time.
Is the motor locked?
• Check the motor and wiring.
Is the torque boost too high?
• Decrease the torque boost
setting.
• If a PM motor is in use, is the
motor set and adjusted prop-
erly?
Others E04. Is the DC injection braking power
too high? P. 7-93
• Decrease the braking power.
Overload pro- This function monitors the inverter E05. Is the load too heavy?
tection*1 output current and, if the built-in elec- • Reduce the load rate.
tronic thermal function detects a
Is the thermal level setting
motor overload, causes the inverter to
(b012/b212) correct? P. 5-15
trip. P. 5-59
• Adjust the thermal level to an P. 6-62
If the Motor Electronic Thermal Selec-
appropriate level. P. 7-74
tion (b910) is set to separate the over- P. 7-78
load protection for the motor and for Is the acceleration torque suffi-
the inverter, this function serves as cient?
the motor overload protection. • Increase the acceleration
time.
Braking resis- The inverter trips if the usage rate of E06. Is there any rapid deceleration?
tor overload the regenerative braking circuit • Increase the deceleration
protection exceeds the value set in b090. time.
P. 5-32
Is the operation cycle time too P. 5-64
short?
• Increase the operation cycle
time.
*1. The inverter will not accept the reset command until approximately 10 seconds after the occurrence of a trip
(specifically, after activation of the protective function).
10 - Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

4
10 Troubleshooting

Alarm Reference
code page
Overvoltage Extremely high DC voltage between E07. Is there any rapid deceleration?
protection P/+2 and N/− may result in a fault. • Increase the deceleration time.
Therefore, the inverter trips if the DC
Is there any ground fault?
dies
voltage between P/+2 and N/−
exceeds approximately 400 VDC (for • Check the output wiring and
200-V class) or 800 VDC (for 400-V the motor.
class) due to regenerative energy Is the motor rotated from the load P. 2-34 10
P. 5-32
from the motor or an increase in the side? P. 5-62
incoming voltage. • Decrease the amount of P. 5-64

regeneration. P. 7-42
Is the incoming voltage too high?

• Lower the incoming voltage,
suppress the power supply
fluctuation, install the AC reac-
tor in the input power circuit.
EEPROM The inverter trips if an error occurs in E08. Is there any large noise source
error*1 the built-in EEPROM due to external around?
noise or abnormal temperature rise. • Take measures against noise.
(This may result in a CPU error.) −
Is the cooling efficiency reduced?
• Check the cooling fin for
clogging and clean it.
Undervoltage The inverter shuts off its output if the E09. Is the power supply voltage
incoming voltage drops below the decreased?
specified level, because the control • Check the power supply.
circuit fails to work properly at such a
Is the power supply capacity suffi-
low incoming voltage. Then, the
cient?
inverter trips if the DC voltage P. 7-69
between P/+2 and N/− exceeds drops • Check the power supply.
to approximately 173 VDC (for 200-V Is there any smooth capacitor
class) or 345 VDC (for 400-V class) or that has deteriorated over time?
lower. • A-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life
Curve on page A-7
Current The inverter trips if an error occurs in E10. The inverter has a defect.
detector error the current detector. −
• Repair it.
CPU error*2 The inverter trips if a malfunction or E11. Is there any large noise source
error occurs in the built-in CPU. around?
• Take measures against noise. −
The inverter has a defect.
• Repair it.
External trip The inverter trips if the multi-function E12. The external equipment has a
input terminal allocated to the Exter- defect.
nal trip (12: EXT) function turns ON. • Check the external equipment.
P. 7-81
Is there any large noise source
around?
• Take measures against noise.
*1. If this error occurs, the inverter will not accept the reset operation via the terminal RS or the STOP/RESET key.
Turn off the power supply once. If this error is still displayed at the next power-on, it is possible that the memory
is corrupt or the parameters are not stored correctly. Perform parameter initialization to reset the parameter
settings.
*2. If this error is still displayed at the next power-on, it is possible that the memory is corrupt or the parameters
are not stored correctly. Perform parameter initialization to reset the parameter settings.

10 Troubleshooting
Alarm Reference
code page
USP error The inverter trips if the power supply E13. Is the power supply turned on
is turned on with the RUN signal ON. with the RUN signal ON?
P. 7-68
(This alarm is displayed only when • Check the RUN command.
the USP function is selected.)
Grounding The inverter trips if a ground fault is E14. Is there any ground fault?
protection*1 detected between the inverter output • Check the output wiring and
unit and the motor when the power the motor.
supply is turned on. (This function
Is there any fault in the inverter
does not work when a residual volt-
itself?
age remains in the motor.)
• Disconnect the output wiring
−
and check it.
Is there any fault in the main cir-
cuit?
• Check the main circuit.
(Refer to Section 11 Mainte-
nance and Inspection.)
Incoming The inverter trips if the incoming volt- E15. Is the incoming voltage too high?
overvoltage age remains in an overload state for • Lower the incoming voltage.
protection 100 seconds. An overvoltage state
• Suppress the power supply
will be detected when DC voltage −
fluctuation.
between P/+2 and N/− is at approxi-
• Install the AC reactor in the
mately 390 VDC (for 200-V class) or
input power circuit.
780 VDC (for 400-V class).
Temperature The Inverter trips if the cooling fin E19. The Inverter is faulty.
detection temperature detection system detects • Repair it. −
error an error such as disconnection.
Abnormal The inverter trips if the temperature in E21. Is the inverter installed vertically?
temperature the main circuit exceeds the specified • Check the installation.
value due to such as high ambient
Is the ambient temperature high?
temperature.
• Decrease the ambient tem-
perature.
Is the cooling fan stopped? −
• Set b092 to Always enabled.
• Check the power supply to
the cooling fan.
Are the cooling fins clogged?
• Clean the fins.
CPU The inverter trips if a malfunction or E22. Is there any large noise source
communication error occurs in the built-in CPU during around?
error communications. • Take measures against noise. −
The inverter is faulty.
• Repair it.
Main circuit The inverter trips if an error occurs in E25. Is there any large noise source
error the main circuit board. around?
• Take measures against noise. −
The inverter is faulty.
• Repair it.
Turn off the power supply once.

6
10 Troubleshooting

Alarm Reference
code page
Analog cur- The Inverter trips if excessive current E26. Is there any short-circuit or incor-
rent input flows through the analog current input rect wiring in the OI wiring?
error terminal OI. • Check the wiring. P. 7-16
P. 7-22
dies
The control circuit board is faulty.
• Repair it.
Driver error*1 This error is detected by the driver IC E30. Is there any output short-circuit? 10
incorporated in the inverter. • Check the output wiring.
The inverter trips to protect the main Is there any ground fault?

element if a momentary overcurrent
• Check the output wiring and
(approximately 350% or higher of the
the motor.
rated current), abnormal temperature
in the main element, or drop of the Is the main element damaged?
P. 11-11
main element drive power supply • Check the IGBT. For the
occurs. (If this trip occurs, the inverter check method, refer to 11-1-7
cannot be restarted.) Inverter/Converter Unit Test
on page 11-10.
Is the cooling fin clogged?
• Clean the fin.
Thermistor The inverter trips if it detects an E35. Is the motor temperature too
error abnormal temperature from the resis- high?
tance value of an external thermistor • Check the temperature.
when the thermistor input function is
Is the thermistor damaged?
enabled. P. 7-82
• Check the thermistor.
Is there any noise in the thermis-
tor signal?
• Separate the wiring.
Brake error The inverter trips if it cannot recognize E36. Is the brake ON/OFF function
the ON/OFF status of the brake within working?
the Brake Error Detection Time • Check the brake.
(b124) after outputting the brake
Is the time set in b124 too short? P. 6-25
release signal, when the brake control
• Increase the b124 value. P. 6-50
function is enabled (b120 = 01).
Is the brake confirmation signal
input?
• Check the wiring.
Emergency The inverter trips if the safety input E37. Are the GS1/GS2 signals input to
shutoff terminal GS1/GS2 are input. the terminal correctly?
• Check the wiring and
sequence. P. 7-103
Is the parameter set correctly?
• Check the GS Input Opera-
tion Selection (b145) setting.
Turn off the power supply once.

10 Troubleshooting
Alarm Reference
code page
Overload The inverter trips if its built-in elec- E38. Is the load too heavy?
protection in a tronic thermal function detects an • Reduce the load rate.
low speed overload in an extremely low speed
range range of 0.2 Hz or lower. (However,
P. 5-15
(Inverter the error history may indicate a high P. 5-59
overload frequency.) P. 6-62
protection) P. 7-35
If the Motor Electronic Thermal Selec- P. 7-78
tion (b910) is set to separate the over-
load protection for the motor and for
the inverter, this function serves as
the inverter overload protection.
Digital The Inverter trips if an error or discon- E40. Is there any communications
Operator nection occurs when it communicates error?
connection with the remote Digital Operator • Check/replace the cable.
failure (Model: 3G3AX-OP01). P. 7-56
This error detection function
is disabled when b165 is set
to 02 (Ignore).
Modbus The inverter trips if a timeout occurs E41. Is the communication speed cor-
communication when the Operation Selection on rect?
error Communication Error (C076) is set to • Check the set value.
00 (Trip).
Is the wiring distance appropri-
ate?
• Check the communications
wires. P. 8-5
Is there any disconnected wire?
• Check the wiring.
Is the terminating resistor setting
correct?
• Check the terminating resis-
tor.
DriveProgramming • Program error (E43. to E45.) E43. For details, refer to the DrivePro-
error • User trip (E50. to E59.) to gramming User's Manual. −
E59.
Option error This error is received from the option E60. For details, refer to the manual
unit. to for the option unit. P. 10-10
E68.
Option timeout The inverter trips if a timeout occurs in E69. No option unit is connected.
communications between the inverter • Check that the housing of the
and the option unit. option unit is mounted prop-
erly with the inverter. Check
also that the fixation screws P. 10-10
are not loosened.
The option unit is faulty.
• The option unit may be faulty
if it is mounted properly.

8
10 Troubleshooting

Alarm Reference
code page
Encoder The inverter trips, when the output fre- E80. The encoder wiring is discon-
disconnection quency is at the Creep Speed Setting nected or connected improperly.
(P015) or higher, if the motor rotation • Check the encoder wiring.
speed detected by the encoder
dies
The actual motor rotation speed
remains lower than the Starting Fre-
remains lower than the Starting
quency (b082) for the duration set in
Frequency (b082) for the duration P. 6-18
the Encoder Disconnection Detection P. 6-28
Time (P077 ≠ 0) or longer.
set in the Encoder Disconnection 10
Detection Time (P077) or longer.
• Adjust the parameter values.

Set a slightly longer time in
P077 and a slightly higher
value in P015.
Overspeed The inverter trips if the motor rotation E81. This alarm is displayed based on
speed exceeds the value set in Maxi- the speed detected by the
mum Frequency  Overspeed Error encoder.
Detection Level (P026 ≠ 0). The encoder wiring is discon-
nected or connected improperly.
• Check the encoder wiring.
The Number of Encoder Pulses
does not match.
• Check the number of
P. 6-18
encoder pulses. (P011) P. 6-28
The actual motor speed is higher
than the error detection level.
• Check load conditions.
• Adjust the setting of Output
Frequency Setting/Monitor
(F001).
• Adjust the setting of Over-
speed Error Detection Level
(P026).
Position The inverter trips if the current posi- E83. Check the current position.
control range tion is out of the range set in the Posi- • Check the parameter settings
trip tion Limit Setting (P072, P073) during (P072, P073).
simple position control. P. 6-34
• Check the parameter settings
(P060 to P067).
• Check the origin.
STO internal This error occurs if a fault is detected E99. Is the safety function operating
fault error in the STO input terminal or the inter- normally?
nal safety circuit of the Inverter. This • Perform a periodic functional
occurs even when the STO function is test. (Refer to 7-10-4 Peri-
not used. odic Inspection on page −
7-104.)
The internal safety circuit is faulty.
• Repair it.

10 Troubleshooting
10-1-3 Option Unit Protective Function List

When an option unit is mounted on the 3G3MX2 Series, the alarm code “E6*.” is displayed if the pro-
tective function is performed on the option unit.
Protective Function Display when EtherCAT Communications Unit

(Model: 3G3AX-MX2-ECT) is Mounted
Alarm code on
Description
Digital Operator
When an unrecoverable error is detected in the option unit, the inverter generates a trip. E60.
The inverter trips if a timeout occurs in communications between the inverter and the
E69.
option unit.
Refer to the “MX2/RX Series EtherCAT Communication Unit User’s Manual (I574)”.

10
10 Troubleshooting

10-1-4 Warning Display
If the set parameter contradicts other set value, the inverter will display a warning with the program LED
blinking.
dies
The table below lists the warning displays and their display conditions. If the warning display appears,
change the parameter setting according to this table. (Inputting the RUN command does not rewrite the
correct parameter value automatically.)
The latest warning display is stored in the parameter d090. 10
Warning display Warning display conditions
10-1-4 Warning Display

1st Frequency Upper Limit (A061)  1st Maximum Frequency (A004)
1st Frequency Lower Limit (A062)  1st Maximum Frequency (A004)
Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001), 1st Maximum Frequency (A004)

1st Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A020)
Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001), 1st Frequency Upper Limit (A061)

1st Frequency Lower Limit (A062) Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001),

Starting Frequency (b082)  1st Frequency Upper Limit (A061)
Starting Frequency (b082)  1st Frequency Lower Limit (A062)
Starting Frequency (b082) Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001),

Starting Frequency (b082)  Jogging Frequency (A038)
Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001), Jump Frequency*1
=
(A063/A065/A067 ± A064/A066/A068)
Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15
=
(A021 to A035)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)  1st Frequency Upper Limit (A061)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)  1st Frequency Lower Limit (A062)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001),

2nd Frequency Upper Limit (A261)  2nd Maximum Frequency (A204)
2nd Frequency Lower Limit (A262)  2nd Maximum Frequency (A204)
Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001), 2nd Maximum Frequency (A204)

2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A220)
Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001), 2nd Frequency Upper Limit (A261)

2nd Frequency Lower Limit (A262) Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001),

Starting Frequency (b082)  2nd Frequency Upper Limit (A261)
Starting Frequency (b082)  2nd Frequency Lower Limit (A262)
Starting Frequency (b082) Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001),

Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001), Jump Frequency *1
2nd Multi-step Speed Reference 0 (A220) =
(A063/A065/A067 ± A064/A066/A068)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)  2nd Frequency Upper Limit (A261)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)  2nd Frequency Lower Limit (A262)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001),

*1. A warning will occur if the frequency set in F001, A020, A220, or A021 to A035 is within the frequency range
set in the frequency jump function.

10 Troubleshooting
10-1-5 Other Indications on Digital Operator
Alarm code on
Name Description
Digital Operator
During reset This indication appears when the input terminal allo- Rotating
cated to the reset (RS) is ON, or when a trip state is
reset via the STOP/RESET key.
Undervoltage standby This indication appears when the inverter is in an

undervoltage standby state, or when the power sup-
ply is shut off.
Restart during This indication appears while restart operation is in
momentary power progress.
interruption/Restart on
trip
Limited RUN command This indication appears when the RUN command is
input from the control terminal, with the RUN direc-
tion limited by the RUN Direction Limit Selection
(b035) setting.
Setting initialization This indication appears while the parameter settings Only left most digit rotating
are initialized.
[ JP]: Pattern 0 setting
[ EU]: Pattern 1 setting Only left most digit rotating
Trip monitor initialization This indication appears while the trip monitor data is Only left most digit rotating
initialized.
No data This indication appears when there is no applicable

data. (This indicates that the fault monitor has no trip
data.)
Communications error This indication appears on the remote Digital Opera- Blinking
tor if an error occurs between a remote Digital Oper-
ator and the Inverter. The indication on the Inverter
does not change.
Auto-tuning OK This indication appears when auto-tuning is com-
pleted normally.
Auto-tuning NG This indication appears when auto-tuning fails.

12
10 Troubleshooting
10-2 Troubleshooting
If you feel that the inverter operation is strange or that the inverter does not operate as intended, use
the following information as a reference, even if the inverter displays no alarm indication.
If the inverter trips with an alarm indication, refer to 10-1 Alarm Display and Remedies on page 10-2.
Symptom Possible cause Remedy

Reference 10
page
The power supply is The short-circuit bar between Install the short-circuit bar, or connect a DC
not turned on. (The the terminal +1 and P/+2 is reactor.
P. 2-12
POWER LED on removed, or no DC reactor is
P. 2-28
the inverter is not connected.
lit.) Input wiring is disconnected. Check the input wiring.
The RUN command The 1st RUN Command Selec- Set the 1st RUN Command Selection (A002)
P. 5-21
is input, but the tion (A002) setting is incorrect. correctly.
motor does not The 1st Frequency Reference Set the 1st Frequency Reference Selection
rotate. Selection (A001) setting is (A001) correctly, then set the frequency
incorrect. according to the selected frequency reference
input method.
The frequency is set to 0 Hz. When the 1st Frequency Reference Selection
(A001) is set to 01 (Control circuit terminal
block), input the analog voltage or current sig-
nal corresponding to the frequency to the ter-
minal O or OI. For details on switching
between the analog voltage and current sig-
P. 5-23
nals, refer to 5-5-1 Frequency Reference
Selection on page 5-23.
When the 1st Frequency Reference Selection
(A001) is set to 02 (Digital Operator), input the
frequency in the Output Frequency Set-
ting/Monitor (F001).
Set the frequency according to the 1st Fre-
quency Reference Selection (A001) setting.
(The input frequency will be displayed in the
Output Frequency Setting/Monitor (F001).)
For the multi-step speed operation, set the
frequency to the Multi-step Speed Reference P. 5-48
0 to 15 (A020 to A035, A220).
No multi-function input termi- To input the RUN command via a multi-func-
nal is allocated for the RUN tion input terminal, set the Multi-function Input
command. 1 to 7 Selection (C001 to C007) to 00 (FW) or
01 (RV). P. 5-47
P. 5-53
To input the RUN command via the 3-wire
input function, set them to 20 (STA), 21
(STP), and 22 (F/R).
The Multi-function Input 1 to Disable the Multi-step speed setting. When
7 Selection (C001 to C007) this setting is enabled, multi-step speed oper-
are set to 02 (CF1) to 05 (CF4) ation is performed, so the motor does not
P. 5-48
and those terminals are ON to rotate if the frequency values in the Multi-step
enable the Multi-step speed Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035) are
setting. 0 (default).
Both the forward and reverse To input the RUN command via the for-
input terminals are ON. ward/reverse input terminal, turn ON either of P. 5-47
them.

10 Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The RUN command The RUN Direction Limit Selec- Set the RUN Direction Limit Selection (b035)
is input, but the tion (b035) is set to limit the for- correctly. P. 7-38
motor does not ward or reverse rotation.
rotate. The input terminal wiring or Wire correctly. (The multi-function input termi- P. 2-12
short-circuit bar connection for nal status can be checked in the Multi-func- P. 2-14
the RUN command is incorrect. tion Input Monitor (d005).) P. 2-36
The analog voltage/current or Wire correctly.
variable resistor input wiring for • For the analog voltage or variable resistor
the frequency reference is input wiring, measure the voltage between
incorrect. the terminals FC and L with a tester etc.
to check that the voltage is correct. P. 2-12
• For the analog current input wiring, with the P. 7-22
wires disconnected, measure the current
flowing between the power supply and OI
terminals with a tester etc. to check that the
current is correct.
Although the inverter is oper- Turn OFF the terminal to which the function is
ated via the Digital Operator, allocated.
the Multi-function Input 1 to
7 Selection (C001 to C007) is P. 7-55
set to 51 (F-TM: Forced termi-
nal block) and that terminal is
ON.
Although the inverter is oper- Turn OFF the terminal to which the function is
ated via the control circuit termi- allocated.
nal block, the Multi-function
Input 1 to 7 Selection (C001 P. 7-55
to C007) is set to 31 (OPE:
Forced operator function) and
that terminal is ON.
The inverter trip occurred. (The Press the STOP/RESET key to reset the trip
ALARM LED is lit with “Exxx” and, after determining the cause and taking P. 5-42
on the display.) countermeasures based on the alarm code, P. 10-2
restart the inverter.
Either the safety input terminal To use the safety function, turn ON both of the
GS1 or GS2 is OFF. safety input terminals GS1 and GS2. To dis-
P. 7-102
able this function, connect GS1 and GS2 to
P24S.
The Multi-function Input 1 to Turn OFF the terminal to which the function is
7 Selection (C001 to C007) is allocated.
set to 18 (RS: Reset), 14 (CS: P. 5-38
P. 5-52
Commercial switching), or 11 P. 7-50
(FRS: Free-run stop) and that
terminal is ON.
The Multi-function Input 1 to Turn ON the terminal to which the function is
7 Selection (C001 to C007) is allocated.
set to 84 (ROK: Permission of P. 7-38
RUN command) and that termi-
nal is ON.
The wiring from the inverter to Check the input wiring.
P. 2-12
the motor, or the internal wiring P. 2-31
of the motor, is disconnected.
The load is too heavy. Reduce the load. −
The motor brake is applied. Release the brake. −

14
10 Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The motor rotation There is a contact failure for the Check the input wiring.
speed does not analog voltage/current or vari- • For the analog voltage or variable resistor
increase. able resistor input wiring. input wiring, measure the voltage between
the terminals FC and L with a tester etc. to
check that the voltage is correct. P. 2-12
• For the analog current input wiring, with the P. 7-22
wires disconnected, measure the current 10
flowing between the power supply and OI
terminals with a tester etc. to check that the
current is correct.
The overload limit or overcur- Disable the function, or increase the level at
P. 7-78
rent suppression function is which the function is activated. P. 7-81
active.
The 1st Maximum Frequency Change the set value.
(A004) or the 1st/2nd Fre- P. 5-20
quency Upper Limit P. 5-30
(A061/A261) is set too low.
The set acceleration time is too Decrease the value set in the 1st/2nd Accel-
P. 5-32
long. eration Time 1/2 (F002/F202/A092/A292).
The Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Turn OFF the terminal to which the function is
Selection (C001 to C007) is set allocated.
P. 5-51
to 06 (JG: Jogging) and that
terminal is ON.
The Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Disable the Multi-step speed setting. (When
Selection (C001 to C007) are this setting is enabled, multi-step speed oper-
set to 02 (CF1) to 05 (CF4) and ation is performed, so the motor runs accord-
P. 5-49
those terminals are ON to ing to the frequency set in the Multi-step
enable the Multi-step speed Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035).)
setting.
The motor brake is applied. Release the brake. −
The Output Fre- The 1st Frequency Reference Set the 1st Frequency Reference Selection
quency Set- Selection (A001) is set to other (A001) to 02 (Digital Operator). P. 5-23
ting/Monitor (F001) than Digital Operator.
cannot be set via The Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Turn OFF the terminal to which the function is
the Digital Operator. Selection (C001 to C007) is set allocated.
to 51 (F-TM: Forced terminal P. 7-55
block) and that terminal is
ON.
The specified The Display Selection (b037) is Set the Display Selection (b037) to 00 (Com-
parameter does not set to 01 (Individual display of plete display).
P. 5-3
appear. functions), 03 (Data compari-
son display), etc.
The Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Turn OFF the terminal to which the function is
Selection (C001 to C007) is set allocated.
P. 7-57
to 86 (DISP: Display fixed)
and that terminal is ON.
The Digital Opera- The Multi-function Input 1 to 7 Turn OFF the terminal to which the function is
tor keys do not Selection (C001 to C007) is set allocated.
P. 7-57
function. to 86 (DISP: Display fixed)
and that terminal is ON.

10 Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The parameter set- The inverter is in operation. Stop the inverter. Then, set the parameters
tings cannot be again after the motor stops with deceleration.
changed. Setting b031 to 10 (Data can be changed −
during RUN) enables parameter settings to be
changed even when the inverter operates.
The soft lock function is Disable the Soft Lock Selection (b031).
P. 7-54
enabled.
The motor rotates in The phase sequence of wiring Reverse the order of two wires connected to
reverse. to the motor is incorrect. (The U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, or change the phase
motor is not designed to rotate sequence to match that of the motor. P. 2-13
forward in the phase sequence:
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3.)
The 3-wire input function is Check the logic of the F/R (3-wire forward/
enabled, but the forward/ reverse) signal allocated to a multi-function P. 5-53
reverse logic is incorrect. input terminal (C001 to C007 = 22).
The motor rotates in The RUN Direction Selection Set the RUN Direction Selection (F004) cor-
reverse when the (F004) setting is incorrect. rectly.
P. 5-21
RUN key is
pressed.
The inverter trips The acceleration time is set too Increase the value set in the 1st/2nd Acceler- P. 5-32
with an Overcur- short. ation Time 1/2 (F002/F202/A092/A292). P. 5-36
rent protection Use the acceleration/deceleration stop func-
(E03) during operation to change the operation pattern to stop P. 7-37
tion. accelerating temporarily.
Use the torque boost function to adjust the
P. 5-59
torque.
Set the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244)
P. 5-8
to 03 (Sensorless vector control) and perform P. 6-3
tuning.
The 1st Overload Limit Selec- Enable the 1st Overload Limit Selection
tion (b021)/1st Overload Limit (b021)/1st Overload Limit Selection 2 (b024).
P. 7-78
Selection 2 (b024) is set to 00
(Disabled).
If an overcurrent trip occurs during operation although the overload limit func-
tion is enabled:
The 1st Overload Limit Level Decrease the 1st Overload Limit Level
(b022)/1st Overload Limit Level (b022)/1st Overload Limit Level 2 (b025) P. 7-78
2 (b025) value is too high. value.
The 2nd Overload Limit Param- Increase the 2nd Overload Limit Parame-
eter/1st Overload Limit Param- ter/1st Overload Limit Parameter 2
P. 7-78
eter 2 (b023/b026) value is too (b023/b026) value.
small.
The STOP/RESET The STOP/RESET key is dis- Set the STOP Key Selection (b087) correctly.
P. 5-41
key does not func- abled.
tion. The Overvoltage Suppression Set the Overvoltage Suppression Function
Function Selection During Selection During Deceleration (b130) to 00
P. 5-62
Deceleration (b130) is enabled. (Disabled), or adjust the level and other set-
tings of the function.
The Deceleration Stop Selec- Set the Deceleration Stop Selection on Power
tion on Power Interruption Interruption (b050) to 00 (Disabled), or adjust P. 7-64
(b050) is enabled. the level and other settings of the function.

16
10 Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The motor or The carrier frequency is too Increase the Carrier Frequency (b083) value.
machine causes a low. However, this may increase noise or leakage
loud noise. current from the inverter. In addition, the out- P. 7-31
put current must be derated depending on the P. A-2
model. For details, refer to A-1 Derating on
page A-2.
The frequency of the motor in Change the frequency setting. If resonance
rotation resonates with the occurs during acceleration/deceleration, use
10
P. 7-36
machine's natural frequency. the frequency jump function settings (A063 to
A068) to avoid the resonance frequency.
The motor is overexcited. Set the 1st/2nd Base Frequency (A003/A203)
and the 1st/2nd Motor Rated Voltage Selec-
tion (A082/A282) according to the motor rat-
ings. If this does not improve the condition, P. 5-8
P. 5-20
decrease the 1st Output Voltage Gain P. 7-41
(A045/A245) slightly. Or set the 1st/2nd Con-
trol Method (A044/A244) to 02 (Free V/f set-
ting) and perform tuning.
The inverter trips The electronic thermal level is Set the 1st Electronic Thermal Level
P. 5-15
with an Overload inappropriate. (b012)/1st Electronic Thermal Characteristics P. 7-74
protection (E05). Selection (b013) to a correct value.
The inverter trips The set deceleration time is too Increase the value set in the 1st/2nd Deceler- P. 5-32
with an Overvolt- short. ation Time 1/2 (F003/F203/A093/A293). P. 5-36
age protection The Overvoltage Suppression Set the Overvoltage Suppression Function
(E07) during decel- Function Selection During Selection During Deceleration (b130) to 01 or
eration. Deceleration (b130) is set to 00 02 to enable the overvoltage suppression
(Disabled). during deceleration function. (However, when
this function is enabled, the actual decelera- P. 5-62
tion time may be longer than the set value.
For details, refer to 5-12-1 Overvoltage Sup-
pression Function during Deceleration on
page 5-62.)
If an overvoltage trip (E07) occurs during deceleration although Overvoltage
Suppression Function Selection During Deceleration (b130) is set to Enable:
The Overvoltage Suppression Change the set values. For details, refer to
Proportional Gain During 5-12-1 Overvoltage Suppression Function
Deceleration (b133)/Overvolt- during Deceleration on page 5-62.
P. 5-62
age Suppression Integral Time
During Deceleration (b134)
value is inappropriate.
The Overvoltage Suppression Decrease the Overvoltage Suppression Level
Level During Deceleration During Deceleration (b131) value. Note, how-
(b131) value is too high. ever, that setting an excessively small value
P. 5-62
may disable deceleration. Consider that the
minimum value is: Incoming voltage  2 
110%.
The inverter trips The Multi-function Input 5 Deallocate the external thermistor function
with a Thermistor Selection is set to 19 (TH: PTC from the terminal TH.
error (E35). thermistor thermal protection) P. 7-82
and 24-VDC voltage is input to
the terminal TH.

10 Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The output fre- The parameter settings are Change the output frequency value slightly
P. 5-23
quency is unstable. inappropriate. away from the power supply frequency.
Change the 1st/2nd Stabilization Parameter
P. 7-52
(H006/H206) value.
The load changes significantly. Increase the motor/inverter capacity. −
The power supply voltage fluc- Take measure to reduce the fluctuation.
−
tuates.
The output torque is The parameter settings are Increase the 1st/2nd Manual Torque Boost
insufficient. inappropriate. Voltage (A042/A242), 1st/2nd Manual Torque P. 5-59
(During acceleration/constant Boost Frequency (A043/A243) value.
speed) Set the 1st/2nd Torque Boost Selection
P. 5-59
(A041/A241) to 01 (Automatic torque boost).
Decrease the Carrier Frequency (b083). P. 7-31
Set the 1st/2nd Control Method (A044/A244)
P. 6-3
to 03 (Sensorless vector control).
The parameter settings are Increase the value set in the 1st/2nd Deceler-
P. 5-32
inappropriate. ation Time 1/2 (F003/F203/A093/A293).
(During deceleration) Set the 1st/2nd AVR Selection (A081/A281) to
P. 7-42
01 or 02 (OFF).
Use braking resistors or regenerative braking
−
units.
Removing the Digi- The Operation Selection at Set the Operation Selection at External Oper-
tal Operator causes External Operator Disconnec- ator Disconnection (b165) to 02 (Ignore).
the inverter to trip, tion (b165) setting is inappro-
P. 7-56
or fall in a free-run priate.
or deceleration stop
state.
The operation/set- Changes are not reflected to After changing the Communication Speed
ting via Modbus the communications parame- Selection (Baud Rate Selection) (C071),
communication is ters. Communication Parity Selection (C074), or
P. 8-5
not possible. Communication Stop Bit Selection (C075),
cycle the power supply, or reset the inverter
(by turning ON to OFF the terminal RS).
The 1st/2nd RUN Command Set the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection
Selection (A002/A202) setting (A002/A202) to 03 (Modbus communication). P. 5-21
is incorrect.
The 1st /2nd Frequency Refer- Set the 1st /2nd Frequency Reference Selec-
ence Selection (A001/A201) tion (A001/A201) to 03 (Modbus communica- P. 5-23
setting is incorrect. tion).
The communications speed Set a correct communications speed in the
setting is incorrect. Communication Speed Selection (Baud Rate P. 8-5
Selection) (C071).
The unit number setting is Set a correct station number in the Communi-
P. 8-5
incorrect or overlaps. cation Station No. Selection (C072).
The communications parity set- Set a correct parity type in the Communica-
P. 8-5
ting is incorrect. tion Parity Selection (C074).
The communications stop bit Set a correct stop bit type in the Communica-
P. 8-5
setting is incorrect. tion Stop Bit Selection (C075).
The wiring is incorrect. Connect the wiring correctly to the terminal
P. 8-4
RS+/RS− on the control circuit terminal block.

18
10 Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The operation/set- Some address setting is incor- • Check that the coil or register address set-
ting via Modbus rect. ting is correct, which is 1 less than the coil
communication is or register No. P. 8-11
not possible. • If the Modbus mapping function is in use, P. 8-24
check if the function settings are correct
and, if necessary, make corrections.
Operating the The leakage current from the Decrease the Carrier Frequency (b083) 10
P. 7-31
inverter activates inverter is too large. value.
the earth leakage Increase the sensitivity current of the earth
breaker. leakage breaker. Or replace the earth leakage
P. 2-25
breaker with one with a higher sensitivity cur-
rent.
The DC injection The DC injection braking power Set the DC Injection Braking Power (A054).
P. 7-93
braking function is not set.
does not work. The DC injection braking time Set the DC Injection Braking Time (A055).
P. 7-93
is not set.
The inverter trips The voltage dropped because Increase the power supply capacity.
with an Undervolt- the power supply capacity is −
age (E09). insufficient.
Noise enters in the The TV or radio is affected by Move the TV or radio as far away as possible
TV or radio located the radiated noise from from the inverter. −
near the inverter. inverter.
An Option error The inverter received an error For details, refer to the manual for the option
−
(E60 to E68) detected in the option unit. unit.
occurred. Inverter fault: The option con- The connector may be faulty if the problem
nector does not work normally. persists even after taking a remedy on the
option unit side. The option connector is not fit −
securely: If the problem persists even after
clearing the contact area, replace the inverter.
An Option error The inverter stops communicat- Check the option connector for loose fitting
(E69) occurred. ing with the option unit after and dirt on terminal contacts.
recognizing it. The option unit is Check that the terminal block cover and the
not mounted securely. −
option unit cover are fit securely on the
inverter and fixed securely with the fixation
screws.
The Modbus mapping endian Set the Modbus Mapping Endian Selection
function setting is inappropri- (P400) to 00 (Big endian). P. 8-29
ate.
The operation/set- The 1st/2nd RUN Command Set the 1st/2nd RUN Command Selection
ting via the option Selection (A002/A202) setting (A002/A202) to 04 (Option). P. 5-21
unit (communica- is incorrect.
tions unit) is not The 1st/2nd Frequency Set the 1st/2nd Frequency Reference Selec-
possible. Reference Selection tion (A001/A201) to 04 (Option).
P. 5-23
(A001/A201) setting is
incorrect.
Some address setting is incor- Check that index/sub-index (for EtherCAT)
−
rect. and Class/Instance settings are correct.
The Modbus mapping function Set the Modbus Mapping Function Selection
P. 8-24
is enabled. (P200) to 00 (Standard Modbus address).

10 Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The CX-Drive can- The CX-Drive version is not To connect the CX-Drive to the 3G3MX2-EV2
P. 3-16
not be connected supported. Series, use Ver. 2.8 or higher.
with the inverter. The inverter software number Set the software number of the connected
P. 3-20
does not match. inverter in the CX-Drive.
The Modbus mapping endian Set the Modbus Mapping Endian Selection
function setting is inappropri- (P400) to 00 (Big endian). P. 8-29
ate.
The inverter does The inverter is in operation. Stop the inverter and, after the motor falls in a
not accept parame- deceleration-stop state, set the parameters
ter settings from the again. Setting b031 to 10 (Data can be
−
CX-Drive. changed during RUN) enables parameter
settings to be changed even when the
inverter is in operation.
The Modbus mapping function Set the Modbus Mapping Function Selection
P. 8-24
is enabled. (P200) to 00 (Standard Modbus address).
The brake control The inverter is in operation with Turn OFF the RUN command to the inverter
function causes an the brake force. when the brake is applied. Even under DC P. 6-25
Overload protec- injection braking, an Overload protection P. 6-50
tion alarm (E05). alarm may occur.
The brake control The output current does not Increase the Brake Release Wait Time (b121)
P. 6-25
function causes a reach the set brake release value or decrease the Brake Release Current P. 6-50
Brake error (E36). current value. (b126).
The brake confirmation signal • Correct the wiring for the brake confirmation
is not input. signal (44: BOK). Deallocate the brake con-
firmation function from the multi-function
input setting. P. 6-25
• Review the operation sequence so that the P. 6-50
brake confirmation signal (44: BOK) is input
after the brake is released.
• Replace the brake if it is faulty.
The brake control The set brake release current is • Increase the Brake Release Current (b126)
function causes the insufficient. value.
load to fall. P. 6-25
• Set the 1st/2nd Control Method P. 6-50
(A044/A244) to 03 (Sensorless vector con-
trol).
The frequency setting for Increase the Brake Release Frequency
P. 6-25
releasing/forcing the brake is (b125), Brake Force Frequency (b127), or P. 6-50
too low. Creep Speed Setting (P015) value.
The PM motor The magnetic pole position of Set the PM Motor Starting Method Selection
rotates during the motor during startup is (H123) to 01 (Initial pole position estimation P. 6-64
startup. incorrect. enabled).
The PM motor The PM motor stalls. Increase the PM Motor Starting Current
causes an Overcur- (H117) value.
rent protection Or perform adjustments according to 6-8-6 P. 6-64
alarm (E03) during Adjustment of PM Motor Mode Settings on
startup. page 6-64.
The load too heavy. Reduce the load. Or increase the accelera-
P. 5-32
tion/deceleration time.

20
11
This section describes the maintenance and periodical inspection items.
11-1 Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................... 11-2

11-1-1 Daily Inspection ................................................................................................. 11-6
11-1-2 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 11-6
11-1-3 Periodic Inspection ............................................................................................ 11-6
11-1-4 Daily/Periodic Inspection Items ......................................................................... 11-7
11-1-5 Megger Test .................................................................................................... 11-10
11-1-6 Withstand Voltage Test ................................................................................... 11-10
11-1-7 Inverter/Converter Unit Test ............................................................................ 11-10
11-1-8 I/O Voltage/Current/Electric Power Measurement Method............................... 11-12

11 Maintenance and Inspection
11-1 Maintenance and Inspection


fire.



CAUTION
11



• The capacitor service life is influenced by the ambient temperature.Refer to "Product Life Curve"
described in the User’s manual. When a capacitor reaches the end of its service life and does not
work as the product, you need to replace the capacitor.

may abruptly start.


Operation Stop Command

• Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is valid only
when function settings are performed.
• The motor may start suddenly if voltage is accidentally applied to a control input terminal in a signal
check when the power supply is ON. Ensure safety when you perform a signal check.
Maintenance and Inspection 11
• Generally speaking, inverters contain components and will operate properly only when each component
operates normally. Some of the electrical components require maintenance depending on application
conditions.Periodic inspection and replacement are necessary to ensure proper long-term operation of
Inverters.
• When a cooling fan reaches the end of its service life, replace it.
Product Disposal
• Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
Dispose of in accordance with WEEE Directive

11-1-1 Daily Inspection

Check the following during operation.
• The motor operates according to the settings.
• There are no faults in the installation environment.
• There are no faults in the cooling system.
• There are no abnormal vibration and sound.
• There are no abnormal overheat and discoloration.
• There is no abnormal odor.
Check the input voltage of the inverter during operation by using a tester or other measuring equip-
ment.
• There is no frequent power supply voltage fluctuation.
• The line voltage is balanced.
11-1-2 Cleaning
Always keep the inverter clean.
Lightly wipe the exterior surfaces of the inverter with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent to
remove dirt.
Do not use solutions such as acetone, benzene, toluene, or alcohol for cleaning. Doing so may cause
the inverter surfaces to dissolve or its coating to come off.
In particular, do not use any detergent or alcohol to clean the Digital Operator display.
11-1-3 Periodic Inspection

Check the parts that must be checked with the operation stopped, as well as those that require periodic
inspection:
• There are no faults in the cooling system.
→ Clean the air filter etc.
• Check for loose screws and retightening.
→ The screws, bolts, and other tightened parts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
change, or other influences. Check these parts carefully and retighten them if necessary.
• Check for corrosion or damage to conductors and insulators.
• Measure the insulation resistance.
• Check the cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, and relay.
• Refer to 7-10-4 Periodic Inspection on page 7-104 for periodic inspections for the safety function.


11-1-4 Daily/Periodic Inspection Items
Inspection
frequency
Inspection Inspection Inspection Periodic
Inspection method Criteria Meter
category item point
Daily
2 years
1 year
General Ambient Check ambient Refer to 2-1 Installation Ambient tempera- Thermometer
environment temperature, on page 2-5. ture: −10 to 50°C, no Hygrometer
humidity, and freezing Recorder
dust.
 Operating humidity: 11
90% max., no con-
densation

Entire Check for Perform visual and No faults
system abnormal vibra-  acoustic inspection.
tion and sound.
Power Check main cir- Measure line voltage Within allowable AC Tester,
supply cuit voltage. between inverter main voltage fluctuation digital
voltage
 circuit terminals R/L1, range multimeter
S/L2, and T/L3.
Main General Perform meg- Disconnect I/O wires 5 M min. 500-VDC
circuit ger check from the inverter main cir- class
(between main cuit terminal block and megger
circuit terminals remove the control circuit
and ground ter- terminal block PCB.
minal). Then, after removing the
short-circuit bar for
switching the inverter
 built-in filter function,
measure using a megger
the resistance between
the ground terminal and
the short-circuited termi-
nals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, P/+,
+1, N/-, and RB.
Check for loose Retighten loose bolts and No faults
bolts and  screws.
screws.
Check each part Perform visual inspec- No faults
for traces of  tion.
overheating.
Conductor/ Check for dis- Perform visual inspec- No faults
wire torted conduc-  tion.
tor.
Check for bro-
ken cable 
sheaths.
Terminal Check for dam- Perform visual inspec- No faults
Blocks age.
 tion.

Inspection
frequency
category item point
Daily
2 years
1 year
Main Inverter Check resis- Disconnect wires from Refer to 11-1-7 Analog
circuit unit tance between the inverter main circuit Inverter/Converter tester
Converter terminals. terminal block and mea- Unit Test on page
unit sure the resistance 11-10.
between the terminals Inverter unit replace-
(including
resistors) 
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and the ment interval:
terminals P/+2, N/−, and
106 start-stop cycles *3
between the terminals
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 and the
terminals P/+2, N/− with a
tester in the 1  range.
Smoothing Check that there Perform visual inspec- No faults Capacity
capacitor *1 is no liquid leak-  tion. meter
age.
Check that the
safety valve
does not come
out and that

there is no
bulge.
Relay Check for chat- Perform acoustic inspec- No faults
tering sound tion.
during opera-

tion.
Check for rough Perform visual inspec- No faults
contact surface.
 tion.
Control Operation Check output Measure the line voltage Phase-to-phase volt- Digital
circuit, check voltage balance between the inverter age balance multimeter
protection between phases main circuit terminals 200-V class: 4 V max. Rectifier
circuit during  U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. 400-V class: 8 V max. Voltmeter
stand-alone
inverter opera-
tion.
Check that there Short-circuit or open the Error is found in the
is no error in inverter protection circuit sequence.
protection and output under simulated
display circuits conditions.
through

sequence pro-
tection function
test.
Cooling Cooling Check for Rotate the fan manually Smooth rotation, no
system fan abnormal vibra-  with the power off. faults *2
tion and sound.
Check for loose Perform visual inspec-
connections.
 tion.
Cooling Check for clog- Perform visual inspec- No clogging
fin ging.
 tion.


Inspection
frequency
category item point
Daily
2 years
1 year
Display Indicator Check that the Perform visual inspec- The LED indicators
LED indicators  tion. are lit.
are lit properly.
Perform clean- Clean it with a waste
ing.
 cloth.
Meter Check indi- Check the indicated val- Specified value, con- Voltmeter,
cated value.  ues on panel meters. trol value ammeter, 11
etc.
Motor General Check for Perform acoustic, sen- No faults

abnormal vibra-  sory, and visual inspec-
tion and sound. tion.
Check for No abnormal odor due to No faults
abnormal odor.  overheating, damage,
etc.
Isolation Perform meg- Disconnect wires from 5 M min. 500-VDC
resis- ger check the inverter main circuit class
tance (between motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, megger
terminals and W/T3 and short-circuit
ground termi- 
the 3-phase motor wires.
nal). Then, use a megger to
measure the resistance
between each motor wire
and the ground terminal.
*1. The capacitor service life is influenced by the ambient temperature.
For the inverter replacement guideline, refer to A-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve on page A-7.
*2. The life of the cooling fan depends on environmental conditions, such as the ambient temperature and/or dust.
Check the operating conditions in daily inspection.

11-1-5 Megger Test

Before performing a megger test on external circuits, be sure to disconnect all the terminals of the
inverter and not to apply the test voltage to the inverter. Use a 500 VDC megger for a megger test.
For a megger test on the inverter main circuit, short-circuit the terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, RB, +1, P/+2, and N/− with wires, as shown below.
Because the insulation resistance rating of the single inverter unit is 5 M or higher, it is normal if the
resistance is 5 M or higher.
• For the inverter, do not perform a megger test on the control circuit. Perform it only on the main cir-
cuit.
• Use a tester (in a high resistance range) for a power-on test on the control circuit. Do not use a meg-
ger or buzzer.
11-1-6 Withstand Voltage Test

Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter.
Doing this test is dangerous because it may cause damage to or deterioration of the parts inside the
inverter.
11-1-7 Inverter/Converter Unit Test

Use the following procedure to check conditions of the inverter and converter units by using a tester.
Preparation
1 Disconnect the externally connected power supply wires (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), the motor
connection wires (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3), and the regenerative braking resistance (P/+, RB).
2 Prepare a tester. Use the 1  resistance measurement range.


Test Method
Measure the resistance at the inverter main circuit terminals block R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
RB, P/+2, and N/− by alternating the polarity of the tester to judge the conduction state.
• Before starting the test, measure the voltage between P/+2 and N/− in the DC voltage range to check
that the smoothing capacitor is sufficiently discharged.
• The tester will show nearly infinite resistance in a no-conduction state. (With conduction, the tester
will show a resistance from a few  to several tens of .)
However, it may not show infinite resistance if a momentary conduction is detected due to the influ-
ence of the smoothing capacitor.
The inverter or converter unit is in good condition if the measured value for each item in the following
table is nearly equal, although it does not match exactly because of the element type, tester type, and
11
so on.
11-1-7 Inverter/Converter Unit Test

Tester polarity Measurement Tester polarity Measurement
+ (Red) − (Black) result + (Red) − (Black) result
R/L1 +1 No conduction U/T1 P/+ No conduction
D1 TR1
+1 R/L1 Conduction P/+ U/T1 Conduction
S/L2 +1 No conduction V/T2 P/+ No conduction
D2 TR2
+1 S/L2 Conduction P/+ V/T2 Conduction
T/L3 +1 No conduction W/T3 P/+ No conduction
D3 TR3
Converter +1 T/L3 Conduction Inverter P/+ W/T3 Conduction
unit R/L1 N/− Conduction unit U/T1 N/− Conduction
D4 TR4
N/− R/L1 No conduction N/− U/T1 No conduction
S/L2 N/− Conduction V/T2 N/− Conduction
D5 TR5
N/− S/L2 No conduction N/− V/T2 No conduction
T/L3 N/− Conduction W/T3 N/− Conduction
D6 TR6
N/− T/L3 No conduction N/− W/T3 No conduction
RB P/+ No conduction
Regenerative P/+ RB Conduction
TR7
braking unit RB N/− No conduction
N/− RB No conduction

11-1-8 I/O Voltage/Current/Electric Power Measurement Method

Measuring instruments commonly used for input/output voltage, current, or electric power measure-
ment are shown below.
IR WI1 IU WO1
ER Inverter EU
Power S IS WI2 S V IV V Motor
supply
ES EV
T W
IT WI3 T W IW WO2
ET EW
Measurement Measurement
Measurement point Measuring instrument Remarks
item value reference
Between R/L1 and S/L2 (ER) All 200-V class: 200 to 240 V,
Power Moving-iron voltmeter
supply Between S/L2 and T/L3 (ER) effective 50/60 Hz
voltage or rectifier type voltme-
values 400-V class: 380 to 480 V,
EIN Between T/L3 and R/L1 (ER) ter
50/60 Hz
Power Current in R/L1, S/L2 All When input current is not
supply T/L3: (IR), (IS), (IT) effective balanced:
current Moving iron ammeter
IIN values IIN = (IR + IS + IT) / 3
Input Between R/L1 and S/L2 (WI1) All Three-wattmeter method
electric Electrodynamic watt- effective
power Between S/L2 and T/L3 (WI2) (WI1) + (WI2) + (WI3)
meter values
WIN Between T/L3 and R/L1 (WI3)
Calculate this from the measured values of power supply voltage EIN,
Input power supply current IIN, and input electric power WIN.
power
factor −
PfIN
Between U/T1 and V/T2 (EU) Effective

Output Refer to the figure on
Between V/T2 and W/T3 (EV) value of
voltage the next page. (Or recti- −
EOUT fundamental
Between W/T3 and U/T1 (EW) fier type voltmeter)
wave
Output Current (IU), (IV), (IW) of All
current U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Moving iron ammeter effective −
IOUT values
Output Between U/T1 and V/T2 (WO1) All Two-wattmeter method (or
Electrodynamic watt-
power Between V/T2 and W/T3 (WO2) effective three-wattmeter method)
WOUT meter
values (WO1) + (WO2)
Calculate this from the measured values of output voltage EOUT, out-
Output put current IOUT, and output electric power WOUT.
power
factor −
PfOUT
Note 1. For the output voltage, use a measuring instrument that shows effective values of fundamental wave.
For the current and the electric power, use a measuring instrument that shows all effective values.
2. The output waveform of the inverter has a margin of error, especially at low frequencies, because it was
generated under PWM control. Note that many general-purpose testers may not be usable due to noise.


Inverter
S V Motor
T W
Diode 2 W 220 kW
600 V 0.1 A min. (200-V class)
1000 V 0.1 A min. (400-V class) +
VDC
Moving coil type 11
− 300 V (200-V class)
VAC = 1.1  VDC
600 V (400-V class)
11-1-8 I/O Voltage/Current/Electric Power Measurement Method


12 Options
Options
12
This section describes the specifications and external dimension of optional equipment.
12-1 Overview of Optional Equipment ................................................................... 12-1

12-1-1 Part Names and Descriptions .............................................................................. 12-1
12-10 Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01) ................................................................12-4
12-10-1 Specifications ................................................................................................... 12-4
12-10-2 External Dimensions ........................................................................................ 12-5
12-11 Digital Operator Cable (Model: 3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE).....................................12-6
12-11-1 Specifications.....................................................................................................12-6
12-11-2 External Dimensions ..........................................................................................12-6
12-12 EtherCAT Communications Unit (Model: 3G3AX-MX2-ECT) ....................... 12-7
12-12-1 Specifications.....................................................................................................12-7
12-12-2 External Dimensions ..........................................................................................12-8

12 Options
12-1 Overview of Optional Equipment
12-1 Overview of Optional Equipment

This section provides an overview of the optional equipment available with the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series
Inverter. For details and selection, refer to the inverter datasheet
DC Reactor (Model: 3G3AX-RC)/AC Reactor

(Model: 3G3AX-RAI)
Use these reactors to suppress harmonics generated from the inverter.

The AC reactor is used when the power supply voltage unbalance factor is 3% or more, the inverter is
much smaller than the supply, or unstable power supply voltage is present.
The DC/AC reactor also has an effect of improving the power factor by reducing harmonics and total
reactive power consumption.
For details, refer to 2-3-4 Wiring for Main Circuit Terminals on page 2-17 and Harmonic Current Mea-
sures and DC/AC Reactor Wiring (+1, P/2) on page 2-28.
Output AC Reactor (Model: AX-RAO)
Use this filter to reduce the conductive disturbance generated by inverter conmutation voltages and the
problems caused by long motor cables.
For details, refer to Installing output noise filter on page 2-32.
Radio Noise Filter chokes (Model: AX-FER)
Use this filter to reduce the radiated noise generated in the inverter and emitted from the power-supply
line side and motor side wires.
For details, refer to Measures against radio noise on page 2-33.

12 Options
EMC Noise Filter (Model: 3G3AX-FIC)

Use this filter to reduce the conductive noise generated in the inverter and transmitted to power supply
lines for compliance with European EU Directives.
For information on EMC noise filters that support the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter, contact your
OMRON sales representative.
Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01)/

Digital Operator Cable (Model: 3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE)
In addition to the Digital Operator as standard equipment, the following Digital Operator products are
also available.
Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01)

This LED Digital Operator has a volume control to adjust frequency reference.
EtherCAT Communications Unit (Model: 3G3AX-MX2-ECT)

This option unit can control the inverter via EtherCAT communications.
For details, refer to “MX2/RX Series EtherCAT Communication Unit User's Manual (I574).”

12 Options
12-2 Digital Operator

(Model: 3G3AX-OP01)
12-11-1 Specifications
3G3AX-OP01
Item Specifications
Display LED digital display
External Dimensions 55 (H)  70 (W)  10 (D) mm
Weight 100 g max.
Operating ambient temperature −10 to 50°C
Operating ambient humidity 20% to 90% (with no condensation)
Storage ambient temperature −20 to 65°C
Location At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m (without corrosive gases or dust)
Others Built-in volume control for frequency setting

12 Options
12-11 Digital Operator (Model: 3G3AX-OP01)

3G3AX-OP01
12

12 Options
12-3 Digital Operator Cable (Model:

3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE)
Item Specifications
Connector RJ45 connector
Cable EIA568-compliant cable (UTP category 5)
Model Cable length [m]

3G3AX-CAJOP300-EE 3

12 Options
12-13 EtherCAT Communications Unit (Model:

12-4 EtherCAT Communications Unit
(Model: 3G3AX-MX2-ECT)
3G3AX-MX2-ECT)
Item Specifications
General Power supply Supplied from inverter
specifications Enclosure rating IP20
Operating ambient −10 to 50°C
temperature
Storage ambient −20 to 65°C
temperature 12
Operating ambient 20% to 90% (with no condensation)
humidity
Vibration resistance 5.9 m/s2 (0.6 G), 10 to 55 Hz
Location At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m, indoors (without corrosive
gases or dust)
Weight 100 g max. (Shipping weight: Approx. 130g)
EC Directives EMC Directive: EN61800-3
Low Voltage Directive: EN61800-5-1
UL/cUL Standard UL 508C
EtherCAT Communications IEC 61158 Type12, IEC 61800-7 CiA 402 drive profile
Communication standard
specifications Physical layer 100BASE-TX (IEEE802.3)
Connector RJ45  2 (shielded type)
ECAT IN: EtherCAT input
ECAT OUT: EtherCAT output
Communications media Category 5 or higher (cable with double, aluminum tape and
braided shielding) is recommended.
Communications Distance between nodes: 100 m max.
distance
Process data Fixed PDO mapping
PDO mapping
Mailbox (CoE) Emergency messages, SDO requests, SDO responses, and SDO
information
Distributed clock Free-run mode (asynchronous)
LED display L/A IN (Link/Activity IN)  1
L/A OUT (Link/Activity OUT)  1
RUN  1
ERR  1
CiA402 drive profile Velocity mode

12 Options

Status indicator Rotary switch for node
address setting
67.6 44.9
28.6
60.0
27.9
FG cable
53.1
Communications
connector (IN) Communications 34mm*1
10.3 10.3 connector (OUT) D*1
28.2
FG cable
*1. With the EtherCAT Communication Unit mounted, dimension D of the inverter increases by 34 mm.
(Dimension D of the inverter varies depending on the capacity. Refer to 1-3-2 External Dimensions on page
1-17).

Appendices
This section provides information on derating, capacitor life curve, compliance with the
UL/cUL Standards, and inverter selection. A
A-1 Derating ............................................................................................................. A-2

A-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-3 Life Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-4 UL/cUL Standards Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A-5 Overview of Inverter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) A-1

Appendices
A-1 Derating
If you intend to use the inverter models with “Yes” in the column “Derating” of the following table at an
ambient temperature of 40°C or higher, or to use more than one inverter installed next to each other
(side-by-side installation), you need to derate the output current as shown in the graphs below. (The
ambient temperature specification for side-by-side installation is −10 to 40°C.)
In the 1st/2nd Electronic Thermal Level (b012/b212), set the output current value to be derated. For
details on the electronic thermal level, refer to 5-3-2 Electronic Thermal Function on page 5-15.
Necessity of Derating
Rated voltage Model Derating

3-phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2-A2001-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A2002-EV2 Yes
3G3MX2-A2004-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A2007-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A2015-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A2022-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A2055-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A2075-EV2 No
Single-phase 200 VAC 3G3MX2-AB001-EV2 No
3G3MX2-AB002-EV2 No
3G3MX2-AB004-EV2 Yes
3G3MX2-AB007-EV2 Yes
3G3MX2-AB015-EV2 No
3G3MX2-AB022-EV2 No
3-phase 400 VAC 3G3MX2-A4004-EV2 Yes
3G3MX2-A4015-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A4022-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A4030-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A4055-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A4075-EV2 No
3G3MX2-A4110-EV2 No
Note Yes: Derating is necessary, No: Derating is Not necessary
For the inverter models with “No” in the column “Derating” of the above table, setting is not necessary to
derate the output current. Use the inverter within the range of the rated specifications.
A-2 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Appendices
Models for Which Derating is Not Necessary
A-1 Derating
A
Models for Which Derating is Necessary
Standard installation (Stand-alone installation) at 40°C
Side-by-side installation at 40°C
Standard installation (Stand-alone installation) at 50°C
⚫ 3G3MX2-A2002-EV2

Appendices
⚫ 3G3MX2-AB004-EV2
⚫ 3G3MX2-AB007-EV2
⚫ 3G3MX2-A4007-EV2

Appendices
⚫ 3G3MX2-A2037-EV2
A-1 Derating
⚫ 3G3MX2-A4040-EV2 A
⚫ 3G3MX2-A2110-EV2

Appendices
⚫ 3G3MX2-A2150-EV2
⚫ 3G3MX2-A4150-EV2

Appendices
A-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve
A-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve

Note 1. “Ambient temperature” refers to the temperature measured at a distance of approximately 5 cm from the A
bottom center of the inverter (atmospheric temperature).
It refers to an interior temperature if the inverter is stored in a cabinet.
2. The smoothing capacitor has a limited life because it is subjected to chemical reaction inside the part
and, as a guide, the inverter needs to be replaced once a decade approximately. (This period is an
expected design life, and not the guaranteed value.)
However, if the Inverter is used at a high ambient temperature or in a heavy load environment such as
at the over-rated current, its life will be significantly shortened.

Appendices
A-3 Life Alarm Output

The inverter can output an alarm by the self-diagnostic function when the service life of each consum-
able part incorporated in the inverter such as on-board smoothing capacitors and cooling fans (except
for the main circuit smoothing capacitor) comes close to the end. Use this as a guide to know the time
for the parts replacement.
Note that this alarm is output by the self-diagnosis based on the expected design life (not guaranteed
value). It has a margin of error depending on your environment or operation conditions.
For details, refer to 7-1-18 Life Assessment Monitor [d022] on page 7-11, 7-2-2 Multi-function Output
Selection on page 7-20, and 5-10-2 Multi-function Output Operation Selection on page 5-54.

Appendices
A-4 UL/cUL Standards Cautions

This section describes the inverter installation procedures required to meet UL/cUL standards.
Applicable Standards:UL61800-5-1, CSA C22.2 No.274
• Use 60°C Cu wire only.

(For models: 3G3MX2-AB001-EV2, -AB002-EV2, -AB004-EV2, -AB007-EV2, -AB015-EV2,
-A2001-EV2, -A2002-EV2, -A2004-EV2, -A2007-EV2, -A2015-EV2, -A4004-EV2, -A4007-EV2,
-A4015-EV2, -A4022-EV2, -A4030-EV2 and -A4040-EV2)
• Use 75°C Cu wire only.
(For models: 3G3MX2-AB022-EV2, -A2022-EV2, -A2037-EV2, -A2055-EV2, -A2075-EV2,
-A2110-EV2, -A2150-EV2, -A4055-EV2, -A4075-EV2, -A4110-EV2, and -A4150-EV2)
• Protected by appropriate fuses and suitable for use on a circuit with a maximum voltage of 240V or
480V capable of delivering not more than 100kA or 5kA rms. Refer to the table below for applicable
fuses.
• Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit
protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electric Code, and any additional local
codes. Follow Canadian Electric Code Part 1 for Canada. A
• The electronic thermal function is effective for motor overload protection. Refer to 7-8-2 Motor Elec-
tronic Thermal Function on page 7-74 for the protection level (electronic thermal level) and appropri-
ate parameter settings. To comply with the standards, set the Electronic Thermal Load Rate Memory
Selection at Power-off (b914) to 01 (Enabled).
Environmental conditions
Item Condition
Maximum Surrounding temperature 50°C
Storage temperature -20°C to 65°C (in transport)
Installation conditions Pollution degree 2, Overvoltage Category III
Wiring requirements Please select a fuse according to this instruction manual.
Refer to 2-3 Wiring on page 2-12 for wiring of the main circuit and
control circuit.

Appendices
Terminal Symbols and Screw Size
Required
Model No. Screw size Wire range
torque [N•m]
3G3MX2-AB001-EV2, 3G3MX2-AB002-EV2,
M3.5 1.0 AWG16 (1.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-AB004-EV2
3G3MX2-AB007-EV2 M4 1.4 AWG12 (3.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-AB015-EV2, 3G3MX2-AB022-EV2 M4 1.4 AWG10 (5.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-A2001-EV2, 3G3MX2-A2002-EV2,
M3.5 1.0 AWG16 (1.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-A2004-EV2, 3G3MX2-A2007-EV2
3G3MX2-A2015-EV2 M4 1.4 AWG14 (2.1 mm2)
3G3MX2-A2022-EV2 M4 1.4 AWG12 (3.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-A2037-EV2 M4 1.4 AWG10 (5.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-A2055-EV2, 3G3MX2-A2075-EV2 M5 3.0 AWG6 (13 mm2)
3G3MX2-A2110-EV2 M6 3.9 to 5.1 AWG4 (21 mm2)
3G3MX2-A2150-EV2 M8 5.9 to 8.8 AWG2 (34 mm2)
3G3MX2-A4004-EV2, 3G3MX2-A4007-EV2,
M4 1.4 AWG16 (1.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-A4015-EV2
3G3MX2-A4022-EV2, 3G3MX2-A4030-EV2 M4 1.4 AWG14 (2.1 mm2)
3G3MX2-A4040-EV2 M4 1.4 AWG12 (3.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-A4055-EV2, 3G3MX2-A4075-EV2 M5 3.0 AWG10 (5.3 mm2)
3G3MX2-A4110-EV2, 3G3MX2-A4150-EV2 M6 3.9 to 5.1 AWG6 (13 mm2)
A - 10 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Appendices
Fuse Size
For conformance to UL standards, use the fuses shown in the table below on the power supply side.
• Semiconductor Fuse (for SCCR ≤ 100kA)
Rated

Model No. MODE Fuse Type Fuse Model
current
VT Manufacturer:
3G3MX2-AB001-EV2 FWH-10A14F 10A
CT Eaton
VT Series:
3G3MX2-AB002-EV2 FWH-15A14F 15A
CT
Cooper
VT
3G3MX2-AB004-EV2 Bussmann LLC FWH-15A14F 15A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-AB007-EV2 FWH-60B 60A
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT A
3G3MX2-A2001-EV2 FWH-10A14F 10A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2002-EV2 FWH-15A14F 15A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2004-EV2 FWH-15A14F 15A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2007-EV2 FWH-25A14F 25A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2015-EV2 FWH-25A14F 25A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2022-EV2 FWH-60B 60A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2037-EV2 FWH-60B 60A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2055-EV2 FWH-150B 150A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2075-EV2 FWH-150B 150A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2110-EV2 FWH-200B 200A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2150-EV2 FWH-200B 200A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4004-EV2 FWH-15A14F 15A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4007-EV2 FWH-25A14F 25A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4015-EV2 FWH-25A14F 25A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4022-EV2 FWH-25A14F 25A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4030-EV2 FWH-25A14F 25A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4040-EV2 FWH-25A14F 25A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4055-EV2 FWH-60B 60A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4075-EV2 FWH-60B 60A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4110-EV2 FWH-150B 150A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4150-EV2 FWH-150B 150A
CT
Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) A - 11

Appendices
• Non-Semiconductor Fuse (for SCCR ≤ 5kA)
Rated Rated
Model No. MODE Fuse Type
voltage current
VT
3G3MX2-AB001-EV2 CT Class J, CC, G, T 600VAC 3A
VT
3G3MX2-AB002-EV2 CT 6A
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
3G3MX2-A2001-EV2 CT 3A
VT
3G3MX2-A2002-EV2 CT 6A
VT
3G3MX2-A2004-EV2 CT 10A
VT
3G3MX2-A2007-EV2 15A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2015-EV2 CT 15A
VT
3G3MX2-A2022-EV2 CT 20A
VT
3G3MX2-A2037-EV2 CT 30A
VT
3G3MX2-A2055-EV2 Class J, G, T 600VAC 60A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A2075-EV2 CT 60A
VT
3G3MX2-A2110-EV2 CT Class J, T 600VAC 80A
VT
3G3MX2-A2150-EV2 CT 100A
VT
3G3MX2-A4004-EV2 CT Class J, CC, G, T 600VAC 6A
VT
3G3MX2-A4007-EV2 CT 10A
VT
3G3MX2-A4015-EV2 CT 10A
VT
3G3MX2-A4022-EV2 CT 10A
3G3MX2-A4030-EV2 VT 15A
CT
VT
3G3MX2-A4040-EV2 CT 15A
VT
3G3MX2-A4055-EV2 CT 30A
VT
3G3MX2-A4075-EV2 CT 30A
VT
3G3MX2-A4110-EV2 CT Class J, G, T 600VAC 50A
VT
3G3MX2-A4150-EV2 CT 50A

Appendices
A-5 Overview of Inverter Selection
Motor Capacity Selection • Example in conveyor application
Before selecting an inverter, first the motor should be chosen. In

selecting the motor, calculate the load inertia appropriate to the

application, and then calculate the required capacity and torque.
 Simplified Selection Method (Required Output Calculation)

This method of calculation helps you select a motor by
calculating the output (kW) required by the motor to maintain
its steady rotations. To use this method for motor selection,

JW : Shaft conversion inertia (Cylinder-1-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
make allowance for the calculated result because it does not
J1 : Inertia of cylinder 1 (Cylinder-1-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
include acceleration/deceleration and other transient state
calculations. The simplified selection method is suitable for J2 : Inertia of cylinder 2 (Cylinder-1-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
fan, conveyor, mixer, and other applications where a constant J3 : Inertia of workpiece (Cylinder-1-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
state continues for a while. J4 : Inertia of belt (Cylinder-1-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
* The simplified selection method cannot be used for the M1 : Mass of cylinder 1 [kg]
following applications. For these applications, use the detailed M2 : Mass of cylinder 2 [kg]
selection method. M3 : Mass of workpiece [kg]
• Those requiring rapid startup (acceleration). M4 : Mass of belt [kg]
• Those that frequently repeat run and stop. D1 : Diameter of cylinder 1 [mm] A
• Those that have a large inertia at the power transfer part.
D2 : Diameter of cylinder 2 [mm]
• Those that have an inefficient power transfer part.
• Example in roller application

 For linear motion: Steady power P0 [kW]
* The same calculating formula is applicable to belt conveyors. JW : Shaft conversion inertia (Roller-1-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
J1 : Inertia of roller 1 (Roller-1-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
 For rotation motion: Steady power P0 [kW]
J2 : Inertia of roller 2 (Roller-2-shaft conversion) [kg·m2]
M : Mass of workpiece [kg]
D1 : Diameter of roller 1 [mm]
D2 : Diameter of roller 2 [mm]
• Example of conversion into motor-shaft inertia
 Detailed Selection Method (RMS Calculation)

This method helps you select a motor by calculating the effective torque and maximum
torque values required to achieve a certain pattern of operation for the application. It
selects a motor that is optimal for a particular operation pattern.
 Calculation of load inertia and motor-shaft conversion inertia Depending on the type of
the motor transfer system, calculate the inertia for all parts and convert it into
the motor-shaft inertia.
• Example in hoist application

Appendices
 Calculation of motor-shaft conversion torque and effective torque
Calculate the acceleration torque from the motor-shaft conver-

sion load inertia, the motor-rotor inertia, and the acceleration.
Then, calculate the load torque from the external force (gravity
and tension) and friction force applied to the load. Finally,
combine these calculation results to calculate the torque
required for the motor.
• Calculation of acceleration torque (TA)

Appendices
Overview of Braking Resistor Selection  Simplified Braking Resistor Selection

This is a simple method to select an appropriate braking resistor
 Requirement of Braking Resistor based on the percentage of the time in which regenerative energy
If the regenerative energy generated in deceleration or is produced in a normal operation pattern.
descent in an application is too large, the main circuit voltage
[r/min]
in the inverter may increase, which results in damage to the
Rotation speed
inverter.
Normally, the inverter has a built-in overvoltage protection

Time
function, which detects an overvoltage (0 V) in the main
circuit to prevent inverter damage. However, because it
detects a fault to stop the motor, stable and continuous
operation will be prevented. • Usage rate [%ED] = 100 x t/T
Therefore, you need to use one or more braking resistors/ t: Deceleration time (regenerative time) [s]
regenerative braking units to absorb this regenerative energy T: 1cycle operation time [s]
outside the inverter.
 For models with built-in regenerative braking circuit
 What is Regenerative Energy?
All models of the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter have built-
The load connected to a motor has kinetic energy when
in regenerative braking circuit.
rotating, and potential energy when it is subject to the gravity.
Select a braking resistor based on the usage rate
When the motor decelerates, or when the load descends, the
calculated from the operation pattern.
energy is fed back to an inverter. This phenomenon is known
Connect a braking resistor suitable for your inverter
as regeneration, and the energy is called regenerative
according to the braking resistor list provided in the
energy.
inverter manual/catalog. A
Kinetic energy  For models without built-in regenerative braking circuit

Potential energy
If a braking torque or regenerative energy is extremely
large, even the 3G3MX2-EV2 Series Inverter may
Regenerative
energy
When decelerating, the motor serves require the Regenerative Braking Unit.
as a generator to convert the kinetic/
potential energy into regenerative energy. Select an appropriate regenerative braking unit and
braking resistor.
 Preventing an overvoltage (0 V) in the main circuit without use
Connect a regenerative braking unit and braking resistor
of braking resistors suitable for your inverter according to the regenerative
The following are methods to prevent the occurrence of an braking unit/braking resistor list provided in the inverter
overvoltage (0 V) in the main circuit without connection of manual and catalog.
braking resistors.
Since these methods prolong the deceleration time, check
that the selected method will not cause application problems.
• Enable the Overvoltage Suppression Function during

Deceleration
The Overvoltage Suppression Function during Deceleration
is enabled by default.
It automatically increases the deceleration time to prevent
the occurrence of an overvoltage in the main circuit.
• Set a longer deceleration time

Increase the deceleration time to prevent the occurrence of
an overvoltage in the main circuit.
This decreases the amount of regenerative energy per unit
time.
• Select free-run stop

This prevents the regenerative energy from being fed back
to the inverter.

Appendices
Detailed Braking Resistor Selection  Braking Resistor Selection
When the usage rate of the braking resistor selected on Select a braking resistor from the required braking resistance
the previous page exceeds 10% ED, or when an and the average regenerative energy described on the left
extremely large braking torque is required, use the section.
method below to calculate a regenerative energy and
• Required braking resistance ≥ Resistance of braking
make your selection.
resistor ≥ Min. connection resistance of inverter or
 Calculation of Required Braking Resistance regenerative braking unit
Speed • Average regenerative energy ≤ Resistance capacity of
braking resistor
Note) 1. Connecting a braking resistor whose resistance is less than the

minimum connection resistance value of the inverter or regenerative
Time
Torque braking unit results in damage to the internal braking transistor. If the
required braking resistance is less than the minimum connection
resistance, change the inverter or regenerative braking unit to one
having a larger capacity and ensure that the required braking
resistance is not less than the minimum connection resistance.
2. Two or more regenerative braking units can be connected in parallel.
Refer to the following formula to know the braking resistance value in
such a case: Braking resistance [] = (Required braking resistance
calculated as above) x (No. of units)
3. Make allowance for the resistance capacity of the braking resistor.
Select a braking resistor whose capacity is at least 20% larger than
the calculated value. Otherwise, it may be overheated.
Note: Calculate a braking torque according to Inverter Capacity Selection in

the Motor Capacity Selection section.
 Calculation of average regenerative energy

Regenerative energy is produced when the motor
rotation and the torque are opposite in direction.
Use the following formula to calculate the regenerative
energy for each period in a cycle.
Speed
For horizontal load P : Regenerative energy in Period
1 [J]
N: Motor rotation speed [r/min]
When the number of rotations
changes, take an average
value.
Torque For linear deceleration
Time (N max+N min)/2
Period 2
Period 1 T: Deceleration torque [N·m]
t: Deceleration time [s]
• For the average regenerative

Speed
energy, calculate the time
For vertical load
average by adding the
regenerative energy for all
periods in a cycle and dividing it
by the cycle time, as shown
below.
Torque Average regenerative energy [W] =
Time
Period 1 Period 3
Period 2 1 cycle time [s]
Note) 1. For Speed, the forward rotation direction is indicated as

positive. For Torque, the torque in the forward rotation direction
is indicated as positive.
2. Calculate a braking torque according to Inverter Capacity
Selection in the Motor Capacity Selection section.

Index
Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) I-1

Index
Index
Numerics D
2nd Control ......................................................................5-7 Data comparison display ..................................................5-4

2nd Control Function ..................................................... 7-33 DB..................................................................................7-93
2nd control selection signal ............................................7-92 DC Injection Braking ........................................... 7-93, 7-96
DC reactor ........................................................... 2-18, 12-3
A DC Reactor Connection Terminals ..............................12-24
DC Voltage Monitor ........................................................7-15
AC reactor ........................................................... 2-18, 12-3 Derating .........................................................................7-31
ADD .............................................................................. 7-39 Digital Operator ............................................ 3-5, 5-25, 12-4
AHD .............................................................................. 7-24 Disconnection detection .................................................7-90
Alarm code .....................................................................10-4 DISP ..............................................................................7-57
Alarm output...................................................................2-24 Display fixed ..................................................................7-57
AM ....................................................................... 2-14, 7-29 Display Selection .............................................................3-7
Ambient temperature........................................................2-7 Dual user monitor ..........................................................7-13
Amount of Heat Generated ............................................. 2-8 DWN ..............................................................................7-40
Analog Command Hold Function ...................................7-24
Analog current input .......................................................5-26 E
Analog input ...................................................................7-22
Analog input adjustment.................................................7-25
Analog Input Filter ..........................................................7-24 EA.................................................................................. 2-16
Analog voltage input ......................................................5-26 Earth leakage breaker ...................................................2-25
Automatic Carrier Reduction ......................................... 7-32 EDM.............................................................................7-102
Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function ............... 7-50 EDM function selector switch ............................ 2-10, 7-102
Automatic Torque Boost ................................................ 5-60 Electronic Thermal Characteristics .................................5-17
Electronic thermal level..................................................5-15
B Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor ...........................7-16
EMC Noise Filter ................................................. 2-25, 12-4
EMC standard ................................................................2-47
Base frequency ..............................................................5-20
End frequency................................................................7-25
Braking Resistor .................................................. 2-18, 12-3
End ratio ........................................................................7-26
Enter key..........................................................................3-6
C
EtherCAT Communications Unit ....................................12-4
EXT................................................................................7-81
Cable length .................................................................. 2-33
External braking resistor connection terminal.................2-34
Cable size ..................................................................... 2-22
External DC injection braking.........................................7-94
Capacitor life warning signal ..........................................7-86
External trip....................................................................7-81
Carrier Frequency ..........................................................7-31
Clear fault monitor............................................................5-7
F
Commercial switching ................................................... 7-50
Communication disconnection detection signal ............. 7-87
FA2 to FA5 .....................................................................7-83
Complete display .............................................................5-3
Fatal fault signal.............................................................7-89
Constant torque characteristics ....................5-8, 5-15, 5-18
Fault Counter .................................................................7-14
Control circuit terminal ...................................................2-36
Fault Monitor ..................................................................7-15
Control circuit terminal block ............................... 2-14, 2-37
FBV................................................................................7-49
Cooling fan life warning signal ...................................... 7-87
Feedback Selection .......................................................7-47
Cooling Fan Operation ...................................................7-86
Fin Temperature Monitor ................................................7-10
Cooling Fin Overheat Warning .......................................7-88
Forced operator function ................................................7-55
Crimp terminal............................................................... 2-22
Forced Terminal Block Function .....................................7-55
CS ..................................................................................7-50
Forward rotation/Reverse rotation ..................................3-29
Current position monitor ................................................ 7-12
Forward Run ..................................................................5-58
CX-Drive ........................................................................3-16
FR ..................................................................................7-88
Free V/f setting ................................................................5-9
FREF .............................................................................7-91
I-2 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Index
Frequency Addition Function ......................................... 7-39 Lower limit ..................................................................... 5-30

Frequency arrival signal................................................. 7-83 M
Frequency Calculation Function..................................... 7-39
Frequency Conversion Coefficient ................................... 7-6 Magnetic contactor ........................................................ 2-25
Frequency Jump Function ............................................. 7-36 Main circuit terminal....................................................... 2-19
Frequency matching restart ........................................... 7-62 Main circuit terminal block ............................................. 2-13
Frequency reference...................................................... 5-23 Main power supply input terminal .................................. 2-24
Frequency reference selection status signal .................. 7-91 Manual Torque Boost..................................................... 5-61
F-TM .............................................................................. 7-55 Maximum frequency ...................................................... 5-20
Measure against noise .................................................. 2-48
G MJA ............................................................................... 7-89
Mode key ......................................................................... 3-6
Ground cable ................................................................. 2-27 Molded case circuit breaker ........................................... 2-24
Ground terminal ............................................................. 2-27 Motor parameter ......................................................6-4, 6-9
Mounting direction ........................................................... 2-5
H EO .......................................................................2-17, 7-27
Multi-function Input Monitor ............................................. 7-5
Multi-function Output Monitor........................................... 7-6
Multi-function Output Selection ...................................... 7-20
H.................................................................................... 2-14
Harmonic current ........................................................... 2-28 Multi-step speed reference ............................................ 5-23
I N
I
Individual Display of Functions......................................... 5-3 NDc ............................................................................... 7-87
Inductive noise............................................................... 2-32 No-fuse breaker............................................................. 2-26
Initial Screen Automatic Return Function ....................... 7-56 Noise filter ..................................................................... 2-27
Initial Screen Selection ......................................... 3-7, 7-56 No-load Run .................................................................. 3-29
Input control logic .......................................................... 2-38 Heavy load mode .......................................................... 5-11
Input Noise Filter ................................................. 2-18, 12-3 No-voltage switch .......................................................... 2-39
Input power monitor ......................................................... 7-9
Inrush current................................................................. 2-26 O
Installation Conditions...................................................... 2-6
Integrated Power Monitor................................................. 7-9 O ....................................................................... 2-14, 7-22
Inverter Display on Operator Connection ....................... 7-57 OD ................................................................................. 7-48
Inverter mode monitor.................................................... 7-13 ODc ............................................................................... 7-90
Inverter output terminal .................................................. 2-31 Offline auto-tuning ........................................................... 6-5
Inverter status monitor register No. ................................ 8-28 OHF............................................................................... 7-88
OI ......................................................................... 2-14, 7-22
J OIDc .............................................................................. 7-90
OL ................................................................................. 7-80
OL2 ............................................................................... 7-80
Jog dial ............................................................................ 3-6
OLR ............................................................................... 7-79
Jog Dial Sensitivity......................................................... 7-61
ONT............................................................................... 7-84
OPE............................................................................... 7-55
K
Operating environment conditions ................................... 2-5
Operation Selection at External Operator Disconnection
KHC ................................................................................. 7-9
...................................................................................... 7-56
Output Current Monitor .................................................... 7-4
L Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) ................. 7-6
Output noise filter .................................................2-18, 12-3
L ..................................................................................... 2-14 Output Torque Monitor ..................................................... 7-8
LCD Digital Operator ..................................................... 12-4 Output Voltage Gain ...................................................... 7-41
Leakage current............................................................. 2-25 Output Voltage Monitor .................................................... 7-8
Life Assessment Monitor................................................ 7-11 Overcurrent Suppression Function ................................ 7-81
Light load mode ............................................................. 5-11 Overload Limit ............................................................... 7-78
Line number................................................................... 7-11 Overload Warning ......................................................... 7-80
Load Run ....................................................................... 3-30 Overvoltage/Overcurrent restart .................................... 7-64
LOC ............................................................................... 7-89
LOG1 to LOG3............................................................... 7-85 P
Logic operation output signal ......................................... 7-85
Low current signal ......................................................... 7-89 P24 ................................................................................ 2-15
Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) I-3

Index
P24S ..............................................................................2-15 Start ratio ....................................................................... 7-26

Parameter initialization ........................................ 3-10, 3-27 Start selection ................................................................ 7-26
Password Function.........................................................7-57 Starting contact signal.................................................... 7-88
Permission of RUN Command .......................................7-38 Starting Frequency.........................................................7-35
Phase loss .....................................................................2-26 Stopping motor ..............................................................3-29
PID Feedback Value Monitor........................................... 7-5 Surge absorber ..............................................................2-26
PID Function ..................................................................7-44
PIDC ............................................................................. 7-49 T
PLC ................................................................................2-15
Position Command Monitor ............................................7-12 Terminal block cover ........................................................2-9
Power interruption/Undervoltage ................................... 7-64 Terminating resistor selector switch ...............................2-10
Power ON time over.......................................................7-85 TH ..................................................................................7-82
Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function................7-68 Thermistor Trip Function ................................................7-82
Power supply .................................................................2-26 Torque Bias Monitor .........................................................7-8
Pulse train frequency input .............................................7-52 Torque boost function.....................................................5-59
Torque Reference Monitor ...............................................7-7
Q Total Power ON Time Monitor ........................................7-10
Total RUN Time Monitor .................................................7-10
Query frame .....................................................................8-7 Transition of parameter display ........................................3-8
Transition of Parameter Display and Key Operation
R in Extended Function Mode U ......................................3-9
Trip ................................................................................10-3
Radio noise ....................................................................2-33 TRQ ...............................................................................6-13
Radio Noise Filter ................................................ 2-18, 12-3
Reactor ..........................................................................2-28 U
Real Frequency Monitor ...................................................7-7
Reduced torque characteristics ....................5-9, 5-15, 5-17 UDC ...............................................................................7-40
Reduced Voltage Startup Selection............................... 7-36 UP..................................................................................7-40
REF ................................................................................7-91 Upper limit .....................................................................5-30
Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor.......................7-16 User Parameter Automatic Setting Function ......... 3-7, 7-60
Regenerative braking unit ................................... 2-18, 12-3 User Parameter Setting Function ...................................7-60
Regenerative braking unit connection terminal .............. 2-34 User setting......................................................................5-4
Remote Operation Function .......................................... 7-40 USP ...............................................................................7-68
Returning Display to d001 ............................................. 3-10 UV..................................................................................7-65
Reverse run ...................................................................5-58
RNT................................................................................7-84 W
RUN ...............................................................................7-82
RUN Command..............................................................5-21 WAC ..............................................................................7-86
RUN Command Status Signal ........................................7-91 WAF...............................................................................7-87
RUN Direction Limit Selection ........................................7-38 Warning .......................................................................10-11
RUN Direction Monitor .................................................... 7-5 Warning Monitor.............................................................7-15
RUN Time Over ..............................................................7-84 WCOI .............................................................................7-90
WCO ..............................................................................7-90
S Window Comparator ......................................................7-90
Safety Function ..............................................................7-99

Safety function STO input terminals ...............................2-10
SET ................................................................................7-33
SETM .............................................................................7-92
SFT ................................................................................7-54
Signal during RUN .........................................................7-82
Silent interval ...................................................................8-7
Sink logic ....................................................2-39, 2-40, 2-41
Soft Lock Function .........................................................7-54
Source logic ................................................2-39, 2-40, 2-42
Stabilization Parameter ................................................. 7-52
Start frequency ...............................................................7-26
I-4 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor:
Kyoto, JAPAN Contact : www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp 2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
The Netherlands Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A.
Tel: (31) 2356-81-300 Fax: (31) 2356-81-388 Tel: (1) 847-843-7900 Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. ©OMRON Corporation 2023 All Rights Reserved.
438B Alexandra Road, #08-01/02 Alexandra Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Technopark, Singapore 119968 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
Tel: (65) 6835-3011 Fax: (65) 6835-3011 PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-6023-0333 Fax: (86) 21-5037-2388 Cat. No. I666-E1-E01 0923

I666 Mx2-Ev2 Users Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I666 Mx2-Ev2 Users Manual en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

I666 Mx2-Ev2 Users Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Inverter

Multi-function Compact Inverter

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 1

2 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Page Structure and Symbol Icons

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 3

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions for Correct Use

Additional information to read as required.

4 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Sections in this Manual

Parameter List Appendices 6

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 5

Terms and Conditions Agreement

Warranty, Limitations of Liability

See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.

Limitation on Liability; Etc

6 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Errors and Omissions

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 7

Indications and Meanings of Safety Information

Meanings of Signal Words

8 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 9

Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly.

Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel.

Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands.

10 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 11

Do not dismantle, repair or modify the product.

12 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Precautions for Safe Use

Installation and Storage

Transporting, Installation and Wiring

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 13

Operation and Adjustment

Maintenance and Inspection

14 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Precautions for Correct Use

Restart Selection Function

Motor Overload Protection

Maintenance and Parts Replacement

Dispose of in accordance with WEEE Directive

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 15

16 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Regulations and Standards

Regulation Applicable Standards

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 17

Items to Check after Unpacking

Checking the Nameplate

Checking the Model

18 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Checking the Accessories

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 19

Name Catalog No.

20 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)

Revision code Revision date Revised Content

Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1) 21

22 Multi-function Compact Inverter 3G3MX2-EV2 User’s Manual (I666-E1)